LEED Reference Guide For Neighborhood Developement

NEIGHBORHOOD
DEVELOPMENT
NEIGHBORHOOD
DEVELOPMENT
i
COPYRIGHT
Copyright © 2014 by the U.S. Green Building Council. All rights reserved.
The U.S. Green Building Council, Inc. (USGBC) devoted significant time and resources to create this LEED
Reference Guide for Neighborhood Development, LEED v4 Edition. USGBC authorizes individual use of the
Reference Guide. In exchange for this authorization, the user agrees:
1. to retain all copyright and other proprietary notices contained in the Reference Guide,
2. not to sell or modify the Reference Guide, and
3. not to reproduce, display, or distribute the Reference Guide in any way for any public or commercial purpose,
including display on a website or in a networked environment.
Unauthorized use of the Reference Guide violates copyright, trademark, and other laws and is prohibited.
The text of the federal and state codes, regulations, voluntary standards, etc., reproduced in the Reference Guide is
used under license to USGBC or, in some instances, in the public domain. All other text, graphics, layout, and other
elements of content in the Reference Guide are owned by USGBC and are protected by copyright under both United
States and foreign laws.
NOTE: for downloads of the Reference Guide:
Redistributing the Reference Guide on the internet or otherwise is STRICTLY prohibited even if offered free of
charge. DOWNLOADS OF THE REFERENCE GUIDE MAY NOT BE COPIED OR DISTRIBUTED. THE USER OF
THE REFERENCE GUIDE MAY NOT ALTER, REDISTRIBUTE, UPLOAD OR PUBLISH THIS REFERENCE GUIDE
IN WHOLE OR IN PART, AND HAS NO RIGHT TO LEND OR SELL THE DOWNLOAD OR COPIES OF THE
DOWNLOAD TO OTHER PERSONS.
DISCLAIMER
None of the parties involved in the funding or creation of the Reference Guide, including the USGBC, its members,
its contractors, or the United States government, assume any liability or responsibility to the user or any third parties
for the accuracy, completeness, or use of or reliance on any information contained in the Reference Guide, or for
any injuries, losses, or damages (including, without limitation, equitable relief ) arising from such use or reliance.
Although the information contained in the Reference Guide is believed to be reliable and accurate, all materials
set forth within are provided without warranties of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited
to warranties of the accuracy or completeness of information contained in the training or the suitability of the
information for any particular purpose.
As a condition of use, the user covenants not to sue and agrees to waive and release the U.S. Green Building Council,
its members, its contractors, and the United States government from any and all claims, demands, and causes of
action for any injuries, losses, or damages (including, without limitation, equitable relief ) that the user may now or
hereafter have a right to assert against such parties as a result of the use of, or reliance on, the Reference Guide.
U.S. Green Building Council

2101 L Street, NW
Suite 500
Washington, DC 20037
TRADEMARK
LEED® is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building Council.
LEED Reference Guide for Neighborhood Development
LEED v4 Edition
ISBN # 978-1-932444-49-0
ii
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The LEED Reference Guide for Neighborhood Development, LEED v4 Edition, has been made possible only through
the efforts of many dedicated volunteers, staff members, and others in the USGBC community. The Reference Guide
drafting was managed and implemented by USGBC staff and consultants and included review and suggestions by
many Technical Advisory Group (TAG) members. We extend our deepest gratitude to all of our LEED committee
members who participated in the development of this guide, for their tireless volunteer efforts and constant support
of USGBC’s mission:
LEED Steering Committee

Joel Todd, Chair Joel Ann Todd
Bryna Dunn, Vice-Chair Moseley Architects
Felipe Faria Green Building Council Brasil
Elaine Hsieh KEMA Services
Susan Kaplan BuildingWrx
Malcolm Lewis Cadmus Group
Muscoe Martin M2 Architecture
Lisa Matthiessen Integral Group
Brenda Morawa Integrated Environmental Solutions
Tim Murray Morris Architects
Sara O’Mara Choate Construction Company
Bruce Poe Modus Architecture Collaborative
Alfonso Ponce Deloitte Finance
David Sheridan Aqua Cura
Lynn Simon Thornton Tomasetti
Doug Gatlin (Non-voting) U.S. Green Building Council
Scot Horst (Non-voting) U.S. Green Building Council
Brendan Owens (Non-voting) U.S. Green Building Council
Peter Templeton (Non-voting) U.S. Green Building Council
LEED Technical Committee

Susan Kaplan, Chair BuildingWrx
Maureen McGeary Mahle, Vice-Chair Steven Winter Associates
Jennifer Atlee BuildingGreen
Steve Baer Five Winds International
Ted Bardacke Global Green USA
Steve Benz OLIN
Neal Billetdeaux SmithGroupJJR
David Bracciano Alliance for Water Efficiency
Daniel Bruck BRC Acoustics & Audiovisual Design
David Carlson Columbia University
Jenny Carney YR&G
Mark Frankel New Buildings Institute
Nathan Gauthier EA Buildings
George Brad Guy Catholic University of America
Michelle Halle Stern The Green Facilitator
Malcolm Lewis Cadmus Group
John McFarland Working Buildings LLC
Jessica Millman The Agora Group
Neil Rosen North Shore LIJ Health System
Thomas Scarola Tishman Speyer
Chris Schaffner The Green Engineer
Marcus Sheffer 7group
Sheila Sheridan Sheridan Associates
Bob Thompson U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Alfred Vick University of Georgia
iii
LEED Market Advisory Committee

Lisa Matthiessen, Chair Integral Group
Holley Henderson, Vice-Chair H2Ecodesign
Liana Berberidou-Kallivoka City of Austin
Jeffrey Cole Konstrukt
Walter Cuculic Pulte Homes
Rand Ekman Cannon Design
Richard Kleinman LaSalle Investment Management
Craig Kneeland NYSERDA
Muscoe Martin M2 Architecture
Cindy Quan Goldman Sachs & Co.
Matt Raimi Raimi + Associates
Jon Ratner Forest City Enterprises
Rebecca Stafford University of California, Office of President
Gary Thomas CB Richard Ellis
Keith Winn Catalyst Partners
Implementation Advisory Committee

Brenda Morawa, Chair Integrated Environmental Solutions
Adam Fransen, Vice-Chair CB Richard Ellis
Michelle Malanca Michelle Malanca Sustainability Consulting
Brad Pease Paladino and Co.
Ken Potts McGough
Richard Schneider U.S. Army Engineer Research and Development Center
Greg Shank Altura Associates
David Sheridan Aqua Cura
Natalie Terrill Viridian Energy & Environmental
Bill Worthen Urban Fabrick Design
Max Zahniser Praxis | Building Solutions
Location and Planning TAG

Jessica Millman, Chair The Agora Group
John Dalzell, Vice-Chair Boston Redevelopment Authority/ City of Boston
Eliot Allen Criterion Planners
Laurence Aurbach Office of Laurence Aurbach
Ted Bardacke Global Green USA
Erin Christensen Mithun
Andy Clarke League of American Bicyclists
Fred Dock City of Pasadena
Bruce Donnelly Auricity
Victor Dover Dover, Kohl, and Partners
Reid Ewing University of Utah
Doug Farr Farr & Associates
Lois Fisher Fisher Town Design
Tim Frank Sierra Club
Randy Hansell Earth Advantage Institute
Justin Horner Natural Resources Defense Council
Ron Kilcoyne Lane Transit District
Todd Litman Victoria Transport Policy Institute
Dana Little Treasure Coast Regional Planning Council
Art Lomenick Parsons Brinckerhoff
Steve Mouzon New Urban Guild
Lynn Richards U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Harrison Rue ICF International
iv
Shawn Seamen PN Hoffman

Anthony Sease Civitech
Laurie Volk Zimmerman/ Volk Associates
Patricia White Defenders of Wildlife
Sustainable Sites TAG

Jenny Carney, Chair YR&G
Neal Billetdeaux, Vice-Chair SmithGroupJJR
Michele Adams Meliora Environmental Design
Steve Benz OLIN
Joby Carlson University of Arkansas
Laura Case Southface Energy Institute
Stephen Cook VIKA
Richard Heinisch Acuity Brands Lighting
Heather Holdridge Lake | Flato Architects
Jason King Greenworks, PC
Katrina Rosa The EcoLogic Studio
Kyle Thomas Natural Systems Engineering
Alfred Vick University of Georgia
Teresa Watkins St. John’s Water Management District
Water Efficiency TAG

Neil Rosen, Chair North Shore LIJ Health System
Doug Bennett, Vice-Chair Las Vegas Valley Water District / Southern Nevada Water Authority
Damann Anderson Hazen & Sawyer
Gunnar Baldwin TOTO USA
Robert Benazzi Jaros Baum & Bolles
Steve Benz OLIN
Neal Billetdeaux SmithGroupJJR
David Bracciano Alliance for Water Efficiency
David Carlson Columbia University
Ron Hand E/FECT. Sustainable Design Solutions
Bill Hoffman H.W. Hoffman and Associates
Winston Huff SSR Engineers
Joanna Kind Eastern Research Group
Heather Kinkade Forgotten Rain
Gary Klein Affiliated International Management
John Koeller Koeller and Company
Shawn Martin International Code Council
Don Mills Clivus Multrum
Geoff Nara Civil & Environmental Consultants
Karen Poff Austin Energy
Shabbir Rawalpindiwala Kohler
Robert Rubin NCSU
Stephanie Tanner U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
David Viola International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
Bill Wall Clivus New England
Daniel Yeh University of South Florida
Rob Zimmerman Kohler
v
Energy and Atmosphere TAG

Nathan Gauthier, Chair EA Buildings
Jeremy Poling, Vice-Chair Goby
John Adams General Services Administration
Amanda Bogner The Energy Studio
Kevin Bright Harvard University
Lane Burt Natural Resources Defense Council
Allan Daly Taylor Engineering
Charles Dorgan University of Wisconsin-Madison
Jay Enck Commissioning & Green Building Solutions
Ellen Franconi Rocky Mountain Institute
Scott Frank Jaros Baum & Bolles
Gail Hampsmire Low Energy Low Cost
Tia Heneghan ZIA for Buildings
Rusty Hodapp Dallas/Fort Worth International Airport Board
Brad Jones Sebesta Blomberg
Dan Katzenberger Engineering, Energy, and the Environment
Doug King King Sustainability
Chris Ladner Viridian
Richard Lord Carrier Corporation
Bob Maddox Sterling Planet
Rob Moody Organic Think
Brenda Morawa BVM Engineering
Paul Raymer Heyoka Solutions
Erik Ring LPA
David Roberts National Renewable Energy Laboratory
Michael Rosenberg Pacific Northwest National Laboratory
Greg San Martin PG&E
Gordon Shymko G.F. Shymko & Associates
Jason Steinbock The Weidt Group
Jorge Torres Coto MBO
Tate Walker Energy Center of Wisconsin
Materials and Resources TAG

Steve Baer, Chair PE INTERNATIONAL / Five Winds Strategic Consulting
Brad Guy, Vice-Chair Material Reuse
Paul Bertram Kingspan Insulated Panels, North America
Paul Bierman-Lytle Pangeon/ iMCC Management Consulting
Steve Brauneis Rocky Mountain Institute
Amy Costello Armstrong World Industries
Chris Geiger San Francisco Department of the Environment
Barry Giles BuildingWise
Avi Golen Construction Waste Management
Lee Gros Lee Gros Architect and Artisan
Rick Levin Kahler Slater
Joep Meijer The Right Environment
Xhavin Sinha CH2M HILL
Raymond Smith U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Wes Sullens StopWaste.Org of Alameda County
Denise Van Valkenburg Eurofins
vi
Indoor Environmental Quality TAG

Daniel Bruck, Chair BRC Acoustics & Audiovisual Design
Michelle Halle Stern, Vice-Chair The Green Facilitator
Sahar Abbaszadeh The Cadmus Group
Terry Brennan Camroden Associates
Aida Carbo UL Environment
Randal Carter Steelcase
Wenhao Chen California Department of Public Health
Nancy Clanton Clanton & Associates
Dan Dempsey Carrier
Larry Dykhuis Herman Miller
Dwayne Fuhlhage PROSOCO
Stowe Hartridge Beam Scientific Certification Systems
Dan Int-Hout Krueger
Alexis Kurtz The Sextant Group
Matt Latchford Lam Partners
David Lubman David Lubman & Associates
Richard Master USG Corporation
John McFarland WorkingBuildings
Bud Offermann Indoor Environmental Engineering
Reinhard Oppl Eurofins Product Testing A/S
Ozgem Ornektekin New York University
Charles Salter Salter Associates
Dana Schneider Jones Lang LaSalle
Dennis Stanke Trane Commercial Systems
Don Stevens Panasonic Home and Environment Company
Bob Thompson U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Ellen Tohn Tohn Environmental Strategies
Prasad Vaidya The Weidt Group
Pilot Credit Library Working Group

Marc Cohen (Chair) The Cadmus Group
Lindsay Baker Mary Davidge Associates
Cheryl Baldwin GreenSeal
James Bogdan PPG Industries
Carlie Bullock-Jones Ecoworks Studio
Paul Firth UL Environment
Mick Schwedler Trane
Steve Taylor Taylor Engineering
Richard Young Fisher-Nickel
Integrative Process Task Group

Lindsay Baker Mary Davidge Associates
John Boecker 7group
Penny Bonda Ecoimpact Consulting
Jenny Carney YR&G
Bill Reed Integrative Design Collaborative
Heather Rosenberg The Cadmus Group
Linda Sorrento National Academy of Environmental Design
Joel Todd Joel Ann Todd
Keith Winn Catalyst Partners
Bill Worthen Urban Fabrik
Max Zahniser Praxis | Building Solutions
vii
A special thanks to USGBC and GBCI staff for their invaluable efforts in developing this reference guide, especially
to the following for their technical expertise: Emily Alvarez, Eric Anderson, Theresa Backhus, Lonny Blumenthal,
Amy Boyce, Steve Brauneis, Sarah Buffaloe, Sara Cederberg, Christopher Davis, Robyn Eason, Corey Enck, Sean Fish,
Asa Foss, Deon Glaser, Scott Haag, Gail Hampsmire, Jason Hercules, Jackie Hofmaenner, Theresa Hogerheide, Mika
Kania, Heather Langford, Christopher Law, Rebecca Lloyd, Emily Loquidis, Chrissy Macken, Chris Marshall, Batya
Metalitz, Larissa Oaks, Lauren Riggs, Jarrod Siegel, Micah Silvey, Ken Simpson, Megan Sparks, Rebecca Stahlnecker,
Matt Toper, Tim Williamson, and Ying Zhao.
A special thanks to Jessica Centella, Selina Holmes, and Dave Marcus for their graphics support and eye for
design.
A thank you also goes to Scot Horst, Doug Gatlin, and Brendan Owens for their vision and support, and
to Meghan Bogaerts for her hard work, attention to detail, and flair for writing. A very special thanks to Dara
Zycherman, staff lead on the development of the LEED v4 Reference Guide suite, for her unwavering commitment to
quality and her dedication to the production of the guides.
A special thanks to the consultant team, which included Arup, CBRE, C.C. Johnson & Malhotra, Criterion
Planners, Goby, Paladino & Co., Post Typography, West Main, and YR&G, and the unique artwork created for this
publication by RTKL Associates.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE 4
GETTING STARTED 9
MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS 49
RATING SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDANCE 55
SMART LOCATION AND LINKAGE 59

SLL Overview......................................................................................................................................................59
SLL Prerequisite Smart Location................................................................................................................ 61
SLL Prerequisite Imperiled Species and Ecological Communities............................................. 71
SLL Prerequisite Wetland and Water Body Conservation............................................................ 79
SLL Prerequisite Agricultural Land Conservation.............................................................................85
SLL Prerequisite Floodplain Avoidance.................................................................................................95
SLL Credit Preferred Locations................................................................................................................ 103
SLL Credit Brownfield Remediation.........................................................................................................111
SLL Credit Access to Quality Transit.......................................................................................................117
SLL Credit Bicycle Facilities........................................................................................................................123
SLL Credit Housing and Jobs Proximity...............................................................................................135
SLL Credit Steep Slope Protection..........................................................................................................141
SLL Credit Site Design for Habitat or Wetland and Water Body Conservation.............. 149
SLL Credit Restoration of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies.........................................157
SLL Credit Long-term Conservation Management of Habitat or
Wetlands and Water Bodies............................................................................................................... 163
NEIGHBORHOOD PATTERN AND DESIGN 169

NPD Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 169
NPD Prerequisite Walkable Streets..........................................................................................................171
NPD Prerequisite Compact Development............................................................................................181
NPD Prerequisite Connected and Open Community......................................................................191
NPD Credit Walkable Streets.................................................................................................................... 199
NPD Credit Compact Development........................................................................................................215
NPD Credit Mixed-use Neighborhoods.................................................................................................219
NPD Credit Housing Types and Affordability...................................................................................225
NPD Credit Reduced Parking Footprint..............................................................................................235
NPD Credit Connected and Open Community.................................................................................241
NPD Credit Transit Facilities..................................................................................................................... 245
NPD Credit Transportation Demand Management....................................................................... 249

NPD Credit Access to Civic and Public Spaces...............................................................................257
NPD Credit Access to Recreation Facilities...................................................................................... 263
NPD Credit Visitability and Universal Design....................................................................................267
NPD Credit Community Outreach and Involvement.....................................................................275
NPD Credit Local Food Production........................................................................................................281
NPD Credit Tree-lined and Shaded Streetscapes.......................................................................... 289
NPD Credit Neighborhood Schools...................................................................................................... 299
GREEN BUILDING AND INFRASTRUCTURE 305

GIB Overview...................................................................................................................................................305
GIB Prerequisite Certified Green Building.......................................................................................... 307
GIB Prerequisite Minimum Building Energy Performance............................................................311
GIB Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction.................................................................................327
GIB Prerequisite Construction Activity Pollution Prevention.................................................... 341
GIB Credit Certified Green Buildings.................................................................................................... 347
GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy Performance........................................................................351
GIB Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction.............................................................................................357
GIB Credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction........................................................................................ 363
GIB Credit Building Reuse...........................................................................................................................371
GIB Credit Historic Resource Preservation and Adaptive Use................................................. 381
GIB Credit Minimized Site Disturbance............................................................................................... 387
GIB Credit Rainwater Management...................................................................................................... 395
GIB Credit Heat Island Reduction..........................................................................................................403
GIB Credit Solar Orientation...................................................................................................................... 415
GIB Credit Renewable Energy Production........................................................................................ 423
GIB Credit District Heating and Cooling............................................................................................. 433
GIB Credit Infrastructure Energy Efficiency...................................................................................... 441
GIB Credit Wastewater Management................................................................................................... 447
GIB Credit Recycled and Reused Infrastructure............................................................................. 453
GIB Credit Solid Waste Management................................................................................................... 459
GIB Credit Light Pollution Reduction................................................................................................... 467
INNOVATION 485
IN Overview...................................................................................................................................................... 485
IN Credit Innovation...................................................................................................................................... 487
IN Credit LEED Accredited Professional............................................................................................ 493
REGIONAL PRIORITY 497
RP Overview..................................................................................................................................................... 497
RP Credit Regional Priority.......................................................................................................................499
APPENDICES 503
Appendix 1. Use Type and Categories................................................................................................. 503
Appendix 2. Default Occupancy Counts............................................................................................504
Appendix 3. Retail Process Load Baselines...................................................................................... 505
Appendix 4. Building Energy Performance Guidelines.................................................................515
4
PREFACE
THE CASE FOR GREEN

NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENTS
Green neighborhoods are an integral part of the people.2 Rapid urbanization and natural resource
solution to the environmental challenges facing the stresses will significantly shape urban redevelopment
planet. and greenfield growth in the decades ahead, and
Today we use the equivalent of 1.5 Earths to meet the the problems must be effectively addressed if
resource needs of everyday life and absorb the resulting communities are to become more sustainable.
wastes. This measure of our planet’s carrying capacity The impetus behind development of the
means that it takes Earth 18 months to regenerate what Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
is used in only 12 months. If current trends continue, (LEED) rating systems was recognition of those
estimates suggest, by the year 2030 we will need the problems, coupled with awareness that the design
equivalent of two planets.1 Turning resources into waste and construction industry already had the expertise,
faster than they can be regenerated puts the planet into tools, and technology to transform buildings and
ecological overshoot, a clearly unsustainable condition make significant advances toward a sustainable
that we all must address. planet. LEED projects throughout the world have
The forces driving this situation are numerous. demonstrated the benefits of taking a green design
Human population has increased exponentially in the approach that reduces the environmental harms of
past 60 years, from about 2.5 billion in 1950 to more buildings and restores the balance of natural systems.
than 7 billion today. Our linear use of resources, treating Since the bulk of urban growth is forecast to
outputs as waste, is responsible for the toxins that are occur in communities of 100,000 to 250,000 people,
accumulating in the atmosphere, in water, and on the neighborhoods will be the fundamental units of
ground. This pattern of extraction, use, and disposal has urban change and innovation. At the neighborhood
hastened depletion of finite supplies of nonrenewable level, these “drawing boards” can catalyze LEED
energy, water, and materials and is accelerating the pace for Neighborhood Development (ND) strategies,
of our greatest problem—climate change. such as affordable housing, climate protection,
The challenges are especially acute in cities, and improved public health. Rapid urbanization
which also face issues like food security, economic requires community planning processes that are
competitiveness, and fiscal austerity. More than half ideal for green intervention and transformation.
of the world’s population now lives in urban rather Opportunities for sustainable solutions range
than rural areas, and the urban share is predicted by from small green business start-ups to large-scale
the United Nations to rise to 70% by 2050, with the ecosystem services.
emergence of megacities of 10 million to 20 million Growing evidence points to a strong public
1 Global Footprint Network, footprintnetwork.org/en/index.php/gfn/page/world_footprint/, accessed September 11, 2012.

2 UN Habitat Global Report on Human Settlements, 2009.
5
preference for sustainable built environments, including LEED ND’s core elements of traditional neighborhood
design and multimodal travel. The National Association of Realtors recently found that two-thirds of households
would prefer a smaller home within walking distance of restaurants, shops, and schools over a large-lot property
farther away.3 With tools like LEED ND, neighborhoods can become exemplars of innovative leadership in achieving
sustainability goals.
PREFACE
ABOUT LEED
Developed by the U.S. Green Building Council, LEED is a framework for identifying, implementing, and measuring
green building and neighborhood design, construction, operations, and maintenance. LEED is a voluntary, market-
THE CASE FOR GREEN NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENTS

driven, consensus-based tool that serves as a guideline and assessment mechanism. LEED rating systems address
commercial, institutional, and residential buildings and neighborhood developments.
LEED seeks to optimize the use of natural resources, promote regenerative and restorative strategies, maximize
the positive and minimize the negative environmental and human health consequences of the construction
industry, and provide high-quality indoor environments for building occupants. LEED emphasizes integrative
design, integration of existing technology, and state-of-the-art strategies to advance expertise in green building
and transform professional practice. The technical basis for LEED strikes a balance between requiring today’s best
practices and encouraging leadership strategies. LEED sets a challenging yet achievable set of benchmarks that
define green building for interior spaces, entire structures, and whole neighborhoods.
LEED for New Construction and Major Renovations was developed in 1998 for the commercial building
industry and has since been updated several times. Over the years, other rating systems have been developed to
meet the needs of different market sectors. The LEED ND rating system was launched in May 2009 after four years
of development and pilot testing by a partnership of the USGBC, the Natural Resources Defense Council, and the
Congress for the New Urbanism.
Since its launch, LEED has evolved to address new markets and building types, advances in practice and
technology, and greater understanding of the environmental and human health effects of the built environment.
These ongoing improvements, developed by USGBC member-based volunteer committees, subcommittees, and
working groups in conjunction with USGBC staff, have been reviewed by the LEED Steering Committee and the
USGBC Board of Directors before being submitted to USGBC members for a vote. The process is based on principles
of transparency, openness, and inclusiveness.
LEED’S GOALS
The LEED rating systems aim to promote a transformation of the construction industry through strategies designed
to achieve seven goals:
·· To reverse contribution to global climate change
·· To enhance individual human health and well-being
·· To protect and restore water resources
·· To protect, enhance, and restore biodiversity and ecosystem services
·· To promote sustainable and regenerative material resources cycles
·· To build a greener economy
·· To enhance social equity, environmental justice, community health, and quality of life
These goals are the basis for LEED’s prerequisites and credits. In the LEED ND rating system, the major
prerequisites and credits are categorized as Smart Location and Linkage (SLL), Neighborhood Pattern and Design
(NPD), and Green Infrastructure and Buildings (GIB).
The goals also drive the weighting of points toward certification. Each credit in the rating system is allocated
points based on the relative importance of its contribution to the goals. The result is a weighted average: credits
that most directly address the most important goals are given the greatest weight. Project teams that meet the
3 National Association of Realtors, 2011 Community Preference Survey.

6
prerequisites and earn enough credits to achieve certification have demonstrated performance that spans the goals
in an integrated way. Certification is awarded at four levels (Certified, Silver, Gold, Platinum) to incentivize higher
achievement and, in turn, faster progress toward the goals.
BENEFITS OF USING LEED

PREFACE
LEED is designed to address environmental challenges while responding to the needs of a competitive market.
Certification demonstrates leadership, innovation, environmental stewardship, and social responsibility. LEED
gives building owners and operators the tools they need to immediately improve both building performance and the
bottom line while providing healthful indoor spaces for a building’s occupants.
LEED-certified developments are designed to deliver the following benefits:

·· Lower operating costs and increased asset value
·· Reduced waste sent to landfills
·· Energy and water conservation
·· More healthful and productive environments for occupants
·· Reductions in greenhouse gas emissions
·· Qualification for tax rebates, zoning allowances, and other incentives in many cities
In particular, LEED ND benefits are distinguished by the following:

·· Scale. The sheer quantity of green benefits is magnified when captured at the neighborhood scale, often
including dozens or hundreds of buildings and thousands of occupants.
·· Comprehensiveness and synergies. Neighborhood planning is inherently comprehensive, and that all-
inclusive scope enables unique opportunities to capture synergistic benefits. An example is rainwater
management accomplished, in part, at an outdoor civic space that infiltrates runoff.
·· Longevity. Once designed and constructed, neighborhoods may persist for hundreds of years. A sustainable
neighborhood design, therefore, pays green dividends for generations, cumulatively a much larger return than
on most other green investments.
By participating in LEED, owners, operators, designers, and builders make a meaningful contribution to the green
building industry. By documenting and tracking resource use, they contribute to a growing body of knowledge that
will advance research in this rapidly evolving field. This will allow future projects to build on the successes of today’s
designs and bring innovations to the market.
LEED CERTIFICATION PROCESS

The process begins when the owner selects the rating system and registers the project (see Rating System Selection).
The project is then designed to meet the requirements for all prerequisites and for the credits the team has chosen
to pursue. After documentation has been submitted for certification, a project goes through preliminary and final
reviews. The preliminary review provides technical advice on credits that require additional work for achievement,
and the final review contains the project’s final score and certification level. The decision can be appealed if a team
believes additional consideration is warranted.
LEED has four levels of certification, depending on the point thresholds achieved:
·· Certified, 40–49 points
·· Silver, 50–59 points
·· Gold, 60–79 points
·· Platinum, 80 points and above
7
CERTIFICATION OPTIONS FOR LEED ND

The LEED for Neighborhood Development rating system comprises two adaptations, LEED ND: Plan and LEED ND:
Built Project, which have certification options unique to this rating system.
Smart Location & Linkage (SLL) and Neighborhood Pattern & Design (NPD) prerequisite review. If the
project team has any doubts about the project’s ability to achieve the SLL or NPD prerequisites, this optional
review can be a useful official determination before investing further in submission preparation. It is available to
PREFACE
both LEED ND: Plan and LEED ND: Built Project registered projects.
Letter of Support optional review. This full review of all prerequisites and credits is available to projects
registered under LEED ND: Plan that have not earned all land-use entitlements. Applicants seeking an early
THE CASE FOR GREEN NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENTS

design-phase award from USGBC to assist with local approvals may elect to undergo this review and will receive a
letter of support if successful.
REFERENCE GUIDE OVERVIEW
GUIDE STRUCTURE CREDIT STRUCTURE
GETTING STARTED Each credit category begins with an overview

provides a that discusses sustainability and market factors
recommended specific to the credit category. For each
PREFACE
process for achieving prerequisite and credit, readers will then find
certification and the following sections:
GETTING STARTED
addresses issues that
cut across the entire INTENT & REQUIREMENTS
MINIMUM PROGRAM outlines the rating system requirements for
rating system.
REQUIRMENTS
STARTED
GETTING
achieving the prerequisite or credit. They were

CATEGORY approved through the rating system development
OVERVIEWS RATING SYSTEM process and can also be found on the USGBC
SELECTION GUIDANCE website.
emphasize
sustainability topics,
CATEGORY OVERVIEW BEHIND THE INTENT
market factors, and

credit relationships connects credit achievement with larger
CREDITS sustainability issues and provides information
that are specific to a
single credit category on how the credit requirements meet the intent
and information stated in the rating system.
that is applicable to
multiple credits within STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
that category. suggests the implementation and documentation
CATEGORY OVERVIEW steps that can be used by most projects, as well
as generally applicable tips and examples.
CREDITS CREDITS
contain content that FURTHER EXPLANATION
is specific to the provides guidance for lengthy calculations
achievement of that or for special project situations, such as tips
credit. for nonstandard project types or different
credit approaches. It sometimes includes an
International Tips section.
REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
lists the items that must be submitted for
certification review.
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

identifies other credits that may affect a project
team’s decisions and strategies for the credit in
question; the relationships between credits may
imply synergies or trade-offs.
CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

ICONS THAT MAY APPEAR WITHIN EACH CREDIT is a quick reference of changes from the previous
REFER THE USER TO FOLLOWING SECTIONS: version of LEED.
REFERENCED STANDARDS
Getting Started (beginning of book) lists the technical standards related to the credit
and offers weblinks to find them.
Further Explanation (within same credit)
EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
identifies the threshold that must be met to earn
an exemplary performance point, if available.
DEFINITIONS
gives the meaning of terms used in the credit.
STARTED
GETTING
Getting Started
HOW TO USE THIS REFERENCE GUIDE
This reference guide is designed to elaborate upon and Within each section, information is organized to flow
work in conjunction with the rating system. Written from general guidance to more specific tips and finally
by expert users of LEED, it serves as a roadmap, to supporting references and other information.
describing the steps for meeting and documenting credit Sections have been designed with a parallel structure
requirements and offering advice on best practices. to support wayfinding and minimize repetition.
CREDIT CATEGORIES
SMART LOCATION AND LINKAGE NEIGHBORHOOD PATTERN AND DESIGN GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE AND BUILDINGS
(SLL) (NPD) (GIB)
INNOVATION REGIONAL PRIORITY

(IN) (RP)
10
PROJECTS OUTSIDE THE U.S.

The International Tips section offers advice on determining equivalency to U.S. standards or using non-U.S.
standards referenced in the rating system. It is meant to complement, not replace, the other sections of the credit.
Helpful advice for projects outside the U.S. may also appear in the Step-by-Step Guidance section of each credit. When
no tips are needed or available, the International Tips heading does not appear.
Units of measurement are given in both Inch-Pound (IP) and International System of Units (SI). IP refers to
the system of measurements based on the inch, pound, and gallon, historically derived from the English system and
commonly used in the U.S. SI is the modern metric system used in most other parts of the world and defined by the
General Conference on Weights and Measures.
Where “local equivalent” is specified, it means an alternative to a LEED referenced standard that is specific to a
project’s locality. This standard must be widely used and accepted by industry experts and when applied, must meet
the credit’s intent leading to similar or better outcomes.
STARTED
GETTING
Where “USGBC-approved local equivalent” is specified, it means a local standard deemed equivalent to the listed
standard by the U.S. Green Building Council through its process for establishing non-U.S. equivalencies in LEED.
TAKING AN INTEGRATIVE APPROACH TO NEIGHBORHOOD

DEVELOPMENT
PROJECT GOALS
An important starting point for project certification is the formulation of overarching goals to guide the project
team’s work toward successful certification. To set valid goals, start by expressing objectives that are derived from or
responsive to the following:
·· The developer’s mission. One of the strongest motivations for project certification should be the developer’s
values and organizational aims. Whether the project is undertaken by for-profit investors or nonprofit
community interest organizations, LEED ND strategies can be tailored to make a strong triple-bottom-line
case for certification.
·· The project’s environmental setting. The degree of environmental sensitivity on and around a project site
creates both responsibilities and opportunities for leadership and innovation. LEED ND offers a full set of
natural resource measures for demonstrating stewardship and helping achieve local environmental goals.
·· The project’s community context. The social and economic conditions of the surrounding community, and
its overall sustainability goals, are factors that should influence project goal-setting and credit selection. LEED
ND strategies can be applied to such community issues as jobs and housing balance, affordable housing, and
universal visitability.
TEAM MEMBERS AND RELEVANT ORGANIZATIONS

For the purposes of LEED ND, the project team has three major components: the applicant acting as team leader,
a multidisciplinary group of design professionals, and local supporting partners. The applicant is the entity that
decides to certify a project under LEED ND. This can be a property owner or developer composed of individuals or
companies that control a majority of the area within a project boundary, either through ownership and/or options to
purchase. A property owner or developer can join with any combination of the following as joint applicants: another
property owner or developer, a nonprofit organization, a homeowners association, or a public or quasi-public agency,
such as a housing authority, redevelopment authority, or business improvement district.
Because the rating system integrates smart growth, new urbanism, social equity, and green building practices,
a successful LEED ND submission draws on the diverse skills of a comprehensive team of professionals. The rating
system can require expertise in many professions, depending on project characteristics and credits attempted.
11
Ensuring that a team has appropriate technical skills is crucial for successful projects and certifications, and the
owner or developer should consider which of the following professions need to be represented on the project team:
·· Urban planning
·· Architecture
·· Civil engineering
·· Transportation planning
·· Mechanical and electrical engineering
·· Landscape architecture
·· Biology and botany
At least one member of the project team should be a LEED ND Accredited Professional experienced in certifying the
kind of project being proposed. Having qualified LEED ND knowledge and insight on the team will aid considerably
in efficient and accurate preparation of submission documentation.
STARTED
GETTING
In addition to assembling a multidisciplinary and LEED ND–experienced project team, it is also important to
consider local partners—the public agencies with authority or services that affect certain credits, or interested
nonprofits with allied goals—when starting a submission. Project teams should identify local partners during
credit selection, make them aware of the project, and seek their assistance with submission documentation where
HOW TO USE THIS REFERENCE GUIDE

appropriate.
12
DEVISING A LEED WORK PLAN
It is recommended that LEED applicants follow a series of steps to certification.
STEP 1. IDENTIFY PROJECT SITE AND PREPARE PRELIMINARY DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM

Site selection is normally done with general development objectives in mind, along with information
about available properties and market conditions in a given area. USGBC encourages the informal use
of LEED ND location criteria in the site selection process. Properties chosen with LEED ND in mind and
sites that already align with LEED ND principles will be easier to certify. Standard protocol is to prepare
a preliminary development program once a prospective site is identified, and if a financial assessment
of that program indicates project feasibility, control of the site is acquired through purchase, option to
STARTED
GETTING
purchase, lease, or equivalent agreements.
STEP 2. SELECT RATING SYSTEM

The LEED system comprises 21 adaptations designed to accommodate the needs of a variety of market
sectors (see Rating System Selection Guidance). The project team leader should confirm that LEED
ND is the most suitable LEED rating system for the project. Some projects pursue LEED ND as well as
several LEED building rating systems simultaneously. Certain multiple-building projects may want to
investigate the USGBC Campus Program, which is not a rating system but a certification process.
Assuming LEED ND is the appropriate choice, the project team leader should also confirm which of two
LEED ND rating systems is applicable to the project:
·· LEED ND: Plan. A project must use the LEED ND Plan rating system if it is in a planning stage or has
constructed less than 75% of its total building floor area.
·· LEED ND: Built Project. If a project is at full build-out, it must use the LEED ND rating system.
The LEED ND: Plan and LEED ND: Built Project rating systems have identical credit requirements but
differing documentation requirements and awards.
STEP 3. ASSEMBLE PROJECT TEAM AND IDENTIFY RELEVANT ORGANIZATIONS

Site acquisition and the preliminary development program will define the project type (residential,
nonresidential, mixed-use), physical setting (e.g., urban infill versus suburban greenfield), and scale
(amount of land, buildings, infrastructure). These characteristics influence the professional disciplines
required for a LEED ND project team. If possible, the team should include a LEED ND Accredited
Professional with experience certifying the kind of project envisioned for the site. This step should also
identify public agencies with authority over the site and nongovernmental organizations with interests
in the area or the project’s goals. As credit selection and documentation proceed, having a working
relationship with these entities is likely to be valuable.
STEP 4. CHECK MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS AND PREREQUISITES

Review the prerequisites and the minimum program requirements (see Minimum Program
Requirements) against the project site and preliminary development program. Ensure that there
are no obvious obstacles to project eligibility or prerequisite achievement.
STEP 5. FINALIZE PROJECT BOUNDARY AND DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM

Two fundamental descriptors of a LEED ND project must be finalized at this point:
·· Project boundary. This boundary determines the land area of a project, including its buildable and
nonbuildable portions. Review the minimum program requirement regarding the delineation of a
project boundary.
·· Development program. This is a summary of project land and subareas and the number of buildings
by type and construction timing. The preliminary program initiated at site selection is finalized at
this point for LEED ND purposes. Although development programs sometimes change over time, an
operative set of land and floor area quantities needs to be used for documenting and verifying credit
achievement. If a change occurs during certification review, the team should provide USGBC with
amended values as soon as they are available.
13
STEP 6. RECONFIRM MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS AND PREREQUISITE

COMPLIANCE
Return to Step 4 prerequisites and confirm the project’s compliance with certainty, now using the final
project boundary and development program. For project teams that have any doubts about meeting
the SLL or NPD prerequisites, this is the point at which a formal prerequisite review can be useful.
STEP 7. DEVELOP LEED SCORECARD

Use the project goals to identify the credits and options that should be attempted by the team. The
Behind the Intent sections offer insight into what each credit is intended to achieve and may help
teams align goals with credits that bring value to the owner, environment, and community of the
project.
This process should focus the team on those credits with the highest value for the project over the
long term. Once the high-priority credits have been selected, identify related credits that reinforce the
priority strategies and provide synergistic benefits.
STARTED
GETTING
Finally, establish the target LEED certification level (Certified, Silver, Gold, or Platinum) and identify
additional credits needed to achieve it. Make sure that all prerequisites can be met and include a buffer
of several points above the minimum in case of changes during design and construction.
LEED WORK PLAN

STEP 8. ASSIGN ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Itemize required documentation and calculations and assign responsibility for their preparation to team
members.
STEP 9. DEVELOP CONSISTENT DOCUMENTATION

Submission work begins with two critical tasks that underpin the balance of the submission:
·· Base mapping. A submission typically requires several credit-specific maps on one of two required
base maps: (1) the project site, and (2) the vicinity within a mile of the project site. Land development
projects often use standardized maps and drawings, and USGBC encourages project teams to adapt
them for LEED ND base mapping purposes.
·· Cross-cutting calculations. The rating system has multiple credits that require the same calculations.
Performing them at the outset of submission preparation improves consistency and speeds up
subsequent credit work. See the next section, Maintaining Consistency in the Application.
With base mapping and cross-cutting calculations in hand, team members will be able to complete
the balance of the submission. If feasible, teams should adapt and reuse project information compiled
for other purposes. However, when adapting such materials, it is best to highlight or excerpt only the
portions relevant to LEED certification.
STEP 10. PERFORM QUALITY ASSURANCE REVIEW AND SUBMIT FOR CERTIFICATION
A quality assurance review is an essential part of the work program. A thorough quality control check
can improve clarity and consistency of the project’s LEED documentation, thereby avoiding errors
that require time and expense to correct later in the certification process. The submission should
be thoroughly proofread and checked for completeness. In particular, numeric values that appear
throughout the submission (e.g., site area) must be consistent across credits.
14
MAINTAINING CONSISTENCY IN THE APPLICATION
PROJECT BOUNDARY
The project boundary defines the land and water area that is reviewed for certification (see Minimum Program
Requirements).
Figure 1 illustrates how a project boundary may encompass a parcel, a parcel plus adjacent rights-of-way, or
multiple parcels and rights-of-way. If a project team elects to include rights-of-way, the entire width of the rights-of-
way must be within the boundary (Figure 1).
LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY Property lines

STARTED
GETTING
Public street Public alley
Figure 1. Example project boundary
When drawing the project boundary, teams should consider the impact of boundary location in relation to credit
requirements. Inclusion or exclusion of features on the periphery of a project site may affect credit applicability
and scoring. For example, the distances between through-connections on a project boundary under NPD Credit
Connected and Open Community can be affected by the inclusion or exclusion of adjacent street rights-of-way.
Because some credit requirements apply to existing uses as well as new construction (see Table 6), carefully consider
whether the inclusion of existing areas will help or hinder the project’s achievement.
SITEGuide
USGBC LEED TYPE Illustrations GS1
Project
A project is categorized by site type depending Boundary
on where (Getting
its boundary is set,Started
the statusFigure 1) the boundary,
of land inside
and the status of properties surrounding the boundary. The following site types may apply: previously developed,
infill, adjacent. The subsections below define these terms and explain their use.
Previously Developed
previously developed altered by paving, construction, and/or land use that would typically have required
regulatory permitting to have been initiated (alterations may exist now or in the past). Land that is not previously
developed and landscapes altered by current or historical clearing or filling, agricultural or forestry use, or
preserved natural area use are considered undeveloped land. The date of previous development permit issuance
constitutes the date of previous development, but permit issuance in itself does not constitute
previous development.
previously developed site a site that, prior to the project, consisted of at least 75% previously developed land
15
LEED ND project teams may consider platted lots of less than 1 acre (0.4 hectares) previously developed if a building
was constructed somewhere on the lot. The purpose of this allowance is to prevent teams from having to individually
assess small home lots to determine the amount of land under the building footprint versus the yard space. For any
lots larger than 1 acre, the team must separate the land into previously developed and undeveloped portions.
Previously developed property status can apply to a project site itself, which carries benefits under several
credits, and to surrounding properties. Assessing properties with few buildings present may be confusing, however.
If the land previously had buildings, it is considered previously developed even if those buildings have since been
torn down. Another frequently confusing situation is parkland. Improved parks with manicured landscaping and
constructed features like playgrounds (e.g., a city park) are considered previously developed. Land that has only
been cleared or graded, with no additional improvements, is not considered previously developed. Land maintained
in a natural state (e.g., a forest preserve) is not considered previously developed, even if minor features like walking
paths are present.
STARTED
GETTING
75% minimum previously developed LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY

Developed
Undeveloped
Figure 2. Example map of previously developed area within project
Infill Site
infill site a site that meets any of the following four conditions:
a. At least 75% of its boundary borders parcels that individually are at least 50% previously developed, and that
in aggregate are at least 75% previously developed.
b. The site, in combination with bordering parcels, forms an aggregate parcel whose boundary is 75% bounded
by parcels that individually are at least 50% previously developed, and that in aggregate are at least 75%
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations GS2
previously developed.
Previously Developed (Getting Started Figure 2)
c. At least 75% of the land area, exclusive of rights-of-way, within 1/2 mile (800 meters) of the project boundary
is previously developed.
16
d. The lands within 1/2 mile (800 meters) of the project boundary have a preproject connectivity of at least
140 intersections per square mile (54 intersections per square kilometer).
The circulation network itself does not constitute previously developed land; it is the status of property
on the other side of the segment of circulation network that matters. For conditions (a) and (b) above, any
fraction of the perimeter that borders a water body is excluded from the calculation.
As defined above and illustrated in the accompanying diagrams, there are four circumstances in which a LEED
ND project can be considered an infill site. In all instances, the characteristics of land around the project are
important. Conditions (a) and (b) involve the parcels bordering or close to the LEED ND project boundary;
conditions (c) and (d) involve characteristics of the area within a 1/2-mile (0.8 km) distance of the project
boundary. For a parcel to qualify as “bordering,” it must share a linear section of boundary; a parcel that adjoins
the project at only a single point (e.g., kitty-corner) is not considered bordering.
Calculations for condition (a): Previous development on adjacent parcels
STARTED
GETTING
Step 1. On a vicinity map, identify parcels adjacent to the project perimeter. For each parcel, calculate the
area that is previously developed. Determine the percentage of the parcel that is previously developed by
dividing the previously developed area by the entire parcel area and multiplying by 100 (Equation 1). Each
adjacent parcel that is at least 50% previously developed is then considered a qualifying parcel in these
calculations.
EQUATION 1. Previously developed percentage of parcel
% of adjacent Area of parcel that is previously developed

parcel previously = × 100
developed Total area of parcel
Step 2. Sum the previously developed land area of each qualifying parcel identified in Step 1, divide by the
total land area of all qualifying parcels (Equation 2), and multiply by 100. The result must be 75% or higher.
EQUATION 2. Previously developed percentage of all qualifying parcels
% previously developed Total previously developed area of qualifying parcels

area of combined = × 100
qualifying parcels Total area of qualifying parcels
Step 3. Measure the total project perimeter, any portion adjacent to waterfront, and the length of portions
adjacent to qualifying parcels, from Step 1. After subtracting waterfront length from the total perimeter
length, divide the perimeter length adjacent to all qualifying parcels by the total net perimeter length, and
multiply by 100 to obtain the percentage of the perimeter bordering previously developed parcels
(Equation 3). The result must be 75% or more.
EQUATION 3. Percentage of perimeter adjacent to qualifying parcels
% of perimeter Perimeter length adjacent to qualifying parcels

adjacent to = × 100
qualifying parcels Total perimeter length – waterfront length
17
Undeveloped area
Exclude as waterfront LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY
STARTED
GETTING
Previously developed parcels
Adjacent to undeveloped parcel
Adjacent to previously developed parcel
Exclude as waterfront
River
Figure 3. Infill condition (a)
Calculations for condition (b): Previous development on adjacent parcels using aggregate method
This is the same as condition (a) except that the expanded boundary is used in place of the project boundary.
The boundary can encompass the project plus any parcels that directly border the project site.
D Guide Illustrations GS13
Infill (Getting Started Figure 3-6 and Definitions)
18
LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY
Aggregate parcel boundary

STARTED
GETTING
LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY Aggregate parcel boundary
Previously developed parcels

Adjacent parcels included in the expanded project boundary
River
Expanded parcel boundary
Figure 4. Infill condition (b)
LEED Guide Illustrations GS14

19
Calculations for condition (c): Previous development in surrounding area

1/2 mile
STARTED
GETTING
(804m)

Previously developed parcel (minimum 75% of land area within 1/2 mile, 804m of project site)
Undeveloped land
Rights-of-way
LEED Project
River
Figure 5. Infill condition (c)
EQUATION 4. Percentage of previous development within 1/2-mile (800-meter) buffer around project boundary
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations GS15within buffer

Area of all previously developed parcels
% of area within buffer = (Getting Started Figure 3-6 and Definitions)
Infill
Total land area within buffer — area of rights-of-way within buffer
Calculations for condition (d): Connectivity in surrounding area

See Connectivity (Intersection Density).
20

Street to street intersection
Cul-de-sac entrance
1/2 mile
(804m)
STARTED
GETTING
Alley to alley Driveway entrance

intersection
Street to alley intersection
Noneligible intersections
Eligible intersections
LEED Project
River
Figure 6. Infill condition (d)
Infill Example
Projects need to meet only one of the four conditions to qualify as an infill site, but for the sake of illustration,
the following example project is tested against (and meets) all four criteria. The calculations are presented in
IP units but are the same for project teams using SI.
A 35-acre project site is evaluated for its status as an infill parcel. The project team evaluates each parcel
of land adjacent to the project boundary and collects information about the land uses within 1/2-mile of the
project boundary (Table 1).
21
TABLE 1. Infill site determination

Total project site perimeter (excluding waterfront) 5,000 ft
Perimeter portion adjacent to parcels that are each > 50% developed 4,300 ft
Total area of adjacent parcels > 50% developed 70 acres
Total previously developed portion of all parcels > 50% developed 55 acres
Total perimeter of project site and additional bordering parcels 16,000 ft
Perimeter portion adjacent to parcels that are each > 50% developed 13,500 ft
Total area of parcels >50% developed adjacent to site and bordering parcels 125 acres
Total previously developed area of > 50% developed parcels adjacent to site and bordering parcels 105 acres
Land area within 1/2 mi of project site boundary (after exclusions) 345 acres
STARTED
GETTING
Previously developed land area within 1/2 mi of site boundary 270 acres
Qualifying intersections within 1/2 mi of project site boundary 100 intersections

The project meets infill condition (a) (previous development on parcels adjacent to site perimeter) because
the portion of the perimeter that borders parcels that are more than 50% previously developed is 86%
(Equation 3):
4,300
× 100 = 86%
5,000
In addition, the adjacent parcels are in aggregate 78% previously developed (Equation 2):
55
× 100 = 78%
70
The project meets infill condition (b) (previous development on parcels adjacent to the project site and any
number of bordering parcels “borrowed” to create the “aggregate parcel”) because the aggregate parcel’s
perimeter portion adjoining parcels that are more than 50% previously developed is 84% (Equation 3):
13,500
× 100 = 84%
16,000
In addition, the parcels adjacent to the aggregate parcel are in total 84% previously developed (Equation 2):
105
× 100 = 84%
125
The project meets infill condition (c) (previous development on surrounding land) because the land within
1/2 mile of the project perimeter is 78% previously developed.
270
× 100 = 78%
345
The project meets infill condition (d) (connectivity of surrounding land) because the land within 1/2 mile of
the project perimeter has more than 140 intersections per square mile:
345 acres
= 0.54 square miles
640 acres per square mile
100 intersections 185 intersections

=
0.54 square mile square mile
22
Adjacent Site
adjacent site a site having at least a continuous 25% of its boundary bordering parcels that are previously
developed sites. Only consider bordering parcels, not intervening rights-of-way. Any fraction of the boundary
that borders a water body is excluded from the calculation.
To be an adjacent site (Figure 7), the project site needs to border previously developed land along at least 25% of its
boundary.
A LEED ND project site can be considered adjacent even if a narrow greenway or undeveloped, permanently
protected land separates it from previously developed parcels. The greenway or undeveloped land may average
no more than 400 feet (125 meters) in width and be no more than 500 feet (155 meters) wide in any one place.
The undeveloped land must be protected from residential and nonresidential construction by easement, deed
restriction, or other enforceable legal instrument.
For a project site to qualify as an adjacent site for SLL Prerequisite Smart Location, Option 2, the greenway or
STARTED
GETTING
other protected open space must allow through-connections to the previously developed land.
Open space LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY

.
ax
)m
4m
2.
(15
0'
50
g.
) av
1.9m
' (12
400
Previously developed parcel
Figure 7. Adjacent site
When determining infill and adjacent status, if the project site is next to a street right-of-way, the team must consider
the previous development status of property on the other side. Parks with physical improvements are considered
previously developed; legally dedicated land in its natural state is considered undeveloped. When waterfront occurs
on the other side of a street right-of-way, the length of that waterfront may be excluded from the calculation.
USGBC LEED Guide
Once a Illustrations
project boundary has been established, the project team should assemble informationGS4 on the type and
Adjacent Site (Getting Started Figure
location of previous development within the boundary to determine whether the site itself 7 and
qualifies as a previously
developed site. Definitions)
23
BUILDABLE LAND
buildable land the portion of the site where construction can occur, including land voluntarily set aside and
not constructed on. When used in density calculations, buildable land excludes public rights-of-way and land
excluded from development by codified law or LEED for Neighborhood Development prerequisites.
Buildable land (Figure 8) is an important element of a project because it is the denominator in the calculation of
land-use densities. First, determine the base amount of buildable land in the project. Then, if additional land is
voluntarily set aside and protected from development, it may be moved into the nonbuildable category, not to exceed
15% of the base amount of buildable land. To be considered nonbuildable under this provision, the land must be
protected from construction by easement, deed restriction, or other enforceable legal instrument. Any additional
land that is voluntarily set aside and not built on, such as open space, must be considered buildable (after the first
15%) because it was available for construction but set aside voluntarily.
For example, in a 20-acre project with a 4-acre park required by local government code, the base buildable land
STARTED
GETTING
would be 16 acres. Should the developer wish to set aside additional land for permanent protection, up to 15% of the
base 16 acres (i.e., up to 2.4 acres) could be set aside and also considered nonbuildable.
Parking garage (buildable)

Required park (non-buildable) Streets (non-buildable)
Habitat (non-buildable) Plaza (buildable) LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY
Unconstrained land (buildable)
Wetlands (non-buildable)
Buildable land with buildings

Buildable land without buildings
Non-buildable locations
Figure 8. Buildable and nonbuildable land

Buildable Land (Getting Started Figure 8)
24
DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM
The development program is a tabular presentation typically prepared by a developer detailing land uses and the
demolition, construction, renovation, or retention of buildings within the project boundary. The development
program should account for all land and water within the boundary according to the buildable and nonbuildable
categories, discussed above. In preparing the development program, teams should consider the following:
New construction. A majority of a project’s square footage should be new construction or major renovation.
When an existing building undergoes major renovations as part of a project, it is typically considered new
construction, but the determination varies by credit. For example, GIB Prerequisite Indoor Water Use
Reduction lumps major renovations in with new construction because replacing water fixtures is common
practice in a major renovation. Please refer to individual credit sections of this guide for more information.
Major renovation is defined as follows:
STARTED
Major renovation. Extensive alteration work in addition to work on the exterior shell of the building and/
GETTING
or primary structural components and/or the core and peripheral MEP and service systems and/or site
work. Typically, the extent and nature of the work is such that the primary function space cannot be used
for its intended purpose while the work is in progress and where a new certificate of occupancy is required
before the work area can be reoccupied.
Existing buildings. As used in LEED ND, existing refers to buildings undergoing no alterations and those
undergoing minor renovations. If existing buildings are included in a project, the project team should carefully
review each prerequisite and credit for its applicability: some credit calculations include existing buildings and
some do not. Table 6 summarizes treatment of existing and planned project features by credit.
DEVELOPMENT TIMELINE
Several provisions of the rating system are tied to milestone dates on a project’s development timeline, beginning
with property acquisition and extending through build-out and occupancy. Some rating system provisions must
be applied in perpetuity. It is critical that the project team understand the timeline concepts within LEED ND. The
following milestone dates should be carefully considered in the LEED ND context:
·· Property acquisition is the date that the project developer purchased or took equivalent control of a majority
of the land area inside the project boundary.
·· Preproject conditions are those present on the date the developer acquired rights to a majority of its
buildable land through purchase or option to purchase.
·· Existing conditions are those present on the date of certification submission. However, a built feature is not
considered existing if it was constructed by the project developer as part of the LEED ND project (this will
come into play only for projects under construction).
·· Build-out is the time at which all habitable buildings on the project are complete and ready for occupancy.
25
Tables 2–4 show major milestones for credits on a timeline that assumes concurrent build-out and occupancy.
TABLE 2. Credit requirements with deadlines
Prerequisite, Credit Title Commitment Meet credit requirement by….
Buildings not more than

GIB Credit Solar Orientation 1st building occupancy
25% shaded
Provide private transit or
NPD Credit Transportation Demand Management 20% occupancy
vehicle sharing
NPD Credit Mixed-Use Neighborhoods Businesses open 50% occupancy
SLL Prerequisite Smart Location Future transit operational 50% occupancy
NPD Credit Local Food Production Future farmers market open 50% occupancy
STARTED
GETTING
NPD Credit Neighborhood Schools New school open 50% residential occupancy
NPD Prerequisite Compact Development Meet minimum density 5 years after 1st building occupied

GIB Credit Heat Island Reduction Provide shade from trees 10 years after plant installation
NPD Credit Tree-Lined and Shaded Streetscapes Provide shade from trees 10 years after plant installation
TABLE 3. Credit requirements with defined time commitments
Credit Title Commitment Maintain requirement for….
NPD Credit Local Food Production CSA shares provided 2 years after occupancy
Site Design for Habitat or Wetland

SLL Credit Maintenance of natural areas 3 years after buildout
and Water Body Conservation
Restoration of Habitat or Wetlands
and Water Bodies
NPD Credit Transportation Demand Management Provide private transit 3 years after buildout
Long-Term Conservation Management of

Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies
NPD Credit Housing Types and Affordability Affordability of rental housing 15 years after units are built
TABLE 4. Credits with perpetual commitments
Prerequisite, Credit Title Commitment
Imperiled Species and Ecological

SLL Prerequisite Protect habitat
Communities Conservation
SLL Prerequisite Agricultural Land Conservation Protect agricultural land
SLL Credit Steep Slope Protection Protect steep slopes
Site Design for Habitat or Wetland

SLL Credit Protect sensitive areas
and Water Body Conservation
Restoration of Habitat or Wetlands
SLL Credit Protect sensitive areas
and Water Bodies
NPD Credit Walkable Streets Prohibit shutters on retail windows
NPD Credit Local Food Production Allow growing spaces in yards
GIB Credit Minimized Site Disturbance Protect undisturbed areas
GIB Credit Light Pollution Reduction Adhere to light pollution measures

26
MAPPING
Because of the numerous geographic provisions and calculations in the rating system, mapping is an important part
of documenting project characteristics and verifying credit achievement. Project teams should use the following
types of maps (Figure 9):
Project site. A standardized project site base map should be used throughout the submission to illustrate site-
level features relevant to individual credits.
Vicinity. A standardized vicinity base map should be used throughout the submission to illustrate relevant
surrounding features for up to 1 mile (1.6 km) around the project boundary.
Special maps. Certain credits require information that is more feasibly shown on special maps instead of the
standard base maps. For example, maps of the high-priority redevelopment areas under Option 3 of SLL Credit
Preferred Locations may cover large parts of communities.
STARTED
GETTING
Visual verification of credit documentation is an important element of LEED ND certification. Each map should have
a title with the applicable credit name, northpoint, scale, and the relevant features clearly labeled and dimensioned
in sufficient detail to enable verification of credit compliance. Maps and other drawings should be concise, clear,
and of sufficiently high resolution to allow detailed review of project features. Overly large documents, however, are
difficult to manage; create concise maps that document only the relevant credit requirements.
Project Site
Project Site
Smart Location
and Linkage
Smart Location
Legend
Vicinity
Smart Location
and Linkage
Smart Location
Legend
Figure 9. Example maps

Composite of Mapping Techniques (Getting
Started Figure 10)
27
WALKING AND BICYCLING DISTANCES

The second most common set of metrics in the rating system is the distances traveled by pedestrians and bicyclists
from origins, such as dwellings, to destinations, such as schools. Walking and biking distances must be measured
along pedestrian and bicycle networks that comply with the following LEED definitions:
walk distance the distance that a pedestrian must travel between origins and destinations without obstruction,
in a safe and comfortable environment on a continuous network of sidewalks, all weather-surface footpaths,
crosswalks, or equivalent pedestrian facilities. The walking distance must be drawn from an entrance that is
accessible to all building users.
bicycle network a continuous network consisting of any combination of the following: (1) off-street bicycle
paths or trails at least 8 feet (2.5 meters) wide for a two-way path and at least 5 feet (1.5 meters) wide for a
one-way path, (2) physically designated on-street bicycle lanes at least 5 feet (1.5 meters) wide, and (3) streets
designed for a target speed of 25 mph (40 kmh)
STARTED
GETTING
Sometimes known as shortest path analysis, the measurement is the distance a pedestrian or bicyclist would
travel from an origin point to the closest destination of a given type, such as the closest bus stop (Figure 10). The
term walkshed denotes an area created from a compilation of walk distances from an origin, such as a polygon

encompassing all possible pathways within 1/4-mile walking distance. Walksheds can sometimes be used as a way to
assess compliance with credits.
Dwellings or businesses accessed through common building entries are counted according to the number of
dwelling units or business establishments reached through such entrances. For example, a multifamily building
entrance used to access 20 dwelling units counts as 20 origin points. A nonresidential building entrance leading to 10
office tenants and two retail tenants counts as 12 origin points.
28
Walking route (1/2 mile, 402m) distance) LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY

STARTED
GETTING
Building entrances within 1/2 mile (804m) walking distance Walking route (1/4 mile, 804m distance)
Building entrances within 1/4 mile (402m) walking distance
Figure 10. Walking distance
LAND-USE
USGBC LEED Guide DENSITIES
Illustrations GS9
Walking
The rating system measures land-use densityDistance (Getting
in two categories, Startedand
residential Figure 12)
nonresidential. Density is calculated
according to the following definitions:
density the amount of building structures constructed on the project site, measured for residential buildings
as dwelling units per acre of buildable land available for residential uses, and for nonresidential buildings as
the floor-area ratio of buildable land area available for nonresidential uses. In both cases, structured parking is
excluded.
floor-area ratio (FAR) the density of nonresidential land use, exclusive of structured parking, measured as
the total nonresidential building floor area divided by the total buildable land area available for nonresidential
buildings.
To be considered a dwelling unit (for the purpose of inclusion in a residential density calculation), the space should
be intended for long-term occupancy and provide facilities for cooking, sleeping, and sanitation. Hotel rooms, for
example, are not dwelling units.
29
Determine densities as follows:

Step 1. Sum the amounts of buildable land area by these categories:
·· Residential
·· Nonresidential
·· Mixed-use (a combination of residential and nonresidential)
·· Other (e.g., voluntary set-asides of open space)
The total must equal 100% of the project’s buildable land.
Step 2. For mixed-use buildings, assign proportional shares of the associated land area to residential and
nonresidential categories using the following equations:
EQUATION 5. Residential percentage of floor area
Residential floor area
STARTED
GETTING
Residential percentage of floor area =
Total floor area
EQUATION 6. Nonresidential percentage of floor area
Nonresidential floor area

Nonresidential percentage of floor area =
Total floor area
EQUATION 7. Mixed-use land area assigned to residential category
Mixed-use land Residential

Mixed-use
area assigned to = land area
× percentage
residential category of floor area
EQUATION 8. Mixed-use land area assigned to nonresidential category
Mixed-use land Nonresidential

Mixed-use
area assigned to = land area
× percentage of
nonresidential category floor area
Step 3. Add the land area of the “other” buildable land category to the nonresidential land category.
Step 4. Sum the residential and nonresidential land areas from above to obtain their respective total land areas
for the entire project.
Step 5. Divide the project’s total dwelling units or total nonresidential floor area by the total residential or
nonresidential land area, respectively. This gives residential density as dwelling units per acre (hectare) of
residential buildable land, and nonresidential density as a floor area ratio for nonresidential buildable land.
The project’s base land-use densities may be adjusted in two instances: (1) the buildable land adjustment when
extra protected areas are set aside (see Buildable Land, above), and (2) under SLL Prerequisite Agricultural Land
Conservation, where provision of a community garden enables a density increase. The latter adjustment applies only
to that prerequisite.
DEVELOPMENT FOOTPRINT
A project’s development footprint is essentially all of its impervious surfaces. The footprint calculation is used in
seven credits where imperviousness is a consideration, such as GIB Credit Rainwater Management. Development
footprint is defined as follows:
development footprint the total land area of a project site covered by buildings, streets, parking areas, and other
typically impermeable surfaces constructed as part of the project.
Surfaces paved with permeable pavement (at least 50% permeable) are excluded from the development footprint.
30
Parking
Park Streets
LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY Plaza Pervious pavers

STARTED
GETTING
Development footprint (impervious surface)
Figure 11. Development footprint
TRANSIT SERVICE
Another common cross-cutting metric is transit service, expressed in daily trips at stops. An important partner in
projects with a transit component is the transit agency serving the site. Transit-related credits should be reviewed
with the agency during goal setting and credit selection, and if possible, submission documentation should be
reviewed with the agency before submission.
Development Footprint (Getting Started Figure 9)
Steps for calculating and documenting transit service are as follows (including some special procedures
depending on the prerequisite or credit):
Step 1. Identify dwelling units and nonresidential use entrances within project boundary
On a site map, indicate the location of all building entrances and dwelling units.
·· See Walking and Bicycling Distances.
Step 2. Determine whether any new transit is planned
Research transit plans for the area to determine whether any new transit is planned near or within the project.
Stops along the planned routes qualify only if they meet one of the three criteria outlined in the rating system:
·· A funding agreement with the Federal Transit Administration (or equivalent national-level agency for
projects outside the U.S.)
·· Approval in an agency budget
·· Preliminary engineering for a rail line and allocated funding
31
Step 3. Identify transit stops within 1/4 mile (400 meters) or 1/2 mile (800 meters)
On a map, identify the locations of existing and planned transit stops (planned stops must meet the
requirements in Step 2) that are within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) or 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of the
project’s dwelling units or nonresidential use entrances, based on vehicle type. Bus, streetcar, or rideshare stops
qualify if they are within 1/4 mile of at least one project building entrance. Bus rapid transit, light or heavy rail,
commuter rail, or ferry stops qualify if they are within 1/2 mile of at least one project building entrance.
Each point at which a transit vehicle stops to receive or discharge passengers is considered a separate transit
stop; this includes stops facing each other on opposite sides of a street. This method of counting is specific to
LEED for Neighborhood Development; the LEED Building Design and Construction rating system uses another
method.
Step 4. Identify transit vehicle types
Identify the type of transit vehicles that serve each qualifying transit stop: bus, streetcar, bus rapid transit, rail, or
STARTED
GETTING
ferry.
Step 5. Create walk route and distance map
Calculate walk routes and distances from the project’s dwelling units and nonresidential use entrances to transit

stops. The routes must comply with the rating system’s requirements for pedestrian facilities. See Walking and
Bicycling Distances.
·· Count the number of dwelling units and nonresidential use entrances within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) walk of
a bus or streetcar stop or within a 1/4-mile (800-meter) walk of a rail, bus rapid transit or ferry stop.
·· Confirm that at least 50% of the project’s dwelling units and nonresidential use entrances are within the
required walking distance of one or more transit stops.
Step 6. Count trips at each qualifying transit stop
A trip is defined as the moment a transit vehicle stops at a stop. If a single vehicle stops at multiple stops along a
route, each stop is considered a trip.
For each transit stop that is within the required walking distance, review transit service schedules to
determine the following:
·· The number of transit vehicle rides on a weekday. If service varies by weekday, count the weekday with the
lowest number of trips.
·· The number of transit vehicle trips on each weekend day. If counts per weekend day are different, use an
average; however, no day may have zero trips.
·· An individual transit stop can be counted only once, regardless of the number of dwelling units or
nonresidential use entrances within walking distance of it.
·· Total the trips provided at all qualifying transit stops and determine whether the number meets the daily
transit service threshold for both weekday and weekend trips, as noted in the credit requirements.
Step 7. Assess achievement of relevant prerequisites and credits
Transit service thresholds vary by prerequisite and credit. The following credits contain transit calculations:
·· SLL Prerequisite Smart Location
·· SLL Prerequisite Agricultural Land Conservation
·· SLL Credit Access to Quality Transit
·· NPD Prerequisite Compact Development
·· NPD Credit Mixed-Use Neighborhoods
·· NPD Credit Transportation Demand Management
Transit service example for SLL Prerequisite Smart Location

A 5-acre project involves new construction of 75 dwellings and 10 businesses plus two existing nonresidential
buildings. Twenty-five of the dwellings are in a multifamily building, and the remainder are detached single-family
units. Of the businesses, five share a building, and the others are in their own buildings. This gives a total of
32
51 residential buildings and eight nonresidential buildings, for a project total of 59 buildings. For the sake of brevity,
it is assumed that each of the 59 buildings has a single entrance and that the project and vicinity pedestrian networks
comply with rating system requirements.
The project team does a preliminary assessment of transit service in the area and finds one rail station with two
platforms (essentially two stops) and six bus lines near the project. The six bus lines have a total of 20 stops near the
project.
Closer assessment reveals that four of the bus stops cannot be reached by any existing or planned project
building within a 1/4-mile walking distance, so these are eliminated from consideration. For the remaining two rail
stops and 16 bus stops, all qualify because at least one existing or planned project building entrance is within the
allowed walking distances.
Additionally, a new bus line is planned that has the required funding commitments. Six new bus stops will be
within walking distance of the project, bringing the total to 22 qualifying bus stops.
The team calculates the number of dwelling and nonresidential entrances within walking distance of at least
STARTED
GETTING
one of the 22 bus stops. Using shortest path analysis, the team finds that 40 of the 59 building entrances are within
the required distance of at least one bus stop, then calculates the percentage: 40 / 59 = 0.68%. Because 68% of the
entrances have access to transit, the project exceeds the required threshold (50% of total origin points).
Next, the team counts the number of daily transit trips at the 22 stops for each day of the week. Based on
timetables, the team finds that the stops, in aggregate, have 400 trips per weekday, 250 Saturday trips, and 100 trips
on Sunday. Because Saturday and Sunday trip numbers are different, the team must use their average: 250 + 100 = 350,
and 350 / 2 = 175. (Although the Saturday and Sunday trips can be different, neither can be zero.)
With 400 daily weekday trips and an average 175 daily weekend trips, the project exceeds the prerequisite’s
thresholds of 60 and 40, respectively.
CONNECTIVITY (INTERSECTION DENSITY)

Another rating system metric is connectivity, expressed as intersections per square mile (square kilometer).
Connectivity is an important objective of LEED ND because it enables multimodal travel that, in turn, reduces
energy use and emissions of pollutants, including greenhouse gases, while improving public health and equitable
access.
Connectivity can be calculated internally (within the project boundary) or in the area surrounding the project
(within a specified distance of the project boundary).
For both internal and surrounding connectivity, eligible and ineligible intersections are as follows (Figure 12):
·· Count publicly accessible intersections of the circulation network, including intersections of streets with
dedicated alleys and transit rights-of-way, and intersections of streets with nonmotorized rights-of-way.
·· If one must both enter and exit an area through the same intersection, exclude that intersection and any
intersections beyond that point; intersections leading only to culs-de-sac are also not counted.
Assemble maps of existing and planned streets and rights-of-way inside the project boundary (internal connectivity)
or existing streets and rights-of-way in the vicinity (surrounding connectivity). Use mapped street data from GIS or
CAD files of right-of-way centerlines, normally available from the local government.
Exclude ineligible intersections (as listed above) and count the remaining qualifying intersections. Sum the
number of qualifying intersections for the project site area (internal connectivity) or the area within a 1/4-mile
(400-meter) distance of the project boundary (surrounding connectivity).
When determining area, include street rights-of-way. Exclude the area of water bodies, parks larger than 1/2 acre
(0.2 hectare), public facility campuses, airports, rail yards, slopes over 15%, and areas nonbuildable under codified
law or the rating system.
Finally, prorate the eligible intersections in the area to the equivalent of a square mile or square kilometer. For
example, 50 intersections in a 0.75-square-mile (1.9-square-kilometer) project site equates to 67 intersections per
square mile (174 intersections per square kilometer).
The results of Equation 9 determine compliance with the connectivity prerequisite and credit.
EQUATION 9. Intersections per square mile (square kilometer)
Intersections Qualifying intersections

=
mi2 or km2 Land area minus any exclusions
33
Public non-motorized ROW (path)
Street to street intersection Driveway Cul-de-sac

entrance entrance
STARTED
GETTING
Alley to alley intersection Street to alley intersection
Figure 12. Eligible and ineligible intersections for determining connectivity
PROJECT GEOGRAPHIC CENTER

Several credits require measuring the Counting
distance from a project’s geographic
Intersections (Gettingcenter to certain features, such as farmers
Started
markets. In CAD or GIS terms, the project’s geographic center is the “centroid” of the
Figure 11)polygon created by the project
boundary.
THROUGH CONNECTIONS AND RIGHT-OF-WAY INTERSECTS

SLL Prerequisite Smart Location and two NPD credits require the measurement of distances between the points
where internal right-of-way centerlines pass through or terminate at the project boundary. Figure 13 shows how
rights-of-way may intersect a project boundary. NPD Prerequisite Connected and Open Community and NPD Credit
Connected and Open Community allow rights-of-way to terminate at the project boundary, as well as pass through
it. As shown in Figures 15–18, the points where the centerlines of rights-of-way intersect the project boundary are the
points used to measure interval distances between those points along the boundary. Maximum allowable distances
between intersect points are stipulated in each credit.
34
Internal ROW (new/existing) LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY External ROW (existing)
CL CL
STARTED
GETTING
Intersect of boundary (through boundary)

Internal ROW (new/existing) LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY
External ROW (existing)

CL
CL
CL
Intersect of boundary (through boundary)
Figure 13. Through connections

ROW Intersecting Boundary
(Figures 13 and 14, a and b)
35
STARTED
GETTING
Figure 14. No through connections
Intersect interval distance
CL
CL
(Figures 13 and 14, c)
Figure 15. Through connections, two-block project

36
CL
CL CL
STARTED
GETTING
CL
Intersect interval distance
Figure 16. Through connections, four-block project
CL CL CL
CL CL

CL CL
(Figures 13 and 14, e)
CL CL
CL CL CL
Intersect interval
distance
Figure 17. Through connection, four-block project including bordering streets

37
CL
CL
STARTED
GETTING
CL
River Intersect interval distance
Exempt boundary
Figure 18. Through connection with exempt boundary portion
CIRCULATION NETWORK AND BLOCK FRONTAGES

Three NPD credits stipulate requirements for circulation networks, block length, and building frontages. Circulation
network and block length are defined as follows:
circulation network all motorized, nonmotorized, and mixed-mode travel ways permanently accessible to the
public, not including driveways, parking lots, highway access ramps, and rights-of-way exclusively dedicated to
rail. It is measured in linear feet.
block length the distance along a block face; specifically, the distance from an intersecting right-of-way edge
USGBC LEED Guidealong
Illustrations GS10
a block face, when that face is adjacent to a qualifying circulation network segment, to the next ROW edge
intersecting that block face, except for intersecting alley ROWs.
(Figures
The applicability of these terms to a typical streetscape is shown in Figure 19. 13 and 14, g)
Sidewalks are usually (but not always) located within the circulation network right-of-way. When measuring
the length of the circulation network using the above definition, count a right-of-way only once, regardless of how
many travel modes or lanes use it. For example, a street segment containing four vehicular lanes, a bicycle lane, and
a bordering sidewalk is considered a single length of circulation network. If, however, a pedestrian-only right-of-way
does not occur along a street but stands alone, its length is counted separately for the circulation network.
The dividing line between the right-of-way and block frontage is the property line, regardless of sidewalk
location.
Some elements of a project, such as a plaza or square, may occasionally allow vehicular passage but are not part of
the circulation network. For example, a plaza serving primarily as a public meeting space is not considered part of the
dedicated circulation network, even if emergency vehicles are allowed to drive through it.
38
CL CL
Building Facade
Sidewalk Length
ROW Block Length (north side) ROW

CL CL
ROW
ROW
Circulation Network Length
Curb Length
Block Length (south side)

STARTED
GETTING
Figure 19. Measuring the circulation network and frontages
OCCUPANCY
Many kinds of people use a typical LEED building, and the mix varies by project type. Occupants are sometimes
referred to in a general sense; for example, “Publicize the availability of subsidized transit passes to project
occupants.” In other instances, occupants must be counted for calculations. Definitions of occupant types are
general guidelines that may be modified or superseded in a particular credit when appropriate (such changes are
noted in each credit’s reference guide section). Most credits group users into two categories, regular building
occupants and visitors.
Regular Building Occupants

Regular building occupants are habitual users of a LEED project. All of the following are considered regular building
occupants.
Employees include part-time and full-time employees, and totals are calculated using full-time equivalency (FTE).
A typical project can count FTE employees by adding full-time employees and part-time employees, adjusted for
their hours of work (Equation 1o).
EQUATION 1O.
Street Block Frontage (Getting Started)
daily part-time employee hours
FTE employees = Full-time employees +
8
For buildings with more unusual occupancy patterns, calculate the FTE building occupants based on a standard
eight-hour occupancy period (Equation 11).
EQUATION 11.
all employee hours

FTE employees =
8
Staff is synonymous with employees for the purpose of LEED calculations.

Volunteers who regularly use a building are synonymous with employees for the purpose of LEED calculations.
39
Residents of a project are considered regular building occupants. This includes residents of a dormitory. If
actual resident count is not known, use a default equal to the number of bedrooms in the dwelling unit plus one,
multiplied by the number of such dwelling units.
Primary and secondary school students are typically regular building occupants (see the exception in SLL
Credit Bicycle Facilities).
Hotel guests are typically considered regular building occupants, with some credit-specific exceptions.
Calculate the number of overnight hotel guests based on the number and size of units in the project. Assume 1.5
occupants per guest room and multiply the resulting total by 60% (average hotel occupancy). Alternatively, the
number of hotel guest occupants may be derived from actual or historical occupancy.
Inpatients are medical, surgical, maternity, specialty, and intensive-care unit patients whose length of stay
exceeds 23 hours. Peak inpatients are the highest number of inpatients at a given point in a typical 24-hour
period.
STARTED
GETTING
Visitors
Visitors (also “transients”) intermittently use a LEED project. All of the following are considered visitors.
Retail customers are considered visitors. In water-related credits, retail customers are considered separately

from other kinds of visitors and should not be included in the total average daily visitors.
Outpatients visit a hospital, clinic, or associated health care facility for diagnosis or treatment that lasts 23 hours
or less.
Peak outpatients are the highest number of outpatients at a given point in a typical 24-hour period.
Volunteers who periodically use a building (e.g., once per week) are considered visitors.
Higher-education students are considered visitors to most buildings, except when they are residents of a dorm,
in which case they are residents.
In calculations, occupant types are typically counted in two ways:

Daily averages take into account all the occupants of a given type for a typical 24-hour day of operation.
Peak totals are measured at the moment in a typical 24-hour period when the highest number of a given
occupant type is present.
Whenever possible, use actual or predicted occupancies. If occupancy cannot be accurately predicted, use one of the
following resources to estimate occupancy:
a. Default occupant density from ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Table 6-1
b. Default occupant density from CEN Standard EN 15251, Table B.2
c. Appendix 2 Default Occupancy Counts
d. Results from applicable studies.
If numbers vary seasonally, use occupancy numbers that are a representative daily average over the entire operating
season of the building.
If occupancy patterns are atypical (shift overlap, significant seasonal variation), explain such patterns when
submitting documentation for certification.
The following LEED ND credits reference occupancy:

·· SLL Credit Bicycle Facilities
·· NPD Credit Transportation Demand Management
·· NPD Credit Local Food Production
·· GIB Prerequisite and Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction
·· GIB Credit Solid Waste Management
40
QUICK REFERENCE
TABLE 5. Scorecard and policy areas
Prerequisite/ Exemplary
Credit name Points
Credit performance Climate Infrastructure
protection efficiency
SLL
Smart Location and Linkage
P Smart Location Required X X
P Imperiled Species and Ecological Communities Conservation Required
P Wetland and Water Body Conservation Required

STARTED
GETTING
P Agricultural Land Conservation Required
P Floodplain Avoidance Required
C Preferred Locations 10 Y X X
C Brownfield Remediation 2
C Access to Quality Transit 7 Y X X
C Bicycle Facilities 1 X X
C Housing and Jobs Proximity 3 X X
C Steep Slope Protection 1
C Site Design for Habitat or Wetland and Water Body Conservation 1
C Restoration of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies 1 Y
C Long-Term Conservation Management of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies 1
NPD
Neighborhood Pattern and Design
P Walkable Streets Required X X
P Compact Development Required X X
P Connected and Open Community Required X X
C Walkable Streets 12 Y X X
C Compact Development 6 X X
C Mixed-Use Neighborhoods 4 Y X X
C Housing Types and Affordability 7 Y
C Reduced Parking Footprint 1 X
C Connected and Open Community 2 X X
C Transit Facilities 1 X X
C Transportation Demand Management 2 X X
C Access to Civic and Public Space 1 X X
C Access to Recreation Facilities 1 X X
C Visitability and Universal Design 1 Y
C Community Outreach and Involvement 2
C Local Food Production 1 Y X
C Tree-Lined and Shaded Streetscapes 2 Y X
C Neighborhood Schools 1 X X
41
Policy-oriented credit sets

Cross-credit
policy synergies
Public health Walkable amenties Water protection Smart growth Social equity Natural resource protection
X X X X X X 8
X X X 3
X X X 3
STARTED
GETTING
X X 2
X X X 3
X X X 5
QUICK REFERENCE
X X X X 5
X X X X 6
X X X X 7
X X X X 6
X X X 3
X X 2
X X 2
X X 2
X X 4
X X 4
X X X X 6
X X 4
X X 4
X X X 5
X X 2
X 2
X X X X 6
X X 4
X X 5
X X X X 6
X X X X 6
X X 2
X X X 5
X 2
X X X 5
42
TABLE 5 (CONTINUED). Scorecard and policy areas
Prerequisite/ Exemplary
Credit name Points
Credit performance Climate Infrastructure
protection efficiency
GIB
Green Infrastructure and Buildings
P Certified Green Building Required X X
P Minimum Building Energy Performance Required X X
P Indoor Water Use Reduction Required X X
P Construction Activity Pollution Prevention Required
C Certified Green Buildings 5 Y X X

STARTED
GETTING
C Optimize Building Energy Performance 2 Y X X
C Indoor Water Use Reduction 1 Y X X
C Outdoor Water Use Reduction 1 Y X X

C Building Reuse 1 Y X X
C Historic Resource Preservation and Adaptive Reuse 1 Y X
C Minimized Site Disturbance 1
C Rainwater Management 4 Y X X
C Heat Island Reduction 1 Y X X
C Solar Orientation 1 Y X X
C Renewable Energy Production 3 Y X X
C District Heating and Cooling 2 Y X X
C Infrastructure Energy Efficiency 1 Y X X
C Wastewater Management 2 Y X X
C Recycled and Reused Infrastructure 1 Y X X
C Solid Waste Management 1 X X
C Light Pollution Reduction 1 X

43
Policy-oriented credit sets

Cross-credit
policy synergies
Public health Walkable amenties Water protection Smart growth Social equity Natural resource protection
X X 5
X 4
X X X 4
X X 4
STARTED
GETTING
3
X 4
X 4
QUICK REFERENCE
X 3
X 2
X X 2
X X 5
X 4
X 4
X X 5
X 2
44
TABLE 6. Applicability of requirements to planned versus existing features
Prerequisite/
Credit name Case or option Planned features Existing features
Credit
SLL
Intersections, circulation
2. Adjacent Sites with Connectivity —
network
P Smart Location
3. Transit Corridor Buildings, transit Buildings, transit
4. Sites with Nearby Neighborhood Assets Buildings Buildings, uses
Wetland and Water Body
P 2. Sites with Wetlands, Water Bodies Land-use densities Land-use densities
Conservation
P Agricultural Land Conservation 5. Sites with Affected Soils Land-use densities Land-use densities
C Access to Quality Transit 1. Transit-Served Location Buildings, transit Buildings, transit
All Projects: Bicycle Storage Dwellings, uses —
STARTED
GETTING
1. Bikable Location — Bicycle network, uses

C Bicycle Facilities
Dwellings, uses, bicycle Dwellings, uses, bicycle
2. Bicycle Network
network network
1. Project with Affordable Residential
Buildings Buildings, jobs
Component
C Housing and Jobs Proximity 2. Project with Residential Component Buildings Buildings, jobs
3. Infill Project with Nonresidential Buildings, transit,
Buildings, jobs
Component dwellings
C Steep Slope Protection All Projects — Slopes
NPD
a. Functional Entry Buildings —
b. Building-Height-to-Street-Centerline Buildings, circulation Buildings, circulation
P Walkable Streets Ratio network network
c. Sidewalks Sidewalks —
d. Garage Frontages Circulation network Circulation network
1. Projects with Access to Quality Transit Land uses, transit Land uses, transit
P Compact Development
2. All Other Projects Land uses, transit Land uses, transit
Circulation network,
1. Surrounding Connectivity —
Connected and Open intersections
P
Community Circulation network, Circulation network,
2. Internal Connectivity
intersections intersections
a. 25-Foot Setback Buildings Buildings
b. 18-Foot Setback Buildings Buildings
c. 1-Foot Setback Buildings Buildings
d. Entries Every 75 Feet Buildings Buildings
e. Entries Every 30 Feet Buildings Buildings
f. Ground-Level Glass Buildings Buildings
g. Minimal Blank Walls Buildings Buildings
h. Unshuttered Retail Windows Buildings Buildings
C Walkable Streets
i. On-street Parking Circulation network Circulation network
j. Continuous Sidewalks Circulation network Circulation network
k. Ground-Floor Dwelling Units Buildings Buildings
l. Ground-Floor Retail Buildings Buildings
m. Building-Height-to-Street-Width Ratio Buildings Buildings
n. 20-mph Streets Circulation network —
o. 25-mph Streets Circulation network —
p. Minimal Driveways Circulation network Circulation network
C Compact Development All Projects Land-use densities Land-use densities
All Projects Dwellings, uses Dwellings, uses
C Mixed-Use Neighborhoods
2 2
Projects with >150,000 ft (13 935 m ) Retail Buildings, transit Buildings, transit
45
TABLE 6 (CONTINUED). Applicability of requirements to planned versus existing features
Prerequisite/
Credit name Case or option Planned features Existing features
Credit
NPD (continued)
1. Diversity of Housing Types Dwellings Dwellings
C Housing Types and Affordability
2. Affordable Housing Dwellings —
C Reduced Parking Footprint All Projects Buildings —
Connected and Open Culs-de-sac, intersections, Intersections, circulation
C All Projects
Community circulation network network
C Transit Facilities All Projects Transit Transit
Transportation Demand 3. Vehicle Sharing Buildings Buildings

C
Management 4. Unbundling of Parking Buildings Buildings
STARTED
Access to Civic and Public
GETTING
C All Projects Buildings Buildings
Space
C Access to Recreation Facilities Proximity to Outdoor Facilities Buildings Buildings
1. Projects with Dwelling Units Dwellings —
C Visitability and Universal Design
2. Projects with Noncompliant ROWs Circulation network Circulation network
QUICK REFERENCE
1. Neighborhood Gardens Dwellings —
C Local Food Production 2. Community-Supported Agriculture Dwellings —
3. Proximity to Farmers Market Buildings Buildings
Tree-Lined and Shaded
C All Projects Buildings, block length Buildings, block length
Streetscapes
Schools, buildings, Buildings, circulation
C Neighborhood Schools All Projects
circulation network network
GIB
P Certified Green Building All Projects Buildings Major renovations
Minimum Building Energy
P All Projects Buildings Major renovations
Performance
P Indoor Water Use Reduction All Projects Buildings Major renovations
1. Projects with 10 or Fewer Habitable
Buildings Buildings
C Certified Green Buildings Buildings
2. Projects of All Sizes Buildings Buildings
Optimize Building Energy
C All Projects Buildings Renovations
Performance
C Indoor Water Use Reduction All Projects Buildings Renovations
C Building Reuse All Projects — Major renovations
Historic Resource Preservation
C All Projects — Buildings
and Adaptive Reuse
C Minimized Site Disturbance 2. Undeveloped Area Is Undisturbed Land uses Land uses
1. Nonroof Measures Nonroof hardscape Nonroof hardscape
2. High-Reflectance and Vegetated Roofs Buildings —
C Heat Island Reduction
Nonroof hardscape, Nonroof hardscape,
3. Mixed Roof and Nonroof Measures
buildings buildings
1. Block Orientation Blocks Blocks
C Solar Orientation
2. Building Orientation Buildings —
C Renewable Energy Production All Projects Buildings —
C District Heating and Cooling All Projects Buildings —
C Infrastructure Energy Efficiency All Projects Infrastructure —
C Wastewater Management All Projects Buildings —
C Light Pollution Reduction All Projects Land uses, buildings Land uses, buildings
46
TABLE 7. Cross-cutting calculations
Circulation
Walking, Project ROW
Prerequisite/ Land-use Development Transit Intersection network,
Credit name biking geographic boundary
Credit density footprint service density block
distances center intersects
frontage
SLL
P Smart Location X X X X X X
Wetland and Water Body

P X
Conservation
Agricultural Land
P X X X
Conservation
C Preferred Locations X
STARTED
GETTING
C Access to Quality Transit X X
C Bicycle Facilities X
Housing and Jobs

C X X
Proximity
C Steep Slope Protection X
Restoration of Habitat or
C X
Wetlands and Water Bodies
NPD
P Walkable Streets X
P Compact Development X
Connected and Open

P X X
Community
C Walkable Streets X
C Compact Development X
C Mixed-Use Neighborhoods X X
Housing Types and

C X
Affordability
C Reduced Parking Footprint X X
Connected and Open

C X X
Community
C Transit Facilities X
Transportation Demand
C X X
Management
Access to Civic and Public
C X
Space
Access to Recreation
C X
Facilities
C Local Food Production X X X
C Neighborhood Schools X
GIB
C Minimized Site Disturbance X X
C Rainwater Management X X
GETTING
QUICK REFERENCE
47
STARTED
49
Minimum Program
Requirements
MPR
MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
INTRODUCTION
The Minimum Program Requirements (MPRs) are the minimum characteristics or conditions that make a project
appropriate to pursue LEED certification. These requirements are foundational to all LEED projects and define the
types of buildings, spaces, and neighborhoods that the LEED rating system is designed to evaluate.
50
1. MUST BE IN A PERMANENT LOCATION ON EXISTING LAND

INTENT
The LEED rating system is designed to evaluate buildings, spaces, and neighborhoods in the context of their
surroundings. A significant portion of LEED requirements are dependent on the project’s location, therefore
it is important that LEED projects are evaluated as permanent structures. Locating projects on existing land is
important to avoid artificial land masses that have the potential to displace and disrupt ecosystems.
REQUIREMENTS
All LEED projects must be constructed and operated on a permanent location on existing land. No project that is
designed to move at any point in its lifetime may pursue LEED certification. This requirement applies to all land
within the LEED project.
ADDITIONAL GUIDANCE
Permanent location
·· Movable buildings are not eligible for LEED. This includes boats and mobile homes.
·· Prefabricated or modular structures and building elements may be certified once permanently installed as part
of the LEED project.
Existing land
MPR
·· Buildings located on previously constructed docks, piers, jetties, infill, and other manufactured structures
in or above water are permissible, provided that the artificial land is previously developed, such that the land
once supported another building or hardscape constructed for a purpose other than the LEED project.
2. MUST USE REASONABLE LEED BOUNDARIES

INTENT
The LEED rating system is designed to evaluate buildings, spaces, or neighborhoods, and all environmental impacts
associated with those projects. Defining a reasonable LEED boundary ensures that project is accurately evaluated.
REQUIREMENTS
The LEED project boundary must include all contiguous land that is associated with the project and supports its
typical operations. This includes land altered as a result of construction and features used primarily by the project’s
occupants, such as hardscape (parking and sidewalks), septic or stormwater treatment equipment, and landscaping.
The LEED boundary may not unreasonably exclude portions of the building, space, or site to give the project an
advantage in complying with credit requirements. The LEED project must accurately communicate the scope of the
certifying project in all promotional and descriptive materials and distinguish it from any non-certifying space.
ADDITIONAL GUIDANCE
Site
·· Non-contiguous parcels of land may be included within the LEED project boundary if the parcels directly
support or are associated with normal building operations of the LEED project and are accessible to the LEED
project’s occupants.
·· Facilities (such as parking lots, bicycle storage, shower/changing facilities, and/or on-site renewable energy)
that are outside of the LEED project boundary may be included in certain prerequisites and credits if they
directly serve the LEED project and are not double-counted for other LEED projects. The project team must
also have permission to use these facilities.
51
·· The LEED project boundary may include other buildings.

°° If another building or structure within the LEED project boundary is ineligible for LEED certification, it may
be included in the certification of the LEED project. It may also be excluded.
°° If another building within the LEED project boundary is eligible for LEED certification, it may be included in
the certification if USGBC’s multiple building guidance is followed. It may also be excluded.
·· Projects that are phased sites with a master plan for multiple buildings must designate a LEED project
boundary for each building or follow USGBC’s master site guidance.
·· The gross floor area of the LEED project should be no less than 2% of the gross land area within the LEED
project boundary.
Building
·· The LEED project should include the complete scope of work of the building or interior space.
·· The LEED project can be delineated by ownership, management, lease, or party wall separation.
·· Buildings or structures primarily dedicated to parking are not eligible for LEED certification. Parking that
serves an eligible LEED project should be included in the certification.
·· If the project consists of multiple structures physically connected only by circulation, parking or mechanical/
storage rooms, it may be considered a single building for LEED purposes if the structures have programmatic
dependency (spaces, not personnel, within the building cannot function independently without the other
building) or architectural cohesiveness (the building was designed to appear as one building).
MPR
·· An addition to an existing building may certify independently, excluding the existing building in its entirety.
Alternatively, the addition and the entire existing building may certify as one project.
Interiors
MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

·· If a single entity owns, manages, or occupies an entire building and wishes to certify a renovated portion of the
building that is not separated by ownership, management, lease, or party wall separation, they may do so if the
project boundary includes 100% of the construction scope and is drawn at a clear, physical barrier.
Neighborhood
·· The LEED neighborhood includes the land, water, and construction within the LEED project boundary.
·· The LEED boundary is usually defined by the platted property line of the project, including all land and water
within it.
°° Projects located on publicly owned campuses that do not have internal property lines must delineate a
sphere-of-influence line to be used instead.
°° Projects may have enclaves of non-project properties that are not subject to the rating system, but cannot
exceed 2% of the total project area and cannot be described as certified.
°° Projects must not contain non-contiguous parcels, but parcels can be separated by public rights-of-way.
·· The project developer, which can include several property owners, should control a majority of the buildable
land within the boundary, but does not have to control the entire area.
3. MUST COMPLY WITH PROJECT SIZE REQUIREMENTS

INTENT
The LEED rating system is designed to evaluate buildings, spaces, or neighborhoods of a certain size. The LEED
requirements do not accurately assess the performance of projects outside of these size requirements.
REQUIREMENTS
All LEED projects must meet the size requirements listed below.
LEED BD+C and LEED O+M Rating Systems
The LEED project must include a minimum of 1,000 square feet (93 square meters) of gross floor area.
52
LEED ID+C Rating Systems

The LEED project must include a minimum of 250 square feet (22 square meters) of gross floor area.
LEED for Neighborhood Development Rating Systems
The LEED project should contain at least two habitable buildings and be no larger than 1500 acres.
LEED for Homes Rating Systems
The LEED project must be defined as a “dwelling unit” by all applicable codes. This requirement includes, but
is not limited to, the International Residential Code stipulation that a dwelling unit must include “permanent
provisions for living, sleeping, eating, cooking, and sanitation.”
MPR
MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS MPR
53
55
Rating System
Selection Guidance
INTRODUCTION
SELECTION
SYSTEM
This document provides guidance to help project teams select a LEED rating system. Projects are required to use the
rating system that is most appropriate. However, when the decision is not clear, it is the responsibility of the project
team to make a reasonable decision in selecting a rating system before registering their project. The project teams
RATING SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDANCE

should first identify an appropriate rating system, and then determine the best adaptation. Occasionally, USGBC
recognizes that an entirely inappropriate rating system has been chosen. In this case, the project team will be asked
to change the designated rating system for their registered project. Please review this guidance carefully and contact
USGBC if it is not clear which rating system to use.
56
RATING SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

LEED FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
Buildings that are new construction or major renovation. In addition, at least 60% of the project’s gross floor area
must be complete by the time of certification (except for LEED BD+C: Core and Shell).
·· LEED BD+C: New Construction and Major Renovation. New construction or major renovation of buildings
that do not primarily serve K-12 educational, retail, data centers, warehouses and distribution centers,
hospitality, or healthcare uses. New construction also includes high-rise residential buildings 9 stories or
more.
·· LEED BD+C: Core and Shell Development. Buildings that are new construction or major renovation for
the exterior shell and core mechanical, electrical, and plumbing units, but not a complete interior fit-out.
LEED BD+C: Core and Shell is the appropriate rating system to use if more than 40% of the gross floor area is
incomplete at the time of certification.
·· LEED BD+C: Schools. Buildings made up of core and ancillary learning spaces on K-12 school grounds. LEED
BD+C: Schools may optionally be used for higher education and non-academic buildings on school campuses.
·· LEED BD+C: Retail. Buildings used to conduct the retail sale of consumer product goods. Includes both direct
customer service areas (showroom) and preparation or storage areas that support customer service.
·· LEED BD+C: Data Centers. Buildings specifically designed and equipped to meet the needs of high density
computing equipment such as server racks, used for data storage and processing. LEED BD+C: Data Centers
only addresses whole building data centers (greater than 60%).
·· LEED BD+C: Warehouses and Distribution Centers. Buildings used to store goods, manufactured products,
merchandise, raw materials, or personal belongings, such as self-storage.
·· LEED BD+C: Hospitality. Buildings dedicated to hotels, motels, inns, or other businesses within the service
industry that provide transitional or short-term lodging with or without food.
SELECTION
SYSTEM
·· LEED BD+C: Healthcare. Hospitals that operate twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week and provide
inpatient medical treatment, including acute and long-term care.
·· LEED BD+C: Homes and Multifamily Lowrise. Single-family homes and multi-family residential buildings
of 1 to 3 stories. Projects 3 to 5 stories may choose the Homes rating system that corresponds to the ENERGY
STAR program in which they are participating.

·· LEED BD+C: Multifamily Midrise. Multi-family residential buildings of 4 to 8 occupiable stories above grade.
The building must have 50% or more residential space. Buildings near 8 stories can inquire with USGBC about
using Midrise or New Construction, if appropriate.
LEED FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION.

Interior spaces that are a complete interior fit-out. In addition, at least 60% of the project’s gross floor area must be
complete by the time of certification.
·· LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors. Interior spaces dedicated to functions other than retail or hospitality.
·· LEED ID+C: Retail. Interior spaces used to conduct the retail sale of consumer product goods. Includes both
direct customer service areas (showroom) and preparation or storage areas that support customer service.
·· LEED ID+C: Hospitality. Interior spaces dedicated to hotels, motels, inns, or other businesses within the
service industry that provide transitional or short-term lodging with or without food.
LEED FOR BUILDING OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE.

Existing buildings that are undergoing improvement work or little to no construction.
·· LEED O+M: Existing Buildings. Existing buildings that do not primarily serve K-12 educational, retail, data
centers, warehouses and distribution centers, or hospitality uses.
·· LEED O+M: Retail. Existing buildings used to conduct the retail sale of consumer product goods. Includes
both direct customer service areas (showroom) and preparation or storage areas that support customer
service.
57
·· LEED O+M: Schools. Existing buildings made up of core and ancillary learning spaces on K-12 school grounds.
May also be used for higher education and non-academic buildings on school campuses.
·· LEED O+M: Hospitality. Existing buildings dedicated to hotels, motels, inns, or other businesses within the
service industry that provide transitional or short-term lodging with or without food.
·· LEED O+M: Data Centers. Existing buildings specifically designed and equipped to meet the needs of high
density computing equipment such as server racks, used for data storage and processing. LEED O+M: Data
Centers only addresses whole building data centers.
·· LEED O+M: Warehouses and Distribution Centers. Existing buildings used to store goods, manufactured
products, merchandise, raw materials, or personal belongings (such as self-storage).
LEED FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT

New land development projects or redevelopment projects containing residential uses, nonresidential uses, or a
mix. Projects may be at any stage of the development process, from conceptual planning through construction. It
is recommended that at least 50% of total building floor area be new construction or major renovation. Buildings
within the project and features in the public realm are evaluated.
·· LEED ND: Plan. Projects in conceptual planning or master planning phases, or under construction.
·· LEED ND: Built Project. Completed development projects.
CHOOSING BETWEEN RATING SYSTEMS

The following 40/60 rule provides guidance for making a decision when several rating systems appear to be
appropriate for a project. To use this rule, first assign a rating system to each square foot or square meter of the
building. Then, choose the most appropriate rating system based on the resulting percentages.
SELECTION
SYSTEM
The entire gross floor area of a LEED project must be certified under a single rating system and is subject to all
prerequisites and attempted credits in that rating system, regardless of mixed construction or space usage type.
RATING SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDANCE

PERCENTAGE OF FLOOR AREA APPROPRIATE
FOR A PARTICULAR RATING SYSTEM
<40% 40% - 60% >60%

SHOULD NOT USE PROJECT’S TEAM SHOULD USE
THAT RATING SYSTEM CHOICE THAT RATING SYSTEM
·· If a rating system is appropriate for less than 40% of the gross floor area of a LEED project building or space,
then that rating system should not be used.
·· If a rating system is appropriate for more than 60% of the gross floor area of a LEED project building or space,
then that rating system should be used.
·· If an appropriate rating system falls between 40% and 60% of the gross floor area, project teams must
independently assess their situation and decide which rating system is most applicable.
59
SLL
SMART LOCATION AND LINKAGE
Smart Location
and Linkage (SLL)
OVERVIEW
Smart Location and Linkage focuses on selection of sites that minimize the adverse environmental effects of new
development and avoid contributing to sprawl and its consequences. Typical sprawl development—low-density,
segregated housing and commercial uses located in automobile-dependent outlying areas—can harm the natural
environment: it can consume forestland, destroy or fragment wildlife habitat, degrade water quality by draining
wetlands and increasing rainwater runoff, pollute the air and emit greenhouse gases through increased automobile
travel, and often displace agriculture from prime farmland to locations where food production requires more energy
and chemical inputs. In addition to these direct environmental effects, leapfrog development (a land-use pattern
in which new development does not connect coherently to existing development, often leaving haphazard tracts of
undeveloped land) can also harm the environment indirectly by promoting additional development in previously
undeveloped areas.
Increased automobile travel is one of the most damaging consequences of sprawl. People living and working in
outlying areas tend to drive greater distances, spend more time driving, own more cars, face a greater risk of traffic
fatalities, and walk less. Vehicle emissions contribute to climate change, smog, and particulate pollution, which all
are harmful to human health and natural ecosystems. In addition, the parking and roadway surfaces required to
support vehicular travel consume land and nonrenewable resources, disrupt natural rainwater flow, and enlarge
urban heat islands.
Choosing a smart location can make a substantial difference. Transportation surveys conducted by many
metropolitan planning organizations across the country show that residents of close-in locations may drive only a
third to half as much, on average, as residents of the most far-flung locations in a metro region.
To reduce the effects of sprawl and create more livable communities, preference should be given to locations
close to existing town and city centers, sites with good transit access, infill sites, previously developed sites, and sites
adjacent to existing development. Selecting these sites avoids development of outlying greenfield sites. In addition,
these sites often have utilities, roads, and other infrastructure in place, reducing the need to build new infrastructure
and minimizing the expansion of impervious surfaces that increase harmful rainwater runoff. In the locations that
perform better environmentally, the benefits can often be multiple and reinforcing: convenient transportation
60
choices, such as buses, light rail, heavy trains, car and van pools, bicycle lanes, and sidewalks, are generally more
available near downtowns, neighborhood centers, and town centers, which are also the locations associated with
shorter automobile trips. Research has shown that living in a mixed-use environment within walking distance of
shops and services encourages walking and bicycling, which improve cardiovascular and respiratory health and
reduce the risk of hypertension and obesity.
An additional benefit of locations that require less driving is that households may be able to own fewer
automobiles and cut transportation expenses. For commercial development, fewer automobiles may mean
less investment in parking infrastructure, which can reduce the amount of land needed for a project and lower
SLL
construction costs. Abundant transportation choices can increase the value and marketability of a neighborhood
development as well. More than 14.6 million households are expected to prefer housing within a half-mile of rail
transit stops by 2025—more than double the number of households living in such locations today.1
Beyond the environmental damage caused by increased automobile dependence, fragmentation and loss of
habitat to sprawl are major threats to many imperiled species. Selection of sites that are within or adjacent to
existing development can minimize habitat fragmentation and also help preserve areas for recreation. Wetlands and
floodplains tend to be biologically rich, and their conversion presents particularly serious environmental challenges:
in addition to altering wildlife habitat, it can reduce water quality and increase the likelihood of flooding and
associated consequences, such as erosion and loss of property. Left alone, these natural areas retain rainwater and
floodwater for slow release into river systems and aquifers, and they protect lakes and streams by trapping sediment.
Another important concern is development intrusion onto prime agricultural lands, which typically require
less fertilization and irrigation and are therefore the most resource efficient and environmentally sound locations
for farming. Leapfrog patterns of development not only take these lands out of agricultural production but can also
fragment farming communities and consequently reduce the economic viability of the local agricultural economy.
Many potential building sites in urban locations have been abandoned because of real or potential contamination
from previous industrial or municipal activities. Remediation and reclamation of contaminated brownfield sites
make them safer for the community and can also contribute to social and economic revitalization of depressed
or disadvantaged neighborhoods. Development of these sites spares greenfields and makes use of existing
infrastructure.
Finally, smart location choice also offers opportunities to repair the fabric of communities that are disjointed and
sprawling. Suburban locations typically contain excellent redevelopment opportunities on grayfield sites, such as old
airports, abandoned or underutilized shopping malls, and closed factories.
1 Center for Transit-Oriented Development, Hidden in Plain Sight: Capturing the Demand for Housing Near Transit (2004).
61
SMART LOCATION AND LINKAGE PREREQUISITE
SLL
Smart Location
SMART LOCATION
This prerequisite applies to:
Plan
Built Project
INTENT
To encourage development within and near existing communities

and public transit infrastructure. To encourage improvement and
redevelopment of existing cities, suburbs, and towns while limiting the
expansion of the development footprint in the region. To reduce vehicle
trips and vehicle distance traveled. To reduce the incidence of obesity,
heart disease, and hypertension by encouraging daily physical activity
associated with walking and bicycling.
For All Projects

Either (1) locate the project on a site served by existing water and wastewater infrastructure or (2) locate the project
within a legally adopted, publicly owned, planned water and wastewater service area, and provide new water and
wastewater infrastructure for the project.
The site should also meet the requirements of one of the following four options.
OPTION 1. INFILL SITES

Locate the project on an infill site.
OR
OPTION 2. ADJACENT SITES WITH CONNECTIVITY

Locate the project on an adjacent site (i.e., a site that is adjacent to previously developed land) where the
connectivity of the adjacent land is at least 90 intersections per square mile (35 intersections per square kilometer)
as measured within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) distance of a continuous segment of the project boundary that
constitutes at least 25% of the total project boundary and is adjacent to previous development.
Existing intersections may be counted if they were not constructed or funded by the project developer within the
past 10 years.
62
Locate and/or design the project such that a through-connection (of the circulation network) intersects the
adjacent portion of the project boundary at least every 600 feet (180 meters) on average and at least every 800
feet (245 meters), connecting it with an existing circulation network outside the project; nonmotorized through-
connections of the circulation network may count for no more than 20% of the total. The exemptions listed in NPD
Prerequisite Connected and Open Community do not apply to this option.
OR
OPTION 3. TRANSIT CORRIDOR

SLL
Locate the project on a site with existing or planned transit service such that at least 50% of dwelling units and
nonresidential use entrances (inclusive of existing buildings) are within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) walking distance
of at least one bus, streetcar, or rideshare stop, or within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of at least one
bus rapid transit stop, light or heavy rail station, or commuter ferry terminal. The transit service at the stop(s) in
aggregate must meet the minimums listed in Table 1.
Projects must meet the requirements for both weekday and weekend trips and provide service every day.
TABLE 1. Minimum daily transit service
Weekday trips Weekend trips
Projects with multiple transit types (bus, streetcar, rail, or ferry) 60 40
Projects with commuter rail or ferry service only 24 6
If transit service is planned but not yet operational, the project must demonstrate one of the following:
1. The relevant transit agency has a signed full-funding grant agreement with the Federal Transit Administration
(or equivalent national agency for project outside the U.S.) that includes a revenue operations date for the
start of transit service. The revenue operations date must be no later than the date by which 50% of the
project’s total building gross floor area will be occupied.
2. For bus, streetcar, bus rapid transit, or ferry service, the transit agency must certify that it has an approved
budget that includes specifically allocated funds sufficient to provide the planned service at the levels listed
above and that service at these levels will begin no later than the date by which 50% of the project’s total
building gross floor area will be occupied.
3. For rail service other than streetcars, the transit agency must certify that preliminary engineering for a rail line
has begun. In addition, the service must meet either of these two requirements:
°° A state legislature or local subdivision of the state (or a local government for projects outside the U.S.) has
authorized the transit agency to expend funds to establish rail transit service that will begin no later than the
date by which 50% of the project’s total building gross floor area will be occupied.
OR
°° A local government has dedicated funding or reimbursement commitments from future tax revenue for the
development of stations, platforms, or other rail transit infrastructure that will serve the project no later
than the date by which 50% of the project’s total building gross floor area will be occupied.
OR
OPTION 4. SITES WITH NEARBY NEIGHBORHOOD ASSETS

Include a residential component equaling at least 30% of the project’s total building gross floor area (exclusive
of portions of parking structures devoted exclusively to parking) and locate the project near existing uses (see
Appendix 1) such that the project boundary is within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) walking distance of at least five uses, or
such that the project’s geographic center is within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of at least seven uses.
63
The following restrictions apply.

·· A use counts as only one type (e.g., a retail store may be counted only once even if it sells products in several
categories).
·· No more than two uses in each use type may be counted (e.g., if five restaurants are within the required
distance, only two may be counted).
·· The uses accessible to the project must represent at least two categories.
SLL
SMART LOCATION
64
BEHIND THE INTENT

A smart development location can reuse land, revitalize neighborhoods, and preserve natural and agricultural areas
on the urban fringe. It can increase links between jobs and the labor force, create a stronger tax base, and strengthen
rural communities.1 Well-connected, mixed-use areas also promote better health, reduce driving, and produce fewer
greenhouse gas emissions. More intersections, smaller blocks, closer proximity to goods and services, and a greater
variety of direct walking and cycling routes to nearby destinations increase the chances that someone will walk.2
Four types of project locations meet the requirements of this prerequisite: infill sites, sites that are adjacent
SLL
to well-connected parcels of land, sites served by transit, and sites near a variety of neighborhood uses. Each type
helps limit sprawl, promote alternative transportation modes, reduce vehicle distance traveled, and connect
neighborhoods. The four options provide flexibility for projects in widely different contexts, from urban infill
projects to small towns. These paths also recognize the way that smart development tends to happen, via a catalyzing
feature such as a transit hub or a mixed-use cluster.
STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
STEP 1. ASSESS WATER AND WASTEWATER INFRASTRUCTURE

When selecting a project site, review maps of existing infrastructure to determine whether it has both
water and wastewater service. Infrastructure must be publicly owned. Septic and mound wastewater
treatment systems do not qualify.
·· If water and wastewater infrastructure does not yet exist, determine whether the project is located
within the service area of planned but legally adopted and publicly owned water and wastewater
service area. Either provide the infrastructure necessary for service or provide evidence of
commitment and funding for the extension of infrastructure to the site by the municipality.
·· Projects that require new water or wastewater infrastructure outside an adopted service area do not
qualify for the prerequisite.
·· This requirement involves assessing the project location in relation to infrastructure, not evaluating the
quality of that infrastructure. Replacement of aging infrastructure or supplementing municipal supply
with an innovative on-site system does not affect compliance.
STEP 2. SELECT SITE THAT COMPLIES WITH AT LEAST ONE OPTION

When evaluating potential sites, determine which option to pursue. A project site may qualify under more
than one option but need comply with only one.
·· Option 1 may be most advantageous, since multiple other prerequisites and credits are automatically
achieved when an infill site is chosen. See Related Credit Tips and Getting Started, Site Type, Infill
Site.
·· Option 2 is for projects that are adjacent and connected to an area with previous development. There
should be numerous connection points, and the previously developed area should have a relatively
high level of street connectivity. See Getting Started, Site Type, Adjacent Site.
·· Option 3 is for projects located within walking distance of existing or planned transit that meets
minimum service levels listed in Table 1. Projects that achieve Option 3 automatically qualify for SLL
Prerequisite Agricultural Land Conservation. See Related Credit Tips.
·· Option 4 is for projects that have a significant residential component and are located within walking
distance of five to seven existing uses, as listed in Appendix 1. This option is simplest to document
when the uses are clustered together.
1 Smart Growth Principles, www.smartgrowth.org (accessed July 11, 2012).

2 R. Ewing and R. Cervero, Travel and the Built Environment: A Meta-Analysis, Journal of the American Planning Association 76(3) (2010).
65
Option 1. Infill Sites
STEP 1. DEMONSTRATE THAT THE PROJECT IS LOCATED ON AN ELIGIBLE INFILL SITE
Option 2. Adjacent Sites with Connectivity
SLL
STEP 1. IDENTIFY QUALIFYING PREVIOUSLY DEVELOPED PARCELS AROUND PROJECT
On a vicinity map, identify all parcels adjacent to the project’s perimeter. For each parcel, calculate the
percentage of previous development area.
SMART LOCATION
·· Qualifying parcels have at least 75% previous development coverage. If a portion of a lot smaller
than 1 acre (0.4 hectare) is previously developed, the entire lot’s area may be considered previously
developed.
·· Start with the parcels that look most developed, and skip those that appear marginal.
STEP 2. CONFIRM THAT PROJECT IS ADJACENT SITE

Measure the project’s entire perimeter, the length of perimeter segments adjacent to waterfront, and the
longest continuous perimeter segments adjacent to qualifying parcels. Use Equation 1 to determine the
percentage of the project boundary adjacent to previously developed parcels.
EQUATION 1. Percentage of boundary adjacent to previously development
Continuous perimeter adjacent to previously developed parcels

% adjacent boundary = × 100
Total perimeter – Waterfront perimeter
·· To qualify as an adjacent site, at least one continuous segment of the site boundary adjacent to
qualifying previously developed parcels must be 25% or more of the net perimeter length.
·· If no continuous segments are at least 25% of the net perimeter length, the site does not qualify for
Option 2.
STEP 3. MAP BUFFER FOR CONNECTIVITY ASSESSMENT

On a vicinity map, indicate a 1/2-mile (800-meter) buffer around the continuous segment adjacent to the
identified previous development (used in Step 2). Measure outward from the project boundary, not into
the interior of the project. See Further Explanation, Examples.
STEP 4. DETERMINE CONNECTIVITY IN BUFFER

Confirm that connectivity in the buffer is at least 90 intersections per square mile (35 intersections per
square kilometer). See Getting Started, Connectivity.
Intersections built or funded by the developer in the past 10 years may not be counted toward
connectivity.
STEP 5. CONFIRM SUFFICIENT THROUGH-CONNECTIONS

For the continuous project boundary segment adjacent to previous development, identify all through-
connections between the project site and the adjacent existing circulation network (Figure 1).
·· Measure the distance between through-connections along this segment of the project boundary and
ensure that no interval exceeds 800 feet (245 meters).
·· The average distance between through-connections may not exceed 600 feet (180 meters).
·· Nonmotorized through-connections may account for only 20% of the through-connections.
66
Intersect interval distance, 600 ft (180m)
LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY Property lines

SLL
Public street Public alley
Figure 1. Example through-connections at project boundary
Option 3. Transit Corridor
STEP 1. ASSESS TRANSIT SERVICE

Follow the steps in the Getting Started, Transit Service, to assess transit service for the project.
Planned transit may be counted if it meets the funding requirements listed in the prerequisite
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations
requirements. SLL2
SLLp1_Smart Location_2
STEP 2. DETERMINE PREREQUISITE COMPLIANCE
Compare final trip counts with the prerequisite’s thresholds, using the row in Table 1 that corresponds to
the transit that serves the project. Use the second row if the only transit for the project is commuter rail
or ferry. If any other types of transit are counted (in any combination, such as bus only, bus plus train,
streetcar plus commuter rail), use the first row of Table 1.
Both weekend and weekday minimums must be met.
67
Option 4. Sites with Nearby Neighborhood Assets
STEP 1. CONFIRM RESIDENTIAL COMPONENT

Calculate the project’s the total building floor area and residential building floor area and confirm that at
least 30% of the total is residential.
The amount of floor area that is designated residential and nonresidential in each project building must
be consistent throughout all credits.
SLL
STEP 2. IDENTIFY NEARBY USES
Prepare a brief survey of eligible existing uses in or near the project. Classify the use types according to
Appendix 1.
SMART LOCATION
Consider whether it will be easier to identify five uses within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) walking distance
of the project boundary, or seven uses within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of the project’s
geographic center. See Getting Started, Project Geographic Center.
STEP 3. MAP WALKING ROUTES AND TABULATE USES

On a map, plot walking routes from the project’s geographic center or boundary to existing uses.
Measure each walking route to determine whether the distance meets prerequisite requirements. See
Getting Started, Walking and Bicycling Distance. Assuming use categories and restrictions are met, there
is no need to map walking distances to additional uses once the prerequisite minimum (five or seven
uses) is met.
STEP 4. ASSESS USE CATEGORIES AND RESTRICTIONS

Check that the uses are sufficiently varied to meet the prerequisite’s restrictions, which are intended to
ensure a range of destinations.
68
FURTHER EXPLANATION
EXAMPLES
Option 2
Figure 2 illustrates a buffer zone outside the portion of the project boundary adjacent to previous development and
shows the eligible intersections inside that buffer.
SLL
Driveway entrance
Street to street intersection LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY

1/2 mile
(804m)
Alley to alley Street to alley intersection

intersection
Cul-de-sac entrance
Buffer zone
Figure 2. Counting intersections in adjacent areas
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
For Option 3, projects outside of the U.S. should use the definition of eligibility listed above as a guide to determine
SGBC LEED Guide Illustrations
eligibility SLL1 may differ to
within their country. The determination of eligibility for planned transit in other countries
that of U.S. projects. SLLp1 Smart Location_1
69
If an equivalent agency or entity does not exist, the project team must describe how the granting or funding
agency is similar in function to the specified U.S. agency. The goal of the requirements is to provide evidence of the
governing authority’s commitment to the transit plan, with legally binding funding commitments.
SLL
Documentation Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4
LS Explanation of how plan will meet thresholds of selected option X X X X
SMART LOCATION
CP CB Map of water and wastewater service areas X X X X
Map of surrounding land and its status (previously developed,

CP CB number of intersections), depending on infill assessment method X
chosen
Map of adjacent land and its eligible intersections and through-

CP CB X
connections
LS CP CB Transit service frequency counts X
Map of nearby transit stops and walking routes from building

CP CB entrances to transit stops; evidence of funding commitments for X
any planned transit
Map of uses and walking distance to those uses from geographic

CP CB X
center or boundary of project
LS = Letter of Support CP = Certified Plan CB = Certified Built Project
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Prerequisite Agricultural Land Conservation. Projects that achieve Option 1, Infill Sites, under this
prerequisite automatically achieve Option 2, Infill Sites, in the related prerequisite. Projects that achieve Option 3,
Transit Corridor for Smart Location, under this prerequisite automatically achieve Option 3, Sites Served by Transit,
in the related prerequisite.
SLL Credit Preferred Locations. Projects that achieve Option 1, Infill Sites, of this prerequisite can earn points
under Option 1, Location Type, of the related credit. Both sets of requirements reward adjacency and connectivity,
but the related credit has additional requirements and different connectivity thresholds.
SLL Credit Access to Quality Transit. The transit assessment used for this prerequisite can also be used to comply
with the related credit.
NPD Prerequisite Connected and Open Community. The related prerequisite primarily measures connectivity
inside the project boundary, whereas this prerequisite’s Option 2, Adjacent Sites with Connectivity, measures
connectivity outside the project boundary. Also, the through-connection exemptions in the related prerequisite are
not applicable to this prerequisite.
NPD Credit Mixed-Use Neighborhoods. Option 4, Sites with Nearby Neighborhood Assets, of this prerequisite
requires diverse uses close to the project’s geographic center or boundary, whereas the related credit awards points
for uses within walking distance of dwelling units. The related credit also permits planned uses as well as existing
uses, with the number of points depending on how many uses are in place by 50% occupancy.
70

·· Option 2, Adjacent Sites with Connectivity, no longer counts intersections inside the project; it evaluates
intersections only on adjacent land.
·· The restrictions for counting neighborhood uses eligible for Option 4, Sites with Nearby Neighborhood Assets,
have been revised.
SLL
None.
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
adjacent site a site having at least a continuous 25% of its boundary bordering parcels that are previously developed
sites. Only consider bordering parcels, not intervening rights-of-way. Any fraction of the boundary that borders a
water body is excluded from the calculation.
bus rapid transit an enhanced bus system that operates on exclusive bus lanes or other transit rights-of-way. The
system is designed to combine the flexibility of buses with the efficiency of rail.
public, not including driveways, parking lots, highway access ramps, and rights-of-way exclusively dedicated to rail.
It is measured in linear feet.
typically impermeable surfaces constructed as part of the project
a. At least 75% of its boundary borders parcels that individually are at least 50% previously developed, and that in
aggregate are at least 75% previously developed
b. The site, in combination with bordering parcels, forms an aggregate parcel whose boundary is 75% bounded by
parcels that individually are at least 50% previously developed, and that in aggregate are at least 75% previously
developed
c. At least 75% of the land area, exclusive of rights-of-way, within 1/2 mile (800 meters) of the project boundary is
previously developed
d. The lands within 1/2 mile (800 meters) of the project boundary have a preproject connectivity of at least 140
intersections per square mile (54 intersections per square kilometer)
The circulation network itself does not constitute previously developed land; it is the status of property on the
other side of the segment of circulation network that matters. For conditions (a) and (b) above, any fraction of the
perimeter that borders a water body is excluded from the calculation.
71
SLL
Imperiled Species and
Ecological Communities
IMPERILED SPECIES AND ECOLOGICAL COMMUNITIES CONSERVATION

Conservation
Plan
Built Project
INTENT
To conserve imperiled species and ecological communities.
REQUIREMENTS
Consult with the state Natural Heritage Program and state fish and wildlife agencies (or local equivalent for projects
outside the U.S.) to determine if any of the following have been or are likely to be found on the project site because of
the presence of suitable habitat and nearby occurrences:
·· species listed as threatened or endangered under the U.S. Endangered Species Act or the state’s endangered
species act, or
·· species or ecological communities classified by NatureServe as GH (possibly extinct), G1 (critically
imperiled), or G2 (imperiled), or
·· species listed as threatened or endangered specified under local equivalent standards (in areas outside the
U.S.) that are not covered by NatureServe data.
If the consultations are inconclusive and site conditions indicate that imperiled species or ecological communities
could be present, perform biological surveys using accepted methodologies during appropriate seasons to determine
whether such species or communities occur or are likely to occur on the site. Comply with the appropriate case or
option below.
72
Case 1. Sites without Affected Species or Ecological Community

The prerequisite is satisfied if the consultation and any necessary biological surveys determine that no such
imperiled species or ecological communities have been found or have a high likelihood of occurring.
OR
Case 2. Sites with Affected Species or Ecological Community

If the site has any affected species or ecological communities, meet either of the following two options.
SLL
OPTION 1. HABITAT CONSERVATION PLAN

Comply with an approved habitat conservation plan under the U.S. Endangered Species Act (or local equivalent for
projects outside the U.S.) for each identified species or ecological community.
OR
OPTION 2. HABITAT CONSERVATION PLAN EQUIVALENT

Work with a qualified biologist or ecologist, a conservation organization, or the appropriate national, state or local
agency to create and implement a conservation plan that includes the following actions:
·· Identify and map the extent of the habitat and the appropriate buffer, not less than 100 feet (30 meters),
according to best available scientific information.
·· If on-site protection can be accomplished, analyze threats from development and develop a monitoring and
management plan that eliminates or significantly reduces the threats.
·· Protect the identified habitat and buffer in perpetuity by donating or selling the land or a conservation
easement on the land to an accredited land trust, conservation organization, or relevant government agency.
·· If any portion of the identified habitat and buffer cannot be protected in perpetuity, quantify the effects by
acres (hectares) or number of plants and/or animals affected, and protect from development in perpetuity
habitat of similar or better quality, on-site or off-site, by donating or selling a conservation easement on it to an
accredited land trust, conservation organization, or relevant government agency. The donation or easement
must cover an amount of land equal to or larger than the area that cannot be protected.
73
BEHIND THE INTENT

Biodiversity and ecological systems, whose preservation is a fundamental goal of environmental protection,
contribute to sustainability by supporting the food web and the human systems that depend on services provided by
natural systems. It is particularly important to protect imperiled species and ecological communities because their
smaller population sizes are often vulnerable and less resilient to human or natural disturbances.
Loss of species and biodiversity is a well-documented and complex problem associated with certain types and
locations of human development. The current rate of species extinction is about 1,000 to 10,000 times higher than
SLL
prehistoric extinction rates,1 and about 16,000 species are known to be threatened with imminent extinction.2
The list compiled for the Living Planet Index, which tracks and aggregates population trends in more than 2,500
vertebrate species worldwide, has shrunk by about 30% since 1970.3

Habitat loss due to development, climate change, invasive species, and overexploitation of natural resources is
the major threat to imperiled species and ecological communities worldwide. This prerequisite supports species
survival in two ways: by requiring new development to be located in areas without imperiled species or ecological
communities, or if development may affect sensitive species or communities, by requiring protection and
management of on-site habitat and mitigation of any loss of habitat through permanent conservation of equivalent
habitat elsewhere. The protection and mitigation process needs to be overseen by an environmental professional
and follow a management plan so that scientific best practices are implemented.
STEP 1. IDENTIFY ANY IMPERILED SPECIES OR COMMUNITIES ON SITE

Projects in the U.S. should contact both of the following agencies to determine whether any imperiled
species or ecological communities (ISEC) have been or are likely to be found on the project site:
·· State Natural Heritage Program
·· State wildlife agency
Qualifying species include threatened or endangered species under the U.S. Endangered Species Act,
those listed by a state endangered species law, or those classified by NatureServe (natureserve.org) as
any of the following:
·· GH (globally presumed extinct)
·· G1 (globally critically imperiled)
·· G2 (globally imperiled)
Projects interested in pursuing the related credit, SLL Credit Site Design for Habitat or Wetland and
Water Body Conservation, may want to ask about species in its additional species classifications:
·· G3 (globally vulnerable)
·· S1 (subnationally critically imperiled)
·· S2 (subnationally imperiled)
Projects outside the U.S. should contact local agencies equivalent to the state Natural Heritage Program
and state wildlife agencies in the United States (the Natural Heritage Program also operates in North
America beyond the U.S.). See Further Explanation, International Tips.
If the state’s Natural Heritage Program (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) is managed by
the state wildlife agency (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.), a single consultation meets
the requirement.
1 International Union for Conservation of Nature, www.iucn.org/what/tpas/biodiversity (accessed April 29, 2012).
2 IUCN Red List 2008, www.iucn.org/about/work/programmes/species/our_work/the_iucn_red_list/review_11012012_1607/.
3 Living Planet Report 2010, WWF, wwf.panda.org/about_our_earth/all_publications/living_planet_report (accessed April 29, 2012).
74
STEP 2. IF STEP 1 CONSULTATIONS ARE INCONCLUSIVE BUT SITE CONDITIONS INDICATE

ISEC COULD BE PRESENT, CONDUCT BIOLOGICAL SURVEY
If the agencies listed in Step 1 say the site may or may not contain critical habitat, engage a qualified
specialist to conduct a biological assessment and determine whether imperiled species and ecological
communities (ISEC) occur or are likely to occur on the site.
·· Ensure that such surveys use accepted methods and are conducted during appropriate seasons.
·· Selection criteria for a qualified specialist should include academic and professional credentials in
biology or ecology, experience performing similar surveys in the project’s region, and established
working relationships with local wildlife officials.
SLL
STEP 3. SELECT CASE

Based on the results of the search or the survey, determine which case to pursue.
·· Case 1 is for projects with no imperiled species or ecological communities.
·· Case 2 applies to sites where imperiled species or ecological communities have been identified.
Generally, this prerequisite cannot be achieved using only general environmental reports prepared for
the project or its vicinity. Although such reports may provide relevant and useful background information
about ISEC, they often do not contain sufficiently specific assurances or use the criteria required for the
prerequisite.
Case 1. Sites without Affected Species or Ecological Communities

No additional steps are required.
Keep records of research and communications with agencies regarding the likelihood or presence of
imperiled species or ecological communities for credit documentation.
Case 2. Sites with Affected Species or Ecological Communities
STEP 1. DETERMINE EXISTENCE OF HABITAT CONSERVATION PLAN

Determine whether an official habitat conservation plan prepared under the auspices of the U.S.
Endangered Species Act is in place for the site. This can be accomplished by contacting the state wildlife
agency or the local office of the U.S. Fish & Wildlife Service. Projects outside the U.S. should contact local
governmental wildlife agencies to determine whether habitat conservation plans exist for the site. See
Further Explanation, International Tips.
STEP 2. SELECT OPTION

Determine which option is appropriate for the project site.
·· Option 1 is appropriate if the project is within the area of an approved habitat conservation plan.
·· Option 2 is appropriate if there is no habitat conservation plan for the project site.
OPTION 1. HABITAT CONSERVATION PLAN
STEP 1. DETERMINE COMPLIANCE WITH PLAN

Demonstrate compliance by describing measures to conserve and protect the habitat, and obtain a
statement from the supervising agency confirming the project’s compliance with the plan.
Having a qualified specialist, as described above, prepare the submission will help ensure agency
approval of the project’s measures.
OPTION 2. HABITAT CONSERVATION PLAN EQUIVALENT
STEP 1. ASSEMBLE TEAM TO PREPARE EQUIVALENT PLAN

In addition to the project team’s qualified specialist, described above, contact local conservation
organizations and wildlife agencies to solicit their participation in the preparation and implementation of
a habitat conservation plan equivalent.
75
STEP 2. PREPARE PLAN

Develop a habitat conservation plan that addresses the required four actions listed for Option 2,
summarized as follows:
·· Map habitat and buffer zone.
·· Analyze and manage threats.
·· Provide perpetual protection.
·· Set aside equivalent area if perpetual protection is not possible.
SLL
STEP 3. IMPLEMENT EQUIVALENT HABITAT CONSERVATION PLAN

FURTHER EXPLANATION
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
If an equivalent to the U.S. Natural Heritage Program or state wildlife agency cannot be determined, project teams
should consult national or international sources for endangered species protection and consult with a qualified
local biologist or ecologist who can determine the presence of endangered species by conducting a biological survey.
Additionally, qualified biologists and ecologists may be helpful in determining which local laws and regulations are
the most equivalent to U.S. measures.
If the project’s country maintains no list of imperiled species, consult the International Union for Conservation
of Nature (IUCN) Red List. An ecology specialist must confirm that the species listed are relevant to the project site
and make appropriate recommendations.
For projects outside the U.S., a qualified ecology specialist can be defined as an individual who has the following
qualifications and attributes:
·· A degree in biology, ecology, or related subject
·· A minimum of three years’ relevant experience as a practicing biologist or ecologist (e.g., conducting
ecological impact assessments, performing habitat surveys, restoring habitat)
·· An understanding of the interaction between ecology and the built environment (e.g., providing
recommendations for ecological protection, enhancement, and mitigation measures during construction)
·· Adherence to a professional code of conduct
Some organizations whose members may be qualified specialists include the following:
·· Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management (CIWEM)
·· Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (IEEM)
·· Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA)
·· Landscape Institute (LI)
76
Case 2
Documentation Case 1
Option 1 Option 2
Confirmation of consultation with state Natural Heritage Program and

LS CP CB X X X
state wildlife agency and NatureServe or equivalent
SLL
LS CP CB Results from biological survey, if applicable X X X
LS Confirmation of habitat conservation plan and commitment to follow it X

Summary of habitat conservation plan, and description of steps taken

CP CB X
to follow requirements
Confirmation of habitat conservation plan equivalent and commitment
LS X
to follow it
Credentials of specialist, summary of habitat conservation plan
CP CB X
equivalent, and description of steps taken to follow requirements
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Prerequisite Wetland and Water Body Conservation. Projects that have both ISEC habitat and wetlands or
water bodies can formulate coordinated and therefore stronger conservation measures for all sensitive resources.
SLL Credit Site Design for Habitat or Wetland and Water Body Conservation, SLL Credit Restoration of
Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies, and SLL Credit Long-Term Conservation Management of Habitat
or Wetlands and Water Bodies. Although the related habitat credits entail different circumstances and approaches
to improving habitat, a coordinated approach may allow projects to earn some or all of them while achieving this
prerequisite.
GIB Credit Minimized Site Disturbance. Protection of a site’s ISEC may help achieve the related credit’s
requirements for protecting the site and its vegetation.
GIB Credit Rainwater Management. ISEC habitat areas may also function as rainwater infiltration areas.

None.
U.S. Endangered Species Act: fws.gov/laws/lawsdigest/esact.html
NatureServe classifications GH, G1, G2: natureserve.org/explorer/ranking.htm
Not available.
None.
DEFINITIONS
IMPERILED SPECIES AND ECOLOGICAL COMMUNITIES CONSERVATION SLL

77
78
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT SLL
79
SLL
Wetland and Water
Body Conservation
WETLAND AND WATER BODY CONSERVATION

Plan
Built Project
INTENT
To preserve water quality, natural hydrology, habitat, and biodiversity

through conservation of wetlands and water bodies.
REQUIREMENTS
Limit development effects on wetlands, water bodies, and surrounding buffer land according to the requirements
below.
Case 1. Sites without Sensitive Areas

Locate the project on a site that includes no preproject wetlands, water bodies, land within 50 feet (15 meters) of
wetlands, and land within 100 feet (30 meters) of water bodies.
Case 2. Sites with Sensitive Areas

If the site has preproject wetlands, water bodies, land within 50 feet (15 meters) of wetlands, or land within 100 feet
(30 meters) of water bodies, select one of the following two options:
OPTION 1. NO DEVELOPMENT ON WETLANDS AND WATER BODIES

Locate the project such that preproject wetlands, water bodies, land within 50 feet (15 meters) of wetlands, and land
within 100 feet (30 meters) of water bodies are not affected by new development, unless the development is minor
improvements or is on previously developed land.
OR
OPTION 2. RAINWATER MANAGEMENT AND PROTECTED BUFFERS

Earn at least 1 point under GIB Credit Rainwater Management, and limit any development beyond minor
improvements to less than the percentage of buffer land listed in Table 1.
80
TABLE 1. Maximum allowable area of development within buffer zone, by project density
Residential density
Nonresidential Percentage of buffer land** where development beyond minor
density (FAR)* improvements is allowed
DU/acre* DU/hectare*
> 25 > 62 > 1.75 ≤ 20%
> 18 and ≤ 25 > 45 and ≤ 62 > 1.25 to ≤ 1.75 ≤ 15%

SLL
> 10 and ≤ 18 > 25 and ≤ 45 > .75 to ≤ 1.25 ≤ 10%
≤ 10 ≤ 25 ≤ .75 ≤ 5%
DU = dwelling unit; FAR = floor-area ratio.

* For this option, a mixed-use project may use either its residential or its nonresidential density to determine the percentage of allowable
development, regardless of which is higher.
** Buffer width may vary as long as the total buffer area is equal to the area within 50 feet (15 meters) of wetlands and/or within 100 feet
(30 meters) of water bodies, minus excluded features (see list of minor improvements, below). In no case may the buffer width be less
than 25 feet (7.5 meters) for wetlands and 50 feet (15 meters) for water bodies, measured from the edge. Inside this minimum buffer, only
minor improvements and/or improvements that result in no ecological impairment of the wetland or water body, as determined by
a qualified biologist, are allowed.
For All Projects

Comply with all local, state, and national regulations pertaining to wetland and water body conservation.
The following features are not considered wetlands, water bodies, or buffer land that must be protected for the
purposes of this prerequisite:
·· previously developed land;
·· man-made water bodies (such as industrial mining pits, concrete-lined canals, or stormwater retention ponds)
that lack natural edges and floors or native ecological communities in the water and along the edge;
·· man-made linear wetlands that result from the interruption of natural drainages by existing rights-of-way; and
·· wetlands that were man-made incidentally and have been rated “poor” for all measured wetland functions, as
assessed by a qualified biologist using a method that is accepted by state or regional permitting agencies (or a
local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
Minor improvements within the buffer may be undertaken to enhance appreciation for the wetland or water body,
provided such facilities are open to public access. Only the following improvements are permitted:
·· bicycle and pedestrian pathways no more than 12 feet wide (3.5 meters), of which no more than 8 total feet (2.5
meters) may be impervious;
·· activities to maintain or restore native natural communities and/or natural hydrology;
·· one single-story structure not exceeding 500 square feet (45 square meters) per 300 linear feet (90 linear
meters) of buffer, on average;
·· grade changes necessary to ensure public access;
·· clearings, limited to one per 300 linear feet (90 linear meters) of buffer, on average, not exceeding 500 square
feet (45 square meters) each, for tables, benches, and access for nonmotorized recreational watercraft;
·· removal of hazardous trees (up to 75% of dead trees), trees smaller than 6 inches (150 millimeters) in diameter
at breast height, trees with a condition rating of less than 40%, and up to 20% of trees larger than 6 inches (150
millimeters) in diameter at breast height with a condition rating of 40% or higher, as based on an assessment
by an arborist certified by the International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) using ISA standard measures or for
projects outside the U.S.an equivalent certified professional utilizing equivalent methodology; and
·· brownfield remediation activities.
Off-street parking is not considered a minor improvement.

Direct development of wetlands and water bodies is prohibited, except for minimal-impact structures, such as
an elevated boardwalk, that allow access to the water for educational and recreational purposes. Structures that
protrude into wetlands or water bodies may be replaced, provided the replacement structure has the same or smaller
footprint and a similar height.
81
BEHIND THE INTENT

Wetlands provide environmental services, such as floodwater storage and abatement, wildlife habitat, and carbon
sequestration, plus recreational opportunities. Wetlands are habitat for nearly 40% of species globally and account
for nearly 570 million hectares, or 6% of Earth’s land surface. 1 In the United States alone, wetlands are home to more
than one-third of threatened and endangered species.2 Wetlands and other water bodies also reduce water pollution
by trapping, transforming, and recycling sediments, excess nutrients, trace metals, and organic materials. Buffers
around wetlands and water bodies often contain an ecosystem’s most ecologically productive and diverse areas.
SLL
Wetlands and water bodies are being damaged and lost at high rates. More than half of the world’s wetlands have
disappeared since 1900.3 The U.S. loses about 60,000 acres (24 300 hectares) of wetlands each year.4 Degradation
and destruction of wetlands and water bodies increases flood risk, drought damage, coastal erosion in tidal zones,

and species decline.
This prerequisite encourages the protection of wetlands and water bodies. Projects that avoid damaging these
natural features and their associated buffer lands may still include limited access for education and recreation, to
ensure that people have opportunity to appreciate and learn more about these sensitive areas.
STEP 1. OBTAIN PREPROJECT SITE MAP OR PHOTOS

Obtain aerial photos of the site showing its appearance when it was acquired by the developer of the
LEED ND project. The date of acquisition defines preproject conditions; the prerequisite applies to any
changes to the site made after this time.
STEP 2. IDENTIFY ECOLOGY SPECIALIST

It is recommended that the project team engage a professional with the knowledge and expertise to
conduct a thorough environmental survey of the site to identify water bodies, wetlands, and related
habitat (or their absence).
·· Project teams should enlist the expertise of an ecology specialist (a biologist, ecologist, environmental
land planner, or similarly qualified individual).
·· Consider consulting with an organization such as the Academy of Board Certified Environmental
Professionals or an environmental conservation agency to find regional specialists, and consider their
experience in performing similar evaluations in the project’s ecological region.
STEP 3. IDENTIFY SENSITIVE AREAS AND EXEMPT FEATURES ON SITE TO DETERMINE

APPLICABLE CASE
Identify any wetlands or water bodies on the project site, including buffer land within the distances
specified in the prerequisite requirements. See Further Explanation, Wetlands.
·· Determine whether any wetlands or water bodies are exempted from consideration as sensitive land,
per the list in the prerequisite requirements.
°° Exempt areas should be identified on the project site map.
°° Exempt areas include previously developed land, man-made water bodies, or man-made wetlands
from the disruption of natural drainage or those whose functions have been rated “poor”.
·· If poor-quality wetlands exist on the site, obtain environmental assessments of the quality. Retain the
wetland quality assessment and evidence of the qualifications of the specialist who conducted the
assessment.
Select the appropriate case.
·· Case 1 is for projects that have no sensitive areas.
·· Case 2 is for projects with sensitive areas; these project teams can then choose one of two options.
1 Ramsar, http://www.ramsar.org/cda/en/ramsar-about-faqs-what-are-wetlands/main/ramsar/1-36-37%5E7713_4000_0_.
2 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, America’s Wetlands: Our Vital Link between Land and Water, EPA843-K-95-001, Office of Water, Office of
Wetlands, Oceans and Watersheds (Washington, DC: EPA, 1995).
3 http://www.unwater.org/downloads/wetlandsbrochurefinal.pdf.
4 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Wetlands: Status and Trends (Washington, DC: EPA, 2012).
82
Case 1. Sites without Sensitive Areas
STEP 1. CONSULT THE PREPROJECT VICINITY MAP

Confirm that no applicable sensitive areas exist on the site.
Case 2. Sites with Sensitive Areas

SLL
STEP 1. IDENTIFY RELEVANT REGULATIONS

If the site contains any wetlands or water bodies, obtain and comply with any relevant local, state, or
national regulations.
STEP 2. LIMIT ANY IMPROVEMENTS NEAR WETLANDS OR WATER BODIES

If sensitive areas exist on the site and minor improvements are planned for the buffer areas, make sure
that the improvements are within the bounds of the prerequisite criteria. On the site map, indicate any
minor improvements, including the dimensions of each. Impacts on the wetlands and water bodies
themselves are prohibited; impacts may occur only in the buffer areas.

Steps 1 and 2 apply to all project sites with sensitive areas. Project teams can then choose one of the
following options.
OPTION 1. NO DEVELOPMENT ON WETLANDS OR WATER BODIES
STEP 1. LOCATE NO NEW DEVELOPMENT ON SENSITIVE AREAS

Clearly delineate buffers (along with the wetlands and water bodies) on the site plan along with the
location of any minor improvements. Design the project such that the development footprint does not
fall on sensitive areas.
·· Clearly delineate sensitive features on a site plan along with the location of any new development.
·· Clearly distinguish between previously developed land and new development.
OPTION 2. RAINWATER MANAGEMENT AND PROTECTED BUFFERS
STEP 1. MAP WETLAND AND WATER BODY BUFFERS

Clearly delineate buffers (along with the wetlands and water bodies) on the site plan along with the
location of any minor improvements.
STEP 2. MINIMIZE DEVELOPMENT ON BUFFERS

Design the project to minimize encroachment of development footprint on buffer land. The maximum
percentage of buffer land that can contain new development, aside from any minor improvements, is
determined by the project’s density.
·· Use the project’s residential or nonresidential density (see Getting Started, Land-Use Densities) and
refer to Table 1 of the prerequisite requirements.
·· Mixed-use projects may use either residential or nonresidential density to determine the maximum
amount of development.
STEP 3. CONFIRM MAXIMUM DEVELOPMENT AREAS ARE NOT EXCEEDED

Confirm that the percentage of developed buffer area is below the allowable thresholds for the buffer
development density, based on the values in Table 1.
STEP 4. IMPLEMENT RAINWATER MANAGEMENT

Confirm that the project will earn at least 1 point under GIB Credit Rainwater Management.
83
FURTHER EXPLANATION
WETLANDS
Wetlands are defined by the methodology in the Army Corps of Engineers Wetlands Delineation Manual, regardless
of whether they are jurisdictional wetlands under the Clean Water Act. As such, intermittent wetlands on the site or
within 100 feet (30 meters) of the project boundary should be assessed using the Army Corps method to determine
whether they qualify for delineation. A site visit, site survey, and analysis of aerial photographs and existing land-use
SLL
maps may be necessary.
Man-made water bodies and wetlands, such as industrial mining pits, concrete-lined canals, rainwater retention
ponds, and drainage ditches, are exempt from the credit requirements. Also exempt are man-made wetlands

assessed as “poor” because they cannot sufficiently support, protect, or improve water quality, provide fish or
wildlife habitat, store floodwater, or maintain surface water flow during dry periods. A qualified environmental
professional can assess wetland quality.
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
The RAMSAR Convention can be a good source of information on wetland locations and regulations for project
teams outside the U.S. (ramsar.org).
Case 2
Option 1 Option 2
LS CP CB Description of any exempted features X X X
Map indicating any wetlands, water bodies, buffer lands,

LS CP CB X X
previously developed areas and new development
LS CP CB Description of any minor improvements on sensitive land X X
Arborist’s assessment of any trees on sensitive land to be

LS CP CB X X
removed
CP CB Calculations for total buffer land developed X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Credit Site Design for Habitat or Wetland and Water Body Conservation. Projects pursuing Case 2, Option
2, of this prerequisite can achieve Option 3 of the related credit by conducting additional biological work and legally
protecting wetlands and water bodies from development. Projects that pursue Case 1 and do not have significant
habitat can achieve Option 1 of the related credit without meeting additional requirements.
SLL Credit Restoration of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies. A project that restores degraded wetlands or
water bodies on site may be able to earn the related credit.
SLL Credit Long-Term Conservation Management of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies. Providing
additional conservation management for restored wetlands or water bodies may meet the requirements of the
related credit.
84

None.
None.
SLL

Not available.
DEFINITIONS
brownfield real property or the expansion, redevelopment, or reuse of which may be complicated by the presence or
possible presence of a hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant
floor-area ratio (FAR) the density of nonresidential land use, exclusive of parking, measured as the total
nonresidential building floor area divided by the total buildable land area available for nonresidential structures. For
example, on a site with 10,000 square feet (930 square meters) of buildable land area, an FAR of 1.0 would be 10,000
square feet (930 square meters) of building floor area. On the same site, an FAR of 1.5 would be 15,000 square feet
(1395 square meters), an FAR of 2.0 would be 20,000 square feet (1860 square meters), and an FAR of 0.5 would be
5,000 square feet (465 square meters).
previously developed altered by paving, construction, and/or land use that would typically have required regulatory
permitting to have been initiated (alterations may exist now or in the past). Land that is not previously developed
and landscapes altered by current or historical clearing or filling, agricultural or forestry use, or preserved natural
area use are considered undeveloped land. The date of previous development permit issuance constitutes the date of
previous development, but permit issuance in itself does not constitute previous development.
water body the surface water of a stream (first-order and higher, including intermittent streams), arroyo, river,
canal, lake, estuary, bay, or ocean. It does not include irrigation ditches.
wetland an area that is inundated or saturated by surface or ground water at a frequency and duration sufficient
to support, and that under normal circumstances does support, a prevalence of vegetation typically adapted for
life in saturated soil conditions. Wetlands generally include swamps, marshes, bogs, and similar areas, but exclude
irrigation ditches unless delineated as part of an adjacent wetland.
85
SLL
Agricultural Land
Conservation
AGRICULTURAL LAND CONSERVATION

Plan
Built Project
INTENT
To preserve irreplaceable agricultural resources by protecting prime and

unique farmland from development.
REQUIREMENTS
Locate the project on a site that is not within a state or locally designated agricultural preservation district (or local
equivalent for projects outside the U.S.), unless any changes made to the site conform to the requirements for
development within the district (as used in this requirement, “district” does not equate to land-use zoning).
Meet the requirements of one of the following five options.
OPTION 1. INFILL SITES

Locate the project on an infill site.
OR
OPTION 2. SITES SERVED BY TRANSIT

Comply with SLL Prerequisite Smart Location, Option 3, Transit Corridor.
OR
OPTION 3. DEVELOPMENT RIGHTS RECEIVING AREA

Locate the project within a designated receiving area for development rights under a publicly administered farmland
protection program that provides for the transfer of development rights from lands designated for conservation to
lands designated for development.
OR
OPTION 4. SITES WITHOUT AFFECTED SOILS

Locate the project’s development footprint such that it does not disturb prime farmland, unique farmland, or
farmland of statewide or local importance as defined by the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 7, Volume 6,
86
Parts 400 to 699, Section 657.5 and identified in a state Natural Resources Conservation Service soil survey (or local
equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
OR
OPTION 5. SITES WITH AFFECTED SOILS

If development footprint affects land with prime farmland, unique farmland, or farmland of statewide or local
importance as defined by the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 7, Volume 6, Parts 400 to 699, Section 657.5 and
identified in a state Natural Resources Conservation Service soil survey (or local equivalent for projects outside
SLL
the U.S.), mitigate the loss through the purchase or donation of easements providing permanent protection from
development on land with comparable soils in accordance with the ratios based on densities per acre (per hectare) of
buildable land listed in Tables 1 and 2.
TABLE 1. Mitigation ratios for projects in large metropolitan or micropolitan statistical areas (pop. 250,000 or more)
Residential density
Mitigation ratio (area of
Nonresidential density (FAR
easement : area of project on
of buildable land available for
DU per hectare of buildable prime, unique, or significant
DU per acre of buildable land nonresidential use)
land available for residential farmland)
available for residential use
use
> 7 and ≤ 8.5 > 17.5 and ≤ 21 > 0.50 and ≤ 0.67 2 to 1
> 8.5 and ≤ 10 > 21 and ≤ 25 > 0.67 and ≤ 0.75 1.5 to 1
> 10 and ≤ 11.5 > 25 and ≤ 28.5 > 0.75 and ≤ 0.87 1 to 1
> 11.5 and ≤ 13 > 28.5 and ≤ 32 > 0.87 and ≤ 1.0 .5 to 1
> 13 > 32 > 1.0 No mitigation
TABLE 2. Mitigation ratios for projects in small metropolitan or micropolitan statistical areas (pop. less than 250,000)
Residential density Mitigation ratio (area of

Nonresidential density (FAR
easement : area of project on
of buildable land available for
prime, unique, or significant
DU/acre of buildable land DU/hectare of buildable land nonresidential use)
farmland)
available for residential use available for residential use
> 7 and ≤ 8 > 17.5 and ≤ 20 > 0.50 and ≤ 0.58 2 to 1
> 8 and ≤ 9 > 20 and ≤ 22 > 0.58 and ≤ 0.67 1 to 1
> 9 and ≤ 10 > 22 and ≤ 25 > 0.67 and ≤ 0.75 0.5 to 1
> 10 > 25 > 0.75 No mitigation
All off-site mitigation must be located within 100 miles (160 kilometers) of the project.
Up to 15% of the affected farmland area may be subtracted from the mitigation area required of the project in Tables
1 and 2 if it is permanently dedicated for community gardens. Portions of parking structures devoted exclusively to
parking must be excluded from the numerator when calculating the floor-area ratio (FAR).
87
The mitigation ratio for a mixed-use project is calculated as follows:

1. Determine the total floor area of all residential and nonresidential uses.
2. Calculate the percentage residential and percentage nonresidential of the total floor area.
3. Determine the density of the residential and nonresidential components as measured in dwelling units per acre
and FAR, respectively.
4. Referring to Tables 1 and 2, find the appropriate mitigation ratios for the residential and nonresidential
components.
SLL
5. If the mitigation ratios are different, multiply the mitigation ratio of the residential component by its
percentage of the total floor area, and multiply the mitigation ratio of the nonresidential component by its
percentage.
6. Add the two numbers produced by step 5. The result is the mitigation ratio.

88
BEHIND THE INTENT

Agricultural land is often flat, easy to build on, and more affordable than land in towns and cities. As a result, it has
become a common location for new development projects. In the U.S., more than 1 acre (0.4 hectare) of farmland or
ranchland is lost to development every minute.1
This loss of agricultural land has implications for ecological systems, agricultural production, and local
economies. Preserved agricultural land can provide a range of ecosystem benefits, including habitat, flood control,
and air quality improvement. It enables local food production, benefiting human health and local economies. In
SLL
areas without extensive wildlife or wilderness, agricultural land can also be the primary source of open space and
connection with nature.
The goal of this prerequisite is to protect prime, unique and/or important agricultural land while permitting
flexibility for developing land that is no longer viable for farming. If a project team is unable to locate on an area
without prime soils, an acceptable alternative is a site targeted for future development. This may be an infill site or
a site served by transit. In addition, project teams may also preserve prime agricultural land through the use of a
transfer of development rights (TDR) program. These programs often operate in parallel to local zoning and entail
the transfer development rights from owners of prime farmland (the “sending area”) to those seeking to develop in a
more appropriate area identified by the local government (the “receiving area”).
If a project is unable to avoid prime farmland outside these “targeted” areas, the team may use off-site mitigation
to ensure that other nearby farmland is preserved for future productive agricultural uses.
All projects must avoid designated agricultural preservation districts unless they adhere to the state or local
government’s associated requirements. These districts can be administered as a part of local government or
individually chartered to protect agricultural resources within specific boundaries.
STEP 1. DETERMINE WHETHER PROJECT IS IN AGRICULTURAL PRESERVATION DISTRICT

Contact the local agricultural department or conservation organization, such as a land trust, to determine
whether the project site is in a state or locally designated agricultural preservation district that has
development review power.
·· Depending on the agency, this designation may be documented in a variety of forms, including maps
or lists.
·· If the project is in an agricultural preservation district, any development or site modifications must
additionally conform to the requirements of that district.
STEP 2. SELECT ONE OPTION

Review the five options to determine which is most appropriate for the project. Consider project site
conditions that might also be used to document compliance with other prerequisites or credits.
·· Option 1 is for projects that are developing infill sites, regardless of soil type or development footprint
location.
·· Option 2 is appropriate if the project site has transit service that complies with SLL Prerequisite Smart
Location, Option 3, regardless of soil type or development footprint location.
·· Option 3 is appropriate if the project site is located in a development rights receiving area (i.e., in
the U.S., is covered by a transfer of development rights, or TDR, program), regardless of soil type or
development footprint location.
·· Option 4 is for projects that are not on infill sites, not served by transit, not in a development rights
receiving area, and not encroaching on prime soil.
·· Option 5 is for projects whose sites do not meet any of the above conditions.
1 American Farmland Trust, www.farmland.org (accessed May 1, 2012).

89
Option 1. Infill Sites
STEP 1. CONFIRM INFILL LOCATION

Demonstrate that the project is located on an eligible infill site. See Getting Started, Site Type,
Infill Site.
SLL
Option 2. Sites Served by Transit
STEP 1. COMPLY WITH OPTION 3 OF SLL PREREQUISITE SMART LOCATION

Assess transit service to ensure compliance with Option 3, Transit Corridor, of the Smart Location
prerequisite. See Getting Started, Transit Service.
Option 3. Development Rights Receiving Area
STEP 1. CONFIRM LOCATION IN TDR AREA

Consult the local planning or land-use authority to determine whether the project site is in a receiving
area for a government-administered transfer of development rights (TDR) program or similar farmland
protection program.
·· Receiving areas are those identified by the local government to attract targeted development.
·· Create or retain a site plan demonstrating that all or a portion of the project site is located within the
development rights receiving area.
Option 4. Sites without Affected Soils
STEP 1. CONFIRM AVOIDANCE OF PRIME FARMLAND

Confirm that the project does not encroach on prime farmland, unique farmland, or farmland of state
or local importance, as identified in the Natural Resources Conservation Service soil survey for the area
(or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.). See Further Explanation, U.S. Soil Surveys and
International Tips.
STEP 2. MODIFY PROJECT DESIGN IF NECESSARY

If portions of the project site include prime soils, modify project design to avoid these areas. If
development cannot be avoided on prime soils, pursue Option 5.
Option 5. Sites with Affected Soils
STEP 1. OBTAIN OFFICIAL SOIL SURVEY FOR PROJECT SITE

Identify prime farmland, unique farmland, or farmland of state or local importance on the project site,
using a Natural Resources Conservation Service soil survey for the area (or a local equivalent for projects
outside the U.S.). See Further Explanation, U.S. Soil Surveys and International Tips.
STEP 2. CALCULATE LAND AREA OF ENCROACHMENT

Based on the soil survey, calculate the land area of prime soils to be affected by the development
footprint.
90
STEP 3. DETERMINE MITIGATION RATIO

The prerequisite requires that the loss on the encroached area be mitigated by protection of agricultural
land off site. The amount is determined by a ratio that is adjusted for the project’s density and the
population of the surrounding area (i.e., more or less than 250,000 people).
·· Use the project’s residential or nonresidential density (see Getting Started, Land-Use Densities).
Identify the applicable mitigation ratio from Table 1 (for projects in large metropolitan or micropolitan
statistical areas) or Table 2 (for projects in small metropolitan or micropolitan statistical areas).
·· If the residential and nonresidential mitigation ratios are different, use Equation 1 to determine the
combined mitigation ratio.
SLL
EQUATION 1. Combined mitigation ratio
Nonresidential Nonresidential Residential % Residential

Mitigation
ratio
= % of total floor × mitigation + of total floor × mitigation
area ratio area ratio
STEP 4. CALCULATE REQUIRED LAND AREA TO BE MITIGATED

Use Equation 2 to determine the total land area of prime soils that must be mitigated by the project team
through conservation easements.
If land inside the project will be permanently dedicated to a community garden, the garden area may be
subtracted from the area to be conserved by easements, not to exceed 15% of the area to be conserved.
EQUATION 2. Conservation area protected by easement
Conservation Mitigation Encroached prime Community garden

area
= ratio
× soil land area
– land area
Community garden land area

where ≤ 0.15
Initial required conservation area
STEP 5. IDENTIFY AND SECURE EASEMENT

Identify one or more locations within 100 miles (160 kilometers) of the project that possess comparable
soils and secure permanent protection of the required mitigation land area through the purchase or
donation of conservation easements.
·· Work with the land trust or agricultural preservation organization to identify and purchase the off-site
easement. Even if a land trust does not exist in the project’s area, the project team must find land of
comparable soils within the required distance.
·· All arrangements must ensure that the land is protected from development in perpetuity.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
See Step-by-Step Guidance. For Option 1, see also Getting Started, Site Types, Infill Site.
EXAMPLE
Option 5. Sites with Affected Soils
A project in a metropolitan statistical area with a population of 400,000 people has 100 dwelling units on 10 acres
91
(4 hectares) of buildable residential land. It will include a 0.1-acre (0.04-hectare) on-site community garden. The
project’s development footprint encroaches on prime soil.
First, the project team obtains a Natural Resources Conservation Service soil survey (projects outside the U.S.
would use a local equivalent) to determine the land area of encroachment. The soil survey shows that the project’s
development footprint encroaches on 2 acres (0.8 hectare) of prime soil.
Next, the project team calculates the residential density, based on its dwelling units (DU):
100 DU
SLL
= 10 DU/acre
10 acres
100 DU

= 25 DU/hectare
4 hectares
To determine the required mitigation ratio for this residential density in a metropolitan statistical area of more than
250,000 people, the project team refers to Table 1. A residential density of 10 dwelling units per acre (25 dwelling
units per hectare) entails a mitigation ratio of 1.5 acres (0.6 hectare) of easement for every 1 acre (0.4 hectare) of
affected soil.
The project team calculates the required mitigation land area using Equation 2.
0.1 acre of
Conservation 2 acres 3.0 0.1 2.9
area
= prime soil
× 1.5 – community = acres
– acre
= acres
gardens
0.04 hectare
Conservation 0.8 hectare 1.2 0.04 1.16
area
= prime soil
× 1.5 – of community = hectares
– hectare
= hectares
gardens
The team must secure an easement on 2.9 acres (1.17 hectares) of land of comparable soils within 100 miles (160
kilometers) of the project.
U.S. SOIL SURVEYS

Project teams may determine site soil types by visiting the Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) website
(see Referenced Standards).
NRCS keeps detailed surveys and maps for every county in the U.S. and provides most of this information online.
The information can be downloaded to GIS mapping programs or viewed without GIS directly through the NRCS
website, at websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov/app/.
If NRCS soils data for the project site are unavailable online, contact the state or regional office to determine
whether the site’s soil type is considered prime, unique, or of state significance. It may be necessary to consult with
an agricultural scientist if the site’s soil type is unclear.
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Identifying prime farmland. A local equivalent for identifying prime farmland is acceptable. Refer to the U.S.
Code of Federal Regulations, Title 7, Volume 6, Parts 400 to 699, Section 657.5, to ensure that the local equivalent’s
definitions are similar. Use a soil survey with methodology equivalent to the NRCS soil survey that identifies land
with characteristics similar to prime farmland in the U.S.
Purchasing or donating easements. Outside the United States, the organizational and legal infrastructure to
purchase or donate an easement can vary significantly. Project teams should first determine whether land trusts
or other conservation organizations are available to identify land for conservation and facilitate its purchase or
donation. Organizations such as Conservation International (conservation.org) and the Food and Agriculture
Organization of the United Nations (fao.org) may be helpful in locating local conservation organizations and land
92
trusts. If no such organizations exist, the project team should enter into an independent, legally binding agreement
that the purchased or donated land will be protected from development in perpetuity.
Documentation Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5

SLL
Verification that project is not located within

LS X X X X X
agricultural preservation district
Map of surrounding land with calculations

LS CP CB X
depending on infill assessment method chosen
LS CP CB Transit service frequency counts X
Confirmation of location in development rights

LS CP CB X
receiving area
Description of how prime farmland criteria was

LS CP CB X
verified
Description of prime farmland in the project that

LS X
must be mitigated
Description of process for identifying and protecting

LS X
off-site land with comparable soils
Calculation for total land area that must be
mitigated, including residential and nonresidential
CP CB densities, migration ratio, land area of prime soils X
affected by development footprint, and land area of
community gardens
Confirmation that land with comparable soils has
CP X
been identified for permanent protection
Vicinity map of land with comparable soils and
CB copy of easements permanently protecting these X
mitigation areas from development
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Prerequisite Smart Location. Projects that pursue Option 3, Transit Corridor, of the related prerequisite
automatically comply with Option 2 of this credit.
NPD Credit Local Food Production. Permanently dedicated community gardens (Option 1 of the related credit)
may be used toward the mitigated agricultural land area required in Option 5 of this prerequisite.

None.
U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 7, Volume 6, Parts 400 to 699, Section 657.5: http://www.nrcs.usda.gov/
wps/portal/nrcs/site/soils/home/
93
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
buildable land the portion of the site where construction can occur, including land voluntarily set aside and not
SLL
constructed on. When used in density calculations, buildable land excludes public rights-of-way and land excluded
from development by codified law or LEED for Neighborhood Development prerequisites.

density a measure of the total building floor area or dwelling units on a parcel of land relative to the buildable land
of that parcel. Units for measuring density may differ according to credit requirements. Does not include structured
parking.
developed
other side of the segment of circulation network that matters. For conditions (a) and (b) above, any fraction of
the perimeter that borders a water body is excluded from the calculation.
land trust a private, nonprofit organization that, as all or part of its mission, actively works to conserve land
by undertaking or assisting in conservation easement or land acquisition, or by its stewardship of such land or
easements (Adapted from Land Trust Alliance)
prime farmland land that has the best combination of physical and chemical characteristics for producing food,
feed, forage, fiber, and oilseed crops and that is available for these uses, as determined by the U.S. Department
of Agriculture’s Natural Resources Conservation Service (a U.S.-based methodology that sets criteria for highly
productive soil). For a complete description of what qualifies as prime farmland, see U.S. Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 7, Volume 6, Parts 400 to 699, Section 657.5.
94
SLL
95
SLL
Floodplain Avoidance
FLOODPLAIN AVOIDANCE
Plan
Built Project
INTENT
To protect life and property, promote open space and habitat conservation,
and enhance water quality and natural hydrologic systems.
REQUIREMENT
Case 1. Sites without Flood Hazard Areas

Locate on a site that is entirely outside any flood hazard area shown on a legally adopted flood hazard map or
otherwise legally designated by the local jurisdiction or the state. For projects in places without legally adopted flood
hazard maps or legal designations, locate on a site that is entirely outside any floodplain subject to a 1% or greater
chance of flooding in any given year.
Case 2. Infill or Previously Developed Sites with Flood Hazard Areas

Locate the project on an infill site or a previously developed site and select one of the following two options.
OPTION 1. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS STANDARD

For any portion of the site within the flood hazard area, design buildings in accordance with American Society of Civil
Engineers Standard 24-05 (ASCE 24).
If the project includes construction of a critical facility that is intended to remain operational in the event of
a flood, or whose function is critical for postflood recovery, design the facility to be protected and operable at the
floodwater levels specified in ASCE 24, or at the water levels represented by a 0.2% annual chance (500-year) flood,
whichever is higher. For the purpose of this requirement, critical facilities include, but are not limited to, hospitals,
emergency operations centers, building or portions of buildings designated as emergency shelters, water and sewage
treatment facilities, and fire and police stations.
OR
OPTION 2. NATIONAL FLOOD INSURANCE PROGRAM

For any portion of the site within the flood hazard area, design buildings in accordance with National Flood
Insurance Program (NFIP) requirements. Project outside the U.S. may use a local equivalent to NFIP if the program
is equal to or more stringent than NFIP and is administered at the national level.
96
If the project involves a critical facility that is intended to remain operational in the event of a flood, or whose
function is critical for postflood recovery, design the facility to be protected and operable at the water levels
represented by a 0.2% annual chance (500-year) flood. For the purpose of this requirement, critical facilities include,
but are not limited to, hospitals, emergency operations centers, building or portions of buildings designated as
emergency shelters, water and sewage treatment facilities, and fire and police stations.
Case 3. All Other Sites with Flood Hazard Areas

Meet the requirements of one of the following two options.
SLL
OPTION 1. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS STANDARD

Previously developed portions of the site
On portions of the site that are previously developed and in the flood hazard area, design buildings in accordance
with American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 24-05 (ASCE 24).
Nonpreviously developed portions of the site

On portions of the site that are not previously developed and in the flood hazard area, do not develop on land that is
within either a regulatory floodway or a coastal high hazard area (Zone V), as shown on the flood hazard map.
On all other portions of the site that are not previously developed and in the flood hazard area, design buildings
in accordance with ASCE 24.
Critical facilities in the flood hazard area

function is critical for postflood recovery, design the facility to be protected and operable at the floodwater levels
specified in ASCE 24 or at the water levels represented by a 0.2% annual chance (500-year) flood, whichever is
higher. For the purpose of this requirement, critical facilities include, but are not limited to, hospitals, emergency
operations centers, building or portions of buildings designated as emergency shelters, water and sewage treatment
facilities, and fire and police stations.
OR
OPTION 2. NATIONAL FLOOD INSURANCE PROGRAM

Previously developed portions of the site
On portions of the site that are previously developed and in the flood hazard area, design buildings in accordance
with National Flood Insurance Program (NFIP) requirements. Project outside of the U.S. may use a local equivalent
to NFIP if the program is equal to or more stringent than NFIP and is administered at the national level.
Nonpreviously developed portions of the site

On portions of the site that are not previously developed and in the flood hazard area, do not develop on land that is
within either a regulatory floodway or a coastal high hazard area (Zone V), as shown on the flood hazard map.
On all other portions of the site that are not previously developed and in the flood hazard area, design buildings
in accordance with NFIP.
Critical facilities in the flood hazard area

function is critical for postflood recovery, design the facility to be protected and operable at the water levels
represented by a 0.2% annual chance (500-year) flood. For the purpose of this requirement, critical facilities include,
but are not limited to, hospitals, emergency operations centers, building or portions of buildings designated as
emergency shelters, water and sewage treatment facilities, and fire and police stations.
97
BEHIND THE INTENT

Floodplains, areas that periodically flood but are usually dry land, provide many benefits to both human and natural
systems. Although floodplains constitute only 2% of Earth’s land surface area, they provide 25% of all ecosystem
services, including supplying a rich feeding and breeding ground for many aquatic and terrestrial species.1
Floodplains allow rivers, streams, and other water bodies to follow natural hydrologic cycles, help remove pollutants
from floodwaters, and protect downstream ecosystems and property owners.
Avoiding development in floodplains keeps natural flood mitigation systems intact and reduces flood damage to
SLL
surrounding life and property. Floodplains also provide cost-effective and reliable contributions to human health
and safety, such as erosion control, open space provision, water treatment, groundwater recharge, water quality
protection, and recreational opportunities. Engineered versions of these services cost communities significantly
more money to build and maintain.2
Many communities consciously avoid building in floodplains. However, some communities are already in
floodplains because of historic settlement patterns or industries that require water access. Floodplains that are
partially or wholly surrounded by urban development have usually lost much of their original ecological function.
These compromised floodplains may continue to pose a threat to human safety and property, and projects can
redevelop infill or previously developed floodplains while taking precautions to prevent future flood damage or
hazards.
The prerequisite allows projects in previously developed floodplains to follow one of two standards. In the U.S.,
the National Flood Insurance Program (NFIP) is a federally administered program common in many communities
(projects outside the U.S. can use an equivalent program administered at the national level), and ASCE 24 is used
throughout the world for flood-mitigating building design. Adherence to NFIP or ASCE 24 flood-resistant strategies
may already be required by local building codes.
STEP 1. CONSULT FLOOD MAPS

Consult legally adopted flood hazard maps of the project site area. Most local governments and flood
management agencies maintain flood hazard maps, which in the U.S. may include flood hazard areas
designated by both the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) and the local jurisdiction. See
Further Explanation, Floodplain Delineation.
If the project is in an area where no floodplain maps are available, work with an engineer, hydrologist,
or other qualified professional to map the floodplain areas subject to prerequisite requirements. At a
minimum, flood hazard maps should delineate areas with a 1% or greater chance of flooding in any given
year (often referred to as a 100-year flood).
STEP 2. CREATE LOCAL FLOOD HAZARD BASE MAP

Based on the flood hazard research, prepare a map showing any flood hazard areas within or around the
project site. These areas constitute the flood hazard areas.
STEP 3. SELECT CASE

The project’s conditions determine whether Case 1, 2, or 3 applies; use the flow chart in Figure 1.
1 Federal Interagency Floodplain Management Task Force Fact Sheet (Washington, DC: FEMA, 2011).
2 Floodplain Restoration and Storm Water Management (Chargin River Watersheds Partners, Inc., 2009).
98
Choose
No
Case 1.
Choose
Consult floodplain NFIP
maps. Are any project path.
areas within a flood Choose
Yes
hazard area? Case 2.
SLL
Yes
Yes Does the project’s Choose

Is the project jurisdiction already NFIP or
require compliance
considered an infill ASCE 24.

site or a previously with NFIP?
No
developed site?
Choose No Is the
Case 3. project Yes
in the
U.S.?
Choose
ASCE 24
No
or an
equivalent
to NFIP.
Figure 1. Selecting case for floodplain avoidance
Case 1. Sites without Flood Hazard Areas

Use the flood hazard map created in the above steps to demonstrate that the project is completely
outside of any flood hazard areas, as defined by the prerequisite requirements.
Case 2. Infill or Previously Developed Sites with Flood Hazard Areas
STEP 1. DESIGN PROJECT TO AVOID FLOOD HAZARD AREAS

Locate as much development as possible—particularly critical facilities—out of the flood hazard areas.
Show the project boundary, project buildings, and any critical facilities on the flood hazard base map.
Undertake this step early in the design development process, when there is still flexibility to change the
project site design.
STEP 2. MEET OR EXCEED REFERENCED STANDARDS FOR BUILDINGS IN FLOOD HAZARD

AREAS
For any buildings in the flood hazard areas noted on the project map, design the project to the standards
of either the National Flood Insurance Program (NFIP) or the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE
24). Both standards include flood mitigation strategies, such as raising building heights and flood-
resistant design.
·· Project architects and local building officials should be consulted about the applicability of
these standards in the community to determine whether local compliance standards meet NFIP
requirements, as is the case in many flood-prone communities. Some communities may have
incorporated the ASCE 24 flood-resistant design strategies into building code.
·· See Further Explanation, National Flood Insurance Program and ASCE 24.
99
STEP 3. DESIGN CRITICAL FACILITIES TO MEET PREREQUISITE REQUIREMENTS

Design critical facilities, examples of which are listed in prerequisite requirements, to remain operational
in the case of a 0.2% annual chance flood (a 500-year flood).
Designing facilities that can operate during a flood can be a complex undertaking, and project teams
will need to work closely with consulting architects, civil engineers, local building officials, and perhaps
floodplain specialists.
SLL
Case 3. All Other Sites with Flood Hazard Areas
STEP 1. INDICATE PROJECT BUILDING LOCATIONS ON FLOOD HAZARD MAP
Show the project boundary, project buildings, and any critical facilities on the map. Delineate any
previously developed portions of the project; review the definition of previously developed. Distinguish
regulatory floodways, coastal high-hazard areas (Zone V), and other floodplain designations.
STEP 2. MEET OR EXCEED NFIP OR ASCE STANDARDS IN PREVIOUSLY DEVELOPED FLOOD

HAZARD AREAS
Design all new buildings in flood hazard areas according to either NFIP or ASCE 24. Both standards
include flooding mitigation strategies, such as raising building heights and flood-resistant design.
·· Project architects and local building officials should be consulted about the applicability of
these standards in the community to determine whether local compliance standards meet NFIP
requirements, as is the case in many flood-prone communities.
·· Some communities may have incorporated the flood-resistant design strategies in ASCE 24 into
building code.
·· See Further Explanation, National Flood Insurance Program and ASCE 24.
STEP 3. AVOID PREVIOUSLY UNDEVELOPED PARTS OF FLOOD HAZARD AREAS

Keep development out of regulatory floodways or coastal high-hazard areas.
In other types of flood hazard areas, meet NFIP or ASCE standards, as described in Step 2. If possible, do
not develop in these areas.
STEP 4. DESIGN CRITICAL FACILITIES TO MEET PREREQUISITE REQUIREMENTS

Design critical facilities to be operable per prerequisite requirements in the case of a 0.2% annual chance
flood (500-year flood).
Designing facilities that can operate during a flood can be a complex undertaking, and project teams
will need to work closely with consulting architects, civil engineers, local building officials, and perhaps
floodplain specialists.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
FLOODPLAIN DELINEATION
There are numerous types of floodplains. For this prerequisite, the flood hazard areas are any areas noted on a legally
adopted flood hazard map. Typically, such maps show areas with a 1% annual chance of flooding (also known as
a 100-year flood) and sometimes other flood hazard areas as designated by the Federal Emergency Management
Agency (FEMA, in the U.S. only) or the local government. For a complete list of FEMA floodplain designations, visit
msc.fema.gov and look for “Definitions of FEMA Flood Zone Designations.”
100
Table 1 illustrates how the prerequisite requirements relate to the FEMA designations.
TABLE 1. LEED and FEMA floodplain designations
Prerequisite language FEMA designation
All special flood hazard areas shown on NFIP flood insurance rate maps as subject to 1% or greater chance of
“any flood hazard area” flooding in any given year and labeled on maps as Zones A, AO, AH, A1-30, AE, A99, AR, AR/A1-30, AR/AE,
AR/AO, AR/AH, AR/A, VO, or V1-30, VE, or V
SLL
“0.2% annual chance flood Areas subject to moderate flood hazard between limits of 100-year and 500-year floods, labeled on FEMA
(500 year)” maps as Zone B or shown as “shaded X” zones
Floodway is channel of river or other watercourse and the adjacent land areas that must be reserved in order
to discharge the base flood without cumulatively increasing water surface elevation more than designated
“regulatory floodway”
height. Floodways are narrower than special flood hazard areas. FEMA delineates regulatory floodways along
many watercourses shown on many flood insurance rate maps.
Coastal high-hazard areas are those portions of special flood hazard areas along open coasts that are subject
to high-velocity wave action from storms or seismic sources. Designated by FEMA as Zone V, coastal high-
“coastal high hazard area”
hazard areas are subject to additional hazards associated with storm wave heights that are predicted to be 3
feet (0.9 meters) or greater during 100-year flood conditions.
NATIONAL FLOOD INSURANCE PROGRAM AND ASCE 24

The National Flood Insurance Program, administered by the U.S. federal government, provides insurance to
homeowners in flood hazard areas. For more information about NFIP, see the FEMA website.
The American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 24 is a referenced standard in the International Building Code;
it has been adopted in whole or in part in many places throughout the world. For more information about ASCE
24, visit the FEMA website and view the document entitled “Highlights of ASCE 24-05 Flood Resistant Design and
Construction.”
EXAMPLES
Figures 2 and 3 are examples of floodplain maps.
Figure 2. FEMA flood insurance rate map (coastal). Courtesy of FEMA.

FEMA Flood Insurance Rate Map (Coastal)
COASTAL FLOOD HAZARD ZONES
Zone A and Zone AE are subject to flooding

by the base or 100-year flood (1% annual
chance), and waves less than 3 feet (formerly
called Zones A1-A30).
Unshaded Zone X is the area of minimal flood
risk outside the 500-year floodplain, formerly
called Zone C.
Shaded Zone X is subject to flooding by the

500-year flood (0.2% annual chance), formerly
called Zone B.
Zone V and Zone VE are where waves are

expected to be 3 feet or more.
Base Flood Elevation (BFE) is the estimated

Shoreline water surface elevation (in feet above datum).
101
Figure 3. Flood insurance rate map (riverine). Courtesy of FEMA.

Flood Insurance Rate Map (Riverine)
1 Zone A (approximate) is the flood hazard

area without BFEs.
2 Cross Section location.
3 Shaded Zone X is the 0.2% annual chance
SLL
(500-year) floodplain (formerly Zone B).
4 Base Flood Elevation (BFE) is the water

surface elevation of the base flood rounded
to the nearest whole foot (consult FIS profiles
and tables for more accurate elevations).
5 Zone AE is the 1% annual chance (100-year)
floodplain with BFEs (formerly Zones A1-A30).
6 The Floodway is the cross-hatched area.
7 Unshaded Zone X is all other areas considered

low risk (formerly Zone C).
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
NFIP is administered by the U.S. federal government. Projects outside the U.S. can use an equivalent program if it
is administered at the national level. Project teams are encouraged to use ASCE 24, which is applicable for projects
outside the U.S. They may need to retain local civil engineers or hydrologists who are licensed or certified to
delineate floodplain boundaries.
Most local, regional, and/or state jurisdictions both inside and outside the U.S. maintain flood hazard maps.
Project teams outside the U.S. may refer to existing up-to-date flood maps for their area, or create maps themselves.
Documentation Case 1 Case 2 Case 3
Description of how flood hazard information was verified for the

LS CP CB X
project site
LS Description of flood hazard areas within the project boundary X X
Legally adopted flood hazard map or map of areas subject to 1%

CP CB or greater chance of flooding (including location of any critical X X
facilities)
Description of how critical facilities have been designed to meet

CP CB X X
standard requirements
CP CB Flood hazard map indicating development footprint X X

102
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Prerequisite Wetland and Water Body Conservation. The areas around wetlands and water bodies are often
flood hazard areas. Review the requirements of both prerequisites as they pertain to the area around the wetlands
and water bodies.
SLL Prerequisite Smart Location. A project that is infill or previously developed, as determined under the related
prerequisite, is eligible to pursue Case 2, Infill or Previously Developed Sites with Flood Hazards, in this prerequisite.
SLL
GIB Credit Rainwater Management. Floodplains can provide a rainwater management function when retained in a
natural state, as rewarded in the related credit.

The American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 24-05 has been added as a referenced standard.
National Flood Insurance Program: fema.gov/national-flood-insurance-program
American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 24: ascelibrary.org
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
developed
other side of the segment of circulation network that matters. For conditions (a) and (b) above, any fraction of the
perimeter that borders a water body is excluded from the calculation.
103
SMART LOCATION AND LINKAGE CREDIT
SLL
Preferred Locations
PREFERRED LOCATIONS
This credit applies to:
Plan
Built Project
1–10 points
INTENT
To encourage development within existing cities, suburbs, and towns

to reduce the environmental and public health consequences of
sprawl. To reduce development pressure beyond the limits of existing
development. To conserve the natural and financial resources required
for infrastructure.
REQUIREMENTS
Achieve any combination of requirements in the following three options, for a total of up to 10 points.
OPTION 1. LOCATION TYPE (1–5 POINTS)

Locate the project in one of the following locations:
·· a previously developed site that is not an adjacent site or infill site (1 point);
·· an adjacent site that is also a previously developed site (2 points);
·· an infill site that is not a previously developed site (3 points); or
·· an infill site that is also a previously developed site (5 points).
AND/OR
OPTION 2. CONNECTIVITY (1-5 POINTS)

Locate the project in an area that has existing connectivity, as listed in Table 1. Measure connectivity one of two ways:
·· within 1/2 mile (800 meters) of the project boundary; or
·· within the project and within 1/2 mile (800 meters) of the project boundary.
Intersections within the site cannot be counted if they were constructed or funded by the developer within the past
10 years.
104
TABLE 1. Points for connectivity
Intersections per square mile Intersections per square kilometer Points
200–249 78-96 1
250-299 97-115 2
300-349 116-134 3
SLL
350-399 135-153 4
≥ 400 ≥ 154 5
AND/OR
OPTION 3. DESIGNATED HIGH-PRIORITY LOCATIONS (3 POINTS)

Earn at least 2 points under NPD Credit Housing Types and Affordability, Option 2, Affordable Housing.
AND
Locate the project in one of the following high-priority redevelopment areas:
·· a site listed by the EPA National Priorities List;
·· a Federal Empowerment Zone site;
·· a Federal Enterprise Community site;
·· a Federal Renewal Community site;
·· a Department of the Treasury Community Development Financial Institutions Fund Qualified Low-Income
Community (a subset of the New Markets Tax Credit Program);
·· a site in a U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development’s Qualified Census Tract (QCT) or Difficult
Development Area (DDA); or
·· a local equivalent program administered at a national level for projects outside the U.S.
105
BEHIND THE INTENT

Through careful site selection, project teams can encourage connectivity and reduce development pressure on open
space, farmland, wildlife habitat, and water resources, thereby reducing the negative consequences of suburban
sprawl. Development locations that are already served by infrastructure, public transit, streets, and neighborhood
amenities such as parks and schools reduce the need to construct new facilities while encouraging reinvestment and
efficiency in existing ones. Well-connected neighborhoods can facilitate walking and bicycling, thereby increasing
physical activity, fitness, and public health outcomes while strengthening social connections. More intersections,
SLL
smaller blocks, and a greater variety of direct walking and cycling routes to nearby destinations reduce the need for
driving.1
This credit has three categories of preferred sites: locations on or near previous development, locations with a
PREFERRED LOCATIONS
dense street network to facilitate multimodal travel, and distressed locations that have been formally targeted for
investment.
Option 1, Location Type, rewards previous development on the project site and in surrounding parcels of land
because it conserves resources and prevents suburban sprawl.
Option 2, Connectivity is measured using a metric of existing intersections per square mile or square kilometer.
Because the credit is focused on site selection, rather than project design, intersections recently added by the project
team may not be included in credit calculations.
Option 3, Designated High-Priority Locations, rewards redevelopment and affordable housing in economically
distressed areas, as identified by various programs administered at the national level. Only national-level (federal
in the U.S.) redevelopment program designations are eligible because of the wide variance in the criteria for state,
regional, and local programs.
STEP 1. SELECT ONE OR MORE OPTIONS

Consider the following options when evaluating potential project sites. The three options offer a total of
13 points; projects can earn a maximum of 10.
·· Option 1 is for projects that will be located on an infill, adjacent, and/or previously developed site.
See Getting Started, Site Type.
·· Option 2 is appropriate if the project site contains 200 or more intersections per square mile
(320 or more intersections per square kilometer) in the surrounding area. See Getting Started,
Connectivity.
·· Option 3 is available if the project will earn at least 2 points for affordable housing (Option 2) under
NPD Credit Housing Types and Affordability and if all or a portion of the project site is within a
nationally designated redevelopment area. See NPD Credit Housing Types and Affordability.
Option 1. Location Type
STEP 1. IDENTIFY PREVIOUS DEVELOPMENT AND/OR CONNECTIVITY

Evaluate previous development and/or connectivity within the proposed project site, on adjacent parcels,
and/or in the vicinity of the project site per credit requirements. Indicate applicable areas on a base or
vicinity map. See Getting Started, Site Type.
1 R. Ewing and R. Cervero, Travel and the Built Environment: A Meta-Analysis, Journal of the American Planning Association 76(3) (2010), http://www.
tandfonline.com/doi/abs/10.1080/01944361003766766.
106
STEP 2. DETERMINE SITE TYPE

Determine whether one or more of the following conditions apply to the project site:
·· Previously developed site
·· Adjacent site
·· Infill site
Indicate applicable areas on a base or vicinity map.
SLL
Option 2. Connectivity
STEP 1. MAP BUFFER FOR CONNECTIVITY ASSESSMENT

On a vicinity map, draw a 1/2-mile (800-meter) buffer around the project boundary and identify all
applicable intersections of the circulation network.
·· Intersections inside the project boundary may be included at the discretion of the project team.
·· Intersections built or funded by the developer in the past 10 years must be excluded from calculations.
STEP 2. DETERMINE CREDIT THRESHOLD

·· Calculate intersection density by dividing the number of intersections by the total land area identified
in Step 2. See Getting Started, Connectivity. Determine points for intersection density from Table 1.
Option 3. High-Priority Location
STEP 1. IDENTIFY PRIORITY DEVELOPMENT AREA

Review the high-priority designations listed in the credit requirements and consult each program’s
website to review the areas it covers. These priority designations are administered at the national level
and often overlap with economically disadvantaged areas. For projects outside the U.S., see Further
Explanation, International Tips.
·· National Priority Sites are designated by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency as areas that
release or threaten to release hazardous substances, pollutants, or contaminants. These sites are
targets for the federal Superfund program, which cleans up uncontrolled hazardous waste.
·· Empowerment Zone, Enterprise Community, and Renewal Community sites are designated by the U.S.
Department of Housing and Urban Development. Projects that locate on these sites may be eligible for
tax incentives intended to encourage businesses to open or expand and hire local residents.
·· The Community Development Financial Institutions Fund is a federal grant program that seeks to
expand affordable credit, capital, and financial services for underserved populations through grants
and tax credits. It is a subset of the Treasury’s New Markets Tax Credit Program, which provides a tax
credit for investing in designated “community development entities.”
·· A Qualified Census Tract has a certain percentage of low-income households, as defined under Section
42 of the U.S. Internal Revenue Code. Difficult Development Areas are determined annually by the
Department of Housing and Urban Development. Owners of rental properties in Qualified Census
Tracts and Difficult Development Areas qualify for the low-income housing tax credit, as defined under
Section 42 of the Internal Revenue Code.
STEP 2. CONFIRM THAT SITE IS IN AREA WITH PRIORITY DESIGNATION

·· Work with the local economic development, planning, community development, housing, or
redevelopment agency or department to determine whether any priority designation applies to the
project site.
·· A project site qualifies even if only a portion is in the high-priority designated area.
·· Indicate the site boundaries and priority area on a site map and provide confirmation of the
designation.
STEP 3. CONFIRM AFFORDABLE HOUSING PROVISION

See NPD Credit Housing Types and Affordability, Option 2, to confirm that the project will earn at least 2
points for affordable housing.
107
FURTHER EXPLANATION
HIGH-PRIORITY REDEVELOPMENT AREA

Information on redevelopment programs varies by jurisdiction. In large urban areas, the planning or economic
development branches of the local government may track such programs. If not, visit each program’s website to
determine whether any part of the project site is included.
State, provincial, and local redevelopment program area designations are not eligible for Option 3 because their
SLL
program criteria vary so widely; the program must be nationally administered.
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
PREFERRED LOCATIONS
For Option 3, Designated High-Priority Locations, projects outside the U.S. should demonstrate that the site is in a
priority area designated by an equivalent, nationally administered program with similar goals and operation. Most
priority designations are intended to encourage investment in economically disadvantaged or low-income areas.
Examples of redevelopment objectives include the following:
·· Remediation and reuse of contaminated areas
·· Business formation, retention, and expansion areas
·· Crime reduction and social services expansion areas
·· Housing revitalization areas
Documentation Option 1 Option 2 Option 3
Vicinity map indicating previous development inside and within

LS CP CB X
1/2 mile (800 meters) of project boundary
Calculations demonstrating site type (adjacent, infill, previously

LS CP CB X
development)
Map of eligible intersections within 1/2 mile (800 meters) of

LS CP CB X
project boundary and calculation of intersection density
LS CP CB Map of priority designation area X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Prerequisite Smart Location. Projects located in infill or adjacent sites may use related documentation to
comply with this credit’s Option 1, Infill Sites. Note that the area in which connectivity is calculated differs between
the prerequisite and the credit.
SLL Prerequisite Agricultural Land Conservation. Projects located on an infill site also comply with Option 2,
Infill Sites, of the related prerequisite.
SLL Prerequisite Floodplain Avoidance. Projects located on an infill or previously developed site may pursue Case
2 of the related prerequisite and have greater allowances for development activities within flood hazard areas.
SLL Credit Brownfield Remediation. Projects that are in a designated high-priority location and pursuing
brownfield remediation may earn an additional point under Option 2, High-Priority Redevelopment Area, in the
related credit.
108
SLL Credit Housing and Jobs Proximity. Projects that are located on an infill site and have no significant
residential component may be qualified to earn Option 3, Infill Project with Nonresidential Component, under the
related credit.
NPD Prerequisite Connected and Open Community and NPD Credit Connected and Open Community. This
credit’s calculation area for connectivity differs from that in the related prerequisite and credit.
NPD Credit Housing Types and Affordability. Projects seeking credit for a designated high-priority location must
earn 2 affordable housing points under the related credit.
SLL
GIB Credit Rainwater Management. Projects located on a previously developed site may earn an additional point
under the related credit.

Circulation network is used in place of street network in the connectivity calculation.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, National Priority List: epa.gov/superfund/sites/npl
U.S. Housing and Urban Development, Federal Empowerment Zone, Federal Enterprise Community, and
Federal Renewal Community: hud.gov/offices/cpd/economicdevelopment/programs/rc/index.cfm
U.S. Department of the Treasury, Community Development Financial Institutions Fund New Markets Tax
Credit Program Qualified Low-Income Community: cdfifund.gov
U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, Qualified Census Tracts and Difficult Development
Areas: huduser.org
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
adjacent site a site having at least a continuous 25% of its boundary bordering parcels that are previously developed
sites. Only consider bordering parcels, not intervening rights-of-way. Any fraction of the boundary that borders a
water body is excluded from the calculation.
developed
109
SLL
PREFERRED LOCATIONS
110
111
SLL
Brownfield Remediation
BROWNFIELD REMEDIATION
Plan
Built Project
1–2 points
INTENT
To encourage the cleanup of contaminated lands and developing sites

that have been identified as contaminated.
REQUIREMENTS
OPTION 1. BROWNFIELD SITE (1 POINT)

At a project site identified as a brownfield or where soil or groundwater contamination has been identified, and the
local, state, or national authority (whichever has jurisdiction) requires its remediation, perform remediation to the
satisfaction of that authority.
OR
OPTION 2. HIGH-PRIORITY REDEVELOPMENT AREA (2 POINTS)

Achieve the requirements in Option 1.
AND
Locate the project in one of the following high-priority redevelopment areas:

·· EPA National Priorities List
·· Federal Empowerment Zone
·· Federal Enterprise Community
·· Federal Renewal Community
·· Department of the Treasury Community Development Financial Institutions Fund Qualified Low-Income
Community (a subset of the New Markets Tax Credit Program)
·· U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development’s Qualified Census Tract (QCT) or Difficult
Development Area (DDA)
·· Or a local equivalent program administered at the national level for projects outside the U.S.
112
BEHIND THE INTENT

Remediation of contaminated sites, or brownfields, removes hazardous materials from soil and groundwater,
thereby reducing the exposure of humans and wildlife to toxic pollution. Redeveloping these sites avoids conversion
of greenfields and environmentally sensitive areas.
Many brownfields are in desirable urban locations that have been identified by communities and governments
as high priorities for redevelopment. Putting such sites back into productive use can increase the local tax base,
revitalize a disadvantaged or economically depressed neighborhood, and bring social and economic benefits to the
SLL
community.
Brownfields often have a rich history and include cultural landscapes, historic buildings, or locally significant
architecture. Adaptive reuse of existing structures can contribute to earning other credits.
Option 1 promotes the remediation and redevelopment of contaminated sites. Option 2 rewards the remediation
and redevelopment of contaminated sites in high-priority areas.
Option 1. Brownfields
STEP 1. LOCATE PROJECT ON BROWNFIELD SITE

When identifying potential sites for the project, consider brownfields.
·· Identify brownfield sites in the project region. If a brownfield project site has already been chosen,
confirm the site’s status.
·· To identify brownfield locations, consult maps, government resources, and local brownfield
professionals, such as an environmental engineer.
·· The entire project site does not need to be a brownfield to earn this credit.
·· If the owner affiliated with the LEED ND project remediated project site contamination prior
to consideration of LEED, obtain confirmation from the authority having jurisdiction that the
contamination was present, that it required remediation (according to code or direction from the
authority), and that it was remediated to the authority’s satisfaction.
°° The current developer or the local government may complete the remediation, provided it is
undertaken for the purposes of the LEED ND project and was not completed by a previous owner.
°° A previously remediated site purchased from another owner does not meet the credit requirements.
STEP 2. PERFORM CONTAMINATION ASSESSMENT

Conduct a study to determine whether soil or groundwater contamination exists on site.
·· For a project team to pursue this credit, the authority having jurisdiction must confirm that there is
contamination on site. See Further Explanation, Authority Having Jurisdiction.
·· If the owner affiliated with the LEED ND project remediated the project site before seeking
LEED certification, verify that the authority having jurisdiction has confirmed the site’s previous
contamination and that no new contamination occurred after remediation was completed.
·· If the authority having jurisdiction has already identified contamination, obtain confirmation from the
authority.
·· The project team may hire an expert to determine whether contamination exists on site, and then
obtain confirmation from the authority having jurisdiction.
·· Remediation of contaminants in existing buildings (whether demolished or remaining), like asbestos
or debris found on site, is not sufficient to earn this credit. Contaminants must be found in soil or
groundwater to meet the credit requirements.
113
STEP 3. VERIFY REMEDIATION REQUIREMENTS

Consult with the authority having jurisdiction to see whether it requires specific remediation measures
and methods for the identified contaminants. If not, an ASTM Phase II or Phase III environmental site
assessment, or equivalent, may be used to establish a remediation plan.
·· If the project was previously remediated by the same owner, verify with the authority that the
remediation measures and methods used are still satisfactory, and that the site requires no further
remediation.
STEP 4. PERFORM REMEDIATION
SLL
If the site was not previously remediated, conduct the remediation to a level deemed satisfactory by the
authority having jurisdiction.
·· Obtain documentation from the authority that the contamination has been remediated to its
satisfaction.
·· Some remediation efforts can take many years. If the remediation will extend beyond the LEED
registration and certification periods, document the special circumstances and show that remediation
will be completed in a reasonable amount of time.
Option 2. High-Priority Redevelopment Areas
STEP 1. IDENTIFY CONTAMINATED SITES THAT ARE ALSO PRIORITY REDEVELOPMENT

AREAS
When identifying potential sites for the project, early in the project planning process, consider the high-
priority redevelopment areas listed in the credit requirements.
·· Most of the priority designations are intended to encourage investment in economically disadvantaged
areas. Confirm these designations by contacting the local economic development, planning,
community development, housing, or redevelopment agency.
·· Alternatively, consult a redevelopment program’s website to learn whether the project site is in a
designated area, as listed in the credit requirements.
STEP 2. LOCATE PROJECT ON CONTAMINATED SITE IN HIGH-PRIORITY REDEVELOPMENT

AREA
Confirm that the project site overlaps with one of the specified high-priority redevelopment areas.
·· Project sites in high-priority redevelopment areas that have no contamination to remediate are not
eligible for this credit.
·· Projects outside the United States should demonstrate that an equivalent program is administered at
the national level, has the same purposes, and operates in a similar way.
·· The entire project site does not need to be in the high-priority redevelopment area to earn this credit.
STEP 3. COMPLETE STEPS IN OPTION 1

Achieve the requirements outlined in Option 1.
·· See Referenced Standards.
·· See Further Explanation, High-Priority Redevelopment Areas.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION

Examples of authorities having jurisdiction include the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), a national
government environmental department, or the department of environmental protection for a given state or locality.
Examples of acceptable documentation from an authority having jurisdiction include the National Priorities List
from EPA’s Superfund website or a government resolution, memorandum, or official letter.
114
HIGH-PRIORITY REDEVELOPMENT AREAS

High-priority redevelopment areas are generally low-income or historically disadvantaged locations that face
economic challenges to redevelopment and qualify for national incentive programs. Internationally, this definition
should be applied when determining qualifying areas and programs. In the U.S., contaminated areas on the EPA
National Priorities List also qualify as high-priority redevelopment areas. The names of high-priority redevelopment
areas are listed in the credit requirements.
In the U.S., the project team can search for information about contaminated sites on federal websites, such
as the EPA National Priorities List and the EPA Brownfields and Land Revitalization program. Other sources are
SLL
representatives from the local government’s economic development, planning, community development, housing,
or redevelopment agency. A local community development corporation or local government agency that administers
federal community development block grant funds may also be familiar with recipients of national assistance.
Projects outside the U.S. should demonstrate that a local equivalent program administered at the national
level is in place for the same purposes and operates in a similar way. Typically, priority designations are intended
to encourage investment in economically disadvantaged or low-wealth areas, and the equivalent program should
support similar goals.
Documentation Option 1 Option 2
Evidence of soil and/or groundwater contamination identified on site, and description

LS X X
of test method used to identify contamination
Name of local, state, or national government agency with jurisdiction over soil and/or
LS X X
groundwater contamination, and description of remediation it requires
Summary of ASTM Phase II assessment, or equivalent, that documents extent of soil

CP X X
and/or groundwater contamination on site
CP Summary of remediation activities that will take place X X
Documentation from local, state, or national government agency that identifies

CB soil and/or groundwater contaminants on site, date of remediation and responsible X X
parties, and confirms satisfactory remediation of all contaminants
Priority area(s) where project is located, and vicinity map showing the LEED project
LS CP CB X
boundary in relation to the priority area(s)
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Prerequisite Smart Location. Many infill sites, sites with connectivity, and sites near transit that meet the
related prerequisite may also be in a high-priority redevelopment area, as defined under Option 2 of this credit. If the
project site is also contaminated, it may be eligible for 2 points under this credit.
SLL Credit Preferred Location. Meeting the requirement for designated high-priority redevelopment locations
(Option 2 of this credit) will help projects achieve points in the related credit.
GIB Credit Historic Resource Preservation and Adaptive Reuse. Many brownfield sites were contaminated by
legacy industries old enough that the buildings may have historic designation. Retain and reuse such buildings to
help projects achieve the related credit.
GIB Credit Rainwater Management. Remediation of brownfield sites reduces stormwater pollution and can
provide an opportunity to establish on-site retention measures.
115

·· Projects are no longer limited to officially designated brownfields. Any on-site soil or groundwater
contamination requiring remediation, as deemed by the authority having jurisdiction, can qualify a project for
this credit.
·· A Phase II environmental site assessment is no longer required, but it is allowed as one method for compliance.
·· Asbestos no longer qualifies as contamination for the purposes of this credit. Building materials left on site
from past construction demolition also do not qualify as contamination.
SLL
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, National Priorities List: epa.gov
U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, Federal Empowerment Zone, Federal Enterprise
Community, and Federal Renewal Community: hud.gov
U.S. Department of the Treasury, Community Development Financial Institutions Fund Qualified Low-
Income Community (a subset of the New Markets Tax Credit Program): cdfifund.gov
U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, Qualified Census Tract or Difficult Development Area:
huduser.org
ASTM International, Phase I and Phase II Environmental Site Assessment: astm.org
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
brownfield real property or the expansion, redevelopment, or reuse of which may be complicated by the presence or
possible presence of a hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminate
116
117
SLL
Access to Quality Transit
ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT

Plan
Built Project
1–7 points
INTENT
To encourage development in locations shown to have multimodal

transportation choices or otherwise reduced motor vehicle use, thereby
reducing greenhouse gas emissions, air pollution, and other environmental
and public health harms associated with motor vehicle use.
REQUIREMENTS
Locate the project on a site with existing or planned transit service (i.e., service with the funding commitments
as specified in SLL Prerequisite Smart Location) such that at least 50% of dwelling units and nonresidential use
entrances (inclusive of existing buildings) are within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) walking distance of at least one bus or
streetcar stop, or within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of at least one bus rapid transit stop, light or heavy
rail station, commuter rail station, or commuter ferry terminal. The transit service at the stop(s) in aggregate must
meet the minimums listed in Tables 1 and 2.
Projects must meet the requirements for both weekday and weekend trips and provide service every day.
TABLE 1. Minimum daily transit service for projects with

multiple transit types (bus, streetcar, rail, or ferry).
Weekday trips Weekend trips Points
60 40 1
76 50 2
100 65 3
132 85 4
180 130 5
246 150 6
320 200 7
118
TABLE 2. Minimum daily transit service for projects with

commuter rail or ferry service only
Weekday trips Weekend trips Points
24 6 1
40 8 2
SLL
60 12 3
Projects served by two or more transit routes such that no one route provides more than 60% of the prescribed levels
may earn an additional point, up to the maximum number of points.
If existing transit service is temporarily rerouted outside the required distances for less than two years, the
project may meet the requirements, provided the local transit agency has committed to restoring the routes with
service at or above the prior level.
119
BEHIND THE INTENT

Compact, walkable communities with transit service provide alternatives to driving, thereby benefiting the
environment as well as human health and well-being. Access to transit is particularly beneficial for young people, the
elderly, persons with disabilities, and people who cannot afford to own cars.
Nearly all forms of public transit create fewer greenhouse gas emissions per passenger than single-occupancy
vehicles. Developments in areas near existing transit also consume less land than low-density, auto-oriented
growth, reducing the need to convert farmland and open spaces for development. Investment in transit and transit-
SLL
oriented developments has been estimated to roughly double the economic benefit to a city compared with highway
investment1 and is a proven strategy for revitalizing downtowns and declining urban neighborhoods.
Transit-oriented development locations support transit services by increasing potential ridership while offering

project occupants access to public transportation. This credit’s maximum walking distance thresholds equate to an
approximately five- or 10-minute walk, which has been documented as comfortable for most people to reach bus or
rail transit, respectively. Projects within walking distance of multiple transit routes make it easy for occupants and
visitors to use public transportation.
STEP 1. LOCATE PROJECT AND GATHER RESOURCES

Site the project in a location that has robust transit options to serve project occupants. Work with transit
agencies and similar entities to gather information that documents the level of transit service available,
including timetables and maps.
STEP 2. MAP RELEVANT PROJECT DETAILS AND COUNT TRIPS AT EACH QUALIFYING
TRANSIT STOP
Follow the procedure outlined in Getting Started, Transit Service, to prepare all necessary information.
If existing transit service is temporarily rerouted and the affected transit stops are counted toward credit
achievement, provide confirmation from the local transit agency that service will be restored within a
two-year timeframe.
STEP 3. CALCULATE ELIGIBLE POINTS

Refer to Table 1 (for projects with multiple transit types) or Table 2 (for projects with commuter rail or
ferry only) to determine the number of points earned.
If weekday and weekend trips meet different point thresholds, use the lowest-performing time period
(weekday or weekend) to determine points.
Both weekday and weekend trips must achieve at least the 1-point threshold. If multiple transit routes are
available, projects may be eligible to earn an additional point, as outlined in the credit requirements. See
Further Explanation, Example.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
EXAMPLE
A 5-acre (2-hectare) project is located in a large city with multiple transit modes—rail, bus, bus rapid transit (BRT),
and ferry. Using the approach described in Getting Started, Transit Service, the team identifies multiple transit stops
1 P. Newman and J. Kenworthy, Sustainability and Cities: Overcoming Automobile Dependence (Washington, DC: Island Press, 1999).
120
that might be within the qualifying walking distances to the building entrances and takes an inventory to determine
which units are eligible.
Since the light rail and BRT have service in both directions, the project team counts service in one direction and
summarizes the service available at the eligible stops (Table 3).
TABLE 3. Example determination for distance to transit stops
Qualifying
DUs and
Walking distance Transit stop DUs and
Building nonresidential Transit type
SLL
(feet) identifier nonresidential

use entrances
entrances
Mixed-Use A (offices + retail) 21 1,450 BRT 2 BRT 21
Mixed-Use B (offices + retail) 31 1,234 BRT 1 BRT 31

Multiunit Residential A 76 900 Rail 1 Rail 76
Multiunit Residential B 50 798 Bus 1 Bus 50
Multiunit Residential C 8 2,110 Bus 3 Bus —
Detached Residential 1 1 542 Ferry 1 Ferry 1
Detached Residential 2 1 278 Bus 2 Bus 1
Detached Residential 3 1 2,508 BRT 2 BRT 1
Detached Residential 4 1 3,760 Rail 1 Rail —
Total 190 — — — 181
DU = dwelling units
BRT = bus rapid transit
As Table 3 shows, 181 of the 190 dwelling units and nonresidential entrances are within either a 1/4-mile (400-meter)
walk of a bus stop or a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walk of rail or ferry terminals. Multiunit Residential C does not qualify
because the nearest bus stop is more than a 1/4-mile walk, and Detached Residential 4 does not qualify because the
nearest rail stop is more than a 1/2-mile walk.
The team then counts the number of trips per transit stop (Table 4). Even though entrances in several buildings
are close to the same transit stop, the trips at that stop are counted only once. Bus 3 is not included because it is not
within a 1/4-mile walking distance of any dwelling units.
TABLE 4. Example determination for daily trips per transit stop
Transit stop Location Service (line) Weekday trips Saturday trips Sunday trips
Main St. and Wyoming Ave.

Bus 1 P4 48 24 12
(northbound)
Arch St. and Ridge Rd.
Bus 2 32, W22 76 36 24
(westbound)
Key Rd. and Handler St.
BRT 1 80 68 32 24
(northbound)
Key Rd. and Chelsea St.
BRT 2 80 68 32 24
(southbound)
Eastern Line 126 45 45
Rail 1 Town Center Station
Western Line 126 45 45
Ferry 1 Town Wharf Mainland 10 5 0
Total 512 214 174
The project team also discovers that the ferry doesn’t provide Sunday service, so its service is excluded from the trip
count. Although the weekday trips total exceeds the threshold for 7 points, the average weekend trip count is lower,
and therefore the project earns 6 points. However, the project receives 1 bonus point (for 7 points) because there are
multiple transit routes and no single route provides more than 60% of the total number of trips.
121
Documentation All projects
LS CP CB Map of nearby transit stops within walking distance of building entrances X
LS CP CB Confirmation of planned or rerouted transit service X
SLL
Calculations of transit service frequency and percentage of dwelling units and non-residential uses within
LS CP CB X
walking distance of transit

RELATED CREDIT TIPS
None.

·· The option for reduced vehicle distance traveled has been eliminated.
·· The approach is now the same for all projects, regardless of size.
None.
Double the highest transit service point threshold:
·· For projects with a combination of transit service types (bus, rail, etc.), achieve 640 weekday trips and 400
weekend trips.
·· For projects with commuter rail or ferry service only, achieve 120 weekday trips and 24 weekend trips.
DEFINITIONS
streetcar a transit service with small, individual rail cars. Spacing between stations is uniformly short and ranges
from every block to 1/4 mile (400 meters), and operating speeds are primarily 10–30 mph (15–50 kmh). Streetcar
routes typically extend 2–5 miles (3-8 kilometers).
walking distance the distance that a pedestrian must travel between origins and destinations without obstruction,
122
123
SLL
Bicycle Facilities
BICYCLE FACILITIES
Plan
Built Project
1–2 points
INTENT
To promote bicycling and transportation efficiency and reduce vehicle

distance traveled. To improve public health by encouraging utilitarian
and recreational physical activity.
REQUIREMENTS
Meet the following requirements in 90% of all new buildings. The buildings that do not have bicycle storage may not
exceed 10% of the total project building floor area.
NON-RESIDENTIAL (EXCLUDING RETAIL) BUILDINGS

Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% of peak visitors, but no fewer than four storage spaces per
building.
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of all regular building occupants, but no fewer than four storage
spaces per building in addition to the short-term bicycle storage spaces. Provide at least one on-site shower with
changing facility for the first 100 regular building occupants and one additional shower for every 150 regular building
occupants thereafter.
MULTI-UNIT RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS

Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% of all peak visitors, but no fewer than four storage spaces per
building.
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 30% of all regular building occupants, but no less than one storage
space per residential unit.
RETAIL BUILDINGS
Provide at least two short-term bicycle storage spaces for every 5,000 square feet (465 square meters), but no fewer
than two storage spaces per building.
124
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of regular building occupants, but no fewer than two storage
spaces per building in addition to the short-term bicycle storage.
Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for the first 100 regular building occupants and one
additional shower for every 150 regular building occupants thereafter.
MIXED-USE BUILDINGS
Meet the above requirements for the project’s non-residential, multi-unit residential, and retail spaces.
SLL
For all projects

Short-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any main entrance. Long-term
bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any functional entry. It must be easily

Shower and changing facility requirements may be met by providing the equivalent of free access to on-site
health club shower facilities, if the health club can be accessed without going outside.
Additionally, meet the requirements of at least one of the following two options.
OPTION 1. BIKABLE LOCATION (1 POINT)

Locate the project such that the project boundary is within 1/4 mile (400 meters) bicycling distance of an existing
bicycle network that connects to at least one of the following.
·· at least 10 diverse uses (see Appendix 1);
·· a school or employment center, if the project total floor area is 50% or more residential; or
·· a bus rapid transit stop, light or heavy rail station, commuter rail station, or ferry terminal.
All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling distance of the project boundary.
AND/OR
OPTION 2. BICYCLE NETWORK (1 POINT)

Design the project such that at least 50% of dwelling units and nonresidential use entrances are located on an
existing or planned bicycle network extending at least 3 continuous miles (4.8 contiguous kilometers). Within those
3 miles (4.8 kilometers), the network must connect to one of the following:
·· a school;
·· an employment center; or
·· at least 10 diverse uses (see Appendix 1).
125
BEHIND THE INTENT

Bicycling offers many individual and global benefits. Nearly 1 pound (450 grams) of carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions
is avoided for each mile (1600 meters) pedaled rather than driven.1 People who shift from car to bicycle use for
short trips gain such health benefits as a lower risk of cardiovascular disease and extend their lives by an estimated
three to 14 months.2 Planners and developers who champion bicycling infrastructure often win political and popular
support.3
To promote bicycle-friendly design, this credit rewards two things: the provision of long- and short-term bicycle
SLL
storage, and access to a “bicycle network” (paths, trails, designated bike lanes, and slow-speed roadways). Short-
term and long-term bicycle storage spaces are considered separately because visitors and regular occupants have
different needs. For residential occupants, long-term storage must be provided outside individual dwelling units,
BICYCLE FACILITIES
because having to carry a bicycle into one’s living space is inconvenient and discourages bicycle use.
Finally, being adjacent to a bicycle network means that building occupants can more easily bicycle to and from
the building. Option 1 rewards projects that locate near an existing bicycle network, and Option 2 rewards projects
that provide a robust interior bicycle network that also extends beyond the project boundary. The routes are
required to connect the project with destinations that will encourage pedaling to and from home, work, and errands,
as well as to other transportation modes such as transit.
STEP 1. COLLECT BUILDING OCCUPANCY INFORMATION

Identify new buildings within the project boundary in each category addressed by this credit
(nonresidential, multifamily residential, and retail). Work with individual building owners to gather the
following information. See Getting Started, Occupancy, for further information on which building users to
include in calculations.
·· For all space types:
°° Full-time occupants
°° Part-time occupants
°° Average part-time shift duration
·· For nonresidential spaces other than retail:
°° Peak visitors
·· For multiunit residential spaces:
°° Dwelling units
°° Peak visitors
·· For retail spaces:
°° Total building floor area
For mixed-use buildings, divide the building into the space types addressed by the credit and address
each type accordingly. Projects with a space type totaling less than 10% of a particular building’s floor
area may follow the requirements of the predominant use, at the discretion of the project team.
STEP 2. DETERMINE NUMBER OF BICYCLE STORAGE SPACES REQUIRED PER BUILDING

Calculate the number of required short-term and long-term bicycle storage spaces using the following
equations. At least 90% of the project, by number of buildings and total building floor area, must meet
the credit requirements. See Further Explanation, Examples.
1 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Light-Duty Automotive Technology, Carbon Dioxide Emissions, and Fuel Economy Trends: 1975 through 2012,
epa.gov/OMSWWW/fetrends.htm#summary (accessed June 10, 2013).
2 J.J. de Hartog, H. Boogaard, H. Nijland, and G. Hoek, Do the Health Benefits of Cycling Outweigh the Risks? Environmental Health Perspectives 118(8)
(2010).
3 D. Royal and D. Miller-Steiger, National Survey of Bicyclist and Pedestrian Attitudes and Behavior (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
2008), http://www.nhtsa.gov/nhtsa/whatsup/tea21/tea21programs/pages/PedBikeSafety.htm (accessed June 10, 2013).
126
EQUATION 1. Short-term bicycle storage, nonresidential and multifamily residential
Short-term bicycle storage = Peak visitors × 0.025
EQUATION 2. Short-term bicycle storage, retail
Building floor area (ft2)

Short-term bicycle storage = 2 ×
SLL
5,000
OR
Building floor area (m2)

Short-term bicycle storage = 2 ×
465
EQUATION 3. Long-term bicycle storage, nonresidential and retail
Long-term bicycle storage = Regular building occupants × 0.05
EQUATION 4. Long-term bicycle storage, multifamily residential
Long-term bicycle storage = Regular building occupants × 0.30
OR (# of dwelling units), whichever is greater
For nonresidential spaces, calculate short- and long-term bicycle storage using Equations 1 and 3.
At least four short-term storage spaces and four long-term storage spaces are required per building.
For multifamily residential spaces, calculate short- and long-term bicycle storage using Equations 1 and
4. At least four short-term storage spaces are required per building, and at least one long-term storage
space is required per dwelling unit.
For retail spaces, calculate short- and long-term bicycle storage spaces using Equations 2 and 3. At least
two short-term storage spaces and two long-term storage spaces are required per building.
The following conditions apply to all calculations for short- and long-term bicycle storage:
·· Results must be rounded up to the nearest whole number.
·· Storage spaces must be devoted to the project pursuing LEED certification and cannot be double-
counted. In addition, if any who are not occupants of the LEED project have access to the bicycle
storage, either sufficient storage spaces must be provided for everyone with access to them, or the
storage must be designated for the occupants of the LEED project only.
·· For mixed-use buildings, identify nonresidential, residential, and retail portions of the building and
meet the applicable bicycle storage requirements for each space type, based on prorated floor area
and occupancy.
STEP 3. DETERMINE NUMBER OF SHOWER AND CHANGING FACILITIES REQUIRED PER

BUILDING
Use Equation 5 to determine the required number of showers with changing facilities and incorporate
these facilities into the project design for the appropriate building types.
·· For residential buildings, no additional showers are required beyond those provided inside dwelling
units.
·· For projects with hotel guests, these occupants may be excluded from the shower calculations.
·· If space for shower and changing facilities is limited, free access to on-site shower facilities or health
club shower facilities within the LEED project boundary may be provided to all occupants in lieu of in-
house facilities. Health club or shower facilities must be accessible to occupants and available during
the associated building’s hours of operation.
·· For mixed-use buildings, identify nonresidential, residential, and retail portions of the building and
meet the applicable shower and changing facility requirements for each space type, based on prorated
square footage and occupancy.
127
EQUATION 5. Shower facilities
If regular building occupants ≤ 100, Shower facilites = 1
Regular building occupants – 100

If regular building occupants > 100, Shower facilites = 1 +
150
SLL
STEP 4. INSTALL BICYCLE STORAGE
Locate bicycle storage to meet credit requirements. Both short-term and long-term storage facilities are
more likely to be used if they are in a well-lit, safe, and accessible area (see Further Explanation, Selecting
BICYCLE FACILITIES
Bicycle Storage).
·· Locate short-term and long-term storage within 100 feet (30 meters) of main and functional entrances,
respectively. See Figure 1 and Getting Started, Walking and Bicycling Distances.
·· Indoor locations are recommended for long-term bicycle storage.
SHORT TERM
BICYCLE STORAGE
SECONDARY
ENTRANCE
70'-0"
(21.3m)
MAIN
ENTRANCE
LONG TERM
BICYCLE STORAGE
INSIDE BUILDING
SECONDARY MAIN
ENTRANCE ENTRANCE
LONG TERM
BICYCLE STORAGE
INSIDE BUILDING
(24 '-0"
)
.4m
80
SHORT TERM
BICYCLE STORAGE
Figure 1. Example bicycle storage locations
ONSTRUCTION
128
STEP 5. CONFIRM BICYCLE FACILITY COMPLIANCE

Confirm that the number of new buildings with compliant bicycle facilities is at least 90% of new
buildings, by building count, and that the corresponding building area accounts for at least 90% of total
project floor area. See Further Explanation, Examples.
STEP 6. IDENTIFY BICYCLE NETWORKS AND ELIGIBLE DESTINATIONS

Obtain or create a map of existing or planned bicycle networks in the area surrounding the project
location.
·· Survey and map schools, employment centers, transit stops, and other eligible uses (Appendix 1).
SLL
·· A bicycle network is defined to include, in any combination, demarcated bike lanes, bike trails, and
streets with a maximum speed limit of 25 mph (40 kph). Both bike lanes and bike trails must meet the
credit’s width requirements.

Locate the project close to an existing or planned bicycle network that meets one or both of the
following options.
·· Option 1 is best suited to projects whose boundary is near an existing bicycle network that meets the
credit requirements.
·· Option 2 is best suited to projects with an existing or planned bicycle network that serves a majority of
building entrances inside the project boundary.
Projects may earn 2 points by achieving both options.
Option 1. Bikable Location
STEP 1. SELECT SITE CLOSE TO BICYCLE NETWORK

Locate the project such that its boundary is within the specified bicycling distance of an existing bicycle
network that connects to one or more of the eligible destinations listed in the credit requirements.
·· Only existing bicycle networks and existing destinations are eligible for this option. Planned bicycle
networks or destinations and destinations located within the project boundary are not eligible.
·· The bicycle route connecting the project to the qualifying destinations may include any combination
of trails, bike lanes, and slow-speed streets, provided the route is contiguous and the total distance
traveled is less than 3 miles (5 kilometers).
·· Eligible destinations include stops for bus rapid transit, rail (heavy, light, commuter), and ferry, but not
local bus or streetcar stops.
129
1/2 mi (0.8 km) from project boundary
SLL
BICYCLE FACILITIES
2 mi (3.2 km) from Existing bike route: street with speed Existing bike route:
project boundary limit of 25mph (40km/h) or less non-motorized trail
Diverse use
LEED project
Existing bicycle network
Figure 2. Bicycle network, Option 1
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations SLL4

Option 2. Bicycle Network SLLc4_Bicycle Facilities_2
STEP 1. LOCATE PROJECT ALONG BICYCLE NETWORK

Locate the project within or along an existing or planned eligible bicycle network that is at least 3 miles
(5 kilometers) long and connects to one or more of the destinations listed in the credit requirements.
·· The bicycle route connecting the project to the qualifying destinations may include any combination
of bike trails, bike lanes, and slow-speed streets, provided the route is contiguous and total distance
traveled is less than 3 miles (5 kilometers).
·· Destinations may be inside or outside the project boundary and may be existing or planned.
·· Eligible destinations do not include transit stops.
130
Bicycle network: extends 4 miles LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY

and connects to a school
SLL
Buildings with entrances on the bicycle network: entrances correspond with accompanying table
Buildings not on the bicycle network
Bicycle network
Figure 3. Bicycle network option 2

UCTION
USGBC LEED
STEP Guide BUILDINGS
2. LOCATE IllustrationsALONG BICYCLE NETWORK SLL5
Revised:
Where possible, locate residential and nonresidential SLLc4_Bicycle
buildings Facilities_3
along existing or planned branches of the
bicycle network.
STEP 3. EXTEND BICYCLE NETWORK TO ENSURE ACCESS FROM BUILDING ENTRANCES

If necessary, extend the bicycle network infrastructure to ensure that at least half of new and existing
dwelling units and nonresidential building entrances are located on the bicycle network. For planned
bicycle trails, lanes, or destinations, confirm the schedule for funding and completion.
131
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
See Calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.
SELECTING BICYCLE STORAGE
SLL
Bicycle storage should reflect best practices in design and installation. For example, the rack should support the
bicycle in at least two places, to keep it from falling over, and allow the owner to lock both the bicycle frame and one
or both wheels to the rack with a standard U-lock. The rack must be securely anchored to an immovable level surface,
wall, or both, and made of material resistant to cutting, rusting, bending, and other deformation.
BICYCLE FACILITIES
EXAMPLE
A development project includes four new buildings:
·· Building A. 10,000-ft2 (929-m2) office building with 40 full-time employees and 10 peak visitors
·· Building B. 128,000-ft2 (11 892-m2) apartment building with 80 dwelling units, 200 residents, and 20 peak
visitors
·· Building C. 30,000-ft2 (2 787-m2) retail building with 32 full-time employees and 16 part-time employees
working 4 hours daily
·· Building D. 5,000-ft2 (465-m2) warehouse with 3 full-time employees.
Buildings A, B, and C represent 97% of the project’s total building floor area of 173,000 square feet (16 072 square
meters). The team chooses to exempt Building D because it does not represent more than 10% of the total building
floor area.
For Building A, requirements are calculated as follows, using guidance for nonresidential (other than retail)
buildings.
·· Short-term bicycle storage, using Equation 1:
10 peak visitors × 0.025 = 0.25 storage spaces (but minimum is 4 spaces)
·· Long-term bicycle storage, using Equation 3:

40 FTE × 0.05 = 2 storage spaces (but minimum is 4 spaces)
·· Shower facilities, using Equation 5:

40 regular building occupants ≤ 100 regular building occupants (therefore 1 shower)
For Building B, requirements are calculated as follows, using guidance for multiunit residential buildings.
20 peak visitors × 0.025 = 0.5 storage spaces (but minimum is 4 spaces)

200 regular building occupants × 0.3 = 60 storage spaces (but minimum is 1 per dwelling unit,
therefore 80 spaces)
·· No shower facilities required outside of dwelling units
For Building C, requirements are calculated as follows, using guidance for retail buildings.
·· Regular building occupants:
(32 full-time × 8 hours) + (16 part-time × 4 hours) = 40 regular building occupants

[(2 × 30,000 ft2 / 5,000 ft) = 12 storage spaces

40 regular building occupants × 0.05 = 2 storage spaces
132
·· Shower facilities using Equation 5:

40 regular building occupants ≤ 100 regular building occupants (therefore 1 shower)
The number of facilities must be calculated for each building individually. In total, the project will need to
provide 20 short-term bicycle storage spaces, 86 long-term bicycle storage spaces, and 2 shower facilities.
To achieve the credit, the project must also meet requirements of either Option 1, Bikable Location, or Option 2,
Bicycle Network.
SLL
Documentation All Projects
LS Description of bicycle storage and changing room facilities at project site X
LS CP CB Vicinity map showing bicycle network with route and distance to one of three required destinations X
Calculations for short-term bicycle storage, long-term bicycle storage, and shower facilities for each
CP CB X
building, and overall percentage by floor area
CP CB Map showing location of bicycle storage relative to buildings X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

NPD Credit Reduced Parking Footprint. Projects that promote bicycle use and other alternative modes of
transportation can reduce the parking capacity needed on the site, which can facilitate achievement of the related
credit.
NPD Credit Mixed-Use Neighborhoods. Any of the diverse uses counted toward the related credit may also count
toward bicycle network requirements in this credit, provided the uses are on the bicycle network.

·· Bicycle network requirements have been organized into two options. Option 1 rewards connection to an
existing bicycle network close to the project boundary. Option 2 rewards connection to a planned or existing
bicycle network that can be inside the project.
·· The maximum bicycling distance to eligible destinations along a bicycle network has been reduced to 3 miles
(4800 meters).
·· Bicycle storage requirements have been revised to include both short- and long-term storage.
None.
Not available.
133
DEFINITIONS
bicycle network a continuous network consisting of any combination of the following:
·· off-street bicycle paths or trails at least 8 feet (2.5 meters) wide for a two-way path and at least 5 feet (1.5
meters) wide for a one-way path
·· physically designated on-street bicycle lanes at least 5 feet (1.5 meters) wide
·· streets designed for a target speed of 25 mph (40 kmh)
SLL
bicycling distance the distance that a bicyclist must travel between origins and destinations, the entirety of which
must be on a bicycle network
BICYCLE FACILITIES
employment center a nonresidential area of at least 5 acres (2 hectares) with a job density of at least 50 employees
per net acre (at least 125 employees per hectare net)
functional entry a building opening designed to be used by pedestrians and open during regular business hours. It
does not include any door exclusively designated as an emergency exit, or a garage door not designed as a pedestrian
entrance.
long-term bicycle storage bicycle parking that is easily accessible to residents and employees and covered to
protect bicycles from rain and snow
short-term bicycle storage non-enclosed bicycle parking typically used by visitors for a period of two hours or less
134
135
SLL
Housing and
Jobs Proximity
HOUSING AND JOBS PROXIMITY

Plan
Built Project
3 points
INTENT
To encourage balanced communities with a proximate housing and

employment opportunities.
REQUIREMENTS
OPTION 1. PROJECT WITH AFFORDABLE RESIDENTIAL COMPONENT (3 POINTS)

Include a residential component equaling at least 30% of the project’s total building floor area (exclusive of parking
structures), and locate or design the project such that its geographic center (or boundary if the project exceeds 500
acres [200 hectares]) is within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of existing full-time equivalent jobs whose
number equals or exceeds the number of dwelling units in the project. Satisfy the requirements necessary to earn at
least 1 point under NPD Credit Housing Types and Affordability, Option 2, Affordable Housing.
OPTION 2. PROJECT WITH RESIDENTIAL COMPONENT (2 POINTS)

Include a residential component equaling at least 30% of the project’s total building floor area (exclusive of parking
structures) and locate or design the project such that its geographic center (or boundary if the project exceeds 500
acres [200 hectares]) is within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of existing full-time equivalent jobs whose
number equals or exceeds the number of dwelling units in the project.
OPTION 3. INFILL PROJECT WITH NONRESIDENTIAL COMPONENT (1 POINT)

Include a nonresidential component equaling at least 30% of the project’s total building floor area (exclusive of
parking structures) and locate on an infill site whose geographic center (or boundary if the project exceeds 500 acres
[200 hectares]) is within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of an existing rail transit, ferry, or tram stop and
within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of existing dwelling units whose number equals or exceeds 50% of
the number of new full-time equivalent jobs located in the project.
136
BEHIND THE INTENT

A balance of housing and jobs within a neighborhood increases opportunities for residents to work close to home
and use alternative transportation modes, such as walking, cycling, and transit. The associated benefits to the
environment, human health, and the economy include increased worker productivity and a reduction in commute
times, vehicle distance traveled, air pollutants, and greenhouse gas emissions.1 Neighborhoods that provide both
housing and employment also create favorable concentrations and mixes of customers who patronize community
businesses and use civic facilities, strengthening the social, economic, and physical fabric of the neighborhood.
SLL
This credit encourages projects to address the housing-jobs balance in three ways. Mostly residential projects
can achieve a balance by locating residential units near existing jobs. Projects with an additional affordable housing
component are also rewarded for their support of diverse communities and employment opportunities not limited
by commuting costs. Projects with a significant nonresidential component can achieve a balance by locating the new
jobs near housing and a new or existing rail, ferry, or tram connection. The emphasis of this credit is on provision of
new community features—whether housing or employment—to complement those already in existence.
STEP 1. DETERMINE CHARACTER OF PROJECT

During site planning and concept design, identify whether the project will include significant residential
or nonresidential components and consider the availability of nearby existing jobs or housing.
·· Assess total project building floor area for both residential and nonresidential uses.
·· Consider locating projects with a significant nonresidential component on infill sites that are within
walking distance of existing housing and transit.
·· Consider locating projects with a significant residential component on sites that are within walking
distance of a large number of existing jobs.
STEP 2. CALCULATE RESIDENTIAL AND NONRESIDENTIAL SHARES OF TOTAL FLOOR AREA

Obtain the total building floor area of existing buildings, separated by residential and nonresidential uses,
from the local planning or tax assessor’s office. Add these totals to the project’s new residential and
nonresidential buildings’ floor areas, from project plans, and use Equations 1 and 2 to determine the share
of each component.
EQUATION 1. Residential share of floor area
Residential Existing residential floor area + New residential floor area

share
=
Total building floor area
EQUATION 2. Nonresidential share of floor area
Nonresidential Existing nonresidential floor area + New nonresidential floor area

share
=
Total building floor area
1 Victoria Transportation Institute, TDM Encyclopedia: Commute Trip Reduction, Jobs-Housing Balance Programs, http://www.vtpi.org/tdm/tdm9.htm
(accessed April 27, 2012).
137

Determine which option to pursue based on the residential or nonresidential character of the project
development program and its location in the community.
·· Option 1 is suitable for projects located on any site type in a job-rich area. The project must have a
30% residential share of total building floor area and an affordable housing component that earns
1 point under NPD Credit Housing Types and Affordability, Option 2.
·· Option 2 is identical to Option 1 except that achievement of NPD Credit Housing Types and
Affordability, Option 2, is not required.
SLL
·· Option 3 is suitable for projects located on infill sites only in housing-rich areas. The project must
have a 30% nonresidential share of total building floor area and be located near existing rail, ferry,
or tram service.
·· Projects whose nonresidential component is more than 30% but less than 70% of the total building
floor area may be able to choose either Option 2 or Option 3, based on the jobs or housing profile of

the surrounding area and additional requirements in Option 3.
Options 1 and 2. Project with Residential Component
STEP 1. CONFIRM RESIDENTIAL FLOOR AREA PERCENTAGE AND NUMBER OF UNITS

·· Confirm that the project’s new and existing residential floor area equals or exceeds 30% of the total
project building floor area, per Equation 1.
·· Identify and count the number of new and existing dwelling units in the project.
STEP 2. DETERMINE PROJECT’S QUALIFYING EMPLOYMENT CATCHMENT AREA

Identify and map all employment locations that meet the following requirements:
·· For project sites less than 500 acres (200 hectares), include job locations within a 1/2-mile
(800-meter) walking distance of the project’s geographic center. See Getting Started, Determining a
Project’s Geographic Center.
·· For projects of 500 acres (200 hectares) or more, job locations may be drawn from the geographic
center, as above, or within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walk outside the project boundary.
·· For this credit, proximity is measured by shortest path analysis along walking routes, not by straight-
line radius. Walking distance can be measured only along routes equipped with pedestrian facilities.
See Getting Started, Shortest Path Analysis.
STEP 3. COUNT EXISTING JOBS IN EMPLOYMENT CATCHMENT AREA

·· Acquire employment data from local planning, finance, or economic development offices; the tax
assessor’s office; state employment records; surveys of business establishments; or private market
research firms.
·· Count jobs only up to the threshold. The project team does not need to count all jobs at all businesses
in the catchment area.
·· Construction jobs related to the LEED ND project or other developments in the vicinity do not qualify
for this credit.
STEP 4. COMPARE NUMBER OF JOBS AND NUMBER OF DWELLING UNITS

For the employment catchment area, determine whether the number of jobs equals or exceeds the
number of new dwelling units created within the project, using Equation 3.
EQUATION 3. Jobs-housing ratio
Existing jobs > Total dwelling units
For project teams pursuing Option 1, confirm that the project also earns at least 1 point for affordable
housing under NPD Credit Housing Types and Affordability, Option 2.
138
Option 3. Infill Project with Nonresidential Component
STEP 1. CONFIRM THAT PROJECT IS LOCATED ON INFILL SITE

Confirm that the site is an infill site. See Getting Started, Site Type, Infill Site.
STEP 2. CALCULATE NONRESIDENTIAL PERCENTAGE OF TOTAL PROJECT BUILDING

FLOOR AREA
Confirm that the nonresidential floor area equals or exceeds 30% of total project building floor area.
SLL
STEP 3. DETERMINE PROJECT’S QUALIFYING HOUSING AND TRANSIT CATCHMENT AREA

Identify and map all existing dwelling units, as well as the closest rail, ferry, or tram stops. These locations
must meet the following requirements:
·· For project sites smaller than 500 acres (200 hectares), include housing and transit locations within
a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of the project’s geographic center. See Getting Started,
Determining a Project’s Geographic Center.
·· For projects of 500 acres (200 hectares) or more, housing and transit locations may be drawn from
the geographic center as above, or within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walk outside the project boundary.
·· Only one rail, ferry, or tram stop within the required distance needs be counted for credit compliance.
For this credit, proximity is measured by shortest path analysis along walking routes, not by straight-
line radius. Walking distance can be measured only along routes equipped with pedestrian facilities. See
Getting Started, Walking and Bicycling Distances.
STEP 4. COUNT EXISTING DWELLING UNITS IN CATCHMENT AREA

Determine the number of dwelling units in the catchment area. Contact the local planning or tax
assessor’s office to obtain information on the number of dwelling units in multiunit buildings.
STEP 5. COUNT NEW, PERMANENT, YEAR-ROUND JOBS IN PROJECT

Predict the number of new FTE jobs that will be created as a result of the project.
·· If this information is unavailable, use the default occupancy count according to the total building floor
area of new commercial space in the project. See Getting Started, Occupancy.
·· Construction jobs related to the LEED ND project or other developments in the vicinity do not qualify
for this credit.
STEP 6. COMPARE NUMBER OF EXISTING UNITS AND NUMBER OF NEW JOBS

Confirm that the number of existing dwelling units is at least 50% of the number of new qualifying jobs
created, using Equation 4.
EQUATION 4. Housing-jobs ratio
Existing dwelling units > New jobs
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
See Step-by-Step Guidance.
EXAMPLE
A 5-acre (2-hectare) project is located close to a mixed-use town center to provide opportunities for residents to live
and work in close proximity. A portion (35%) of the project’s total building floor area is nonresidential, and 65% is
139
residential, with 50 dwelling units. Of the residential units, no affordable housing component is being included that
would achieve Option 2 of NPD Credit Housing Types and Affordability.
Through the local tax assessor office, the project team has determined that there are 81 FTE jobs and 23 dwelling
units in the calculated catchment area. Because the number of existing jobs exceeds the number of project dwelling
units within the project boundary, the team chooses to pursue 2 points under Option 2, which rewards bringing
housing to an established jobs-rich area. Because the residential and nonresidential floor area is more than 30% of
the total, the project could have followed Option 3 instead, but the team chose to focus on Option 2, under which this
project earns more points based on its performance.
SLL

LS CP CB Counts for existing jobs and relevant project square footages X X
Map and/or table of existing job and locations within walking distance
CP CB X X
of geographic center
Map and/or table of jobs created by project and existing dwelling units
LS CP CB X
within walking distance
CP CB Counts for FTE jobs created, dwelling units, and ratios for these units X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Prerequisite Smart Location, SLL Prerequisite Floodplain Avoidance, and SLL Credit Preferred
Locations. Locating a project on an infill site to achieve Option 3 of this credit can contribute to multiple related
credits in the SLL category.
SLL Credit Access to Quality Transit. A transit stop that counts for Option 3 in this credit may also count under the
related credit.
NPD Credit Mixed-Use Neighborhoods. Employment locations in this credit may also constitute diverse use
locations under the related credit.
NPD Credit Housing Types and Affordability. Only projects that achieve Option 2, Affordable Housing, of the
related credit are eligible for Option 1 of this credit.

None.
None.
140
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
SLL
developed
141
SLL
Steep Slope Protection
STEEP SLOPE PROTECTION

Plan
Built Project
1 point
INTENT
To minimize erosion, protect habitat, and reduce stress on natural water

systems by preserving steep slopes in a natural, vegetated state.
REQUIREMENTS
The following requirements apply to projects sites that have slopes greater than 15%.
Ensure that the share of the development footprint on existing slopes less than 15% is greater than the share of
the project site with existing slopes greater than 15%.
On any existing, previously developed slopes steeper than 15%, restore the slope area with native plants or
noninvasive adapted plants, according to Table 1. In addition, on any existing, undeveloped slopes steeper than 15%,
limit the development area according to Table 1.
TABLE 1. Required restoration and protection areas of slope
Previously developed slopes: Undeveloped slopes:

Slope
% of area to be restored % of area permitted for development
> 40% 100% No development permitted
26% to 40% 60% 40%
>15% to 25% 40% 60%
For undeveloped slopes steeper than 40%, do not disturb portions of the project site within 50 feet (15 meters)
horizontally of the top of the slope and 75 feet (23 meters) horizontally from the toe of the slope.
Develop covenants, conditions, and restrictions (CC&Rs), development agreements, or other binding
documents that will protect all steep slopes in perpetuity.
142
BEHIND THE INTENT

Protecting steep slopes from development disturbance is a long-standing and successful method of maintaining
ecosystems, watersheds, and topographic features in a natural state. Undisturbed, vegetated slopes with natural
topography and hydrology are less prone to erosion, landslides, and flooding. Existing, naturally occurring slopes can
give important clues to the natural hydrology of the site and help project teams create an erosion and sedimentation
control plan for construction or a permanent rainwater management plan for the developed site. Slopes may also act
as natural windbreaks and provide visual interest and character. Avoiding construction on steep slopes can reduce
SLL
development costs.
Previously developed slopes can be an erosion risk unless appropriate plantings or stability structures hold
them in place. This credit allows some development and requires native or noninvasive adapted plants for slope
restoration, which increases habitat survivability and long-term strength while preventing erosion.
STEP 1. INDICATE SITE SLOPES ON TOPOGRAPHIC MAP

Using a topographic map of the project vicinity, determine whether the project site has any existing
natural or constructed slopes beyond negligible slopes. Next, prepare a site-specific topographic map
that delineates the project boundary and shows the following slope classes:
·· 1–14%
·· 15–25%
·· 26–40%
·· more than 40%
Figure 1 can help project teams conceptualize the steepness of various slope degrees.
500% (78.7°)
ANGLE
90°
80°
200% (63.4°)
70°
°
60
°
50
100% (45°)
°
40
°
30
50% (26.6°)
40% (21.8°)
20°
30% (16.7°)
20% (11.3°)
10°
10% (5.7°)
0° 0% (0°)
GRADE
Figure 1. Slope degrees translated into angle degrees

143
STEP 2. DESIGN PROJECT TO OPTIMIZE USE OF FLAT AREA AND MINIMIZE STEEP SLOPE
DISTURBANCE
Project teams should design the initial site layout with the following design principles:
·· Avoid development on all undeveloped slopes greater than 40%.
·· Locate as much development as possible on land with less than a 15% slope.
·· Consider opportunities to restore sloped areas of the site by landscaping with native plants or
noninvasive adapted plants.
STEP 3. CONFIRM THAT PROJECT FOOTPRINT MAXIMIZES USE OF FLAT LAND
SLL
Use Equations 1 and 2 to determine whether the project is maximizing development on flat land.
EQUATION 1. Percentage of development footprint on flat land

% development Area of development footprint with slope < 15%
footprint on flat land
= × 100
Total development footprint
EQUATION 2. Percentage of project area with steep slopes
% project area with Area of project site on land with slope > 15%
steep slopes
= × 100
Total project area
The credit requirement is met if the result of Equation 1 is greater than the result of Equation 2.
STEP 4. PREPARE AND IMPLEMENT RESTORATION PLAN FOR PREVIOUSLY DEVELOPED

SLOPES
If the project site has previously developed steep slopes (greater than 15%), determine the restoration
area for each slope class, according to Table 1; see Figure 2.
·· The restoration must use native and/or noninvasive adapted plants. Include a list of plants selected for
restoration areas.
·· Ensure the plan addresses the specific requirements for slopes over 40%.
·· The development footprint of existing buildings is exempt from the requirements to restore previously
developed slopes, but the hardscape surrounding existing buildings must be included.
·· The restoration should include the removal of invasive plant species and ongoing management to
prevent recolonization by invasive species. A qualified biologist can help develop a planting plan
that uses native plants. Landscape architects, local or regional governmental agencies, educational
facilities, native plant societies, and plant nurseries that specialize in native species may also be able to
assist in identifying native species and plant sources.
·· When selecting plants for steep slopes, teams should take into account northern versus southern
exposure, ease of planting, soil stability through the plant establishment period, hydrology and soil
type, and the nature of the development or conserved areas upslope and downslope of the newly
vegetated areas.
144
SLL
A
Previously developed area

15-25% slope = 40% plant restoration
25-40% slope = 60% plant restoration
>40% slope = 100% plant restoration
Figure 2. Required restoration percentages for previously developed slopes
STEP 5. AVOID UNDEVELOPED SLOPES GREATER THAN 40%

Indicate on a topographic map any undeveloped slopes greater than 40% and surrounding areas that will
not be disturbed or developed. On the map, indicate all setback requirements from the top and bottom
of the 40% slope, as required by the credit. The top and toe (bottom) of the slope are defined as the
40% slope topographic line.
USGBC LEED
STEP 6.Guide Illustrations
MINIMIZE DEVELOPMENT FOOTPRINT DISTURBANCE OF UNDEVELOPED SLOPES SLL6
Complete avoidance of slopes greater than 15% is the easiestSLLc6: Steep
way to meet Slope Protection_1
the undeveloped slope
requirements.
·· Locate the development footprint to minimize the impact on slopes greater than 15%.
·· On a topographic map, indicate the project development area for each percentage class of
undeveloped steep slopes.
·· Last, calculate the percentage of development on each slope class and verify that the development
restrictions for each slope class have been met, according to Table 1.
145
SLL
15-25% slope = 60% can be developed
26-40% slope = 40% can be developed
>40% slope = cannot be developed
Figure 3. Percentage of disturbance allowed on undeveloped slopes
STEP 7. DEVELOP COVENANTS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS TO PROTECT STEEP

CTION SLOPES
Protect the remaining undeveloped slopes over 15% and all restored slopes from disturbance in
USGBC LEED Guide
perpetuity Illustrations
by developing CC&Rs, development agreements, or comparable binding agreements. SLL7
The teams should engage a legal professional to draft the agreement.
SLLc6: Steep Slope Protection_2
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.
EXAMPLES
A 100-acre (40-hectare) project whose site is not previously developed has a 25-acre (10-hectare) wood on a slope of
22%. The project team estimates that the development footprint will be about 60 acres (24 hectares).
146
Using Equation 2, the team determines that 25% of the project area qualifies as steep.
% project area with 25 acres

steep slope
= × 100 = 25%
100 acres
% project area with 10 hectares

= × 100 = 25%
SLL
steep slopes
40 hectares
The credit requirements state that the percentage of the development footprint on flat land needs to be greater
than the percentage of the project area with steep slopes. Working backward, the team therefore knows that the
percentage of the development footprint on flat land must be more than 25%.
Because flat land occupies 75 acres (30 hectares) and the development footprint is only 60 acres (24 hectares),
the team could put the entire development footprint on the flat land to comply with the requirements. If site
constraints force development onto part of the steep slope, the team must ensure that the percentage of the
development footprint on flat land exceeds 25%.
Additionally, at least 60% of the 25-acre (10-hectare) steep wood must remain undeveloped, per Table 1.
LS Narrative and/or map indicating the topography of the site relative to the development footprint X
CP CB Topographic map with slope classes, development footprint, and restored areas X
CP CB Narrative describing the protection and restoration of slopes according to class X
CB Calculations for percentage of slopes by class that have been developed or restored X
CB CC&Rs or other binding documents protecting slopes steeper than 40% X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Prerequisite Imperiled Species and Ecological Communities Conservation; SLL Credit Site Design for
Habitat or Wetland and Water Body Conservation; SLL Credit Restoration of Habitat or Wetland and Water
Bodies; and SLL Credit Long-Term Conservation Management of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies. If
the project has significant existing or restored habitat on steep slopes, measures that protect the slopes may also help
achieve the related habitat prerequisite and credits. This credit allows noninvasive adapted species of vegetation;
SLL Credit Restoration of Habitat or Wetland and Water Bodies.
GIB Credit Minimized Site Disturbance. Steep slope protection measures may also contribute to meeting the
related credit’s site and tree protection requirements.
GIB Credit Rainwater Management. Protected and restored slopes are potential infiltration areas for rainwater
management plans under the related credit.
147
GIB Prerequisite Construction Activity Pollution Prevention. Slopes that are protected or restored during
construction can contribute to the erosion and sedimentation control plan required for the related prerequisite.

·· A single set of requirements replaces three options.
·· The exempted slope requirements are removed.
SLL
·· Projects that locate on a site without existing slopes greater than 15% may not earn the credit.

None.
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
adapted plant vegetation that is not native to a particular region but that has characteristics that allow it to live in
the area. Adapted plants do not pose the same problems as invasive species.
covenants, conditions, and restrictions (CC&R) limitations that may be placed on a property and its use and are
made a condition of holding title or lease
148
149
SLL
Site Design for Habitat
or Wetland and Water
SITE DESIGN FOR HABITAT OR WETLAND AND WATER BODY CONSERVATION

Body Conservation
Plan
Built Project
1 point
INTENT
To conserve native plants, wildlife habitat, wetlands, and water bodies.
REQUIREMENTS
Case 1. Sites without Significant Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies

(1 point)
Locate the project on a site that does not have significant habitat, as defined in Case 2 of this credit, and is not within
100 feet (30 meters) of such habitat. Fulfill the requirements of Option 1 or 2(a) under SLL Prerequisite Wetland and
Water Body Conservation.
Case 2. Sites with Habitat or Wetlands or Water Bodies (1 point)

Meet the requirements of Option 1 or Option 2.
OPTION 1. SITES WITH SIGNIFICANT HABITAT

Work with both the state’s Natural Heritage Program and the state fish and wildlife agency (or local equivalent
agency for projects outside the U.S.) to delineate identified significant habitat on the site. Do not disturb significant
habitat or portions of the site within an appropriate buffer around the habitat. The geographic extent of the
habitat and buffer must be identified by a qualified biologist, a nongovernmental conservation organization, or the
appropriate state, regional, or local agency. Protect significant habitat and its identified buffers from development
by donating or selling the land, or a conservation easement on the land, to an accredited land trust, conservation
organization, or relevant government agency (a deed covenant is not sufficient to meet this requirement) for the
purpose of long-term conservation.
150
Identify and commit to ongoing management activities, along with parties responsible for management and
funding available, such that habitat is maintained in preproject condition or better for a minimum of three years after
the project is built out. The requirement for identifying ongoing management activities may also be met by earning
SLL Credit Long-Term Conservation Management of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies.
Significant habitat for this credit is as follows:
·· Endangered species acts. Habitat for species that are listed or are candidates for listing under state or
national endangered species acts, habitat for species of special concern in the state, and habitat for species
or ecological communities classified as GH, G1, G2, G3, S1, or S2 by NatureServe (local equivalent standards
SLL
for threatened and endangered species may be used in countries outside the U.S. that do not have access to
NatureServe data);
·· Locally or regionally significant habitat. Locally or regionally significant habitat of any size, or patches
of predominantly native vegetation at least 150 acres (60 hectares) (even if part of the area lies outside the
project boundary); and
·· Habitat flagged for conservation. Habitat flagged for conservation under a regional or state conservation or
green infrastructure plan.
OR
OPTION 2. SITES WITH WETLANDS AND WATER BODIES (1 POINT)

Design the project to conserve 100% of all water bodies, wetlands, land within 100 feet (30 meters) of water bodies,
and land within 50 feet (15 meters) of wetlands on the site. Using a qualified biologist, conduct an assessment,
or compile existing assessments, showing the extent to which those water bodies or wetlands provide (1) water
quality maintenance; (2) wildlife habitat; and (3) hydrologic function maintenance, including flood protection.
Assign appropriate buffers, measuring not less than 100 feet (30 meters) for water bodies and 50 feet (15 meters) for
wetlands, based on the functions provided, contiguous soils and slopes, and contiguous land uses. Do not disturb
wetlands, water bodies, or their buffers, and protect them from development by donating or selling the land, or a
conservation easement on the land, to an accredited land trust, conservation organization, or relevant government
agency (a deed covenant is not sufficient to meet this requirement) for the purpose of long-term conservation.
funding available, such that habitat is maintained in preproject condition or better for a minimum of three years
after the project is built out. The requirement for identifying ongoing management activities may also be met by
earning SLL Credit Long-Term Conservation Management of Wetlands and Water Bodies. The project does not
meet the requirements if it degrades habitat for species identified in endangered species acts or habitat flagged for
conservation in Option 1.
For All Projects

The following features are not considered wetlands, water bodies, or buffer land that must be protected:
a. previously developed land;
b. man-made water bodies (such as industrial mining pits, concrete-lined canals, or rainwater retention ponds)
that lack natural edges and floors or native ecological communities in the water and along the edge;
c. man-made linear wetlands that result from the interruption of natural drainages by existing rights-of-way; and
d. wetlands that were created incidentally by human activity and have been rated “poor” for all measured wetland
functions, as assessed by a qualified biologist using a method that is accepted by state or regional permitting
agencies (or a local equivalent method for projects outside the U.S.).
151
BEHIND THE INTENT

Conservation of habitat, wetlands, and water bodies supports the natural hydrologic cycle, recharges groundwater,
maintains microclimates, preserves biodiversity, and contributes to the management of rainwater runoff and flood
protection. Conserved areas can also provide public recreation and improve adjacent land value.
This credit focuses on preservation of natural habitat areas, including wetlands and water bodies, by conserving
areas with significant ecological value and by redirecting development toward sites without these features.
Establishing buffers is essential for conserving natural system functions, such as hydrology and biodiversity, because
SLL
damage to habitat, wetlands, or water bodies is directly related to the proximity of development.
The involvement of a land trust, conservation organization, or other third party is required to ensure that natural
systems and buffers will remain intact and be maintained appropriately over time.

STEP 1. IDENTIFY ECOLOGY SPECIALIST

An expert must conduct a thorough environmental survey of the site to identify significant habitat and
wetlands (or their absence).
·· Enlist the expertise of an ecology specialist—a biologist, ecologist, environmental land planner, or
similarly qualified individual.
·· Consider consulting with an organization such as the Academy of Board Certified Environmental
Professionals or an environmental conservation agency to find regional specialists, and consider their
experience in performing similar evaluations in the project’s ecological region.
·· For wetlands and water bodies, the assessment required for this credit is the same as that conducted
for SLL Prerequisite Wetland and Water Body Conservation.
·· For habitat, the assessment used for SLL Prerequisite Imperiled Species and Ecological Communities
Conservation must be expanded to include the additional habitat types covered by this credit.
·· See Further Explanation, Significant Habitat and Wetlands and Water Bodies.
·· International projects need to identify the best means to determine existing conditions. See Further
STEP 2. DETERMINE PROJECT CASE

Use the flow chart (Figure 1) to determine which case applies to the project. If the site has both
significant habitat and wetlands or water bodies, the team may choose either Option 1 or Case 2, Option
2. However, if meeting the requirements for Option 2 would negatively affect any habitat for species or
habitat for conservation identified for Option 1, the team must pursue Option 1.
·· If a team has both significant habitat and wetlands or waterbodies and elects to use Case 2, Option 2,
it may be necessary to document that there is no negative impact to habitat that would have triggered
the Option 1 requirement.
·· If a project team identifies significant habitat in SLL Prerequisite Imperiled Species and Ecological
Communities Conservation, the project is likely to trigger Case 2, Option 1, for this credit.
·· If a project team determines through SLL Prerequisite Wetland and Water Body Conservation that
protection of wetlands or water bodies is necessary, then Case 2, Option 2, may be appropriate.
152
No Case 1
Does the project include

areas of significant Option 1. Sites with
habitat, wetlands, or significant habitat
water bodies?
Yes Case 2
SLL
Option 2. Sites with

wetlands or water bodies
Figure 1. Determining case and option
Case 1. Sites without Significant Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies
STEP 1. CONFIRM THAT SITE HAS NO SIGNIFICANT HABITAT, WETLANDS, OR WATER

BODIES
If the project is eligible to pursue Case 1, gather documentation indicating that the site does not have
significant habitat, wetlands, or water bodies.
Case 2. Sites with Habitat or Wetlands or Water Bodies
OPTION 1. SITES WITH SIGNIFICANT HABITAT
STEP 1. DELINEATE SIGNIFICANT HABITAT AND BUFFERS ON SITE

Involve a qualified biologist, a conservation organization, or the appropriate government agency to
identify and document the significant habitat on the site.
·· If the project is eligible for Option 1 or Option 2, the team may want to differentiate the types of
habitat (i.e., for species, targeted for conservation, or locally significant) in project documentation for
future reference.
·· In some situations, the same third-party individual or organization can help delineate significant
habitat, determine conservation mechanisms, and conserve and manage the land.
STEP 2. DETERMINE LAND CONSERVATION MECHANISM

With the assistance of an accredited land trust, conservation organization, government agency, or private
consultant, create a management plan and funding strategy that will work for both parties.
·· Finding a conservation organization with the capacity to manage the restored land may take time, so
start the process early.
·· Project teams are required only to estimate the costs of implementing the management plan.
·· One possible funding strategy is establishing an endowment that generates adequate income
each year.
·· See Further Explanation, Government Agencies and Accredited Land Trusts.
STEP 3. CONSERVE LAND

Donate or sell the land containing the habitat and buffer, or establish a conservation easement on the
land, to an accredited land trust, conservation organization, or government agency for the purpose of
long-term conservation. Involving the third party early in the process allows the organization to assist
with selecting the areas to be restored and, ultimately, conserved.
153
OPTION 2. SITES WITH WETLANDS AND WATER BODIES
STEP 1. CONDUCT WATER BODY FUNCTION ASSESSMENT AND COMPILE REPORT

Working with a qualified ecology specialist, document the wetlands and water bodies on and adjacent
to the site. The assessment report might include the location, function, quality, habitat value, and social
benefits of the water body.
STEP 2. ASSIGN APPROPRIATE DEVELOPMENT BUFFERS

Collaborate with a land planner to protect and preserve all required wetlands and water bodies on site by
SLL
designating buffers.
·· The ecology specialist reviewing the functions of the wetlands or water bodies can enlarge the
required buffers if appropriate but cannot reduce them below the minimums indicated in this credit.
·· Local laws may require buffers larger than those listed in the credit.

STEP 3. DETERMINE WETLAND OR WATER BODY MANAGEMENT PLAN AND FUNDING
STRATEGY
With the assistance of an accredited land trust, conservation organization, government agency, or private
consultant, create a management plan and funding strategy that will work for both parties. If the project
also has certain types of significant habitat under Option 1, this plan cannot negatively impact that
habitat.
STEP 4. CONSERVE WETLANDS, WATER BODIES, AND BUFFERS

Donate or sell the area containing the water body, wetland, and buffers, or establish a conservation
easement on the area, to an accredited land trust, conservation organization, or government agency for
the purpose of long-term conservation.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
SIGNIFICANT HABITAT
Habitat is considered significant if any of the three criteria listed in Case 2, Option 1, of the credit apply.
U.S. project teams should consult the NatureServe classification to verify that habitat has not been flagged for
conservation under a regional or state conservation or green infrastructure plan. For projects outside the U.S., see
International Tips.
Local entities having jurisdiction (e.g., fish and wildlife agencies), as well as local land trusts, conservation
organizations, and naturalist societies, may have already identified the site or its species and ecological communities
as significant habitat.
A site visit, site survey, and analysis of aerial photographs and existing land-use maps may be necessary to assess
the presence of significant habitat.
WETLANDS AND WATER BODIES

Delineated wetlands, as defined by the methodology in the Army Corps of Engineers Wetlands Delineation Manual
(or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) are considered wetlands by LEED whether or not they are
jurisdictional wetlands under the Clean Water Act.
Intermittent wetlands on the site or within 100 feet (30 meters) of the project boundary should be assessed using
the Army Corps method (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) to determine whether they qualify for
delineation. A site visit, site survey and analysis of aerial photographs and existing land use maps may be necessary to
determine the presence of wetlands and water bodies.
Man-made water bodies and wetlands, such as industrial mining pits, concrete-lined canals, rainwater retention
ponds, and drainage ditches, are exempt from the credit requirements. Also exempt are man-made wetlands
154
assessed as “poor” because they cannot sufficiently support, protect, or improve water quality, provide fish or
wildlife habitat, store floodwater, or maintain surface water flow during dry periods. A qualified environmental
professional can assess wetland quality.
GOVERNMENT AGENCIES
Most localities have government agencies that oversee land conservation and associated easements. Examples
include the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation and the California Department of
Conservation. USGBC has compiled a list of such agencies by state, at usgbc.org/ShowFile.aspx?DocumentID=10501.
SLL
It is recommended that the project team work with a single individual at the government agency, someone
who will be the project’s liaison. Understand the agency’s decision making-process and be aware of potential
overlaps between agencies. For example, a project site that includes public roads may require coordination with the
department of transportation as well as the conservation department.
ACCREDITED LAND TRUSTS

Many land trusts or conservation organizations work to conserve land through acquisition, oversight of
conservation easements, and other measures. In many cases land trusts work directly with the government’s
conservation agency.
Conservation organizations can be relatively small and focused on a particular area or region, such as the San
Juan Preservation Trust in Washington State, or have a national presence, such as The Nature Conservancy or the
Trust for Public Lands. Other organizations have an international focus, such as Conservation International.
The Land Trust Alliance Accreditation Commission (an independent project of the Land Trust Alliance)
maintains a database of accredited land trust organizations. Government agencies can also be a good resource for
finding land trusts in the region. To get the most meaningful environmental outcomes, consider choosing a local
land trust, conservation organization, or organization that stewards comparable habitat.
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Identify the agency that is responsible for land conservation issues. U.S. agencies can be a good resource to identify
their counterparts in foreign countries. Groups that work internationally include NatureServe Natural Heritage
Program, Conservation International, and World Land Trust.
of Nature (IUCN) Red List. A qualified biologist must confirm that the species listed are relevant to the project site
and make appropriate recommendations. For information about sensitive wetlands and waterbodies, consult the
Ramsar Convention.
·· Is a practicing biologist or ecologist with a minimum of three years’ relevant experience (e.g., conducting
155
Case 2
Option 1 Option 2
Description of how project verified that site includes no locally or regionally

LS CP CB significant habitat, no patches of native vegetation 150 acres (60 hectares) or X
greater, no habitat flagged for conservation
Description of how project verified that site includes no locally or regionally
SLL
LS significant habitat, no patches of native vegetation 150 acres (60 hectares) or X
greater, no habitat flagged for conservation
Vicinity map showing additional sensitive habitat on site, beyond requirements of
CP CB SLL Prerequisite Imperiled Species and Habitat Conservation, and description of how X

project verified this criteria
Copy of conservation easement or legal document indicating transfer of land or
CP CB development rights to accredited land trust, conservation organization, or relevant X
government agency
For projects not meeting SLL Credit Long-Term Conservation Management of
Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies: confirmation that sensitive habitat and buffer
CP CB X X
land will be maintained in preproject condition or better for at least three years after
construction
Biological assessment, compiled by qualified biologist, of on-site water bodies’ or
LS CP CB wetlands’ contribution to water quality, wildlife habitat, and hydrologic functions, X
including flood protection
CP CB Qualifications of specialist conducting biological assessment X
Copy of conservation easement or legal document indicating transfer of land or

CP CB development rights to accredited land trust, conservation organization, or relevant X
government agency
For projects not meeting SLL Credit Long-Term Conservation Management of
Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies: confirmation that sensitive habitat and buffer
CB X
land will be maintained in preproject condition or better for at least three years after
construction
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Prerequisite Wetland and Water Body Conservation. Teams must meet Option 1 or 2(a) in the related
prerequisite to achieve Case 1 of this credit. The flexibility allowed by the related prerequisite for making minor
improvements to buffer areas are not allowed under this credit, however.
SLL Credit Restoration of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies. Although the same site areas cannot be
counted for both credits, the habitat, wetland, or water body management strategies may be shared.
SLL Credit Long-Term Conservation Management of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies. Teams may meet
the requirement for identifying ongoing management activities by earning the related credit.
GIB Credit Minimized Site Disturbance. Construction strategies used for the related credit can preserve habitat,
wetlands, and water bodies.

None.
NatureServe Natural Heritage Program–North America: natureserve.org
156
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
land trust a private, nonprofit organization that, as all or part of its mission, actively works to conserve land
SLL
by undertaking or assisting in conservation easement or land acquisition, or by its stewardship of such land or
easements (Adapted from Land Trust Alliance)
native vegetation an indigenous species that occurs in a particular region, ecosystem, and habitat without direct or
indirect human actions. Native species have evolved to the geography, hydrology, and climate of that region. They
also occur in communities; that is, they have evolved together with other species. As a result, these communities
provide habitat for a variety of other native wildlife species. Species native to North America are generally recognized
as those occurring on the continent prior to European settlement. Also known as native plants.
157
SLL
Restoration of Habitat
or Wetlands and
RESTORATION OF HABITAT OR WETLANDS AND WATER BODIES

Water Bodies
Plan
Built Project
1 point
INTENT
To restore native plants, wildlife habitat, wetlands, and water bodies

harmed by previous human activities.
REQUIREMENTS
Using only native plants, restore predevelopment native ecological communities, water bodies, or wetlands on the
project site in an area equal to or greater than 10% of the development footprint.
Work with a qualified biologist to ensure that restored areas will have the native species assemblages, hydrology,
and other habitat characteristics that likely occurred in predevelopment conditions. Protect such areas from
development by donating or selling the land, or a conservation easement on the land, to an accredited land
trust, conservation organization or relevant government agency (a deed covenant is not sufficient to meet this
requirement) for the purpose of long-term conservation.
funding available, so that restored areas are maintained for a minimum of three years after the project is built out or
the restoration is completed, whichever is later. The requirement for identifying ongoing management activities may
also be met by earning SLL Credit Long-Term Conservation Management of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies.
The project does not meet the requirements if it has negative effects on habitat for species identified in
endangered species acts or habitat flagged for conservation in Option 1 of SLL Credit Site Design for Habitat or
Wetland and Water Body Conservation.
158
BEHIND THE INTENT

Restoration of habitat, wetlands, and water bodies provides many ecological benefits, including connectivity to
nearby natural areas, water quality improvements, and contribution to the management of rainwater runoff and
flood protection. Restored areas are more likely to support native fauna and can also improve adjacent land value.
Long-term conservation plans help ensure that conditions will be maintained long enough for the restored area to
become established and reconnect with the local ecosystem.
The involvement of a government agency or an accredited land trust or conservation organization, such as the
SLL
Land Trust Alliance, ensures that the land will be managed appropriately for long-term conservation, providing
continuity of care to give sensitive species the best chance of survival.
STEP 1. FIND ECOLOGY SPECIALIST

The project team must engage an expert to identify significant habitat and wetlands (or their absence)
and restore these areas to predevelopment conditions.
·· Enlist the expertise of a qualified biologist—an ecology specialist, restoration ecologist, or similarly
qualified individual—who can help the team address the site-specific nature of restoration and
determine predevelopment conditions.
·· Consult with an organization such as the Academy of Board Certified Environmental Professionals,
Society of Wetland Scientists, or an environmental conservation agency to find regional specialists,
and consider their experience in performing similar evaluations in the same ecological region.
·· Consult with natural resource agencies, conservation organizations, native plant societies, or academic
institutions to identify areas of importance to the region.
·· “Predevelopment” refers to the natural conditions of the site, before any human alteration, such as
construction of roads or buildings, occurred.

Find a land trust or conservation organization with the capacity to manage restored land.
STEP 3. DETERMINE RESTORATION AREA

With the assistance of the specialist and third-party conservation organization, identify areas of the
project site to be restored, based on the project’s goals and where restoration would be most beneficial.
·· Work with the ecology specialist or restoration expert to ensure that areas identified for restoration
can be sufficiently restored to achieve predevelopment structure and function, including native
vegetation, hydrology, and habitat.
·· Confirm that restoration efforts will not negatively impact significant habitat or species identified
under SLL Credit Site Design for Habitat or Wetland and Water Body Conservation or SLL Prerequisite
Wetland and Water Body Conservation. A local wildlife agency or program can help the team with that
assessment. See Further Explanation, Government Agencies.
·· For hydrological restoration, consider daylighting streams that were channeled underground, removing
agricultural tiles that drained wetlands, and using other techniques to mimic natural hydrology.
·· A site plan showing potential restoration areas may help the team assess and select restoration
strategies.
STEP 4. CONFIRM THAT RESTORED AREA WILL BE AT LEAST 10% OF TOTAL

DEVELOPMENT FOOTPRINT
Using Equation 1, calculate the restoration area as a percentage of the total development footprint, and
confirm that this amount is 10% or more.
159
EQUATION 1. Restored area as percentage of development footprint
Total restoration area

≥ 10%
Total development footprint
STEP 5. DEVELOP RESTORATION STRATEGIES
SLL
Working with the specialist, develop suitable restoration strategies. The following strategies do not meet
the credit requirements:
·· Planting nonnative, adapted species in restoration areas.
·· Creating wetlands or streams where they did not previously exist.

·· Restoring areas that are disturbed during construction, unless it improves the ecological conditions
compared with their predevelopment state.
STEP 6. RESTORE LAND

Implement the restoration strategies.
·· Involve the specialist and third parties early in the process so that they can help identify the most
appropriate restoration and preservation strategies.
·· Consider the phasing and timing of the restoration activities in relation to construction or demolition
activity occurring on the project site. Areas restored before construction is complete may be
subsequently damaged and then not qualify for the credit.
·· Selecting qualified contractors with experience is recommended.
STEP 7. PRESERVE RESTORED AREAS

Donate or sell the land containing the habitat, wetlands, water bodies, and associated buffers, or
establish a conservation easement on the land, to the identified accredited land trust, conservation
organization, or relevant government agency for the purpose of long-term conservation.
·· Identify an appropriate trust or government agency to ensure the long term conservation is in the
hands of a third party. See Further Explanation, Government Agencies and Accredited Land Trusts.
STEP 8. MANAGE RESTORED AREAS

With the assistance of the land trust, conservation organization, relevant government agency, or private
consultant, create an appropriate management plan that identifies responsible parties and funding.
·· Project teams must maintain restored areas for a minimum of three years after the project is built out
or the restoration is completed, whichever is later.
·· Finding a conservation organization with the capacity to manage the restored land may take a long
time, so start the process early.
·· One possible funding strategy is establishing an endowment that generates adequate income each
year.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
GOVERNMENT AGENCIES
160

SLL
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Ramsar Convention.
161
Description of development footprint, qualified restoration areas, and restoration approach, developed in
LS X
consultation with qualified specialist
Confirmation that restored areas will be transferred to accredited land trust, conservation organization, or
CP X
relevant government agency for long-term conservation
SLL
Vicinity map showing project’s development footprint, project boundary, and areas identified for
CP CB X
restoration of native ecological communities, water bodies, or wetlands

CP CB Area calculations X
For projects not meeting SLL Credit Long-Term Conservation Management of Wetlands and Water Bodies:
CP CB confirmation that sensitive habitat and buffer land will be maintained in preproject condition or better for X
at least three years after construction
CB Documentation from qualified specialist that areas have been restored according to credit requirements X
Documentation of transfer of land or development rights to accredited land trust, conservation

CB X
organization, or relevant government agency for long-term conservation
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Prerequisite Wetland and Water Body Conservation. Restoration activities undertaken for this credit are
allowed within the buffer land defined by the related prerequisite.
SLL Credit Steep Slope Protection. Meeting Case 2 (Previously Developed Sites with Slopes over 15%) of the
related credit may help project teams achieve this credit.
SLL Credit Site Design for Habitat or Wetland and Water Body Conservation. Although the same site areas
(existing habitat and previously developed area) cannot be counted for both credits, the habitat, wetland, or water
body management strategies may be the same.
SLL Credit Long-Term Conservation Management of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies. Teams may meet
this credit’s requirement for identifying ongoing management activities by earning the related credit.
NPD Credit Access to Civic and Public Space. Typically, restored areas and recreation areas are not compatible.
Work with a biologist to determine whether people can have access to the restored area.
GIB Credit Rainwater Management. Restoring natural hydrologic processes may help project teams manage
runoff on site.

None.
162
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
SLL
163
SLL
Long-Term Conservation
Management of Habitat
LONG-TERM CONSERVATION MANAGEMENT OF HABITAT OR WETLANDS AND WATER BODIES

or Wetlands and
Water Bodies
Plan
Built Project
1 point
INTENT
To conserve native plants, wildlife habitat, wetlands, and water bodies.
REQUIREMENTS
Create and commit to implementing a long-term (at least 10-year) management plan for existing or recently
restored on-site native habitats, water bodies, or wetlands and their buffers, and create a guaranteed funding source
for management.
Involve a qualified biologist or a professional from a natural resources agency or natural resources consulting
firm in writing the management plan and conducting or evaluating the ongoing management.
The plan must include biological objectives consistent with habitat or water resource conservation, and it must
identify the following:
·· procedures and personnel for maintaining the conservation areas;
·· estimated implementation costs and funding sources; and
·· any threats that the project poses for habitat or water resources within conservation areas (e.g., introduction
of exotic species, intrusion of residents in habitat areas) and measures to substantially reduce those threats.
The project does not meet the requirements if it has negative effects on habitat for species identified in endangered
species acts or habitat flagged for conservation in Option 1 of SLL Credit Site Design for Habitat or Wetland and
Water Body Conservation.
164
BEHIND THE INTENT

Conservation areas protect ecosystems from development and other sources of harm. Long-term management
is necessary to prevent invasive species from overtaking desirable habitat and ensures the future health of an
ecosystem, beyond the relatively short timeframe of a typical development or construction project. Despite
its importance, long-term planning has not become standard practice, in part because establishing enduring
management structures is challenging. Adaptive management, in which monitoring provides feedback that informs
decision making, is a flexible approach.
SLL
This credit requires a long-term management plan for restored or existing habitat areas, including wetlands
and water bodies. Together with related credits and prerequisites, it provides a comprehensive approach to land
conservation.
STEP 1. FIND ECOLOGY SPECIALIST

The project team must engage an expert to identify significant habitat and wetlands (or their absence)
and protect these areas.
·· Enlist the expertise of a qualified biologist—an ecology specialist, restoration ecologist, or similarly
qualified individual—who can help the team address the site-specific nature of restoration and
determine predevelopment conditions.
·· Consult with an organization such as the Academy of Board Certified Environmental Professionals,
Society of Wetland Scientists, or an environmental conservation agency to find regional specialists,
and consider their experience in performing similar evaluations in the same ecological region.
·· Consult with natural resource agencies, conservation organizations, native plant societies, or academic
institutions to identify areas of importance to the region.

Find a land trust or conservation organization with the capacity to manage restored land. Finding a
conservation organization with the capacity to manage the restored land may take a long time, so it is
best to start early.
STEP 3. CONFIRM LOCATION AND TYPE OF ALL SIGNIFICANT HABITAT

Identify all preserved and restored native habitat, wetlands, and water bodies in the project. Consult with
the local wildlife agency or program to determine the presence of any significant habitat, as defined
under SLL Credit Site Design for Habitat or Wetland and Water Body Conservation.
·· There is no minimum area that must be managed for projects to earn this credit.
·· 100% of the significant habitat identified on the site must be conserved.
·· Significant habitat must not be damaged by actions under this credit.
·· It may be helpful to track significant habitat by type during the planning and documentation
processes.
·· International projects need to identify ways to determine existing conditions. See Further Explanation,
Government Agencies and International Tips.
·· For additional help identifying and restoring significant habitat, wetlands, and water bodies, see SLL
Credit Site Design for Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies Conservation and SLL Credit Restoration
of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies.
STEP 4. CREATE MANAGEMENT PLAN

With the assistance of the qualified specialist and an accredited land trust, conservation organization,
government agency, or private consultant, create a management plan. See Further Explanation,
Government Agencies and Accredited Land Trusts.
·· Craft the management plan to address recently restored or existing significant habitat with the
qualified conservation professional(s) so that it extends at least 10 years and meets the credit
requirements.
165
·· Project owners may want to include monitoring of the conservation results over time. See Further
Explanation, Management Best Practices.
STEP 5. ESTABLISH MANAGEMENT AGREEMENT

Establish an agreement that keeps the specialist involved in either conducting or evaluating the future
management of the habitat area.
STEP 6. ESTABLISH FUNDING

Procure a guaranteed funding source for the entire duration and scope of management activities.
SLL
·· Project teams are required only to estimate the costs of implementing the management plan. See
Further Explanation, Implementation Cost Considerations.
·· One possible funding strategy is establishing an endowment that generates adequate income each
year.

FURTHER EXPLANATION
GOVERNMENT AGENCIES

IMPLEMENTATION COST CONSIDERATIONS

Implementation costs include labor and materials to execute the long-term conservation management plan.
Volunteer labor is acceptable, provided back-up funds for continued maintenance are available in case volunteers’
commitment wanes.
Example line items in an annual maintenance budget can be found in Budgeting for Stewardship Funding Goals,
Chapter 2, Determining Stewardship Costs for Land Trust Properties, Table 2-2 (Land Trust Alliance, 2007).
MANAGEMENT BEST PRACTICES

One recommended practice is to compare the plan’s objectives with the biological monitoring results and revise
the objectives accordingly. Another is to schedule frequent site inspections during the first two years and promptly
address any issues that arise. Organizations such as the Society for Ecological Restoration International can provide
more guidance on best management practices.
166
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Ramsar Convention.
SLL

Description of how long-term management plan will be created for conserving existing or restored on-site
LS X
native habitat, water bodies, wetlands, and associated buffer land
Copy of long-term management plan for conserving existing or restored on-site native habitat, water
CP CB X
bodies, wetlands, and associated buffer land
Qualifications of professional engaged to write management plan and conduct or evaluate ongoing
CP CB X
management
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Credit Steep Slope Protection. The covenants, conditions, and restrictions (CC&R) developed for the related
credit can be included in the long-term conservation management plan.
SLL Credit Site Design for Habitat or Wetland and Water Body Conservation. The related credit calls for
identifying and avoiding significant habitat, wetlands, and water bodies. The management plan used to satisfy this
credit’s requirement for long-term conservation can substitute for the related credit’s three-year management plan.
SLL Credit Restoration of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies. The management plan used to satisfy this
credit’s requirement for long-term conservation can substitute for the related credit’s three-year management plan.
GIB Credit Minimized Site Disturbance. Construction strategies used for the related credit should be considered
in the long-term management plan.
167

None.
None.
SLL

Not available.
DEFINITIONS
169
NPD
Neighborhood Pattern
NEIGHBORHOOD PATTERN AND DESIGN

and Design (NPD)
OVERVIEW
Neighborhood Pattern and Design emphasizes the creation of compact, walkable, mixed-use neighborhoods with
good connections to nearby communities. These vibrant neighborhoods provide many important benefits to
residents, employees, and visitors and to the environment.
In particular, because compact neighborhoods use land and infrastructure efficiently, they avoid fragmentation
of wildlife habitat and farmland loss, conserve economic resources, and slow the spread of low-density development
across a region’s landscape. Residents enjoy convenient access to shops, services, and public spaces within walking
and bicycling distance, and when people choose to drive, they take shorter automobile trips, saving time and
avoiding emissions. Compact development also facilitates access to public transportation because transit becomes
more economically viable when supported by higher concentrations of population.
In addition, the small block sizes associated with compact neighborhoods encourage walking and bicycling
because of increased connectivity, shorter travel distances, slower automobile traffic, and a more inviting pedestrian
environment. The slower traffic speeds typically found in dense developments also can reduce injury rates. The
environmental and public health benefits that accompany increased transportation choices and reduced rates of
driving are further discussed in the introduction to Smart Location and Linkage.
Features such as sidewalks and trails, street trees, inviting building façades, small setbacks, minimal parking lot
area, and measures to slow automobiles also increase pedestrian activity. Public spaces, such as parks, plazas, and
playing fields, can encourage social interaction and active recreation while helping control rainwater runoff and
reducing urban heat island effects. Community gardens also promote social interaction and physical activity while
increasing access to fresh, locally grown produce.
Communities with diverse housing types that accommodate a range of incomes, ages, and physical abilities
permit residents to live closer to their workplaces, help the community retain residents, and allow families to remain
in the neighborhood as their circumstances change over time.
A community’s involvement in project design and planning can help the project complement adjacent
neighborhoods, meet the needs of residents and workers, and nurture a cooperative relationship with the project’s
neighbors.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT NPD
170
171
NEIGHBORHOOD PATTERN AND DESIGN PREREQUISITE
Walkable Streets
Plan
NPD
Built Project
WALKABLE STREETS
INTENT
To promote transportation efficiency and reduce vehicle distance

traveled. To improve public health by providing safe, appealing, and
comfortable street environments that encourage daily physical activity
and avoid pedestrian injuries.
REQUIREMENTS
Design and build the project to achieve all of the following:
a. 90% of new buildings have a functional entry onto the circulation network or other public space, such as a
park or plaza, but not a parking lot. Whether opening to the circulation network or other public space, the
functional entry must be connected to a sidewalk or equivalent provision for walking. If the public space is a
square, park, or plaza, it must be at least 50 feet (15 meters) deep, measured at a point perpendicular to each
entry.
b. At least 15% of the block length of the existing and new circulation networks within and bordering the project
has a minimum building-height-to-street-centerline ratio of 1:1.5 (i.e., a minimum of 1 foot [300 millimeters]
of building height for every 1.5 feet [450 millimeters] of width from street centerline to building façade). Alleys
may be omitted from the calculations.
°° Projects that border a part of the circulation network must meet only their proportional share of the height-
to-width ratio (i.e., only on the project side of the circulation network).
°° Building height is measured to eaves or, for a flat-roof structure, to the rooftop. For buildings with multiple
heights or widths, use average heights or widths weighted by each portion’s share of the total height or
width.
c. Continuous sidewalks or equivalent all-weather routes for walking are provided along both sides of 90% of
the circulation network block length within the project, including the project side of circulation network
bordering the project. Bicycle- and pedestrian-only paths meet this requirement. New sidewalks must be at
least 8 feet (2.5 meters) wide on retail or mixed-use blocks and at least 4 feet (1.2 meters) wide on all other
blocks.
172
d. No more than 20% of the block length of the circulation network within the project is faced directly by garage
and service bay openings. Alleys may be omitted from the calculations.
Portions of projects containing historic buildings or contributing buildings in a designated historic district subject
to review by a local historic preservation entity are exempt from (b), (c), and (d) if approval for compliance is not
granted.
Portions of projects containing historic buildings or contributing buildings in historic districts listed in or
eligible for listing in a state provincial, or regional register, or the National Register of Historic Places that are subject
to review by a state historic preservation office or the National Park Service (or local equivalent for projects outside
the U.S.) are exempt from (b), (c), and (d) if approval for compliance is not granted.
NPD
173
BEHIND THE INTENT

Residents of highly walkable neighborhoods drive nearly 40% fewer miles (kilometers) than their counterparts in
the least walkable neighborhoods; they thereby reduce traffic-related emissions by as much as 2,000 grams of carbon
dioxide per person per day1 while increasing their physical fitness, social interaction, and neighborhood safety.
LEED ND has both a prerequisite and a credit for walkable streets. The prerequisite outlines basic design
considerations for walkable streets and is complemented by the additional best practice standards in the
corresponding credit.
Strategies to improve a neighborhood’s walkability include the following:

·· Public-facing building entries. Buildings with entries that face sidewalks or public space activate and engage
the pedestrian realm, whereas buildings entered through parking lots, driveways, or private gated areas greatly
discourage walking and isolate passing pedestrians.
·· Building-height-to-centerline ratio. Buildings should be tall enough and streets narrow enough to provide
NPD
a sense of “enclosure,” pedestrian comfort, and interest to passers-by. This prerequisite requirement applies
to only 15% of the length of blocks in the project, allowing projects with various building heights, building
setbacks, and street widths to still qualify.
·· Continuous sidewalks. Sidewalks along project streets encourage pedestrians. This requirement applies
WALKABLE STREETS
to 90% of the circulation network (streets and paths), so projects can still earn the prerequisite if sidewalks
are infeasible in certain locations. A minimum sidewalk width ensures that sidewalks can comfortably
accommodate multiple pedestrians.
·· Limited garage openings. Sidewalks lined by garage doors and service entrances are a pedestrian safety
hazard and are very uninviting to pedestrians, so their number should be limited.
STEP 1. DESIGN PROJECT TO INCLUDE REQUIRED WALKABLE FEATURES

Review the prerequisite to identify how the requirements will affect critical design elements of the
project. For each component, consider the effects on walkability when preparing design alternatives.
·· It is best to do this as early in the design process as possible because fundamental decisions like street
layout and building orientation will affect compliance.
·· Check whether the jurisdiction has street design standards that may conflict with prerequisite
compliance.
STEP 2. MEASURE BLOCK LENGTH

Measure the length of every block or portion of a block within and bordering the project, and sum the
total project block length (see Definitions for block length and Getting Started, Circulation Network
and Block Frontages, for an example diagram). This will be the denominator for the calculations in
prerequisite components (b), (c), and (d), below.
STEP 3. DETERMINE WHETHER PROJECT QUALIFIES FOR HISTORIC BUILDING OR DISTRICT

EXEMPTIONS
The project must be in a historic district or contain historic buildings, as defined by the prerequisite
requirements, to be eligible for the exemption for historical buildings and districts.
·· Local, state, or national regulations to preserve historical authenticity and character may require
historic buildings to obtain approval from agencies or review bodies before construction, remodeling,
or development. Most of these entities keep lists of buildings or districts (neighborhoods with a high
concentration of historic buildings or features) they consider historic.
1 D. Goldberg, L. Frank, B. McCann, J. Chapman, and S. Kavage, New Data for a New Era: A Summary of the SMARTRAQ Findings (Georgia Department
of Transportation, 2007).
174
·· Non-U.S. projects should identify a similar historic preservation review body with similar processes and
procedures if the team seeks any exemptions for historic buildings.
STEP 4. DETERMINE COMPLIANCE FOR HISTORIC BUILDINGS OR DISTRICTS, IF

APPLICABLE
If the project contains existing historic buildings or districts, determine whether those buildings or
districts comply with the requirements for components (b), (c), or (d). If historic buildings or districts
comply, the exemption is not required.
STEP 5. REQUEST APPROVAL FOR COMPLIANCE, IF APPLICABLE

If historic buildings or districts do not comply, request any necessary approvals for construction or
alterations from the relevant historic preservation review body.
·· If approval is received, the historic building or district must comply with the prerequisite.
·· If the relevant historic preservation review body will not permit a historic building or district to meet
the requirements for (b), (c), or (d), the historic building or district is exempt from those requirements.
NPD
Requirement (a). Public-facing building entries

STEP 1. DETERMINE TOTAL NUMBER OF NEW BUILDINGS AND NUMBER WITH PUBLIC-
FACING ENTRIES.
First, sum the total number of new buildings in the project.
Then, count the number of buildings that have a functional entry facing the circulation network or other
public space and are connected to a sidewalk or walkway.
If any building entry faces a public space, confirm that the space meets the prerequisite’s depth
requirements at a point perpendicular to the entry (Figure 1). The depth requirements ensure that
the building entry fronts meaningful public space, not just empty “dead” space, such as a grassy strip
separating the sidewalk from a parking lot.
STEP 2. CALCULATE PERCENTAGE OF COMPLIANT BUILDINGS

Use Equation 1 to calculate the percentage of buildings that comply with the requirement, and confirm
that the percentage meets the threshold.
EQUATION 1. Percentage of buildings with public-facing entries
Buildings with public-facing entries

% buildings with public-facing entries = × 100
Total buildings
175
Circulation network LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY
"
50'-0
)
(15.2m
NPD
WALKABLE STREETS
Circulation network Entrance
Sidewalk
Building
Park
Figure 1. Depth of public space–facing entries
CTION
Requirement
USGBC LEED (b). Building-height-to-street-centerline ratio
Guide Illustrations NPD13
NPDp1 Walkable Streets_1
STEP 1. MEASURE BUILDING HEIGHT AND DISTANCE TO CENTERLINE
For planned and existing buildings facing the circulation network (see Definitions), measure each
building’s height and the distance from its façade to the street centerline (or right-of-way centerline).
Keep the following in mind:
·· The ratio requires no less than 1 unit of building height to every 1.5 units of distance from façade to
centerline.
·· Even though the project boundary might include buildings and not the adjacent street or other
circulation network, these buildings still are subject to this requirement. Project teams should measure
to the centerline of that adjacent street or other circulation network.
·· Use average height and façade setback for buildings with multiple heights and façade elements.
·· If a large building has separate façade elements or frontages along multiple, different circulation
networks, the height and distance to centerline of different façade portions must be calculated
separately for each segment.
176
STEP 2. DETERMINE WHICH BUILDINGS QUALIFY

For each building, compute the building-height-to-street-centerline ratio using Equation 2, and enter the
results in a table.
EQUATION 2. Building-height-to-street-centerline ratio
Average building height

BH:SC ratio =
Average distance to street centerline
For each building, if the result is 0.66 or greater, the building qualifies and its frontage width should be
determined.
STEP 3. COMPUTE PERCENTAGE OF QUALIFYING BLOCK LENGTH

Aggregate the frontage widths of all qualifying buildings. Use Equation 3 to determine whether the
NPD
minimum block length threshold has been achieved.
EQUATION 3. Percentage of block length for qualifying frontages

Qualifying frontage widths

% qualifying block length = × 100
Total block length
Building A height: 30 ft (9.1m) Building C height: 80 ft (24.4m)
Building B height: 60 ft (18.3m)
"
'-0
150 .7m)
(45
ork
" etw
'-0 nN
150 .7m) tio
cula
(45 Cir
"
'-0
60 3m)
-0" .
50' m) (18
2
(15.
"
CL
'-0
70 3m)
.
(21
"
'-0
50 2m)
.
(15
Block Length 1
Total project street frontage = 700 ft (213m)
Total frontage with minimum ratio = 350 ft (106.7m)
Frontage achieving minimum ratio = 50%
Distance BH - CL Frontage
Building Height to CL Ratio Counted
A 30 ft (9.1m) 50 ft (15.2m) 1:0.60 ---
B 60 ft (18.3m) 70 ft (21.3m) 1:0.86 150 ft (45.7m)
C 80 ft (24.4m) 60 ft (18.3m) 1:1.33 150 ft (45.7m)
300 ft (91.4m)
Figure 2. Percentage of qualifying block length

177
Requirement (c). Continuous sidewalks
STEP 1. MEASURE SIDEWALK LENGTH

Measure the block length that has sidewalks or equivalent all-weather routes on both sides of the
circulation network. Do the same for the project side of bordering circulation networks.
·· Bicycle-only and pedestrian-only paths meet this requirement automatically; it is not expected
that they have additional sidewalks alongside. Include pedestrian-only paths in “Block lengths with
sidewalks” in Equation 4).
·· Use Equation 4 to determine whether the minimum sidewalk coverage threshold has been met.
EQUATION 4. Percentage of block length with qualifying sidewalks
Block lengths with sidewalks

% block length with sidewalks = × 100
Total block length
NPD
STEP 2. DETERMINE WHETHER NEW SIDEWALKS MEET DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
WALKABLE STREETS
For all newly constructed sidewalks, confirm that they meet the prerequisite requirements. The required
sidewalk width can include features such as street trees, tree gates, planting strips, benches, trash
receptacles, bicycle racks, and street lights. See Further Explanation, Sidewalk Design Considerations.
circulation 8'-0"
network (2.4m)
Figure 3. Sidewalk width
Requirement (d). Limited garage openings
STEP 1. MEASURE GARAGE AND SERVICE BAY OPENINGS

Measure the length of each garage or service bay opening facing the circulation network, and sum the
total.
STEP 2. CONFIRM THAT GARAGE AND SERVICE BAY OPENINGS MEET REQUIREMENTS
Use Equation 5 to determine whether the project is within the maximum allowable garage and service
bay openings threshold.
178
EQUATION 5. Percentage of block length with garage and service bay openings
Lengths of garage and service openings

% block length with openings = × 100
Total block length
Service bay Alley
Garage door Garage doors

NPD
5% 5% 5%
Block length (100% excluding alley)
Figure 4. Measuring garage and service bay openings
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations NPD15
NPDp1 Walkable Streets_3
SIDEWALK DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Good sidewalks have important design components. Project teams should keep the following in mind:
·· Sidewalks may need to be wider than the prerequisite’s minimum, depending on the scale of neighborhood
features and the amount of pedestrian traffic.
179
·· A buffer zone, such as on-street parking or a planting strip between the sidewalk and the street, can greatly
enhance a sidewalk’s walkability.
·· A sidewalk’s ideal setback from the street curb should be a function of street width, traffic speed, parking
regulations, and building setbacks.
·· Streetscape amenities—outdoor seating, planters, trash receptacles, telephone booths, bike racks, street
lights, newsstands, and drinking fountains—can make the sidewalk interesting and inviting to pedestrians but
should not impede pedestrian traffic.
·· Good sidewalk design includes necessary lighting, signage, ramps, and auditory signals for seniors and those
with disabilities.
·· Sidewalks may include street trees in wells or tree grates without reducing the measured sidewalk width, but
trees should not obstruct the pedestrian path of travel.
·· Equivalent walking facilities, such as designated walking paths and trails, can substitute for sidewalks. These
should be finished with pervious or impervious pavement, gravel, or other material that is safe and passable in
NPD
rain, snow, and ice.
WALKABLE STREETS
Documentation Requirement (a) Requirement (b) Requirement (c) Requirement (d)
Explanation of how project will

LS be designed to meet prerequisite X X X X
requirements
For historic buildings, any denials of
LS CP CB approval from historic review board for X X X X
compliance with (b), (c), and (d)
Map identifying principal functional

CP CB X
entry or entries of all buildings
Map showing lengths of all facades and

CP CB length of every circulation network in or X
bordering project
Map showing locations of all sidewalks
CP CB and equivalent provisions in and X
bordering project
Map showing locations of any garage
CP CB X
doors and service bay openings
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

NPD Credit Walkable Streets. The requirements for building-height-to-street-centerline ratio (b) and continuous
sidewalks (c) are repeated with higher thresholds in the related credit. The credit also rewards frequent functional
building entries and limited driveway crossings of sidewalks, similar to components (a) and (c), respectively.

·· Street has been changed to circulation network.
·· The ratio is now building-height-to-centerline instead of building-height-to-street-width.
·· The separate building-height-to-centerline ratio for nonmotorized streets has been removed.
·· Building-height-to-centerline width, sidewalk length, and garage opening length are all now calculated as a
percentage of block length instead of street frontage.
180
None.
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
block length the distance along a block face; specifically, the distance from an intersecting Right-of-Way (ROW)
NPD
edge along a block face, when that face is adjacent to a qualifying circulation network segment, to the next ROW edge
entrance.
historic building a building or structure with historic, architectural, engineering, archeological, or cultural
significance that is listed or determined to be eligible as a historic structure or building, or as a contributing building
or structure in a designated historic district. The historic designation must be made by a local historic preservation
review board or similar body, and the structure must be listed in a state register of historic places, be listed in the
National Register of Historic Places (or a local equivalent outside the U.S.), or have been determined eligible for
listing.
historic district a group of buildings, structures, objects, and sites that have been designated or determined to be
eligible as historically and architecturally significant, and categorized as either contributing or noncontributing to
the historic nature of the district
181
Compact Development
Plan
NPD
Built Project
COMPACT DEVELOPMENT
INTENT
To conserve land. To promote livability, walkability, and transportation

efficiency and reduce vehicle distance traveled. To leverage and support
transit investments. To improve public health by encouraging daily
physical activity.
REQUIREMENTS
Design and build the project to meet the densities specified below. Minimum densities must be met for both (1) the
entire project at full build-out and (2) the portion of the project that will be built within five years of the date that the
first new building of any type is occupied.
Case 1. Projects with Access to Quality Transit

For projects with existing or planned transit service (i.e., service with the funding commitments as specified in SLL
Prerequisite Smart Location) that meets or exceeds the 2-point threshold in SLL Credit Access to Quality Transit,
build at the following densities, based on the walking distances to the transit service specified in that SLL credit:
·· for residential components located within the walking distances: 12 or more dwelling buildable land units per
acre (30 DU per hectare) of buildable land available for residential uses;
·· for residential components falling outside the walking distances: 7 or more dwelling units per acre (17.5 DU per
hectare) of buildable land available for residential uses;
·· for nonresidential components located within the walking distances: 0.80 or higher floor-area ratio (FAR) for
the buildable land available for nonresidential uses; and
·· for nonresidential components falling outside the walking distances: 0.50 or higher FAR for the buildable land
available for nonresidential uses.
If the project location is served by a transit agency whose guidelines for minimum service densities are greater than
the densities required by this prerequisite, the project must achieve those service densities instead.
182
Case 2. All Other Projects

Build any residential components of the project at a density of 7 or more dwelling units per acre (17.5 DU per hectare)
of available for residential uses.
Build any nonresidential components of the project at a density of 0.50 or higher FAR for the buildable land
available for nonresidential uses.
For All Projects

Density calculations include all planned and existing buildings within the project boundary, excluding those portions
of parking structures devoted exclusively to parking.
If the residential component of the project meets the minimum density requirement but the nonresidential
component does not, or vice versa, include only the qualifying density. Use that component’s dwelling units or
nonresidential floor area in the numerator and the total buildable land area in the denominator. If the resulting
density meets the minimum requirement, the prerequisite is achieved.
NPD
183
BEHIND THE INTENT

Compact development is a foundation for neighborhood sustainability. Most people will not walk more than 1/4-mile
(400 meters) (about five minutes), to casual destinations, or up to 1/2-mile (800 meters) for regular trips, such as
a daily commute.1 Thus, people are more likely to walk in compact neighborhoods with a wide variety of nearby
destinations. In fact, doubling of a residential or job density is associated with a more than 30% decrease in vehicle
distance traveled and total air pollution.2
As neighborhoods become more compact, residents are less likely to be overweight and more likely to get
daily physical activity and be physically fit, as a result of their more frequent walking.3 One study found that the
likelihood of being overweight falls around 5% for every 1/2-mile (800 meters) walked per day.4 In addition, bicycle
and pedestrian casualties tend to be less frequent in denser neighborhoods, partly because motorists tend to drive
more carefully as the number of cyclists and pedestrians increases.5 Compact development also conserves sensitive
natural open space from sprawling urbanization while supporting infill areas already serviced by transportation
systems, infrastructure, and other investments.
NPD
Compact development sets the stage for multiple credit topics throughout LEED ND—including access to
schools, parks, transit, jobs, local food, and neighborhood centers with diverse uses—all of which specify a maximum
1/4-mile (400-meter) or 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance. The prerequisite’s thresholds are considered
minimum levels of compactness for walking to be a viable, widespread, everyday mode of transportation in a
COMPACT DEVELOPMENT
neighborhood. In areas well served by public transit, greater density is required, since sufficient population and
employment density are crucial components of successful public transit. For both the prerequisite and the credit,
density is assessed at five years after first building occupancy in addition to full build-out to support walking, cycling,
and transit as new residents and workers populate the project and develop their travel habits.
Although projects need to calculate both residential and nonresidential densities to meet the compact
development thresholds, a provision in the requirements allows for flexibility when one component of the project
cannot meet the minimum. For example, when a project contains a large, dense residential component and a small,
low-density civic or nonresidential component, outstanding density in the residential component can compensate
for density below the threshold in the nonresidential component.
STEP 1. DETERMINE TRANSIT SERVICE CONDITIONS

Follow the steps outlined in Getting Started, Transit Service, to assess transit service in and near the
project and map the walking routes.
Planned transit may be counted if it meets the funding requirements in SLL Prerequisite Smart Location,
Option 3.
STEP 2. SELECT CASE TO DETERMINE REQUIRED MINIMUM DENSITIES

Use the transit service information and map to determine whether the project meets the 2-point
threshold for transit service under SLL Credit Access to Quality Transit (see that credit’s requirement
language).
1 Interview with Dan Burden, Walkable Communities (March 2007), cited in Raimi + Associates and Public Health Law and Policy, How to Create and
Implement Healthy General Plans (2008).
2 M. Raimi, S. Patrick, and Design Community & Environment, with R. Ewing, L. Frank, and R. Kreutzer, Understanding the Relationship Between Public
Health and the Built Environment (U.S. Green Building Council LEED ND Core Committee and Congress for the New Urbanism, 2006), p. 116.
3 L. Frank et al., Linking Objectively Measured Physical Activity with Objectively Measured Urban Form: Findings from SMARTRAQ, American Journal of
Preventive Medicine (February 2005): 117–125.
4 L. Frank, Obesity Relationships with Community Design, Physical Activity, and Time Spent in Cars, American Journal of Preventive Medicine 27(2)
(2004).
5 A. Durning, The Car and the City: 24 Steps to Safe Streets and Healthy Communities (Seattle: Northwest Environmental Watch, 1996).
184
Case 1 is for projects that meet the 2-point threshold for transit service. Case 1 projects must split the
project into two areas:
·· For portions of the project within walking distance of transit, as identified in the map created in Step 1,
the project must meet the higher density thresholds listed in the prerequisite requirements.
·· For portions outside walking distance of transit, the lower density thresholds apply.
If the transit agency has minimum service area density guidelines that are higher than the prerequisite
densities, use the transit agency minimums for any portion of the project site subject to such guidelines.
Case 2 is for projects that do not meet the 2-point threshold for transit service.
STEP 3. MAP BUILDING LOCATIONS AND CHARACTERISTICS

Generate a map early in the development process, when design modifications and phasing plans may
still be flexible, to assist with determining whether the development plan is meeting the project’s density
goals and prerequisite compliance.
·· Begin with a standard site base map and indicate the project boundary.
·· Delineate the boundary of the project’s expected build-out area five years after first building
NPD
occupancy.
·· Case 1 projects only: Distinguish between areas of the project within walking distance of transit (which
are subject to higher minimum densities), and areas outside walking distance of transit.
·· Identify existing and planned buildings and their associated land areas and classify them as residential,
nonresidential, or mixed-use.
·· For mixed-use buildings or land areas, distinguish between residential and nonresidential portions (see
Getting Started, Land Use Densities).
·· Project teams that have not yet advanced to building details must prepare good-faith estimates of
building uses.
STEP 4. CALCULATE DENSITIES

Prepare a table listing buildings, associated land area, number of dwelling units, and nonresidential floor
area information. Calculate project densities for the following:
·· Total site at full build-out
·· Portion of the site to be built within five years after first building occupancy
Determine the total buildable land for residential and nonresidential development.
·· See Getting Started, Buildable Land and Land-Use Densities.
Calculate residential density in dwelling units (DUs) per acre or hectare, according to Equation 1.
EQUATION 1. Residential density
Residential density Total DUs

(DU/acre or hectare)
=
Residential buildable land (acres or hectares)
Calculate nonresidential density in floor-area ratio (FAR), according to Equation 2.
EQUATION 2. Nonresidential density
Total nonresidential floor area

Nonresidential density (FAR) =
Total nonresidential buildable land area (ft2 or m2)
Density calculation requirements specific to this prerequisite include the following:

·· If full build-out and fifth-year densities differ, the lower value must be used to determine prerequisite
compliance.
·· Density calculations include existing and planned buildings; exclude portions of parking structures
dedicated solely to parking.
185
·· If one component of a project, residential or nonresidential, fails to meet a minimum density while the
other component exceeds the minimum, an adjusted calculation is allowed in which the compliant
component compensates for the low density of the other component. See Further Explanation,
Calculations.
Case 1 projects only: Calculate densities separately inside the transit walkshed and outside the transit
walkshed. See Further Explanation, Example 2.
STEP 5. DETERMINE WHETHER DESIGN ADJUSTMENTS ARE REQUIRED

Referring to the flow chart (Figure 1), compare the project density calculations with the criteria to
determine whether the project achieves the prerequisite. If the project does not meet the criteria,
redesign to increase density.
Case 1 projects: Using the flow chart, assess compliance for portions of the project within the transit
walkshed and portions outside the transit walkshed separately. Both results must meet the prerequisite
requirements.
NPD
Does build-out
density at
least equal the
following? no
COMPACT DEVELOPMENT
7 DU/acre (17.5
DU/hectare) Recalculate
Compare Build-out based on the yes
and Prerequisite
build-out adjusted is achieved.
density with 0.5 FAR
density
density at 5 Prerequisite calculation to
years after first yes determine
is achieved.
building compliance.
occupancy. Does 5-year Redesign to
Does adjusted
density at meet
Which is lower? 5-year density meet
least equal the no requirement.
requirements?
following?
7 DU/acre (17.5 no
DU/hectare)
and
0.5 FAR
Figure 1. Determining density to assess compliance
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
See Equations 1 and 2 in Step-by-Step Guidance.
Adjusted Project Density Provision

If one component of a project, either residential or nonresidential, fails to meet a minimum density while the other
component exceeds the minimum, apply Equation 3 for the component that qualifies. If the adjusted density exceeds
the minimum density, the prerequisite is achieved.
EQUATION 3. Adjusted density for mixed-use project
Compliant component (DUs or nonresidential floor area)

Adjusted density =
Project total buildable land area
186
EXAMPLES
Example 1. Adjusted Project Density Provision (applies to Case 1 or Case 2)
A project pursuing Case 2 has 10 acres of total buildable land; 8 acres is residential and has 160 dwelling units, for a
density of 20 DUs per acre. The remaining 2 acres has a density of 0.25 FAR.
According to Table 1, the nonresidential component does not meet the prerequisite criteria, but the residential
component exceeds the minimum. Using Equation 3, the team calculates adjusted density:
160 DUs
Adjusted density = = 16 DUs per acre
10 acres
With 16 DUs per acre, the project exceeds the required 7 DUs per acre for a project not served by transit, and the
NPD
prerequisite is achieved.
Example 2. Density of Project Partially in Transit-Served Area (Case 1)

Assessing local transit, a project team finds both existing and planned transit service. To determine whether the
planned transit service meets funding requirements, the team reviews SLL Prerequisite Smart Location, Option
3, and Further Explanation, Planned Transit. The planned transit has met the funding commitments and should be
included in the transit service totals.
The team next refers to SLL Credit Access to Quality Transit and determines that total transit, including the
planned service, will meet the 2-point threshold (inclusive of weekdays and weekends). Case 1 of this prerequisite
therefore applies.
The team maps the locations of buildings and identifies them as residential or nonresidential. The area of the site
within the prescribed walking distances of the transit service meeting at least the 2-point threshold is 20 acres; this is
the “transit walkshed.” In Figure 2, both shaded areas are part of the transit walkshed.
Within the 20-acre transit walkshed, 15 acres is residential and 5 acres is nonresidential. Using Equations 1 and 2,
the residential density is calculated to be 16.7 dwelling units per acre, and the nonresidential density is calculated to
be 1.15 FAR, both of which meet the prerequisite criteria.
The land area outside the transit corridor (80 acres) has a density of 7.3 dwelling units per acre and 0.54 FAR, both
of which meet the prerequisite criteria.
187
Walking route (1/2 mile, 402m) distance) LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY
NPD
COMPACT DEVELOPMENT
Walking route (1/4 mile,
804m distance)
Building entrances within required walking distance of transit (transit walkshed)
Building entrances outside of required walking distance of transit
Area that will be built five years after first building occupancy
Figure 2. Determining areas with access to transit
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations

PLANNED TRANSIT
ND
NPDp2 Prerequisite Compact Development
If planned transit service is present on or near the project site, and it contributes trips towards meeting the 2
point threshold of SLL Credit Access to Quality Transit, that service must meet the requirements found in SLL
Prerequisite Smart Location. Demonstrate one of the following:
·· The relevant transit agency has a signed full-funding grant agreement with the Federal Transit Administration
(or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) that includes a revenue operations date for the start of transit
service. The revenue operations date must be no later than the date by which 50% of the project’s total building
gross floor area will be occupied.
·· For bus, streetcar, bus rapid transit, or ferry service, the transit agency must certify that it has an approved
above and that service at these levels will begin no later than the date by which 50% of the project’s total
building gross floor area will be occupied.
188
·· For rail service other than streetcars, the transit agency must certify that preliminary engineering for a rail line
°° A state legislature or local subdivision of the state has authorized the transit agency to expend funds to
establish rail transit service that will begin no later than the date by which 50% of the project’s total building
gross floor area will be occupied.
OR
°° A municipality has dedicated funding or reimbursement commitments from future tax revenue for the
than the date by which 50% of the project’s total building gross floor area will be occupied.
NPD
Calculations of transit trips and description of the minimum transit service densities required by the
LS CP CB X
transit agency
LS CP CB Explanation of planned project densities at full build-out and five years after first building occupancy X
Site map that includes building within walking distance of transit, project boundary, boundary of built-out
LS CP CB X
area at 5 years after building occupancy
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Credit Access to Quality Transit. The 2-point threshold in Access to Quality Transit is the threshold at which
the Compact Development prerequisite requires higher minimum densities.
NPD Credit Compact Development. The related credit awards points for exceeding this prerequisite’s minimums.
Unlike the prerequisite, the credit does not require higher densities within walking distance of transit, nor does it
allow a single land-use component to achieve the credit by calculating its density over the total buildable land area.

None.
None.
Not available.
189
DEFINITIONS
parking.
NPD
COMPACT DEVELOPMENT
190
191
Connected and
Open Community
NPD
Plan
Built Project
CONNECTED AND OPEN COMMUNITY

INTENT
To promote projects that have high levels of internal connectivity and

are well connected to the community. To encourage development within
existing communities that promote transportation efficiency through
multimodal transportation. To improve public health by encouraging
daily physical activity.
REQUIREMENTS
Meet the requirements of Case 1 if the project has no circulation network intersections within the project boundary
and is five acres or less in size. All other projects must meet Case 2.
Case 1. Surrounding Connectivity

Locate the project such that the connectivity within 1/4-mile (400 meters) of the project boundary is at least 90
intersections per square mile (35 intersections per square kilometer). Any part of the circulation network that is
counted toward the connectivity requirement must be available for general public use and not gated. Gated areas are
not considered available for public use, with the exception of education and health care campuses and military bases
where gates are used for security purposes.
Additionally, any circulation network within the project must be available for general public use and not gated.
Case 2. Internal Connectivity

Design and build the project such that its internal connectivity is at least 140 intersections per square mile (54
intersections per square kilometer).
192
Any part of the circulation network counted toward the connectivity requirement must be available for general
public use at all times and not gated. Additionally, no more than 10% of the project area may be accessed via
circulation network that is gated. Education campuses, health care campuses, and military bases where gates are
used for security purposes are exempt from the 10% limit, and intersections within those projects may be counted
toward the connectivity requirement.
Design and build the project with at least one through-connection (of the circulation network) intersecting
or terminating at the project boundary at least every 800 feet (245 meters), or at existing abutting intervals and
intersections of the circulation network, whichever is the shorter distance. These requirements do not apply to
portions of the boundary where connections cannot be made because of physical obstacles, such as prior platting of
property, construction of existing buildings or other barriers, slopes steeper than 15%, railroad and utility rights-of-
way, existing limited-access motor vehicle rights-of-way, and parks and dedicated open space.
NPD
193
BEHIND THE INTENT

A circulation network—well-connected pedestrian, bicycle, and vehicular routes—and smaller block sizes provide
direct, efficient routes for walking and bicycling to nearby destinations. A higher intersection density is one of the
single most important factors for increased levels of walking, as well as for increasing transit use and reducing
vehicle distance traveled.1 One study found that in well-connected, pedestrian-friendly communities, residents use
alternatives to cars for 18% more work trips and 11% more nonwork trips.2
People in the most walkable neighborhoods are more than twice as likely to undertake 30 minutes of moderate
daily exercise than those who live in the least walkable neighborhoods.3 Regular physical activity can reduce the
prevalence of many chronic diseases, including diabetes, heart disease, stroke, and hypertension.
Routes across the project boundary that integrate with external circulation networks ensure that the project is
well connected with the surrounding area. Gated streets, paths, and other areas should not be included in project
designs seeking to enhance community connections, since preventing public access creates a barrier to connectivity.
NPD

Determine which case the project should follow. Case 1 is for projects that meet both of the following
conditions:
·· The project site is 5 acres (2-hectares) or less.
·· There are no intersections of routes considered part of the circulation network inside the project
boundary. See Getting Started for a description of the kinds of paths and right-of-ways that qualify as
circulation network.
Most projects will fall under Case 2.
Case 1. External Connectivity
STEP 1. IDENTIFY 1/4-MILE (400-METER) BUFFER

On a site map, indicate a 1/4-mile (400-meter) buffer outside the project boundary (see Further
Explanation, Examples).
STEP 2. DETERMINE CONNECTIVITY WITHIN BUFFER

See Getting Started to determine how to calculate connectivity.
Confirm that connectivity inside the buffer is at least 90 intersections per square mile (35 intersections
per square kilometer).
STEP 3. CONFIRM ABSENCE OF GATES

Confirm that the project design does not include gates across any part of the internal circulation
network. However, gates within a parcel of land, such as an entryway gate to an apartment building
courtyard or parking lot, are not prohibited.
1 R. Ewing and R. Cervero, Travel and the Built Environment: A Meta-Analysis, Journal of the American Planning Association 76(3) (2010).
2 R. Cervero and C. Radisch, Travel Choices in Pedestrian Versus Automobile Oriented Neighborhoods (UC Transportation Center, 1995) (www.uctc.net).
3 D. Goldberg, L. Frank, B. McCann, J. Chapman, and S. Kavage, New Data for a New Era: A Summary of the SMARTRAQ Findings (Georgia Department
of Transportation, 2007).
194
Case 2. Internal Connectivity
STEP 1. DESIGN PROJECT TO MAXIMIZE CONNECTIVITY

Early in the design process, evaluate the potential to connect to surrounding right-of-ways, taking into
account topography and existing built features. Inside the project, prioritize planning for streets and
paths and maximize the number of intersections (see Further Explanation, Examples).
STEP 2. CALCULATE GATED AREA

Identify any portions of the project’s circulation network that are gated and not available for public use,
as well as the buildings or portions of the site that are accessed by that gated circulation network.
·· Calculate the total area of gated circulation network and areas on the site, and ensure that it does not
exceed 10% of the total area inside the project boundary.
·· The 10% limit on gated areas is not applicable to an education campus, health care campus, or military
base with gates for security purposes.
NPD
STEP 3. DETERMINE CONNECTIVITY WITHIN PROJECT BOUNDARY

See Getting Started to determine how to calculate connectivity.
Confirm that connectivity inside the project boundary is at least 140 intersections per square mile (54
intersections per square kilometer).
STEP 4. IDENTIFY PHYSICAL OBSTACLES

Identify and mark on a site map any segment(s) of the project boundary adjacent to physical obstacles
in the surrounding area where through-connections cannot be made. These portions of the project
boundary are exempt from the through-connection requirement.
·· See prerequisite requirements for examples of acceptable physical obstacles.
STEP 5. ASSESS THROUGH-CONNECTIONS

For unobstructed portions of the project boundary, identify and mark every location where a through-
connection of the circulation network crosses the project boundary, or where the internal circulation
network terminates at the project boundary (see Getting Started for through-connection diagrams).
·· Measure the distance along the project boundary between each through-connection and ensure that
no single segment between through-connections is more than 800 feet (245 meters).
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
See Getting Started, Connectivity, for connectivity calculations.
195
EXAMPLES
Street to street intersection
Driveway Cul-de-sac LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY

entrance entrance
NPD
1/4 mile
(402m)

Alley to alley intersection
Eligible intersections (+90 within 1/4 mile, 402m radius of project site)
Figure 1. Example plan for Case 1
SGBC LEED Guide Illustrations NPD19

NPDp3 Connected and Open Community_2
196
Cul-de-sac Street to street intersection

entrance
Alley to alley intersection Driveway LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY

entrance
NPD
Gated community Street to alley intersection
Figure 2. Example plan for Case 2
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations Documentation NPD18Case 2 Case 1
LS CP CB Intersection density calculations

NPDp3 Connected and Open Community_1
x x
LS CP CB Map showing eligible intersections of the circulation network x x
CP CB Maximum distance between through connections x
CP CB Calculation of percentage of project area accessed via gated circulation network x

197
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

·· SLL Prerequisite Smart Location. Option 2 of the related prerequisite also measures connectivity and
distance between through-connections along the project boundary, but it entails a smaller area and requires
through-connections along the adjacent portion of the project boundary, regardless of physical obstacles.
·· SLL Credit Preferred Locations. The related credit rewards higher connectivity in a larger area of the
surrounding existing circulation network.

·· The prerequisite now specifies a maximum area that can be gated.
·· The prerequisite now refers to the circulation network, not just streets.
NPD
None.

Not available.
DEFINITIONS
198
199
NEIGHBORHOOD PATTERN AND DESIGN CREDIT
Walkable Streets
Plan
NPD
Built Project
1–9 points
WALKABLE STREETS
INTENT
To promote transportation efficiency and reduce vehicle distance

traveled. To improve public health by providing safe, appealing, and
comfortable street environments that encourage daily physical activity
and avoid pedestrian injuries.
REQUIREMENTS
A project may earn a maximum of 9 points, awarded according to Table 1.
TABLE 1. Points for walkable street features
Items achieved Points
2–3 1
4–5 2
6–7 3
8–9 4
10–11 5
12 6
13 7
14 8
15–16 9
200
Façades and Entries

a. At least 80% of the total linear distance of building façades facing the circulation network in the project is no
more than 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the property line.
b. At least 50% of the total linear distance of building façades facing the circulation network in the project is no
more than 18 feet (5.5 meters) from the property line.
c. At least 50% of the total linear distance of mixed-use and nonresidential building façades facing the
circulation network in the project is within 1 foot (300 millimeters) of a sidewalk or equivalent walking route.
d. Functional entries to the building occur at an average of 75 feet (23 meters) or less along nonresidential or
mixed-use buildings or blocks.
e. Functional entries to the building occur at an average of 30 feet (9 meters) or less along nonresidential or
mixed-use buildings or blocks.
Items (d) and (e) are cumulative.
NPD
Ground-Level Use and Parking

f. All ground-level retail, service, and trade uses that face a public space have clear glass on at least 60% of their
façades between 3 and 8 feet (900 and 2500 millimeters) above grade.
g. If a façade extends along a sidewalk, no more than 40% of its length or 50 feet (15 meters), whichever is less, is
blank (without doors or windows).

h. Any ground-level retail, service, or trade windows facing the circulation network must be kept visible
(unshuttered) at night; this must be stipulated in covenants, conditions, and restrictions (CC&Rs) or other
binding documents.
i. On-street parking is provided on at least 70% of both sides of the block length of all new and existing
motorized portions of the circulation network, including the project side of bordering circulation network.
The percentage of on-street parking is calculated by dividing the length of street designated for parking by the
total length of the curb along each street, including curb cuts, driveways, and intersection radii. Space within
the parking lane that is occupied by corner bulb-outs (within 24 feet [7 meters] of an intersection), transit
stops, and motorcycle or bicycle parking may be counted as designated for parking in this calculation. Alleys
may be exempted.
j. Continuous sidewalks or equivalent provisions for walking are available along both sides of the entire
circulation network within the project, including the project side of the circulation network bordering the
project. Bicycle- and pedestrian-only paths meet this requirement. New sidewalks must be at least 10 feet (3
meters) wide on retail or mixed-use blocks and at least 5 feet (1.5 meters) wide on all other blocks. Note that
these requirements specify wider sidewalks than required by NPD Prerequisite Walkable Streets. Alleys may
be exempted.
k. If the project has ground-floor dwelling units, the principal level of at least 50% of those units has an elevated
finished floor at least 24 inches (60 centimeters) above the sidewalk grade. Below-grade basement spaces and/
or accessory dwelling units are exempt from this requirement.
l. In nonresidential or mixed-use projects, 50% or more of the total number of office buildings includes ground-
floor retail along 60% of the length of the street-level façade; 100% of mixed-use buildings include ground-
floor retail, live-work spaces, or ground-floor dwelling units along at least 60% of the street-level façade; and
all businesses or community services on the ground floor are accessible directly from sidewalks along the
circulation network or other public space, such as a square, park, or plaza, but not a parking lot.
m. At least 40% of the block length of the circulation network within the project has a minimum building-height-
to-street-centerline ratio of 1:1.5 (i.e., at least 1 foot (30 centimeters) of building height for every 1.5 feet (45
centimeters) of width from circulation network centerline to building façade). Alleys may be exempted.
Projects that border a part of the circulation network must meet only their proportional share of the height-to-
centerline ratio (i.e., only on the project side of the circulation network).
Building height is measured to eaves or, for a flat-roof structure, to the rooftop, and width is measured façade
to centerline. For buildings with multiple heights or widths, use average heights or widths weighted by each
portion’s share of the total height or width.
201
Design Speeds for Safe Pedestrian and Bicycle Travel

n. 75% of the length of new residential-only motorized parts of the circulation network within the project is
designed for a target speed of no more than 20 mph (30 km/h).
o. 70% of the length of new nonresidential or mixed-use motorized parts of the circulation network within the
project is designed for a target speed of no more than 25 mph (40km/h). A multiway boulevard, with travel
lanes separated from access lanes by medians, may apply this requirement to its outer access lanes only
(through-lanes are exempt), provided pedestrian crosswalks are installed across the boulevard at intervals no
greater than 800 feet (245 meters).
Sidewalk Intrusions
p. At-grade crossings with driveways account for no more than 10% of the length of sidewalks within the project.
NPD
WALKABLE STREETS
202
BEHIND THE INTENT

This credit complements and builds on the design requirements found in NPD Prerequisite Walkable Streets. The
best walkable streets are comfortable, interesting, safe, beautiful, inviting, and functional. There is no single feature
that makes a street walkable. In fact, most walkable streets succeed as the result of many mutually reinforcing
features and strategies.
Pedestrian-supportive strategies for building and street design can include the following:
·· Façades and entries. Buildings close to the street add a sense of enclosure and comfort for passing
pedestrians, and multiple pedestrian building entries reduce the physical and psychological barriers between
pedestrians and the interior of buildings.
·· Ground-level uses and on-street parking. Approachable, easy-to-access building façades with clear,
unshuttered windows are welcoming to passing pedestrians, adding a sense of neighborhood safety and
social connection. Additionally, ground-floor uses like retail or housing bring people out to the sidewalk while
NPD
providing a fine-grained mix of neighborhood destinations. Continuous sidewalks make for easier pedestrian
travel, and elevated ground-floor dwelling units provide additional “eyes on the street” while also providing
privacy for residents. On-street parking provides a buffer between the street and the sidewalk while reducing
the need for off-street parking lots.
·· Design speeds for safe pedestrian and bicycle travel. Pedestrians’ and bicyclists’ risk of injury increases
exponentially with increased travel speeds. Low speed limits are a reliable way to keep pedestrians and
bicyclists safe.
·· Limited sidewalk intrusions. Limiting sidewalk intrusions from garages and alleys also promotes
pedestrians’ and bicyclists’ safety, especially for young children and elderly, while creating a more consistent,
comfortable, and aesthetically pleasing pedestrian environment.
STEP 1. CALCULATE BASE PROJECT MEASUREMENTS

Perform the base project measurements that will be required for the selected requirements. Some
calculations are found in NPD Prerequisite Walkable Streets.
Measuring compliance for nearly all the requirements in the Walkable Streets credit (requirements a-p)
relies on one of the following base measurements (Figure 1):
·· Block length
·· Sidewalk length
·· Circulation network length
·· Façade length
203
CL CL
Building Facade
Sidewalk Length
ROW Block Length (north side) ROW

CL CL
ROW
ROW
Circulation Network Length
Curb Length
NPD
Block Length (south side)
WALKABLE STREETS
Figure 1. Measuring circulation network and frontages
The base measurements for each requirement are listed in Table 1.

·· Some base measurements can be reused or adjusted for determining compliance with different
requirements of the credit.
·· For documentation, a single map may suffice to show compliance with requirements that share the
same measurements (e.g., façade length for requirements a, b, c, and g).
TABLE 1. Base project measurements, by lettered requirement
Requirement Base measurement How much needs to be measured
a, b Façade length Project total of all building façades (facing circulation network)
c Façade length Nonresidential or mixed-use building façades only (facing circulation network)
d, e Block length Nonresidential or mixed-use block length
f Façade square feet Retail, service, and trade uses only (facing public space)
g Façade length Not-to-exceed maximum length (facing any sidewalk)
h N/A
i Block length Project total (along motorized circulation network)
j Circulation network length Project total
USGBC LEED Guide

k Illustrations
N/A GS11
l Façade length All mixed-use and half of officeStreet Block
building facades Frontage (Getting Started
(street level)
m Block length Project total
n Circulation network length Residential, motorized portions only
o Circulation network length Nonresidential or mixed-use, motorized portions only
p Sidewalk length Project total

204
STEP 2. INDICATE CONTRIBUTING ELEMENTS ON SITE MAP

For each lettered requirement, prepare a site map that includes the site base, project boundary, and any
relevant items from following:
·· Building setbacks and functional entries
·· On-street parking and curb length, by block
·· Ground-level retail, service, or trade façades, by glass height and width
·· Ground-floor retail façades in nonresidential and mixed-use buildings
·· Street target speeds
·· Corner bulb-outs in parking lanes
·· Ground-floor dwellings with finished-grade elevation above sidewalks
·· Driveway crossings
·· Blank walls per façade
·· Street frontage that does and does not qualify for building-height-to-centerline-width ratio
requirements
·· Sidewalks (with typical dimensions shown) and circulation networks
NPD
·· Pedestrian crosswalks on multiway boulevards

Requirements (a), (b), and (c). Façades
STEP 1. MEASURE FAÇADE LENGTH

As done for NPD Prerequisite Walkable Streets, measure façade length for all project building facades
facing the circulation network (a, b) and/or mixed-use and nonresidential facades facing the circulation
network (c). See Figure 2.
STEP 2. DETERMINE BUILDING SETBACK

Orient as many buildings as possible to meet the setback requirements. Measure the setback to each
building; entering the information in a table may be helpful.
·· If portions of a building’s facade comply with the setback requirements, the compliant portions of the
façade can contribute to the linear feet requirements.
·· For the nonresidential and mixed-use setback from sidewalks requirements (c), the distance of the
setback must be measured from the property line.
STEP 3. COMPUTE PERCENTAGE OF QUALIFYING FAÇADE LENGTH

For each requirement, aggregate the frontage widths of all qualifying buildings. Use Equation 1 to
determine whether the minimum block length threshold has been achieved for each requirement.
EQUATION 1. Percentage of façade length for qualifying frontage setbacks
Qualifying façade length

% qualifying facade length = × 100
Total facade length
Projects can achieve any combination of requirements (a), (b), and (c). For instance, a project in which
80% of the total linear length of building frontage is set back no more than 18 feet (5 meters) would
achieve both (a) and (b).
205
25
(7 '-0"
.6m
m
ax )
"
'-0 )
25 .6m
7
( ax
m
NPD
18
(5 '-0"
WALKABLE STREETS
.5m
0"
'- ) ma )
18 .5m x
(5 ax
m
Figure 2. Building setbacks
Requirements (d) and (e). Functional entrances
STEP 1. DETERMINE LENGTHS OF NONRESIDENTIAL OR MIXED-USE BUILDINGS OR

BLOCKS
Identify all nonresidential or mixed-use buildings or blocks and measure their length. Project teams
may choose to measure distances between building entrances along individual buildings or along entire
blocks (not differentiating between buildings), as long as this is done consistently for the entire project
site. For instance, if a city block contains nonresidential building frontages on two sides and residential
building frontages on the other two sides, a project must measure only along nonresidential building
frontages.
STEP 2. COUNT FUNCTIONAL ENTRIES

Count the total number of entries along nonresidential or mixed-use buildings or blocks (Figure 3).
Doors exclusively designated emergency exits and garage doors not designed as pedestrian entrances
USGBC LEEDare
Guide Illustrations
not considered functional entries. NPD1
NPDc1: Walkable Streets_1
206
NPD
Figure 3. Counting entry points
STEP 3. COMPUTE PROJECT-WIDE AVERAGE

Use Equation 2 to determine the project’s average functional entry spacing.
EQUATION 2. Average functional entry spacing
Total project block length

Average spacing =
Functional entries
Entrances spaced at an average distance of 30 feet (9 meters) or less achieve both (d) and (e).
The average distances are cumulative and for the entire project. If one segment between functional
entries exceeds the maximum distance but the average is less, the project still qualifies.
GBC LEED Guide Illustrations NPD2

Requirement (f). Ground-level glazing NPDc1: Walkable Streets_2
STEP 1. DETERMINE LOCATIONS OF ALL RETAIL, SERVICE, AND TRADE FAÇADES

Identify any façades that contain eligible uses at the ground level in the project.
Residential, office, or other nonresidential uses not specified in the credit are not subject to the
requirements.
STEP 2. MEASURE APPLICABLE FAÇADE AREA

Use Equation 3 to calculate the total area of the vertical face of all retail, service, or trade façades
between the specified heights above the ground.
207
EQUATION 3. Applicable façade area
Applicable façade area = Length of façade × Maximum height – Minimum height
For example, if a project has 1,000 feet (304 meters) of retail, service, or trade façades, the requirements
would apply to 5,000 square feet (460 square meters): 1,000 feet (304 meters) in length x 5 feet (1.5
meters) in height (Figure 4).
Minimum 60% clear glass
NPD
WALKABLE STREETS
5'-0"
(1.5m)
3'-0"
(.9m)
Figure 4. Area of clear glazing
STEP 3. MEASURE WINDOW AREAS

Measure the area of clear windows or portions of glazing on applicable frontages that lie between the
specified heights from the ground.
Low-E glass with at least 60% visible light transmittance (VLT) qualifies as clear glass.
STEP 4. COMPUTE PERCENTAGE OF GLAZING

Use Equation 4 to determine the percentage of clear glazing at viewing height.
EQUATION 4. Percentage of clear glazing within specified heights
Area of clear windows

% glazing = × 100
Applicable façade area

208
Requirement (g). Façades along sidewalks
STEP 1. AVOID OR ELIMINATE BLANK WALLS

Minimize blank walls throughout the site by including building entrances and windows along all building
frontages with sidewalks. If the site plan is already completed, scan the site plan for potential blank
wall(s) (Figure 5). Keep the following in mind:
·· A single noncompliant wall disqualifies a project from meeting the requirement.
·· Projects teams can often remedy blank walls by strategically adding doors or windows.
STEP 2. DETERMINE COMPLIANCE WITH CREDIT REQUIREMENTS

For each building’s façade along each sidewalk, measure the length of blank walls. Confirm that no blank
wall exceeds the maximum length, 50 feet (15 meters). Next, use Equation 5 to determine the percentage
of the façade’s length that is blank, and confirm that it does not exceed 40%.
EQUATION 5. Percentage of façade length with blank wall

NPD
Length of blank façade

% blank façade = × 100
Total building façade length
Figure 5. Measuring blank walls

209
Requirement (h). Unshuttered windows

Implement a binding, project-wide requirement through covenants, conditions, and restrictions (CC&Rs)
to keep applicable windows unshuttered at night. Security bars that allow a view of interior spaces are
allowed.
Requirement (i). On-street parking
STEP 1. MEASURE BLOCK LENGTH (MOTORIZED PORTIONS)

Measure total block length along any motorized portions of the circulation network within or bordering
the project.
STEP 2. PROVIDE ON-STREET PARKING
NPD
Add on-street parking throughout the site sufficient to meet the credit requirements, keeping in mind the
following:
·· Parking must be on both sides of the motorized circulation network to count toward this credit. The
only exception is in the case of a right-of-way along the edge of the project boundary, which may be
WALKABLE STREETS
counted even if only the project ide has parking.
·· Transit stops, on-street motorcycle and bicycle parking, and curb bulb-outs may be counted as areas
where on-street parking is allowed if they are within 24 feet (7 meters) of an intersection, so including
these facilities will increase a project’s likelihood of achieving the required minimum.
STEP 3. DETERMINE ON-STREET PARKING COMPLIANCE

Measure the total length of on-street parking as indicated in the credit requirements. Use Equation 6 to
determine whether the on-street parking meets the credit threshold.
EQUATION 6. Percentage of on-street parking
Length of parking
% on-street parking = × 100
Motorized block length
210
Alley Alley Curb

NPD
Total block length
Corner bulb-out, 24 ft (7.3m) Bus stop Corner bulb-out, 24 ft (7.3m)
Exclusions from curb calculation
Figure 6. Determining percentage of on-street parking
Requirement (j). Sidewalks

Follow the instructions for NPD Prerequisite Walkable Streets, requirement (d), but ensure that the
project meets the higher thresholds necessary for credit compliance, for length of coverage and width of
sidewalks.

Requirement (k). Elevated ground-floor dwelling units
STEP 1. COUNT GROUND-FLOOR DWELLING UNITS

Identify and count all ground-floor dwelling units in the project (Figure 6), keeping the following
guidance in mind:
·· The ground floor of a multistory dwelling unit must meet the requirements.
·· Dwelling units occupying only upper floors do not count.
STEP 2. ENSURE SUFFICIENT ELEVATED GROUND-FLOOR UNITS

Of the ground-floor units identified in Step 1, place at least half of them the specified distance above the
grade of the adjacent sidewalk.
211
NPD
WALKABLE STREETS
Figure 7. Elevated ground-floor units
Requirement (l). Street-level retail, live-work, and dwelling units
STEP 1. COUNT OFFICE AND MIXED-USE BUILDINGS AND MEASURE FAÇADE LENGTH
Identify and count the office buildings and mixed-use buildings on the site.
Measure and record the façade length of each individual office building and mixed-use building in the
project, including all driveways, entryways, and service entries. Entering this information in a table may
be helpful.
STEP 2. IDENTIFY ELIGIBLE STREET-LEVEL USES AND ENSURE FUNCTIONAL ENTRY ONTO
PUBLIC SPACE
For each building, note the eligible uses, as listed in the credit requirements. For any businesses or
community services on the ground floor of any office building or any mixed-use building, include a
functional entry that opens to the circulation or other public space. See NPD Prerequisite Walkable
Streets, requirement (a).
USGBC LEED Guide

STEP 3. MEASURE Illustrations
FAÇADE LENGTH FOR ELIGIBLE STREET-LEVEL USES NPD6
NPDc1:
For each building, measure the façade length of eligible street-level uses, as indicated Walkable Streets_6
in the credit
requirements.
Note that the eligible uses are different for office buildings and mixed-use buildings.
STEP 4. COMPUTE INDIVIDUAL BUILDING COMPLIANCE

Use Equation 7 to determine whether each building’s street-level use(s) meets the requirement for
percentage of façade.
212
EQUATION 7. Percentage of compliant street-level façade, per building
Length of façade with eligible uses

% façade = × 100
Total length of façade
Not all office buildings are required to meet the threshold.

All mixed-use buildings must meet the threshold. A single noncompliant mixed-use building disqualifies a
project from meeting the requirement.
STEP 5. COUNT COMPLIANT OFFICE BUILDINGS

Determine the number of compliant office buildings. If at least half are compliant, the requirement is
achieved.
NPD
Requirement (m). Building-height-to-street-centerline ratio

Follow the instructions for NPD Prerequisite Walkable Streets, requirement (b), but ensure that the
project meets the higher block length threshold necessary for credit compliance.
Requirements (n) and (o). Safe speeds
STEP 1. MEASURE RESIDENTIAL-ONLY CIRCULATION NETWORK LENGTH

·· Identify any segments of the motorized circulation network bordering only residential uses on both
sides.
·· Measure the length of these residential-only segments. Requirement (n) (low-speed design on 75% of
length) applies to the cumulative length of these residential-only segments.
STEP 2. MEASURE NONRESIDENTIAL OR MIXED-USE CIRCULATION NETWORK LENGTH

·· Identify any nonresidential or mixed-use segments of the motorized circulation network. This includes
any segment of the circulation network not bordering residential-only uses on both sides (as identified
in Step 1).
·· Measure the length of these nonresidential and mixed-use segments.
·· Requirement (o) (low-speed design on 70% of length) applies to the cumulative length of these
nonresidential and mixed-use segments.
STEP 3. DESIGN SUFFICIENT LOW-SPEED MOTORIZED CIRCULATION NETWORKS

Design and implement low-speed residential and/or nonresidential streets to comply with the
requirements for (n) and (o), as determined in Steps 1 and 2. See Further Explanation, Designing for
Slower Streets.
Requirement (p). Limited sidewalk intrusions

Follow the instructions for NPD Prerequisite Walkable Streets, requirement (d), but ensure that the
project also meets the credit requirements for driveway crossings.
213
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
DESIGNING FOR SLOWER SPEEDS

When designing neighborhoods for slower street speeds, keep the following in mind:
·· Techniques for designing slower streets include narrow right-of-ways, narrow lane widths, and on-street
parking.
·· A multiway boulevard with travel lanes separated from access lanes by medians may apply the requirements to
its outer lanes only.
NPD
·· If the local jurisdiction’s speed limits do not meet the credit requirements, provide evidence of the policy
or the denial of a request to post lower speed limits, plus evidence that the street meets the design and
engineering criteria for the intended speed:
°° Presence of on-street parking (parallel or angled) on 70% or more of both sides of the street, for the length
WALKABLE STREETS
of the street
°° Intersections spaced no more than 800 feet (243 meters) apart
°° Paving material with texture
°° Presence of medians and median landscaping
°° Roadside and curb treatments, including bulb-outs, street furniture, and other landscaping elements
°° Travel lane widths no greater than 11 feet (3 meters) and parallel parking lane widths no greater than 8 feet
(2 meters)
·· Consult the technical standards of the Institute of Transportation Engineers for additional design speed
information.
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Areas without speed limits must follow the same guidance above for project teams whose local jurisdiction’s speed
limits do not meet the credit requirements.
Many of the prerequisite’s calculations require an understanding of parcel boundaries, which have a specific
meaning in the U.S. A “parcel” is a plot of land that can be individually owned, bought, and sold. Most parcels are
created from the subdivision of a larger piece of land. The legal boundaries between adjacent parcels, or between a
parcel and adjacent public space or right-of-ways, are “property lines.”
LS Explanation of how project will be designed to meet credit requirements X
CP CB Map showing relevant project design features pursued for this credit X

214
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

NPD Prerequisite Walkable Streets. The related prerequisite sets minimum thresholds for this credit’s
requirements and identifies the base project measurements, such as façade length and block length.
NPD Credit Visitability and Universal Design. Elevating 50% of ground-floor units 24 inches above grade (k)
still allows the project team to build other ground-floor units that are accessible at grade and should therefore not
prevent the project from qualifying for the related credit.
GIB Prerequisite Minimum Building Energy Performance and GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy
Performance. The pedestrian benefits of clear windows should be compared with the energy-saving benefits of
low-emissivity (“low E” or “tinted”) glass.
NPD

·· Street has been changed to circulation network.
·· Building-height-to-street-width ratio is now building-height-to-centerline ratio.
None.
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
entrance.
215
Compact Development
Plan
NPD
Built Project
1–6 points
COMPACT DEVELOPMENT
INTENT
To conserve land and protect farmland and wildlife habitat by

encouraging development in areas with existing infrastructure. To
promote livability, walkability, and transportation efficiency, and reduce
vehicle distance traveled. To improve public health by encouraging daily
physical activity.
REQUIREMENTS
Design and build the project such that residential and nonresidential components achieve the densities per acre (per
hectare) of buildable land listed in Table 1 at build-out or within five years of the date that the first new building of
any type is occupied (excluding those portions of parking structures devoted to parking), whichever is lower.
TABLE 1. Points for density per acre (hectare) of buildable land
Residential density
Nonresidential density (FAR) Points
DU/acre DU/hectare
> 10 and ≤ 13 > 25 and ≤ 32 > 0.75 and ≤ 1.0 1
> 13 and ≤ 18 > 32 and ≤ 45 > 1.0 and ≤ 1.25 2
> 18 and ≤ 25 > 45 and ≤ 62 > 1.25 and ≤ 1.75 3
> 25 and ≤ 38 > 62 and ≤ 94 > 1.75 and ≤ 2.25 4
> 38 and ≤ 63 > 94 and ≤ 156 > 2.25 and ≤ 3.0 5
> 63 > 156 > 3.0 6

216
The scoring of a mixed-use project is calculated with a weighted average, according to the following steps.
1. Determine the total floor area of all residential and nonresidential uses.
2. Calculate the percentage residential and percentage nonresidential of the total floor area.
3. Determine the density of each component as measured in dwelling units per acre or hectare and floor-area
ratio, respectively.
4. Referring to Table 1, find the appropriate points for the densities of the residential and nonresidential
components.
5. If the points are different, multiply the point value of the residential component by its percentage of the total
floor area and multiply the point value of the nonresidential component by its percentage.
6. Add the two scores.
NPD
217
BEHIND THE INTENT

This credit rewards projects that exceed the minimum densities of NPD Prerequisite Compact Development and has
the same purpose, implications, and benefits.
STEP 1. DETERMINE PROJECT DENSITIES

Follow the steps in NPD Prerequisite Compact Development to calculate density.
·· As in the prerequisite, calculate density at build-out and at five years after first building occupancy,
NPD
and use the lower of the two values to determine points earned.
·· Unlike the prerequisite, the credit makes no distinction between areas with transit service and other
areas. Use overall density.
COMPACT DEVELOPMENT
STEP 2. DETERMINE NUMBER OF POINTS EARNED
Refer to the densities in Table 1 to determine the project’s points.
For mixed-use projects, if residential and nonresidential densities earn different point values, use a
weighted average calculation by area to determine points earned (Equation 1). Calculated points must be
rounded down to the nearest integer.
EQUATION 1. Weighted average points calculation
Residential Residential Nonresidential Nonresidential

Total percentage point value percentage point value
points
= of total floor
× based on
+ of total floor
× based on
area density area density
For example, consider a project with a residential density of 30 DUs/hectare (1 point) and a
nonresidential density of 1.5 FAR (3 points). The project’s residential floor area is 60% of the total, and
nonresidential is 40%.
Total points = [(0.6 x 1 point) + (0.4 x 3 points)]
= 1.8 (round down)
= 1 point
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
See Step-by-Step Guidance and NPD Prerequisite Compact Development.
218
LS CP CB Density calculations for full build-out and five years after first building occupancy X
Land-use map showing residential, nonresidential, and mixed-use buildings and boundaries of fifth-year
LS CP CB X
build-out area
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

NPD
NPD Prerequisite Compact Development. Like the related prerequisite, this credit compares density at five years
after first building occupancy with density at full build-out; if those densities are different, the lesser value is used
for credit compliance. Unlike the prerequisite, the credit requires high levels of density regardless of transit service
levels.

None.
None.
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
parking.
219
Mixed-Use
Neighborhoods
NPD
Plan
Built Project
MIXED-USE NEIGHBORHOODS
1–4 points
INTENT
To reduce vehicle distance traveled and automobile dependence,

encourage daily walking, biking, and transit use, and support car-free
living by providing access to diverse land uses.
REQUIREMENTS
Locate or design the project such that 50% of its dwelling units are within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) walking distance
of the number of uses (see Appendix 1) listed in Table 1. For projects with no dwelling units, 50% of dwelling units
within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) walking distance of the project boundary must be within a 1/4-mile (400-meter)
walking distance of the number of uses within the project specified in Table 1.
The specified number of uses must be in place by the time of 50% occupancy of total building floor area (exclusive
of portions of parking structures devoted to parking).
TABLE 1. Points for uses within 1/4-mile (400-meter)

walking distance, by percentage of occupancy
Diverse uses Points
4–7 1
8–11 2
12–19 3
≥ 20 4
220
The following restrictions apply.

·· A use may be counted as only one use type (e.g., a retail store may be counted only once even if it sells products
in several categories).
·· No more than two uses in each use type may be counted (e.g., if five restaurants are within the required
distance, only two may be counted).
·· The uses accessible to each counted dwelling unit must represent at least two categories.
··
For projects with regional-serving retail of 150,000 or more square
feet (13 935 square meters) only
Additionally, a project that has at least one large retail use (defined as a use totaling 75,000 or more square feet
[7 000 or more square meters]), must also meet at least the 2-point threshold for transit service under SLL Credit
Access to Quality Transit. In this case, planned transit service can be counted. Each large retail use must be served
by at least one transit stop providing trips that qualify under that SLL Credit.
NPD
If transit service is planned but not yet operational, the project must demonstrate one of the following:
1. The relevant transit agency has a signed full-funding grant agreement with the Federal Transit Administration
(or equivalent national agency for projects outside the U.S.) that includes a revenue operations date for
the start of transit service. The revenue operations date must be no later than the day by which 50% of the
project’s total building floor area will be occupied.
2. For bus, streetcar, bus rapid transit, or ferry service, the transit agency must certify that it has an approved
above and that service at these levels will begin no later than the day by which 50% of the project’s total
building floor area will be occupied.
3. For rail service other than streetcars, the transit agency must certify that preliminary engineering for a rail line
°° A state legislature or local subdivision of the state (or local government for projects outside the U.S.) has
authorized the transit agency to expend funds to establish rail transit service that will begin no later than the
date by which 50% of the project’s total building floor area will be occupied.
OR
°° A local government has dedicated funding or reimbursement commitments from future tax revenue for the
than the date by which 50% of the project’s total building floor area will be occupied.
221
BEHIND THE INTENT

Mixed-use development achieves a long list of documented environmental and social benefits. Residents in centrally
located, well-designed neighborhoods drive as little as half as much as residents of outlying areas.1 Besides reducing
distance driven, access to a variety of amenities also reduces the rate of car collision fatalities2, increases physical
activity, and improves community health outcomes.
Mixed-use development has also been shown to boost tax revenue for local municipalities. For instance, one
study in the United Kingdom indicated that mixed-use development raised both commercial and residential
property values, decreased investment risk, and generally represented a greater return on investment relative to
properties without a mix of uses.3
This credit ensures that a majority of residents can reach a diverse set of destinations on foot. The maximum
walking distance for qualifying uses reflects the finding that most people prefer to walk no more than 1/4-mile (400
meters), or about five minutes, to casual destinations.4 In addition, by allowing diverse uses access to be calculated
from half rather than all of dwelling units, project teams can provide the benefits of these amenities while having
NPD
flexibility in project design and site programming.
To ensure a diversity of amenities, the credit restricts which uses can and cannot count. This allows occupants
to combine their trips—for example, stopping at a dry cleaner’s on the way to the bank. Appendix 1 identifies these
diverse uses categories and types. The credit’s transit service requirements for large retail uses are intended to reduce
reliance on automobile travel, since large retail uses typically attract many people outside of walking distance.
STEP 1. IDENTIFY PROJECT SITE AND CONSIDER DESIGN

Identify potential project sites based on their proximity to a variety of uses. Also consider sites where
development activity will produce new uses in a similar timeframe as the construction of the LEED ND
project. See Appendix 1, Use Types and Categories.
Where possible, design the project to locate residential development within walking distance of existing
or planned uses.
STEP 2. MAKE INITIAL ASSESSMENT OF NEARBY USES

Survey the eligible existing and planned diverse uses in or near the project and classify them according
to Appendix 1.
·· To be eligible, uses that are planned but not currently operating must be in operation by the time of
50% project occupancy of total building floor area (exclusive of the floor area devoted to parking).
·· Uses may be inside or outside the project boundary.
STEP 3. MAP WALKING ROUTES FROM DWELLING UNITS TO USES

On a map, plot walking routes from dwelling units inside the project boundary to the identified uses.
To limit the number of routes that must be drawn, start with uses near the highest density of housing,
or housing near the highest density of uses. Create a table identifying the number and types of uses
accessible to each counted dwelling unit.
In lieu of individual walking routes, “walksheds” may be drawn around dwelling units to indicate the
total area within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) walking distance from a dwelling unit. Diverse uses located
within each walkshed may be counted for that dwelling unit. See Getting Started, Walking and Bicycling
Distances.
1 T. Litman and R. Steele, Land Use Impacts on Transport: How Land Use Factors Affect Travel Behavior (PDF) (2011). http://www.vtpi.org/landtravel.pdf
2 Health Impact Assessment on Policies Reducing Vehicle Miles Traveled in Oregon Metropolitan Areas (Upstream Public Health, 2009).
3 http://webarchive.nationalarchives.gov.uk/20120919132719/http://www.communities.gov.uk/documents/planningandbuilding/pdf/156291.pdf
4 Interview with Dan Burden, Walkable Communities, cited in Raimi + Associates and Public Health Law and Policy, How to Create and Implement Healthy
General Plans (2008), p. B2, changelabsolutions.org/sites/default/files/Healthy_General_Plans_Toolkit_Updated_20120517_0.pdf (accessed June 10,
2013).
222
If the project has no dwelling units, draw routes to the project’s uses from dwelling units within 1/4-mile
(400 meters) of the project boundary.
STEP 4. COUNT ACCESSIBLE USES PER DWELLING UNIT

Determine the number and category of contributing uses, per the credit requirements. Count the total
eligible uses for each dwelling unit, noting the restriction on the number from each category and use
type.
·· Ensure that each counted dwelling unit can reach eligible uses in at least two of the four categories in
Appendix 1: food retail, community-serving retail, services, and civic and community facilities.
·· Ensure that no more than two use types within each category are counted for each dwelling unit.
STEP 5. CALCULATE NUMBER OF POINTS

Refer to Table 1 to determine the number of points available, based on the number of uses within the
specified walking distance per dwelling unit.
·· Identify the highest number of uses accessible to at least 50% of dwelling units. Some dwelling units
NPD
may have access to more than the number of uses in the minimum credit threshold selected.
·· See Further Explanation, Example.
Projects with Regional-Serving Retail
STEP 1. IDENTIFY LARGE RETAIL USES IN PROJECT

Identify the total floor area of retail space in the project and the floor area of the largest retail use.
·· If the project has total retail space of at least 150,000 square feet (13 935 square meters) or has one or
more retail uses totaling at least 75,000 square feet (6970 square meters), follow Steps 2 and 3.
·· If the project does not meet either threshold for retail space, no further requirements apply.
STEP 2. CONFIRM THAT PROJECT MEETS MINIMUM TRANSIT TRIP FREQUENCY

Determine whether transit for the project would meet the 2-point threshold for weekday and weekend
service levels listed in SLL Credit Access to Quality Transit, Tables 1 and 2.
See Getting Started, Transit Service for instruction on demonstrating transit levels.
STEP 3. MAP LOCATION OF ELIGIBLE TRANSIT STOPS

For each large retail use, at least one bus, streetcar, or rideshare stop must be within a 1/4-mile
(400-meter) walking distance, or at least one bus rapid transit, light or heavy rail, commuter rail, or ferry
station must be within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
EXAMPLE
A project has a planned residential component of four buildings, totaling 20 dwelling units. The project team maps
the diverse uses in the nearby town center, noting their type and category (Appendix 1), and designs the project such
that 15 of the dwelling units are sited near the town center.
Using the vicinity map, the project team lists the dwelling units and diverse uses in a table, entering no more than
two uses of a given use type (e.g., including two but not three restaurants) (Table 2).
223
TABLE 2. Example determination of uses within walking distance
Uses within walking distance, by category
Civic and
Community- Total uses
Building ID DUs Food retail Services community
serving retail (categories)
facilities
Building A 10 1 2 6 1 10 (4)
Building B 4 0 1 4 1 6 (3)
Building C 5 0 0 0 0 0
Building D 1 0 0 5 0 5 (1)
DU = dwelling unit
Of the four residential buildings, Building A (10 dwelling units) is within walking distance of 10 uses representing
NPD
four categories. Building B (four dwelling units) is within walking distance of six uses representing three categories.
Building C (five dwelling units) is not within walking distance of any uses. Building D (one dwelling unit) is within
walking distance of five uses but does not meet the requirement that those uses represent at least two categories.
Referring to the map, the team determines that 70% (14 of 20) dwelling units are within walking distance of
six qualifying uses, earning 1 point. However, 50% (10 of 20) dwelling units are also within walking distance of 10
qualifying uses, so the project earns 2 points.
Projects with regional-
serving retail
Vicinity map showing uses within walk distance to residential

LS CP CB X
units
Table of uses identified by type, with calculations for total
CP CB dwelling units within walking distance of qualifying uses and X
minimum number of uses accessible
CP CB Total weekday and weekend trips for large retail uses X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Credit Access to Quality Transit. The related credit prescribes the threshold and method for calculating
required transit service for projects with regional-serving retail.

·· Separate requirements for projects larger than 40 acres (16 hectares) have been removed.
·· Restrictions on uses that share the same building entrance have been removed.
·· Food retail is no longer required as one of the two minimum categories of diverse uses.
·· Minimum project occupancy thresholds for planned uses have been removed from Table 1. All planned uses
must be in place by the time of 50% occupancy, regardless of the point threshold attempted.
224
None.
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
NPD
diverse use a distinct business or organization that provides goods or services intended to meet daily needs and is
publicly available. Automated facilities such as ATMs or vending machines are not included. For a full list, see the
Appendix.
streetcar a transit service with small, individual rail cars. Spacing between stations is uniformly short and ranges
from every block to 1/4-mile (400 meters), and operating speeds are primarily 10–30 mph (15–50 kmh). Streetcar
routes typically extend 2–5 miles (3–8 kilometers).
225
Housing Types
and Affordability
NPD
Plan
Built Project
HOUSING TYPES AND AFFORDABILITY

1–7 points
INTENT
To promote socially equitable and engaging neighborhoods by enabling

residents from a wide range of economic levels, household sizes, and
age groups to live in a community.
REQUIREMENTS
Meet the requirements of one or more of the following options.
OPTION 1. DIVERSITY OF HOUSING TYPES (1–3 POINTS)

Include a sufficient variety of housing sizes and types in the project such that the total variety of planned and existing
housing within the project achieves a Simpson Diversity Index score greater than 0.5, using the housing categories
below. Projects of less than 125 acres (50.5 hectares) may calculate the Simpson Diversity Index for the area within
1/4-mile (400 meters) of the project’s geographic center. The Simpson Diversity Index calculates the probability that
any two randomly selected dwelling units in a project will be of a different type.
Score = 1 – ∑ (n/N)2
where
n = the total number of dwelling units in a single category, and

N = the total number of dwelling units in all categories.
226
TABLE 1. Points for housing diversity
Simpson Diversity Index score Points
> 0.5 to < 0.6 1
≥ 0.6 to < 0.7 2
≥ 0.7 3
Housing categories are defined by the dwelling unit’s net floor area, exclusive of any garage, as listed in Table 2.
TABLE 2. Housing categories
Type Square feet Square meters
Detached residential, large > 1,250 > 116

NPD
Detached residential, small ≤ 1,250 ≤ 116
Duplex or townhouse, large > 1,250 > 116
Duplex or townhouse, small ≤ 1,250 ≤ 116

Dwelling unit in multiunit building with no elevator, large > 1,250 > 116
Dwelling unit in multiunit building with no elevator, medium > 750 to ≤ 1,250 > 70 to ≤ 116
Dwelling unit in multiunit building with no elevator, small ≤ 750 ≤ 70
Dwelling unit in multiunit building with elevator, 4 stories or fewer, large > 1,250 > 116
Dwelling unit in multiunit building with elevator, 4 stories or fewer, medium > 750 to ≤ 1,250 > 70 to ≤ 116
Dwelling unit in multiunit building with elevator, 4 stories or fewer, small ≤ 750 ≤ 70
Dwelling unit in multiunit building with elevator, 5 to 8 stories, large > 1,250 > 116
Dwelling unit in multiunit building with elevator, 5 to 8 stories, medium > 750 to ≤ 1,250 > 70 to ≤ 116
Dwelling unit in multiunit building with elevator, 5 to 8 stories, small ≤ 750 ≤ 70
Dwelling unit in multiunit building with elevator, 9 stories or more, large > 1,250 > 116
Dwelling unit in multiunit building with elevator, 9 stories or more, medium > 750 to ≤ 1,250 > 70 to ≤ 116
Dwelling unit in multiunit building with elevator, 9 stories or more, small ≤ 750 ≤ 70
Live-work space, large > 1,250 > 116
Live-work space, small ≤ 1,250 ≤ 116
Accessory dwelling unit, large > 1,250 > 116
Accessory dwelling unit, small ≤ 1,250 ≤ 116
For the purposes of this credit, townhouse and live-work units may have individual ground-level entrances or be
within a multiunit or mixed-use building. Double counting is prohibited; each dwelling may be classified in only one
category. The number of stories in a building is inclusive of the ground floor regardless of its use.
AND/OR
OPTION 2. AFFORDABLE HOUSING (1–3 POINTS)

Include a proportion of new rental and/or for-sale dwelling units priced for households earning less than the area
median income (AMI). Rental units must be maintained at affordable levels for a minimum of 15 years. Existing
dwelling units are exempt from requirement calculations. Meet any combination of thresholds in Table 3, up to a
maximum of 3 points.
227
TABLE 3. Points for affordable housing
Rental dwelling units For-sale dwelling units
Priced up to 60% AMI Priced up to 80% AMI Priced up to 100% AMI Priced up to 120% AMI
Percentage of total Percentage of total Percentage of total Percentage of total

Points Points Points Points
rental units rental units for-sale units for-sale units
5 1 10 1 5 1 8 1
10 2 15 2 10 2 12 2
15 3 25 3 15 3 — —
AMI = area median income
NPD
AND/OR
OPTION 3. HOUSING TYPES AND AFFORDABLE HOUSING (1 POINT)

A project may earn an additional point by earning at least 2 points in Option 1 and at least 2 points in Option 2 (at
least one of which must be for providing housing at or below 100% AMI).
228
BEHIND THE INTENT

Varied housing types, affordable housing, and multiple for-sale or rental price points are mutually reinforcing
strategies to support socially inclusive and equitable neighborhoods. Option 1 of this credit rewards a diversity
of housing options—from single-family homes to duplexes and apartments, and from small to large units—to
accommodate a broad range of potential residents. Such variety also enables residents to stay in the community
as their circumstances change, whether through age, a growing family, or income fluctuations. The measure for
diversity of housing is based on a well-known metric in ecology, the Simpson Diversity Index, adapted and simplified
for use in planning.
The features encouraged by LEED ND— walkability, central locations, and access to jobs, transit, and existing
services and neighborhood amenities—are also highly prized by affordable housing developers and residents
because they support better health, quality of life, and economic opportunity. The provision for affordable housing
in a green community asserts that green building techniques are attainable for all income levels, and many of the
hallmarks of green building, like energy and water efficiency, also save money for the owners or renters of affordable
NPD
housing.
In this spirit, Option 2 of this credit rewards careful pricing of units to accommodate underserved populations
and reflect the area’s income context. Project teams begin by setting goals for the income level or levels they would
like to serve. These target incomes are tailored to the project’s location, using the area’s median income as a baseline.
A further adjustment accounts for differences in family size, using the number of bedrooms in a given unit type as
proxy. Rental units are then priced from this figure, based on a monthly derivative of annual income and an estimate
of 30% as the maximum portion of annual income that should go toward rent.1 For-sale units are priced based on
total housing costs, which include principal, property taxes, and insurance.
To promote holistic housing strategies, an additional point is awarded to projects containing both diverse
housing types and high levels of affordability.
STEP 1. PROFILE EXISTING HOUSING IN PROJECT

Survey any existing housing inside the project boundary to determine the number and types of units.
Contact the local planning or tax assessor’s office to collect information on floor areas of dwelling units,
the number of dwellings in multiunit buildings, height, and other features, such as elevator provision.
·· If existing housing has a diversity of types or size, or if it is different from planned new housing, it will
help contribute to Option 1, Diversity of Housing Types. All existing housing must be included.
·· Although not counted explicitly in Option 2, Affordable Housing, existing housing may affect local
housing demand and should be considered when setting a strategy for rental and for-sale prices.
STEP 2. DETERMINE STRATEGY FOR NEW HOUSING AND SELECT CREDIT OPTION
Establish the number and type of residential units desired for the project during preliminary project
design. Consider project goals, existing housing stock, area demographics, market conditions, and
economic forecasts for the area. Select one or more options accordingly:
·· Option 1 may necessitate conducting a study to determine the feasibility of incorporating the various
housing types listed in Table 2 during preliminary planning stages.
·· Option 2 may entail engaging with local government agencies, nonprofit organizations, and other
entities early in the entitlement and financing process to identify local and state regulations or
incentives for affordable housing, such as inclusionary zoning or tax and fiscal policies.
·· Option 3 offers an additional point to projects that achieve high levels of compliance with Options 1
and 2.
1 U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, definition of “affordable housing,” http://www.huduser.org/portal/glossary/glossary_a.html
(accessed August 28, 2012).
229
Option 1. Diversity of Housing Types
STEP 1. DETERMINE CALCULATION AREA

The catchment area for evaluating new and existing housing per the Simpson Diversity Index is based on
the area inside the LEED project boundary.
·· Projects larger than 125 acres (50.5 hectares). Evaluate new and existing housing inside the project
boundary.
·· Projects smaller than 125 acres (50.5 hectares). Project teams have two choices:
°° Evaluate new and existing housing inside the project boundary.
OR
°° Evaluate new and existing housing inside the project boundary plus housing in the surrounding area
within 1/4-mile (400 meters) of the project’s geographic center.
STEP 2. ESTABLISH DIVERSITY OF HOUSING
NPD
During project planning, establish the size and type of each residence built as part of the project,
targeting a diversity of housing types, as listed in Table 2. For existing buildings in the project that are
not under the applicant’s control, consider using city property records or GIS metadata to estimate
number and size of dwelling units in each building.

STEP 3. CLASSIFY DWELLING UNITS BY HOUSING TYPE
Create a table to classify all existing and new dwelling units in the calculation area according to the
20 housing types listed in Table 2. List the housing types and the number of each in the project’s new
residential space.
STEP 4. CALCULATE SIMPSON DIVERSITY INDEX SCORE

Calculate the project’s Simpson Diversity Index score, using Equation 1 or the USGBC calculator. See
Further Explanation, Example 1. Refer to Table 1 to determine the number of points earned.
EQUATION 1. Simpson Diversity Index
Housing diversity score= 1 – ∑ (n/N)2
where
n = dwelling units in a single category
N = total dwelling units in all categories
The Simpson Diversity Index score is easiest to calculate using the calculator provided by USGBC.
To achieve Option 3, the project must earn at least 2 points in Option 1 for providing a diversity of
housing types. See Step-by-Step Guidance, Option 3.
Option 2. Affordable Housing
STEP 1. DETERMINE AREA MEDIAN INCOME FOR PROJECT LOCATION

Contact local or regional officials to determine the area median income associated with the project’s
location or, for U.S. projects, refer to the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development website.
See Further Explanation, Area Median Income (AMI).
STEP 2. DETERMINE TARGET INCOME FOR RESIDENTS

Use the AMI and Equation 2 to calculate the target household income percentages that the project seeks
to serve. For projects to earn points under Option 2 of this credit, rental units must target household
incomes that do not exceed 60% AMI or 80% AMI. For-sale units must target household incomes that do
not exceed 100% AMI or 120% AMI.
230
EQUATION 2. Target income
Target income = AMI × Household income percentage goal
·· Project teams may target more than one income level.

·· To achieve Option 3, the project must earn at least 2 points in Option 2 for providing affordable
housing. See Step-by-Step Guidance, Option 3.
STEP 3. ADJUST TARGET INCOME FOR EACH DWELLING SIZE

For each size of dwelling unit in the project, and at each selected target income level, adjust the target
income for family size using the appropriate bedroom factor, according to Table 4 and Equation 3.
TABLE 4. Bedroom (BR) factors for adjusting target income
Unit BR factor
NPD
Studio 0.70
1 BR 0.75
2 BR 0.90
3 BR 1.04
4 BR 1.16
EQUATION 3. Adjusted target income
Adjusted target income = Target income × BR factor
STEP 4. COMPUTE MAXIMUM PRICING

Calculate the maximum price that would qualify a rental or for-sale unit of a given size as affordable, for
each adjusted target income level.
·· For rental units, determine the maximum monthly rent according to Equation 4. A factor of 30%
is applied to adjusted target income as the recommended maximum percentage of income that
households should spend on rent payments.
EQUATION 4. Maximum monthly rent
Adjusted target income × 0.30

Maximum monthly rent =
12
·· For for-sale units, determine the maximum amount of income available to pay principal, taxes, and
insurance (PITI) according to Equation 5. A factor of 28% is applied to adjusted target income as the
recommended maximum percentage of income that households should spend on homeownership.
EQUATION 5. Maximum monthly PITI
Adjusted target income × 0.28

Maximum monthly PITI =
12
231
STEP 5. RESERVE REQUISITE NUMBER OF AFFORDABLE UNITS

Apply prices that do not exceed the calculated monthly rent and monthly PTI to the appropriate number
of units, using Equation 6 and the target AMI percentage from Table 3.
EQUATION 6. Minimum affordable units priced at selected AMI
Minimum units = Total units × Target AMI %
Points are earned for achieving any of the thresholds in Table 3, up to 3 points. For example, a project
with 10% of rental units priced at 60% AMI earns 2 points, and an additional 10% of rental units priced at
80% AMI earns 1 point.
STEP 6. OBTAIN BINDING AGREEMENT TO MAINTAIN AFFORDABLE RENTAL RATES FOR AT

LEAST 15 YEARS
NPD
Obtain a binding agreement from the responsible developer that the affordable rental rates will be
maintained for at least 15 years, starting from the date of unit occupancy. This agreement may be in the
form of a deed restriction, operating agreement, or other recorded document.

Option 3. Housing Types and Affordable Housing
STEP 1. CONFIRM PROJECT POINTS

Review the results of Option 1 and Option 2 calculations to confirm that the project can earn an
additional point. The following three criteria must be met:
·· Earn at least 2 points under Option 1.
·· Earn at least 2 points under Option 2.
·· Of the 2 points earned under Option 2, at least one must be for rental units priced below 60% or 80%
AMI or for for-sale units priced below 100% AMI.
232
FURTHER EXPLANATION
EXAMPLES
Example 1. Option 1, Diversity of Housing Types
A project has 2,358 dwelling units. The project team classifies them according to Table 2, as shown in Table 5.
Then, the team calculates (n/N)2 for each dwelling unit type. For example, the number of large detached
residential units, 238, divided by the total number of dwelling units, 2,358, is 0.1009, which when squared is 0.0102
(column 3). The team then sums the values in column 3.
TABLE 5. Example distribution of dwelling units
Unit type DUs (n) (n/N)2
Detached residential, large 238 0.0102

NPD
Detached residential, small 239 0.0103
Townhouses, small 378 0.0257

Apartments in multiunit building with elevator, four stories or fewer, medium 513 0.0473
Apartments in multiunit building with elevator, nine stories or more, large 909 0.1486
Live-work, large 45 0.0004
Accessory dwellings, small 36 0.0002
Total 2,358 (N) 0.2427
DU = dwelling unit
Finally, the team calculates the project’s Simpson Diversity Index, using Equation 1:
1 – ∑ (n/N)2 = 1 – 0.2427 = 0.7573
The index score exceeds 0.70, so the project earns 3 points.
Example 2. Option 2, Affordable Housing

A project with 350 studio and two-bedroom rental units will include a yet-to-be-determined number of units priced
for households up to 60% of the area median income. The team wants to earn 3 points under Option 2 and must
calculate the necessary number of units and their maximum monthly rent.
According to the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, the local AMI for a four-person
household is $99,000. The team calculates the income of the target renter, according to Equation 2.
Target income = AMI × 0.6 = $59,400
Target income is then adjusted for each dwelling type (studios and two-bedroom units) with the bedroom factors
(Table 4), using Equation 3.
Studio: Adjusted target income = Target income x 0.7 = $41,580
Two-bedroom unit: Adjusted target income = Target income x 0.9 = $53,460
A factor of 30% (the percentage of income to be used for rent) is applied to the adjusted target income for each type
of dwelling unit and converted into a maximum monthly rental rate.
Studio: [Adjusted target income x 30%] / 129 = $1,039.50 per month
Two-bedroom unit: [Adjusted target income x 30%)] / 12 = $1,336.50 per month

233
The percentage of affordable units required to earn 3 points is then obtained from Table 3 and calculated per
Equation 6.
Affordable units = 350 units x 15% = 53 units
Thus the project must price at least 53 of the rental units for 60% AMI.
There are several other combinations of affordable units that would earn a project 3 points. Other projects may
be able to earn 3 points using a combination of affordable for-sale and rental units. For example, 10% of the rentals
could be priced at 60% AMI (2 points) and 10% of the for-sale units could be priced at 100% AMI (1 point).
AREA MEDIAN INCOME

Area median income (AMI) is a standardized measure of the median income for a given place. In the U.S., AMI is
determined by the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development and may be found at huduser.org/portal/
NPD
datasets/il/il2012/select_Geography.odn.
INTERNATIONAL TIPS

Project teams outside the U.S. will need to identify a local source for area median income statistics, such as national
census or housing agencies. The International Labour Organization (ILO) of the United Nations may be a good
source of information to help determine AMI or identify a local agency (ilo.org). Project teams should use ILO as a
starting point to determine AMI but must take additional steps to determine localized data.
LS CP CB Site or vicinity map showing dwelling unit locations X X
LS CP CB Table of housing types by frequency X X
LS CP CB Narrative describing strategy for providing affordable rental and for-sale housing X X
LS CP CB Calculation for percentage of dwelling units at affordable housing levels X X
CP CB Copy of agreement to maintain affordable rates for at least 15 years X X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Credit Preferred Locations. Projects that earn at least 2 points for Option 2, Affordable Housing, in this credit
are eligible to pursue up to 3 additional points under Option 3, Designated High-Priority Locations, in the related
credit.
SLL Credit Brownfields Redevelopment and SLL Credit Preferred Locations. Because of funding sources
and other market pressures, projects with a significant affordability component are often located in designated
high-priority locations, which can earn points under both related credits. A project with affordable housing should
determine whether its location is officially designated or listed.
SLL Credit Housing and Jobs Proximity. Projects that earn at least 1 point for Option 2, Affordable Housing, can
pursue an additional point under Option 1, Project with Affordable Residential Component, of the related credit.
234
NPD Prerequisite Compact Development and NPD Credit Compact Development. Incorporating a wide range
of housing types and sizes is an effective strategy to increase residential density, aiding in the achievement of the
related prerequisite and credit.

None.
None.
NPD
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
area median income midpoint in the family-income range for a metropolitan statistical area, the non-metro parts
of a region, or local equivalent to either. The figure often is used as a basis to stratify incomes into low, moderate and
upper ranges.
235
Reduced Parking
Footprint
NPD
Plan
Built Project
REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT

1 point
INTENT
To minimize the environmental harms associated with parking facilities,

including automobile dependence, land consumption, and rainwater
runoff.
REQUIREMENTS
For new nonresidential buildings and multiunit residential buildings, either do not build new off-street parking lots,
or locate all new off-street surface parking lots at the side or rear, leaving building frontages facing the circulation
network free of surface parking lots (alleys may be exempted).
Use no more than 20% of the total development footprint area for all new off-street surface parking facilities,
with no individual surface parking lot larger than 2 acres (0.8 hectare). For the purposes of this credit, surface
parking facilities include ground-level garages unless they are under habitable building space. Underground or
multistory parking facilities can be used to provide additional spaces. On-street parking spaces are exempt from this
limitation.
Provide preferred parking for carpool or shared-use vehicle parking spaces equivalent to at least 10% of the total
off-street parking spaces for each nonresidential and mixed-use building on the site. Such parking spaces must be
marked and within 200 feet (60 meters) walking distance of entrances to the building served.
236
BEHIND THE INTENT

In the U.S., pavement covers roughly 35% of the surface area in average residential areas and 50% to 70% of the
surface area in average nonresidential areas.1 The surfaces of these parking lots fragment the streetscape, intensify
the urban heat island effect, and increase the volume of rainwater runoff by limiting ground infiltration.
This credit addresses the design of new surface parking by restricting surface area and instituting best
practices for parking design. Limits to the cumulative area of parking infrastructure encourage the conservation
of land and discourage automobile dependence, prompting more pedestrian-oriented communities and reducing
transportation-related air pollution and carbon emissions. Multistory and underground parking facilities are
rewarded as an effective strategy for minimizing surface parking footprint. Designating carpool and car-share vehicle
parking spaces encourages flexible modes of transportation that reduce the need for privately owned vehicles, in
turn reducing both vehicular trips and parking demand. Finally, locating surface parking lots to the side or rear of a
building makes sidewalks safer and entrances more accessible to pedestrians.
NPD
STEP 1. INCORPORATE STRATEGIES TO REDUCE PARKING DEMAND

Design the project to minimize street-level parking, and avoid placing off-street parking lots along the
circulation network.
The credit does not set a maximum or a standard for required number of parking spaces; however,
minimizing the number of parking spaces will make it easier to reduce the parking footprint and design
on-site parking to meet the credit requirements.
STEP 2. DETERMINE TARGET NUMBER OF OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES

Identify the number of off-street parking spaces that will be included to meet project demand. Conduct
an inventory of existing parking facilities to determine how many new parking spaces are needed.
STEP 3. CALCULATE REQUIRED CARPOOL AND SHARED-VEHICLE PARKING

Select a vehicle strategy (carpool, shared-use vehicle, or combination of both). Count the number of new
and existing parking spaces associated with each nonresidential and multiunit residential building on the
project site. Designate at least the minimum required percentage of the total parking capacity of each
building for use by carpool vehicles or shared-use vehicles only.
STEP 4. DESIGN PARKING

If the project is providing new off-street parking, design and locate new parking, including carpool and
shared-used vehicle parking spaces, to meet the credit requirements. Indicate all elements and relevant
distances on a site map.
·· Consider establishing underground parking, constructing multistory parking facilities, or sharing
parking with adjacent facilities to reduce surface parking area.
·· Locate surface parking lots to the side or rear of a building, according to the credit requirements for
building frontage. Consider including clear pedestrian walkways and native plantings to make parking
lots more pedestrian friendly and soften hardscape.
·· Projects that do not include any new parking must have existing parking on the site that complies with
carpool and shared-vehicle parking requirements.
·· As for all other LEED ND credits, the credit requirements must be met regardless of local zoning
codes. If the authority having jurisdiction will not grant an exemption so that the project can meet the
requirements, the project is not eligible for this credit.
·· See Further Explanation, Example.
1 H. Akbari, L. Shea Rose, and H. Taha, Analyzing the Land Cover of an Urban Environment Using High-Resolution Orthophotos, Landscape and Urban
Planning (2003).
237
STEP 5. CALCULATE DEVELOPMENT FOOTPRINT

Determine the development footprint of the project. For calculation instructions, see Getting Started,
Development Footprint.
STEP 6. MEASURE TOTAL SURFACE PARKING FOOTPRINT

Tabulate and sum the total surface area of new off-street surface parking planned for or provided in the
project.
·· The project’s total new surface parking footprint must include the following:
°° Surface parking, including drive aisles and driveways leading into these parking lots
°° Ground-level parking in a one-story parking structure, unless under habitable building space,
including driveways leading into these parking structures
°° Pull-in parking in alleys
·· The project’s total new surface parking footprint may exclude these features:
°° Multistory parking structures, underground parking facilities, and ground-level parking facilities
under habitable building space, including driveways or ramps leading into these parking structures
NPD
°° On-street parking, including both parallel and pull-in parking
°° Parallel parking in alleys
°° Vegetated areas and elevated sidewalks in new surface parking lots

STEP 7. CONFIRM THAT NEW SURFACE PARKING FOOTPRINT MEETS CREDIT
REQUIREMENTS
Confirm that the total area does not exceed 20% of the development footprint of the project, and that
any one new surface parking lot does not exceed 2 acres (0.8 hectare). If surface parking area exceeds
the credit threshold, revise the parking design.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
EXAMPLE
Figure 1 illustrates four parking strategies and their treatment in LEED ND.
238
Multi-level parking structure (not

subject to credit requirements)
Surface lot behind building

(subject to credit requirements)
NPD
Surface parking in front of Residential on-street parking

building (subject to credit (not subject to credit
requirements) requirements)
Figure 1. Example parking lots
FACILITIES
·· Facility 1. On-street parallel or pull-in spaces are not subject to the credit requirements.
·· Facility 2. Surface parking behind a building is subject to the 20% of total development footprint limit and, by
default, to the building-frontage requirement.
·· Facility 3. A standalone multistory parking garage is not subject to the building-frontage requirement.
NPDc5: Reduced Parking Footprint_2
·· Facility 4. Surface parking in front of the building makes a project ineligible for this credit.
239
No New
Documentation New Parking
Parking
LS CP CB Summary of parking and strategies used to avoid new parking creation X
LS Justification for new off-street parking and description of plan to limit new parking X
Site map or parking plan highlighting new surface parking and single story parking
CP CB X
garages not under habitable buildings, carpool, and shared-use vehicle parking
CP CB Table listing surface parking areas X
CP CB Table listing preferred parking areas X
NPD

RELATED CREDIT TIPS
NPD Prerequisite Walkable Streets and NPD Credit Walkable Streets. Avoiding street-fronting parking and
large parking lots, as required for this credit, will help projects achieve the setback maximums and ground-level use
requirements of the related prerequisite and credit. When designing parking, review the requirements for garage
entries into structured parking and driveways to off-street parking in the related prerequisite and credit.
NPD Credit Transportation Demand Management. Instituting the related credit’s strategies can reduce the need
for parking, making it easier to reduce the parking footprint.
GIB Credit Rainwater Management. A reduction in surface parking hardscape can help projects achieve the on-site
rainwater retention requirements of the related credit. Bioswales or other vegetated areas in a parking lot may help
reduce both surface parking footprint and runoff volume.
GIB Credit Heat Island Reduction. Using solar-reflecting materials on parking structures and designing buildings
with integrated underground parking can contribute to Option 2, High-Reflectance and Vegetated Roofs, of the
related credit.

Bicycle storage requirements have been moved to SLL Credit Bicycle Facilities.
None.
Not available.
240
DEFINITIONS
NPD
241
Connected and
Open Community
NPD
Plan
Built Project

1–2 points
INTENT
To conserve land and promote multimodal transportation by

encouraging development within existing communities that have high
levels of internal connectivity and are well connected to the larger
community. To improve public health by encouraging daily physical
activity and reducing motor vehicle emissions.
REQUIREMENTS
Locate or design the project such that its internal connectivity falls within one of the ranges listed in Table 1. If the
project has no internal circulation network, the connectivity within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) distance of the project
boundary must be used.
TABLE 1. Points for connectivity
Intersections per square mile Intersections per square kilometer Points
300–400 116–154 1
> 400 > 154 2
All parts of the circulation network that are counted toward the connectivity requirement must be available for
general public use at all times and not gated. No more than 10% of the project area may be accessed via circulation
network that is gated. Education campuses, health care campuses, and military bases where gates are used for
security purposes are exempt from the 10% limit, and intersections within those projects may be counted toward the
connectivity requirement.
242
AND
Design or locate the project such that a through-connection (of the circulation network) intersects or terminates
at the project boundary at least every 400 feet (122 meters) or at existing abutting intervals and intersections of the
circulation network, whichever is the shorter distance. Include a pedestrian or bicycle through-connection in at least
90% of any new culs-de-sac. These requirements do not apply to portions of the boundary where connections cannot
be made because of physical obstacles, such as prior platting of property, construction of existing buildings or other
barriers, slopes steeper than 15%, wetlands and water bodies, railroad and utility rights-of-way, existing limited-
access motor vehicle rights-of-way, and parks and dedicated open space.
NPD
243
BEHIND THE INTENT

This credit encourages projects to go beyond the corresponding prerequisite’s requirements for connectivity.
Establishing greater connectivity within the project and more frequent through-connections across the project
boundary, as well as bicycle or pedestrian through-connections on culs-de-sac, enhances the benefits of highly
connected developments. Each of the required measures improves transportation networks that encourage walking
and bicycling.
NPD
STEP 1. USE SAME CALCULATION AREA AS RELATED PREREQUISITE
Use the same calculation area required when determining cases in NPD Prerequisite Connected and
Open Community.

·· Projects pursuing Case 1, External Connectivity of the related prerequisite should calculate
intersections within 1/4 mile (400 meter) distance of the project boundary.
·· Projects pursuing Case 2, Internal Connectivity of the related prerequisite should calculate
intersections within the project boundary. This case and calculation area is appropriate for most LEED
ND projects.
STEP 2. DETERMINE CONNECTIVITY

Follow Step-by-Step Guidance in the prerequisite to determine connectivity. Connectivity must meet or
exceed 300 or 400 intersections per square mile (116 or 154 intersections per square kilometer), for 1 or 2
points, respectively.
STEP 3. CALCULATE INTERVALS BETWEEN THROUGH-CONNECTIONS

·· Projects that followed Case 1 in the prerequisite do not need to meet through-connection
requirements.
·· Projects that followed Case 2 should use the interval calculation in the prerequisite to determine
whether through-connections will occur at least every 400 feet.
STEP 4. CONFIRM CUL-DE-SAC THROUGH-CONNECTIONS

Identify and mark on a site map all culs-de-sac inside the project boundary. Ensure pedestrian or bicycle
through-connections for at least 90% of culs-de-sac.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
See NPD Prerequisite Connected and Open Community.
EXAMPLES
See NPD Prerequisite Connected and Open Community.
244
LS CP CB Intersection density calculations X
LS CP CB Map showing eligible intersections of the circulation network X
LS CP CB Intersection density calculations X
CP CB Calculation of percentage of project area accessed via gated circulation network X

NPD
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Prerequisite Smart Location. The related prerequisite also measures connectivity and distance between
through-connections along the project boundary but entails connectivity in a smaller area and requires through-
connections along the adjacent portion of the project boundary, regardless of physical obstacles.
SLL Credit Preferred Locations. The related credit rewards higher connectivity in a larger area of the surrounding
existing circulation network.
NPD Prerequisite Connected and Open Community. This credit requires bicycle or pedestrian through-
connections in culs-de-sac, whereas the related prerequisite does not.

Street has been changed to circulation network.
None.
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
245
Transit Facilities
Plan
NPD
Built Project
1 point
TRANSIT FACILITIES
INTENT
To encourage transit use and reduce vehicle distance traveled by

providing safe, convenient, and comfortable transit waiting areas.
REQUIREMENTS
Work with the transit agency or agencies serving the project to inventory existing transit stops and new transit
stops within the project boundary that will be warranted within two years of project completion (because of either
increased ridership on existing service or planned transit).
At those locations,
1. Confirm that transit facilities will be funded by either the transit agency or the project developer.
2. Install transit agency-approved shelters and any other required improvements at existing stops. Reserve space
for transit facilities or install transit facilities at new stops.
Shelters must be covered, be at least partially enclosed to buffer wind and rain, have seating and illumination, and
have signage that display transit schedules and route information.
246
BEHIND THE INTENT

For a typical transit trip, 10% to 30% of travel time is spent waiting at a stop.1 Research indicates that making
these stops more comfortable, attractive, safe, and convenient tends to increase transit ridership, particularly for
“discretionary” riders who have the choice of driving or taking transit.2 The nature of the shelters and station facilities
where people wait are as important for supporting ridership as frequent, well-connected transit service.3, 4 A favorable
experience waiting for a bus or a train will encourage riders to take public transit again, and using transit promotes
physical activity and fitness while reducing greenhouse gas emissions, pollution, and other environmental harms.
This credit sets minimum standards for well-equipped transit stops, including seating, shelter, lighting, and
schedule information. Since public transit is commonly provided by a local or regional transit agency, the credit calls
for close coordination between transit agencies and the project team in siting and installing transit stop facilities.
Developing an early working relationship with the transit agency will help integrate the transit from the very outset
of the project and sustain its use over time.
NPD
STEP 1. IDENTIFY EXISTING TRANSIT STOPS

Map all existing stops within the project boundary. Transit authority websites, bus maps, and field
observation are good starting points. While conducting the inventory, the team may find it useful to
photograph each transit stop, catalogue current shelter amenities, and record desired maintenance and
upgrades to improve ridership.
STEP 2. MEET WITH TRANSIT AUTHORITY

For projects that feature substantial right-of-way improvements and/or increases in density, additional
transit stops may be warranted to maximize ridership. Project teams should work with transit authorities
to describe the proposed development, with the goal of obtaining commitment from the authority to
increasing the number, frequency, and amenities of waiting areas.
·· Inquire about the process for approving new stops to understand how the project may affect transit
planning and budgeting cycles.
·· Collect current design standards for all types of transit stops within the project boundary.
STEP 3. IDENTIFY TRANSIT STOP IMPROVEMENT NEEDS

Evaluate the agency’s design standards for shelters and transit stops and compare them with the credit
requirements. If needed, work with the agency to revise standards to include all required amenities and
develop a plan to make specific improvements to stops located inside the project boundary.
STEP 4. CREATE IMPROVEMENT PLAN

Create a plan that addresses existing, new, and future stops to ensure that all stops will meet the credit
requirements.
·· For existing stops, list specific upgrades needed and indicate when they will be installed. Upgrades
and agency-required improvements should be installed as soon as possible.
·· For new stops, ensure that design standards meet the credit’s amenity requirements. If not, identify
the additional features needed for each location.
·· For future stops, build shelters in advance or, if shelters cannot be constructed at this time, reserve
space at the locations determined by the agency.
1 Victoria Transportation Policy Institute, TDM Encyclopedia: Transit Station Improvements (2010), http://www.vtpi.org/tdm/tdm127.htm (accessed April
24, 2012).
2 Kittleson & Associates (1999), Pratt (2004), and Littman (2007), cited in Victoria Transportation Policy Institute, TDM Encyclopedia: Transit Station
Improvements (2010), http://www.vtpi.org/tdm/tdm127.htm (accessed April 24, 2012).
3 Transit Cooperative Research Program, Amenities for Transit Handbook, Part 2: Impacts of Amenities, http://onlinepubs.trb.org/onlinepubs/tcrp/tcrp_
rpt_46-b.pdf (accessed April 24, 2012).
4 M.R. Talbott, Bus Stop Amenities and Their Relationship with Ridership: A Transportation Equity Approach, University of North Carolina at Greensboro,
http://libres.uncg.edu/ir/listing.aspx?id=7532 (accessed April 24, 2012).
247
Keep records of coordination discussions and agreements to facilitate credit documentation.
STEP 5. OBTAIN WRITTEN COMMITMENTS

If the project is in the early planning stages and shelters will not be installed immediately, the developer
or the transit authority must commit to funding and installation.
·· Either the transit authority or the project may fund the necessary improvements.
·· Work collaboratively with the transit authority to determine the installation schedule.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
NPD
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Transit service may be provided by private operators as well as government agencies, but it must be fixed-route,
fixed-schedule service. Informal services such as on-demand jitneys are not eligible.
TRANSIT FACILITIES
Description of collaboration with agency to inventory existing transit facilities and plan any new
LS X
qualifying facilities
Inventory of existing and planned transit stop facilities and indication if any new facilities that will be
CP CB X
needed within 2 years of project construction
Confirmation that agency-approved transit facilities meet credit requirements; implementation plan and
CP CB X
source of funding for any new transit facilities
CB Photograph or rendering of example transit stop facility X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.

·· The requirement to identify shelters that will be installed no later than 50% construction has been replaced
with a requirement to identify shelters where transit service will be warranted within two years of project
completion.
·· Bicycle storage requirements have been removed.
None.
248
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
None.
NPD
249
Transportation
Demand Management
NPD
Plan
Built Project
TRANSPORTATION DEMAND MANAGEMENT

1-2 points
INTENT
To reduce energy consumption, pollution, and harm to human health

from motor vehicles by encouraging multimodal travel.
REQUIREMENTS
Achieve at least two of the following options.
Earn 1 point for every two options, for a maximum of 2 points. For the purposes of this credit, existing buildings
and their occupants are exempt from the requirements.
OPTION 1. TRANSIT PASSES

Provide transit passes valid for at least one year, subsidized to 100% of regular price, to each resident and employee
locating within the project during the first three years of project occupancy (or longer). Publicize the availability of
subsidized transit passes to project occupants.
AND/OR
OPTION 2. DEVELOPER-SPONSORED TRANSIT

Provide year-round, developer-sponsored transit service (vans, shuttles, buses) from at least one central point
in the project to other major transit facilities or to other destinations, such as a retail or employment center, with
service no less frequent than 45 daily weekday trips and 30 daily weekend trips. The service must begin by the time
the project’s total floor area is 20% occupied and must be guaranteed for at least three years beyond project build-
out. The occupancy requirement is met when residents are living in 20% of the dwelling units and/or employees are
working in 20% of the total nonresidential floor area.
250
Provide transit stop shelters and bicycle racks adequate to meet projected demand but no less than one shelter
and one bicycle rack at each transit stop. Shelters must be covered, be at least partially enclosed to buffer wind and
rain, and have seating and illumination. Bicycle racks must have a two-point support system for locking the frame
and wheels and must be securely affixed to the ground or a building.
AND/OR
OPTION 3. VEHICLE SHARING

Locate the project such that 50% of the dwelling units and nonresidential use entrances are within a 1/4-mile
(400-meter) walking distance of at least one vehicle in a vehicle-sharing program, as specified below, depending on
project size.
·· If the project has fewer than 100 dwelling units and/or employees, provide one vehicle.
·· If the project has more than 100 dwelling units and/or employees and has a minimum transit service of 60 daily
weekday trips and 40 daily weekend trips, provide at least one additional vehicle and parking space for every
NPD
100 dwelling units and/or employees.

·· If the project has more than 100 dwelling units and/or employees but does not have transit service at the
frequencies specified above, provide at least one additional vehicle and parking space for every 200 dwelling
units and/or employees.
For each vehicle, dedicate one parking space accessible to vehicle-sharing members. Publicize to project occupants
the availability and benefits of the vehicle-sharing program. Commit to providing vehicles to the locations for at
least two years. If a new vehicle-sharing location is planned, the vehicle-sharing program must begin by the time the
project’s total floor area is 20% occupied. The occupancy requirement is met when residents are living in 20% of the
dwelling units and/or employees are working in 20% of the total nonresidential floor area.
AND/OR
OPTION 4. UNBUNDLING OF PARKING AND PARKING FEES

For 90% of multiunit residential units and/or nonresidential floor area, the associated parking spaces must be sold or
rented separately from the dwelling units or nonresidential floor area.
Set parking fees within the project boundary for all off-street parking equal to or greater than the cost of monthly
usage for public transit. Off-street parking in this instance does not include parking devoted to individual, detached
residential units.
AND/OR
OPTION 5. GUARANTEED RIDE HOME PROGRAM

Major employers within the project must commit to providing a guaranteed ride home program for employees. A
major employer accounts for more than 25% of the workers on the project site. The program must provide free rides
to employees who have carpooled, taken transit, walked, or cycled to work but must leave because of an unexpected
personal emergency. Rides may be on taxis, company cars, or rental cars.
AND/OR
OPTION 6. FLEXIBLE WORK ARRANGEMENTS

Major employers within the project must commit to promoting and supporting flexible work arrangements with
the goal of reducing vehicle trips during peak commuting hours. A major employer accounts for more than 25% of
the workers on the project site. The employer must develop internal policies that outline the terms under which
employees can engage in telework, flextime, compressed work weeks, staggered shifts, or other arrangements. These
policies must also describe how the program will be promoted to employees.
251
BEHIND THE INTENT

Whether by offering car-shares or establishing work-from-home arrangements or using other strategies, new
developments have the opportunity to improve human health and reduce air pollution and other environmental
damage by reducing project occupants’ automobile trips. Even modest improvements in walking and bicycling can
reduce greenhouse gas emissions from private vehicles by 3% to 8%.1 The availability, number, and convenience of
transportation alternatives to driving should be considered during project development and implemented before
project occupancy—before transportation habits are developed.
Project teams pursuing this credit choose from a list of six transportation demand management strategies. A
minimum of two strategies must be pursued, and an additional point is awarded for four strategies, to reflect the
compounded effect that comprehensive offerings will have on the project’s occupants.
NPD

STEP 1. CHOOSE TWO OR MORE OPTIONS
Select at least two of the following credit options to pursue.
·· Option 1 is appropriate for projects with access to transit systems that provide viable transportation
options to local residents.
·· Option 2 is intended for project sites located in areas with limited existing transit connectivity to
external locations.
·· Option 3 is appropriate if an on-site or nearby car-share service is under consideration.
·· Option 4 is appropriate if extensive multimodal options are available and car ownership is not likely for
every resident.
·· Option 5 is for projects with major employers that might be willing to offer taxi vouchers or other free-
ride services to employees who normally use transit.
·· Option 6 may be achievable if major employers within the project boundary allow some employees to
work from home.
Note that for most options, promoting awareness to project occupants will be a major determinant of the
success of the transportation demand management strategy in reducing motor vehicle trips.
Option 1. Transit Passes
STEP 1. IDENTIFY TRANSIT SERVICE

Identify the agency operating public transit in the project vicinity, along with its ridership fee and pass
structure.
STEP 2. PROVIDE TRANSIT PASSES TO RESIDENTS AND EMPLOYEES

Work with building owners and/or employers to provide transit passes for all employees and residents
in the project, or provide subsidies equivalent to 100% of transit fees for each resident or employee,
depending on the fee and pass structure of the transit agency.
Passes must valid for a period of at least one year from date of issuance. The program must be available
for at least the first three years of occupancy.
STEP 3. ADVERTISE AVAILABILITY OF TRANSIT PASSES
1 Rails to Trails Conservatory, Active Transportation for America (2008).

252
Option 2. Developer-Sponsored Transit
STEP 1. SELECT PRIVATE TRANSIT SERVICE PROVIDER

Identify and hire a private transit service capable of providing transportation between the project site
and any major external locations. Alternatively, provide transit service independent of outside vendors by
providing transportation within the development’s organizational structure.
STEP 2. PLAN PRIVATE TRANSIT SERVICE

Using a site map, design the route the transit service will serve. This route must include one or more
central locations within the project for pick-up and drop-off and serve at least one major external
destination, as indicated in the credit requirements.
Operate the transit service to serve passengers at the frequency stipulated in the credit requirements.
STEP 3. PROVIDE PASSENGER FACILITIES

NPD
Design transit stops within the project to meet all the specified requirements for shelter, bicycle parking,
and lighting.
STEP 4. PROVIDE TRANSIT SERVICE

Ensure that transit service will be in place by the time project occupancy reaches 20%, and maintain
service for three years beyond project build-out.
Option 3. Vehicle Sharing
STEP 1. IDENTIFY OR RECRUIT NEARBY VEHICLE-SHARE FACILITY

Identify an existing vehicle-share service, or work with a provider to establish vehicle-share locations on
or near the project.
STEP 2. CALCULATE MINIMUM REQUIRED NUMBER OF VEHICLES

Determine the minimum number of vehicles that must be provided based on the number of employees or
dwelling units in the project, per the credit requirements. For projects with more than 100 dwelling units
and/or employees, consider the frequency of transit service within the project based on Equation 1 or 2:
EQUATION 1. Required vehicle-share spaces, high-frequency transit
Dwelling units and employees

Required vehicle-share spaces =
100
EQUATION 2. Required vehicle-share spaces, low-frequency transit
Dwelling units and employees

Required vehicle-share spaces =
200
STEP 3. LOCATE VEHICLE SPACES TO MAXIMIZE ACCESSIBILITY

Locate vehicle-share spaces within the maximum walking distance from dwelling units and nonresidential
entrances. See Getting Started, Walking and Bicycling Distance.
STEP 4. IMPLEMENT ACCORDING TO TIMELINE

Ensure that the vehicle-share program will be in place by the time project occupancy reaches 20%.
Advertise it and its benefits to all project occupants.
STEP 5. ADVERTISE AVAILABILITY OF VEHICLE-SHARE PROGRAM

253
Option 4. Unbundling of Parking and Parking Fees
STEP 1. CALCULATE CREDIT THRESHOLDS

Determine the number of units in multiunit buildings and the nonresidential floor area for which parking
will not be included in the selling or rental price.
·· Count the multiunit residential spaces and determine the number of units equal to 90% of the total.
·· Identify the amount of nonresidential floor area that is 90% of the total.
STEP 2. SELL OR RENT PARKING SEPARATELY

Identify the offstreet parking that would typically be associated with those residential units and
nonresidential uses, and sell or rent those spaces separately to meet the threshold.
In sales material, purchase agreements, and leases, indicate that parking will be sold or rented separately
from the associated dwelling units and nonresidential uses.
STEP 3. CHECK LOCAL TRANSIT PRICES
NPD
Identify the agency that operates public transit in the project vicinity and determine the cost for a
monthly transit pass.
STEP 4. SET OFF-STREET PARKING FEES

Work with any parking vendors in the project to set parking rates that are at least as high as the cost of a
monthly transit pass.
Option 5. Guaranteed Ride Home
STEP 1. IDENTIFY MAJOR EMPLOYERS

Identify the project’s major employers (i.e., those that account for more than 25% of the workers on the
project site), using Equation 3. Contact the local tax assessor’s office or planning board to determine the
baseline number of employees, or contact each employer individually for employee counts or estimates.
EQUATION 3. Major employer determination
Major employer’s employees > 0.25 × Total project site employees
STEP 2. SECURE GUARANTEED RIDE-HOME COMMITMENT

Work with major employers to secure commitments to provide a guaranteed ride home for employees
who bicycle or use transit but may need a ride if they work late or have an emergency. Ensure that these
policies are formalized in company policy and promoted to all employees.
Each employer should consider the type of transportation service provided and the number of
employees expected to carpool, take transit, walk, or cycle to work.
Option 6. Flexible Work Arrangements
STEP 1. IDENTIFY MAJOR EMPLOYERS

Follow the procedure outlined in Option 5, Guaranteed Ride Home Program, to identify major employers
in the project.
STEP 2. OBTAIN COMMITMENTS FOR FLEXIBLE WORK POLICIES

Work with major employers to develop and advertise policies that provide flexible work arrangements for
employees, as indicated in the credit requirements.
254
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
Option Option Option Option Option Option
Documentation
1 2 3 4 5 6
LS CP CB Description of transit pass subsidy and publicity program x

NPD
Description of developer-sponsored service, shelters, and

LS x
bicycle storage spaces meeting credit criteria
Vicinity map including routes, transit destinations by type

CP CB x
and location of stops
Schedule of service including frequency of service on both

CB x
weekdays and weekends
LS CP CB Calculation of transit trips in the project X
Description of vehicle-share program, including number

LS CP CB and location of vehicles, walking distance to dwelling units X
and nonresidential units
Map of walking routes from project dwelling units and
CP CB nonresidential use entrances to shared-vehicle parking X
locations
Documentation indicating monthly off-street parking fees

CP CB x
and monthly transit passes.
For each major employer, description of guaranteed ride

CP CB x
home program for employees
Documentation of official policy from major employers

CB x x
including resources that employers will provide
For each major employer, description of flexible work

CP CB x
schedule program, including program publicity
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Credit Access to Quality Transit. Developer-sponsored transit, such as shuttle service, does not qualify as
transit for the related credit. Conversely, public transit may not be counted for Option 2 of this credit.
NPD Credit Reduced Parking Footprint. Achievement of Option 4 of this credit can aid in achievement of the
related credit by reducing parking demand.

·· For transit passes, the required subsidy has increased, from 50% to 100% of transit costs.
·· For unbundling of parking and parking fees, minimum fee thresholds for off-street parking rates, based on
local transit costs, have been added.
255
·· The option for a transportation demand management program has been eliminated.
·· Options for a guaranteed ride home program and flexible work arrangements have been added.
None.
Not available.
NPD
DEFINITIONS

employment center a nonresidential area of at least 5 acres (2 hectares) with a job density of at least 50 employees
per net acre (at least 125 employees per net hectare)
256
257
Access to Civic
and Public Space
NPD
Plan
Built Project
ACCESS TO CIVIC AND PUBLIC SPACE

1 point
INTENT
To provide open space close to work and home that enhances

community participation and improves public health.
REQUIREMENTS
Locate 90% of planned and existing dwelling units and nonresidential use entrances within a 1/4-mile (400 meters)
walk of at least one civic and passive use space. The spaces must be at least 1/6 acre (0.067 hectare) in area. Spaces
less than 1 acre (0.4 hectare) must have a proportion no narrower than 1 unit of width to 4 units of length.
Projects larger than 10 acres (4 hectares) must have a median space size of at least 1 acre (0.4 hectare). Spaces
over 1/2 acre (0.2 hectare) that are used to meet the 90% threshold are included in the median calculation.
258
BEHIND THE INTENT

Public spaces play a vital role in the life of a neighborhood. They create a sense of place, foster civic pride, and act as a
shared resource in which community experiences and values are created.1 They also encourage walking and activity,
and they create opportunities for people to display their culture and identities, learn awareness of diversity and
difference, and establish social connections, all of which help create a sense of community and social connection.2
Social connections make neighborhoods safer, more stable, and more desirable. Strong social ties have also been
shown to improve physical health: one large study found that the mortality rate of people with strong social ties is
33% less than those without them.3
A short walking distance increases the likelihood that the public space will be used by a high number of
neighborhood residents, employees, and visitors while serving as a public commons and gathering space. Public
spaces should be large enough to be usable and comfortable, and large projects should provide a variety of sizes of
public space for different intensities of use. Ideally, civic spaces should be integrated thoughtfully and aesthetically
into the project design, not just composed of slivers of undeveloped land.
NPD
STEP 1. IDENTIFY POTENTIAL PUBLIC AND CIVIC SPACES

On a site map, identify the locations of public, outdoor, passive use spaces on or near the project site
that may meet the credit requirements for size and type, such as plazas, squares, or parks.
·· The spaces can be either inside or outside the project boundary.
·· Exclude any space already claimed for NPD Credit Access to Recreation Facilities, since space cannot
be double-counted between the two credits.
STEP 2. MAP WALKING ROUTES TO BUILDING ENTRANCES

On a map, plot walking routes from the potential public spaces to the project’s dwelling units and
nonresidential use entrances. Indicate which spaces are within the maximum 1/4-mile (400-meter)
walking distance. See Getting Started, Walking and Bicycling Distance.
·· Walking routes can be measured from any point in the public space.
·· At least one public space must be within the maximum walking distance of 90% of dwelling units and
nonresidential entrances. Some project teams may need to map distances to multiple spaces to reach
the required percentage of project dwelling units and nonresidential buildings within the specified
walking distance.
·· Walking distances can be documented using walksheds or furthest walking distances to key units and
entrances that must be measured to show credit compliance.
STEP 3. CALCULATE SIZE OF PUBLIC SPACES

On the site map, indicate the area of each potential public space that is within the maximum walking
distance of project dwelling units or nonresidential entrances.
·· The land area must meet the thresholds in the credit requirements.
·· For public spaces defined as small in the credit criteria, the width-to-length aspect ratio must exceed
the specified minimum proportions, 1 to 4. See Further Explanation, Proportions of Small Areas.
·· For projects larger than 10 acres (4 hectares), determine the median size of the public spaces. The
1-acre (0.4 hectare) minimum ensures that larger public spaces can accommodate a large project’s
higher occupancy.
·· When calculating the median size, large projects should exclude public spaces of 1/2 acre (0.2 hectare)
or less. This allows teams to include multiple small plazas or pocket parks without being penalized,
provided the median threshold is met when the area of the larger spaces is averaged.
1 C. Tims and M. Mean, People Make Places: Growing the Public Life of Cities (2005), http://www.demos.co.uk/.
2 K. Worpole and K. Knox, The Social Value of Public Spaces (2007), http://www.jrf.org.uk/.
3 J. Holt-Lunstad, T.B. Smith, and J.B. Layton, Social Relationships and Mortality Risk: A Meta-Analytic Review, PLoS Med 7(7), e1000316 (2010).
259
STEP 4. CONFIRM THAT PUBLIC SPACES ARE WITHIN WALKING DISTANCE

Create a table that lists the project dwelling units and nonresidential use entrances within the required
distance. See Further Explanation, Example.
When the walking distances from civic spaces to dwelling units and entrances have been tabulated, use
Equation 1 to verify that 90% of dwelling units and entrances meet the credit criterion.
EQUATION 1. Percentage of dwelling units and entrances within walking distance of public space
DUs and nonresidential entrances

% compliant DUs within walking distance
and entrances
= × 100
Total DUs and nonresidential entrances
NPD
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
EXAMPLE
A 7.2-hectare project is designed with a 0.4-hectare plaza outside a light rail station, a 285-square-meter pocket park,
a 1.2-hectare park, and a 0.25-hectare public square. The pocket park does not qualify as a public space because it is
less than 675 square meters (0.2 hectare). To organize project information and determine whether the remaining
public spaces are within walking distance of 90% of the project buildings’ entrances, the team creates the following
table (Table 1).
TABLE 1. Example determination of walking distances to public spaces
Dwelling units and Walking distance Total entrances within

Closest qualifying
Building nonresidential use to qualifying public walking distance of
public space
entrances space (meters) public space
Detached Residential A 1 Park 530 —

Detached Residential B 1 Park 429 —
Detached Residential C 1 Park 379 1
Detached Residential D 1 Park 322 1
Detached Residential E 1 Park 305 1
Detached Residential F 1 Park 277 1
Duplex A 2 Metro plaza 455 —
Duplex B 2 Metro plaza 394 2
Duplex C 2 Metro plaza 316 2
Duplex D 2 Metro plaza 354 2
Multifamily Dwelling A 64 Public space 55 64
Multifamily Dwelling B 46 Public space 115 46
Multifamily Dwelling C 52 Public space 115 52
Office-Retail A 3 Metro plaza 210 3
Office-Retail B 4 Metro plaza 225 4
Total 183 179

260
Using Equation 1, the team determines that 98% of the 183 dwelling units and nonresidential use entrances are within
a 400-meter walking distance of a qualifying civic or passive use space: (179 / 183) x 100 = 98%
Because the project is larger than 4 hectares, the team must also calculate the median size of the civic and
public use spaces. The pocket park is too small to be included in the calculations. The median size of the three
remaining public spaces (0.4 hectare, 1.2 hectares, 0.25 hectare) is 0.62 hectare. Because the median size is greater
than 0.4 hectare, this project meets the credit requirements. The team submits this table, along with a map showing
the public spaces, building entrances, and walking distances, to document credit achievement.
Proportions of Small Areas

Figure 1 illustrates the 1:4 proportion requirements for spaces less than 1 acre (0.4 hectare). The leftover green space
does not qualify because of its narrow proportions. The square pocket park, though small, is conducive to social
interaction and community engagement because of its more regular proportions.
NPD
54'-0"
375'-0"
(16.5m)
(114.3m)
375'-0"
(114.3m)
650'-0"
(198m)
Green space Park

Compliant space
Noncompliant space
Figure 1. Compliant and noncompliant park space
GBC LEED Guide Illustrations NPD9

NPDc9: Access to Civic and Public Spaces
261
LS Description of dwelling units, nonresidential units, walking distances, and public spaces X
CP CB Site or vicinity map indicating walking routes from entrances to nearby public spaces X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

NPD Credit Access to Recreation Facilities. This credit focuses on outdoor public spaces such as plazas and parks
NPD
intended for passive use; the related credit focuses on indoor or outdoor recreation facilities for exercise. A given
area may count toward one credit or the other, but not both.

·· The size threshold for a large project (triggering a calculation of the median size of public spaces within
walking distance) has been increased, from 7 to 10 acres (2.8 to 4 hectares).
·· The minimum median public space required for large projects has been increased, from 1/2 to 1 acre
(0.2 to 0.4 hectare).
·· The median public space calculation now excludes any space smaller than 1/2-acre (0.2 hectare).
None.
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
262
263
Access to
Recreation Facilities
NPD
Plan
Built Project
ACCESS TO RECREATION FACILITIES

1 point
INTENT
To enhance community participation and improve public health by

providing recreational facilities close to work and home that facilitate
physical activity and social networking.
REQUIREMENTS
Locate or design the project so that a publicly accessible outdoor recreation facility at least 1-acre (0.4 hectares)
in area, or a publicly accessible indoor recreational facility of at least 25,000 square feet (2325 square meters),
lies within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of 90% of new and existing dwelling units and nonresidential
use entrances. Outdoor recreation facilities must consist of physical improvements and may include “tot lots,”
swimming pools, and sports fields, such as baseball diamonds.
264
BEHIND THE INTENT

Living or working near sports fields or other recreation facilities makes people much more likely to use them. This
increases levels of fitness, health, and social interaction while providing an attractive neighborhood amenity. People
who live within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of parks and green space have been found to have lower
rates of chronic diseases like asthma, heart disease, depression, and respiratory illness, whereas those farther away
are 50% more likely to report feeling unhealthy.1 Similarly, children who are exposed to 20 minutes of green space
daily have been found to engage in five times more physical activity than children without such daily exposure.2 As
an added benefit, proximity to open space has been shown to increase a neighborhood’s property values, and the
values increase with the area of open space.3
The majority of project occupants should have easy walking access to public recreation. Facilities should be sized
appropriately for the population of the local community and should be designed for active rather than passive activity.
NPD
STEP 1. IDENTIFY ELIGIBLE RECREATION FACILITIES

On a site map, identify the locations of publicly accessible recreation facilities near the project site that
meet the credit requirements for size and type.
·· Facilities can be either indoors or outdoors, and inside or outside the project boundary.
·· Exclude any space already claimed for NPD Credit Access to Public and Civic Space, since space
cannot be double-counted between the two credits.
STEP 2. MAP WALKING ROUTES TO BUILDING ENTRANCES

On a map, plot walking routes from the eligible recreation facilities to the project’s dwelling unit
entrances and nonresidential use entrances. Indicate which facilities are within a 1/2-mile (800-meter)
walking distance. See Getting Started, Walking and Bicycling Distance.
·· Walking routes can be measured from the entrance to the recreation facility and need not cross or
reach its far end.
·· At least one recreation facility must be within the maximum walking distance of 90% of dwelling unit
and nonresidential use entrances. Some projects may need to map distances to multiple facilities
to reach the required percentage of dwelling units and nonresidential buildings within the specified
walking distance.
STEP 3. CONFIRM THAT RECREATION FACILITIES ARE WITHIN WALKING DISTANCE

Create a table that shows the number of project dwelling units or nonresidential use entrances that are
within the required distance. Indicate the type of facility (e.g., indoor, outdoor, playing field, pool, fitness
center) and its size.
Use Equation 1 to verify that 90% of dwelling units and nonresidential entrances meet the criterion.
EQUATION 1. Percentage of dwelling units and entrances within walking distance of recreation facility
DUs and nonresidential entrances

% compliant DUs and entrances = × 100
Total DUs and nonresidential entrances
See NPD Credit Access to Civic and Public Space, Further Explanation, Example; the method for
assessing walking distance to recreation spaces is similar.
1 J. Maas et al., Morbidity Is Related to a Green Living Environment, Epidemiol Community Health (October 15, 2009).
2 E. Almanza, M. Jerrett, G. Dunton, E. Seto, and M.A. Pentz, A Study of Community Design, Greenness, and Physical Activity in Children Using Satellite,
GPS and Accelerometer Data, Health & Place 18(1): 46–54 (January 2012).
3 B. Bolitzer and N. Netusil, The Impact of Open Spaces on Property Values in Portland, Oregon, Journal of Environmental Management 59(3): 185–193
(July 2000).
265
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
LS Description of dwelling units, nonresidential units, walking distances and recreation facilities X
NPD
CP CB Map showing dwelling units, nonresidential units, walking distances, and qualifying recreation facilities X
ACCESS TO RECREATION FACILITIES

RELATED CREDIT TIPS
NPD Credit Access to Civic and Public Space. The related credit focuses on outdoor public spaces like plazas
and parks for passive use; this credit focuses on recreation facilities for exercise. A given area may count toward one
credit or the other, but not both.

None.
None.
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
266
267
Visitability and
Universal Design
NPD
Plan
Built Project
VISITABILITY AND UNIVERSAL DESIGN

1 point
INTENT
To increase the proportion of areas usable by a wide spectrum of

people, regardless of age or ability.
REQUIREMENTS
Case 1. Projects with New Dwelling Units

Design a minimum of 20% of the new dwelling units (but not less than one dwelling unit per type) in accordance with
ICC A117.1, Type C, Visitable Unit, for each of the following residential building types:
·· detached single-dwelling-unit buildings;
·· attached single-dwelling-unit buildings; and
·· buildings with two or three dwelling units.
Each unit must also have a kitchen, living area, bedroom, and full bath on an accessible level.
For multiunit buildings with four or more dwelling units, design a minimum of 20% of the units (but not less
than one) to meet the requirements of one of the following options. This category includes mixed-use buildings with
dwelling units.
OPTION 1. UNIVERSAL DESIGN FEATURES THROUGHOUT THE HOME

Throughout the home, include at least five of the following universal design features:
·· easy-to-grip lever door handles;
·· easy-to-grip cabinet and drawer loop handles;
268
·· easy-to-grip locking mechanisms on doors and windows;

·· easy-to-grip single-lever faucet handles;
·· easy-touch rocker or hands-free switches;
·· motion-detector lighting at entrance, in hallways and stairwells, and in closets, and motion-detector light
switches in garages, utility spaces, and basements;
·· large, high-contrast print for controls, signals, and the house or unit numbers;
·· a built-in shelf, bench, or table with knee space below, located outside the entry door with weather protection
overhead, such as porch or stoop with roof, awning, or other overhead covering;
·· a minimum 32-inch (80-centimeter) clear door opening width for all doorways;
·· tread at the entrance, on stairs, and other areas where slipping is common, with color contrast difference
between stair treads and risers; and
·· interior floor surfaces (e.g., low-pile carpets, hard-surface flooring) that provide easy passage for a wheelchair
or walker, with color contrast between floor surfaces and trim; no carpet is permitted in a kitchen, bathroom,
NPD
or other wet areas of the dwelling unit.
OR
OPTION 2. KITCHEN FEATURES

On the main floor of the home (or on another floor, if an elevator or stair lift is provided), provide a kitchen with
hard-surface flooring, plumbing with single-lever controls, a 5-foot (1.5-meter) turning radius, and at least four of the
following universal design features:
·· variable-height (28- to 42-inch [70- to 110-centimeter]) or adjustable work surfaces, such as countertops,
sinks, and cooktops;
·· clear knee space under sink and cooktops (this requirement can be met by installing removable base cabinets
or fold-back or self-storing doors), cooktops and ranges with front or side-mounted controls, and wall-
mounted ovens at a height to accommodate a seated adult;
·· a toe kick area at the base of lower cabinets with a minimum height of 9 inches (23 centimeters), and full-
extension drawers and shelves in at least half (by volume) of the cabinets;
·· contrasting color treatment between countertops, front edges, and floor;
·· adjustable-height shelves in wall cabinets; and
·· glare-free task lighting.
OR
OPTION 3. BEDROOM AND BATHROOM FEATURES

On the main floor of the building (or on another floor, if an elevator or stair lift is provided), include all of the
following:
In at least one accessible bedroom,

·· Size the room to accommodate a twin bed with a 5-foot (1.5-meter) turning radius around the bed.
·· Install a clothes closet with a 32-inch (80-centimeter) clear opening with adjustable-height closet rods and
shelves.
In at least one full bathroom on the same floor as the bedroom,

·· Provide adequate maneuvering space with a 30-by-48-inch (75-by-120 centimeter) clear floor space at each
fixture.
·· Center the toilet 18 inches (45 centimeters) from any side wall, cabinet, or tub, and allow a 3-foot
(90-centimeter) clear space in front.
·· Install broad blocking in walls around toilet, tub, and/or shower for future placement and relocation of grab
bars.
·· Provide knee space under the lavatory (this requirement may be met by installing removable base cabinets or
fold-back or self-storing doors).
269
·· Install a long mirror whose bottom is no more than 36 inches (90 centimeters) above the finished floor and
whose top is at least 72 inches (180 centimeters) high.
In addition, all bathrooms must have hard-surface flooring, all plumbing fixtures must have single-lever controls,
and tubs or showers must have hand-held showerheads.
Case 2. Projects with Noncompliant Routes and No New Dwelling Units

This case applies to projects that have no new residential units and are either (1) retrofitting existing public rights-
of-way or publicly accessible travel routes that are not in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA,
for private sector and local and state government facilities) or the Architectural Barriers Act (ABA, for federally
funded facilities), or (2) building new publicly accessible travel routes that are not legally required to meet ADA-ABA
accessibility guidelines.
Design, construct, or retrofit 90% of the rights-of-way and travel routes in accordance with the ADA-ABA
NPD
accessibility guidelines, as applicable, or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S., whichever is more stringent.

270
BEHIND THE INTENT

This credit addresses accessibility in residential buildings and in public rights-of-way, such as sidewalks, paths,
and trails. Designing spaces for universal accessibility, visitability, and ease of use enhances social interaction
and diversity while fostering an inclusive community, independent living, and personal well-being. Accessibility
is beneficial to all projects, whether housing for seniors or people with disabilities is present or planned. Diverse
communities include a mix of abilities as well as ages. Visitability and universal design allow individuals to maintain
their neighborhood social and economic networks in the event of short- or long-term physical restriction.
In addition, dwelling units designed to accommodate a broader cross section of the population are more likely to
have a long and useful service life. As residents age or new residents move in, fewer materials are wasted retrofitting
those units to meet different needs.
Typically, single-family homes are not required to be accessible and multifamily buildings do not have to provide
universal ease of use beyond meeting the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) or Architectural
Barriers Act (ABA) (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) in shared spaces. Although many public routes
NPD
are now required to be accessible, existing and private routes fall outside those requirements.
The requirements of the credit encourage design for universal accessibility and ease of use in private spaces,
common areas and access routes that may not currently be obligated to go beyond the basic requirements of the
ADA/ABA (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.), or may not currently be in compliance. Some of the
prescriptive elements in this credit are already required by ADA and ABA (or local equivalent for projects outside the
U.S.), while others exceed these requirements.
STEP 1. CHOOSE PROJECT CASE

The case for the project is determined by the presence or absence of new dwelling units and compliant
travel routes (Figure 1).
·· Case 1, Projects with New Dwelling Units, is for projects that will construct new dwelling units.
·· Case 2, Projects with Noncompliant Routes and No New Dwelling Units, is for the following situation:
°° the project will not construct any new dwelling units; and
°° the project includes either (1) a retrofit of existing public rights-of-way or travel routes that are
not currently ADA or ABA compliant, or (2) new public travel routes that would not otherwise be
required to meet ADA or ABA.
·· For Case 2, projects outside the U.S. should use local equivalents for ADA and ABA.
...has new
dwelling units Use Case 1
...there will be retrofits of

Project... noncompliant existing
Use Case 2
public rights-of-way and/or
travel routes
does not have new ...there will be new public

dwelling units—all are rights-of-way and/or travel
Use Case 2
existing, or there are no routes that are not otherwise
dwellings at all—and required to be compliant
...there are no noncompliant

The credit is
existing or new public
not applicable
rights-of-way and/or
to the project
travel routes
Figure 1. Determining case

271
STEP 1. IDENTIFY RESIDENTIAL BUILDING TYPES

Determine which residential building types will be included in the project design. Identify the buildings
that will have new dwelling units in each building type:
·· Single-dwelling-unit buildings, detached
·· Single-dwelling-unit buildings, attached
·· Multiunit buildings with two or three dwelling units
·· Multiunit buildings with four or more dwelling units
Count mixed-use buildings with dwelling units as multiunit buildings with four or more dwelling units.
STEP 2. CALCULATE NUMBER OF NEW DWELLING UNITS THAT MUST BE COMPLIANT

Count the number of new dwelling units in each building type; ignore any existing units, which do not
need to meet the requirements of Case 1.
NPD
·· For 20% of the new units in each building type, comply with the credit requirements for that building
type.
·· A minimum of one unit must comply, even if 20% of the new units equals less than one unit. For
example, 20% of four new units equals 0.80, but one unit must be compliant.

·· Teams may want to record the size and number of units by building type on a spreadsheet, for easy
cross-referencing with other credits.
STEP 3. DESIGN UNITS TO MEET STANDARD ICC A117.1, TYPE C

New single dwelling units (both detached and attached), as well as those in new multiunit buildings with
two or three dwelling units, must follow ICC A117.1, Type C, Visitable Unit. Multiunit buildings with four or
more units do not need to meet this requirement; go to Step 5.
·· Visitability features should be incorporated early to optimize the overall site and building design
throughout the life cycle of the project.
·· Developers and designers should determine, during project schematic design, which residential
buildings and units could most benefit from additional accessibility, then alert residential designers
about universal design and visitability requirements as early as possible to ensure implementation and
coordination.
STEP 4. DESIGN THESE UNITS TO MEET ADDITIONAL ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS

In addition to designing the units according to ICC A117.1, Type C, include a kitchen, living area, bedroom,
and full bathroom on any accessible level in each unit. Multiunit buildings that have four or more units do
not need to meet this requirement.
STEP 5. DESIGN UNITS IN MULTIUNIT BUILDINGS WITH FOUR OR MORE UNITS TO MEET
ONE OF FOLLOWING OPTIONS.
This category also includes mixed-use buildings with dwelling units.
OPTION 1. UNIVERSAL DESIGN FEATURES THROUGHOUT THE HOME
STEP 1. INCLUDE AT LEAST FIVE UNIVERSAL DESIGN FEATURES

Design the new units to include at least five of the listed universal design features.
OPTION 2. KITCHEN FEATURES
STEP 1. LOCATE KITCHENS ON ACCESSIBLE FLOORS

Locate the kitchen in each unit either on the main floor or on another accessible floor of the home.
STEP 2. DESIGN KITCHENS TO INCLUDE REQUIRED UNIVERSAL DESIGN FEATURES

Include hard-surface flooring, plumbing with single-lever controls, and a 5-foot (1.5-meter) turning radius
in the kitchen. Also design the kitchens to include at least four universal design features listed in the
requirements.
272
OPTION 3. BEDROOM AND BATHROOM FEATURES
STEP 1. LOCATE ONE BEDROOM AND ONE BATHROOM ON ACCESSIBLE FLOOR

Locate at least one bedroom and at least one full bathroom in each unit either on the main floor or on
another accessible floor of the home. The bedroom and bathroom must be on the same floor.
STEP 2. DESIGN BEDROOM AND BATHROOM FOR ACCESSIBILITY

Both the bedroom and the full bathroom must be accessible and must include all the features listed in
the requirements.
STEP 3. DESIGN ADDITIONAL BATHROOMS FOR ACCESSIBILITY

Any additional bathrooms in the unit must have hard-surface flooring, plumbing with single-lever
controls, and hand-held showerheads in the tubs or showers.
NPD
STEP 1. IDENTIFY NONCOMPLIANT PUBLIC ROUTES

Identify which public routes in the project are noncompliant.

·· “Noncompliant” means that the routes are currently not, or are not required to be, ADA or ABA
compliant (see Further Explanation, International Tips).
·· Include routes for both vehicles and pedestrians, such as rights-of-way, roads, paths, sidewalks, and
trails.
STEP 2. DESIGN OR RETROFIT PUBLIC ROUTES TO BE COMPLIANT

Design and construct new routes to be ADA or ABA compliant. Or redesign existing noncompliant routes
to meet ADA or ABA requirements.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
EXAMPLES

A project has determined that it will have the following units, by building type:
TABLE 1. Example project dwelling units
Required number of
Number of Number of units Existing or
Building type Total units compliant units
buildings in each building new?
(20% minimum)
Detached single-
24 1 24 Existing 0
dwelling-unit building
Detached single-
2 1 2 New 1
Attached single-
32 1 32 New 7
Building with 2 or 3 3 (3 stories, 1 unit
12 36 New 8
dwelling units on each floor)
Building with 4+ 12 (3 stories, 4 units
2 24 Existing 0
Building with 4+ 12 (3 stories, 4 units
4 48 New 10
Total required
26
compliant units
273

A project includes 48 existing dwelling units, and no new units are proposed. The neighborhood already has 5,000
linear feet (lf) (1 524 meters ) of roads, sidewalks, and other travel routes, and is planning to design and construct
3,000 lf of new road, sidewalks, and recreation trails. Of the 5,000 lf (1 524 meters) of existing travel routes, 75% is
already compliant with either ADA or ABA standards or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S. The project
is planning to modify the remaining 25% to comply with ADA. The new routes, though not legally required to meet
accessibility guidelines in the project’s locality, will be designed to be universally accessible according to ADA, thus
exceeding the 90% threshold in the credit requirements.
For Letter of Support, the project team prepares a description of how the existing compliant travel routes already
meet ADA or ABA standards (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.), and how the existing noncompliant
routes and new planned routes will be redesigned to meet ADA. The narrative includes the specific conditions of
the existing and proposed travel routes and the anticipated retrofit and design strategies. Later, when pursuing
Certified Plan and Certified Built Project, the project team will describe the actual retrofits, strategies employed, and
postconstruction conditions of the travel routes. The team will then also include all travel route calculations and site
NPD
drawings with sufficient detail to show and support the conditions described in the narrative and calculations.
INTERNATIONAL TIPS

Projects outside the U.S. may use a local equivalent if the local equivalent is at least as stringent as the ADA and ABA
codes. International Building Code (IBC) 101 can be used as an equivalent for most project types; however ADA-
ABA standards are more stringent and regulate certain nonresidential design components not addressed in the
IBC standard. Project teams should reference the comparison of ADA and IBC standards available on the ADA-ABA
website, at access-board.gov/, to ensure compliance.
Case 1, single- Case 1
dwelling-unit
buildings
and multiunit
Option 1 Option 2 Option 3
buildings with 2 or
3 dwelling units
Narrative indicating percentage of compliant

units and describing how units meet ICC A117.1,
LS CP CB X
Type C, Visitable Unit, and other requirements
for universal design features
Number of total and compliant dwelling units
CP CB X X X X
for each building type
List of features provided in compliant dwelling
LS CP CB X X X
units
Narrative describing existing and new travel
LS CP CB routes, and how they comply with credit X
requirements
Site map showing existing and new travel
CP CB routes, and how they comply with credit X
requirements
Calculations for existing, new, noncompliant,
CP CB X
and compliant travel routes

274
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

NPD Credit Housing Types and Affordability. Both this and the related credit require an inventory of new and
existing dwelling units and reward projects that provide housing for a diverse market. Coordination of the inventory
and planning processes could be an efficient way to comply with both credits.

There were no technical changes; however, the credit requirements were reorganized to provide clarity.
NPD
ICC/ANSI A117.1 (2009), Type C, Visitable Unit: iccsafe.org
Americans with Disabilities Act: ada.gov
Architectural Barriers Act of 1968: access-board.gov/the-board/laws/architectural-barriers-act-aba
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
None.
275
Community Outreach
and Involvement
NPD
Plan
Built Project
COMMUNITY OUTREACH AND INVOLVEMENT

1–2 points
INTENT
To encourage responsiveness to community needs by involving the

people who live or work in the community in project design and
planning and in decisions about how the project should be improved or
changed over time.
REQUIREMENTS
OPTION 1. COMMUNITY OUTREACH (1 POINT)

Engage the community in the following ways. Each activity must be led by the development team and be directly
related to the LEED ND project.
Predesign
Meet with adjacent property owners, residents, business owners, and workers; local planning and community
development officials; and any current residents or workers at the project site to solicit and document their input on
the proposed project before beginning design.
Preliminary design
Advertise and host at least one open community meeting other than an official public hearing or recurring citizen
advisory meeting, to generate comments on the preliminary project design concept. Work directly with community
associations and/or the local government to advertise the meeting(s). Collect and summarize comments generated
at the meeting(s).
Modify the project’s preliminary design as a direct result of community input, or if modifications are not made,
explain why community input did not generate design modifications.
276
Ongoing communication
Establish ongoing means for communication between the developer and the community throughout the design and
construction phases and, in cases where the developer maintains any control, after construction.
OR
OPTION 2. CHARRETTE (2 POINTS)

Comply with Option 1 and conduct a design charrette or interactive workshop of at least two days that is open to the
public and includes, at a minimum, participation by a representative group of nearby property owners, residents,
business owners, and workers in the preparation of conceptual project plans and drawings.
OR
OPTION 3. ENDORSEMENT PROGRAM (2 POINTS)

Comply with Option 1 and obtain an endorsement from an ongoing local or regional nongovernmental program that
NPD
systematically reviews and endorses smart growth development projects under a rating or jury system.
277
BEHIND THE INTENT

Community feedback is vital to many LEED prerequisites and credits and should be considered early to ensure that
all aspects of the design are vetted by stakeholders. This involvement is intended not just to overcome potential
opposition or facilitate a project’s approval. By harnessing community insight, a project team can respond to local
needs, strengthen links to the surrounding neighborhood, and improve the project’s design. The stakeholder
feedback process provides a venue for resolving conflicts and fostering innovative ideas. Incorporating feedback
early in project design may also avoid costs arising from redesigns prompted by community objections.
A predesign meeting establishes a relationship with the community ahead of any project proposal or design.
Once a preliminary design concept is established, holding at least one community meeting allows for feedback
on specific aspects on the preliminary design. Though important in their own right, the government hearings and
citizen advisory meetings often required as part of zoning or permitting processes do not guarantee focused, open
discussion of the project design. For project teams seeking to increase the amount of community collaboration in
project design, a multiday meeting—either a charrette or an interactive workshop—is a proactive way to concentrate
NPD
and document stakeholder input.
A well-designed process can address project implementation and provide a venue for resolution while creating
time and space for visionary thinking. As the project progresses, ongoing communication between the project
owner and major stakeholders fosters community stewardship and creates a foundation for long-term integration

of the project into the surrounding community. Project teams that engage with local communities can also win
endorsement by nongovernmental organizations, such as regional land-use advocacy groups, that support smart
growth and recognize excellence in neighborhood development.
Option 1. Community Outreach

All projects attempting the credit must hold at least two outreach meetings—the first prior to the
project’s design, and the second during the preliminary design phase. Ideally, outreach meetings are
tailored to the demographics of residents and stakeholders in and around the project. This may include
translation of materials and presentations. Public input from the meetings must be formally considered
by the project team and incorporated into the design where appropriate.
STEP 1. IDENTIFY KEY COMMUNITY AND NEIGHBORHOOD STAKEHOLDERS

Target property owners, residents, workers, and business owners adjacent to or on the project site, as
well as local planning and community development officials, to provide input on the type of development
that should be built.
·· Engaging a diversity of stakeholders ensures that perspectives from various groups are captured and
considered.
·· The local planning agency, community development agency, or existing neighborhood groups may
have a current list of property owners and other stakeholders nearby.
·· Ensure that outreach lists include newcomers and those with less formal status to promote inclusivity.
STEP 2. HOST AT LEAST ONE PREDESIGN MEETING

Hold at least one stakeholder meeting before beginning the project’s design. This must be led by the
project team and be advertised to the stakeholders identified in Step 1.
The meeting can consist of several components, including an introduction of the project team to
neighborhood leaders, discussion of the purpose and intent of the predesign meeting, discussion of
the project team’s preliminary observations about the site and nearby features (i.e., existing conditions
analysis), and solicitation of feedback on the type of development desired. General reactions and
278
suggestions from stakeholders should be documented via memo, meeting notes, or other appropriate
format for future reference and to assure the community that their input has been heard.
Discussing the project as an agenda item at the meeting of an existing group or documenting unrelated
community events that have occurred nearby is not sufficient to achieve this requirement.
STEP 3. PREPARE PRELIMINARY DESIGN CONCEPT

Use input from the predesign meeting to inform the preliminary design. Choose design solutions
that address major concerns of the community; common issues may entail traffic, safety, parking,
streetscape, and lighting. Where possible, consider including desirable neighborhood features such as
parks, community centers, recreation facilities, schools, public spaces, and affordable housing in the
development program and project design.
STEP 4. HOST AT LEAST ONE PRELIMINARY DESIGN REVIEW MEETING

Following the predesign meeting and subsequent completion of the project’s preliminary design,
work with community associations and/or local government to advertise and host at least one open
community meeting for public review and comment.
NPD
·· The meeting must be led by the project team and be open to all interested stakeholders (not limited
by invitation).
·· The team must solicit comments from attendees on the project’s preliminary design. Official
government hearings involving the project or recurring citizen advisory committee formal reviews do
not alone satisfy this requirement.

·· Choose the meeting format based on the anticipated participants and the preferences of the design
team. For example, breakout rooms or movable tables may facilitate productive discussions in small
groups.
·· Summarize the feedback collected during the preliminary design review meeting in a memo or other
format appropriate for the project. Consider making this feedback available to the public.
STEP 5. EVALUATE AND MODIFY PROJECT’S PRELIMINARY DESIGN

Implement design changes in response to the community’s comments at the preliminary design meeting.
When the design has been finalized, describe these changes. If any comments in the design review
meeting did not result in changes, explain why those suggestions were not implemented.
Depending on the types of participants who attended the preliminary design review meeting and the
feedback received, consider scheduling similar follow-up design review meetings as the preliminary
design progresses or as suggestions from one or more meetings are incorporated.
STEP 6. ESTABLISH ONGOING COMMUNICATIONS STRATEGY BETWEEN DEVELOPER AND

COMMUNITY
Determine a means for ongoing communications with the community, such as a newsletter, website, on-
site office hours, social media, or a combination of strategies.
·· Ensure that the strategy supports two-way communications throughout the project design and
construction process.
·· If the developer retains any postconstruction control of the project, establish communications that
continue for the duration of that control.
Option 2. Charrette
STEP 1. MEET OPTION 1 REQUIREMENTS
STEP 2. ORGANIZE AND HOLD MINIMUM TWO-DAY CHARRETTE OR INTERACTIVE

WORKSHOP
Work with community associations and/or local government to organize a charrette or interactive
workshop at least two days in length. The charrette must take place in addition to, and not in place of,
any of the two meetings described in Option 1.
·· The meeting must be open to all interested stakeholders (not limited by invitation), although those
identified as key stakeholders should be invited.
·· Participants should include many of the stakeholders identified in Option 1.
·· Consider involving a third-party facilitator or community involvement specialist to help run the
workshop.
279
The workshop need not be held on two consecutive days but should be a single event. For instance, the
first day of the charrette may focus on an initial design. The project team may take the next day to revise
the designs and then present a synthesis of design revisions on the second day of the charrette.
STEP 3. EVALUATE AND MODIFY PROJECT DESIGN

Incorporate concepts generated at the workshop into the project design and document these decisions.
If any suggested changes were not made, prepare documentation explaining why that was not possible.
Option 3. Endorsement Program
STEP 1. MEET OPTION 1 REQUIREMENTS
STEP 2. IDENTIFY QUALIFYING PROGRAM(S)
NPD
Identify an ongoing nongovernmental program operating at the local, regional, state, or provincial level
that recognizes excellence in neighborhood development. Nearby organizations that support smart
growth or related land-planning and development principles may be able to help the team identify
qualifying programs.

A qualifying endorsement program has the following attributes:
·· Its criteria for endorsement are objective and publicly available.
·· It evaluates projects against a set of broad (nonspecialized) smart growth1 or related sustainability
principles.
·· Its endorsements are granted fairly and consistently by a jury.
A program that has a formal point checkbox system meets the requirement for using objective criteria,
but programs based on discussion and consensus may also qualify.
STEP 3. APPLY FOR ENDORSEMENT FROM QUALIFYING PROGRAM

Follow the application process and provide all necessary documentation for the program. In some cases,
this application may involve continual communication between the endorsement program and the
project team during the evaluation process. If the project is accepted by the program, the endorsement
may be in the form of an award, letter of recognition, or similar affirmation of merit.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
None.
1 See http://www.smartgrowth.org/why.php for the 10 principles of smart growth.

280
LS CP CB Summary of predesign meeting, including participants and input generated X X X
Summary of preliminary design open community meeting(s), including

LS CP CB X X X
summary of design modifications made or rejected in response to input
Description of communication channel between developer and community

CP CB during design and construction and, if developer will retain operating interest, X X X
after completion
Summary of charrette or interactive workshop, including participants,
CP CB conceptual plans or drawings prepared by participants, and outcomes (with X
explanation for changes not made)
LS Name of smart growth organization and program whose recognition is sought X

NPD
CP CB Confirmation of local or regional smart growth endorsement X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.

·· In Option 1, the credit now explicitly states that the development team must lead the community outreach and
that the meetings must be directly related to the LEED ND project.
·· In Option 1, the credit requirements have been reorganized to specify predesign, preliminary design, and
ongoing communication requirements.
None.
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
None.
281
Local Food Production

Plan
NPD
Built Project
1 point
LOCAL FOOD PRODUCTION

INTENT
To promote the environmental and economic benefits of community-

based food production and improve nutrition through better access to
fresh produce.
REQUIREMENTS
Establish covenants, conditions, and restrictions (CC&R) or other forms of deed restrictions stating that the
growing of produce is not prohibited in project areas, including greenhouses, any portion of residential front, rear, or
side yards; or balconies, patios, or rooftops. Greenhouses but not gardens may be prohibited in front yards that face
the circulation network.
Meet the requirements of one of the following three options.
OPTION 1. NEIGHBORHOOD GARDENS (1 POINT)

Dedicate permanent and viable growing space or related facilities (such as greenhouses) within the project as
specified in Table 1 (exclusive of existing dwellings). Ensure solar access and provide fencing, watering systems,
garden bed enhancements (such as raised beds), secure storage space for tools, and pedestrian access for these
spaces. Ensure that the spaces are owned and managed by an entity that includes occupants of the project in its
decision making, such as a community group, homeowners association, or public body.
TABLE 1. Minimum garden space, by project density
Imperial units Metric units
Project density (DU/acre) Growing space (sf/DU) Project density (DU/hectare) Growing space (sq. meters/DU)
> 7 and ≤14 200 > 17.5 and ≤ 35 18.5

> 14 and ≤ 22 100 > 35 and ≤ 55 9
> 22 and ≤ 28 80 > 55 and ≤ 69 7.5
> 28 and ≤ 35 70 > 69 and ≤ 87 6.5
> 35 60 > 87 5.5
DU = dwelling unit; sf = square feet; sq. meters = square meters.
282
An established community garden outside the project boundary but within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance
of the project’s geographic center can satisfy this option if the garden otherwise meets all the requirements.
OR
OPTION 2. COMMUNITY-SUPPORTED AGRICULTURE (1 POINT)

Purchase shares in a community-supported agriculture program located within 150 miles (240 kilometers) of the
project site for at least 80% of dwelling units within the project (exclusive of existing dwelling units). Each counted
dwelling unit must receive CSA service for at least two years, beginning when it is occupied. Shares must be delivered
to a point within 1/2-mile (800 meters) of the project’s geographic center on a regular schedule not less than twice
per month at least four months of the year.
OR
OPTION 3. PROXIMITY TO FARMERS MARKET (1 POINT)

NPD
Locate the project’s geographic center within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of an existing or planned
farmers market that is open or will operate at least once weekly for at least five months annually. Farmers market
vendors may sell only items grown within 150 miles (240 kilometers) of the project site. A planned farmers market
must have firm commitments from farmers and vendors that the market will meet all the above requirements and be
in full operation by the time 50% of the project’s total floor area is occupied.
283
BEHIND THE INTENT

Local neighborhood gardens, farmers markets, and community-supported agriculture (CSA) programs improve
people’s access to fresh fruits and vegetables, in turn supporting better health. Simply adopting more healthful
eating habits reduces the risk of heart disease, stroke, and obstructive pulmonary disease, three of the five leading
causes of death in the world.1 There is evidence that regular interaction with nature, such as gardening, reduces
anxiety and depression.2, 3 Community gardens also promote stronger social ties among neighbors.4 Credit
requirements for Option 1, Neighborhood Gardens, are intended to ensure beneficial and consistent use by
occupants, thereby increasing the probability of health benefits.
In addition, local food production supports local economies and food security, encourages farmers to diversify
their crops to serve the diverse needs of the local market, and reduces greenhouse gas emissions due to transport
and distribution. In contrast to monoculture, farmers who grow multiple small-scale crops usually use less fertilizer,
select crops appropriate to the local climate, and include a broader range of local plant and livestock varieties. This
reinforces the diversity and stability of natural ecological systems. CSA programs provide a stable, predictable
NPD
source of financial support for local farmers, and regular local food delivery can encourage more healthful cooking
and eating habits.
In some neighborhoods or cities, initiatives to use yards or a community space for gardening are impeded by local
zoning codes or homeowners association rules. To remove this barrier, the Local Food Production credit calls for

legal protection of greenhouses and the growing of produce as an allowable land use.
STEP 1. ESTABLISH COVENANTS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS THAT SUPPORT LOCAL

FOOD PRODUCTION
Establish covenants, conditions and restrictions (CC&Rs) or equivalent legal protection of gardening
spaces, per the credit requirements.
CC&Rs or equivalent legal protections may entail working with a governing authority that would typically
prohibit gardening spaces. This may be the local government or another entity, such as a homeowners
association. Project teams should work with this authority to establish a CC&R to ensure that the gardens
are included in the project for the life of the landownership or leasing. Zoning variances may also be
sought to legally allow for the project to include these gardens.

Review the options to determine which is best suited to the project.
·· Option 1 requires the project to have a residential component. It may be best for early-stage projects
with the flexibility to integrate gardens into the design.
·· Option 2 also requires the project have a residential component and is best suited for projects of any
stage with an operating CSA in the vicinity.
·· Option 3 is applicable to projects that are residential, nonresidential, or mixed-use. It is appropriate
for projects at any stage that can set aside space for a market or that have an operating or planned
market nearby.
1 World Health Organization, Top Ten Causes of Death (Geneva, 2011), http://www.who.int/mediacentre/factsheets/fs310/en/index.html
(accessed July 2012).
2 The Center for Health Design, 2007. “Health and Nature: The Influence of Nature on Design of the Environment of Care.” Available at https://www.
healthdesign.org/chd/research/health-and-nature-influence-nature-design-environment-care (accessed: August 2014)
3 Beyond Blue Limited, Deakin University, 2010. “Beyond Blue to Green: The benefits of contact with nature for mental health and well-being.”
Available at http://www.hphpcentral.com/wp-content/uploads/2010/09/beyondblue_togreen.pdf (accessed: August 2014)
4 The University of Washington, 2014. “Green Cities: Good Health.” Available at http://depts.washington.edu/hhwb/Thm_Place.html
(accessed: August 2014)
284
Option 1. Neighborhood Gardens
STEP 1. IDENTIFY EXISTING GARDENS

Identify any existing on-site or off-site neighborhood gardens.
·· If the project is using a neighborhood garden outside the project boundary to meet the credit
requirements, use shortest path analysis to determine whether it is within a 1/2-mile (800-meter)
walking distance of the project’s geographic center. See Getting Started, Walking Distance.
·· The garden type that is intended to qualify for this credit is a traditional, community-accessible space,
not individual garden space in private yards or balconies. The garden spaces should be designed such
that occupants can easily and safely reach them using multiple modes of travel. Although gardening
spaces may be behind a locked gate, all neighborhood occupants must be eligible for a plot.
STEP 2. CALCULATE REQUIRED GARDEN AREA

Determine the residential density of the site at build-out, using Equation 1.
NPD
EQUATION 1. Residential density
Total dwelling units

Residential density =
Residential buildable land
Using calculated residential density and Table 1, determine the minimum area of growing space per
dwelling unit. Next, calculate the required growing space, using Equation 2.
EQUATION 2. Total required growing space
Total required growing Required growing space

space (ft2 or m2)
= Total dwelling units × (ft2 or m2) per dwelling unit
STEP 3. ENSURE SUFFICIENT GARDEN SPACE

Compare the total required growing space with the existing area of gardens. If there are insufficient
qualifying established neighborhood gardens, dedicate additional permanent garden space on the
project site.
The community gardens do not need to be grouped together but can be dispersed throughout the
project. If the project has any prime agricultural soils, as determined under SLL Prerequisite Agricultural
Land Conservation, these areas may be used. Locations with sunlight for most of the day also are good
candidates.
Create a map showing garden locations and sizes.
STEP 4. ESTABLISH GARDEN MANAGEMENT REGULATIONS AND FEATURES

Ensure that all gardens counted toward the credit are owned and managed by an organization whose
decision makers include garden users. Provide the following features in all new or existing on-site
dedicated garden space:
·· Permanently dedicated growing space
·· Solar access
·· Fencing
·· Watering system
·· Garden bed enhancements, such as raised beds
·· Secure tool storage
·· Pedestrian access
Prepare a narrative description of garden ownership as well as the physical features that will be supplied.
Agreements to include garden users in decision-making processes can be part of such documents as
neighborhood association bylaws or membership agreements signed by garden users.
285
Option 2. Community-Supported Agriculture
STEP 1. IDENTIFY LOCAL CSAS

Identify community-supported agriculture (CSA programs that are within 150 miles (240 kilometers) of
the project site.
Use roadway or straight-line distance to measure the distance from the project to the CSA headquarters
or to the farm associated with the CSA program.
STEP 2. IDENTIFY DELIVERY LOCATION

Of the CSA programs identified, determine which ones can deliver shares of food to a location within
a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of the project’s geographic center. In addition, the program
must deliver at least twice monthly for at least four months annually. Consider establishing delivery at
a community center or other public location with a walk-in refrigerator or kitchen, if such facilities are
included in the project scope.
NPD
STEP 3. PURCHASE CSA SERVICE PLAN
From the qualifying CSAs, purchase two years of CSA service for at least 80% of the project’s total
dwelling units. Each of those dwelling units must receive CSA service for two years starting at occupancy
or the start of the next CSA season, whichever is sooner.

Calculate the required number of CSA shares according to Equation 3.
EQUATION 3. Required CSA shares
Required CSA shares = Total dwelling units × 0.8
Retain a copy of the CSA service agreement receipt or commitment demonstrating the total number of
shares provided and retain it for credit documentation.
Option 3. Proximity to Farmers Market
STEP 1. IDENTIFY LOCAL FARMERS MARKET

Identify an existing or planned farmers market within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of the
project’s geographic center, either on-site or off-site. On a map, indicate the market’s location and the
walking route, and measure the walking distance to project’s geographic center.
STEP 2. DETERMINE SCHEDULE AND FOOD SOURCE DISTANCE COMPLIANCE PATH

Use roadway or straight-line length to measure the distance from the source farms to the market. In
addition, determine whether the local farmers market meets the following requirements:
·· The market operates at least once weekly for at least five months annually.
·· It selects vendors of food grown within 150 miles (240 kilometers) of the project site. This applies only
to agricultural products, such as produce and dairy, and not to other items found at farmers markets,
such as baked goods and crafts.
For a planned farmers market, obtain confirmation from the operator that the market will be fully
operational when the project achieves occupancy of 50% of the total building floor area.
286
FURTHER EXPLANATION
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
For Option 2, Community-Supported Agriculture, project teams outside the U.S. should confirm that local
agricultural distribution programs fit the definition of a CSA. In a CSA, a community of individuals pledges support
for farm operation. The growers and consumers share both the risks and the benefits of food production, and
consumers receive portions of the farm’s harvest during the growing season.
NPD
LS Description of existing and planned community gardens X
LS Anticipated growing space per dwelling unit X

CP CB Map of garden locations and sizes X
CP CB Calculations for growing space per dwelling unit X
CP CB Description of management entity and amenities provided at growing spaces X
LS CSA name and percentage of dwelling units that will receive shares X
CP CB CSA service agreement indicating shares, frequency and date of operation X
CP CB Calculations of percentage of dwelling units that will receive shares X
LS Description of existing or planned farmers market X
CP CB Map showing farmers’ market X
CP CB Confirmation of farmers’ market operating schedule X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

GIB Credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction. The related credit allows food gardens to be included or excluded from
landscape water-use calculations, at the discretion of the project team.
GIB Credit Rainwater Management and GIB Credit Wastewater Management. Garden irrigation is a potential
reuse that would count toward achievement of the related credits.
GIB Credit Solid Waste Management Infrastructure. Garden composting can assist in achieving the composting
option under the related credit.

None.
287
None.
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
NPD

288
289
Tree-Lined and
Shaded Streetscapes
NPD
Plan
Built Project
TREE-LINED AND SHADED STREETSCAPES

1–2 points
INTENT
To encourage walking and bicycling and discourage speeding.

To reduce urban heat island effects, improve air quality, increase
evapotranspiration, and reduce cooling loads in buildings.
REQUIREMENTS
OPTION 1. TREE-LINED BLOCKS (1 POINT)

Provide trees at intervals of no more than 50 feet (12 meters) (exempting driveways) along at least 60% of the
total existing and planned block length within the project, and on the project side of blocks bordering the project,
between the vehicle travel way (if there is one) and walkway. Alleys may be exempted from the block length
calculations.
AND/OR
OPTION 2. SHADED SIDEWALKS (1 POINT)

Provide shade from trees or permanent structures over at least 40% of the total length of existing and planned
sidewalks within or bordering the project (alleys may be exempted). Trees must provide shade within 10 years of
landscape installation. Use the estimated crown diameter to calculate the length of sidewalk shaded.
AND
For All Projects with Street Tree Plantings

From a registered landscape architect (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.), obtain a determination that
planting details are appropriate to growing healthy trees, taking into account tree species, root medium, and width
and soil volume of planter strips or wells, and that the selected tree species are not considered invasive in the project
context according to USDA or the state agricultural extension service (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
290
BEHIND THE INTENT

Street trees and shading structures have long been used in a variety of climates to create pleasant and comfortable
spaces. Shading hardscape with trees or structures can indirectly lower cooling demands in adjacent buildings
and reduce the urban heat island effect.1 In particular, trees help retain and filter rainwater on site, provide wildlife
habitat, sequester carbon, remove gaseous air pollutants like ozone, and extend the useful life of pavement. Their
presence supports higher rates of walking and bicycling as well as more frequent and extended use of outdoor
areas. One study demonstrated that trees along the circulation network can slow traffic by 3 to 15 mph (5 to 24
km/h), improving pedestrians’ and bicyclists’ safety.2 The shade and beauty of trees along the circulation network
also usually increase the value of nearby homes and businesses; for instance, businesses on tree-lined streets have
approximately 20% higher revenue than their peer establishments.3
For many projects, tree plantings can help achieve both options. Option 1 rewards trees along the circulation
network, using block length as a metric. Qualifying blocks must have trees no more than 50 feet (12 meters) apart.
Option 2 takes a complementary approach, using the total length of shaded sidewalks in the project regardless of
NPD
spacing. This distinction is intended to capture the direct benefits of shade for pedestrians.
A 10-year estimated canopy growth is used to measure shade in Option 2, in recognition of the time it takes for
trees to become established and provide shade. Shade from unintentional features, such as building height, is not
included in this option.
The credit also requires that a landscape architect review tree plantings to increase the plants’ chances of
reaching maturity, since poor planting and inadequate room for growth may prevent the trees from thriving.
STEP 1. SELECT ONE OR BOTH OPTIONS

Consider planned sidewalk and block lengths, existing trees and preliminary understanding of soil
conditions to determine which option(s) to pursue. Achievement of one option is often closely linked to
achievement of the other if trees will be used for shading.
·· Option 1 is appropriate for projects that can plant trees along a majority of the block lengths.
Compliance is based on the maximum spacing along a block length, so begin by identifying blocks
that cannot have frequent tree plantings to see whether the threshold is achievable.
·· Option 2 is for projects that have trees adjacent to sidewalks or will have other proximate structures,
such as permanent awnings associated with buildings. See Further Explanation, Permanent Shade
Structures. Compliance is based on the length of shade provided.
Option 1. Tree-Lined Blocks
STEP 1. MEASURE TOTAL BLOCK LENGTH

Measure the distance along each block face of the new and existing circulation network in and bordering
the project. Sum these lengths and subtract any excluded distances to determine the total block length.
·· Measure the length of each side of the circulation network while “jumping over” (excluding)
intersections of the circulation network. Each side of the block is considered separately and
contributes individually to the total block length.
·· Alleys and driveways may be excluded from block length at the discretion of the project team.
·· See Getting Started, Circulation Network and Block Frontages, and Further Explanation, Bordering
Blocks.
1 Local Government Commission, Local Government Commission Report, Newsletter 30(8) (August 2008), p. 2.
2 D. Burden, G. Jackson, and Walkable Communities Inc., 22 Benefits of Urban Street Trees (May 2006), p. 18.
3 Ibid.
291
STEP 2. PREPARE TREE PLANTING PLAN

Conduct a survey of existing trees along the circulation network and determine which block lengths
will have trees meeting the maximum interval requirement. Indicate their locations on a site map or tree
planting plan (Figure 1).
·· Both newly planted trees and existing trees being retained may be counted toward credit compliance.
·· Intervals are measured “on center,” from the center of one tree trunk to the center of the next tree
trunk.
·· Any sections of a block where trees are missing or farther apart than 50 feet (12 meters) do not count
toward the 60% minimum tree-lined requirement. In such cases, qualifying block length measurements
are taken between the first and last trees of the section meeting the maximum distance requirements,
and begin again at the first tree of the next qualifying section.
Sidewalk Building Alley
NPD
345'-0" 360'-0"
(105m) (109.7m)
25'-0" 50'-0" 50'-0" 50'-0" 50'-0"

(7.6m) (15.2m) (15.2m) (15.2m) (15.2m)
600'-0" 600'-0"
(183m) (183m)
SCALE:
200'
(61m)
Noncompliant
Compliant
Figure 1. Example tree planting plan
STEP 3. ENGAGE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT TO CONFIRM PLANTING DETAILS

Work with a registered landscape architect (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) when
creating and/or reviewing the tree planting plan.
ONSTRUCTION
·· The landscape architect must evaluate whether the soil and the width and volume of planter strips,
tree pits, or wells are appropriate for the tree species selected.
USGBC ·LEED Guide architect
· The landscape Illustrations NPD12
must also confirm that selected tree species are not invasive according to the
U.S. Department of Agriculture, state agricultural extension service, or local equivalent agency.
NPDc14: Treelined and Shaded Streetscapes_3
292
STEP 4. INSTALL AND MEASURE TREE PLANTINGS

Install any new trees according to the tree planting plan. Calculate the final interval length between trees
and confirm that the combined tree-lined block lengths meet or exceed 60% of total block length for the
project, using Equation 1.
EQUATION 1. Percentage of tree-lined blocks
Length of tree-lined blocks

% tree-lined blocks = × 100
Total block length – Exclusions
·· In lieu of specifying or demonstrating each interval on the site map or tree plan, projects may state
the “not-to-exceed” or maximum tree interval along blocks to demonstrate compliance and avoid
measuring each tree interval.
·· See Further Explanation, Example 1.
NPD
Option 2. Shaded Sidewalks

STEP 1. MEASURE LENGTH OF SIDEWALKS IN PROJECT

Referring to the site plan, measure the total length of sidewalks in and bordering the project. Include
existing, planned, and bordering sidewalks in calculations.
See Getting Started, Circulation Network and Block Frontages.
STEP 2. DETERMINE SHADING STRATEGY

Evaluate the existing conditions and preliminary design to determine whether to shade sidewalks with
trees, permanent structures, or a combination. In this analysis, look for existing sidewalks, shading
structures, and tree canopies.
STEP 3. MODIFY DESIGN AS NEEDED

If sidewalks will not be sufficiently shaded to meet the goals of the credit, consider adjusting sidewalk
routes or tree locations.
STEP 4. PREPARE SITE MAP OR TREE PLANTING PLAN

Identify the location of shading structures on a site map. If the team is providing shade with trees,
prepare a tree planting plan demonstrating shade from the full crown diameter by 10 years after planting
(Figure 2). This may be the same plan created for Option 1.
·· Show the shaded length of the sidewalk as if the sun were directly overhead.
·· Only the length of shade provided on the sidewalk at ground level is considered. There is no maximum
interval distance required between trees, as is required in Option 1.
·· Both newly planted and existing trees being retained may be counted.
293
Sidewalk Building
38'-0" 40'-0" 30'-0" 30'-0" 38'-0" 40'-0"

(11.6m) (12.2m) (9.1m) (9.1m) (11.6m) (12.2m)
NPD
Tree crown and projected shade (with sunlight directly overhead)
Figure 2. Example shade drawing
STEP 5. IDENTIFY ANY SECTIONS OF SIDEWALK SHADED BY PERMANENT STRUCTURES

For all shaded sidewalks or for any gaps in the tree planting plan, teams may select alternative shading
strategies to meet the credit threshold. See Further Explanation, Permanent Shade Structures.
STEP 6. ENGAGE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT TO CONFIRM PLANTING DETAILS FOR ANY

TREES
Work with a registered landscape architect (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) when
creating and/or reviewing the tree planting plan. Indicate the expected crown diameters of trees within
10 years.
OR CONSTRUCTION ·· The landscape architect must evaluate whether the soil and the width and soil volume of planter strips,
tree pits, or wells are appropriate for the tree species selected.
USGBC LEED
·· The Guide
landscape Illustrations
architect NPD11
must also confirm that the selected tree species are not invasive according to
the U.S. Department of Agriculture, state agricultural extension service, or local equivalent agency.
NPDc14: Treelined and Shaded Streetscapes_1
STEP 7. INSTALL AND MEASURE SHADE FROM TREES AND SHADING STRUCTURES.
Install any trees or shading structures according to the site map or tree planting plan and confirm that
the combined shaded length meets or exceeds 40% of total sidewalk length, per Equation 2. Shade is
measured by length along a straight line.
EQUATION 2. Percentage of shaded sidewalks
Length of shaded sidewalks

% shaded sidewalks = × 100
Total length of sidewalks
·· Sidewalks whose widths are only partially shaded may be counted toward credit compliance.
·· See Further Explanation, Example 2.
294
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
EXAMPLE 1
Option 1. Tree-Lined Blocks
A 9-acre (4-hectare) project has a circulation network that measures 1,500 feet (457 meters). Three blocks will be
tree-lined; one will have no trees. For Blocks A, B, and C, the team prepares a planting plan and lists the total length of
each block and the distances from tree to tree (Table 1).
NPD
TABLE 1. Example tree planting plan
Distance
Tree intervals
Feet Meters
Block A 325 99.1

Tree A1 to Tree A2 33 10.1
Block B 350 106.7
Tree B1 to Tree B2 48 14.6
Tree B3 to Tree B4 36 11
Block C 400 121.9
Tree C1 to Tree C2 40 12.2
Tree C7 to Tree C8 36 11
Total block length with trees 1,075 327
Block D No trees 425 130
Total circulation network 1,500 457
295
No interval between trees exceeds 50 feet (12 meters). Thus, the entire block lengths of A, B, and C contribute
toward compliance. The team sums the lengths of the tree-lined blocks and calculates the result as a percentage
of the total circulation network:
1,075 ft
× 100 = 71%
1,500 ft
327 m
× 100 = 71%
457 m
Therefore the project meets the requirement for 60% tree-lined blocks with trees spaced no farther apart than 50
NPD
feet (12 meters).
EXAMPLE 2

Option 2. Shaded Sidewalks
A 5-acre (2-hectare) project has 2,850 linear feet (869 meters) of sidewalks. Trees and trellises along several blocks
will provide shade to 1,599 linear feet (487 meters) of the sidewalks.
The team determines the percentage of sidewalks that are shaded:
1,599 ft
× 100 = 56%
2,850 ft
The project meets the requirement for 40% shading of sidewalks.
Permanent Shade Structures

Examples of eligible shade structures include the following:
·· Arcades
·· Trellises
·· Pergolas with foliage
·· Galleries or covered promenades
·· Permanent awnings
·· Retractable awnings (provided they are permanently installed)
·· Free-standing shade structures (e.g., a permanently installed metal frame with canvas covering)
The following strategies are ineligible:

·· Removable awnings
·· Removable umbrellas
·· Potted plants
·· Building façades adjacent to a sidewalk
·· Vertical signs or architectural features that do not provide shade when the sun is directly overhead
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
For projects in countries where landscape architect registration is not available, an equivalent landscape
professional, horticultural professional, architect with specialization in landscape design, or exterior architect may
qualify for the purposes of the credit. Provide a summary of the specialist’s qualifications as they relate to expertise
and accreditation in plant design.
296
LS Narrative and/or map of existing tree cover and any additional plantings to line blocks X
Site map or tree plan indicating block lengths of circulation network and compliant tree
CP CB X
intervals
CP CB Calculations for percent of block length that is tree-lined X
CP CB Calculations for percent of sidewalks by length that are shaded X
CB Registered landscape architect’s confirmation of planting details X
CP List of tree species identified for planting and confirmation that they are noninvasive X X
NPD
LS Description of trees and shade structures to be installed X
Site map or tree plan indicating length of sidewalks and the length of shade provided by
CP CB X
trees at 10-year crown diameter or by shade structures
For any trees, registered landscape architect’s confirmation of planting details and 10-
CB X
year crown diameters
RELATED CREDITS
NPD Prerequisite Walkable Streets. The related prerequisite establishes a minimum length and width of
sidewalks, which will need to be coordinated with any trees and shade structures used to comply with Option 2 of
this credit.
GIB Credit Heat Island Reduction. Shaded hardscape provided by trees and shade structures may also contribute
toward the related credit. However, the related credit requires calculations by area, not sidewalk length.
GIB Credit Rainwater Management. Trees along the circulation network and the associated planting areas may be
an effective strategy for rainwater infiltration under the related credit.
GIB Credit Minimized Site Disturbance. Existing trees along the circulation network in the project may be subject
to the tree protection requirements in the related credit.

In Option 1, the tree spacing requirement has been changed from an average 40-foot (12-meter) interval to a
maximum 50-foot (15-meter) interval.
None.
297
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
block length the distance along a block face; specifically, the distance from an intersecting Right-of-Way (ROW)
edge along a block face, when that face is adjacent to a qualifying circulation network segment, to the next ROW edge
NPD
invasive plant nonnative vegetation that has been introduced to an area and that aggressively adapts and
reproduces. The plant’s vigor combined with a lack of natural enemies often leads to outbreak populations. (Adapted
from U.S. Department of Agriculture)

298
299
Neighborhood Schools
Plan
NPD
Built Project
1 point
NEIGHBORHOOD SCHOOLS
INTENT
To promote community interaction and engagement by integrating

schools into the neighborhood. To improve students’ health by
encouraging walking and bicycling to school.
REQUIREMENTS
Include in the project a residential component that constitutes at least 30% of the project’s total building floor
area, and locate or design the project such that at least 50% of the dwelling units are within a 1/2-mile (800-meter)
walking distance of the functional building entry of an existing or new elementary or middle school or within a
1-mile (1600-meter) walking distance of the functional building entry of an existing or new high school. If the school
combines an elementary or middle school with a high school, 50% of the dwelling units must be a 1/2-mile (800
meter) walking distance of the functional building entry.
For any new school, the school authority must commit that the school will be open by the time 50% of the project
dwelling units are occupied. A legally binding warrant committing to open the school by this time must be provided
at the time of first building occupancy.
Portions of the circulation network within or bordering the project boundary that lead from dwelling units to the
school site must have (1) a complete network of sidewalks on both sides and (2) either continuous bicycle lanes or a
combination of traffic control and calming measures (alleys may be exempted). If the school is planned as part of the
project, it must be designed such that pedestrians and cyclists can easily reach building entrances without crossing
bus zones, parking entrances, and student drop-off areas.
New school campuses within the project boundary must not exceed the following limits:
·· high school (students 15-18 years old), 15 acres (6 hectares);
·· middle school (students 11-14 years old), 10 acres (4 hectares); and
·· elementary school (students 6-10 years old), 5 acres (2 hectares).
Schools combining grade levels from more than one category may use the grade level with the higher allowable
limits.
Facilities on the school site (e.g., athletic fields, playgrounds, multipurpose interior spaces) for which there is a
formal joint-use agreement with another entity may be deducted from the total site area of the school.
300
BEHIND THE INTENT

Locating schools within walking and bicycling distances of dwellings reduces auto trips, trip distances, congestion,
and emissions while providing a neighborhood amenity for recreation and civic participation. Walking and cycling to
school also improve health for school staff, students, and parents. Studies have found that regular walking or cycling
to school increases students’ overall levels of physical activity,1, 2 which helps reduce obesity, support healthy bone
and muscle development, improve psychological welfare, and even improve academic performance.3, 4 The number
of U.S. students who walk or bicycle to school has fallen, however, from 42% in 1969 to only 16% in 2001.5 This credit
is intended to help reverse that trend. To better protect walking and cycling youth and children, who are more
vulnerable to vehicle collisions and injury, the credit sets design standards for safe bicycle and pedestrian access to
schools.
This credit also limits the size of new school campuses built as part of the project to encourage the design of
compact school sites that are better integrated with surrounding neighborhood residences and amenities. Because
schools that serve as centers of community activity, recreation, or civic involvement can help maximize community
NPD
benefits from public investment, the credit allows project teams to deduct related facilities from the total site area of
the school.
STEP 1. CALCULATE RESIDENTIAL PERCENTAGE OF TOTAL PROJECT BUILDING SQUARE

FOOTAGE
For the project to qualify for this credit, residential floor area must equal at least 30% of the overall
building floor area.
STEP 2. DETERMINE LOCATIONS OF SCHOOLS AND PERCENTAGE OF QUALIFYING

DWELLING UNITS
Locate at least 50% of the project’s dwelling units within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance to the
functional building entry of an existing or new elementary or middle school, or a 1-mile (1600-meter)
walking distance to the functional building entry of an existing or new high school. If the school combines
an elementary or middle school with a high school, the shorter walking distance applies.
STEP 3. DESIGN SAFE PEDESTRIAN AND CYCLING ROUTES, OR CONFIRM EXISTING SAFE
ROUTES
Ensure that on-site or site-bordering portions of the circulation network leading to schools contain both
of the following:
·· A complete network of sidewalks on both sides of streets
·· Either continuous bicycle lanes or a combination of traffic control and calming measures
These requirements do not apply to alleys or off-site streets that do not border the project.
Traffic control and calming measures might include on-street parking, street trees, narrow streets,
clearly marked crosswalks, controlled intersections, and caution signs. See Further Explanation, Safe
Routes to School.
1 Alexander et al., The Broader Impact of Walking to School among Adolescents, BMJournal, cited by the National Center for Safe Routes to School, http://
www.saferoutesinfo.org/program-tools/what-are-health-benefits-children-who-walk-or-bicycle-school (accessed April 25, 2012).
2 Cooper et al., Commuting to School: Are Children Who Walk More Physically Active? American Journal of Preventive Medicine 25(4) (2003).
3 Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, The Importance of Regular Physical Activity for Children, at http://www.cdc.gov/youthcampaign/pressroom/
article/physical.htm (accessed April 25, 2012).
4 California Department of Education, A Study of the Relationship between Physical Fitness and Academic Achievement in California Using 2004 Test
Results, http://www.cde.ca.gov/ta/tg/pf/documents/pft2004resultsv2.doc (accessed April 25, 2012).
5 U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, Kids Walk-to-School: Then and Now—Barrier and Solutions, http://www.cdc.gov/nccdphp/dnpa/
kidswalk/then_and_now.htm (accessed January 17, 2006).
301
New schools inside the project boundary must be designed to include on-campus circulation that allows
cyclists and pedestrians to safely reach campus buildings while avoiding vehicle conflicts, in accordance
with the credit requirements. Acquire confirmation from the school authority that the school is being
designed for bicyclists’ and pedestrians’ safety.
STEP 4. CONFIRM THAT ANY NEW SCHOOL IN PROJECT DOES NOT EXCEED AREA LIMITS
Design campus sizes for new schools such that they do not exceed the maximum areas identified in the
credit requirements.
·· For purposes of credit compliance, projects can deduct campus area for which there is a formal joint-
use agreement with another entity, such as a city government, local sports league, or neighborhood
organization.
·· If a project includes a new school, the project team should contact the local school authority early
in the process to review the credit’s requirements with school officials. The credit’s maximum new
campus areas are often smaller than those used by local school authorities.
STEP 5. OBTAIN OPENING AGREEMENT FOR NEW SCHOOLS
NPD
For any new school, whether inside or outside the project boundary, that will count toward credit
compliance, obtain a legally binding agreement from the school authority to open the school at the
specified location by the time of 50% occupancy of project dwelling units.
If the new school is located inside the project boundary, the agreement must also contain provisions
requiring compliance with the maximum campus size and safe travel routes on the campus, as indicated
above.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
SAFE ROUTES TO SCHOOLS

The U.S. Safe Routes to School (SRTS) program is devoted to promoting children’s safety while walking and bicycling
to school. Project teams may wish to engage community stakeholders to determine how best to apply the program’s
recommendations.
The SRTS program elements and LEED ND requirements are complementary, and following one set of
requirements can help achieve the other set. For more information, visit saferoutesinfo.org.
EXAMPLE
A mixed-use project has a total area of 153,000 square feet (14 214 square meters), of which 62,000 square feet
(5 759 square meters) is residential. The team computes the dwelling units’ combined floor area as a percentage
of the project’s total floor area:
62,000 ft2
× 100 = 41%
153,000 ft2
5 759 m2
× 100 = 41%
14 214 m2
The project exceeds the minimum 30% residential floor area requirement. The team then determines walking
distances from the dwelling units to a nearby middle school (Figure 1).
302
TABLE 1. Example walking distance table
Building Dwelling units Walk distance to school (feet) Dwelling units within 2,640 feet
Multi-family Building A 15 2,345 15

Multi-family Building B 10 2,538 10
Townhouse A 1 2,647 0
Townhouse B 1 2,698 0
Townhouse C 1 2,750 0
Townhouse D 1 2,794 0
Duplex A 2 2,694 0
Duplex B 2 2,754 0
Total 33 25
NPD
Eight of the 33 dwelling units are farther than 1/2-mile (800 meters) from the school. The team calculates the 25
qualifying units as a percentage of the total:
25
× 100 = 76%
33
This project exceeds the requirement that at least 50% of dwellings be located within 1/2-mile (800 meters) of an
elementary or middle school.
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
U.S. schools are categorized as elementary, middle, and high, generally serving students of ages 5–11, 12–14, and 15–18,
respectively. Schools outside the U.S. should use these approximate age ranges when applying the credit to local
schools.
Existing New
Documentation
schools schools
Description of schools (existing and planned), dwelling units, walking distances, and
LS X X
pedestrian and bicycle routes
CP CB Map showing walking routes and distances from dwelling units to school(s) X X
Site map or plan drawings indicating that pedestrians and bicycle routes have traffic
CP CB X X
controls and calming measures
CP CB Commitment to open school at 50% project occupancy X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

NPD Credit Walkable Streets. Pedestrian facilities used to achieve the related credit may also help achieve the
student travel route requirements of this credit.
NPD Credit Street Network. The higher levels of connectivity achieved under the related credit may also increase
the number of student travel routes that can meet the requirements of this credit.
303
NPD Credit Access to Civic and Public Space and NPD Credit Access to Recreation Facilities. Schools that
enter into a long-term agreement to provide general public access to outdoor and indoor campus facilities before or
after school hours may qualify for the related credits. Project teams should review these credits and their proximity
before selecting a location for a new school building and/or new dwelling units.

The maximum size for school campuses is now limited to new schools inside the project boundary and no longer
applies to schools outside the project boundary.
NPD
None.
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
bicycle network a continuous network consisting of any combination of the following:
·· off-street bicycle paths or trails at least 8 feet (2.5 meters) wide for a two-way path and at least 5 feet (1.5
meters) wide for a one-way path
·· physically designated on-street bicycle lanes at least 5 feet (1.5 meters) wide
·· streets designed for a target speed of 25 mph (40 kmh)
305
Green Infrastructure
and Buildings (GIB)
GIB
GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE & BUILDINGS
OVERVIEW
Green Infrastructure and Buildings focuses on measures that can reduce the environmental consequences of the
construction and operation of buildings and neighborhood infrastructure. In the U.S., buildings account for large
shares of energy consumption and water use. Globally, construction consumes a major part of the stone, gravel,
sand, and virgin wood used in the world. Sustainable building technologies reduce waste and use energy, water, and
materials more efficiently than conventional building practices.
Including certified green buildings in projects is one way to reduce negative environmental effects. These
buildings achieve substantially better performance across a range of environmental measures, and in many cases the
cost per square foot can be comparable to that of conventional buildings.
Energy efficiency is an essential strategy for reducing pollution and greenhouse gas emissions, which are possibly
the most negative environmental consequences of building and infrastructure operation. Production of electricity
from fossil fuels is responsible for air pollution, water pollution, and more than one-third of U.S. greenhouse gas
emissions; hydroelectric generation plants can degrade river habitats; and nuclear power presents waste disposal
problems and safety concerns. Building systems—electrical, lighting, heating, ventilation, air-conditioning, and
others—can be designed to significantly reduce energy consumption compared with conventional designs and
practices. The same gains are possible with neighborhood-scale infrastructure components like street lights, traffic
signals, and water and wastewater pumps.
District heating and cooling systems are an example of neighborhood-scale infrastructure that can improve
energy efficiency because large plants are typically more efficient than building-based equipment. District systems
can also take advantage of waste heat from on-site energy generation, improving efficiency.
On-site power generation is another energy management strategy for either individual buildings or
neighborhood-scale installations. These systems reduce transmission losses, and they may increase power reliability
and decrease energy costs by supplementing or replacing utility-supplied electricity. Use of renewable energy in on-
site generation further reduces environmental harms.
Solar orientation can also reduce energy consumption in buildings through passive or active systems. And
applications like photovoltaic systems can be scaled up to neighborhood levels.
306
The environmental consequences of building construction can be lessened through the reuse of existing
buildings. Reuse avoids the environmental effects associated with the extraction, manufacture, and transportation
of raw materials, and it reduces the volume of construction and demolition waste, lowering disposal costs and
extending landfill life. Reuse of existing components and infrastructure systems can also reduce the cost of
construction.
Using materials with recycled content conserves raw materials and supports recycling of construction wastes
so that they can be diverted from landfills. Many commonly used products are now available with recycled content,
including metals, concrete, masonry, acoustic tile, carpet, ceramic tile, and insulation. Most recycled-content
products exhibit performance similar to products containing only virgin materials and can be easily incorporated
into building projects at little or no additional cost.
Conventional building practices typically alter watershed hydrology and impair local water resources and
ecosystems. Changes to hydrology may deplete aquifers, reduce stream base flow, and cause thermal stress, flooding,
and stream channel erosion. New developments can be designed to minimize changes to natural hydrology and
stream health by reducing the velocity, volume, temperature, and pollutant content of rainwater runoff.
Urban heat islands are another consequence of standard development patterns and practices. The use of dark,
nonreflective materials for parking, roofs, walkways, and other surfaces raises ambient temperatures when radiation
from the sun is absorbed and transferred through convection and conduction back to surrounding areas. As a
result, ambient temperatures in urban areas can be artificially elevated by more than 10°F (5.5°C) compared with
surrounding undeveloped areas. This increases cooling loads in summer, requiring larger HVAC equipment and
consuming additional electricity, which in turn exacerbates air pollution and contributes to the formation of smog.
GIB
Heat islands are also detrimental to wildlife habitat: plants and animals are sensitive to high temperatures and may
not thrive when temperatures increase.
Water use can also be reduced through improved design and technologies that conserve water and ease demands
on water supply. Indoors, potable water consumption can be reduced by using low-flow plumbing fixtures and
waterless urinals. Outdoor water use, primarily for landscape maintenance, accounts for a large share of U.S. water
consumption and can be reduced through careful plant selection and landscape design. Wastewater can also be
reused for landscape maintenance.
Water conservation protects the natural water cycle and saves water resources for future generations by reducing
amounts withdrawn from rivers, streams, underground aquifers, and other water bodies. Another benefit of water
conservation is reduced energy and chemical use at wastewater treatment facilities. In addition to conserving
precious potable water, wastewater reuse reduces the amount of wastewater released into environmentally stressed
streams and rivers and lessen demands on overburdened wastewater treatment systems.
Site design provides another opportunity to reduce the environmental consequences of development. Site plans
should preserve the existing tree canopy and native vegetation to the extent possible while accommodating compact
development. Preserving existing vegetation can reduce rainwater runoff, mitigate the urban heat island effect,
reduce the energy needed for heating and cooling, and reduce landscaping installation and maintenance costs. Trees
also reduce air pollution, provide wildlife habitat, and make outdoor areas more pleasant for walking and recreation.
The construction process itself is often damaging to site ecology, indigenous plants, and animal populations.
This problem can be minimized by confining construction activities to certain areas on the site and restricting the
development footprint. Protection of open space and sensitive areas through the use of strict boundaries reduces
damage to the site ecology and preserves trees, native vegetation, and wildlife habitat. Construction can also cause
soil erosion by wind and water, and soil that leaves the site can cause water and air pollution. Loss of topsoil may
increase rainwater runoff, which pollutes nearby water bodies, and may necessitate use of more irrigation, fertilizer,
and pesticides. These problems can be prevented by implementing an erosion and sedimentation control plan.
307
GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE AND BUILDINGS PREREQUISITE
Certified Green Building

Plan
Built Project
INTENT
GIB
To encourage the design, construction, and retrofit of buildings using
green building practices.
CERTIFIED GREEN BUILDING

REQUIREMENTS
Design, construct, or retrofit one whole building within the project to be certified through a LEED rating system
(if LEED for Interior Design and Construction, 75% of the total building floor area must be certified), or through a
green building rating system requiring review by independent, impartial, third-party certifying bodies that have been
accredited by an IAF-accredited body to ISO/IEC Guide 65 or, when available, ISO/IEC 17065.
308
BEHIND THE INTENT

Green buildings include features that address many aspects of sustainable design and, when integrated, produce
results greater than the sum of their parts. By applying a well-established rating system to a green building project,
project teams can quantify environmental benefits in various environmental impact areas, such as energy, water,
materials, and indoor air quality, and prioritize certain design strategies, based on their relative benefits.
Building certification systems certify structures only, and sometimes the area immediately surrounding them.
Neighborhood certification addresses the larger-scale planning, design, and construction of the neighborhood in
which the building is located. To holistically address integrated design and construction, certification of both is
important.
The use of a national, consensus-based, third-party verification to certify buildings as sustainable can add
credibility to the design from the perspective of both building occupants and community members. Neighborhoods
that are designed to be sustainable have an opportunity to demonstrate commitment to the environment by
ensuring that certified green buildings are included in the project scope.
GIB
STEP 1. CHOOSE BUILDING OR BUILDING AREA TO BE CERTIFIED

Determine which building or building areas (for LEED ID+C projects) will be certified. Consider factors
such as return on investment, overall impact, and ease of construction. See Further Explanation, Green
Building Selection Strategies.
·· Certifications achieved before the applicant initiated the LEED ND project do not qualify (See
Getting Started, Development Timeline). Buildings that have been or will be designed, constructed, or
retrofitted as part of the LEED ND project, and which will be certified using one of the approved third-
party rating systems listed in the prerequisite requirements, are eligible.
·· If the project team will pursue GIB Credit Certified Green Buildings, consider choosing a building with
the smallest total floor area to meet the prerequisite.
STEP 2. CHOOSE CERTIFICATION SYSTEM

Determine whether the project will pursue green building certification through LEED or an alternative
third-party rating system. Consider the following when choosing a certification strategy:
·· Approved non-LEED rating systems must include review by an IAF-accredited third-party certifier, to
the standards listed in the prerequisite requirements.
·· If the local government has requirements for using a particular approved green building certification
system, investigate whether the same certification system would be eligible for LEED ND.
·· Even if the local regulations require a different rating system, teams may wish to pursue LEED
certification for this credit to maintain consistency in third-party certification across the LEED ND
application. Additionally, single-building projects will automatically be awarded points for their
location in a LEED ND neighborhood, which may further streamline documentation.
·· See Further Explanation, Using Non-LEED Green Building Rating Systems.
STEP 3. CERTIFY SELECTED BUILDING

To achieve this prerequisite in the most cost-effective way, begin in the earliest project phases, use an
integrated design approach, and select a team with previous experience in using the selected rating
system.
·· If a developer other than the LEED ND developer will be responsible for achieving green building
certification, consider including the certified green building requirement in the specifications and
contracts.
·· Project teams that pursue parallel certifications (LEED ND and green building certification)
simultaneously should maintain a record of their pursuit of both certifications along with the
appropriate project names and numbers to submit for prerequisite documentation. Communicate
with USGBC about the timelines of the two certifications, to ensure that both certifications proceed
smoothly.
309
FURTHER EXPLANATION
GREEN BUILDING SELECTION STRATEGIES

To achieve a good return on investment, select the building to be certified early in design, when additional costs can
be minimized. Consider also that a certified green commercial building is likely to increase workers’ productivity and
reduce utility costs and should therefore command a premium in rents or sales price.
To leverage green building certification, identify high-profile buildings that can highlight the development’s
commitment to sustainability. Examples of such buildings include the following:
·· A public or mixed-use building
·· A building in an area with high foot traffic
·· A building that will have high daily occupancy
·· A building that will be an icon for the neighborhood development project
If the LEED ND project has a residential component, consider pursuing LEED for Homes for those buildings.
Cost/Ease of Implementation
Survey existing building owners to see if there is interest in certifying existing buildings via LEED for Building
Operations and Maintenance (LEED O+M). Many commercial offices can achieve certification cost-effectively;
major tenants considering improving their leased spaces might therefore be interested in LEED ID+C. For ease of
GIB
documentation, target single-tenant buildings.
USING NON-LEED GREEN BUILDING RATING SYSTEMS
CERTIFIED GREEN BUILDING

The certification entities of any green building rating system used to demonstrate prerequisite compliance must
have a documented quality system that covers the following elements of ISO/IEC Guide 65 or 17065:
·· Initial and continuing training of personnel
·· Periodic (usually annual) assessment of staff performance
·· Confidentiality controls
·· Conflict-of-interest statement
·· Organizational chart
·· Roles and responsibilities and/or job descriptions
·· Document control
·· Internal audit
·· Management review
·· Financial stability
Consult the full text of either standard for additional information. This requirement applies to both U.S. and non-
U.S. projects.
LS CP Name of building(s) to be certified, and name of green building rating system(s) X
CP Scorecard or checklist, including certification level and credits, for each building X
CP Narrative describing strategies to be included in building(s) X
CP CB Name and address of certified building(s) X
CB Evidence of completed certification, or Project ID for LEED certification X

310
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

GIB Credit Certified Green Buildings. The related credit builds on this prerequisite. When selecting a building
for the prerequisite, anticipate opportunities to certify additional buildings and earn the credit. For consistency,
projects may wish to use the same rating system for any additional buildings pursued in the credit. Buildings that are
certified to meet this prerequisite’s requirements may not be double-counted for compliance with the related credit.

·· Certifying bodies must be accredited.
·· ISO/IEC 17021 is no longer included as an acceptable accreditation standard.
USGBC LEED rating systems: usgbc.org/leed
ISO/IEC Guide 65, 1996: iso.org

GIB
ISO/IEC 17065: iso.org
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
None.
311
Minimum Building
Energy Performance
Plan
Built Project
GIB
INTENT
MINIMUM BUILDING ENERGY PERFORMANCE

To encourage the design and construction of energy-efficient buildings
that reduce air, water, and land pollution and environmental damage
from energy production and consumption.
REQUIREMENTS
The requirements apply to 90% of the total building floor area (rounded up to the next whole building) of all
nonresidential buildings, mixed-use buildings, and multiunit residential buildings four stories or more constructed
as part of the project or undergoing major renovations as part of the project. Each counted building must comply
with one of the following options.
OPTION 1. WHOLE-BUILDING ENERGY SIMULATION

Demonstrate an average improvement of 5% for new buildings, 3% for major building renovations, or 2% for core
and shell buildings over ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent
standard for projects outside the U.S.) across all buildings pursuing Option 1. Multiple buildings may be grouped
into a single energy model, provided (1) the building type (new construction, major renovation, or core and shell)
is consistent for all buildings included in the energy model, or (2) an average 5% improvement is demonstrated for
the entire energy model. Calculate the baseline building performance according to ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard
90.1–2010, Appendix G, with errata, using a simulation model.
Buildings must meet the minimum percentage savings before taking credit for renewable energy systems.
Each building’s proposed design must meet the following criteria:
·· compliance with the mandatory provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata (or a
USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.);
312
·· inclusion of all energy consumption and costs within and associated with the building project; and
·· comparison against a baseline building that complies with Standard 90.1–2010, Appendix G, with errata (or a
USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.).
Document the energy modeling input assumptions for unregulated loads. Unregulated loads should be modeled
accurately to reflect the actual expected energy consumption of the building.
If unregulated loads are not identical for both the baseline and the proposed building performance rating, and
the simulation program cannot accurately model the savings, follow the exceptional calculation method (ANSI/
ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, G2.5). Alternatively, use the COMNET modeling guidelines and procedures to
document measures that reduce unregulated loads.
OR
OPTION 2. PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE: ASHRAE 50% ADVANCED ENERGY DESIGN GUIDE

Comply with the mandatory and prescriptive provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata
(or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.).
Comply with HVAC and service water heating requirements applicable to the each building, including equipment
efficiency, economizers, ventilation, and ducts and dampers, for the appropriate ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy
Design Guide and climate zone:
·· ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Small to Medium Office Buildings, for office buildings
smaller than 100,000 square feet (9 290 square meters);
GIB
·· ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Medium to Large Box Retail Buildings, for retail buildings
with 20,000 to 100,000 square feet (1 860 to 9 290 square meters);
·· ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for K–12 School Buildings; or
·· ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Large Hospitals.

°° Over 100,000 square feet (9 290 square meters)
For projects outside the U.S., consult ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendixes B and D, to
determine the appropriate climate zone.
OPTION 3. PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE: ADVANCED BUILDINGS CORE PERFORMANCE

GUIDE
Comply with the mandatory and prescriptive provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata
(or USGBC approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.).
Comply with Section 1: Design Process Strategies, Section 2: Core Performance Requirements, and the following
three strategies from Section 3: Enhanced Performance Strategies, as applicable. Where standards conflict, follow
the more stringent of the two. For projects outside the U.S., consult ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2010,
Appendixes B and D, to determine the appropriate climate zone.
3.5 Supply Air Temperature Reset (VAV)
3.9 Premium Economizer Performance
3.10 Variable Speed Control
To be eligible for Option 3, the project must be less than 100,000 square feet (9 290 square meters).
Note: Healthcare, Warehouse or Laboratory projects are ineligible for Option 3.
AND
For new single-family residential buildings and new multiunit residential buildings three stories or fewer, 90% of the
buildings must meet the requirements of LEED for Homes v4 EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance.
313
BEHIND THE INTENT

Building design on the neighborhood scale can substantially reduce energy use—often for a modest initial cost
with a short payback period—when it includes load reduction, improved mechanical system efficiency, and smart
operational strategies. An integrated approach to building efficiency can reduce infrastructure requirements, lower
operating and maintenance costs, and improve indoor air quality, thermal comfort, and access to daylight. Either a
prescriptive or a performance approach may be used to attain such results.
The prerequisite is earned if at least 90% of project building floor area (rounded up to the next whole building)
achieves a minimum energy efficiency. Project buildings are categorized into two groups:
·· Group 1. Nonresidential, mixed-use, and multiunit residential buildings four stories or more
·· Group 2. Single-family residential and multiunit residential three stories or less
The 90% requirement is applied to each group. The 10% allowance accommodates projects with a small percentage
of buildings that have special energy characteristics or are difficult to model.
GROUP 1
For buildings in Group 1, a performance modeling method and two prescriptive methods are offered to give
project teams flexibility. The prescriptive approach—applicable to smaller buildings and certain nonresidential
building types, such as offices, retail stores, and schools—is simpler: it presents a limited set of system choices with
mandatory performance characteristics. Best suited to projects with smaller budgets, straightforward design, and
GIB
packaged equipment, it provides energy-saving guidance for many simple buildings with typical energy systems. Two
prescriptive options are available, depending on building size and other factors. Not all buildings will be eligible for a
prescriptive approach, however, and it can be inflexible, given that all listed requirements must be met to achieve the
prerequisite.

Alternatively, the performance path offers a more flexible, tailored way to evaluate the interactive effects
of efficiency measures. This option uses energy modeling to simulate the energy performance of the buildings
as a whole. Design teams can then assess complex systems and make efficiency trade-offs among systems and
components that the prescriptive options do not allow. One of the greatest benefits of early energy modeling is
better integration of interrelated design issues: it encourages dialogue about assumptions concerning building
components and systems. Information on energy use and costs thereby plays a bigger role as design decisions are
made.
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 was chosen as the standard on which to base the requirements because it pushes building
design toward greater energy efficiency. A study by the U.S. Department of Energy showed a weighted average
improvement of 18% across all building types1 when ASHRAE 90.1–2010 was applied instead of ASHRAE 90.1–2007.
GROUP 2
Buildings in Group 2 use ENERGY STAR for Homes, Version 3. This well-respected program provides a benchmark
for energy efficiency, comfort, and durability using a whole building approach and addresses most of the common
failures in residential construction.
Because of the complexity of designing and achieving energy efficiency for the multiple buildings in
a neighborhood development project, the guidance for this energy performance prerequisite and its
related credit, Optimize Building Energy Performance, takes a different approach. The general steps
below are intended for the master developer and project team, who will set performance goals for
the development and its buildings. More detailed information on complying with the requirements,
intended for the project buildings’ architects, HVAC system designers, and energy modelers, is available
1 DOE/PNNL study, ANSI/ASHRAE/IES 90.1–2010 Final Determination Quantitative Analysis, p. 29, http://www.energycodes.gov/sites/default/files/
documents/BECP_FinalQuantitativeAnalysisReport901-2010Determination_Oct2011_v00.pdf
314
in Appendix 4, which presents specific steps for both energy simulation and prescriptive compliance
options. Appendix 4 also offers guidance on avoiding common modeling errors, accounting for different
types of buildings, and determining compliance for district energy systems.
STEP 1. IDENTIFY BUILDING GROUPS AND TYPES

Identify the building groups and building types in the project.
Group 1. Nonresidential, mixed-use, and multiunit residential buildings four stories or more include the
following:
·· Multifamily residential buildings four stories or more, both midrise (four- to eight-story) and high-rise
(more than eight-story) buildings
·· Mixed-use buildings that are three stories or fewer and have less than 40% residential floor area
·· All mixed-use buildings more than three stories
Further classify the buildings into subgroups: new construction, major renovations, and core and shell.
Existing buildings are not subject to the prerequisite requirements.
Group 2. New single-family and new multiunit residential buildings three stories or fewer include the
following:
·· Single-family buildings
·· Multiunit residential buildings three stories or fewer
·· Mixed-use buildings three stories or fewer whose residential floor area is more than 60% of the total
See Further Explanation, LEED for Homes v4 Requirements.
GIB
See Getting Started, Development Program, for further guidance about building classification. Existing
buildings are not subject to the prerequisite requirements.
Group 1
Of the buildings in this group, 90% of the total building floor area must achieve prerequisite compliance
with one of the three options: a performance modeling option or either of two prescriptive options.
STEP 1. DETERMINE CLIMATE ZONE

Identify the project’s climate zone according to ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix B (see Further Explanation,
Climate Zone Determination).
STEP 2. REVIEW AND ADDRESS ASHRAE STANDARD 90.1–2010 MANDATORY

REQUIREMENTS
See Appendix 4, ASHRAE Standard 90.1–2010 vs. 90.1–2007, for further guidance.
STEP 3. IDENTIFY ENERGY USE TARGET

Set an energy performance goal for buildings early in the design process.
·· Consider community-level measures beyond building design, such as building a central heating and
cooling plant, planning building orientation, and developing a community renewable energy system.
These strategies will help teams that pursue points under GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy
Performance.
·· Setting an energy goal for each major building type may help teams prioritize efficiency strategies and
integrate systems for buildings that share common characteristics.
·· Balance the goals for different types of buildings for the purpose of achieving the prerequisite
requirements. For example, a project team may set a higher performance goal and design an
innovative energy system with a higher first cost for large office buildings, based on expected returns
from space rentals, than for small midrise residential buildings and the retail buildings (also in Group 1).
And the team may use energy modeling to demonstrate compliance for the office buildings but follow
a prescriptive option for the retail structure. Provided 90% of the total Group 1 floor area meets the
requirements, the project complies with the prerequisite.
STEP 4. SELECT ONE OPTION FOR EACH BUILDING IN GROUP 1

Select an option for each building that will contribute toward compliance. Count 90% of the total
building floor area, rounded up to the next whole building. Review the requirements for GIB Credit
Optimize Building Energy Performance before making a selection, and consult Figure 1.
315
START
If Office, is it under
100,000 ft2 (9 290 m2)?
Is the building an
If Retail, is it from The building may
office, retail, a
Yes 20,000 ft2 (1 860 m2) Yes follow OPTION 2
school, or a
100,000 ft2 (9 290 m2)?
hospital?
If Hospital, is it over
100,000 ft2 (9 290 m2)?
No
No
Is the building a
Project must
warehouse or Yes
follow OPTION 1
laboratory?
No
GIB
Is the building
under 100,000 ft2 No
(9 290 m2)?

Does
the project team
want to use renewable
Yes energy savings to pursue Yes
GIB Credit Optimize
Building Energy
Performance?
The building may

follow OPTION 3
Figure 1. Selecting option for each counted building
Option 1, the performance approach, is available to all buildings in the group and may be appropriate
if the building or building systems are complex and cannot comply with standard prescriptive
requirements.
The following factors could indicate that Option 1 would be advantageous:
·· Neither of the prescriptive pathways (Options 2 and 3) is available because of the building’s type
or size.
·· A building has a unique design or an HVAC system that is not covered by one of the prescriptive
options.
·· The project team wants to achieve efficiency trade-offs between measures or buildings,
offsetting the lower efficiency of one system by the improved efficiency of another, or offsetting
the lower performance of one building by the improved performance of another.
·· The project team wants to explore the energy performance and load reduction effects of several
envelope and lighting designs and mechanical systems. Detailed feedback is important during
the design process for potential savings associated with various efficiency measures, both in
isolation and in combination with other measures.
·· The owner wants an estimate of the carbon reductions or lower operating costs (energy savings,
demand charge savings) from energy strategies, beyond a simple calculation for individual
energy conservation measures.
316
Option 1 is required for the following situations:

·· The project includes on-site renewable energy and the team will count that energy in GIB Credit
Optimize Building Energy Performance.
·· For midrise and high-rise multifamily buildings, the team is pursuing GIB Credit Optimize
Building Energy Performance.
Options 2 and 3 are the prescriptive approaches. The following factors could indicate that Option 2 or
Option 3 would be advantageous:
·· The building type is covered under one or both prescriptive options and incorporates
conventional systems and energy efficiency strategies.
·· The project budget and timeline would benefit from simplified decision making and analysis
during the project design.
·· The owner needs only limited feedback and wants all efficiency measures incorporated to
achieve the prescribed threshold for energy performance.
·· The additional cost of energy modeling would not be warranted.
Although the prescriptive paths are applicable to some large buildings, such as schools and hospitals,
they were designed primarily for small projects, for which the cost of energy modeling would
represent a high percentage of the project budget.
The prescriptive paths are available only for buildings that meet certain criteria. Review the buildings’
eligibility for the ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guides and/or the Advanced Buildings
Core Performance Guide. If neither prescriptive option fits the building type, the team must pursue
Option 1.
GIB
If a building is eligible for both prescriptive options, determine which is more appropriate based
on the specific option requirements as well as future credit goals. The building type, for example,
may not match those in the Advanced Energy Design Guide (AEDG), or the project’s goals and
design may align better with the Advanced Buildings™ Core Performance™ Guide (CPG) prescriptive
requirements.
Option 2 is for buildings that have no need for unique designs and systems, beyond the simple
upgrades to mechanical, envelope, and lighting systems listed in the ASHRAE prescriptive
components. Teams will use ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for HVAC and service
water-heating systems.
Option 2 delivers a 50% savings over ASHRAE 90.1–2004 when all requirements in all categories
are met. A building must meet all the HVAC and service water-heating requirements to earn the
prerequisite under Option 2.
The eligible project types for Option 2 include the following:
·· Small to medium office buildings, less than 100,000 square feet (9290 square meters)
·· Medium to large box retail buildings, 20,000 to 100,000 square feet (1860 to 9290 square
meters)
·· K–12 school buildings of any size
·· Hospitals more than 100,000 square feet (9290 square meters)
Have the mechanical engineer review the applicable AEDG requirements for the project type. If
buildings are expected to have unique systems, potential equipment is not listed, or the system
capacity is not likely to fall within the ranges in the AEDGs, then the project cannot pursue Option 2.
Option 3 uses the Core Performance Guide and offers an alternative for buildings that are less than
100,000 square feet (9290 square meters) and not healthcare, warehouse, or laboratory. The CPG
requires that the project comply with prescriptive criteria and also demonstrate that a process is in place
for considering energy efficiency alternatives early in the design phase.
·· Projects that use Option 3 are ineligible for GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy Performance.
·· Option 3 achieves 20% to 30% savings over ASHRAE 90.1–2004, depending on the climate zone and
building type.
STEP 5. REVIEW AND ADDRESS REQUIREMENTS OF EACH SELECTED OPTION

317
STEP 1. REVIEW PREREQUISITE AND CREDIT REQUIREMENTS

Thoroughly review the criteria and referenced standards for both GIB Prerequisite Minimum Building
Energy Performance and GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy Performance.
·· The prerequisite and credit are integrally linked. Teams that intend to pursue the credit should focus
on the expanded scope necessary for credit achievement.
·· Buildings that meet the requirements for earning points under GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy
Performance, including mandatory requirements and excluding any credits from renewable energy,
automatically achieve the prerequisite.
·· The required improvement threshold for each subgroup (new construction, major renovation, or
core and shell) is the aggregate performance for buildings within the group. However, each counted
building must meet ASHRAE 90.1 mandatory requirements.
LEED ND projects typically have much longer design and construction timelines than individual building
projects. If an energy simulation for buildings was based on an earlier version of ASHRAE Standard
90.1 and the project does not wish to update the energy model to version 2010, the performance of the
buildings must be converted to the performance based on ASHRAE 90.1–2010. These buildings must
meet ASHRAE 90.1–2010 mandatory requirements, as noted in Appendix 4.
STEP 2. DEVELOP ENERGY MODEL

Engage an energy modeler to perform the energy analysis for the buildings following Option 1 (see
Appendix 4, Energy Modeler’s Qualifications).
GIB
Projects teams may develop one energy model for all the buildings, or separate energy models for
individual subgroups of buildings, or develop one energy model for each building. A single energy model
may be appropriate for a project with a central plant serving multiple subgroups of buildings.
The whole-building model for midrise multifamily residential buildings must follow USGBC’s Multifamily

Midrise Simulation Guidelines, which are based on ASHRAE Standard 90.1–2010, Appendix G (with
errata). See Appendix 4, Modeling Building Type Variations.
For projects served by district energy systems, see Further Explanation, District Energy Systems.
See Appendix 4, Option 1, Whole-Building Energy Simulation, for further guidance.
STEP 3. SUMMARIZE ENERGY MODEL RESULTS AND DETERMINE ENERGY COST SAVINGS
Calculate the anticipated energy cost savings (see Further Explanation, Energy Cost Savings).
A project team that has developed a separate energy model for each subgroup of buildings (new
construction, major renovation, and core and shell) may either aggregate the results by subgroup or sum
the energy costs across all the buildings in Group 1.
If the former, calculate the total proposed case energy cost and total baseline case energy cost for each
subgroup, and calculate the percentage of the improvement for the subgroup (Equation 1).
EQUATION 1. Percentage improvement for each subgroup in Group 1
1 – Proposed energy cost

% improvement = × 100
Baseline energy cost
If the latter, calculate a single aggregate percentage improvement for all counted buildings in Group 1
(Equation 2).
318
EQUATION 2. Percentage improvement for all counted buildings in Group 1
1 – Total proposed energy cost

% improvement = × 100
Total baseline energy cost
Energy costs offset by on-site renewable energy systems do not count toward energy savings for
compliance with the prerequisite (see Related Credit Tips).

See Appendix 4, Option 2, Prescriptive Compliance, ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide.
OPTION 3. PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE: ADVANCED BUILDINGS CORE PERFORMANCE GUIDE

See Appendix 4, Option 3, Prescriptive Compliance, Advanced Buildings Core Performance Guide.
Group 2
Of the buildings in this group, 90% of the total building floor area must meet the requirements of LEED
GIB
for Homes v4 EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance.
STEP 1. REVIEW AND ADDRESS ENERGY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS IN LEED FOR

HOMES V4
For new residential buildings in Group 2, follow the requirements of EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance in LEED for Homes v4 (see Further Explanation, LEED for Homes v4).
·· The requirements are to meet ENERGY STAR for Homes version 3, a program of the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency and the Department of Energy. The LEED v4 for Homes prerequisite
allows teams to use a prescriptive pathway or demonstrate energy efficiency through modeling and
achieving the target score on the Home Energy Rating System (HERS) index.
·· Existing homes are not subject to the prerequisite requirements, even if they are undergoing major
renovations.
STEP 2. ASSEMBLE TEAM

As early as possible, assemble experienced design and verification teams, including a HERS rater or other
USGBC-approved energy rater. Many Green Raters are HERS raters.
·· The HERS rater creates an energy model that rates the home’s performance. In addition to its function
as documentation, the HERS rating process is a valuable tool in designing the home. Options for
improving the efficiency of the home can be modeled and the associated energy savings can be used
to make design decisions.
·· ENERGY STAR certification affects nearly every construction trade. The contractor installing the
foundation must properly address moisture and thermal issues. Likewise, the plumber must select
efficient plumbing equipment and hot water piping designs.
·· Developing an ENERGY STAR and LEED training program for trade contractors is a good strategy for
success.
STEP 3. CHOOSE COMPLIANCE PATH

Homes may meet the ENERGY STAR efficiency requirements using either a prescriptive path or a
performance path.
·· The performance path is strongly encouraged because of the value that energy modeling provides
in helping project teams make informed decisions (see Further Explanation, LEED for Homes v4
Performance Path and LEED for Homes v4 Prescriptive Path).
·· The performance path provides flexibility to select a custom combination of measures so that the
home equals or betters the minimum performance of the ENERGY STAR reference home. Equivalent
performance is assessed through energy modeling. Using a home energy-rating software program
approved by the Residential Energy Services Network (RESNET), a HERS rater models the home and
verifies that the HERS index score meets or exceeds the ENERGY STAR target.
·· The prescriptive path provides a single set of measures that can be used to construct a home that
meets the certification standards of ENERGY STAR.
319
STEP 4. DECIDE ON SPECIFIC COMPLIANCE MEASURES

·· For the performance path, have the energy model completed by a qualified HERS rater. Energy
modeling may be used to perform cost-benefit analysis of different energy upgrades and design
features, such as window overhangs or home size. The cost-benefit analysis can be performed in
conjunction with a design charrette to facilitate integrated design.
·· For the performance path, a builder may selectively upgrade certain aspects of the home while
installing other items at code minimum levels, effectively making trade-offs. For example, a builder
may upgrade the windows because the supplier offers very competitive pricing, but maintain wall
insulation levels at the code minimum because there is a significant cost to upgrade in the local
market. Which features of the home are upgraded does not matter, provided the home’s overall energy
performance meets the threshold.
·· For the prescriptive path, ensure that all requirements will be met, such as insulation levels, window
performance, and heating and cooling efficiencies.
STEP 5. DESIGN HVAC SYSTEM

A qualified party should design the HVAC system to ensure proper sizing of equipment and the
distribution system, following ACCA Manual J, Residential Load Calculation; Manual D, Residential Duct
Systems; and Manual S, Residential Equipment Selection.
STEP 6. INSPECT FOUNDATION

During the early phases of construction, the builder or a builder-assigned party must complete the
foundation inspection elements of the water management checklist.
GIB
STEP 7. COMPLETE PREDRYWALL INSPECTION
The HERS rater must complete the thermal enclosure inspection after the insulation and air sealing are
installed, but before drywall installation.

A duct leakage test and envelope leakage tests are encouraged at this time because problems are easier
to fix before the drywall is installed.
STEP 8. COMPLETE HVAC CHECKLIST

After systems are installed, the HVAC contractor starts up the system and completes the HVAC
contractor checklist.
STEP 9. COMPLETE FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTS

After construction is complete, the HERS rater must complete any final inspections and diagnostic tests,
including verifying select measures from the HVAC start-up checklist.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
CLIMATE ZONE DETERMINATION

Determining the right climate zone for the project is essential, since the requirements are specific to each climate
zone. ASHRAE 90.1–2010 defines eight climate zones (Miami is in climate zone 1; Anchorage is in climate zone 8) and
three climate types: A (moist), B (dry), and C (marine).
320
To find the project’s climate zone and type, consult ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix B, for the appropriate state and
county. If the project’s county is not listed, use the climate zone listed for the state as a whole. For projects outside
the U.S., see Further Explanation, International Tips).
ENERGY COST SAVINGS

For GIB Prerequisite Minimum Building Energy Performance and GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy
Performance, modeled energy savings must be reported on an energy cost basis using actual utility rates or the
state’s average energy prices.
Using energy cost savings as a metric for overall building energy efficiency is important for several reasons. It
aligns with the energy modeling procedures in ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G, and provides a uniform metric for all
fuel types. It captures the relative effects of various efficiency measures on energy demand and long-term operating
costs—valuable metrics for the owner in determining the overall cost-effectiveness of selected efficiency strategies.
And finally, the energy cost savings metric can help designers understand energy consumption because in many
cases, cost and carbon emissions of each fuel source are closely correlated.
BUILDING TYPE VARIATIONS

Core and Shell, Retail, Data Center, and Multifamily Residential Four Stories or More
See Appendix 4, Modeling Building Type Variations.
GIB
Healthcare, Warehouses, and Laboratories

These buildings are not eligible to pursue Option 3.
DISTRICT ENERGY SYSTEMS

Projects that are served by a district energy system (DES) may demonstrate compliance with GIB Prerequisite
Minimum Building Energy Performance and GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy Performance by following a
performance modeling method or either of two prescriptive methods.
·· Option 1, Whole-Building Energy Simulation. The project team has three choices: Path 1, ASHRAE 90.1–2010,
Appendix G; Path 2, Full DES Performance Accounting; and Path 3, Streamlined DES Modeling. The modeling
path chosen by the project team may depend on the relative efficiency of the DES to which the project is
connected, how much DES information is available, or whether an energy model already exists for the system.
·· Option 2, Prescriptive Compliance, ASHRAE 50% AEDG, and Option 3, Prescriptive Compliance, Advanced
Buildings Core Performance Guide. The project team must include or exclude effects of upstream DES
equipment as specified in the referenced standard for the selected option. If the referenced standard does not
specify either approach, the upstream effects must be excluded.
See Appendix 4, Modeling District Energy Systems, if the DES also serves other neighborhoods or buildings. In all
cases, the baseline case systems should be determined for each building separately, regardless of whether these
buildings are modeled singly or together.
A project served by a dedicated DES may model the DES and all the buildings it serves as designed in a single
energy model. If the DES serves different building subgroups, the project can demonstrate that the single aggregated
improvement for all buildings required by this prerequisite is achieved. If the project wishes to demonstrate
that each building subgroup served by the DES meets the specific performance improvement required by this
prerequisite and GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy Performance, separate the DES energy performance for each
building subgroup. This may require metering the energy sources (chilled water, hot water, steam, etc.) provided by
the DES for each subgroup, or use additional models for individual subgroups based on the annual average efficiency
determined by the first model.
The average efficiency of the DES plant determined in the energy modeling process for the proposed case and the
baseline case for this prerequisite may be directly used for compliance with GIB Credit District Heating and Cooling.
For example, Path 3, Streamlined DES Modeling, may be used to determine the average efficiency of the baseline DES
plant required by GIB Credit District Heating and Cooling.
321
Path 3 allows the team to earn credit for an efficient plant without having to model a virtual plant. Additionally,
the baseline case systems are altered such that the software program models purchased energy (chilled water, hot
water, steam, etc.). The average annual efficiencies of the proposed plant must be determined via monitoring or
modeling. The average annual efficiency for each district energy source of the baseline plant is predetermined by
(and automatically entered into) the USGBC minimum energy performance calculator, based on ASHRAE 90.1–
2010, Appendix G, baseline case requirements. These values are determined by the ASHRAE 90.1–2010 system type
that would be selected for the building if the baseline case were modeled with on-site equipment.
LEED FOR HOMES v4 REQUIREMENTS

For new residential structures in Group 2, follow the relevant sections of EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance in LEED for Homes v4, reproduced below. (The Homes prerequisite also addresses existing buildings;
those requirements are omitted here because existing buildings are not subject to the LEED ND prerequisite.)
LEED FOR HOMES v4
EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy

Performance
GIB
INTENT
To improve the building’s overall energy performance and reduce its greenhouse gas
emissions.

REQUIREMENTS
Meet all of the following requirements:
1. Meet the requirements of ENERGY STAR for Homes, version 3
Complete the thermal enclosure system rater checklist, the HVAC system quality installation rater and
contractor checklists, and the water management system builder checklist. Certified passive house
projects automatically meet the thermal enclosure system rater checklist requirement.
Achieve a HERS index rating at or below the HERS index target (or USGBC-approved equivalent
for projects outside the U.S.) or meet the requirements of the ENERGY STAR for Homes, version 3,
Prescriptive Pathway, which includes meeting or exceeding all components of the ENERGY STAR
Reference Design.
2. At least one of the following appliances must be ENERGY STAR qualified (or performance equivalent for
projects outside the U.S.) and installed in each dwelling unit:
·· Refrigerator
·· Dishwasher
·· Clothes washer
3. All duct runs must be fully ducted (i.e., building cavities may not be used as ducts).
Although new residential buildings must meet the energy performance requirements of ENERGY STAR, they need
not be ENERGY STAR labeled.
LEED FOR HOMES v4, PERFORMANCE PATH

The performance path for achieving EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance requires preparing an energy
model, known as a HERS rating. The HERS rating uses a scale, or index, in which a home built to the specifications
of the HERS reference home (based on the 2006 International Energy Conservation Code) achieves a score of 100,
and a net zero-energy home scores 0. The HERS index takes into account the size of building elements (window,
floor, roof, and ceiling areas) and the characteristics of mechanical systems, lights, appliances, and insulation. The
lower a home’s HERS index, the more energy efficient it is compared with the HERS reference home. Each one-point
decrease in the HERS index corresponds to an estimated 1% reduction in energy consumption compared with the
322
HERS reference home. Thus a home with a HERS index of 75 is 25% more energy efficient than the HERS reference
home.
The ENERGY STAR HERS index target varies based on the size of the home and the number of bedrooms.
ENERGY STAR requires that large homes with few bedrooms be designed and built to higher performance standards
than smaller homes with more bedrooms. The HERS rating software provides the ENERGY STAR HERS index target.
LEED FOR HOMES v4, PRESCRIPTIVE PATH

The prescriptive path for achieving EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance provides a single set of measures
that can be used to construct an ENERGY STAR–certified home. Energy modeling is not required; however, no trade-
offs are allowed. (Under the performance path, a builder may upgrade certain facets of the home while installing
other items at code minimum levels, effectively making trade-offs.)
The first step in the prescriptive path is to ensure eligibility by comparing the conditioned floor area (CFA) of
the home to be built with the CFA of the benchmark home. If the CFA and number of bedrooms make the home
eligible, build the home according to all requirements of the ENERGY STAR reference design and the mandatory
requirements for all certified homes. Consult ENERGY STAR for Homes, version 3, national program requirements,
for eligibility guidelines.
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
GIB
Option 1. Whole-Building Energy Simulation

Option 1 requirements can be met with a USGBC-approved equivalent standard, if approved for the project’s
location.
All Options
Consult ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendixes B and D, to find the project’s climate zone. Use
Table B-2 (Canada) or Table B-3 (International). For locations not listed in Table B-3, use Table B-4, along with the
climate type definitions in Section B2, plus Appendix D, to determine climate zone.
For example, a team working on a project in Beijing consults ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010,
Appendix B, to determine the appropriate climate zone. Table B-3 does not give a climate zone for Beijing. The
project team finds Beijing in Appendix D, Table D-3, which lists the values for heating degree-days to base 65°F or
18°C (HDD65 or HDD18) as 5252, and cooling degree-days to base 50°F or 10°C (CDD50 or CDD10) as 4115. The team
uses these values to determine Beijing’s climate zone as defined in Appendix B, Section B2 and Table B-4. Beijing is
in a “moist climate” because its warmest month has a mean temperature higher than 72°F (22.2°C) and is therefore
too warm to be a “marine climate,” and annual rainfall data indicate that the city is not in a “dry climate.” Finally, the
project team uses the values found in Table D-2 for HDD65 (5252) and CDD50 (4115) in Table B-4 and determines that
Beijing is in Zone 4A (mixed-humid) because the CDD50 value is 4500 or less, and the HDD65 value is between 3600
and 5400.
New Single-Family Homes and Multiunit Residential Three Stories or Less

Projects outside the U.S. may demonstrate compliance with either ENERGY STAR for Homes or a USGBC-approved
equivalent.
Projects outside the U.S. may purchase refrigerators, dishwashers, or clothes washers that are not rated under
the ENERGY STAR program if they meet the ENERGY STAR product specifications, available on the ENERGY
STAR website. All products must meet the standards of the current version of ENERGY STAR as of the date of their
purchase.
323
Group 1
Documentation Group 2
Option 1 Option 2 Option 3
Description of compliance strategy, confirmation that project will

LS CP X X X X
meet requirements for all building groups and types
Copies of energy modeling reports, including input-output reports

CB X
from modeling software
CB Results of minimum energy performance calculator X
Any additional energy modeling documentation or exceptional

CB X
calculations (if applicable)
CB Data center calculator (if applicable) X
Retail process energy calculator

CB X
(if applicable)
CB AEDG compliance tables X
GIB
CB Target Finder results and summary X
CB Building loads and mechanical system design capacity inputs X

CB Description of insulation installation X
CB Table and calculations of building envelope performance X
CB Table and calculations of building fenestration performance X
Description of special zones or separate supplementary control

CB X
provisions (if applicable)
CB Table of variable speed control X
CB ENERGY STAR for Homes documentation X
CB ENERGY STAR for Homes inspection checklists X

324
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy Performance. The Advanced Buildings Core Performance Guide is an
option for compliance in this prerequisite but not in the related credit.
GIB Credit Solar Orientation. Orientation has significant effect on buildings’ energy performance.
GIB Credit Renewable Energy Production. Consider renewable energy production for the project during
early design. Although renewables cannot be counted toward this prerequisite, they are a viable energy costs-
saving measure that can earn points under the related credit (as well as GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy
Performance).
GIB Credit District Heating and Cooling. Projects may use Path 2, Full DES Performance Accounting and Path 3,
Streamlined DES Modeling, to determine the average efficiencies of the DES plant and the baseline plant as required
by the related credit. Improving DES efficiency affects all buildings on the district heating and cooling system. A
combined heat and power system designed to meet thermal and electrical base loads can often increase operational
efficiency and decrease energy costs.
GIB Credit Infrastructure Energy Efficiency. The efficiency of pumps for distribution of heating and cooling from
a district system can be counted in the related credit.
GIB Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction. For projects pursuing Option 1 of this prerequisite, hot water demand
GIB
savings from low-flow fixtures must be derived from the related prerequisite’s calculations.
CHANGES FROM LEED ND 2009

New construction, major renovation, and core and shell buildings except for low-rise residential buildings
·· Each of the buildings counted for prerequisite compliance can comply with any one of the applicable efficiency
options. (In LEED ND 2009, projects that followed a prescriptive option were assigned a particular percentage
improvement over ASHRAE 90.1.)
·· The aggregated proposed building cost and the aggregated baseline building cost determined by the energy
model are used to calculate the performance improvement for subgroups or for all the buildings in Option 1.
The weighted average method is no longer used.
·· For Option 1, the following changes were made:
°° ASHRAE 90.1–2010 replaces ASHRAE 90.1–2007.
°° Thresholds have been revised to 5% above ASHRAE for new buildings, 3% for major renovations, and 2% for
core and shell buildings.
°° Process energy is no longer required to make up 25% of overall building energy for the baseline and
proposed models.
°° Prerequisite compliance must now be achieved without accounting for the cost offset by site-
generated renewable energy.
·· For Option 2, the standard for compliance has been changed from the 30% savings version of the AEDG to the
50% savings version.
·· For Options 2 and 3, the project must now comply with mandatory and prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE
90.1–2010.
New single-family residential buildings and new multiunit residential buildings three stories or fewer
·· The referenced ENERGY STAR standard has been updated from version 2 to version 3, which requires
substantially better energy efficiency, comfort, and durability performance for homes.
·· Prescriptive requirements that appliances be ENERGY STAR qualified and duct runs be fully ducted have been
added.
325
ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010: ashrae.org
ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guides: ashrae.org
Advanced Buildings Core Performance Guide: advancedbuildings.net/core-performance
2006 Mortgage Industry National Home Energy Rating System Standards: resnet.us/standards/RESNET_
Mortgage_Industry_National_HERS_Standars.pdf
ACCA Manual D, Residential Duct Systems: acca.org/store/product.php?pid=355
ACCA Manual J, Residential Load Calculation (8th edition): acca.org/store/product.php?pid=172
ACCA Manual S, Residential Equipment Selection: acca.org/store/product.php?pid=154
ENERGY STAR Qualified Homes, version 3, National Program Requirements: energystar.gov/ia/partners/

bldrs_lenders_raters
ENERGY STAR Qualified Homes, version 3, Inspection Checklists for National Program Requirements:
energystar.gov/ia/partners/bldrs_lenders_raters
COMNET Commercial Buildings Energy Modeling Guidelines: comnet.org/mgp-manual
GIB
ENERGY STAR Multifamily High-Rise Simulation Guidelines: energystar.gov/ia/partners/bldrs_lenders_raters

Not available.
DEFINITIONS
None.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT GIB
326
327
Indoor Water
Use Reduction
Plan
Built Project
GIB
INTENT
INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

To reduce indoor water consumption.
REQUIREMENTS
Nonresidential Buildings, Mixed-Use Buildings, and Multifamily Residential Buildings Four Stories or More
For new buildings and buildings undergoing major renovations as part of the project, reduce indoor water usage by
an average of 20% from a baseline. All newly installed toilets, urinals, private lavatory faucets, and showerheads that
are eligible for labeling must be WaterSense labeled (or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
For the fixtures and fittings listed in Table 1, as applicable to the project scope, reduce water consumption by 20%
from the baseline. Base calculations on the volumes and flow rates shown in Table 1.
The design case is calculated as a weighted average of water usage for the buildings constructed as part of the
project based on their floor area.
TABLE 1. Baseline water consumption of fixtures and fittings
Fixture or fitting Baseline (IP units) Baseline (SI units)
Toilet (water closet)* 1.6 gpf 6 lpf
Urinal* 1.0 gpf 3.8 lpf

0.5 gpm at 60 psi all others except 1.9 lpm at 415 kPa, all others except
Public lavatory (restroom) faucet
private applications private applications
Private lavatory faucet* 2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa
Kitchen faucet (excluding faucets used

2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa
exclusively for filling operations)
Showerhead* 2.5 gpm at 80 psi per shower stall 9.5 lpm at 550 kPa per shower stall
* WaterSense label available for this product type

gpf = gallons per flush lpf = liters per flush
gpm = gallons per minute lpm = liters per minute
psi = pounds per square inch kPa = kilopascals
328
New Single-Family Residential Buildings and New Multiunit Residential Buildings Three Stories or Fewer
90% of residential buildings must use a combination of fixtures and fittings that would earn 2 points under LEED for
Homes v4 WE Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction
GIB
329
BEHIND THE INTENT

Potable water usage in buildings constitutes a large portion of freshwater consumption. Strategies to reduce potable
water use in buildings entail the selection of efficient plumbing fittings, fixtures, and equipment. Fixtures that use
20% to 50% less water than code-required levels are now widely available. The WaterSense label was developed by
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency to identify efficient fixtures and ensure that higher efficiency does not
come at the cost of performance. The WaterSense label has been incorporated as a requirement for this credit to
ensure that fixtures are both water efficient and high performing.
Because this prerequisite is designed around an “efficiency first” model, the prerequisite deals only with the
efficiency of fixtures and fittings; alternative or nonpotable water sources that offset potable water demand are
addressed in the corresponding credit.
STEP 1. DETERMINE BUILDING CATEGORIES AND SELECT COMPLIANCE PATH, IF APPLICABLE

Categorize each building as follows and select one compliance path for any Category 1 buildings.
GIB
Nonresidential buildings, mixed-use buildings, and multifamily residential buildings four stories or more
(Category 1)
·· Compliance Path 1, Prescriptive Achievement, is for projects that can demonstrate, through product

cutsheets and/or fixture schedules, a 20% reduction from the baseline for all fixtures in new buildings
and buildings undergoing major renovations.
·· Compliance Path 2, Usage-Based Calculation, is for projects that cannot demonstrate the above 20%
reduction and also for projects pursuing points under the Indoor Water Use Reduction credit. Teams
must perform calculations to show compliance with the prerequisite requirements.
New single-family residential buildings and new multiunit residential buildings three stories or fewer
(Category 2)
·· Meet the requirements for achieving 2 points under WE Indoor Water Use from LEED for Homes v4.
STEP 2. SELECT WATERSENSE-LABELED PRODUCTS WHERE POSSIBLE

Select WaterSense-labeled products for all newly installed fixtures that are eligible for labeling. Verify
that the manufacturer and model are listed on the WaterSense website.
·· The WaterSense label can be found for fixtures in the following product categories:
°° Tank-type toilet (water closet)
°° Water-using urinals
°° Private lavatory faucets
°° Showerheads
·· The following fixture types are not labeled by WaterSense and need only comply with the percentage
reduction criteria:
°° Tankless toilets
°° Composting toilets and waterless toilets
°° Waterless urinals
°° Public lavatory faucets
Using aerators in flow fixtures is an acceptable water savings strategy.
·· Newly installed aerators or flow restrictors added to private lavatories or showers must be WaterSense
labeled.
·· For private lavatories, WaterSense requires a maximum flow rate of 1.5 gpm at 60 psi (5.6 lpm at 415
kPa) and a minimum flow rate of 0.8 gpm at 20 psi (3 lpm at 140 kPa). The installed fixtures in the
design case must use the rated flow rate from the manufacturer, and the underlying assumptions must
remain consistent between the baseline and design cases.
For projects in countries where WaterSense-labeled products are not readily available, see Further
330
STEP 3. SELECT HIGH-EFFICIENCY FIXTURES

For all product categories listed in Step 2, including those covered by WaterSense, specify low-
flow fixtures. Where possible, select fixtures that meet or exceed the 20% reduction indicated in the
prerequisite requirements.
·· Some equipment does not need to meet the 20% reduction threshold (see Further Explanation,
Excluded Water-Using Equipment).
·· The distinctions between public and private determine which thresholds each fixture and fitting must
meet (see Further Explanation, Public versus Private Lavatories).
·· For guidance on unusual fixtures, see Further Explanation, Unique or Nonstandard Water Closets.
·· Sinks can be defined as public, private, kitchen, or process, depending on use and location. Kitchen
sinks include all sinks in public or private buildings that are used in ways similar to residential kitchen
sinks: hotel or motel kitchenette sinks, office kitchenette sinks, staff lounge sinks, pantry or nutrition
station sinks, school classroom sinks (if used similarly to residential kitchen sinks), and commercial
(food service) kitchen hand sinks that do not pass through a grease interceptor.
Compliance Path 1. Prescriptive Achievement (prerequisite only)
STEP 1. CONFIRM PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE

Ensure that the selected fixtures meet the following prescriptive flush or flow rate thresholds.
GIB
TABLE 2. Maximum installed flush or flow rates for prescriptive path
Maximum installed
Fixture or fitting
flush or flow rate
IP SI
Toilet (water closet)* 1.28 gpf** 4.8 lpf**
Public lavatory (restroom) faucet 0.40 gpm 1.5 lpm
Private lavatory faucets* 1.50 gpm 5.7 lpm
Kitchen faucet 1.75 gpm 6.7 lpm
Showerhead* 2.00 gpm 7.6 lpm
* WaterSense label is available for this fixture type.

** Calculate the average flush rate for dual flush toilets as the average flush volume of one full flush and two
reduced flushes, using a 1:2 (high-low) ratio.
gpf = gallons per flush
gpm = gallons per minute
lpf = liters per flush
lpm = liters per minute
STEP 2. COLLECT MANUFACTURER’S INFORMATION

Compile fixture cutsheets and/or manufacturer’s information for all fixtures and appliances. The fixture
data must highlight the flush or flow rate(s). A plumbing fixture schedule is acceptable, provided it
contains the flush or flow rate information.
Compliance Path 2. Usage-Based Calculation
STEP 1. COMPILE CUTSHEETS AND/OR PREPARE PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

For each fixture, compile manufacturer’s data that indicate the fixture’s flush or flow rate.
·· To manage the data needed for the calculation, consider creating a table or plumbing fixture schedule
with the flush or flow rate information for each fixture.
·· Record fixture model, flush or flow rate, percentage of occupants with access to the fixture, and so on.
331
STEP 2. GATHER INFORMATION FOR INDOOR WATER USE CALCULATOR

The indoor water use calculator provided by USGBC requires the following information:
·· Project occupancy. Count occupants consistently across all LEED credits (see Further Explanation,
Occupant Types).
°° If different parts of the project have different sets of fixtures, create a separate table for each
subset. If fixtures are uniform across the project and if restroom access is unrestricted, multiple
calculations are not necessary; one calculation can cover all building fixtures and occupants.
°° A separate calculation to accommodate visitors is not necessary because the calculator
automatically assigns them a lower daily usage rate. For example, it assumes that visitors do not use
kitchen faucets.
·· Gender ratio. The default gender mix is half male and half female. Assumptions that differ from the
default must be justified; provide a narrative and supporting data (see Further Explanation, Gender
Ratio).
·· Days of operation. The default number of days of operation per year is 365.
°° If the project is in use for only a portion of the year or closes on specific days, the days of operation
can be reduced.
°° The same number of days of operation must be applied to both the baseline and the design cases.
°° Ensure that the number of days of use is consistent with the project’s operating schedule and
prepare supporting documentation.
·· Fixture types used in the project.
STEP 3. COMPLETE CALCULATIONS
GIB
Complete the calculations for the design case (installed) flush and flow fixtures. The following
information is required:
·· Fixture type
·· Flush or flow rate

·· Fixture manufacturer and model (which should match cutsheets)
·· Percentage of occupants using each fixture model. The total for all fixtures of each type must total
100% of occupants for standard fixture types.
The calculator determines usage based on Equation 1 (see Further Explanation, Calculations and Default
Durations and Uses).
EQUATION 1. Basic indoor water use reduction calculation
Daily water use for Fixture flush or Duration Uses per person
each fixture type
= flow rate
× of use
× Users × per day
·· The duration of use, number of users, and uses per person per day must be the same in both the
baseline and the design cases.
·· Dual-flush toilet flush rates are calculated as the average, using a 1:2 (high-low) ratio.
·· For metering faucets, gallons (liters) per cycle (gpc, lpc) and cycle duration in manufacturer’s
documentation must be converted to a flow rate in gallons (liters) per minute (gpm, lpm). Use
Equation 2 to perform the conversion.
EQUATION 2. Faucet flow rate conversion
Gallons per cycle (gpc) × 60 sec

Flow rate (gpm) =
Cycle duration (seconds)
Liters per cycle (lpc) × 60 sec

Flow rate (lpm) =
Cycle duration (seconds)
For example, convert a 0.2 gpc metering faucet with a 12-second cycle duration as follows:
0.2 gpc × 60 sec

= 1 gpm
12 sec
332
Likewise, convert a 0.76 lpc metering faucet with a 12-second cycle duration as follows:
0.76 lpc × 60 sec

= 3.8 lpm
12 sec
Provide manufacturer’s documentation to confirm the flow rate conversion.
NEW SINGLE-FAMILY RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS AND NEW MULTIUNIT RESIDENTIAL

BUILDINGS THREE STORIES OR FEWER
STEP 1. SPECIFY DESIRED WATER CONSUMPTION RATE OF FIXTURES AND APPLIANCES

·· Select high-efficiency faucets, showerheads, and clothes washers.
·· Select high-efficiency toilets.
·· Design only one showerhead per shower compartment.
·· If graywater will be used, ensure that the water quality will meet any minimum standards set by fixture
manufacturers.
STEP 2. PURCHASE AND INSTALL FIXTURES

All fixtures must be WaterSense labeled except for clothes washers, which must be ENERGY STAR
qualified. Clothes washers are not currently covered by the WaterSense program. See Further
Explanation, International Tips, for information on equivalency.
GIB
Low-flow showerheads, especially those with flow volumes of less than 1.75 gpm (6.6 lpm), should be
installed with proper thermostatic mixing valves that have been designed, tested, and verified to function
safely at the reduced flow rate. The use of conventional or compensating shower valves can increase
the risk of scalding when the plumbing system experiences pressure changes. Consult showerhead
manufacturers’ information for the performance of high-efficiency and very high efficiency showerheads
(including testing for scalding and thermal shock) before making a selection.
If faucets do not comply with the credit requirements, replace the original aerator with a low-flow aerator.
Also called flow restrictors, aerators limit the amount of flow in a tap and are an acceptable strategy to
meet the credit requirements.
STEP 3. CHECK FOR WATER LEAKS WITHIN BUILDING

After plumbing is complete, including the installation of all fixtures and any irrigation, ensure that there
are no leaks in the system.
Test with a pressure gauge or ask the plumber to perform the test. Turn off all water fixtures and fittings
in the building. Install a pressure gauge on a hose bib, and check pressure in psi.
Do not turn on any water during the testing period. If pressure is unchanged over a period of at least 30
minutes, there is no detectable water leak.
STEP 4. CHECK FOR WATER LEAKS BETWEEN WATER METER AND BUILDING
If possible, also check for leaks between the utility meter and the building by turning off all water fixtures
and fittings.
Observe the water meter over a period of at least 30 minutes. If the meter reading is unchanged, there is
no detectable water leak.
WATER PRESSURE (SINGLE-FAMILY RESIDENCES ONLY, CASE 1 IN LEED FOR HOMES v4,
WE CREDIT INDOOR WATER USE)
STEP 1. MEASURE WATER PRESSURE

As early as possible during construction, measure the pressure of the water coming into the house
(see Further Explanation, Residential Water Pressure).
STEP 2. ADJUST PRESSURE

If the water pressure is greater than 60 psi (415 kPa), install a pressure regulation valve and adjust the
water pressure so that it is 20 to 60 psi (140 to 415 kPa).
333
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
See equations in Step-by-Step Guidance. Calculations are built into the indoor water use calculator provided by
USGBC; the following is offered for reference.
The usage-based calculation for the project is the difference between the calculated design case and a baseline
case. The percentage is determined by dividing the design case reduction by the baseline reduction.
In traditional plumbing design, calculations are based on fixture counts; the methodology for this prerequisite
calculates water use according to fixture consumption rates and estimated use. Occupants’ estimated use is
determined by counting full-time-equivalent and transient occupants and applying appropriate fixture use rates to
each. The calculator estimates the percentage reduction of potable water use, compared with the baseline.
The calculator produces the following:
·· Annual baseline water consumption (gallons or liters per year)
·· Annual design case water consumption (gallons or liters per year)
·· Percentage savings between baseline and design cases
Alternatively, teams can use the equations in Step-by-Step Guidance and then calculate the percentage savings using
Equation 3.
GIB
EQUATION 3. Indoor water-use reduction
% improvement Baseline volume – Performance volume

from baseline
= × 100

Baseline volume
This prerequisite deals only with the water efficiency of fittings and fixtures that use potable water. Water derived
from alternative sources, such as harvested rainwater, is not considered under this prerequisite but can be used to
document additional savings in GIB Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction.
EXCLUDED WATER-USING EQUIPMENT

Appliances and equipment that use water on substances intended for human consumption may be excluded. For
example, bread and produce misters, soda machines, coffee-making machines, and fixtures used to fill sinks for
washing produce are excluded.
Fixtures whose flow rates are regulated by health codes may be excluded from the calculation. For example,
regulated medical equipment is considered a process water user and is excluded from fixture calculations.
Process water sinks are also excluded from the fixture water-use reduction calculations. Examples of process
water sink fixtures that are excluded include the following.
Specialized
·· Janitor sinks
·· Laboratory sinks regulated for medical or industrial purposes
Commercial kitchens (food service)

·· Commercial kitchen (food service) sinks and prep sinks, including pot-filling, wash-down, and cleaning sinks
Health care
·· Surgical scrub sinks
·· Exam or procedure room sinks for clinical use
·· Medication room sinks
334
General
·· Janitor closet sinks
·· Soiled utility room flushing rim sinks
·· Soiled utility room hand-washing sinks
·· Clean utility room hand-washing sinks
PUBLIC VERSUS PRIVATE LAVATORIES

Lavatory faucets must be classified as public or private. The Uniform Plumbing Code, International Plumbing Code,
and National Standard Plumbing Code define private as fixtures in residences, hotel or motel guest rooms, and
private hospital rooms. All other applications are deemed to be public.
Private fixtures are for residential occupants and residential-type occupants who use the building for sleeping
accommodations. These include fixtures in bathrooms for dormitory residents, hospital inpatients, nursing home
residents, and prisoners.
If it is unclear whether the classification should be public or private, default to public use flow rates in performing
the calculations.
Lavatory faucets are intended for hand washing (Table 3). Private lavatory faucets are subject to the federal
standard of 2.2 gallons per minute at 60 pounds per square inch (psi; 8.3 liters per minute at 415 kilopascals, kPa).
Public lavatory faucets are subject to the federal standard of 0.5 gallons per minute at 60 psi (1.9 liters per minute at
415 kPa).
GIB
TABLE 3. Typical public and private lavatory faucet applications
Lavatory faucet Classification

• Restroom sink
Public (baseline: 0.5 gpm, 1.9 lpm)
• School classroom sinks (if used primarily for hand washing)
• Residential bathroom sink

• Hotel or motel bathroom sink
• Dormitory bathroom sink Private (baseline: 2.2 gpm, 8.3 lpm)
• Patient room sink
• Patient bathroom sink in hospital or nursing home

UNIQUE OR NONSTANDARD WATER CLOSETS

For unique or nonstandard toilets and fixtures, the following may apply:
·· Toilets with flush valve control and separate bowls. The flush rates should be based on installed flush valve.
Confirm that bowl size and flush valve rates are compatible to ensure performance.
·· Prison fixtures. Flow rates and flushing mechanisms must conform to the same design standards as
commercial toilets.
·· Children’s toilets. Flow rates and flushing mechanisms must conform to the same design standards as
commercial toilets. Confirm that bowl size and flush valve rates are compatible to ensure performance.
·· Squat (floor-mounted) toilets. Flow rates and flushing mechanisms must conform to the same design
standards as commercial toilets.
OCCUPANT TYPES
Identify the daily average number of building users by type (see Getting Started, Occupancy). The indoor water use
calculator requires total occupant counts in the following categories:
·· Employees and staff. Express this type as full-time-equivalent (FTE) employees.
·· Residents. Include dormitory residents, hospital inpatients, prisoners, hotel guests, and any other people who
use the building for sleeping accommodations. For hotels, calculate the number of overnight guests based on
335
the number and size of units in the project. Assume 1.5 occupants per guest room and multiply the resulting
total by 60% (average hotel occupancy, per American Hotel and Lodging Association).
·· Primary and secondary school students. See Further Explanation, Rating System Variations.
·· Retail customers
Visitors (excluding retail customers). Include outpatients and higher education students. Report visitors as a daily
average total. If occupancy is known, use the actual occupant counts and determine a representative daily average
over the course of the year. If the occupancy is not known, see Getting Started, Occupancy.
Tables 4 and 5 under Default Duration and Uses, below, provide default fixture use values for different occupancy
types. These values should be used in the calculations unless special circumstances warrant modifications (see
Further Explanation, Rating System Variations).
GENDER RATIO
The default gender ratio for full-time-equivalent occupants is 50:50. If special circumstances warrant an alternative
ratio, provide a narrative and supporting documentation. Modifications to the 50:50 ratio must be shown to apply for
the life of the building.
Acceptable special circumstances include buildings specifically designed for an alternative gender ratio—for
example, a single-gender educational facility. The project team must show that the building’s flush and flow fixtures
have been distributed to account for the modified ratio. Provide documentation of the code-required plumbing
GIB
fixture counts per gender so that the reviewers can verify that the flush-fixture ratio supports the alternative ratio.
Gender ratio affects water usage only when urinals are installed. If the project does not include urinals, a 50:50 or
0:100 male-female ratio should yield the same usage results.

DEFAULT DURATIONS AND USES
Duration of use and uses per day are calculated using defaults (Tables 4 and 5).
TABLE 4. Nonresidential default fixture uses
Uses per day

Duration
Fixture type
(sec)
Employees (FTE) Visitors Retail customers Students
Water closet (female) n/a 3 0.5 0.2 3
Water closet (male) n/a 1 0.1 0.1 1
Urinal (female) n/a 0 0 0 0
Urinal (male) n/a 2 0.4 0.1 2
Public lavatory faucet 30 3 0.5 0.2 3
Shower 300 0.1 0 0 0
Kitchen sink 15 1 0 0 0
TABLE 5. Residential default fixture uses
Duration
Fixture type Uses per day
(sec)
Water closet (female) n/a 5
Water closet (male) n/a 5
Private lavatory faucet 60 5
Shower 480 1
Kitchen sink 60 4
336
For home and dormitory residents, hospital inpatients, hotel guests, prisoners, or any other residential occupants
who use the building for sleeping accommodations, use the default residential fixture usage assumptions.
RESIDENTIAL WATER PRESSURE

The flow rate of plumbing fixtures is measured at 60 pounds per square inch (psi; 415 kilopascals, kPa). When house
water supply pressure varies, fixture flow rate drops or rises with it. For example, a reduction in pressure from 100
to 50 psi (690 to 345 kPa) at an outlet can reduce water flow by about one-third. Water pressure over 60 psi can void
manufacturers’ warranties for plumbing fixtures. Many residential plumbing fixtures are engineered for pressures
no greater than 75 to 80 psi (520 to 550 kPa). Fixtures such as tanked water heaters, dishwashers, refrigerators,
icemakers, and pressure-assist toilets can leak or have shorter lifespans if pressures exceed the rated maximum.

Core and Shell Buildings
Include in the prerequisite documentation only plumbing fixtures, appliances, and process water installed as a part
of the core and shell building’s scope of work (i.e., what the developer is installing in the project). Do not include
as-yet-uninstalled (future) plumbing fixtures, appliances, and process water. If no eligible plumbing fixtures,
appliances, and process water are installed as part of the Neighborhood Development project’s scope of work, the
project automatically achieves this prerequisite.
GIB
If plumbing fixtures are installed by the developer in otherwise-incomplete tenant spaces, include those fixtures
as part of the core and shell building’s scope and use the default occupancy counts to account for their usage in the
calculations if pursing Compliance Path 2. If the occupancy is not known, see Getting Started, Occupancy.
Schools
For primary and secondary schools that close on weekends, holidays, and for eight weeks of school vacation, assume
195 days of operation.
For occupancy calculations (see Getting Started, Occupancy), in deciding whether to count individuals as
employees, students, or visitors, consider their fixture-use patterns. For example, a volunteer who serves four
hours each day in an elementary school will likely have the same plumbing usage patterns as full-time staff. Such a
volunteer could therefore be considered to have an FTE value of 0.5. On the other hand, an individual who attends
a high school basketball game may be expected to use the water closets and lavatory faucets in the school building
infrequently and therefore should be counted as a visitor. Report visitors as average daily totals.
When calculating annual occupancy for schools with multiple sessions, consider a session a discrete period of
school building operation. A session can be defined by a season or by other variations in building occupancy and
usage, such as weekend programming by a community organization. If the school building is used for more than one
session annually, calculate the percentage for each session, based on the number of days in the session divided by the
total number of days during which the school building operates annually, using Equation 4.
EQUATION 4. School session as percentage of annual operation
Days in session
Session % =
Annual days of operation
Then calculate the annual occupants of each gender by multiplying the number of occupants in each session by the
session percentage (from Equation 4) and summing the results of all sessions, using Equation 5.
EQUATION 5. Annual occupancy for Schools projects
Annual occupants, (Session A FTEs, (Session B FTEs,

by gender
= by gender, × Session %)
+ by gender, × Session %)
FTE = full-time equivalent

337
Mixed-use buildings
If a mixed-use building has the same fixtures throughout, the team may perform just one calculation for building
water use. If the spaces use different fixtures or have materially different occupancy patterns, complete the indoor
water use calculator separately for each space type.
Multifamily buildings, three stories or fewer

Use residential occupancy and the Homes tab of the indoor water use reduction calculator.
Renovations
All fixtures, both existing and new, within the scope of the renovation must be included in the indoor water use
calculations for the prerequisite and credit. Use the baseline flush and flow rates in Table 1 for baseline water
consumption, not the water consumption of fixtures prior to retrofit. Existing fixtures and fittings are not subject to
the prerequisite requirements.
Additions
For compliance with this prerequisite, include in the documentation all plumbing fixtures necessary to meet the
occupants’ needs, whether they will be installed as part of the project’s scope of work or not. Include at a minimum
all necessary restroom fixtures (toilets, urinals, and lavatories); include showers if the project is pursuing SLL Credit
Bicycle Facilities. The WaterSense label requirement does not apply to fixtures that are outside the scope of the
LEED project.
GIB
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
In countries where the WaterSense label is not available, refer to the acceptable WaterSense substitutes document
at usgbc.org. Countries that are not listed must comply with the fixture performance requirement of water use—at

least 20% below the baseline EPAct 1992 requirement (see Referenced Standards)—but are not required to purchase
WaterSense fixtures.
A project outside the U.S. may purchase products that are not labeled under the ENERGY STAR program if they
meet the ENERGY STAR product specifications, available on the ENERGY STAR website. All products must meet
the standards of the current version of ENERGY STAR as of the date of their purchase.
A project outside the U.S. may purchase products that have not been qualified or labeled by the Consortium for
Energy Efficiency (CEE) if they meet the CEE product criteria for efficiency.
Commercial buildings (new or
Core and Shell
major renovation) Residential
buildings
Documentation buildings,
included in
Usage-based homes
Prescriptive calculations
calculation
LS CP Fixture strategies narrative X X X X
CB Product cutsheets or manufacturer’s information X X X
CB Indoor water use reduction calculator X X
CB Tenant lease agreement (if applicable) X
CB Tenant scope of work narrative (if applicable) X

338
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.

·· The WaterSense label, recommended in LEED 2009, is now mandatory for fixtures in U.S. projects.
·· The prescriptive compliance path (based on demonstrating that all fixtures are 20% more efficient than the
baseline) is new.
·· Duration-based savings for autocontrol faucets with automatic fixture sensors or metering controls are no
longer allowed in the design case. Studies have shown that autocontrol faucets do not result in savings because
users frequently reactivate the faucet after initial use or stop washing before the cycle ends.
·· Applying nonpotable water is no longer allowed as an alternative compliance path in the prerequisite. An
alternative water source can earn points in the corresponding credit.
GIB
Energy Policy Act (EPAct) of 1992, as amended: energy.gov/eere/femp/federal-energy-management-program
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials, Publication IAPMO/ANSI UPC 1-2006,
Uniform Plumbing Code 2006, Section 402.0, Water-Conserving Fixtures and Fittings: iapmo.org
International Code Council, International Plumbing Code 2006, Section 604, Design of Building Water
Distribution System: iccsafe.org
ENERGY STAR: energystar.gov
WaterSense: epa.gov/watersense/
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
potable water water that meets or exceeds U.S. Environmental Protection Agency drinking water quality standards
(or a local equivalent outside the U.S.) and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities
having jurisdiction; it may be supplied from wells or municipal water systems
nonpotable water water that does not meet drinking water standards
blackwater wastewater containing urine or fecal matter that should be discharged to the sanitary drainage system
of the building or premises in accordance with the International Plumbing Code. Wastewater from kitchen sinks
(sometimes differentiated by the use of a garbage disposal), showers, or bathtubs is considered blackwater under
some state or local codes.
composting toilet system see nonwater toilet system
graywater untreated household waste water which has not come into contact with toilet waste. Graywater includes
339
used water from bathtubs, showers, bathroom wash basins, and water from clothes-washers and laundry tubs. It
must not include waste water from kitchen sinks or dishwashers” (Uniform Plumbing Code, Appendix G, Gray
Water Systems for Single-Family Dwellings); “waste water discharged from lavatories, bathtubs, showers, clothes
washers and laundry sinks” (International Plumbing Code, Appendix C, Gray Water Recycling Systems). Some states
and local authorities allow kitchen sink wastewater to be included in graywater. Other differences can likely be found
in state and local codes. Project teams should comply with the graywater definition established by the authority
having jurisdiction in the project area.
metering control a regulator that limits the flow time of water, generally a manual-on and automatic-off device,
most commonly installed on lavatory faucets and showers
nonwater (or composting) toilet systems dry plumbing fixtures and fittings that contain and treat human waste
via microbiological processes
GIB
340
341
Construction Activity
Pollution Prevention
Plan
Built Project
GIB
INTENT
CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY POLLUTION PREVENTION

To reduce pollution from construction activities by controlling soil
erosion, waterway sedimentation, and airborne dust.
REQUIREMENTS
Create and implement an erosion and sedimentation control plan for all new construction activities associated with
the project. The plan must incorporate best management practices (BMPs) to control erosion and sedimentation
in runoff from the entire project site during construction. The BMPs must be selected from EPA’s BMPs for
construction and post-construction site runoff control.
The erosion and sedimentation control plan must list the BMPs employed and describe how the project team will
do the following:
·· preserve vegetation and mark clearing limits;
·· establish and delineate construction access;
·· control flow rates;
·· install sediment controls;
·· stabilize soils;
·· prevent soil loss during construction;
·· stockpile topsoil for reuse;
·· protect slopes;
·· protect drain inlets, all rainwater conveyance systems, and receiving water bodies;
·· stabilize channels and outlets;
·· control pollutants including dust and particulate matter;
·· control dewatering;
·· maintain the BMPs; and
·· manage the erosion and sedimentation control plan.
342
BEHIND THE INTENT

This prerequisite promotes environmental protection measures that reduce construction project disturbances to
neighboring properties, rainwater systems, and the site itself. There are many simple and cost-effective means to
reduce soil erosion, preserve topsoil, and prevent sediment and pollution from leaving the project site and entering
the air, storm drains, or waterways.
Local codes often regulate construction activity pollution; however, some project sites may not be subject to
such codes. To ensure that all projects implement erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction,
LEED applies the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) best management practices (BMPs) for controlling
construction and postconstruction site runoff.
STEP 1. DESIGNATE RESPONSIBLE PARTY

Designate a responsible party to develop an erosion and sedimentation control (ESC) plan. The civil
engineer is typically responsible for the plan, but in some cases, the landscape architect, project
GIB
hydrologist, geologist, earthworks contractor, or general contractor will undertake the plan development.
STEP 2. EVALUATE SITE FOR ESC PLAN NEEDS

The unique conditions of each project site need to be addressed. Not all of the ESC best management
practices listed by EPA may be applicable. Assess which measures will be needed based on a simple site
evaluation that identifies the following:
·· Slopes of the project site and where water will drain
·· Total area and duration of ground disturbance, which will affect air quality and runoff
·· Location of existing rainwater management systems that must be protected
·· Construction sequencing, which may necessitate additional ESC measures over time
·· Weather and soil conditions that could cause runoff or dust
·· Construction entrances and their effects on local roads serving the project site
·· Vegetation to be preserved
·· Stockpiles of materials
Based on the location and conditions, some U.S. projects may be required by their local governments
to obtain a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit from EPA and follow EPA’s
Construction General Permit (CGP). The CGP may be used to satisfy this prerequisite, provided it includes
EPA’s required BMPs. Explain how the plan addresses all elements listed in the credit. See Further
Explanation, About NPDES and the CGP.
STEP 3. CREATE ESC PLAN

During the project’s construction documentation phase, develop the plan based on the project site
conditions, as identified in the evaluation, and EPA’s list of BMPs. Detail how the project will implement all
the elements listed in the credit requirements.
An ESC plan is generally prepared as part of the project plans or specifications, or a combination of
both. The plan includes erosion and sedimentation control measures to be phased and implemented
throughout construction.
·· For the purposes of LEED, all projects must have an ESC plan that meets the prerequisite
requirements. This includes projects with little exterior site disturbance.
·· Zero-lot-line projects and projects with minimal exterior work must have an ESC even if local codes do
not require them. Such projects need to describe how the plan applies to their specific situations.
·· For projects that apply for LEED after the construction has started, see Further Explanation, Assessing
Compliance in Late Design or Early Construction.
343
STEP 4. IMPLEMENT ESC PLAN

Establish control measures before construction begins and implement additional BMP measures as
needed, based on site conditions as construction progresses. The establishment and maintenance of ESC
measures are generally the responsibility of the general contractor or builder.
The project team should monitor the BMPs periodically through site inspections, record maintenance
activities undertaken during construction, and ensure that inspections are recorded regularly via date-
stamped photographs, inspection reports, or other recording processes. Retain this documentation for a
postconstruction narrative. See Further Explanation, Example ESC Narrative.
The following steps are also recommended:
·· All problems with BMP measures that are identified in site inspections should be resolved in a timely
manner.
·· All subcontractors should be informed of their responsibility to promptly notify the responsible party if
they notice damage to an ESC BMP measure.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
GIB
ABOUT NPDES AND THE CGP
Refer to the EPA NPDES website to determine whether a permit is required for the project. NPDES is a U.S. program
that regulates rainwater discharges from construction activities that disturb 1 or more acres (0.4 hectare), or smaller

sites that are part of a larger common plan of development or sale. However, this prerequisite applies to all sites,
even those smaller than 1 acre (0.4 hectare). In the U.S., EPA or a local authority, depending on the project location,
administers the permitting process associated with NPDES and issues CGPs.1
ASSESSING COMPLIANCE IN LATE DESIGN OR EARLY CONSTRUCTION

The ESC plan can be developed or modified late in the design process if the decision to pursue LEED is made at
that time. However, project teams that decide to pursue LEED during early construction must already have had a
compliant ESC plan in place before construction began.
EXAMPLE ESC NARRATIVE

Track implementation of the ESC plan by keeping ongoing written records or date-stamped photographs. A narrative
description of ESC plan implementation should include the following:
·· Timing of the plan’s implementation (including the sequence of construction)
·· Specific control measures applied on site (e.g., BMP calculations and description of soil limitations and
resolutions)
·· Maintenance protocol used to ensure the proper function of control measures
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Construction pollution prevention priorities may differ, depending on the project’s location. Provide information
on the issues that are regionally important. For example, if rainwater is not a problem but particulate pollution is,
include information on dust control in the project’s construction activity pollution prevention plan.
1 This information paraphrased from EPA http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/cgp.cfm

344
Narrative or ESC plan describing proposed erosion and sedimentation control practices to be
LS X
implemented on site
ESC plan or construction drawings describing erosion and sedimentation control measures to be
CP CB X
implemented
Written declaration from contractor(s) or builder(s) who implemented plan, confirming that ESC plan was
implemented properly
OR
Date-stamped photos taken at regular intervals showing all areas covered in plan, all ESC measures taken,
CB X
and any corrective action
OR
Narrative describing how ESC plan was implemented, including timing of implementation of plan, specific
control measures applied, and maintenance protocol used to ensure proper function of control measures
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

GIB
SLL Credit Steep Slope Protection. The BMPs implemented in this prerequisite could contribute to the slope
protection required in the related credit.
GIB Credit Minimized Site Disturbance. The ESC measures undertaken for this prerequisite will protect the site
area to be preserved for achieving the related credit.
GIB Credit Rainwater Management. Implementation of an ESC plan that minimizes soil compaction where
vegetation will be planted, or where infiltration measures will be installed, will help reduce runoff volumes for
achieving the related credit.

The referenced standard was changed from Washington State’s Stormwater Management Manual for Western
Washington to EPA’s BMPs for construction and postconstruction site runoff control.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, BMPs for construction and postconstruction site runoff control:
http://water.epa.gov/polwaste/npdes/swbmp/
Not available.
345
DEFINITIONS
GIB
346
347
GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE AND BUILDINGS CREDIT
Certified Green
Buildings
Plan
Built Project
1–5 points
GIB
CERTIFIED GREEN BUILDINGS
INTENT
To encourage the design, construction, and retrofit of buildings using

green building practices.
REQUIREMENTS
OPTION 1. PROJECTS WITH 10 OR FEWER HABITABLE BUILDINGS (1–5 POINTS)

Design, construct, or retrofit one building as part of the project, beyond the prerequisite requirement, to be certified
under a LEED green building rating systems (for LEED for Interior Design and Construction, 75% of the total
building floor area must be certified), or through a green building rating system requiring review by independent,
impartial, third-party certifying bodies that have been accredited by an IAF-accredited body to ISO/IEC Guide 65 or,
when available, ISO/IEC 17065. Up to five points may be earned for each additional certified building that is part of
the project.
OR
OPTION 2. PROJECTS OF ALL SIZES (1–5 POINTS)

Design, construct, or retrofit a percentage of the total project building floor area, beyond the prerequisite
requirement, to be certified under a LEED green building rating systems or through a green building rating system
requiring review by independent, impartial, third-party certifying bodies that have been accredited by an IAF-
accredited body to ISO/IEC Guide 65 or, when available, ISO/IEC 17065.
348
TABLE 1. Points for green building certification
Percentage of total floor area certified Points
≥ 10% and < 20% 1
≥ 20% and < 30% 2
≥ 30% and < 40% 3
≥ 40% and < 50% 4
≥ 50% 5
For all projects

Detached accessory dwelling units must be counted as separate buildings. Accessory dwellings attached to a main
building are not counted separately.
GIB
349
BEHIND THE INTENT

This credit builds on the Certified Green Building prerequisite by rewarding teams for a making a comprehensive
commitment to certifying additional green buildings in the neighborhood development, beyond the minimum
requirements of the prerequisite.

Select the appropriate compliance path for the project based on the number of habitable buildings, as
described in the credit requirements.
·· Option 1, Projects with 10 or Fewer Habitable Buildings, is available to small projects, those with 10 or
fewer habitable buildings.
·· Option 2, Projects of All Sizes, is available to any project, regardless of the number of habitable
buildings.
STEP 2. CHOOSE BUILDING(S) OR BUILDING AREAS TO BE CERTIFIED
GIB
Determine which buildings or building areas are good candidates for certification. Only a building
designed, constructed, or retrofitted as part of the project and certified by an approved third party is
eligible.
CERTIFIED GREEN BUILDINGS

·· Considerations for selecting buildings to be certified are described in GIB Prerequisite Certified Green
Building.
·· Certified floor area or certified buildings used to meet the prerequisite cannot contribute to earning
this credit.
·· For projects pursuing Option 1, at least one building must be certified. One point is available for each
building (up to five buildings) certified in addition to the prerequisite requirement.
·· For projects pursuing Option 2, at least 10% of the total floor area must be certified. Additional
certified floor area may earn additional points, as described in the credit requirements. Use Equation 1
and Table 1 to compute the potential points.
·· If detached accessory dwelling units are part of the LEED project scope, count them as separate
buildings.
·· Efficiencies of scale can be achieved through project planning (e.g., applying design guidelines and
specifications to multiple buildings) and infrastructure systems (e.g., district heating and cooling
system, solar gardens, and access to public or alternative transit) that support green building
certification.
EQUATION 1. Percentage of certified area
% total floor area Certified gross floor area (ft2 or m2)

certified
= × 100
Total building floor area in project (ft2 or m2)
STEP 3. CHOOSE CERTIFICATION SYSTEM

Determine whether the project will pursue green building certification through LEED or an alternative
third party–certified rating system. See GIB Prerequisite Certified Green Building for factors to consider
when selecting a certification strategy.
STEP 4. CERTIFY BUILDINGS OR BUILDING AREAS

Undertake design strategies that meet the requirements of the selected rating system. Provide
confirmation that the building or building area is certified, as described in the prerequisite.
350
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
See Equation 1 in Step-by-Step Guidance.
LS CP CB Name of green building rating system(s) X X
CP Registration, scorecard or checklist, that includes certification level and credits, for each building X X
CP Narrative describing strategies to be included in building(s) X X
CP CB Name and address of building(s) to be certified X X
CB Evidence of completed certification for each building, including LEED project ID if applicable X X
GIB
LS Number of buildings to be certified X
LS CP CB Percentage of building area to be certified X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

GIB Prerequisite Certified Green Building. This credit builds on the related prerequisite. The project team may
use the same rating system for the additional building(s) pursued in the credit, but this is not required. Buildings
used to meet the requirements for the prerequisite cannot be counted toward this credit.

See GIB Prerequisite Certified Green Building.
See GIB Prerequisite Certified Green Building.
·· Option 1. Achieve certification for all buildings in the project.
·· Option 2. Achieve certification for 90% of the project’s total building floor area.
DEFINITIONS
None.
351
Optimize Building
Energy Performance
Plan
Built Project
1–2 points
GIB
OPTIMIZE BUILDING ENERGY PERFORMANCE
INTENT
To encourage the design and construction of energy-efficient buildings

that reduce air, water, and land pollution and adverse environmental
effects from energy production and consumption.
REQUIREMENTS
The requirements apply to 90% of the total building floor area (rounded up to the next whole building) of all
nonresidential buildings, mixed-use buildings, and multiunit residential buildings four stories or more constructed
as part of the project or undergoing major renovations as part of the project.
Each counted building must comply with one of the following efficiency options.
OPTION 1. WHOLE-BUILDING ENERGY SIMULATION (1–2 POINTS)

New buildings must demonstrate an average percentage improvement of 12% (1 point) or 20% (2 points) over ANSI/
ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata. Buildings undergoing major renovations as part of the project
must demonstrate an average percentage improvement of 10% (1 point) or 18% (2 points). Core and shell buildings
must demonstrate an average percentage improvement of 11% (1 point) or 15% (2 points). To determine percentage
improvement, follow the method outlined in GIB Prerequisite Minimum Building Energy Performance.
OR

(2 POINTS)
To be eligible for Option 2, project must comply with all of requirements of Option 2 in GIB Prerequisite Minimum
Building Energy Performance.
352
AND
Comply with the applicable recommendations and standards in Chapter 4, Design Strategies and Recommendations
by Climate Zone, for the appropriate ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide and climate zone. For projects
outside the U.S., consult ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendixes B and D, to determine the
appropriate climate zone.
ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Small to Medium Office Buildings
·· Building envelope, opaque: roofs, walls, floors, slabs, doors, and continuous air barriers
·· Building envelope, glazing: vertical fenestration
·· Interior lighting, including daylighting and interior finishes
·· Exterior lighting
·· Plug loads, including equipment and controls
ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Medium to Large Box Retail Buildings
·· Building envelope, opaque: roofs, walls, floors, slabs, doors, and vestibules
·· Building envelope, glazing: fenestration - all orientations
·· Interior lighting, excluding lighting power density for sales floor
·· Additional interior lighting for sales floor
GIB
·· Plug loads, including equipment choices and controls
ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for K–12 School Buildings
·· Building envelope, opaque: roofs, walls, floors, slabs, and doors

·· Interior lighting, including daylighting and interior finishes
·· Plug loads, including equipment choices, controls, and kitchen equipment
ASHRAE 50% Advanced Design Guide for Large Hospitals

·· Building envelope, opaque: roofs, walls, floors, slabs, doors, vestibules, and continuous air barriers
·· Interior lighting, including daylighting (form or nonform driven) and interior finishes
·· Plug loads, including equipment choices, controls, and kitchen equipment
For new single-family residential buildings and new multiunit residential buildings three stories or fewer, 90% of the
buildings must reduce absolute estimated annual energy usage by 20% compared with the LEED energy budget for
each building. Follow the method outlined in LEED for Homes v4, EA Credit Annual Energy Use.
353
BEHIND THE INTENT

See GIB Prerequisite Minimum Building Energy Performance, Behind the Intent.
The guidance below is for the master developer and project team. Project buildings’ architects, HVAC
system designers, and energy modelers should also read Appendix 4.
Projects that achieved the prerequisite under Option 3 (Prescriptive Compliance: Advanced Buildings™
Core Performance™ Guide) are not eligible to pursue this credit.
STEP 1. REVIEW REQUIREMENTS FOR GIB PREREQUISITE MINIMUM BUILDING ENERGY

PERFORMANCE
·· Ensure that the related prerequisite will be achieved before pursuing the credit.
·· Follow the initial steps of the prerequisite.
·· Projects that achieved the prerequisite by demonstrating an average improvement with an energy
model that combined new buildings, major renovations, and/or core and shell buildings must
GIB
demonstrate the separate achievement of the required improvement for each category of buildings.

Group 1. Nonresidential buildings, mixed-use buildings, and multiunit
residential buildings four stories or more

Compare the proposed model with the baseline model to determine the anticipated energy cost savings.
Calculate the energy cost savings for each building subgroup (new construction, major renovation, or
core and shell) separately. See GIB Prerequisite Minimum Building Energy Performance, Group 1, Option
1, Whole-Building Energy Simulation, Step 4 and Equation 2. Apply any savings from on-site renewable
energy systems for each building subgroup after minimum compliance has been demonstrated
(see Further Explanation, Applying Renewable Energy Savings).
OPTION 2. ASHRAE 50% ADVANCED ENERGY DESIGN GUIDES
STEP 1. CONFIRM PREREQUISITE REQUIREMENTS

Ensure that all HVAC and service water-heating equipment of the buildings using this option meets the
requirements of the appropriate AEDG, determined in the prerequisite.
STEP 2. CONFIRM CREDIT-SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

Confirm that all applicable building components comply with the recommendations and standards
in the appropriate ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide, Chapter 4, Design Strategies and
Recommendations by Climate Zone. For projects outside the U.S., consult ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA
Standard 90.1–2010, Appendixes B and D, to determine the appropriate climate zone.
Confirm that retail buildings comply with the prescriptive measures in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, for 90% of
total energy consumption for all process equipment.
354
Group 2. New single-family residential buildings and new multiunit

residential buildings three stories or fewer
As in the prerequisite, the requirements apply to 90% of the Group 2 building floor area (rounded
up to the next whole building). Each of these buildings must reduce its absolute estimated annual
energy usage by 20% compared with its LEED energy budget (the maximum allowed annual energy
consumption).
STEP 1. CONTRACT WITH ENERGY RATER

Contract with a qualified energy rater to perform the required energy modeling using RESNET-approved
software.
STEP 2. CREATE PRELIMINARY ENERGY MODEL

Prepare the energy model to determine the maximum allowed annual energy consumption (LEED energy
budget), using the LEED reference building defined in the credit requirements under Option 1. The
energy modeling software generates a report stating the reference home’s energy budget and actual
energy use.
·· Confirm that the report states annual source energy and not site energy use. Use annual source
energy conversion factors as required (see Further Explanation, Calculating Annual Source Energy
Savings).
·· Add the annual source energy consumption of all major energy users not included in the energy
model (such as pools and heated garages) to the modeled annual energy use of the home. A separate
calculation must be performed for each permanently installed major energy user.
GIB
·· Compare the total energy use of the home with the LEED energy budget.
If the projected annual energy consumption is higher than the LEED energy budget, investigate design
modifications that lower energy consumption enough to meet the credit requirements.
STEP 3. CONSTRUCT HOME AND CONDUCT PERIODIC INSPECTIONS

The HERS rater must conduct periodic inspections to verify that all specified building components are
properly installed.
STEP 4. CREATE FINAL ENERGY MODEL

The final energy model must include the confirmed envelope and duct leakage rates, insulation
installation grading, equipment efficiencies, and all other energy-related specifications of the building.
Use the LEED energy budget as the baseline in the energy modeling software.
STEP 5. GENERATE LEED ENERGY BUDGET REPORT

For each building, add the annual energy consumption of all major energy-using nonrated features to the
total energy consumption (MMBtu/year) as generated by the energy model, if needed.
Typically, a separate report is used for this calculation.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
APPLYING RENEWABLE ENERGY SAVINGS

Only projects pursuing Option 1 of this credit may count savings from renewable energy systems.
Calculate the total amount of energy generated by the system and convert this value into the equivalent cost
using either utility rates or virtual energy rates (see GIB Credit Renewable Energy Production). Apply the equivalent
cost directly to the energy model through the simulation software, or subtract it from the final energy cost savings
calculation.
355
CALCULATING ANNUAL SOURCE ENERGY SAVINGS

For separate, permanently installed energy uses (such as pools), convert the energy consumption to source energy
using national conversion factors. Follow the procedure outlined here.
First, calculate the annual energy use of the LEED reference home. From the energy model file, record the annual
MMBtu consumption for each fuel type. Convert the annual MMBtu for each fuel type to national source energy:
MMBtu x 1.05 for natural gas, and MMBtu x 3.2 for electricity. The sum of the fuel’s source MMBtu is the annual
energy consumption of the LEED reference home.
Next, calculate the annual energy usage of the home as designed. From the energy model file, record the annual
MMBtu consumption for each fuel type. Convert the annual MMBtu for each fuel type to national source energy:
MMBtu x 1.05 for natural gas, and MMBtu x 3.2 for electricity. The sum of the fuel’s source MMBtu is the annual
energy consumption of the designed home.
Finally, calculate the percentage energy savings (Equation 1).
EQUATION 1. Annual source energy savings
Reference home MMBt – Designed home MMBtu

% energy savings = × 100
Reference home MMBtu
PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS AND DISTRICT ENERGY SYSTEMS
GIB
For core and shell buildings, retail buildings, data centers, and multifamily residential buildings four stories or more,
see Appendix 4, Building Type Variations.
For district energy systems, see Appendix 4, Modeling District Energy Systems.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
See GIB Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Further Explanation, International Tips.
See GIB Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Required Documentation. Additionally, Group 2 projects
pursuing Certified Built Project, must provide energy model input and output summaries.
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

GIB Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. See Related Credit Tips under the prerequisite.
GIB Credit Renewable Energy Production. To receive credit for renewable energy systems savings for Group 1
buildings, calculate the equivalent cost of the energy generated using the methodology outlined in the related credit.
For Group 2 buildings, including low-rise multifamily buildings or homes, use that absolute energy generated for the
renewable energy systems.
The renewable energy systems may be allocated to individual buildings or subgroups of buildings in any way that
the project team deems appropriate. However, if a specific amount of renewable energy is allocated to a particular
subgroup of buildings for this credit, the same allocations must apply for any LEED BD+C, LEED for Homes or
LEED ID+C submissions. The renewable energy may not be allocated to one set of buildings for the purposes of
documenting compliance with this credit in LEED ND, and then reallocated to different buildings for individual
building LEED submittals.
356

See GIB Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Changes from LEED 2009.
ASHRAE 90.1–2010: ashrae.org
ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guides: ashrae.org
COMNET Commercial Buildings Energy Modeling Guidelines: comnet.org/mgp-manual
ENERGY STAR Qualified Homes, version 3, National Program Requirements: energystar.gov/ia/partners/

bldrs_lenders_raters
2006 Mortgage Industry National Home Energy Rating System Standards: resnet.us/standards/RESNET_
Mortgage_Industry_National_HERS_Standars.pdf
GIB
For projects with nonresidential buildings, mixed-use buildings, and multiunit residential buildings four stories or
more, demonstrate a 28% improvement over ASHRAE Standard 90.1–2010 for new buildings, a 26% improvement
for buildings undergoing major renovations, and 19% for core and shell buildings for at least 90% of the building floor
area; this earns the project an Innovation credit.
For projects with new one- to three-family townhouse residential buildings and new multiunit residential
buildings three stories or fewer, achieve a 30% annual source energy usage reduction compared with the LEED
energy budget for each building for at least 90% of buildings.
For projects with both types of buildings, achieve both of the above thresholds.
DEFINITIONS
None.
357
Indoor Water
Use Reduction
Plan
Built Project
1 point
GIB
INTENT
To reduce indoor water consumption.
REQUIREMENTS
NONRESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS, MIXED-USE BUILDINGS, AND MULTIFAMILY RESIDENTIAL

BUILDINGS FOUR STORIES OR MORE
For new buildings and buildings undergoing major renovations as part of the project, reduce indoor water usage by
an average of 40% from a baseline
All newly installed toilets, urinals, private lavatory faucets, and showerheads that are eligible for labeling must be
WaterSense labeled (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
For fixtures and fittings listed in Table 1, as applicable to the project scope, calculate the baseline water
consumption using estimated occupant usage.
The design case is calculated as a weighted average of water usage for the buildings constructed as part of the
project, based on their floor area.
358
TABLE 1. Baseline water consumption of fixtures and fittings
Fixture or fitting Baseline (IP units) Baseline (SI units)
1.6 gpf
Toilet (water closet)* 6 lpf
0.5 gpm at 60 psi** all others except private 1.9 lpm at 415 kPa, all others except private
Public lavatory (restroom) faucet
applications applications
Private lavatory faucet* 2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa
Kitchen faucet (excluding faucets used

2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa
exclusively for filling operations)
Showerhead* 2.5 gpm at 80 psi per shower stall 9.5 lpm at 550 kPa per shower stall
* WaterSense label available for this product type

gpf = gallons per flush
psi = pounds per square inch
lpf = liters per flush
kPa = kilopascals
GIB
NEW SINGLE-FAMILY RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS AND NEW MULTIUNIT RESIDENTIAL

BUILDINGS THREE STORIES OR FEWER
90% of buildings must use a combination of fixtures and fittings that would earn 4 points under LEED for Homes v4
WE Credit Indoor Water Use.

359
BEHIND THE INTENT

See Behind the Intent in GIB Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction
STEP 1. COMPLETE CALCULATIONS IN PREREQUISITE

Follow the instructions in GIB Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction to determine the water savings
from high-efficiency fixtures and fittings.
STEP 2. CONSIDER ALTERNATIVE WATER SOURCES

Alternatives to potable water include municipally supplied reclaimed water (“purple pipe” water),
graywater, rainwater, condensate, foundation dewatering water, used process water, treated seawater,
and reverse osmosis reject water.
·· Untreated water sources ineligible for this credit include raw water from naturally occurring surface
water bodies, streams, and rivers, as well as groundwater, well water, and water discharged from an
open-loop geothermal system.
GIB
·· When choosing alternative sources of water, target the uses that require the least treatment first. In
most cases, water can be reused outside the building (for irrigation) or inside (for toilet flushing) with
minimal treatment, but other uses will require more energy-intensive treatment.

STEP 3. CALCULATE ADDITIONAL SAVINGS FROM NONPOTABLE WATER USE
If the project is using an alternative, nonpotable water source, calculate the total annual projected water
savings, using Equation 1.
EQUATION 1. Indoor water-use reduction with nonpotable supply
Annual baseline water consumption –

(Annual design case water consumption
– Annual nonpotable water supply)
Total water
savings
= × 100
Annual baseline water consumption
·· Prepare a narrative describing the nonpotable water source, plumbing system design drawings that
highlight the nonpotable water system, and supply-and-demand calculations that confirm the available
quantity of nonpotable water.
·· Address any change to the calculated usage demand due to seasonal availability or storage capacity.
If the nonpotable water is used for multiple applications—for example, flush fixtures and landscape
irrigation—a sufficient quantity must be available to meet the demands of all uses. The amount of
nonpotable water meant for indoor and outdoor uses cannot exceed the total annual nonpotable
water supply.
360
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
See Step-by-Step Guidance and use the indoor water use calculator.
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
In countries where WaterSense label is not available, refer to the acceptable WaterSense substitutes document at
usgbc.org. Countries that are not listed must comply with the 20% below baseline requirement but do not have
additional performance requirements.

Core and Shell Buildings
Include in the credit documentation all plumbing fixtures necessary to meet the occupants’ needs, whether they
will be installed as part of the project’s scope of work or not. Include at a minimum all necessary restroom fixtures
(toilets, urinals, and lavatories); include showers if the project is pursuing SLL Credit Bicycle Facilities.
As-yet-uninstalled (future) fixtures are considered to have the baseline water consumption rate. Kitchen
sinks must be included in the credit calculations if installed as part of the Core and Shell project’s scope of work or
GIB
addressed in a tenant sales or lease agreement. Exclude any future kitchen sinks that are not installed as part of the
scope of work or addressed in a tenant sales or lease agreement.
A project can earn credit for the plumbing fixtures installed as part of the Core and Shell project’s scope only if
all fixtures necessary to meet the needs of the occupants are included in the calculations and all occupants of the
incomplete tenant spaces are included in the calculations.
To earn credit for future plumbing fixtures that are necessary to meet occupants’ needs and will be installed in
incomplete tenant spaces, submit a legally binding and executed tenant sales or lease agreement (signed by both the
owner and the tenant) stating the performance requirements for the future fixtures. The performance requirements
must specify the maximum water flush and flow rates and WaterSense label (or equivalent for projects outside the
U.S.) for all newly installed fixtures that are eligible for labeling.
Renovations
All fixtures, both existing and new, within the LEED project boundary must be included in the indoor water use
calculations for the prerequisite and credit. Use the baseline flush and flow rates in Table 1 for baseline water
consumption, not the water consumption of fixtures prior to retrofit. Existing fixtures and fittings are not subject to
the credit requirements.
Additions
For compliance with this credit, include in the documentation all plumbing fixtures necessary to meet the occupants’
needs, whether they will be installed as part of the project’s scope of work or not. Include at a minimum all necessary
restroom fixtures (toilets, urinals, and lavatories) to meet the project occupants’ needs; include showers if the
project is pursuing SLL Credit Bicycle Facilities. The WaterSense label requirement does not apply to fixtures that
are outside the scope of the LEED project.
361
LS CP Efficiency strategy narrative X
CB Cutsheets, manufacturer’s information X
CB Indoor water use reduction calculator X
CB Alternative water source calculations and narrative (if applicable) X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

GIB Credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction. Alternative water sources may be used for either credit, but the same
projected quantity of alternative water cannot be double-counted for both.
GIB Credit Wastewater Management. In the related credit, wastewater diversion is based on the calculations of
GIB
wastewater produced for this credit.

The WaterSense label, recommended in LEED 2009, is now mandatory for fixtures in U.S. projects.
Duration-based savings for autocontrol faucets with automatic fixture sensors or metering controls are no
longer allowed in the design case. Studies have shown that autocontrol faucets do not result in savings because users
frequently reactivate the faucet after initial use or stop washing before the cycle ends.
Energy Policy Act (EPAct) of 1992, as amended: energy.gov/eere/femp/federal-energy-management-program
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials, Publication IAPMO/ANSI UPC 1-2006,
Uniform Plumbing Code 2006, Section 402.0, Water-Conserving Fixtures and Fittings: iapmo.org
International Code Council, International Plumbing Code 2006, Section 604, Design of Building Water
Distribution System: iccsafe.org
ENERGY STAR: energystar.gov
WaterSense: epa.gov/watersense
For nonresidential buildings, reduce fixture and fitting water use by more than 55%, on average. For 90% of
residential buildings, qualify for 6 points in LEED for Homes v4, WE Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction.
362
DEFINITIONS
alternative water source nonpotable water from other than public utilities, on-site surface sources, and subsurface
natural freshwater sources. Examples include graywater, on-site reclaimed water, collected rainwater, captured
condensate, and rejected water from reverse osmosis systems (IgCC).
baseline water consumption a calculated projection of building water use assuming code-compliant fixtures and
fittings with no additional savings compared with the design case or actual water meter data
nonpotable water water that does not meet drinking water standards
GIB
363
Outdoor Water
Use Reduction
Plan
Built Project
1–2 points
GIB
OUTDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION
INTENT
To reduce outdoor water consumption.
REQUIREMENTS
Reduce outdoor water use through one of the following options. Nonvegetated surfaces, such as permeable or
impermeable pavement, should be excluded from landscape area calculations. Athletic fields and playgrounds
(if vegetated) and food gardens may be included or excluded at the project team’s discretion.
OPTION 1. NO IRRIGATION REQUIRED (2 POINTS)

Show that the landscape does not require a permanent irrigation system beyond a maximum two-year establishment
period.
OR
OPTION 2. REDUCED IRRIGATION (1–2 POINTS)

Reduce the project’s landscape water requirement (LWR) by at least 30% from the calculated baseline for the site’s
peak watering month. Reductions must first be achieved through plant species selection and irrigation system
efficiency as calculated in the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) WaterSense Water Budget Tool.
Additional reductions beyond 30% may be achieved using any combination of efficiency, alternative water
sources, and smart scheduling technologies.
TABLE 1. Points for reducing irrigation water
Percentage reduction from baseline Points
30% 1
50% 2
364
BEHIND THE INTENT

Landscape irrigation practices consume large quantities of potable water, sometimes accounting for 30% to 70%
of the water consumed in nonagricultural use in the U.S. according to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA). Attention to landscape design can dramatically reduce the need for irrigation. The use of native, adapted, and/
or drought tolerant plants may produce a self-sustaining landscape that requires little or no irrigation and better
integrates the building site into its surroundings, attracting native wildlife. Native vegetation also tend to require
less fertilizer and pesticide decreasing the potential for water quality degradation by stormwater runoff.
The landscape water requirement (LWR) can be estimated by developing a water budget that allows landscape
professionals to consider the effects of the many design variables, such as plant types, planting density, and irrigation
system elements. This water budget can then be used to optimize landscape design with respect to water use.
Once plant selection and irrigation efficiency have been optimized, potable water use may be further reduced by
reusing potable water and/or using nonpotable water sources.
GIB
For U.S. and Canadian projects, the WaterSense Water Budget Tool automatically derives rainfall
and evapotranspiration from the project zip code or postal code (see Further Explanation, About
WaterSense). Skip Step 1 and go directly to Step 2.
STEP 1. PROJECTS OUTSIDE U.S. AND CANADA ONLY: OBTAIN PRECIPITATION AND
EVAPOTRANSPIRATION DATA TO DETERMINE IRRIGATION REQUIREMENTS
Gather average monthly precipitation data and evapotranspiration rates (ETo) for the project area to
determine the site’s potential irrigation needs. Precipitation data and ETo can be found for most locations
around the world.
·· Projects outside the U.S: use the SI unit water budget calculator, which can be found on the resources
tab for this credit at usgbc.org/credits. Projects must provide rainfall and evapotranspiration data for
their location.
·· Canadian projects may use the U.S. or SI unit calculator at their discretion. The U.S. EPA calculator
uses IP units, and includes the Canadian rainfall and evapotranspiration data. The SI unit calculator
uses is in metric units but does not include the Canadian weather data. This data can be found
independently for Canadian projects on the U.S. EPA’s data finder at epa.gov/watersense/new_homes/
wb_data_finder.html
·· See Further Explanation, International Tips, for information on rainfall and evapotranspiration statistics
outside the U.S.
STEP 2. DETERMINE VEGETATED AREAS

On a map, indicate all areas on the project site that are to be vegetated.
·· Decide whether to include or exclude any vegetated playgrounds, athletic fields, food gardens, and
urban agricultural areas.
·· See Further Explanation, Other Vegetated Areas.
STEP 3. SELECT PLANT TYPES AND COVERAGE

Identify plant types and coverage that minimize irrigation needs yet allow for each vegetated area’s
intended function.
·· Reserve grass for playing fields or other activities that require turf; using turf for groundcover will
make it difficult to meet credit thresholds.
·· Native and drought-tolerant vegetation generally require little to no irrigation after the establishment
period.
·· See Further Explanation, Plant Resources.
365

Select the more suitable compliance path for the project based on the irrigation needs, as described in
the credit requirements.
·· Option 1 is for projects that do not require irrigation, based on the project location and landscape
design, and for projects that have no landscape area.
·· Option 2 is for all projects that require irrigation.
OPTION 1. NO IRRIGATION REQUIRED

Develop the plant species and water requirement narrative.
·· Describe the plantings and their expected establishment period.
·· Referring to local rainfall data and plants’ water demands, explain why average rainfall will be sufficient
after the establishment period.
·· A landscaping plan showing native and drought-tolerant vegetation may be provided.
OPTION 2. REDUCED IRRIGATION
STEP 1. REDUCE IRRIGATION NEEDS BY ALTERING DESIGN

Teams can dramatically reduce irrigation demand through careful selection of plant material. Plant native
species to replace landscaping with a high irrigation demand.
STEP 2. CONSIDER WEATHER-BASED IRRIGATION CONTROLS

Consider including smart-sensor irrigation controls for additional water savings.
GIB
STEP 3. CONSIDER ALTERNATIVE WATER SOURCES
Consider using site-derived alternative water sources or treated wastewater provided by a municipal
agency to offset potable water used for irrigation. See Further Explanation, Alternative Water Sources.

STEP 4. CALCULATE LANDSCAPE WATER BUDGET
Calculate water use as a percentage of total irrigation and peak month irrigation demand, using the
WaterSense Water Budget Tool.
·· Use the tool for vegetated areas only. Do not include hardscapes (whether pervious or impervious) or
nonvegetated softscapes, such as mulched paths and playground areas.
·· If uncertain of the water requirement for a particular type of plant, refer to local resources, such as
plant guides, state agricultural extension services, or nurseries to classify each plant type as a low,
medium, or high water user.
·· Because of calculator limitations, water consumption cannot be entered as zero for a landscaped area.
If only part of an area is irrigated, perform the calculations twice, once for the irrigated section and
again for the nonirrigated area, and add the results.
STEP 5. CALCULATE ADJUSTED LANDSCAPE WATER REQUIREMENT

Calculate monthly supply from alternative sources and determine the adjusted landscape water
requirement (LWR), using Equation 1. The value for alternative water quantity depends on the source: for
reused water, use projected water demand; for harvested rainwater, use historical rainfall data (Equation 2).
·· Ensure that the rainwater needed in the peak month can be stored on site if the team is attempting a
100% reduction.
·· Alternative calculations for rainwater cistern sizing can be used.
EQUATION 1. Adjusted landscape water requirement
Adjusted LWR LWR Alternative water

(volume/month)
= (volume/month)
– (volume/month)
EQUATION 2. Volume from rainwater harvesting
Gallons per square footage

1 inch of rain
= of roof area
× 0.6
Amount available for gallons per 1 inch average inches

collection
= of rain
× rain per month
366
STEP 6. CALCULATE ADJUSTED PERCENTAGE REDUCTION FROM BASELINE FOR USE OF

WEATHER-BASED IRRIGATION CONTROLS
Calculate the adjusted percentage reduction from the baseline due to weather-based irrigation controls.
Count only irrigation controls whose smart-sensor technology meets the WaterSense criteria. These
controls result in an additional 15% reduction that project teams can take from the original LWR.
EQUATION 3. Landscape water requirement with smart irrigation controls
Final LWR = (LWR or adjusted LWR) – 0.15(LWR)
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
See the calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.
GIB
ABOUT WATERSENSE
EPA’s WaterSense website includes this reference for native vegetation in U.S. locations: epa.gov/watersense/
outdoor/what_to_plant.html.
The WaterSense water budget data finder (epa.gov/watersense/new_homes/wb_data_finder.html) estimates
the evapotranspiration rate (ETo) for the critical month of the year, expressed in inches per month, by zip code (and
postal code for Canada). ETo varies by region, depending on the sun, wind, humidity, and temperature at a location.
Hot, dry, and windy locations have higher ETo values than cool, humid locations. The data for the variables are based
on 30-year historical averages. ETo represents the amount of water lost from a well-maintained expanse of average-
height green grass and the surrounding soil.
The WaterSense Water Budget Tool (epa.gov/watersense/water_budget/) calculates a baseline landscape water
requirement (LWR) based on that typical landscape. Different plant species and arrangements in the landscape can
be entered into the tool to estimate the effect of these design variables. Irrigation water delivery system elements can
also be varied to estimate their effect on water requirements.
WaterSense specifies requirements for weather-based irrigation controller systems, at epa.gov/WaterSense/
products/controltech.html). Installation of these systems earns projects a standard 15% reduction in landscape
water requirement for the Outdoor Water Use Reduction credit.
OTHER VEGETATED AREAS

The following landscape types may be included or excluded from landscape calculations:
·· Vegetated playgrounds and athletic fields. These are considered a public good.
·· Food gardens and urban agricultural areas. Land intended to produce food for human consumption is not
subject to the landscape water reduction criteria.
PLANT RESOURCES
The U.S. Department of Agriculture plant database provides standardized information about plants of the U.S. and
its territories, for both native and introduced species. The Lady Bird Johnson Wildflower Center’s database provides
standardized information about native plants.
Both databases cover plant characteristics, such as moisture requirements and preferred growing conditions,
along with distribution data, plant images, and references.
State cooperative extension services can also be a valuable source of information on local and native vegetation.
367
ALTERNATIVE WATER SOURCES

Potential alternative water sources include reclaimed wastewater, graywater, swimming pool filter backwash,
refrigeration system condensate, harvested rainwater, stormwater and foundation drain water, steam system
condensate, fluid cooler discharge, food steamer discharge, combination oven discharge, industrial process water,
fire pump test water, municipally supplied treated wastewater, and ice machine condensate.
It is recommended that such sources be tested to confirm that the water is suitable for irrigation use. The salinity
of an alternative water source is one consideration: irrigating with saline water in an arid environment will cause a
buildup of salt, which will eventually degrade the soil as a growth medium. Condensate and cooling tower blowdown
in particular may have salinity levels that preclude their use for irrigation.
Another issue is the timing and reliability of the supply. Monthly water budget calculations may be necessary
to determine the total irrigation water demand during each month of the irrigation season, the availability of the
alternative water, and thus how much potable water can be replaced. The default assumption is that alternative water
is used in the irrigation system as it is available. Alternative water cannot contribute to the peak month irrigation
demand unless some of the previous months’ supply can be reserved and stored until needed.
EXAMPLES
Residential buildings Park with trees: drip irrigation
GIB
Groundcover: low water need native species
Road
Sidewalk
Building footprint = 27,500 sq ft (2 554.8 sq m)

Hardscape = 125,000 sq ft (11 613 sq m)
Groundcover = 105,000 sq ft (9 755 sq m)
Trees = 85,000 sq ft (7 897 sq m)
Option 2. Example: Livingston, New Jersey

·· Livingston is a typical suburban community in northern New Jersey. The project team uses the EPA
WaterSense water budget data finder and begins by entering the project’s zip code:
°° Enter Zip Code: 07039
°° Peak Month: Jun
°° ETo Value: 6.30 inches/month (160 mm/month)
°° Rainfall: 3.40 inches/month (86.40 mm/month)
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations GIB(WE)6

WEp and GIB Outdoor Water Use Reduction
368
·· Landscape area:
°° Total: 190,000 ft
2
°° 105,000 ft of groundcover – low water need, native species, drip irrigation

2
°° 85,000 ft of trees – medium water need, drip irrigation

2
·· Landscape water allowance (30% below baseline) = 522,263 gallons/month

·· Landscape water requirement (design case) = 212,412 gallons/month
·· Total savings compared with baseline = 72%
With a 72% water reduction, the project earns 1 point.

GIB
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
For sites outside the U.S. and Canada, the monthly average reference evapotranspiration and rainfall must be
estimated if they are not available from another source, such as the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United
Nations. Reference evapotranspiration may be calculated from weather data.
Monthly rainfall should be an average value calculated from at least 10 years of data or referenced to a reliable
source; if less historical information is available, provide an explanation in the documentation. Monthly rainfall data
for many cities are available from the World Meteorological Organization. REF-ET software can calculate reference
evapotranspiration using a variety of algorithms; it uses monthly average weather data. The month with the largest
deficit between reference evapotranspiration and rainfall is the peak month. The estimates may then be used in the
EPA WaterSense Water Budget Tool to calculate the site’s landscape water allowance and water requirement.
369
CP CB Narrative on plant selection X
CP CB Water Budget Tool report X
CP CB Site plan X
Additional reduction calculations for alternative water supply and/or irrigation controls
CP CB X
(if applicable)
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

GIB Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction. Wastewater, calculated for the related prerequisite, is a potential
graywater source that may contribute to a reduction from the baseline outdoor water demand for this credit.
GIB Credit Rainwater Management. Rainwater management can include rainwater harvesting for irrigation.
GIB

The WaterSense Water Budget Tool is now the referenced calculation tool.
None.
Option 2. Achieve at least a 75% reduction from the baseline.
DEFINITIONS
adapted plants are plants that may not be native to a particular region but which have certain characteristics that
allow them to live in a region, without being invasive
graywater untreated household waste water which has not come into contact with toilet waste. Graywater includes
370
hardscape the inanimate elements of the building landscaping. It includes pavement, roadways, stonewalls, wood
and synthetic decking, concrete paths and sidewalks, and concrete, brick, and tile patios.
native vegetation are those endemic to the region. In North America, these are plants growing in an area before
European colonization.
peak watering month the month with the greatest deficit between evapotranspiration and rainfall. This is the
month when the plants in the site’s region potentially require the most supplemental water typically a mid-summer
month. (Sustainable Sites Initiative)
rainwater harvesting the capture, diversion, and storage of rain for future beneficial use. Typically, a rain barrel or
cistern stores the water; other components include the catchment surface and conveyance system. The harvested
rainwater can be used for irrigation.
Smart-sensor technology the use of soil moisture, temperature, and salinity sensors to measure and automatically
adjust irrigation rates. Wireless sensor networks provide real time measurements that allow irrigation rates to be
adjusted to difference zones.
GIB
softscape the elements of a landscape that consist of live, horticultural elements

371
Building Reuse
Plan
Built Project
1 point
GIB
INTENT
To extend the life cycle of buildings and conserve resources, reduce
BUILDING REUSE
waste, and reduce environmental harm from materials manufacturing
and transport for new buildings.
REQUIREMENTS
CASE 1. FIVE BUILDINGS OR FEWER

For projects with five or fewer buildings undergoing major renovations, reuse 50% of one such building, based on
surface area. Calculations must include structural elements (e.g., floors, roof decking) and enclosure materials (e.g.,
skin, framing). Exclude from the calculations window assemblies, nonstructural roofing material, and any hazardous
materials that are remediated as part of the project.
CASE 2. MORE THAN FIVE BUILDINGS

For projects with more than five buildings undergoing major renovations, reuse 20% of the total surface area of such
buildings (including structure and enclosure materials, as defined in Case 1).
FOR ALL PROJECTS

Do not demolish any historic buildings or contributing buildings in a historic district, or portions thereof, or alter
any cultural landscapes as part of the project.
An exception is granted only with approval from an appropriate review body. For buildings or landscapes listed
locally, approval must be granted by the local historic preservation review board, or equivalent. For buildings or
landscapes listed in a state register or in the National Register of Historic Places (or equivalent for projects outside
the U.S.), approval must appear in a programmatic agreement with the state historic preservation office or National
Park Service (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
372
BEHIND THE INTENT

Buildings have a wide range of local, regional, and global environmental consequences throughout their lifetimes.
Many of these harms occur during the harvest, extraction, manufacture, transportation, and disposal of the
materials used in construction and operation. In “The Greenest Building: Quantifying the Environmental Value of
Building Reuse,” the National Trust for Historic Preservation concluded that building reuse almost always offers
environmental savings over demolition and new construction. It can take 10 to 80 years for the energy savings of an
efficient new building to cancel out the climate change consequences of its construction.1
Reuse is an efficient way to reduce the carbon footprint of communities by utilizing in-place resources.
Remodeling an existing building provides immediate carbon savings through avoided demolition, material, and
construction emissions. Existing buildings also typically have advantageous characteristics such as thermal mass
and optimal daylight configuration that can be utilized in energy use reduction strategies. The demolition and
construction waste from remodeling is also typically far less than from new building construction; smaller quantities
of waste and materials are sent to landfills.
Although retrofitting old buildings to accommodate new functions can add complexity and soft costs to
the design and construction of a project, reusing existing components can be less expensive than wholly new
construction. Retaining buildings that are important to the local community preserves the character of a place and
fosters strong relationships of mutual support among building owners and community members.
The reuse of salvaged materials and products from other locations is laudable, but to capture the beneficial
aspects of building reuse at the community scale, this credit targets reuse of the majority of an on-site building’s
GIB
elements.
STEP 1. IDENTIFY BUILDINGS SUBJECT TO CREDIT REQUIREMENTS

Buildings being fully demolished are excluded from the calculations for this credit and do not contribute
to the count of buildings used to determine which case the project is eligible for. However, the full or
partial demolition of any historic structures or the alteration of any cultural landscapes without approval
from the appropriate review body will prevent the project from achieving this credit. Therefore, a
thorough inventory of the buildings within the project boundary is essential. Inventory buildings within
the project boundary to identify the following:
·· Historic structures
°° Determine early in the process whether any building being demolished as part of the project is
historic.
°° Consult the local planning office, the state historic preservation office, and the National Register of
Historic Places (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) to confirm whether any buildings or
sites have historic designation.
°° In the U.S., buildings as young as 40 years old can be landmarked for various historical reasons;
other countries may have different landmark standards. Check local codes, ordinances, or laws for
applicable designation procedures. See Further Explanation, International Tips.
·· Cultural landscapes2
°° Determine early in the process whether any portion of a landscape being altered as part of the
project is culturally significant.
°° There are four general types of cultural landscapes, which are not mutually exclusive: historic sites,
historic designed landscapes, historic vernacular landscapes, and ethnographic landscapes.
°° Almost every historic property has a landscape component.
°° Projects should also follow their national, state, or local preservation office’s regulations for the
preservation of historic landscapes. See Further Explanation, International Tips.
1 http://www.preservationnation.org/information-center/sustainable-communities/green-lab/valuing-building-reuse.html#.VBHep5RdVfc.
2 http://www.nps.gov/tps/how-to-preserve/cultural-landscapes.htm.
373
·· Buildings undergoing major renovation

°° Credit is not awarded simply for having existing operational buildings within the project boundary.
A building must undergo a major renovation to contribute to the achievement of this credit (see
Definitions).
°° Existing buildings with additions may contribute to this credit if they meet the applicable thresholds
for reuse, based on the existing portion of the building only.
STEP 2. CONFIRM PLANS FOR HISTORIC BUILDINGS AND CULTURAL LANDSCAPES

This credit cannot be achieved if a historic resource or any parts of it are demolished without the
approval of the entities listed in the credit requirements.
·· See the credit requirements for guidance in identifying the appropriate review body.
·· Maintain a record of approval from the review body for credit documentation if a cultural landscape is
altered or if any part of a historic building is demolished.
STEP 3. SELECT CASE

Select the appropriate case that will apply to the project:
·· Case 1. Five Buildings or Fewer
°° This case allows project teams to focus on reuse of one building.
·· Case 2. More Than Five Buildings
°° This case requires that all buildings undergoing major renovations be included in the calculation, but
they may on average meet a lower threshold than in Case 1.
A project is eligible for only one case. Because the primary difference is the number of buildings,
GIB
instructions for both cases are presented together.
STEP 4. INVENTORY BUILDINGS FOR REUSE

In both cases, best practice is to identify and quantify surface areas of the building or buildings that can
BUILDING REUSE
be retained. Create a spreadsheet to record the following:
·· Total surface area of the building(s)
°° Identify and quantify the surface areas of the structure, building enclosure, and interior elements
(e.g., walls, doors, floor coverings, and ceiling systems) that can be retained.
°° Also determine the surface areas that will not be retained. See Further Explanation, Calculating
Surface Area.
·· Elements that can be reused, including structural elements and enclosure materials. See Definitions.
·· Materials excluded from credit calculations
°° Exclude window assemblies and hazardous materials that are remediated as part of the project. See
the credit requirements for a complete list of excluded elements.
°° Exclude materials salvaged from on or off the project site and installed on the project site; they are
not eligible as reuse for this credit.
Once the scope of reuse is determined, ensure that the areas intended for reuse are well defined and
incorporated into the design and construction documents.
374
Reused exterior wall: 10% of surface area Reconstructed wall: 20% of surface
(counts towards credit) area (does not count towards
credit)
Remediated hazardous roofing due to asbestos

(excluded from calculation)
Reused roofing: 15% of surface area

(counts towards credit)
GIB
Reused surfaces that contribute towards credit

Reconstructed surfaces that were existing and have been re-built are
included in the calculation but do not contribute towards credit
Remediated surfaces that are excluded from calculations
STRUCTION Figure 1. Establishing which portions of building count toward reuse
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations MR1

STEP 5. PERFORM CREDIT CALCULATIONS MRc Building Life Cycle Impact Reduction
(BD&C)
Calculate reused surface area with Equation 1 for Case and GIB
1 and Equation credit:
2 for Case 2.Building Reuse
For both cases:
·· Each assembly (vertical or horizontal) may be calculated as up to three layers of surface area. See
Further Explanation, Calculating Surface Area.
·· Common or shared walls between renovated and unrenovated buildings can be included as reuse for
the renovated building.
375
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
EQUATION 1. Percentage reuse for one building (Case 1)
Building reuse Surface area reused

(%)
= Total eligible surface area of building
× 100
undergoing major renovation
For Case 2, all buildings that are undergoing major renovation must be included in the equation. The calculation is
aggregated: each individual building does not need to meet the threshold.
EQUATION 2. Percentage reuse for multiple buildings (Case 2)
Building reuse Total surface area reused

(%)
= Total eligible surface area of all buildings
× 100
undergoing major renovation
GIB
CALCULATING SURFACE AREA
Each assembly (vertical or horizontal) may be calculated as up to three layers of surface area. For vertical building
BUILDING REUSE
elements, the layers include structure, enclosure, and interior finish. For horizontal building elements, the layers
include structure, floor finish, and ceiling finish. Structural support elements, such as columns, beams, and studs, are
considered part of the larger surfaces they support. Calculate the surface area of these elements as equal to surface
area of the wall.
Not all projects will have all layers present at the beginning of construction, depending on the state of the
building. If a layer that existed before construction or demolition is removed and replaced with new material, it
must be included in the calculation. If an existing layer was removed and not replaced, it is excluded from the credit
calculations. Examples:
·· A project has a floor assembly consisting of structural slab, ceiling tiles, and carpeting. The structural slab
and ceiling tiles are reused, but the carpet is removed and not replaced because the design uses the exposed
structural concrete as the finish material. The team excludes the carpeting from the calculation but counts the
slab as reused.
·· A building has an existing steel structure, brick enclosure, and drywall. The project is reusing the structure and
enclosure but replacing the existing drywall with new drywall. The team must include all three existing layers
in the denominator but only the reused portions in the numerator.
·· A building has an existing steel structure and brick enclosure, with no drywall or interior finish. The team
includes only those two layers in the reuse calculations.
If the existing building has more than three layers that can be counted toward reuse, the project team may choose
the three layers to include in the calculation. The three layers chosen should represent the structure of a typical basic
wall or floor assembly (structure, ceiling, and enclosure and interior finish; or floor slab, ceiling finish, and floor
finish).
376
Backer board: reused
Batt insulation: replaced Layer 3: reused studs
Layer 2: replaced interior drywall

GIB
Layer 1: reused bricks, repaired as needed
Reused materials included in credit calculations
Figure 2. Example of surface area reuse calculations using wall assembly layers
EXAMPLES
The following approach applies to Case 1 as well, except the team would calculate surface area for a single building
N
instead of aggregating surface area for multiple buildings.
USGBC LEED Guide

Example Case 2.Illustrations
More Than Five Buildings MR3
A project contains 22 buildings: 12 new buildingsMRcand 10Building
undergoingLife
someCycle Impact
form of Reduction
renovation. Of the 10 buildings
(BD&C)that
to be renovated, six are undergoing renovations and Interiors
would Life-Cycle
be defined as major inImpact Reduction
LEED (see Definitions). Therefore,
the team follows Case 2, which applies to projects with more than five buildings undergoing major renovation.
The project team assesses each building and determines what portion can be reused, based on surface area.
See Further Explanation, Calculating Surface Area, for specific guidance. For example, Building A reuses 71.6% of the
structure (Table 1).
377
TABLE 1. Calculating reuse, Building A
Structure, enclosure, interior elements Existing area (ft2) Reused area (ft2) Percentage reused
On-grade floor assembly

• Foundation 18,230 18,230 100.0%
• Subfloor 17,500 15,000 85.7%
• Carpet 10,000 0 0.0%
2nd-floor assembly
• Structural deck 18,230 18,230 100.0%
• Hardwood flooring 10,000 2,500 25.0%
• Reused wood flooring 7,500 7,500 100.0%
• Ceiling tiles 14,500 7,000 48.3%
Roof assembly
• Roof deck 18,000 7,630 42.4%
• Asbestos ceiling tiles (hazardous material removed) Excluded Excluded N/A
1st-floor wall assembly (excluding windows)
• Brick enclosure 16,460 16,460 100.0%
• Sheathing 15,000 8,400 56.0%
GIB
• Insulation 7,700 0 0.0%
• Reused doors 105 105 100.0%
2nd-floor wall assembly (excluding windows)
BUILDING REUSE
• Brick enclosure 16,460 16,000 97.2%
• Steel structure 16,460 16,460 100.0%
• Drywall 15,300 9,400 61.4%
Total 201,445 142,915 70.9%
Building A reuses a total surface area of 70.9%. Table 2 combines that result with similar calculations for buildings
B–F to determine the total surface area of reused materials.
TABLE 2. Summary of reuse, entire project
Building Existing surface area (ft2) Reused surface area (ft2) Percentage reused
A 201,445 142,915 70.9

B 10,121 2,123 20.9
C 70,912 5,235 7.4
D 90,234 10,123 11.2
E 500,443 98,008 19.6
F 100,887 52,398 51.9
Total 974,042 310,802 31.9%
Once each building’s reused surface area has been tabulated, the project team aggregates the results for all six
buildings. The total is 31.90%, and thus the team has met the 20% threshold and achieved the credit.
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
·· Use a local definition for historic buildings. Many countries have nationally recognized agencies that identify
historic buildings and sites. If the project is located in a country without a national program, consider using the
prescriptive requirements of a neighboring or culturally similar country.
·· Best practices for rehabilitating and restoring historic structures may be specific to the country. If standards do
not exist, consider using the Venice Charter or the U.S. Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for the Treatment
of Historic Properties and/or the accompanying Treatment of Cultural Landscapes.
378
·· It is recommended that the project team include a qualified individual with the qualifications of a historic
architect to ensure that culturally sensitive characteristics are appropriately restored.
If historic buildings or cultural landscapes will be demolished or altered, provide approval (or intent to seek
LS CP CB X
approval) from appropriate local and state or national authority
Description of building that will be reused, their locations, and the strategies implemented to meet the
LS CP CB X
requirement threshold
Calculations of reuse by building element, including:

CP CB • Total surface area for buildings undergoing major renovations X
• Reused surface area of those buildings
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

GIB
GIB Credit Historic Resource Preservation and Adaptive Reuse. Ensure that historic structures listed under
this credit are consistent with the related credit. Reused historic buildings can contribute toward this credit if they
undergo major renovation and maintain their historic designation.

The credit’s scope now covers only buildings undergoing major renovation, rather than all existing habitable
building stock.
None.
For projects pursuing Case 1, reuse 75% of one building undergoing major renovations.
For projects pursuing Case 2, reuse 40% of total building floor area of buildings undergoing major renovations.
DEFINITIONS
cultural landscape an officially designated geographic area that includes both cultural and natural resources
associated with a historic event, activity, or person or that exhibits other significant cultural or aesthetic values
enclosure the exterior plus semi-exterior portions of the building. Exterior consists of the elements of a building
that separate conditioned spaces from the outside (i.e., the wall assembly). Semiexterior consists of the elements of
a building that separate conditioned space from unconditioned space or that encloses semi-heated space through
which thermal energy may be transferred to or from the exterior or conditioned or unconditioned spaces (e.g., attic,
crawl space, basement).
379
National Register of Historic Places, or have been determined eligible for listing in the National Register.
historic district a group of buildings, structures, objects, and sites that have been designated as historically and
architecturally significant and categorized as either contributing or noncontributing
major renovations extensive alteration work in addition to work on the exterior shell of the building and/or primary
structural components and/or the core and peripheral MEP and service systems and/or site work. Typically, the
extent and nature of the work is such that the primary function space cannot be used for its intended purpose while
the work is in progress and where a new certificate of occupancy is required before the work area can be reoccupied.
structure elements carrying either vertical or horizontal loads e.g. walls, roofs, and floors that are considered
structurally sound and non-hazardous
GIB
BUILDING REUSE
380
381
Historic Resource
Preservation and
Adaptive Reuse
Plan
Built Project
GIB
2 points
HISTORIC RESOURCE PRESERVATION AND ADAPTIVE REUSE

INTENT
To respect local and national landmarks and conserve material and

cultural resources by encouraging the preservation and adaptive reuse
of historic buildings and cultural landscapes.
REQUIREMENTS
This credit is available to projects with at least one historic building, contributing building in a historic district, or
cultural landscape on the project site.
Do not demolish any historic buildings or contributing buildings in a historic district, or portions thereof, or alter
any cultural landscapes as part of the project.
An exception is granted only with approval from an appropriate review body. For buildings or landscapes listed
locally, approval must be granted by the local historic preservation review board, or equivalent. For buildings or
landscapes listed in a state register or in the National Register of Historic Places (or equivalent for projects outside
the U.S.), approval must appear in a programmatic agreement with the state historic preservation office or National
Park Service (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
If any historic building or a contributing building in a historic district in the project site is to be altered
(rehabilitated, preserved, or restored), use one of the following approaches for each building, as applicable.
·· Building subject to local review. Obtain approval, in the form of a certificate of appropriateness, from a local
historic preservation commission or architectural review board for any exterior alterations or additions.
·· Building subject to state or federal review. If the building is subject to review by a state historic preservation
office or the National Park Service (or equivalent body for projects outside the U.S.), the alteration must meet
382
the Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for the Treatment of Historic Properties (or equivalent for projects
outside the U.S.).
·· Listed or eligible building not subject to review. If a building is listed or determined eligible but alteration
is not subject to local, state, or federal review, include on the project team a preservation professional who
meets the U.S. federal qualifications for historic architects or architectural historians (or a local equivalent
for projects outside the U.S.). The preservation professional must confirm adherence to the Secretary of the
Interior’s Standards for the Treatment of Historic Properties, or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.
If a cultural landscape is to be rehabilitated, restored, or preserved, do so in accordance with the Guidelines for the
Treatment of Cultural Landscapes or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S. whichever is more stringent.
GIB
383
BEHIND THE INTENT

The reuse of historic buildings and cultural landscapes enhances the history and character of a place. Historic
elements can inform the scale and character of new buildings and often support walkable streetscapes and districts.
This credit rewards projects that retain historic elements or cultural landscapes and rehabilitate buildings in ways
consistent with their context. The requirements are intended to align with the typical approvals process for working
in historic districts or protected landscapes.
Preserving historic resources also reduces the environmental consequences of new construction, including
energy use associated with demolition and construction, waste sent to landfill, transportation and manufacturing
emissions, and land and water disruptions from raw material extraction. Studies confirm that retaining and
upgrading existing buildings instead of replacing them with new structures have environmental benefits because it
can take many years for the energy savings from even highly efficient new buildings to offset the energy used in their
construction.1 Tax credits may make historic preservation or rehabilitation projects economically attractive.2
GIB
STEP 1. IDENTIFY HISTORIC BUILDINGS AND CULTURAL LANDSCAPES WITHIN PROJECT
BOUNDARY
Create an inventory of historic buildings and cultural landscapes within the project boundary.

·· Consult the local planning office and state and national registers of historic places to determine
whether any buildings have historic designation.
·· Consult the local and state historic preservation office and the National Park Service (or local
equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) to determine whether the site contains or is within an officially
designated cultural landscape. See Further Explanation, Cultural Landscapes.
·· A building that does not have historic designation may be considered eligible if it meets state or local
criteria or at least one of the following four National Register criteria for a historic building3:
°° It is associated with events that have made a significant contribution to the broad patterns of our
history.
°° It is associated with the lives of significant persons in the past.
°° It embodies the distinctive characteristics of a type, period, or method of construction, or
represents the work of a master, or possesses high artistic values, or represents a significant and
distinguishable entity whose components may lack individual distinction.
°° It has yielded, or may be likely to yield, information important in history or prehistory.
·· Project teams outside the U.S. should consult the historic preservation guidelines set forth in their local
or national registry of historic places. See Further Explanation, International Tips.
STEP 2. CONFIRM PRESERVATION OF HISTORIC BUILDINGS AND SITES

Ensure that the historic components of the project will be preserved. There is no minimum area of the
building that must be retained to meet the requirement. However, this credit cannot be achieved if
within the project boundary, a historic building is demolished or a cultural landscape is altered, unless
demolition or alteration is approved by the appropriate review body.
·· Determine the specific requirements for maintaining historic designation during design and
construction.
·· Confirm what can and cannot be altered to maintain the building or site’s historic status and ensure
that the design and construction uphold these requirements.
·· If historic designation or eligibility is revoked because of inappropriate demolition or alteration, the
project is no longer eligible for this option.
·· If alteration or demolition of a historic element is planned, it must be reviewed by the appropriate
review board or conform to local standards for rehabilitation. Document the review body’s purview to
approve demolition.
3 Section II, National Register Criteria for Evaluation, http://www.nps.gov/nr/publications/bulletins/nrb15/nrb15_2.htm.
384
·· If there is no local review body, include on the project team a qualified professional to guide design
decision making in a historically sensitive manner.
STEP 3. DEVELOP APPROPRIATE REHABILITATION PLANS

If any historic buildings or sites within the project boundary will be rehabilitated, review the credit
requirements to determine compliant approaches. If it can be done without altering their character,
consider upgrading historic structures to improve energy performance, water efficiency, and occupants’
comfort. Design the surrounding streetscape to complement the historic character of retained buildings.
Ensure that the rehabilitation design complies with regulations or standards for historic buildings, and
that no alterations affect the historic designation.
·· For buildings subject to local review, study municipal ordinances related to zoning, historic districts,
and preservation to identify design standards.
·· For all other buildings, follow the U.S. Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for the Treatment of
Historic Properties (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
·· For cultural landscapes, follow the U.S. Secretary of the Interior’s Guidelines for the Treatment of
Cultural Landscapes (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.), whichever is more stringent.
·· For projects outside the U.S., refer to equivalent national, state, or local historic preservation standards.
See Further Explanation, International Tips.
STEP 4. OBTAIN APPROVAL FOR REHABILITATION

For buildings subject to local, state or federal review, adhere to the procedures of the review body to
document approval. This process typically includes the following steps:
·· The proposed work (e.g., modification, partial demolition) is reviewed before construction.
GIB
·· A certificate of appropriateness is typically issued when the proposed work has been deemed
acceptable. Most jurisdictions do not allow work to begin without this certificate. For example, a
local building department will not release a construction permit until the historic preservation review
commission has approved the proposed modifications. Maintain a record of approval from the review
body for credit documentation.

·· When construction ends, the review board inspects the completed work for compliance before issuing
an occupancy permit. Retain the certificate of compliance.
If required approvals are not achieved, or if historic designation is revoked at the end of construction, the
project is not eligible for this credit.
If buildings or landscapes are listed in a historic register but there is no applicable review body,
contact a historic preservation professional to determine whether proposed alterations or removals are
appropriate.
If all historic buildings and cultural landscapes will be maintained without rehabilitation, no
documentation of approval is required.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CULTURAL LANDSCAPES
Four types of cultural landscapes can apply for this credit.4
Historic site: a landscape that was consciously designed or laid out by a landscape architect, master gardener,
architect, or horticulturist according to design principles, or an amateur gardener working in a recognized style or
tradition. The landscape may be associated with a significant person(s), trend, or event in landscape architecture,
or it may illustrate an important development in the theory and practice of landscape architecture. Aesthetic values
play a significant role in designed landscapes. Examples include parks, campuses, and estates.
4 U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service, Protecting Cultural Landscapes: Planning, Treatment and Management of Historic Landscapes,
Preservation Brief 36, http://www.nps.gov/tps/how-to-preserve/briefs/36-cultural-landscapes.htm.
385
Historic designated landscape: a landscape that evolved through use by the people whose activities or occupancy
shaped that landscape. Through social or cultural attitudes of an individual, family or a community, the landscape
reflects the physical, biological, and cultural character of those everyday lives. Function plays a significant role in
vernacular landscapes. They can be a single property, such as a farm, or a collection of properties, such as a district of
historic farms in a river valley. Examples include rural villages, industrial complexes, and agricultural landscapes.
Historic vernacular landscape: a landscape significant for its association with a historic event, activity, or person.
Examples include battlefields and president’s house properties.
Ethnographic landscape: a landscape containing a variety of natural and cultural resources that associated people
define as heritage resources. Small communities of plants and animals and subsistence and ceremonial grounds are
often components. Examples are contemporary settlements, religious sacred sites, and massive geologic structures.
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Projects outside the U.S. should consult the historic preservation guidelines set forth in their local or national
registry of historic places. Many countries have established their own process for determining the historical
significance of buildings and landscapes. If the project’s country has no process for determining historic status,
the team is encouraged to consult the UNESCO website (http://whc.unesco.org/en/conventiontext/) or the Venice
Charter (http://www.icomos.org/charters/venice_e.pdf) to determine historical significance.
GIB

LS Description of approval needed from local review body X
LS CP CB Documentation of historic designation status X
If historic buildings or cultural landscapes will be demolished or altered, provide approval (or intent to seek
LS CP CB X
approval) from appropriate local and state or national authority
Certificate, programmatic agreement, or other form of confirmation for approved alterations, demolition, or
CP CB X
rehabilitation for any historic building or cultural landscape
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

NPD Credit Compact Development. Because historic structures tend to be built in populated areas, many meet
the medium density threshold for the related credit or can do so through thoughtful infill and additions. Consider
potential density changes when planning reuse and new construction.
GIB Credit Building Reuse. Both credits prohibit demolition of historic buildings and alteration of cultural
landscapes unless approved by the appropriate review body. A historic building appropriately renovated as part of
this credit may also contribute to the related credit.

None.
386
National Register of Historic Places: nps.gov/nr/
National Park Service: nps.gov/index.htm
Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for the Treatment of Historic Properties: http://www.nps.gov/tps/
standards/four-treatments/treatment-rehabilitation.htm
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
cultural landscape an officially designated geographic area that includes both cultural and natural resources
associated with a historic event, activity, or person or that exhibits other significant cultural or aesthetic values
GIB
National Register of Historic Places (or a local equivalent outside the U.S.), or have been determined eligible for
listing.
historic district a group of buildings, structures, objects, and sites that have been designated or determined to be
eligible as historically and architecturally significant, and categorized as either contributing or noncontributing to
the historic nature of the district
387
Minimized Site
Disturbance
Plan
Built Project
1 point
GIB
INTENT
MINIMIZED SITE DISTURBANCE

To preserve existing noninvasive trees, native plants, and pervious
surfaces.
REQUIREMENTS
OPTION 1. DEVELOPMENT FOOTPRINT ON PREVIOUSLY DEVELOPED LAND (1 POINT)
Locate 100% of the development footprint and the construction impact zone on previously developed land.
OR
OPTION 2. UNDEVELOPED PORTION OF PROJECT LEFT UNDISTURBED (1 POINT)

Depending on the density of the project, do not develop or disturb a portion of the site that has not been previously
developed, exclusive of (1) any land preserved by codified law, (2) a prerequisite of LEED for Neighborhood
Development or (3) exempt areas designated as nonbuildable in comprehensive land-use plans. Stipulate in
covenants, conditions, and restrictions (CC&R) or other binding documents that the undisturbed area will be
protected from development by a private or governmental agency for the purpose of long-term conservation.
When determining the minimum area to be left undeveloped, mixed-use projects must use the lowest applicable
density from Table 1 or use the weighted average methodology in NPD Credit Compact Development. Densities and
minimum percentages are as follows:
388
TABLE 1. Minimum undeveloped area, by project density
Residential density
Residential density (DU/acre) Nonresidential density (FAR) Minimum area left undisturbed
(DU/hectare)
< 13 <32 < 0.5 20%
> 13 and ≤ 18 > 32 and ≤ 45 ≥ 0.5 and ≤1 15%
> 18 > 45 >1 10%
For portions of the site that are not previously developed, identify construction impact zones that limit disturbance
to the following:
·· 40 feet (12 meters) beyond the building perimeter;
·· 10 feet (3 meters) beyond surface walkways, patios, surface parking, and utilities less than 12 inches (30
centimeters) in diameter;
·· 15 feet (4.5 meters) beyond street curbs and main utility branch trenches; and
·· 25 feet (7.5 meters) beyond constructed areas with permeable surfaces (such as pervious paving areas,
stormwater retention facilities, and playing fields) that require additional staging areas to limit compaction in
the constructed zone.
GIB
FOR ALL PROJECTS

Survey the site to identify the following:
·· trees in good or excellent condition, as determined by an arborist certified by the International Society of
Arboriculture (ISA) or local equivalent professional for projects outside the U.S.;
·· any heritage or champion trees of special importance to the community because of their age, size, type,
historical association, or horticultural value, as defined by a government forester;
·· all trees larger than 6 inches (15 centimeters) in diameter at breast height (dbh, 4 feet 6 inches [1.4 meters]
above ground); and
·· any invasive plant species that affect trees present on the site, and whether those plants threaten the health
of other trees to be preserved on the site, as determined by an ISA-certified arborist or local equivalent
professional.
Preserve the following trees that are also identified as in good or excellent condition:
·· all heritage or champion trees and trees whose dbh exceeds 50% of the state champion dbh for the species;
·· a minimum of 75% of all noninvasive trees (including the above) larger than 18 inches (45 centimeters) dbh;
and
·· a minimum of 25% of all noninvasive trees (including the above) larger than 12 inches (30 centimeters) dbh if
deciduous and 6 inches (15 centimeters) dbh if coniferous.
Tree condition ratings must be determined by an ISA-certified arborist using ISA-approved assessment measures or
by a local equivalent professional utilizing an equivalent methodology.
Develop a plan, in consultation with and approved by an ISA-certified arborist or equivalent, for the health of the
trees, including fertilization and pruning, and for their protection during construction.
If an ISA-certified arborist or local equivalent professional has determined that any trees to be preserved are
threatened by invasive vegetation, develop a plan to reduce the invasive vegetation. Stipulate in codes, covenants,
and restrictions or other binding documents that the undisturbed area of the preserved trees will be protected from
development by a private or governmental agency for the purpose of long-term conservation.
389
BEHIND THE INTENT

Construction activities, particularly near or in undeveloped areas, can disrupt the local ecology. Wildlife, plant
communities, soils, wetlands, and water bodies may all be harmed. Changes to the hydrologic regime as a result of
adjacent construction activities may increase runoff, erosion, and sedimentation of water bodies, both on site and
downstream. Vegetative root zones may be damaged as soils become compacted and lose nutrients and organic
matter. Soils are the foundation for the project’s ecology; thus, minimizing site disturbance to protect soils is
particularly important.
Building on previously developed land, protecting undisturbed land inside the project boundary, and limiting
the development footprint and construction zones can all help reduce damage to intact and sensitive areas. These
strategies are the simplest ways to ensure that construction activities do not harm healthy soils, trees identified for
preservation, native vegetation, or other sensitive site features.
Mature trees are an important community asset at both the site and the ecoregion level, especially where limited
green space is planned for a project. Large trees provide shade and habitat for a variety of species and help manage
rainwater through both evapotranspiration and infiltration. Preserving existing trees and protecting them from
construction damage enable the project site to provide valuable ecological services to the community. An arborist
certified by the International Society of Arboriculture (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) should be
engaged as early as possible so that the project can preserve important existing trees.
GIB

STEP 1. SELECT ARBORIST
Identify an arborist certified by the International Society of Arboriculture (ISA), or for projects outside
the U.S., an equivalent certified professional using equivalent methodology. ISA maintains a directory of
certified arborists on its website. See Referenced Standards.
STEP 2. CONDUCT SITE SURVEY

Work with the arborist or a local equivalent professional to identify all trees and invasive plants with the
qualities listed in the requirements. Projects on previously developed sites without trees are still required
to develop a site survey summarizing these conditions.
STEP 3. IDENTIFY TREES TO BE PRESERVED

Work with the arborist or a local equivalent professional to evaluate the identified trees, and determine
which will be preserved to meet or exceed the thresholds identified in the credit requirements. Determine
the trees’ condition ratings, and preserve those that meet the credit’s preservation criteria. See Further
Explanation, Example Tree Inventory.
STEP 4. DEVELOP PLAN THAT ENSURES HEALTH OF PRESERVED TREES

Work with the arborist or a local equivalent professional to develop a plan that ensures the health of the
preserved trees.
·· The qualified professional should determine the current health of the individual trees and list steps to
be taken for each.
·· The plan typically addresses mitigation of damage from construction activities, surrounding soil
qualities, root-zone compaction, watering, pruning, drainage, fertilization, and future protection
measures.
·· “A Guide to Preserving Trees in Development Projects” (Penn State University) is a resource for
information on developing a plan for tree protection and maintenance.
390
STEP 5. DEVELOP PLAN TO REDUCE INVASIVE SPECIES, IF APPLICABLE

If the site survey identifies invasive species, develop a plan to reduce the threat this vegetation poses to
trees.
·· An important consideration in invasive species management is the health of trees, whose root systems
and branching structure must not be damaged during the invasive plants’ removal.
·· An invasive vegetation management plan includes steps to remove existing invasive plants, prevent
them from returning, and prevent new invasive species from becoming established.
·· Removing existing invasive plants may involve complete root removal strategies (mechanical,
biocontrol, etc.) and containment.
·· Prevention of invasive plant establishment may involve regular monitoring of the property for “hot
spots” of new invasive plants, public awareness and education, and integrated species management
strategies.
STEP 6. ESTABLISH COVENANTS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS FOR PROTECTED

TREES
The CC&Rs or other binding documents must stipulate that the undisturbed, preserved trees will be
protected from development, per the credit requirements.

Determine which option is more appropriate for the project to demonstrate credit compliance, based on
current site conditions.
·· Option 1. Development Footprint on Previously Developed Land, is appropriate if 100% of the project’s
GIB
development will be on previously developed land. The project boundary may encompass land not
previously developed; however, 100% of development and construction activities must occur on the
previously developed area.
·· Option 2. Undeveloped Portion of Project Left Undisturbed, is for projects with undeveloped areas
inside the LEED project boundary, if extending the development footprint or construction impact zone
into these undeveloped areas is unavoidable.
Option 1. Development Footprint on Previously Developed Land
STEP 1. CONDUCT SITE PLANNING EARLY

Begin site planning early to ensure that the project design avoids undeveloped portions of the site.
Projects whose design extends onto previously undeveloped land are not eligible to pursue Option 1 of
this credit.
STEP 2. CONSTRUCT ON PREVIOUSLY DEVELOPED LAND

Ensure that 100% of the development footprint and construction activities occur only on previously
developed land; areas that are currently undeveloped must not be disturbed. Projects that disturb any
undeveloped areas in the development or construction phases are not eligible to pursue Option 1.
Option 2. Undeveloped Portion of Project Left Undisturbed
STEP 1. IDENTIFY ALL AREAS ON SITE THAT ARE UNDEVELOPED AND UNDISTURBED
On a site map, indicate all areas of the project site that are undisturbed and undeveloped. This
information may be part of the site survey.
Restoration activities are not considered disturbance.
STEP 2. IDENTIFY UNDISTURBED AREAS THAT MEET CREDIT REQUIREMENTS

Review the credit criteria to determine which areas qualify as undisturbed, and indicate these on the site
map. These areas are exempt from the Option 2 requirements and are subtracted from the total site area
before the undisturbed area percentage is calculated.
391
STEP 3. DETERMINE MINIMUM PERCENTAGE OF UNDISTURBED AREA

Find the project’s residential density, listed in Table 1, to determine the minimum percentage of area that
must be left undisturbed.
·· For mixed-use projects, use either the lowest density value (residential or nonresidential), or a
weighted average to determine the percentage of area to be left undisturbed. See Further Explanation,
Calculations, and Examples, Mixed-Use Project.
STEP 4. ESTABLISH BUFFER ZONES FOR DEVELOPMENT AND CONSTRUCTION

DISTURBANCE
Establish construction buffer zones and clearly state expectations for observing them with the project
contractors.
·· A construction activity or erosion and sedimentation plan may be required by local or national
agencies. Projects may follow this plan if it is at least as stringent as the credit requirements.
·· Communicate to the construction contractor the necessary steps to limit development and
disturbance, according to the credit requirements. A map can be used to show the limits of
disturbance and the locations of land protection measures that will be implemented before
construction begins.
STEP 5. WORK WITH ACCREDITED LAND TRUST OR GOVERNMENT AGENCY

Donate or sell the undisturbed land, or establish a conservation easement on the land with an accredited
land trust or government agency for the purpose of long-term conservation. See Further Explanation,
Government Agencies and Accredited Land Trusts.
GIB
STEP 6. ESTABLISH COVENANTS, CONDITIONS, AND RESTRICTIONS FOR UNDISTURBED
AREA PROTECTION
The CC&Rs must stipulate that the undisturbed areas will be protected from development, per the

credit requirements. Stipulate that the areas identified in the credit requirements will be protected from
development by a private or governmental agency for the purpose of long-term conservation.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
Equation 1. Weighted average methodology for mixed-use projects
Required Required
Minimum Residential % area left Nonresidential % area left
% area left = % total floor × undisturbed + % total floor × undisturbed
undisturbed area based on area based on
density density
EXAMPLES
Mixed-Use Project
A project has a residential density of 30 dwelling units (DU) per hectare and a nonresidential density of 1.5 floor-
area ratio (FAR). The project’s overall residential floor area is 60% of the total floor area, and nonresidential area
accounts for the remaining 40%. The required percentage of area left undisturbed is 20% for the residential area and
10% for the nonresidential area (based on Table 1). The project can use either the percentage of area left undisturbed
for the lower applicable density (20%) or the result of the weighted average calculation:
392
Minimum % area
left undisturbed
= 0.60 × 0.20 + 0.40 × 0.10
The minimum area to be left undisturbed is thus 16%.
TABLE 2. Example tree inventory
Maintenance recommendations and

Tree ID Species DBH Tree height Tree condition
comments
001 White Oak 19 in (48 cm) 52 ft (16 m) Excellent Crown cleaning, annual pruning
002 White Oak 26 in (66 cm) 68 ft (21 m) Excellent Annual pruning
003 American Elm 16 in (41 cm) 36 ft (11 m) Fair
004 Sugar Maple 11 in (28 cm) 60 ft (18 m) Good
005 White Pine 7 in (18 cm) 18 ft (5.5 m) Good Crown raising, annual pruning
GIB
Trees that must be preserved per credit requirements.
This example project has no heritage or champion trees of special importance to the community, as defined by a
government forest agency, based on their age, size, type, historical association, or horticultural value. Table 3 lists the
reasons why the trees highlighted in Table 2 must be preserved, per the credit requirements.
TABLE 3. Example summary
Preservation requirements for trees in good Trees to be

Trees on site Tree ID Notes
or excellent condition preserved
Minimum 75% of all noninvasive trees larger

2 2 001, 002
than 18 in (45 cm) dbh
Requirement fulfilled
Minimum 25% of noninvasive trees larger than 001, 002,
3 1 by preservation of
12 in (30 cm) dbh if deciduous 003
001 and 002 (above)
Minimum 25% of noninvasive trees larger than
1 1 005
6 in (15 cm) dbh if coniferous

Many private nonprofit land trusts or conservation organizations work to conserve land through acquisition,
oversight of conservation easements, and other measures. In many cases land trusts work directly with the state or
local government’s conservation agency.
393
GOVERNMENT AGENCIES
Most U.S. state governments have agencies that oversee land conservation and associated easements. Examples
LS CP CB Percentages of trees to be preserved according to dbh X X
CP CB Survey of trees and invasive plants X X
CP CB Plan for maintaining tree health and controlling any invasive vegetation X X
GIB
LS CP CB Description of previously developed land X
LS CP CB Calculations for density and undisturbed area X

Site plan showing project boundary, building footprint(s), undisturbed area, and construction
CP CB X
disturbance limits
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SLL Credit Site Design for Habitat or Wetland and Water Body Conservation. If the undisturbed land preserved
under this credit is significant habitat, wetlands, or water bodies, then earning this credit may assist in earning the
related credit. However, deed restrictions or other CC&Rs used to preserve land under this credit are not adequate to
achieve the related credit.
SLL Credit Restoration of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies. If the undisturbed land preserved under this
credit is significant habitat, wetlands, or water bodies and will undergo ecological restoration, then earning this
credit may assist in earning the related credit. However, deed restrictions or other CC&Rs used to preserve land
under this credit are not adequate to achieve the related credit.
SLL Credit Long-Term Conservation Management of Habitat or Wetlands and Water Bodies. If the
undisturbed land preserved under this credit is significant habitat, wetlands, or water bodies and a long-term
management plan in place, then earning this credit may assist in earning the related credit.
GIB Prerequisite Construction Activity Pollution Prevention. The same strategies used to preserve trees and
protect undisturbed areas for this credit can also help teams achieve the related prerequisite.
GIB Credit Rainwater Management. Because they help prevent soil erosion, preserved trees can be part of the
rainwater management plan required for the related credit. Limiting the development footprint, minimizing
construction impact zones, and preserving land that has not been previously developed also contribute to erosion
and sedimentation control measures and allow rainwater to infiltrate and evapotranspire, helping teams achieve the
related credit.
394

The threshold values for project area in Table 1 have been changed to align with NPD Credit Compact Development.
International Society of Arboriculture: isa-arbor.com
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
construction impact zone the project’s development footprint plus the areas around the improvement where
construction crews, equipment, and/or materials are staged and moved during construction
GIB
invasive plant nonnative vegetation that has been introduced to an area and that aggressively adapts and
reproduces. The plant’s vigor combined with a lack of natural enemies often leads to outbreak populations. (Adapted
from U.S. Department of Agriculture)
395
Rainwater Management
Plan
Built Project
1-4 points
GIB
INTENT
To reduce runoff volume and improve water quality by replicating the
RAINWATER MANAGEMENT
natural hydrology and water balance of the site, based on historical
conditions and undeveloped ecosystems in the region.
REQUIREMENTS
In a manner best replicating natural site hydrology processes, manage on site the runoff from the developed site for
the percentile of regional or local rainfall events listed in Table 1, using low-impact development (LID) and green
infrastructure.
Use daily rainfall data and the methodology in the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Technical
Guidance on Implementing the Stormwater Runoff Requirements for Federal Projects under Section 438 of the
Energy Independence and Security Act to determine the percentile amounts listed in Table 1. The percentile rainfall
event indicates the total volume to be retained on site.
TABLE 1. Points for retaining rainwater on site
Percentile rainfall event Points
80th 1
85th 2
90th 3
95th 4
Projects that earn at least 2 points under this credit may earn an additional point if the site meets one of the following
criteria.
·· The project is located on a previously developed site.
·· The project achieves 1 point in SLL Credit Brownfield Remediation.
·· The project is designed to be transit ready by achieving at least 2 points each under NPD Credit Walkable
Streets, NPD Credit Compact Development, and NPD Credit Mixed-Use Neighborhoods.
396
BEHIND THE INTENT

The impervious surfaces, soil compaction, loss of vegetation, and loss of natural drainage patterns associated with
conventional site development disrupt natural hydrologic systems and watersheds. The cumulative effect of these
changes alters the natural water balance and water flow. Typically, a conventional site manages runoff by piping and
conveying the rainwater as quickly as possible into large, central facilities at the base of drainage areas. Although
intended to prevent flooding and promote efficient drainage, this strategy can harm watersheds: it increases the
volume, temperature, peak flow, and duration of runoff, eroding streams and causing other ecological damage.
Green infrastructure (GI) and low-impact development (LID) rainwater management strategies improve on
that conventional approach by mimicking a site’s natural hydrology. Rainwater is treated as a resource rather than a
waste product. The approaches and techniques in this credit involve minimizing disturbed areas on the project site,
limiting the amount of impervious cover on a site, and then infiltrating, filtering, storing, evaporating, or detaining
rainwater runoff at or close to its source.
GIB
STEP 1. OBTAIN RAINFALL DATA FOR PROJECT LOCATION

Collect at least 10 years of historical rainfall data from all seasons to account for seasonal variability. If
the team submits less than 10 years’ worth of information, explain why additional historical data are not
available.
·· For projects in the U.S., long-term rainfall data for many locations are available through the National
Climatic Data Center. Use this database or another source to identify the reference location closest to
the project site where similar precipitation patterns are expected.
·· For projects outside the U.S. or other locations not covered by the National Climatic Data Center,
obtain information from local airports, universities, water treatment plants, or other facilities that
maintain long-term precipitation records (see Further Explanation, International Tips).
·· Include the location of the monitoring station, the recording time (usually the start of a time-step), and
the total precipitation (in inches or millimeters) during the time-step.
·· Collect daily historical rainfall data from a consistent source whenever possible. If data must be
combined from multiple monitoring stations, interpolate or average rainfall data from three or more
stations around the site to even out any discrepancies with the primary station.
STEP 2. DETERMINE VALUE FOR 80TH, 85TH, 90TH, OR 95TH PERCENTILE OF STORM EVENTS
Using the historical rainfall data collected, calculate the rainfall value for the 80th, 85th, 90th, or 95th
percentile. This is the precipitation amount that 80%, 85%, 90%, or 95% of all rainfall events for the period
of record do not exceed (see Further Explanation, Percentile of Rainfall Events).
·· Select an appropriate percentile storm for the region and site. Only one percentile storm is needed.
·· Review local rainwater regulations or regional rainwater design guidance manuals to see whether
predetermined percentiles are indicated.
STEP 3. CALCULATE RUNOFF VOLUME TO BE MANAGED ON SITE

Calculate the total volume of runoff (in cubic feet or cubic meters) corresponding to the chosen
percentile of rainfall events for the site in its postdeveloped condition. This is the amount that the
project will need to manage entirely on site through green infrastructure and low-impact development
techniques.
·· Many rainwater software programs include calculation methodologies. (see Further Explanation,
Calculations and Example).
·· Runoff volume depends on the specific postdeveloped cover types and hydrologic conditions of the
project, such as amount of impervious surface and permeability of other surfaces.
397
STEP 4. DESIGN STRATEGIES TO MANAGE RUNOFF ON SITE

Incorporate green infrastructure and low-impact development strategies into the site design to manage,
on site, 100% of the total volume of runoff calculated for the chosen percentile rainfall event and the
project’s developed conditions.
·· Work with the project’s civil engineer, landscape architect, hydrologist, or other qualified professional
to determine design strategies and perform management calculations (see Further Explanation, Green
Infrastructure and Low-Impact Development Strategies).
·· Use an empirical, statistical, or mathematical method to confirm that the total volume of rainwater
managed by the project’s GI and LID measures will fully manage the total runoff volume through
infiltration, evapotranspiration, or capture and reuse (see Further Explanation, Calculations).
·· Calculations must account for the site-specific soil characteristics, the soil infiltration rate, and the
storage capacity of all GI and LID measures.
STEP 5. DETERMINE ELIGIBILITY FOR ADDITIONAL POINT

A project that meets the credit criteria for at least the 85th percentile threshold is eligible for an
additional point if it also meets one of the criteria indicated in the credit requirements. The total
maximum is 4 points, so a project that is already meeting the 95th percentile threshold is not eligible
for an additional point.
GIB
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
The land use Runoff Coefficients for small rainfall depths in the Small Storm Hydrology Method are recommended.
The project team may choose the runoff volume calculation methodology most appropriate for the project. The
use of the Cover Complex Method is not recommended at this time for the calculation of runoff volume from small
rainfall events (i.e. less than 2.5 in [63.5 mm] precipitation in 24 hours). Explain the choice and provide sufficient
documentation to demonstrate that the intent of the credit is being met.
Many rainwater software programs include calculation methodologies. Computer modeling programs based on
the Small Storm Hydrology Method, such as WinSLAMM, are acceptable tools. The U.S. EPA Stormwater Calculator
can provide an overview of percentile storm events and potential compliance but should not be used for design.
Small Storm Hydrology Method:

·· Large impervious areas. This category describes impervious areas with an average dimension greater than 24
feet (7.3 meters) in any direction. Examples include parking lots with curbs, roads with curbs, and highways.
·· Small impervious areas. This category describes impervious areas with an average dimension no greater than
24 feet (7.3 meters) in any direction. Examples include roads without curbs, small parking lots without curbs,
and sidewalks.
For each land-use type, runoff volume is calculated based on the area and a land-use coefficient, using the following
equations:
IP units
Runoff P
volume
= × Rv × Area
12
where
Runoff volume from a 95% rainfall event (ft3)
P = 95% rainfall depth (in)
Rv = Small Storm Hydrology Method runoff coefficient
A = area of land use (ft2)
398
For a site with multiple land uses, runoff volume can be calculated in IP units as follows:
Runoff P P P
volume
= 12
× Rvi × Ai + 12
× Rvi+1 × Ai+1 +...+ 12
× Rvn × An
i=1
SI units
Runoff P
volume
= × Rv × Area
1000
where
Runoff volume from a 95% rainfall event (m3)
P = 95% rainfall depth (mm)
Rv = Small Storm Hydrology Method runoff coefficient
A = area of land use (m2)
For a site with multiple land uses, runoff volume can be calculated in SI units as follows:
GIB
Runoff P P P
volume
= 1000
× Rvi × Ai + 1000
× Rvi+1 × Ai+1 +...+ 1000
× Rvn × An
i=1
PERCENTILE OF RAINFALL EVENTS

A percentile of rainfall events1 represents a precipitation amount that the chosen percentage of all rainfall events for
the period of record do not exceed. For example, the 95th percentile of rainfall events is the measured precipitation
depth accumulated over 24 hours that ranks as the 95th-percent rainfall depth based on the range of all daily event
occurrences during the period of record. The 24-hour period is typically defined as 12:00:00 a.m. to 11:59:59 p.m.
Use the following steps to determine the chosen percentile of rainfall events:
1. Obtain a long-term daily precipitation data set for the project location (for U.S. projects, from the National
Climatic Data Center website; for projects outside the U.S., see International Tips). In general, a 30-year period
of rainfall record is preferred for the analysis. The raw data are collected by most airports. At least 10 years of
data must be included if available.
2. Import the data into the USGBC rainfall events calculator or another spreadsheet. If using another
spreadsheet, organize daily precipitation records in a single column, in any order.
3. Review the records, looking for anomalies, and identify and remove any erroneous or flagged data points.
4. Remove rainfall events of less than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm). The amount of precipitation from these small events
generally produces no measurable runoff because of absorption by permeable surfaces and interception and
evaporation by impermeable and vegetated surfaces.
5. The USGBC calculator determines the 80th, 85th, 90th, and 95th percentile rainfall amounts. If using another
spreadsheet software, apply a percentile function (or similar) to obtain results.
1 Components adapted from Technical Guidance on Implementing the Stormwater Runoff Requirements for Federal Projects under Section 438 of the Energy
Independence and Security Act.
399
GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE AND LOW-IMPACT DEVELOPMENT STRATEGIES

In addition to mimicking natural hydrologic cycle processes, green infrastructure and low-impact development help
integrate the site with the surrounding watershed, are appropriate to the local ecosystem and climate, and can also
provide water for reuse, create wildlife habitat, and promote species diversity. The goal of low impact development is
to manage water as close to the source as possible using soils and vegetation.
Prior to calculating the runoff volume from the project area, the designer is encouraged to reduce the volume
of runoff by protecting existing natural resources that serve to reduce the generation of runoff. Examples include
healthy uncompacted soils, riparian buffers, tree canopy, etc. These areas must be protected from disturbance during
the construction period in order to be effective. If protected from disturbance during construction, these natural
areas can be excluded from runoff volume management.
Project teams should consult EPA’s National Menu of Stormwater Best Practices and consider the following
questions when selecting measures for the project:
·· Which GI and LID measures best mimic the site’s natural hydrology?
·· How can multiple measures be used together (in a “treatment train” approach) to manage rainwater?
·· What are the infiltration rates and capacities of the most practical measures and how might the site’s soil
conditions affect their efficiency? Will any design modifications need to be made to satisfy performance goals?
·· How effective are the measures at removing contaminants from the rainwater runoff?
GIB
TABLE 2. Green infrastructure and low-impact development summary2
Approach or technology Common applications and considerations
• Applicable in most areas, including arid and cold climates with modifications
• Best applied on small sites
Bioretention: rain garden, tree box,
• Applicable in highly urbanized sites
infiltration planter
• Can be designed for infiltration or filtration
• Can contain robust vegetation
• Good as part of series (treatment train) of best management practices to treat rainwater on
site
Vegetated swale, bioswale • Typically used for conveyance but provides some infiltration
• Best applied on small sites and with low slopes
• Can require irrigation in arid and semi-arid climates
• Requires relatively large area
Vegetated filter strip • Best suited to treating runoff from roads and highways, roof downspouts, very small parking
lots, and pervious surfaces
Pocket wetland • Applicable to nonurban areas with moderate rainfall
Preservation of natural vegetation, • Applicable to all sites with vegetation in predevelopment state or previously developed
revegetation areas that can be revegetated to mimic predevelopment state
Protection of riparian buffer, floodplain • Appropriate for all sites adjacent to shoreline, stream, wetland, or other water bodies
• Applicable to roofs with an angle of less than 20°
• Appropriate for all locations, including highly urbanized sites
Green roof
• Irrigation systems may be necessary, depending on climate and planting design
• Increased roof load must be incorporated into building design
• Performs well in pedestrian walkways, sidewalks, driveways, parking lots, and low-volume
roadways
• Consider load-bearing and infiltration capacities of subgrade soil, infiltration capacity of
Porous (pervious) pavement
pervious concrete, and storage capacity of stone base and subbase
• Not appropriate for high-volume or extreme load applications without substantial system
thickness
• Widely applicable, provided local jurisdiction allows rainwater harvesting
Rainwater harvesting • Can reduce potable water consumption if used for landscape irrigation, toilet flushing,
cooling, and other on-site purposes
2 Content adapted from http://water.epa.gov/polwaste/npdes/swbmp/

400
EXAMPLE
Rain gardens
Parking garage
Plaza
Streets: impervious
Alleys and parking:
permeable pavement Lawn: pervious
+
HP
+
HP
+
GIB
HP
+
+ HP
LP
+
+ HP
HP
Lawn: pervious
Bioretention basin A
Bioretention basin B
Wetlands and buffer

Buildings
Buildings with vegetated roofs
Rainwater management facilities
Permeable pavement
Drainage between rainwater management facilities
Figure 1. Example site plan
The project team is attempting the 95th percentile threshold and has pulled daily rainfall data from the National
Climatic Data Center for the previous 10 years. Following the steps in Further Explanation, Percentage of Rainfall
Events, the team has analyzed the historical data and found that the 95th-percentile storm delivers 1.1 inches
USGBC LEED(28 mm) ofIllustrations
Guide rain. GS5
To supplement the capacity of the pervious landscaped area, the team has identified several GI and LID
Buildable Land (Getting Started Figure 8)
measures—bioretention areas, porous paving, a rain garden, and pervious decking—to capture rainwater from
impervious surfaces.
To ensure that the designed site manages all the rainwater runoff generated during the 95th percentile storm,
the team calculates how the GI and LID measures perform and determines that there is excess runoff. The team
redesigns one bioretention area to accommodate the remaining water. Running the calculations again, the team
confirms that all runoff from the 95th percentile storm is now accounted for (Table 3).
401
TABLE 3. Example summary table
Total area 95 acres (38.45 hectares)
Total imperviousness 58.1%
95th-percentile rainfall event 1.1 in (28 mm)
Total expected site runoff for 95th percentile of rainfall events without bioretention 53 in (1346 mm)
Area of bioretention needed to manage expected runoff 18 acres (7.28 hectares)
Area of bioretention in project design 20.5 acres (8.30 hectares)
The area of planned bioretention exceeds the area needed to manage expected runoff from a 95th-percentile storm,
so the project earns the maximum 4 points.
Sample documentation narrative describing GI and LID measures:

The bioretention facilities incorporated into the site design are soil- and plant-based filtration systems that receive runoff
from the developed site areas. They are located at low points on the site, where rainfall collects (see site plan). Rainfall
runoff infiltrates into a sandy medium that temporarily holds the rainwater, facilitating numerous physical, biological, and
chemical processes. Vegetation planted in the bioretention facilities, including Andropogon scoparius, Iris sp., and Prunus
americana, helps filter particles in the runoff, assimilate nutrients and contaminants from the neighboring roadway, degrade
engine oil, and oxygenate conditions to promote beneficial microorganisms. Bioretention mimics the site’s natural hydrology
GIB
by facilitating natural processes such as infiltration and evapotranspiration. The area of bioretention in this project meets the
95th percentile criteria, managing rainwater via natural processes for storms up to 1.1 inches (28 mm).
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
If rainfall data for the project location are not available from the National Climatic Data Center database, the
databases of the UN Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) and Aquastat can be good sources of information for
country-level rainwater data. Local rainfall data are best; use country-level data if necessary.
LS CP CB Description of GI or LID measures to be implemented and how they best replicate site’s natural hydrology X
LS CP CB Attempted threshold (80th, 85th, 90th, or 95th percentile storm event) X
CP CB Rainfall events calculator (or equivalent documentation) with rainfall data (at least 10 years) and source X
CP CB Site plan with elements and measurements noted X
CP CB Plans, details, and/or cross-sections clearly depicting GI and LID measures X
CP CB Calculations for total runoff volume and volume of runoff managed by GI and LID measures X
CP CB If applicable, description of why 10 years of rainfall data are not available X

402
RELATED CREDITS TIPS

or Wetlands and Water Bodies. Maintaining, restoring, or conserving the site’s natural hydrology can help teams
achieve the related credits by also maintaining, restoring, or conserving the associated habitat, wetlands, or water
bodies.
GIB Credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction. GI and LID measures that harvest and reuse rainwater for irrigation
may help projects achieve the related credit by reducing the potable water demand.
GIB Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction. GI and LID measures that harvest and reuse rainwater to supplement
plumbing fixture water use may help reduce potable water demand.
GIB Credit Heat Island Reduction. Vegetated roofs installed to achieve this credit will also qualify for the related
credit.

·· Projects must use GI and LID rainwater management techniques on site.
GIB
·· U.S. EPA technical guidance has replaced Washington State’s Stormwater Management Manual for Western
Washington.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Technical Guidance on Implementing the Rainwater Runoff
Requirements for Federal Projects, Section 438, Energy Independence and Security Act: epa.gov
Manage 100% of rainwater that falls inside the project boundary.
DEFINITIONS
green infrastructure a soil- and vegetation-based approach to wet weather management that is cost-effective,
sustainable, and environmentally friendly. Green infrastructure management approaches and technologies
infiltrate, evapotranspire, capture and reuse stormwater to maintain or restore natural hydrologies. (Adapted from
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency)
low-impact development (LID) an approach to managing rainwater runoff that emphasizes on-site natural features
to protect water quality, by replicating the natural land cover hydrologic regime of watersheds, and addressing runoff
close to its source. Examples include better site design principles (e.g., minimizing land disturbance, preserving
vegetation, minimizing impervious cover), and design practices (e.g., rain gardens, vegetated swales and buffers,
permeable pavement, rainwater harvesting, soil amendments). These are engineered practices that may require
specialized design assistance.
manage (rainwater) on site to capture and retain a specified volume of rainfall to mimic natural hydrologic
function. Examples of rainwater management include strategies that involve evapotranspiration, infiltration, and
capture and reuse.
natural site hydrology the natural land cover function of water occurrence, distribution, movement, and balance
403
Heat Island Reduction

Plan
Built Project
1 point
GIB
INTENT
To minimize effects on microclimates and human and wildlife habitats
HEAT ISLAND REDUCTION

by reducing heat islands.
REQUIREMENTS
OPTION 1. NONROOF (1 POINT)

Use any combination of the following strategies for 50% of the nonroof site paving (including roads, sidewalks,
courtyards, parking lots, parking structures, and driveways).
·· Use the existing plant material or install plants that provide shade over the paving areas on the site within 10
years of plant material installation.
·· Install and plant planters, either at grade or raised. Plant material cannot include artificial turf.
·· Provide shade with structures covered by energy generation systems, such as solar thermal collectors,
photovoltaics, and wind turbines, that produce energy used to offset some nonrenewable resource use.
·· Provide shade with architectural devices or structures that have a three-year aged solar reflectance (SR) value
of at least 0.28. If three-year aged value information is not available, use materials with an initial SR of at least
0.33 at installation.
·· Provide shade with vegetated structures.
·· Use paving materials with a three-year aged solar reflectance (SR) value of at least 0.28. If three-year aged value
information is not available, use materials with an initial SR of at least 0.33 at installation.
·· Use an open-grid pavement system (at least 50% unbound).
OR
404
OPTION 2. HIGH-REFLECTANCE AND VEGETATED ROOFS (1 POINT)

Use roofing materials that have an SRI equal to or greater than the values in Table 1. Meet the three-year aged SRI
value (if three-year aged value information is not available, use materials that meet the initial SRI value) for a
minimum of 75% of the roof area of all new buildings within the project, or install a vegetated (“green”) roof for at
least 75% of the roof area of all new buildings within the project. Combinations of SRI-compliant and vegetated roofs
can be used, provided they satisfy the equation in Option 3.
TABLE 1. Minimum solar reflectance index value, by roof slope
Initial SRI 3-year aged SRI
Low (≤ 2:12) 82 64
Steep (> 2:12) 39 32
OR
OPTION 3. MIXED NONROOF AND ROOF MEASURES (1 POINT)

Use any of the strategies listed under Options 1 and 2 that in combination meet the following criterion:
Area of Nonroof Area of High- Area of

GIB
Measures Reflectance Roof Vegetated Roof Total Site Total Roof

+ ≥ Paving Area + Area
0.5 0.75 0.75
Alternatively, an SRI and SR weighted average approach may be used to calculate compliance.
405
BEHIND THE INTENT

The dark, nonreflective surfaces of parking lots, roads, roofs, walkways, and other hardscapes absorb the sun’s
warmth and radiate heat, creating heat islands. Urban areas can have temperatures 1.8º to 5.4ºF (1º to 3ºC) warmer
than surrounding suburban and undeveloped areas, and as much as 22ºF (12ºC) warmer in evenings. These heat
islands may contribute to regional average warming trends.1 A study of surface warming from rapid urbanization in
eastern China found urban heat islands responsible for 24.2% of regional warming.2 Urban heat island effects have
numerous negative consequences. Plants and animals sensitive to temperature fluctuations may find habitat affected
by heat islands inhospitable. Human health may suffer because exposure to ground-level pollution is often worse
in places affected by heat islands. Additionally, heat islands increase cooling loads in the summer, necessitating
larger, more powerful air-conditioners that use more electricity, in turn increasing cooling costs, producing more
greenhouse gases, and generating pollution.
According to a study of the metropolitan areas of Baton Rouge, Chicago, Houston, Sacramento, and Salt Lake
City by the Department of Energy’s Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, the energy savings potential of heat
island reduction measures ranges from $4 million to $15 million per year. Energy savings from reducing the heat
island can result from reduced heat gain through the roof plus an overall increase in efficiency for outdoor air-
conditioning condensing units and cooling towers. Efforts to reduce heat islands can have a reasonable payback
period when included as part of an integrated systems approach to improving building performance, such as by
installing solar panels on shading devices or using a vegetated roof to insulate a building and extend the life of the
roof.
GIB
The most effective measure of a roofing material’s ability to reject solar heat is the solar reflectance index (SRI).
However, to measure the solar heat rejection of components that are not roofing materials—for example, vegetation,
shading devices, and other less reflective components—solar reflectance (SR) is used in this credit instead. SR is
a more appropriate way to measure nonroof materials, which have more thermal mass. In addition to a product’s

initial SRI or SR value, this credit considers a product’s three-year-aged SRI or SR values, which measure materials’
performance over time. The credit encourages project teams to adopt a variety of strategies, including reducing
hardscape and incorporating high-SRI or high-SR materials such as vegetation and shaded parking, which minimize a
project’s overall contribution to heat island effects.
STEP 1. IDENTIFY HARDSCAPE AND ROOF AREA

On a site plan, identify the total hardscape area and total applicable roof area inside the project
boundary.
·· Hardscape area includes all paved roads, sidewalks, courtyards, and parking lots.
·· Applicable roof area excludes surfaces covered by mechanical equipment, solar energy panels,
skylights, and any other appurtenances.
·· The top level of multilevel parking structures is considered nonroof surface if it has parking spaces but
roof area if it has no parking spaces.

Determine which option the project will pursue. Project teams may want to run preliminary calculations
to determine the most advantageous option if multiple strategies are used. For example, a project with
both a green roof and pervious paving is not required to select Option 3 but could elect to meet just the
requirements for roofing under Option 2.
1 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Heat Island Effect, epa.gov/heatisland/index.htm (accessed May 2013).
2 Yang, X., Y. Hou, and B. Chen, Observed Surface Warming Induced by Urbanization in East China, J. Geophys. Res. 116 (2011), D14113,
doi:10.1029/2010JD015452.
406
Option 1. Nonroof
STEP 1. MINIMIZE HARDSCAPE

In early design, look for opportunities to limit the amount of hardscape on the project site. Increasing
the landscaped portion of the site is the most effective strategy for reducing overall heat island
effects and supports achievement of other credits (see Further Explanation, Heat Island Mitigation
Strategies and Related Credit Tips).
STEP 2. IDENTIFY AREA OF PLANTERS AND SHADED, PERMEABLE, AND REFLECTIVE

HARDSCAPE
On the site plan, determine the area of hardscape that is mitigated by one of the eligible nonroof
measures listed in the credit requirements. Gather manufacturer’s documentation of SR and paving
permeability, as applicable, to verify compliance with credit requirements.
·· Calculate the area of each nonroof measure in plan view.
·· Count each hardscape surface only once, even if it is addressed through multiple strategies (e.g.,
permeable paving that is also shaded).
STEP 3. EVALUATE COMPLIANCE AGAINST CREDIT REQUIREMENTS

Sum the paving area addressed by eligible nonroof measures and confirm that the mitigated area is
at least 50% of the site’s total hardscape; this is the standard nonroof calculation. Alternatively, use
Equation 1 to demonstrate compliance.
·· Equation 1 weights the SR for total nonroof area, showing its overall effect on heat island. This
GIB
equation is useful for projects whose nonroof materials fall both above and below the required SRI
values: materials with exceptional performance can compensate for those that do not meet the
minimums.
·· Project teams should first evaluate compliance against the standard nonroof calculation. If the project
does not meet the requirements with the standard nonroof calculation, move to Equation 1.
EQUATION 1. Weighted nonroof calculation
SR of high-reflectance *
Area of high- nonroof A Area of other
reflectance × nonroof Total site
nonroof A Required SR + measures ≥ paving area
0.5 0.5
* Summed for all high-reflectance nonroof areas.
STEP 4. INCORPORATE ADDITIONAL MITIGATION STRATEGIES IF NECESSARY

If the project does not meet the credit requirements with either calculation, revise the project design
to extend or incorporate additional nonroof or roof mitigation strategies. Then recalculate to confirm
compliance.
Once the credit strategy is finalized, include performance requirements in the applicable specification
sections, or specify particular systems and products that meet credit requirements.
Option 2. High-Reflectance and Vegetated Roofs
STEP 1. SELECT ROOFING MATERIALS

To the extent feasible, incorporate vegetated roof systems or high-reflectance roofing materials that
comply with the requirements listed in Table 1. On the site plan, determine the areas of vegetated and
high-reflectance roof. For all applicable roof areas, gather manufacturer’s documentation of SRI to verify
compliance with credit requirements.
·· Selecting high-reflectance roofing material is typically the most economical way to mitigate the heat
island effect.
407
·· Consider how roof surfaces will be maintained. The reflectivity of high-SRI surfaces needs to be
maintained through regular cleaning; a maintenance plan for such roof surfaces is recommended.

Project teams can use several approaches to determine compliance, depending on the nature of the
building’s roof.
·· If the project uses only high-reflectance roofing materials with the minimum required SRI values (Table
1), confirm that the total amount of compliant area is at least 75% of the total roof area.
·· If the project uses only vegetated roof, confirm that the total amount of compliant area is at least 75%
of the total applicable roof area.
·· If the project includes a combination of materials, determine credit compliance using Equation 2,
which accounts for a combination of high-reflectance and vegetated roof areas. If the project does not
meet the requirements, move to Equation 3.
·· Equation 3 weights the SRI for total roof area, showing its overall effect on heat island. This equation is
useful for projects that have multiple roof angles and roof materials that fall both above and below the
required SRI values.
EQUATION 2. Standard roof calculation
Area of high-reflectance roof Area of vegetated roof

+ ≥ Total roof area
0.75 0.75
GIB
EQUATION 3. Weighted roof calculation

SRI of high-reflectance *
× roof A
Area of high- Area of Total roof
reflectance roof A Required SRI + vegetated roof ≥ area
0.75 0.75
* Summed for all high-reflectance roof areas.

compliance.
sections, or specify particular systems and products that meet credit requirements.
Option 3. Mixed Nonroof and Roof Measures
STEP 1. MINIMIZE HARDSCAPE

In early design, look for opportunities to limit the amount of hardscape on the project site. Increasing the
landscaped portion of the site is the most effective strategy for reducing overall heat island effects; it
also supports achievement of other credits (see Related Credit Tips).
STEP 2. SELECT ROOFING MATERIALS

To the extent feasible, incorporate vegetated roof systems and/or high-reflectance roofing materials
that comply with Table 1 into the project design. On the site plan, determine the areas of vegetated and
high-reflectance roof. For all applicable roof areas, gather manufacturer’s documentation of SRI to verify
compliance with credit requirements.
408
·· Roof reflectance is the major consideration for projects that minimize hardscape.
·· Selecting high-reflectance roofing material is typically the most economical way to mitigate heat
island effect.
·· Consider how roof surfaces will be maintained. The reflectivity of high-SRI surfaces needs to be
maintained through regular cleaning; a maintenance plan for such roof surfaces is recommended.
·· See Further Explanation, Heat Island Mitigation Strategies, Roof Strategies.
STEP 3. IDENTIFY AREA OF PLANTERS AND SHADED, PERMEABLE, AND REFLECTIVE

HARDSCAPE
On the site plan, determine the area of hardscape that is mitigated by one of the eligible nonroof
measures listed in the credit requirements. Gather manufacturer’s documentation of SR and paving
permeability as applicable, to verify compliance with credit requirements.
·· Calculate the area of each nonroof measure in plan view.
·· Each hardscape surface should be counted only once, even if it is addressed through multiple
strategies (e.g., permeable paving that is also shaded).
·· See Further Explanation, Heat Island Mitigation Strategies, Nonroof Strategies.

Determine credit compliance using Equation 4 or Equation 5.
·· Project teams should first evaluate compliance with Equation 4, which determines the combined heat
island effect of roof and nonroof hardscape areas for the whole project. If the project does not meet
the requirements, move to Equation 5.
GIB
·· Equation 5 provides an average SRI for total roof area, showing the roof area’s overall effect on heat
island. This equation is useful for projects that have multiple roof angles and roof materials that fall
both above and below the required SRI values. See Further Explanation, Examples 1 and 2.
EQUATION 4. Standard nonroof or roof calculaltion
Area of nonroof Area of high- Area of

measures reflectance roof vegetated roof Total site Total roof
+ + ≥ paving area + area
0.5 0.75 0.75
* Summed for all high-reflectance nonroof areas.
EQUATION 5. Weighted nonroof or roof calculation
** ***
SR of high- SR of high-
Area of reflectance Area of Area of reflectance
high- other high- Area of Total
nonroof A roof A Total
site
reflectance × + nonroof + reflectance × vegetated ≥ + roof
nonroof A Required SR measures roof A Required SR roof paving
area
area
0.5 0.5 0.75 0.75
** Summed for all high-reflectance nonroof areas.

*** Summed for all high-reflectance roof areas.

compliance.
sections, or specify particular systems and products that meet the credit requirements.
409
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
HEAT ISLAND MITIGATION STRATEGIES
TABLE 2. Roof strategies
Strategy Rules and tips
Consider effects of glare on traffic, pedestrians, and adjacent buildings, especially if project has steep-
sloped roofs.
Potential moisture issues may result with high-reflective roofs in colder climates if not properly installed.
High-reflectance roof Consider including in the building installation specifications a proper inspection of the roof installation
process.
Consider high-reflectance materials’ need for maintenance (e.g., regular cleaning) required to keep these
materials from losing reflectivity over time.
Artificial turf grass does not count.
Plants must be in place at occupancy.
Vegetated roof
GIB
Extensive or intensive vegetated roofs are eligible; roof planters contribute only if part of a vegetated roof
system.
Consider maintenance required for both plants and structural integrity.

TABLE 3. Nonroof strategies
Strategy Rules and tips

Shading with new or existing plant
material Assume 10-year canopy width at 12:00 pm (i.e., in plan view, plant canopy width has no
extending shadows, regardless of time of year).
Artificial turf grass does not count.
Vegetated planters
Shading structures with energy Paved area (not roof area) shaded by covering with energy generation equipment (e.g., solar
generation thermal collectors, photovoltaics, wind turbines) is eligible.
Shading architectural devices or
Materials must have 3-year aged SR value of at least 0.28, or initial SR of at least 0.33.
structures
Vegetated shading structures Plants must be in place at occupancy.
Materials must have 3-year aged SR value of at least 0.28, or initial SR of at least 0.33.
High-reflectance paving Consider maintenance (e.g., regular cleaning) required to keep these materials from losing
reflectivity over time.
Open-grid paving Must be at least 50% unbound.
410
EXAMPLES
Driving aisle: SR of 0.10 Parking area: SR of 0.10

(does not contribute to credit) (does not contribute to credit)
Sidewalk: 3-year aged SR of 0.30 Tree shade over hardscape
Building Mechanical
footprint equipment
GIB
Photovoltaic panels
Parking deck
(does not contribute to credit)

Vegetated roof area = 1,200 sq ft (110 sq m)
High-reflectance roof area (3-year aged SRI of 90) = 1,050 sq ft (100 sq m)
Nonroof strategies contributing to credit achievement
Total roof area = 2,450 sq ft (230 sq m)
Mechanical equipment on roof = 200 sq ft (20 sq m)
Total nonroof hardscape area = 3,900 sq ft (360 sq m)
Parking covered with photovoltaic panels = 600 sq ft (55 sq m)
Sidewalks (3-year aged SR of 0.30) = 400 sq ft (35 sq m)
Tree shade = 1,000 sq ft (95 sq m)
Figure 1. Example site plan
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations SS15

GIBc Heat Island Reduction (Batch 2)
411
Example 1. Option 3, Standard Calculation

The project includes 3,900 ft2 (360 m2) of hardscape. The total roof area is 2,450 ft2 (230 m2), of which 200 ft2 (20 m2) is
covered by mechanical equipment, making the total applicable roof area 2,250 ft2 (210 m2). The following heat island
mitigation strategies have been included in the project design:
·· 400 ft2 (35 m2) of sidewalks with a three-year aged SR of 0.30
·· 600 ft2 (55 m2) of parking canopy covered with photovoltaic panels
·· 1,000 ft2 (95 m2) of shading by tree canopy
·· 1,200 ft2 (110 m2) of vegetated roof
·· 1,050 ft2 (100 m2) of high-reflectance roof (low slope) with a three-year aged SRI of 90
The project team calculates compliance using Equation 1, as follows:
400 ft2 (35 m2)

+
600 ft2 (55 m2)
+ 1050 ft2 1,200 ft2
1,000 ft2 (95 m2) (100 m2) (110 m2)
3,900 ft2 2,250 ft2
+ + ≥ (360 m2)
+ (210 m2)
0.5 0.75 0.75
GIB
The total calculated area of nonroof and roof mitigation strategies (7,000 ft2 [650 m2]) exceeds the total of site
hardscape and applicable roof area (6,150 ft2 [570 m2]), so the project achieves the credit.

Example 2. Option 3, Weighted Calculation
The project includes 3,900 ft2 (360 m2) of hardscape. The total roof area is 2,450 ft2 (230 m2), of which
200 ft2 (20 m2) is covered by mechanical equipment, making the total applicable roof area 2,250 ft2 (210 m2).
The following heat island mitigation strategies have been included in the project design:
·· 400 ft2 (35 m2) of permeable sidewalks that are 55% unbound
·· 600 ft2 (55 m2) of parking canopy covered with a vegetated roofing system
·· 1,000 ft2 (95 m2) of shading by tree canopy
·· 1,200 ft2 (110 m2) of vegetated roof
·· 400 ft2 (35 m2) of steep-sloped roof with an initial SRI of 42
·· 650 ft2 (60 m2) of steep-sloped roof with an initial SRI of 34
The project team calculates compliance using Equation 2, as follows:
400 ft2
(35 m2)
+
600 ft2
(55 m2) SRI SRI
+ 400 ft 2 42 650 ft2 34
1,000 ft2 (35 m2) × + (60 m2) × 1,200 ft2
SRI SRI
(95 m2) 39 (110 m2)
39 3,900 ft2 2,250 ft2
+ + ≥ (360 m2)
+ (210 m2)
0.5 0.75 0.75
The total calculated area of nonroof and roof mitigation strategies (6,929 ft2 [636 m2]) exceeds the total of site
hardscape and applicable roof area (6,150 ft2 [570 m2]), so the project achieves the credit.
412
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Projects outside the U.S. can contact manufacturers directly and ask for SRI information. If manufacturers do
not provide this information, the project team can identify a similar material from the Cool Roof Rating Council
standard for comparison to show that the project’s material meets the intent of the credit.
LS Indication of which heat island mitigation strategies will be used X X X
Site plan or photos showing project boundary, building footprints, roof areas, nonroof
CP CB hardscape areas, materials used, and area of each roof and nonroof measure, as X X X
applicable
CP CB Area and SR of all nonroof measures (as applicable) X X
Manufacturer’s documentation of SR or paving permeability, and supplier’s

CP CB X X
documentation of plant species
GIB
CP CB Manufacturer’s documentation of SRI X X
CP CB Slope, area, and SRI of all roof measures (as applicable) X X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

or Wetlands and Water Bodies. Reducing a site’s hardscape area to protect significant habitat, wetlands, or water
bodies will help the project earn the related credits if the land undergoes ecological restoration efforts or a long-term
management plan is in place.
Performance. Vegetated roofs help insulate buildings, and the cooler surrounding microclimate may lower a
building’s cooling load and improve energy performance. High-reflectance roofs experience less solar heat gain and
may therefore lower cooling loads (but increase heating loads in low-rise buildings in cold climates).
GIB Credit Rainwater Management. Vegetated roofs can contribute to rainwater management. Reducing a site’s
hardscape area and using open-grid paving will improve infiltration rates.

·· Vegetated roofs and high-reflectance roofs now have equal weight for calculating compliance.
·· The initial SRI thresholds for roofing material have increased.
·· Credit compliance for nonroof hardscape is now calculated using SR values instead of SRI values.
·· The credit now takes into account the three-year aged SRI values for roofing material.
413
ASTM Standards E903 and E892: astm.org
Cool Roof Rating Council Standard (CRRC-1): coolroofs.org
·· Option 1. Use any combination of the listed strategies for 100% of the nonroof site paving.
·· Option 2. Meet the required SRI value for 100% of the roof area, or install a vegetated roof for 100% of the roof
area.
·· Option 3. Calculate exemplary performance using the following equation. The value of the left side must be
equal to or greater than that of the right side.
Area of nonroof Area of high- Area of Total site Total roof

measures
+ reflectance roof
+ vegetated roof
≥ paving area
+ area
GIB
DEFINITIONS

appurtenance a built-in, nonstructural portion of a roof system. Examples include skylights, ventilators, mechanical
equipment, partitions, and solar energy panels.
heat island effect the thermal absorption by hardscape, such as dark, nonreflective pavement and buildings, and its
subsequent radiation to surrounding areas. Other contributing factors may include vehicle exhaust, air conditioners,
and street equipment. Tall buildings and narrow streets reduce airflow and exacerbate the effect.
infrared (thermal) emittance a parameter between 0 and 1 (or 0% and 100%) that indicates the ability of a material
to shed infrared radiation heat. A cool roof should have a high thermal emittance. The wavelength range for radiant
energy is roughly 5 to 40 micrometers. Most building materials (including glass) are opaque in this part of the
spectrum and have an emittance of roughly 0.9, or 90%. Clean, bare metals, such as untarnished galvanized steel,
have a low emittance and are the most important exceptions to the 0.9 rule. In contrast, aluminum roof coatings
have intermediate emittance levels. (Adapted from Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory)
open-grid pavement system pavements that consist of loose substrates supported by a grid of a more structurally
sound grid or webbing. Pervious concrete and porous asphalt are not considered open grid as they are considered
bounded materials. Unbounded, loose substrates do not transfer and store heat like bound and compacted materials
do.
solar reflectance (SR) the fraction of solar energy that is reflected by a surface on a scale of 0 to 1. Black paint has
a solar reflectance of 0; white paint (titanium dioxide) has a solar reflectance of 1. The standard technique for its
determination uses spectrophotometric measurements, with an integrating sphere to determine the reflectance
at each wavelength. The average reflectance is then determined by an averaging process, using a standard solar
spectrum, as documented by ASTM Standards E903 and E892.
solar reflectance index (SRI) a measure of the constructed surface’s ability to stay cool in the sun by reflecting solar
radiation and emitting thermal radiation. It is defined such that a standard black surface (initial solar reflectance
0.05, initial thermal emittance 0.90) has an initial SRI of 0, and a standard white surface (initial solar reflectance
0.80, initial thermal emittance 0.90) has an initial SRI of 100. To calculate the SRI for a given material, obtain its
solar reflectance and thermal emittance via the Cool Roof Rating Council Standard (CRRC-1). SRI is calculated
414
according to ASTM E 1980. Calculation of the aged SRI is based on the aged tested values of solar reflectance and
thermal emittance.
three-year aged SR or SRI value a solar reflectance or solar reflectance index rating that is measured after three
years of weather exposure
GIB
415
Solar Orientation
Plan
Built Project
1 point
GIB
INTENT
To encourage energy efficiency by creating optimum conditions for the
SOLAR ORIENTATION
use of passive and active solar strategies.
REQUIREMENTS
OPTION 1. BLOCK ORIENTATION (1 POINT)

This option is for projects that earn at least 2 points under NPD Credit Compact Development.
Design and orient the project or locate the project on existing blocks such that one axis of 75% or more of the
blocks is within ±15 degrees of geographical east-west, and the east-west lengths of those blocks are at least as long as
the north-south lengths.
OR
OPTION 2. BUILDING ORIENTATION (1 POINT)

Design and orient 75% or more of the project’s total building floor area (excluding existing buildings) such that one
axis of each qualifying building is at least 1.5 times longer than the other, and the longer axis is within 15 degrees of
geographical east-west. The length-to-width ratio applies only to walls enclosing conditioned spaces; walls enclosing
unconditioned spaces, such as garages, arcades, or porches, cannot contribute to credit achievement. The surface
area of equator-facing vertical surfaces and slopes of roofs of buildings counting toward credit achievement must not
be more than 25% shaded at the time of initial occupancy, measured at noon on the winter solstice.
416
BEHIND THE INTENT

A building’s orientation affects its ability to provide natural lighting, use the sun for passive heating, offer protection
from overheating, and deploy photovoltaic power or solar water heating. Orientation can also enhance daylight and
views, which improve the comfort and satisfaction of building occupants while reducing energy demand for lighting.
Orienting buildings for solar efficiency can be one of the most cost-effective energy savings measures used in a
project.
This credit encourages block and building forms that capitalize on a site’s solar potential. Orienting a building on
the east-west axis provides several benefits. In the northern hemisphere, north-facing exposures receive consistent
indirect daylight without glare and excessive heat gain, while southern exposures receive consistent direct sunlight
that can be filtered or shaded to provide natural lighting without heat gain and glare, or used for heating in cold
climates. Equator-facing exposures are also optimal for photovoltaic panels, solar water-heating collectors, and
other active solar applications. By contrast, a building oriented on a north-south axis will have east and west
exposures that receive changing amounts of sunlight throughout the day and therefore incur daylight, comfort, and
energy penalties in the forms of glare, increased cooling demand, and inconsistent heating loads.
GIB
STEP 1. EVALUATE SITE’S SOLAR POTENTIAL

Early in the conceptual layout and planning phases of a project, evaluate the site’s potential for taking
advantage of the sun’s energy to identify ideal locations for buildings or renewable energy systems.
Because site limitations may constrain a project’s ability to achieve solar orientation that meets the credit
requirements of one or both options, project teams should consider the following:
·· Any slopes, mountains, or significant terrain features
·· Existing street network
·· Locations of existing trees, buildings, and infrastructure
·· Waterfront, wetlands, or other natural features that should be preserved
If the area is urban or has significant obstructions, the team may find it useful to create a simplified 3D
computer model. See Further Explanation, Assessment of Solar Potential.
STEP 2. DETERMINE ACCEPTABLE ORIENTATIONS

Establish a range of orientations that will meet credit requirements by determining the geographical
east-west axis in relation to the project area.
Use true north as the reference for axes. True north (geographical north) refers to the geographic
location of the North Pole and differs from magnetic north, which moves over time because of changes in
the magnetism of Earth’s core.
STEP 3. SELECT AN OPTION

Determine the appropriate option(s) for the project.
·· Option 1 is for projects that can earn at least 2 points under NPD Credit Compact Development and
have no existing streets (or streets already oriented east-west) or will be altering street layouts. In
some cases, projects may be able to modify the existing street network to achieve the credit.
·· Option 2 is available to all projects. Projects with existing buildings may be able to achieve Option 2 by
ensuring that the equator-facing side of any new building is not shaded by existing buildings.
417
Option 1. Block Orientation
STEP 1. VERIFY THAT PROJECT WILL ACHIEVE 2 POINTS UNDER NPD CREDIT COMPACT
DEVELOPMENT
Because this option is predicated on achieving at least 2 points for compact development, teams must
have a high confidence of achievement before selecting this option. As a backup, consider tracking
achievement of Option 2 for this credit.
STEP 2. DESIGN SITE FOR OPTIMAL SOLAR ORIENTATION

Since it becomes increasingly difficult to change street orientation as the project progresses, address
this option as early as possible in the layout of the street grid. Determine how the orientation and block
length requirements of this credit can be balanced against the benefits and trade-offs with other credits.
STEP 3. IDENTIFY BLOCKS WITH OPTIMAL ORIENTATION

Identify the total number of blocks and the number of blocks that meet the both of the following criteria:
·· The block is within plus or minus 15 degrees of geographical east-west.
·· The east-west length of the block is at least as long as the north-south length.
GIB
SOLAR ORIENTATION
East-
wes
than t axis lon
north g
-sout er
h
N No greater
than 15˚
W E
Figure 1. Block orientation
STEP 4. DETERMINE PERCENTAGE OF BLOCKS WITH OPTIMAL ORIENTATION

Calculate the percentage of blocks with optimal orientation, as defined in the credit requirements,
according to Equation 1, and verify that at least 75% of blocks have optimal orientation.
EQUATION 1. Percentage of optimally oriented blocks
Blocks with optimal orientation

% blocks with optimal orientation =
Total blocks
GIBc10o1_solar orientation
418
Option 2. Building Orientation
STEP 1. DESIGN BUILDINGS FOR OPTIMAL SOLAR ORIENTATION

Starting in the conceptual design phase, consider the effects of roof slopes and orientation, window and
overhang locations, landscaping placement, and proximity to existing and planned buildings and trees
on the potential to collect solar energy. Using this evaluation of solar potential, consider how to plan
buildings such that they are orientated with the long side facing the equator, within +/- 15 degrees of
east-west.
This requirement creates opportunities to use undeveloped site setbacks as open space, locations for
gardens, or other community amenities.
STEP 2. IDENTIFY BUILDINGS THAT MEET AXIS AND ORIENTATION REQUIREMENTS

Identify all new buildings in the project that meet the both of the following criteria:
·· One axis is at least 1.5 times longer than the other.
·· The longer axis is within 15 degrees of east-west.
For buildings with variable axes, see Further Explanation, Calculations.
GIB
Non-qualifying
building
Non-qualifying
building
N Long axis no
greater than 15˚
W E
Figure 2. Building orientation
STEP 3. EVALUATE SHADING

For buildings that meet axis and orientation requirements, determine whether any portion of the
equator-facing walls or sloped roofs will be shaded by existing or planned structures or landscaping on
the winter solstice.
·· If so, determine whether more than 25% of the equator-facing surface area of each such building will
be shaded at noon on the winter solstice. See Further Explanation, Shaded Area Calculation.
·· If more than 25% of the equator-facing surface area will be shaded, even if unshaded portions are
optimally oriented, the entire building cannot contribute to credit achievement.
GIBc1o2
419
STEP 4. DETERMINE FLOOR AREA OF QUALIFYING BUILDINGS

Sum the total floor area of new buildings that meet the three requirements: east-west orientation,
axis length, and minimal shading. Calculate the percentage of these buildings’ floor area according to
Equation 2, verifying that at least 75% of new building floor area qualifies.
EQUATION 2. Percentage of solar-ready building area
Floor area of qualifying new buildings

% area with solar potential = × 100
Total floor area of all new buildings
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
GIB
Variable Axes
To determine the axis length for a nonrectangular building with variable axis lengths, use the average length of the
SOLAR ORIENTATION
two exterior walls for each axis.
Shaded Area Calculation

The surface area of an equator-facing wall that will be shaded depends on the solar altitude of the project location
at noon on the winter solstice, the height of the existing or planned structures or landscaping that will block the
sunlight on the equator-facing wall, and the distance between them.
Calculate the
Calculate the
Determine the surface area of Divide shaded
surface area of
sun angle at those that will area by total
equator-facing
noon on be shaded at equator-facing
walls and
winter solstice noon on surface area
sloped roofs
winter solstice
Figure 3. Determining shaded area

420
Roof slope C: 150 sf (14 sq m)
Roof slope B: 100 sf (9 sq m)
Wall B: 250 sf (23 sq m)
Shaded wall and roof area
15˚
N
GIB
W E
S
Equator
Shaded wall area

Wall A: 500 sf (47 sq m)
Roof slope A: 450 sf (42 sq m)
Total surface area of equator-facing walls and roof slopes: 1,450 sf (135 sq m)
Shaded wall and roof area: 280 sf (26 sq m) = 18%
Figure 4. Calculating shaded area
EQUATION 3. Percentage of shaded area on equator-facing wall and sloped roof
Surface area shaded at noon on winter solstice

% shaded surface area = × 100
Total area of equator-facing surfaces
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations GIB ?
GIBc Solar Orientation
ASSESSMENT OF SOLAR POTENTIAL

Sunlight may be limited by shading from trees, existing buildings, terrain, or other features, as well as by local
weather or climate. Conversely, vegetation, open space, and large bodies of water may moderate temperatures,
reduce heating and cooling demand, and improve the efficiency of passive and active solar designs. Simulation and
modeling programs can help teams account for such effects.
After making a preliminary assessment of sunlight, shading, and site features, the project team should review
local regulations for any impediments to solar applications. Using a base map of site constraints and opportunities,
the team can then develop or adjust the site plan to achieve optimal solar orientation, long east-west axes, and
minimal shading of equator-facing surfaces.
421
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Design considerations for north or south faces of buildings apply to the northern hemisphere. In the southern
hemisphere, they are the opposite.
Some benefits of the solar orientation required in the credit may become less effective at project locations
below 25 degrees latitude, since the location of the sun in the sky is increasingly overhead as one nears the equator,
minimizing the difference between north and south building faces.
LS CP CB Calculation of qualifying blocks as percentage of total blocks X
CP CB Site plan indicating orientation of blocks and block lengths X
LS CP CB Calculation of qualifying floor area as percentage of total floor area X
CP CB Site plan indicating relative orientation of buildings and lengths X
GIB
RELATED CREDIT TIPS
SOLAR ORIENTATION
Performance. Building orientation can reduce energy loads, thereby contributing to the achievement of the related
prerequisite and credit.
GIB Credit Renewable Energy Production. Building orientation can affect energy loads, directly affecting the
amount of renewable energy needed to reach a set percentage threshold for the related credit.

None.
None.
·· For Option 1, meet the credit requirements for 95% or more of blocks.
·· For Option 2, meet the credit requirements for 95% or more of the project’s total building floor area.
DEFINITIONS
None.
422
423
Renewable Energy
Production
Plan
Built Project
1–3 points
GIB
INTENT
RENEWABLE ENERGY PRODUCTION

To reduce the environmental and economic harms associated with fossil
fuel energy by increasing self-supply of renewable energy.
REQUIREMENTS
Incorporate on-site nonpolluting renewable energy generation, such as solar, wind, geothermal, small-scale or
micro-hydroelectric, or biomass, with production capacity of at least 5% of the project’s annual electrical and
thermal energy cost (exclusive of existing buildings).
Points are awarded according to Table 1.
TABLE 1. Points for renewable energy production
Percentage of annual electrical

Points
and thermal energy cost
5% 1
12.5% 2
20% 3
424
BEHIND THE INTENT

Renewable energy generation can reduce carbon emissions and offer local environmental benefits by reducing air
pollution. Some renewable energy systems capture wind or sunlight; others usefully employ materials that might
otherwise be wasted. Renewable energy produced on site protects projects from energy price volatility and reliance
on the grid while reducing wasted energy lost in transmission. Ultimately, renewable energy production contributes
to reducing a country’s demand for imported energy. This credit encourages new, on-site renewable energy systems
developed in the neighborhood.
STEP 1. EXPLORE OPPORTUNITIES FOR RENEWABLES

Determine the most abundant renewable resources on site, such as sunlight, wind, or water, and explore
opportunities for using renewable fuels, such as waste wood or biomass (see Further Explanation,
Renewable Resource Considerations).
GIB
STEP 2. COMPARE REQUIREMENTS FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS

Carefully evaluate the space requirements, costs, financial incentives, and efficiencies for each potential
technology.
·· Local funding, financing, and incentives for renewable generation projects may be available for certain
technologies and may be a significant factor.

·· Creating a central community system or tying into an existing system may lower cost barriers through
economies of scale, because unit costs may decrease as system sizes increase. Community systems
can also take advantage of time-shifted demand.
·· Systems producing on-site renewable electrical power should be designed to facilitate net metering—
in which power delivered to the grid offsets the customer’s electricity consumption and generates a
credit on the customer’s utility bill—whenever the renewable energy system output exceeds the site’s
demand. Ask local utilities and electric service providers about incentive and rebate programs.
·· A few systems that are sometimes considered renewable do not qualify for this credit (see Further
Explanation, Eligible Renewable Energy Systems).
STEP 3. SET RENEWABLE ENERGY TARGET

To establish the size of the renewable energy system, estimate the annual energy cost for the project.
·· In early project phases, teams whose building types are covered by the U.S. Department of Energy’s
Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS) may use the database to estimate annual
energy usage.
·· For residential buildings, both multifamily and single family, teams may use data from the Residential
Energy Consumption Survey of the U.S. Energy Information Administration (EIA).
·· For nonresidential building types that are not covered by the CBECS database, the preliminary energy
model (see Appendix 4, Developing a Preliminary Energy Model) can roughly project energy usage.
Use the EIA energy rate to estimate the preliminary energy cost of the project.
·· For projects pursuing Certified Built Project, the approach depends on how a team achieved GIB
Prerequisite Minimum Building Energy Performance (and GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy
Performance, if pursued):
°° Teams that used energy modeling must base annual energy cost on the whole-building simulation
results (see Further Explanation, Example 1).
°° Teams that used a prescriptive path must use the CBECS data to estimate annual energy use and
then calculate associated costs (see Further Explanation, Example 2). If the project has multiple
building types, calculate energy consumption and cost for each type.
°° For Group 2 buildings (single-family and multifamily buildings three stories and less), if GIB Credit
Optimize Building Energy Performance is not pursued, teams that followed a prescriptive approach
in the prerequisite should take energy use data from EIA’s Residential Energy Consumption Survey.
–– Teams that used energy modeling must estimate the energy cost based on predicted energy use.
Add the energy consumption for these buildings to the energy consumption modeled for other
project buildings (e.g., commercial and high-rise residential buildings).
425
–– The same rate structure used for the other buildings and for renewable energy cost is used to find
the residential energy cost (i.e., the virtual rate, EIA rate, or actual utility rate).
The annual energy cost of all new buildings and buildings undergoing major renovations must be
counted.
·· Use either the space available for renewable power generation systems or the budget available for
renewable systems as the starting point to estimate the maximum number of points for this credit.
·· To qualify toward achievement, the benefits (i.e., the environmental credits or renewable energy
certificates) associated with the renewable energy that the project generates must be retained or
used on site—within the LEED project boundary—or if they are sold, the project must purchase an
equivalent amount (see Further Explanation, Renewable Energy Certificates and Carbon Offsets).
STEP 4. DESIGN AND SPECIFY SYSTEM CRITERIA

Many resources are available, some for no or little cost, for planning and designing a renewable energy
system. Given basic information for the project, many manufacturers can complete the necessary
calculations for the project team. Teams will also find software tools that help in sizing.
STEP 5. CALCULATE RENEWABLE ENERGY COST CONTRIBUTION

If any new buildings and any Group 1 buildings undergoing major renovations as part of the project were
excluded from GIB Prerequisite Minimum Building Energy Performance, their energy cost and building
area must now be included; otherwise, use the same values as in that prerequisite. Use Equation 1, and
exclude from the calculations any existing Group 1 buildings not undergoing major renovations and any
existing Group 2 buildings.
GIB
EQUATION 1. Total annual energy cost
Energy cost from GIB Prerequisite

Total annual electric × Total building floor area

and thermal cost
=
Building floor area from GIB Prerequisite
Use Equation 2 to estimate the annual energy cost of the usable energy produced by the renewable
energy system and calculate its percentage of the total energy cost. Refer to Table 1 to determine the
points earned.
EQUATION 2. Percentage renewable energy cost contribution
Equivalent cost of usable energy produced

% renewable by renewable energy system
energy cost
= × 100
Total energy cost (from Equation 1)
Usable energy is defined as the output energy from the system less any transmission and conversion
losses, such as standby heat loss or losses when converting electricity from DC to AC.
The project may use the virtual energy rate or the actual utility rates (see Further Explanation, Equivalent
Cost for Renewable Energy).
426
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
RENEWABLE RESOURCE CONSIDERATIONS

Using web resources and other tools, the project team should assess the feasibility of renewable systems given
the site’s climate, context, and infrastructure. Consider solar availability, wind patterns, and other renewable
energy sources and any seasonal or daily variations in supply. Consider the land or roof areas needed to
accommodate the renewable systems. Rural communities may benefit from the economic development that wind
farms and biomass conversion facilities may bring.
Match the project’s energy needs with renewable energy output when selecting a renewable system. For example,
a sunny site is a good candidate for solar thermal hot water, but this type of renewable resource is most cost-effective
if the buildings have a constant demand for hot water. Accordingly, multifamily buildings may be a better match
for a solar thermal hot water system than office buildings. Daily and seasonal variations in loads also factor into the
investigation of renewable energy.
ELIGIBLE RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS

GIB
Allowable sources for renewable energy include the following:

·· Photovoltaic (PV)
·· Solar thermal
·· Wind
·· Low-impact hydroelectricity
·· Wave and tidal energy
·· Geothermal energy (in some cases)
·· Biofuel (in some cases)
Geothermal energy, such as electricity generated from subterranean steam or heat generated from subterranean
steam or hot water, is eligible. However, geothermal energy used in conjunction with vapor compression cycles, as in
a ground-source heat pump, is not.
If a biofuel is used in a cogeneration plant that produces both electricity and heat, both of these energy uses count
as renewable energy. A biofuel used in a boiler to produce heat also qualifies. However, not all biofuels meet the
intent of this credit. The following biofuels are ineligible:
·· Combustion of municipal solid waste
·· Forest biomass waste other than mill residue
·· Wood coated with paints, plastics, or laminate
·· Wood treated for preservation with materials containing halogens, chlorine compounds, halide compounds,
chromated copper arsenate, or arsenic; if more than 1% of the wood fuel has been treated with these
compounds, the energy system is ineligible
Some renewable energy systems do not meet the intent of the credit and are not eligible. Strategies like architectural
features, passive solar, and daylighting, for example, reduce energy consumption but are not eligible renewable
energy systems.
RENEWABLE ENERGY CERTIFICATES AND CARBON OFFSETS

The environmental benefits from renewable energy generation are certified and tracked through renewable energy
certificates (RECs). A third party ensures that a specific amount of power was generated by a renewable source. By
purchasing RECs, a project that is using nonrenewable energy can still stimulate demand for green power.
427
Carbon offsets allow buildings or companies to fund activities that decrease carbon emissions or remove carbon
from the atmosphere. Carbon offset projects include reforestation, carbon sequestration, energy efficiency projects,
and land-use changes.
Generating renewable energy has both environmental and financial benefits, and projects must retain both
benefits for the buildings or land within the project boundary to be eligible for this credit. Some utilities or third-
party entities may grant a rebate to projects that generate their own renewable energy and also require that they
give up the rights to the renewable attributes (i.e., RECs) associated with the generation. If so, a project can still
claim this credit by purchasing enough renewable attributes (RECs or carbon offsets) to make up for the renewable
attributes that were sold or given away. In such cases, projects that are generating electricity are required to purchase
Green-e–certified RECs; projects that are generating thermal energy or replacing other nonelectric energy sources
are required to purchase Green-e Climate–certified carbon offsets.
EQUIVALENT COST OF RENEWABLE ENERGY

The equivalent cost of the usable energy system can be calculated in one of three ways.
Virtual rate. The project team may use the virtual energy rate determined by the proposed building energy model
used for GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy Performance. The virtual rate accounts for both consumption and
demand charges.
EIA rate. The Energy Information Administration, an agency of the U.S. Department of Energy, publishes average
GIB
annual energy costs for building types and locations. Project teams that used the EIA rates in the energy model must
also use them to determine the renewable energy system cost.
Actual rate plus demand. The expected savings in both consumption and demand charges can be based on the rates

charged by the utility that serves the project. Project teams that used utility rates in the energy model must also use
them for this credit. If more than one rate was used in the model, calculate a weighted average rate from the modeled
buildings to determine the renewable energy cost. If a project is served by a utility that uses time-dependent
valuation to set rates, the team may use those rates but must provide hourly calculations for the value of generated
energy to determine the cost savings from the renewable energy systems. Some modeling software may calculate the
savings from renewable energy systems if the utility rates include consumption, demand, time-dependent valuation,
time-of-use, ratchets, and other factors.

Project teams must calculate how much energy the renewable energy system will produce. With some technologies,
like a biofuel-fired boiler, modeling software can determine the amount of energy generated. In other cases, such as
PV or wind systems, the amount may be determined by using an external calculation program. In either case, provide
all assumptions and outputs associated with the renewable energy calculations. For systems that do not involve net
metering, such as solar hot water systems, the renewable energy calculations must show that the project’s hourly
loads are aligned with the renewable energy generation.
EXAMPLES
Example 1. Project with complete energy modeling data
A project comprises new multifamily residential buildings, retail buildings, and 50 single-family buildings. The
project team installed a PV system and has completed energy models for GIB Credit Optimize Energy Performance.
Of the new multifamily residential and retail building floor area, 950,000 of the 1,000,000 square feet was included
in the GIB Credit Optimize Energy Performance model, which predicted a total annual energy consumption of
5,624,570 kWh of electricity and 296,500 therms of natural gas. The total floor area of the single-family buildings is
90,000 square feet, and all these buildings were modeled for GIB Credit Optimize Energy Performance. The total
428
annual energy consumption of all the single-family buildings is 542,750 kWh of electricity and 30,000 therms of
natural gas. The virtual energy rates are $0.082 per kWh of electricity and $0.675 per therm of natural gas. The total
building annual energy cost is as follows:
Gas consumption Electricity consumption Project total

× Gas rate + × Electricity rate × building floor area
Total
cost
=
Energy model building floor area
296,500 30,000 5,624,570 542,750

therms therms kWh kWh 1,000,000
× + × + × + × × + 90,000
$0.675/ $0.675/ $0.082/ $0.082/ ft2
therm therm kWh kWh
Total
cost
=
950,000 + 90,000 ft2
GIB
Total
cost
= $220,388 + $505,720 × 1.048 = $761,016
The project has space on site for a 450-kW PV array. Based on calculations provided by the solar array installer, the
system will produce 656,150 kWh of electricity per year, after transmission and conversion losses. The project team
calculates the equivalent cost of the renewable energy generated:
Equivalent Units of renewable Project utility or virtual rate for

cost
= energy generated
× type of energy generated
Equivalent
cost
= 656,150 kW × $0.082/kWh = $53,804
The project can now calculate its renewable energy as a percentage of the total:
$53,804
% renewable
energy
= × 100 = 7.07%
$761,016
Example 2. Project without energy modeling data

A commercial infill project includes several new office buildings totaling 750,000 square feet. The project is
complying with GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy Performance through the prescriptive path and is installing
an on-site renewable energy system. To achieve this credit, the team must determine the total annual energy cost
429
for all buildings. The project will have gas and electricity service. Local utility rates are $1.10 per therm of natural
gas and $0.09 per kWh of electricity. Using data from CBECS (Table 2), the project can estimate its annual energy
consumption by fuel type for the buildings.
Electricity cost is estimated as follows:
Electricity cost = (Electricity kWh/ft2 for space type × Project area × Project electricity rate)
Electricity cost = (17.3 kWh/ft2 × 750,000 ft2 × $0.09/kWh)
Electricity cost = $1,167,750
The project’s gas cost can be estimated in the same manner:
Gas cost = (Nonelectric kBtu/ft2 for space type × Project area × [1 therm / 100 kBtu]
× Project gas rate)
Gas cost = (34 kBtu/ft2 × 750,000 ft2 × [1 therm / 100 kBtu] × $1.10 / Therm)
Gas cost = $280,500
TABLE 2. CBECS building energy intensity data
GIB
Total energy consumption Total electric energy consumption Total nonelectric
(CBECS Table C3) (CBECS Table C14) energy consumption
Building Type
kBtu/ft2 kBtu/m2 kBtu/ft2 kBtu/m2 kBtu/ft2 kBtu/m2

Education 83.1 262.2 11 118.4 45.5 143.6
Food sales 199.7 630.1 49.4 531.8 194.6 614
Food service 258.3 814.9 38.4 413.3 127.4 401.9
Health care inpatient 249.2 786.2 27.5 296.0 155.5 490.6
Health care outpatient 94.6 298.5 16.1 173.3 39.6 124.9
Lodging 100 315.5 13.5 145.3 53.9 170.1
Retail (nonmall) 73.9 233.2 14.3 153.9 25.1 79.2
Enclosed and strip malls 102.2 322.4 22.3 240.0 26.2 82.7
Office 92.9 293.1 17.3 186.2 34 107.3
Public Assembly 93.9 296.3 12.5 134.6 51.3 161.9
Public order and safety 115.8 365.3 15.3 164.7 63.5 200.3
Religoius worship 43.5 137.2 4.9 52.7 26.9 84.9
Service 77 242.9 11 118.4 39.5 124.6
Warehouse and storage 45.2 142.6 7.6 81.8 19.3 60.9
Other 164.4 518.7 22.5 242.2 87.6 276.4
Source: Energy Information Administration (EIA).

430
The project’s total annual building energy cost is the sum of the electricity and gas costs, or $1,448,250. The building
site has space for a 700-kW solar array, which is estimated to produce 921,250 kWh of electricity per year, after
transmission and conversion losses. The project’s equivalent cost of usable energy is calculated as follows:
Equivalent Units of renewable Project utility rate for type

cost
= energy generated
× of energy generated
Equivalent
cost
= 921,250 kWh × $0.09/kW = $82,913
The project can now calculate its renewable energy as a percentage of the total:
$82,913
% renewable
energy
= × 100 = 5.7%
$1,448,250
GIB
Description of renewable energy systems, explanation of calculation method used to estimate annual
LS CP CB X
energy generated, and estimation of percentage of annual energy cost offset by renewables
CB Renewable system’s rated capacity X
CB Calculations to determine renewable energy generated and equivalent cost X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

GIB Credit Certified Green Buildings. Renewable energy may help project buildings achieve certification under a
green building rating system.
GIB Credit Minimum Building Energy Performance. Energy costs offset by on-site renewable energy systems do
not count toward energy savings for compliance with the prerequisite.
GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy Performance. Renewable energy may be included to achieve the related
credit.

None.
431
Center for Resource Solutions Green-e Program: green-e.org
Commercial Building Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS): eia.gov/consumption/commercial/
Residential Energy Consumption Survey (RECS): eia.gov/consumption/residential/
Use renewable energy to account for 27.5% of the total energy cost.
DEFINITIONS
None.
GIB
432
433
District Heating
and Cooling
Plan
Built Project
2 points
GIB
INTENT
DISTRICT HEATING AND COOLING

To encourage the development of energy-efficient neighborhoods by
employing district heating and cooling strategies that reduce energy
use and energy-related environmental harms.
REQUIREMENTS
Incorporate a district heating and/or cooling system for space conditioning and/or water heating of new buildings
(at least two buildings total) such that at least 80% of the project’s annual heating and/or cooling consumption is
provided by the district plant. Single-family residential buildings and existing buildings of any type may be excluded
from the calculation.
Each system component that is addressed by ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010 must have an
overall efficiency performance at least 10% better than that specified by the standard’s mandatory requirements.
Additionally, annual district pumping energy consumption that exceeds 2.5% of the annual thermal energy
output of the heating and cooling plant must be offset by increases in the component’s efficiency beyond the 10%
improvement. If a combined heat and power (CHP) system is used to comply with the credit requirements, show
equivalence by demonstrating that energy consumption savings from the CHP plant at least equal the energy savings
that would result from using a conventional district energy system with components that are 10% better than ANSI/
ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010. When determining equivalency, take into account the pumping energy as
described above.
434
BEHIND THE INTENT

A district heating and cooling system provides heating (through steam or hot water) and/or cooling (through chilled
water) to multiple buildings from a central plant. A central plant can offer several advantages: increased efficiency
from larger equipment, simplified fuel distribution logistics, and reduced construction and maintenance costs.
Buildings connected to central plants require smaller mechanical rooms, have no heat rejection noise, and avoid
noise and emissions from fuel delivery vehicles.
Another benefit of a central plant is that it allows heating and cooling equipment to be sized for a coincident peak
load instead of individual buildings’ peak loads, thereby reducing the overall mechanical system capacity. This can
be especially effective when the central plant supports facilities with differing usage patterns, such as residential and
commercial office spaces. Strategies like smart controls, energy demand management, and heat recovery systems
can be implemented at scale in a central plant rather than per building. However, district heating and cooling does
require infrastructure—the installation of distribution networks among buildings.
A district energy system (DES) requires coordination between groups of nearby buildings. When multiple
buildings are being planned at the same time, designers can select building HVAC systems that use steam, hot water,
and chilled water to ensure that the buildings are compatible with a DES. The energy usage of multiple buildings can
be estimated to judge savings and return on investment. In some cases, long-term power purchase agreements with
energy service companies can finance mechanical equipment, allowing developers to leverage their funds.
GIB
STEP 1. DETERMINE MINIMUM SIZE OF DISTRICT ENERGY SYSTEM

Estimate the size of a potential DES by considering the heating, cooling, and water-heating loads for all
eligible buildings within the project scope.
·· Teams that used energy modeling to achieve GIB Prerequisite Minimum Building Energy Performance
can take the simulated building loads and use modeling to demonstrate the required 10% efficiency
improvement (see Further Explanation, Path 2).
·· Additional resources, such as historical building energy use data from existing on-site buildings and
the Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS) building energy consumption data
from the Energy Information Administration (EIA), can provide estimated energy consumption for a
variety of building types.
·· For specialized or unique projects, preliminary energy calculations or modeling can be used to
estimate total energy demand. The thermal requirements should include energy for heating, cooling,
and domestic hot water uses.
·· If the team is considering a combined heat and power (CHP) system, ensure that the efficiency
requirements are met (see Further Explanation, Combined Heat and Power Implementation).
·· Single-family residential buildings and existing buildings can be excluded from the DES sizing
calculations. However, including single-family and existing buildings in the DES system may increase
the opportunities for energy savings.
·· The proposed system must be capable of meeting at least 80% of the project’s annual thermal
requirements.
°° The system does not need to be sized for 80% of the peak heating, cooling, and water heating load
but must be able to satisfy at least 80% of the annual thermal load.
°° In some instances, a qualifying DES may provide significantly less than 80% of the peak, depending
on the operation schedules.
STEP 2. REVIEW SIZE AND EFFICIENCY OF ANY EXISTING SYSTEM

Identify any existing DES to which the project could connect.
·· Verify that it has sufficient capacity to meet the heating and/or cooling threshold.
·· Ensure that it also meets the credit’s efficiency requirements. If it does not meet the efficiency or
performance requirements, it cannot be counted toward this credit. See Further Explanation, Path 1
and Path 2.
435
If a district energy system exists but does not meet the efficiency requirements, the credit may be
achieved if all eligible equipment is upgraded to meet the efficiency requirements. Alternatively, the
system may comply by demonstrating a 10% overall improvement. See Further Explanation, Path 2.
STEP 3. DESIGN NEW DISTRICT ENERGY SYSTEM, IF NECESSARY

Where no DES exists, or the existing DES cannot be adapted to meet the size or efficiency criteria,
evaluate the feasibility of a new system.
Select equipment that exceeds ASHRAE 90.1–2010 mandatory requirements. Factors to consider include
the following:
·· Space for the equipment
·· Expected savings versus the cost of distribution infrastructure
·· Ability to meet efficiency and performance requirements
°° Many projects will be able to comply with this credit prescriptively by selecting more efficient
equipment than specified by ASHRAE 90.1–2010.
°° See Further Explanation, Determining DES Component Efficiencies Example.
In a preliminary analysis, teams should use energy modeling or calculations to determine the estimated
pumping load. If district pumping energy consumption exceeds 2.5% of the annual thermal energy output
of the DES, the efficiency of the DES components should be increased until the pumping consumption is
2.5% or lower.
·· If the team does not use energy modeling to determine the estimated pumping energy load, account
for at least the following in the calculations:
°° Pump power at full load for each distribution loop (primary, secondary, etc.) for chilled water, hot
GIB
water, steam, CHP, or condenser water, as applicable
°° Pump curves for all variable-volume pumps
°° For constant-volume pumps, estimated annual hours of operation
°° For variable-volume pumps, estimated annual hours of operation at each part-load range (i.e., 10%,

20%, 30%) matched with variable-speed curves for each part-load range
·· For constant-volume pumps, multiply the full-load pump power by the estimated annual hours of
operation to obtain the annual pumping energy load.
·· For variable-volume pumps, calculate the estimated annual hours of operation at the corresponding
position on the part-load pump curves to yield the annual pumping energy load for variable-volume
pumps.
STEP 4. COMPARE ENERGY CONSUMPTION SAVINGS

If a CHP system is used in tandem with a DES, demonstrate that the energy consumption savings from
the CHP system are greater than or equal to the energy consumption savings that would result from
using a conventional DES consisting of water-cooled electric chillers and/or boilers (as applicable) with
components that are 10% more efficient than ASHRAE 90.1–2010. The project team may show energy
consumption savings by using either site energy or source energy as a basis of comparison. If using
source energy, include the referenced data used to determine the total source energy ratio. Various
resources are available, including ENERGY STAR’s Portfolio Manager Technical Reference: Source Energy.
When the team is determining equivalency, the pumping energy for both scenarios must be taken into
account and must consume less than 2.5% of the annual thermal energy output of the CHP plant. See
Further Explanation, Combined Heat and Power Implementation.
STEP 5. CHOOSE METHOD FOR DEMONSTRATING IMPROVED PERFORMANCE

·· Path 1, Efficiency Requirements for DES Equipment, is a prescriptive approach in which teams select
equipment with high efficiency ratings.
·· Path 2, Comprehensive System Energy Simulation, uses energy modeling to confirm the required
improvement in efficiency.
See Further Explanation, Path 1 and Path 2.
436
FURTHER EXPLANATION
PATH 1. EFFICIENCY REQUIREMENTS FOR DES EQUIPMENT

All eligible equipment installed as part of the DES system must have an overall efficiency performance at least 10%
better than the mandatory requirements of ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Sections 6.4 and 7.4. Efficiency values in ASHRAE
90.1–2010 are given in various units—energy efficiency ratio (EER), coefficient of performance (COP), kW/ton—
which affect how the team will calculate the 10% improvement.
·· For efficiency ratings that are expressed as a percentage, such as combustion efficiency, a higher numeric value
represents higher efficiency. The efficiency improvement is calculated as follows:
10% improved efficiency = Minimum efficiency × 1.1
Example: A gas-fired boiler’s minimum efficiency is 80%.
10% improved efficiency = 80% × 1.1 = 88%
·· For efficiency ratings that are expressed as a ratio, such as kW/ton, a lower numeric value represents a higher
efficiency. The efficiency improvement is calculated as follows:
10% improved efficiency = Minimum efficiency × 0.9
Example: A water-cooled chiller’s minimum efficiency is 0.576 kW/ton and 0.549 IPLV.
GIB
10% improved efficiency = 0.576 kW/ton × 0.9 = 0.518 kW/ton
10% improved efficiency = 0.549 IPLV × 0.9 = 0.494 IPLV

·· If the efficiency is listed as COP or EER, the 10% improvement would be a higher number, or 1.1 times the
minimum efficiency.
ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Table 6.8.1C, allows two paths (Path A or Path B) regarding minimum efficiency for water
chilling packages. To comply with the intent of this credit, a 10% efficiency improvement over either path may be
used. If efficiency values are given for full- and part-load conditions (kW/ton and IPLV), both values must meet the
10% performance improvement.
Example Determination of DES Component Efficiencies

A planned multifamily residential development in Colorado is evaluating a district energy system. All 10
buildings—100% of the project—will be connected to a central plant providing hot and chilled water. The
preliminary energy analysis indicates that the annual thermal output from the plant will be approximately 10,100
MMBtus (10,664 GJ) for heating and 2,000 MMBtus (2,110 GJ) for cooling. The pumping energy required for
distribution is estimated at 150 MMBtus (158 GJ).
The project will be using natural gas-fired boilers and electric centrifugal chillers.
Total energy = 12,100 MMBtus (12,776 GJ)
2.5% of total energy = 302.5 MMBtu (319 GJ)
Pump energy at 150 MMBtu (158 GJ) is less than 2.5% of total energy
Since the pumping energy is less than 2.5% of the total energy consumption, each piece of equipment will be required
to exceed the efficiencies of ASHRAE 90.1–2010 by only 10%.
437
Boiler
For the boilers, each of which will be larger than 2,500,000 Btu/h (732 kW), the minimum efficiency specified by
ASHRAE 90. 2010 Table 6.8.1F is 82% Ec. To determine a 10% improvement, the team multiplies the minimum
efficiency by 1.1:
10% improved efficiency = 82% Ec × 1.1 = 90.2% Ec
The project team must select boilers with an efficiency of at least 90.2% Ec.
Chiller
Each chiller is expected to be larger than 300 tons (1,055 kW) but less than 600 tons (2,110 kW), and the minimum
efficiency specified by Table 6.8.1C (Path A) is 0.576 kW/ton and 0.549 IPLV. The project must select equipment with
a 10% improvement in both figures. To determine a 10% improvement, the team multiplies the minimum efficiency
by 0.9. For kW/ton, for example,
10% improved efficiency = (0.576 kW/ton × 0.9) = 0.518 kW/ton
Selecting electric centrifugal chillers with full-load efficiency of 0.518 kW/ton and 0.494 IPLV will satisfy the
requirements of this credit.
GIB
Combined Heat and Power (CHP) Implementation
Fossil fuel–powered plants in the U.S. are on average only 32% efficient1: approximately two-thirds of the energy used
to produce power is wasted. Installing an on-site power generation system allows the project to take advantage of the
waste heat from the generation process—heat that is not available to municipal power customers. The total power

used by a plant to generate power, divided by the actual power produced, is known as source-to-site ratio. Figure 1
illustrates the source-to-site ratios for various fuel types.
Energy Type U.S. Ratio Canadian Ratio
Electricty (Grid Purchase) 3.14 2.05
Electricity (On-Site Solar or Wind Installation) 1.00 1.00
Natural Gas 1.05 1.02
Fuel Oil (1, 2, 4, 5, 6, Diesel, Kerosene) 1.01 1.01
Propane & Liquid Propane 1.01 1.03
Steam 1.20 1.20
Hot Water 1.20 1.20
Chilled Water 1.00 0.71
Wood 1.00 1.00
Coal/Coke 1.00 1.00
Other 1.00 1.00
Figure 1. Source-to-site ratios from ENERGY STAR Portfolio Manager, by energy type 2
1 .
http://www.epa.gov/chp/basic/efficiency.html
2 http://www.energystar.gov/buildings/tools-and-resources/portfolio-manager-technical-reference-source-energy
438
If the project’s DES will include CHP equipment, the team must ensure that the energy consumption savings for
the CHP plant are greater than or equal to the energy savings associated with installing equipment that is 10% more
efficient than required by ASHRAE 90.1–2010. The project team may demonstrate energy consumption savings in
terms of site or source energy.
Example of Qualifying CHP Plant

A CHP system recovers waste heat for both heating hot water and driving absorption chillers. The conventional
system for this application would be natural gas hot water boilers and water-cooled electric centrifugal chillers (or
screw chillers for smaller applications). The team refers to ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G, to establish the appropriate
conventional system for comparison with the project application.
An energy model or bin-hours spreadsheet is used to calculate the energy consumption based on the generator
efficiency curves and the chilled-water and hot-water efficiency curves for the proposed design. A similar energy
model or bin-hours spreadsheet is used to calculate the performance of the conventional case.
Minimally efficient DES plant. After preliminary analysis of all the buildings in the project, the team has calculated
that the total site energy consumption for a DES system with ASHRAE minimum-efficiency equipment is 15,000
MMBtu (15,838 GJ). The energy consumption per fuel is as follows:
Electricity = 5,000 MMBtu (5,280 GJ)
Fuel = 10,000 MMBtu (10,558 GJ)

GIB
When the source-to-site ratios (Figure 1) are factored in, the total source energy consumption for the project is
26,200 MMBtu (27,663 GJ):
Electricity: 15,700 MMBtu (3.14 × 5,000 MMBtu) (16,577 GJ)

Fuel: 10,500 MMBtu (1.05 × 10,000 MMBtu) (11,086 GJ)
DES plant with efficiency upgrades. With 10% efficiency upgrades for all required DES components, the total site
energy consumption for the plant is 13,500 MMBtu (14,254 GJ):
Electricity = 4,600 MMBtu (4,857 GJ)
Fuel = 8,900 MMBtu (9,397 GJ)
Total site energy consumption savings: 15,000 MMBtu (15,838 GJ) – 13,500 MMBtu (14,254 GJ) =
1,500 MMBtu (1,584 GJ)
Total source energy consumption savings: 26,200 MMBtu (27,663 GJ) – 23,800 MMBtu (25,129 GJ)
= 2,400 MMBtu (2,534 GJ)
Proposed CHP plant. The proposed CHP plant, with on-site electricity generation, absorption chillers, and
supplemental heating, is an economically viable option:
Electricity: 0 MMBtu (all electricity is now produced on site)
Fuel: 18,000 MMBtu (19,005 GJ)
The total plant site energy consumption is 18,000 MMBtu (19,005 GJ), which is greater than the site energy
consumption of the DES plant with efficiency upgrades. The plant does not qualify for this credit based on site
energy; however, because of the production of on-site electricity and the low source-site ratio for fuel (natural gas in
this example), the source energy is 18,900 MMBtu (19,955 GJ):
Fuel: 18,000 MMBtu (19,005 GJ) × 1.05 = 18,900 MMBtu (19,955 GJ)
This example CHP plant therefore earns the credit.
PATH 2. COMPREHENSIVE SYSTEM ENERGY SIMULATION

Use an energy simulation model to demonstrate that the proposed DES plant shows an annual energy cost savings
improvement of 10% or greater over a DES plant with minimally compliant equipment. The project team may show
439
compliance by demonstrating a 10% improvement in average efficiency for district cooling and district heating (as
applicable) using Option 1, Path 2 (Full DES Performance Accounting), or Path 3 (Streamlined DES Modeling),
described in Appendix 4, District Energy Systems.
Under Compliance Path 2, the proposed average efficiency must be 10% better than the baseline case average
efficiencies shown in Tables 1 and 2, based on the system sizes.
TABLE 1. Baseline chilled water average efficiencies
Minimum CHW peak load in this range

Average COP
(tons) (kW)
0 0 4.05
65 230 4.12
130 460 4.29
260 920 4.64
520 1,830 4.54
1,043 3,670 4.98
COP = coefficient of performance
GIB
TABLE 2. Baseline heating average efficiencies
Minimum heating peak load

Average fuel COP Average electrical COP

(Btu/h) (kW)
0 0 0.8 270
240,000 88 0.8 460
2,000,000 733 0.82 460
COP = coefficient of performance
For CHP plants, use Path 2. Calculate the total baseline source energy consumption using Equation 1, based on the
total annual estimated proposed chilled water and heating generated by the district plant.
EQUATION 1. Total baseline source energy consumption
Baseline Baseline
chilled heating
Source- Source-
Total baseline water load load
site site
source energy = × efficiency
+ × efficiency
consumption Average Average
chilled ratio fuel ratio
water COP heating CO
If the team is pursuing this option, the DES plant does not need to meet the efficiency requirements of
Compliance Path 1, Minimum Equipment Efficiency Requirements. However, ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Tables 6.8.1C and
6.8.1F, mandatory efficiency requirements must still be met. See Appendix 4 for guidance on modeling the baseline
and proposed DES plant equipment.
Under Path 3, the proposed average efficiency must be 10% better than the baseline average efficiency for both
the chilled water and the heating systems (as applicable) for all buildings reported.
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
If ASHRAE 90.1 is not applicable, minimum efficiency requirements can be met with a USGBC-approved equivalent
standard.
440
LS CP CB Description of DES schematic, size, and other design parameters X
LS CP CB Percentage of energy supplied by the DES X
CP CB Calculations demonstrating that DES exceeds ASHRAE 90.1–2010 requirements by 10% X
CP CB Comparison of CHP consumption savings with DES savings (if applicable) X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

Performance. Building energy performance will influence the size of the district heating and cooling system.
GIB Credit Solar Orientation. The orientation of the buildings served by the district energy system may have a
GIB
marked effect on their thermal loads. Passive solar strategies may reduce the total thermal requirements of the DES.

The referenced standard was updated from ASHRAE 90.1–2007 to 90.1–2010.
ASHRAE 90.1–2010: ashrae.org
Meet 95% of the project’s annual heating and/or cooling consumption through district energy and demonstrate
individual DES component efficiencies or performance improvement at least 20% better than ASHRAE 90.1–2010.
DEFINITIONS
None.
441
Infrastructure
Energy Efficiency
Plan
Built Project
1 point
GIB
INTENT
INFRASTRUCTURE ENERGY EFFICIENCY

To reduce the environmental harms from energy used for operating
public infrastructure.
REQUIREMENTS
Design, purchase, or work with the municipality to install all new infrastructure (e.g., traffic lights, street lights,
water and wastewater pumps) to achieve a 15% annual energy reduction below an estimated baseline energy use for
this infrastructure. When determining the baseline, assume the use of lowest first-cost infrastructure items.
442
BEHIND THE INTENT

Approximately 3% to 4% of energy use in the United States is for water and wastewater infrastructure,1 and 1% is used
for street lighting.2 Energy costs for street lighting can account for about a third of local governments’ utility bills,
and energy costs for drinking water and wastewater systems can be 40% or more. On a neighborhood scale, pumping
(for potable water, stormwater, and sewage) and lighting (for streets, pathways, and signage) present multiple
opportunities for increasing energy efficiency.
The cost of infrastructure components is often borne by municipalities. If efficient infrastructure components
have a higher first cost, the project team can make the case for the investment in efficiency based on total life-cycle
cost. Savings from these components can reduce energy costs and result in lower service fees; additionally, many
energy-efficient products have a longer service life, requiring less maintenance and causing fewer interruptions to
public services.
STEP 1. INVENTORY ENERGY-USING INFRASTRUCTURE EQUIPMENT

GIB
List the energy-using infrastructure equipment that will be installed or replaced on the project site.
·· This credit refers only to new infrastructure installed inside the LEED ND project boundary. It does not
require that existing infrastructure be replaced with new infrastructure.
·· The new infrastructure components need not be purchased by the owners of the LEED ND project; this
may be done by the local government or other entity. However, new infrastructure must be installed or
replaced on the project site to qualify for this credit.
·· Any new energy-using equipment outside buildings must be included, such as street lights, traffic
lights, water and wastewater pumps, utility systems, centralized parking meters, bus stop lighting, and
signage lighting.
°° District energy systems, such as combined heat and power plants, are not included, but the pumps
for distribution of heating and cooling from district system must be.
°° Exterior lighting within the property lines of buildings is not infrastructure equipment and is not
eligible for this credit.
STEP 2. DEVELOP ANNUAL ENERGY USE BASELINE

Research and develop the annual baseline energy use for the lowest first-cost infrastructure installation
or replacement options for each inventory item. See Further Explanation, Baseline Energy Consumption
Calculations.
·· In some cases, the lowest first-cost option may be the equipment that the local government typically
installs (see Further Explanation, Example 1).
·· If the local government benchmarks standard infrastructure performance, these data can be used as
the baseline.
·· Some countries have standards for municipal infrastructure design, which may include the minimum
requirements for energy consumption (see Further Explanation, Example 2).
STEP 3. LIST ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES

Develop a list of energy-efficient alternatives appropriate to the project and ensure that safety, reliability,
and human health concerns are addressed.
·· Install energy-efficient lighting and pumps that provide the same illuminance or peak flow as the
baseline lighting and pumps. Include dimmers on street lighting. Install variable-speed drives and
variable-volume controls for pumps, or install bigger pipes to reduce pumping energy.
·· Install infrastructure with self-contained renewable energy production, such as photovoltaic panels
supplying the electricity for street lights.
1 http://water.epa.gov/infrastructure/sustain/energyefficiency.cfm.
2 R. Hamm, The Blinding Cost of Street Lighting When Purchase Decisions Are Improperly Managed, http://www.dailyenergyreport.com/the-blinding-cost-
of-street-lighting-when-purchase-decisions-are-improperly-managed/.
443
STEP 4. CALCULATE ENERGY EFFICIENCY OF ALTERNATIVES

Compute the energy consumption of the targeted alternatives (see Further Explanation, Calculations,
Equation 1).
Each piece of equipment does not need to meet the reduction threshold; rather, all infrastructure
equipment in aggregate must meet the threshold. The 15% reduction requirement is for all new
infrastructure inside the project boundary on an annual basis.
STEP 5. EVALUATE REPLACEMENT ALTERNATIVES

Examine the energy use for each alternative and develop a strategy for achieving the energy use
reduction threshold. The following analysis is recommended for finding the most cost-effective package
of efficiency measures but is not required for documenting credit compliance:
·· Target energy-efficient alternatives that have the biggest impact. Although it is possible for a single
upgraded component to produce all the required savings, a combination of upgrades is more likely to
be a successful approach.
·· Since the efficient infrastructure components typically have a higher first cost, look at the overall
equipment life cycle, including initial cost, operation costs, inflation, and maintenance.
·· Evaluate the targeted infrastructure component upgrades that are slated for replacement within the
timeframe of the project to determine which have the best potential for life-cycle cost savings.
·· Although existing infrastructure is excluded from the calculations, it may be worthwhile to evaluate
life-cycle cost savings information for aging existing infrastructure slated to be replaced outside the
timeframe of the project. Attractive payback periods could influence the municipality to replace them
earlier.
GIB
STEP 6. INITIATE INFRASTRUCTURE UPGRADE DISCUSSIONS WITH MUNICIPALITY
Identify the local government facilities contacts who will initiate upgrades of infrastructure components.
Consult with them about local experiences and preferences for infrastructure components and discuss

the possibility of installing new or upgrading existing equipment inside the LEED ND project boundary, at
a minimum.
Prepare preliminary life-cycle cost savings information on potential upgrades, such as differences in
first cost, expected reductions in energy use, and payback period, including reduced maintenance costs
and longer service life. Present the evaluation to the municipality and determine which upgrades will be
installed, whether by the municipality or by the project developer.
STEP 7. COLLABORATE WITH MUNICIPALITY TO INSTALL INFRASTRUCTURE

Install infrastructure or assist the municipality with specifying the energy-efficient alternatives for
installation at the project site.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
Use Equation 1 to determine the percentage energy reduction for each alternative compared with the baseline.
EQUATION 1. Percentage energy reduction
Total baseline energy use – Total new equipment energy use

% reduction = × 100
Total baseline energy use
444
Baseline Energy Consumption Calculations

A reasonable assumption for baseline energy use can be derived from energy specifications for the lowest-cost
option for that particular infrastructure component and working with the civil engineer and municipality to
determine anticipated run time. Use the following equation:
EQUATION 2. Annual energy use (per component)
Annual energy use = Estimated component energy use (kW) × Estimated annual runtime
To determine runtime, make an assumption for the number of full-load hours per day the piece of equipment
runs. Ensure that the daily runtime accounts for any ASHRAE 90.1 mandatory controls that apply to the project
equipment, such as dusk-to-dawn controls for outdoor lighting infrastructure. Multiply the number of hours per day
the equipment runs by 365. For example, if the lowest-cost wastewater pump has a power rating of 5 kW and runs for
8 hours a day, the equation would be as follows:
5 kW × 8 hours/day × 365 days/year = 14,600 kWh/year
Sum the annual energy use of all components to determine the total baseline infrastructure energy use.
Remember that existing infrastructure is excluded from the calculations. If existing infrastructure is replaced
with new equipment, the baseline must represent the energy use of an assumed new piece of lowest-cost equipment,
rather than that of the existing equipment.
GIB
EXAMPLES
Example 1. Baseline for local government’s standard equipment

A small project is designed with LED street lighting. The local government typically installs high-pressure sodium
(HPS) fixtures (170 watts for street lighting and 130 watts for alley lighting). Local street design spaces HPS street
lighting fixtures approximately 140 feet to 160 feet apart; the LED fixtures require about 120- to 140-foot spacing to
achieve the same illumination level. The team accounts for the different intervals when constructing the baseline
with HPS fixtures:
Street lighting: 170 W × 37 fixtures = 6.29 kW
Alley lighting: 130 W × 22 fixtures = 2.86 kW
The total baseline lighting power is 9.15 kW. The team then determines the energy use of the proposed case:
Street lighting: 62 W × 49 fixture = 3.04 kW
Alley lighting: 42 W × 29 fixtures = 1.22 kW
The total proposed lighting power is 4.26 kW. Because the operating time is the same in both cases, the annual
lighting energy reduction is 53%.
Example 2. Baseline based on local infrastructure energy consumption standards

A project in China plans to install new HPS street lighting. Per the country’s current standard for urban lighting,
HPS street lighting for the street types in the project is limited to a maximum lighting power density of 0.45 watts
per square meter and a minimum illumination level of 10 foot-candles. The baseline case lighting power is calculated
based on the required lighting power density and the area of the street. The proposed case lighting power is based
on the installed power of the HPS street lights, which meet the standard’s minimum illumination level of 10 foot-
candles.
445
LS CP Explanation of how project plans to meet requirements as infrastructure is installed X
CP CB Description of how infrastructure energy baseline was determined X
CB Table and calculation of total infrastructure energy efficiency X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

NPD Credit Transit Facilities. Lighting required in NPD Credit Transit Facilities may be a prime candidate for
efficient alternatives used to comply with this credit.
GIB Credit District Heating and Cooling. Only the distribution components of district systems (i.e., pumps)
count toward this credit.
GIB

None.
None.
Achieve a 30% reduction in energy use from the baseline.
DEFINITIONS
None.
446
447
Wastewater
Management
Plan
Built Project
1–2 points
GIB
INTENT
WASTEWATER MANAGEMENT
To reduce pollution from wastewater and encourage water reuse.
REQUIREMENTS
Design and construct the project to retain on-site at least 25% of the average annual wastewater generated by the
project (excluding any existing buildings), and reuse that wastewater to replace potable water. Provide on-site
treatment to a quality required by state and local regulations for the proposed reuse, whichever is more stringent.
Calculate the percentage of wastewater diverted and reused by determining the total wastewater flow, using the
design case from GIB Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction and adding wastewater flow from residential
buildings, then determining how much of that volume is reused on site.
TABLE 1. Points for reusing wastewater
Percentage of wastewater reused Points
25% 1
50% 2
448
BEHIND THE INTENT

Minimizing the volume of sewage that leaves a project site reduces strain on public infrastructure. Efficient on-
site treatment can reduce chemical inputs, energy use, and emissions from wastewater treatment. In locales with
combined sewer systems, reducing sanitary sewer inputs limits the damage from combined sewer overflows.
Managing wastewater locally with small, distributed treatment systems has a number of benefits. Treatment
occurs near the point of use of the effluent, decreasing the length of wastewater conveyance pipes and pumping
energy. Small, distributed treatment systems may contribute to a more robust regional wastewater management
program by defraying costs and volume and reducing the burden on large, central processing systems.
Reuse of treated wastewater for irrigation, toilet flushing, on-site process use, or ornamental landscape use
reduces demand on potable water supplies. On-site wastewater treatment systems transform perceived “waste” into
resources that can be used on the project site and provide opportunities to enhance occupants’ understanding of
nutrient cycles. These resources include treated water volumes for potable and nonpotable use, as well as nutrients
that can be applied to improve the site’s soil conditions.
GIB
STEP 1. REVIEW REGULATIONS AND PERMITTING REQUIREMENTS

Identify the regulatory entities that have authority over wastewater and effluent. Consult with local
officials and environmental regulatory agencies to determine codes and standards for on-site wastewater
treatment and reuse.
·· If wastewater treatment at the project level will be permitted by the jurisdiction having authority,
review the permit process and requirements.
·· Some jurisdictions require buildings to discharge all wastewater to public sewers. Others allow
graywater to be collected and treated on site but require blackwater (from toilets, urinals, and
kitchens) to be conveyed to the public system.
·· If definitive effluent quality standards are not available, contact local and state regulators to determine
requirements. Reuse of treated wastewater inside occupied structures may be new to some regulatory
agencies, and standards may not be explicit.
·· Treated wastewater effluent may be used only for purposes approved by appropriate regulatory
authorities. Codes and regulations take precedence. If the regulatory agency does not allow a
particular use of treated wastewater effluent, the project cannot claim that reuse to achieve this credit.
STEP 2. CREATE WATER BUDGET

Compile a comprehensive list of water uses on the project site that produce wastewater, including
fixtures and fittings, specialty appliances, and process water. Irrigation water is typically absorbed or
lost to runoff and does not produce wastewater. Calculations from other LEED credits can be used to
estimate water use and wastewater output.
For commercial buildings, use GIB Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction calculations.
For new single-family residential buildings and new multiunit residential buildings three stories or fewer,
use the wastewater tab in the indoor water use calculator provided by USGBC to estimate water use and
wastewater output. Alternatively, projects may provide their own wastewater calculations.
STEP 3. DEVELOP WATER REUSE STRATEGY

Identify the targeted percentage of water reuse and determine whether blackwater and/or graywater
treatment systems are appropriate for the project. Consider the following:
·· Local requirements
·· The relative cost of treatment systems
·· Operations and maintenance requirements
·· Space planning implications, such as size and location of the treatment system(s) and conveyance
requirements. For example, a graywater system requires drain lines serving laundry, showers,
lavatories, and bathtubs to be separate from drain lines that serve toilets, urinals, and kitchens.
449
Although the project team can pursue treatment for graywater, blackwater, or both, the percentage of
treatment is based on total wastewater, not just the selected type.
·· A variety of systems may be used for on-site treatment and reuse; options include constructed
wetlands, mechanical recirculating sand filters, and/or anaerobic biological treatment facilities.
·· The Environmental Protection Agency’s Office of Water (water.epa.gov/scitech/wastetech/mtbfact.
cfm) maintains detailed fact sheets for municipal wastewater technologies.
STEP 4. DESIGN WASTEWATER TREATMENT SYSTEM(S)

Design treatment and reuse systems to meet the project’s wastewater reuse goals. Ensure that the
system design addresses the following:
·· Applicable effluent quality standards
·· Systems for storing and conveying treated wastewater to points of use
·· Seasonality of use, if applicable
·· At a minimum, the wastewater treatment system must be sized to treat the design case water volume
calculated for GIB Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction. However, teams are encouraged to match
system capacity to demand to maximize opportunities for nonpotable water use.
STEP 5. DETERMINE VOLUME OF WASTEWATER DIVERTED

Provide calculations of wastewater diverted based on characteristics of the system. Because system
diversion capacities vary significantly and are project-specific, project teams may use their discretion in
choosing a calculation method. Captured rainwater may not be counted as diversion for this credit.
STEP 6. CONFIRM PERCENTAGE OF WASTEWATER DIVERTED
GIB
Calculate the total wastewater generated and percentage of wastewater diverted, using Equations 1 and 2.
EQUATION 1. Total wastewater generated
Percentage of Design case from GIB Wastewater from residential buildings
wastewater = Prerequisite Indoor + not included in design case figure
generated Water Use Reduction (from indoor water use calculator)
See GIB Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction for more detail.
EQUATION 2. Percentage of wastewater diverted
Wastewater diverted
Percentage of
wastewater diverted
= × 100
Total wastewater generated
Review Table 1 in the credit requirements to determine the number of points achieved.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance and GIB Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction.
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Wastewater must be treated to the quality required by local regulation, based on intended use.
450
LS CP CB Description of treatment method and diversion estimate X
CB Wastewater projections from GIB Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction X
CB Wastewater calculations for residential buildings (if applicable) X
CB On-site reuse volume calculation (if applicable) X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

GIB Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction. Wastewater volume is projected based on indoor water use calculations
for the related credit. Treated wastewater effluent may contribute to reducing indoor water use if it replaces potable
water for uses such as toilet flushing.
GIB Credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction. Treated wastewater effluent may be reused as landscape irrigation
water, reducing the need for potable water and contributing to achievement of the related credit.
GIB

None.
None.
Reuse at least 75% of generated wastewater.
DEFINITIONS
blackwater wastewater containing urine or fecal matter that should be discharged to the sanitary drainage system
of the building or premises in accordance with the International Plumbing Code. Wastewater from kitchen sinks
(sometimes differentiated by the use of a garbage disposal), showers, or bathtubs is considered blackwater under
some state or local codes.
graywater “untreated household waste water which has not come into contact with toilet waste. Graywater includes
451
wastewater water that has been used for a purpose and conveyed by building plumbing systems toward a point of
treatment and disposal. Wastewater from buildings can be classified as graywater, blackwater, or process wastewater.
GIB
452
453
Recycled and
Reused Infrastructure
Plan
Built Project
1 point
GIB
INTENT
RECYCLED AND REUSED INFRASTRUCTURE

To avoid the environmental consequences of extracting and processing
virgin materials by using recycled and reclaimed materials.
REQUIREMENTS
Use materials for new infrastructure such that the sum of the postconsumer recycled content, on-site reused
materials, and one-half of the preconsumer recycled content constitutes at least 50% of the total mass of
infrastructure materials.
Count materials in all of the following infrastructure items, as applicable:

·· roadways, parking lots, sidewalks, unit paving, and curbs;
·· water retention tanks and vaults;
·· base and sub-base materials for the above; and
·· rainwater, sanitary sewer, steam energy distribution, and water piping.
Recycled content is defined in accordance with ISO/IEC 14021, Environmental Labels and Declaration, Self-Declared
Environmental Claims (Type II environmental labeling).
454
BEHIND THE INTENT

Use of recycled and reused content reduces virgin material consumption and solid waste volumes. Creating a
demand for recycled content and reused materials also helps develop the secondary market in reused and recycled
material and increases environmental awareness among the construction community.
Products with recycled content are often readily available and cost the same as or less than all-new materials.
Postconsumer recycled content is derived from materials that can no longer be used for their original purpose;
preconsumer recycled content consists of raw material diverted from the waste stream during the manufacturing
process. The former is accorded greater value because of its increased environmental benefit over the life cycle of a
product.
Infrastructure elements comprise materials such as sand, gravel, and concrete, which lend themselves well to
environmentally preferred sourcing. Existing infrastructure that requires refurbishment or is demolished as part of
the project can be reused. Reclamation and reuse of on-site materials have significant environmental benefit, since
the damage associated with production and transportation of new materials is avoided.
GIB
STEP 1. ASSESS INFRASTRUCTURE OPPORTUNITIES

Determine the infrastructure needed for the project. Review the site’s existing infrastructure and identify
opportunities for reuse of materials if the project involves demolition.

·· Determine whether existing infrastructure can be retained or must be refurbished or replaced. If the
infrastructure is owned by the municipality, government records may indicate when it was installed
and its expected useful life.
·· Categorize infrastructure on the project as existing, requiring replacement, requiring repair, or new
construction.
°° The scope of this credit includes replaced, repaired, and new infrastructure. Existing infrastructure
that is not modified is not included. See Further Explanation, Calculations.
°° If minor upgrades are needed, repairing or restoring existing infrastructure to full functionality is
advisable, to avoid operations and maintenance issues.
STEP 2. RESEARCH AND SPECIFY RECYCLED MATERIALS FOR NEW INFRASTRUCTURE

Maximize the use of recycled and reused materials for new infrastructure by identifying opportunities
early in the project timeline.
·· Consider ways that demolition debris could be reused. For example, crushed asphalt or concrete
recovered from on-site demolition may be used as subbase material for roads and other infrastructure.
These materials would be considered on-site reuse.
·· Test any contaminated soil and determine whether its reuse has legal implications.
·· Consider obtaining grade 3 soils for road base or infill from construction and demolition waste-sorting
facilities instead of sourcing new material. Although reclaimed grade 3 soils are often less costly, only
materials reused on site contribute toward credit compliance.
·· Begin researching infrastructure materials containing recycled content early. Provide information to
vendors, especially if they are new to using these materials.
·· Contact product manufacturers to obtain documentation of recycled content in products. To qualify,
recycled content must be confirmed by the product manufacturer.
·· If the municipality is responsible for providing infrastructure, engage the appropriate officials about
their material choices and coordinate reclamation and reuse opportunities between the public works
agency and the privately managed aspects of infrastructure construction.
455
STEP 3. DOCUMENT USE OF RECYCLED AND REUSED MATERIALS

Identify the mass of all repaired, replaced, and new infrastructure elements for the credit calculation
denominator. Then quantify the recycled and reused materials in those new infrastructure elements.
·· Create a list or spreadsheet of each infrastructure type in the project and the material being used.
·· Categorize infrastructure elements as on-site existing material to be reused, new material without
recycled content, and new material with recycled content.
·· Determine the weight of each eligible infrastructure element.
·· If the material contains recycled content, record the manufacturer’s percentage of postconsumer or
preconsumer recycled content. The weight of the recycled content is what contributes toward credit.
Manufacturers, rather than project teams, are the source of this information.
·· There is no threshold of minimum repair for the credit calculation. Minor repair is encouraged to
mitigate the harms associated with installation of new materials on site.
·· Replacement and new construction of infrastructure can include on-site reuse of materials,
incorporation of new material with recycled content, or new material.
STEP 4. CALCULATE RECYCLED CONTENT AND REUSE PERCENTAGE

To demonstrate credit achievement, calculate the percentage of compliant materials used. See Further
Explanation, Calculations.
GIB
FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
This credit covers existing infrastructure that is repaired or replaced and new infrastructure. Existing infrastructure
not touched as part of the project is excluded from credit calculations.
Using Equation 1, compare the weight of all reused and recycled materials with the total weight of all new
infrastructure components listed in the credit requirements. Use consistent units for all weights.
EQUATION 1. Total recycled and reused content, by weight
Total recycled Postconsumer On-site Preconsumer recycled content

or reused = recycled + reused +
content content content 2
where
Postconsumer recycled content = weight of materials that are postconsumer recycled content, as defined
by ISO 14021
Preconsumer recycled content = weight of materials that are preconsumer recycled content, as defined
by ISO 14021
On-site reused content = weight of infrastructure materials that are reused materials from project site
Using Equation 2, calculate the recycled and reused infrastructure as a percentage of the total weight of all new
infrastructure materials.
456
EQUATION 2. Percentage of infrastructure recycled and reused
Total recycled and reused content

% recycled and reused
infrastructure
= × 100
Total eligible infrastructure
materials
EXAMPLES
The project team lists infrastructure elements with their total weights and their percentages of recycled and
reused content (Table 1). The percentage of recycled and reused infrastructure material is 50.27%, so the project
earns 1 point.
TABLE 1. Example tabulation of recycled and reused infrastructure materials
ON-SITE
RECYCLED CONTENT NEW MATERIAL Total
REUSED
Recycled Total
and Weight
TOTAL Weight of
Infastructure Type Description Weight On-site of
Post Pre Weight of On-Site
NEW Reused Material
GIB
Consumer Consumer Recycled Reused

Material Material (Tons)
(%) (%) Content Material
(Tons) (Tons)
(Tons) (Tons)
Roadways Asphalt 10,000 50.00% 10.00% 5,500 6,000 11,500 16,000

Reclaimed
Parking Lots - 0.00% 0.00% - 7,000 7,000 7,000
Crushed Asphalt
Sidewalks Concrete 10,000 40.00% 40.00% 6,000 2,500 8,500 12,500
Unit Paving Concrete 10,000 40.00% 40.00% 6,000 4,500 10,500 14,500
Curbs Concrete 2,000 30.00% 40.00% 1,000 - 1,000 2,000
Water Tanks/ Vaults Steel 2,000 40.00% 10.00% 900 1,850 2,750 3,850
Piping-Stormwater PVC 5,000 0.00% 0.00% - - - 5,000
Piping-Stormwater Concrete 6,000 20.00% 40.00% 2,400 - 2,400 6,000
Piping-Stormwater Corrugated Steel 2,000 20.00% 10.00% 500 - 500 2,000
Piping-Sewer Concrete 10,000 40.00% 60.00% 7,000 6,500 13,500 16,500
Piping-Steam
Steel 6,000 40.00% 10.00% 2,700 4,000 6,700 10,000
Distribution
Piping-Water PVC 10,000 0.00% 0.00% - - - 10,000
Totals 73,000 32,000 32,350 64,350 105,350
Total mass of infrastructure (new + reclaimed) 105,350 tons
Total mass of recycled content and on-site reused material 64,350 tons
% of infrastructure mass recycled and reclaimed 61.08%
457
LS CP Description of strategies being implemented to achieve recycled and reuse requirement threshold X
Calculation of infrastructure, by weight, that is the sum of the recycled content and on-site reused
CB X
materials as a percentage of new infrastructure
CB Documentation of materials’ sustainable criteria X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

GIB Credit Solid Waste Management. Demolished materials from existing hardscape, such as roads, parking
lots, and sidewalks, can be used on site as reused material infill for new infrastructure. This type of reuse can count
toward the related solid waste management credit.
GIB
None.

International Organization for Standardization, ISO Standard 14021–1999, Environmental Labels and
Declarations—Self Declared Environmental Claims (Type II Environmental Labeling): iso.com
Use recycled and reused materials for at least 75% of the total weight of all applicable infrastructure materials.
DEFINITIONS
recycled content defined in accordance with the International Organization of Standards document ISO 14021 –
Environmental labels and declarations – Self-declared environmental claims (Type II environmental labeling)
reuse the reemployment of materials in the same or a related capacity as their original application, thus extending
the lifetime of materials that would otherwise be discarded. Reuse includes the recovery and reemployment of
materials recovered from existing building or construction sites. Also known as salvage.
458
459
Solid Waste
Management
Plan
Built Project
1 point
GIB
INTENT
SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT

To reduce the volume of waste deposited in landfills and promote the
proper disposal of hazardous waste.
REQUIREMENTS
Meet at least four of the following five requirements and publicize their availability and benefits.
a. Include as part of the project at least one recycling or reuse station, available to all project occupants,
dedicated to the separation, collection, and storage of materials for recycling; or locate the project in a local
government jurisdiction that provides recycling services. The recycling must cover at least paper, corrugated
cardboard, glass, plastics, and metals.
b. Include as part of the project at least one drop-off point, available to all project occupants, for potentially
hazardous office or household wastes and establish a plan for postcollection disposal or use; or locate the
project in a local government jurisdiction that provides collection services. Examples of potentially hazardous
wastes include paints, solvents, oil, mercury-containing lamps, electronic waste, and batteries.
c. Include as part of the project at least one compost station or location, available to all project occupants,
dedicated to the collection and composting of food and yard wastes, and establish a plan for postcollection use;
or locate the project in a local government jurisdiction that provides composting services.
d. On every mixed-use or nonresidential block or at least every 800 feet (245 meters), whichever is shorter,
include recycling containers either adjacent to or integrated into the design of other receptacles.
e. Recycle, reuse, or salvage at least 50% of nonhazardous construction, demolition, and renovation debris.
Calculations can be done by weight or volume but must be consistent throughout. Develop and implement a
construction waste management plan that identifies the materials to be diverted from disposal and specifies
whether the materials will be stored on site or commingled. Reused or recycled asphalt, brick, and concrete
(ABC) can account for no more than 75% of the diverted waste total. Excavated soil, land-clearing debris,
alternative daily cover (ADC), and materials contributing toward GIB Credit Building Reuse do not qualify for
this credit.
460
BEHIND THE INTENT

In 2010, the U.S. generated approximately 250 million tons (226.79 million tonnes) of municipal solid waste but
recycled and composted only about 85 million tons (77.11 million tonnes), or 34.1 percent. On average, each person
generated 4.43 pounds (2 kilograms) of waste per day, of which only 1.51 pounds (0.68 kilograms) was recycled or
composted.1
Incorporating recycling and composting infrastructure early in the design process provides a foundation for
a successful recycling program during operations, therefore diverting more neighborhood waste from landfills.
Accessible waste management infrastructure can help make recycling and composting a default behavior for
community members.
Safe handling and diversion of hazardous waste is often overlooked during the design process. Appropriate
waste management infrastructure for batteries, mercury-containing lamps, electronic waste, and other hazardous
materials protects the health of community members.
In the U.S., total building-related construction and demolition waste is approximately 135.5 million tons (122.92
million tonnes) per year, or about 30 percent of total waste produced—the largest single source.2 On average,
commercial construction generates 3.9 pounds of solid waste per square foot (19.05 kilograms of solid waste per
square meter), the majority of which could be recycled.3 Developing a construction waste management plan early
in the design process allows more time for planning and coordination, developing innovative sorting strategies, and
establishing contractual agreements with construction team members and waste haulers. In turn, this leads to the
successful implementation of construction waste management strategies.
GIB
STEP 1. SELECT OPTIONS TO PURSUE

Determine which waste management strategies listed in the credit requirements to pursue. Consider
opportunities for recycling, composting, hazardous waste disposal or reuse, and construction and
demolition waste diversion.
·· Identify synergies between the choices. For example, if the project will include a recycling station,
consider integrating a compost station as well. Also identify synergies with other credits, such as
locating the compost station near a community garden.
·· If possible, develop a comprehensive solid waste management plan outlining how each type of
material will be collected, disposed of, and diverted from the landfill. This may reveal potential cost
savings (e.g., if a single hauler can handle more than one type of waste).
·· Consider centrally locating collection facilities and drop-off sites to maximize convenience for
community members.
Recycling or Reuse Station
STEP 1. DETERMINE WHETHER MUNICIPALITY PROVIDES RECYCLING SERVICES

Contact the municipality to determine whether recycling services are provided. If services are not
provided, go to Step 2. If services are provided, note the following.
·· To qualify, the local government collection services must include all the materials listed in the credit
requirements.
·· Ensure that recycling stations or pickup zones are located within the project site.
·· If curbside pickup is offered, confirm that the coverage area includes the entire project site.
1 http://www.epa.gov/osw/nonhaz/municipal/pubs/msw_2010_rev_factsheet.pdf.
2 http://www.buildings.com/tabid/3334/ArticleID/5758/Default.aspx.
3 Ibid.
461
STEP 2. FIND APPROPRIATE SITE FOR RECYCLING OR REUSE STATION

If the municipality does not provide collection services, determine the best sites for one or more
recycling and reuse stations, accessible to all occupants.
·· Consider accessibility (for both community members and haulers) but also proximity to buildings
(odor, aesthetics, etc.).
·· Ensure use of the station by publicizing its location and availability.
Hazardous Waste Drop-Off Site
STEP 1. DETERMINE WHETHER MUNICIPALITY COLLECTS HAZARDOUS WASTE

Contact the municipality to determine whether services are provided. If services are not provided, go to
Step 2. If services are provided, note the following.
·· Criteria for compliant local government collection services are listed in the credit requirements.
·· Confirm that hazardous waste drop-off sites are located in or near the project site.
·· Unlike recycling and composting stations, a hazardous waste collection area or drop-off site may be
located outside the project boundary, but it must still be free and easily accessible to all community
members.
STEP 2. FIND APPROPRIATE SITE FOR HAZARDOUS WASTE DROP-OFF
GIB
If the municipality does not offer collection services, determine the best sites for one or more hazardous
waste drop-off locations, accessible to all occupants.
·· Hazardous waste drop-off sites must account for proper, safe storage to avoid causing harm to the
community. Locate sites away from residences, schools, parks, or other heavily trafficked areas.

·· Ensure use of the drop-off site by publicizing its location and availability.
Compost Station
STEP 1. DETERMINE WHETHER MUNICIPALITY PROVIDES COMPOSTING SERVICES

Contact the municipality to determine whether compost services or stations are provided for food and
yard wastes and confirm that they are located within the project site. If services are not provided, go to
Step 2.
STEP 2. FIND APPROPRIATE SITE FOR COMPOST STATION

If the municipality does not have established collection services, determine the best sites for one or more
compost stations.
·· Compost stations must be accessible to all project occupants.
·· Neighborhood gardens or farms can be ideal locations for compost stations.
·· Compost facilities may need approvals or permits from the state or local government. Obtain approval
from the governing authority before designing a compost facility.
·· Consider publicizing the locations and availability of drop-off sites.
Recycling Infrastructure
STEP 1. IDENTIFY LOCATIONS FOR RECYCLING CONTAINERS

Indicate locations for recycling containers along mixed-use and residential blocks. Recycling containers
must, at a minimum, be located on each applicable block or at least every 800 feet (245 meters).
462
STEP 2. SELECT TYPES OF RECYCLING CONTAINERS

Specify the desired types of recycling containers at each location. Containers may be stand-alone or
integrated into other waste collection receptacles.
·· Commingled recycling containers are acceptable if the waste hauler or municipality accepts and is
able to process and sort commingled waste.
·· If only single-stream recycling is available, containers must be provided for each material type.
Recycle or Reuse Construction and Demolition Waste
STEP 1. DEVELOP CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

Create a construction and demolition waste management plan that will be implemented throughout the
project construction phase.
·· Establish on-site infrastructure, practices, and policies for off-site sorting, and develop a tracking
system, as applicable. At a minimum, identify what materials will be targeted, whether waste will be
separated on site or commingled, and where any on-site storage will be located.
°° Some construction sites may not have room for source separation. Projects may use both source
separation and commingling depending on which is more appropriate for the material, location, and
availability of haulers and/or facilities.
·· Consider including the following in the plan:
GIB
°° Waste diversion goals, including each targeted waste stream and the potential for material to be
reused or recycled
°° Collection and sorting methods and locations
°° Diversion methods
°° List of responsible parties

°° Locations of sites and services
°° Calculation methodology, including a tracking template
·· See Further Explanation, Construction Waste Management Plans.
STEP 2. DIVERT WASTE

Track all the construction and demolition waste leaving the site. Retain waste hauler reports for
documentation. Record estimated weights or volumes of materials reused on site or salvaged by
subcontractors or vendors for reuse on other projects.
·· Use a tracking tool to measure diverted waste. See Further Explanation, Sample Construction Waste
Management Tracking Tool.
·· Decide whether to use weight or volume; the same unit must be used consistently throughout.
STEP 3. CALCULATE WASTE REDUCTION

Compute the total waste generated, the total waste diverted, and the percentage that came from asphalt,
brick, and concrete and compare the results with the credit thresholds for compliance. See Further
Explanation, Calculations.
·· Consider evaluating the waste diversion several times during construction to ensure that the project is
meeting interim compliance benchmarks.
·· See Further Explanation, Examples, Construction and Demolition Waste.
463
FURTHER EXPLANATION
CALCULATIONS
For all recycle and reuse construction and demolition waste calculations:
·· Include asphalt, brick, and concrete (ABC) in the total construction and demolition waste.
·· Exclude hazardous waste, excavated soil, and land-clearing debris. These materials should be disposed of
according to local regulations.
·· Alternative daily cover (ADC) does not count as diversion for nonhazardous construction and demolition
debris but must be included in total construction and demolition waste.
·· Exclude materials already counted for compliance with GIB Credit Building Reuse.
·· Commingled recycling facilities must be able to provide diversion rates. The rates can be specific to the project
or an average diversion rate, provided the facility is regulated by a local or state authority and excludes ADC.
Use Equation 1 to apply the 75% cap on ABC on diverted waste. ABC waste can account for no more than 75% of
diverted waste.
EQUATION 1. ABC cap
ABC waste diverted
GIB
75% ≥ × 100
ABC + other waste diverted

where
Total waste diverted = all diverted waste from the project
ABC = asphalt, brick, and concrete
Use Equation 2 to determine total waste diverted for credit calculation.
EQUATION 2. Percentage of total waste diverted
Diverted waste total

% total waste diverted = × 100
Total construction and demolition waste generated
EXAMPLES
A project team determines the proportions of construction and demolition waste, including ABC, that it has diverted
from the landfill (Table 1)
TABLE 1. Example tabulation of construction and demolition waste management
Weight
ABC waste diverted 25 tons
Non-ABC waste diverted 20 tons
Diverted waste total 45 tons
ABC calculation (25 / 45) × 100 = 55%
Total waste generated 55 tons
Total diverted waste (45 / 55) × 100 = 81.8%

464
In this case, ABC waste accounts for less than 75% of all the waste diverted, and therefore all the ABC waste
contributes toward credit. The project earns 1 point because the total diverted waste exceeds 50% of all waste
generated.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLANS

Considerations when preparing a construction and demolition waste management plan include the following.
On-site separation (also known as source separation) is most viable if multiple bins are conveniently located and
the general contractor and subcontractors ensure careful separation. Easy-to-understand multilingual or symbol-
based signage helps prevent contamination. A best practice is to target waste materials that are easily separated and
have established recycling markets, such as steel, wood, and concrete.
On-site separation is preferable because separated wastes are more likely to be diverted from the landfill, but
commingled collection (or single-stream recycling) may be appropriate for sites with limited space for waste
containers. Recyclable materials are collected in one container but sorted at an off-site recycling facility, where they
are separated from the waste going to a landfill.
Donating surplus materials or architectural salvage to a community organization is permissible, provided the
organization can verify how much material is received and track where it is going. Habitat for Humanity Restore is a
commonly used donation facility in the U.S. and Canada.
Use of construction waste to infill mining pits is permissible only if the waste is “clean” and the work is overseen
by the state or local government or a government-sponsored organization. Leaving items at the curb for people to
GIB
pick up is not acceptable. Dumping in the ocean is never permissible.

Construction
Recycling Hazardous Compost Recycling
Documentation and demolition
station waste station containers
waste diversion
Description of municipal services or drop-

LS CP CB off point location, collection scope, and X X X X
frequency relevant to requirement
Description of waste management
LS strategies being implemented to achieve X
requirement threshold
CP CB Waste management plan X
CB Waste diversion calculations X
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.
CHANGES FROM PREVIOUS VERSION

Alternative daily cover (ADC) is now excluded from the diversion calculations.
465
None.
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
ADC (alternative daily cover) material other than earthen material placed on the surface of the active face of a
municipal solid waste landfill at the end of each operating day to control vectors, fires, odors, blowing litter, and
scavenging. Generally these materials must be processed so they do not allow gaps in the exposed landfill face.
commingled waste building waste streams that are combined on the project site and hauled away for sorting into
recyclable streams. Also known as single-stream recycling.
electronic waste discarded office equipment (computers, monitors, copiers, printers, scanners, fax machines),
GIB
appliances (refrigerators, dishwashers, water coolers), external power adapters, and televisions and other
audiovisual equipment
land clearing debris and soil materials that are natural (e.g., rock, soil, stone, vegetation). Materials that are man-

made (e.g., concrete, brick, cement) are considered construction waste even if they were on site.
mixed paper white and colored paper, envelopes, forms, file folders, tablets, flyers, cereal boxes, wrapping paper,
catalogs, magazines, phone books, and photos
waste diversion a management activity that disposes of waste through methods other than incineration or
landfilling. Examples include reuse and recycling.
466
467
Light Pollution
Reduction
Plan
Built Project
1 point
GIB
INTENT
LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION

To increase night sky access, improve nighttime visibility, and reduce the
consequences of development for wildlife and people.
REQUIREMENTS
Meet the Light Pollution Reduction requirements for the following:
1. One option in Exterior Lighting for Residential Areas
2. Exterior Lighting for Circulation Network
3. Uplight and light trespass requirements in Exterior Lighting for All Other Areas
4. Covenants, Conditions, and Restrictions.
Divide the project into model lighting ordinance (MLO) lighting zones LZ0 to LZ4 based on site-specific
characteristics using the definitions of lighting zones provided in the Illuminating Engineering Society and
International Dark Sky Association (IES/IDA) MLO User Guide.
Meet the requirements below for each lighting zone within the project.
468
Exterior Lighting for Residential Areas

Meet either Option 1 or Option 2 for all exterior lighting in new residential construction and residential buildings
undergoing major renovations. Existing residential construction is exempt. Projects may use different options for
uplight and light trespass.
OPTION 1. BUG RATING METHOD

Each fixture must have a backlight-uplight-glare (BUG) rating (as defined in IES TM-15-11, Addendum A) of no
more than B2-U2-G2.
OR
OPTION 2. CALCULATION METHOD

Meet the requirements of Option 2 in Exterior Lighting for All Other Areas, below.
Exterior Lighting for Circulation Network

For any portions of the circulation network not governed by national, state, or other superseding regulations, do not
install street lighting unless conditions warrant the need for street lighting.
New and existing street lighting luminaires must not emit any light above 90 degrees (horizontal), based on the
photometric characteristics of each luminaire when mounted in the same orientation and tilt as specified in the
GIB
project design or as currently installed.

Exception for ornamental luminaires: Using the lowest MLO lighting zone for immediately adjacent properties,
meet the requirements of the IES/IDA MLO, Table H.
AND
Exterior Lighting for All Other Areas

Use either the BUG method (Option 1) or the calculation method (Option 2) to meet uplight and light trespass
requirements. Projects may use different options for uplight and light trespass.
UPLIGHT
Do not exceed the following luminaire uplight ratings, based on the specific light source installed in the luminaire
as defined in IES TM-15-11, Addendum A.
TABLE 1. Maximum uplight ratings for luminaires, by lighting zone
MLO lighting zone Luminaire uplight rating
LZ0 U0
LZ1 U1
LZ2 U2
LZ3 U3
LZ4 U4

Do not exceed the following maximum percentages of total lumens emitted above horizontal.
469
TABLE 2. Maximum percentage of lumens above horizontal
Maximum allowed percentage of total luminaire

MLO lighting zone
lumens emitted above horizontal
LZ0 0%
LZ1 0%
LZ2 1.5%
LZ3 3%
LZ4 6%
LIGHT TRESPASS
Do not exceed the following luminaire backlight and glare ratings (based on the specific light source installed in
the luminaire) as defined in IES TM-15-11, Addendum A, based on the mounting location and distance from the
lighting boundary.
TABLE 3. Maximum backlight and glare ratings, by lighting zone
MLO lighting zone
GIB
Luminaire mounting LZ0 LZ1 LZ2 LZ3 LZ4
Allowed backlight ratings

> 2 mounting heights from lighting boundary B1 B3 B4 B5 B5
1 to 2 mounting heights from lighting boundary and

B1 B2 B3 B4 B4
properly oriented
0.5 to 1 mounting height to lighting boundary and
B0 B1 B2 B3 B3
properly oriented
< 0.5 mounting height to lighting boundary and

B0 B0 B0 B1 B2
properly oriented
Allowed glare ratings
Building-mounted > 2 mounting heights from any

G0 G1 G2 G3 G4
lighting boundary
Building-mounted 1–2 mounting heights from any

G0 G0 G1 G1 G2
lighting boundary
Building-mounted 0.5 to 1 mounting heights from

G0 G0 G0 G1 G1
any lighting boundary
Building-mounted < 0.5 mounting heights from any

G0 G0 G0 G0 G1
lighting boundary
All other luminaires G0 G1 G2 G3 G4
The lighting boundary is located at the property lines of the property, or properties, that the LEED project
occupies. The lighting boundary can be modified under the following conditions:
·· When the property line abuts a public area that includes, but is not limited to, a walkway, bikeway, plaza, or
parking lot, the lighting boundary may be moved to 5 feet (1.5 meters) beyond the property line.
·· When the property line abuts a public street, alley, or transit corridor, the lighting boundary may be moved
to the center line of that street, alley, or corridor.
470
·· When there are additional properties owned by the same entity that are contiguous to the property, or
properties, that the LEED project is within and have the same or higher MLO lighting zone designation as
the LEED project, the lighting boundary may be expanded to include those properties.
Orient all luminaires less than two mounting heights from the lighting boundary such that the backlight points
toward the nearest lighting boundary line. Building-mounted luminaires with the backlight oriented toward the
building are exempt from the backlight rating requirement.

Do not exceed the following vertical illuminances at the lighting boundary of each lighting zone in the project
(use the definition of lighting boundary in Option 1). Calculation points may be no more than 5 feet (1.5 meters)
apart. Vertical illuminances must be calculated on vertical planes running parallel to the lighting boundary, with
the normal to each plane oriented toward the property and perpendicular to the lighting boundary, extending
from grade level to 33 feet (10 meters) above the height of the highest luminaire.
TABLE 4. Maximum vertical illuminance at lighting boundary, by lighting zone
MLO lighting zone Vertical illuminance
LZ0 0.05 fc (0.5 lux)
LZ1 0.05 fc (0.5 lux)

GIB
LZ2 0.10 fc (1 lux)
LZ3 0.20 fc (2 lux)

LZ4 0.60 fc (6 lux)
FC = footcandle
Exemptions from Uplight and Light Trespass Requirements

The following exterior lighting is exempt from the requirements, provided it is controlled separately from the
nonexempt lighting:
·· specialized signal, directional, and marker lighting for transportation;
·· internally illuminated signage;
·· lighting that is used solely for façade and landscape lighting in MLO lighting zones 3 and 4 and is
automatically turned off from midnight until 6 a.m.;
·· lighting that is integral to other equipment or instrumentation that has been installed by the equipment or
instrumentation manufacturer;
·· lighting for theatrical purposes for stage, film, and video performances;
·· street lighting;
·· hospital emergency departments, including associated helipads; and
·· lighting for the national flag in MLO lighting zones 2, 3, or 4.
Covenants, Conditions, and Restrictions

Establish covenants, conditions, and restrictions (CC&R) or other binding documents that require continued
adherence to the above requirements.
471
BEHIND THE INTENT

Artificial exterior lighting not only provides human safety and comfort, it also enables us to productively use more
hours of the day. If done correctly, exterior lighting offers safety, security, building identification, aesthetics, and way
finding. However, poor lighting design causes light pollution.
Light pollution is the misdirection or misuse of light, generally resulting from an inappropriate application of
exterior lighting. Backlight creates light trespass onto adjacent sites by directing light in the opposite direction of the
area intended to be lighted. Uplight causes artificial sky glow. Glare is caused by high-angle front light.
Light pollution creates an abundance of environmental problems. Wildlife species that hunt or forage at night
may be unable to feed. Some flora and fauna are unable to adjust to seasonal variations when exposed to light
pollution. Migratory birds that rely on stars to guide them during migration may become disoriented. Even human
health can be damaged by misuse of light. Studies have shown that overexposure to artificial lighting, particularly at
night, may disrupt our circadian rhythms and melatonin production, impair night vision, and lead to sleep disorders.1
Finally, light directed into the sky or into areas that do not need illumination is a waste of both energy and money.
Good lighting design involves reducing three forms of light pollution: uplight, glare, and light trespass. This
credit addresses all three with requirements for specifying only the necessary lighting, selecting the right luminaires
(lamp-ballast combinations), locating them appropriately on the project site, and implementing an appropriate
control strategy. So that designers have flexibility, this credit offers two compliance options—a calculation method
(as in LEED 2009) and a new backlight, uplight, and glare (BUG) rating method.
Thoughtful selection of lighting results in luminaires that not only are aesthetically pleasing but also generate
GIB
well-shielded, well-directed light. Minimizing direct views of lamps avoids glare, and gradually changing light levels
allows the human eye to adapt. Efficient design specifies both luminaire distribution and lighting controls, including
motion sensors, photocells, time clocks, and other devices that reduce the amount of light at times and places it is
not needed.

STEP 1. ESTABLISH EXTERIOR LIGHTING PROJECT GOALS

Determine which team members will be responsible for the lighting design, luminaire selection, and
overall lighting concept. Prepare a schematic site lighting design by doing the following:
·· Identify the desired lighted areas on site.
·· Consult the Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) Lighting Handbook’s recommendations to establish
target light levels and uniformities for the identified areas.
·· Identify any areas of the site where it may be difficult to meet the credit requirements because of light
level needs, proximity to a boundary, or other factors.
STEP 2. DETERMINE LIGHTING ZONE(S)

Identify the lighting zones in the project to determine the requirements that must be met to achieve the
credit. The lighting designer or someone familiar with the project site and lighting zone classifications
should determine the project’s zones. See Further Explanation, Lighting Zones.
·· Refer to the Model Lighting Ordinance (MLO) User Guide and the five lighting zone descriptions. The
MLO provides guidance and information on determining the project lighting zone.
·· Classify the entire project as one or multiple lighting zones. The lighting designer usually completes
this step, since it requires knowledge of the project’s neighboring properties and area, plus familiarity
with the lighting zones and their associated lighting power, intensity, light spill, and other factors.
·· Review the requirements of the designated lighting zone(s) to establish allowances.
1 American Medical Association, House of Delegates, Report 4 of the Council on Science and Public Health (A-12), Light Pollution: Adverse Health Effects of
Nighttime Lighting (2009), ama-assn.org/resources/doc/csaph/a12-csaph4-lightpollution-summary.pdf (accessed March 2013).
472
STEP 3. ESTABLISH LIGHTING BOUNDARIES

Determine the location of the lighting boundary or boundaries, and create a lighting boundary site plan.
Provide justification for any modification of the lighting boundary (e.g., if the lighting boundary is moved
from the project boundary to the center line of an adjacent public street). See Further Explanation,
Lighting Boundary.
STEP 4. PREPARE PRELIMINARY SITE LIGHTING DESIGN

Prepare a site lighting plan that provides comfortable lighting in all areas while minimizing the exterior
lighting on the circulation network. Do not install street lighting in the circulation network unless it is
required by regulation or warranted for reasons of safety or comfort. Develop a luminaire schedule for
the project, selecting luminaires that eliminate or minimize uplighting and light trespass off the site. The
site lighting plan and luminaire schedule should do the following:
·· Designate all exterior luminaires (both exempt and nonexempt) inside the project boundary, and
indicate locations, including pole heights.
·· Depict the project boundary, the property line (if different from the project boundary), the lighting
boundary, any additional properties included in the lighting boundary (if applicable), and any relevant
project site conditions.
·· Indicate the total number of each luminaire type in the project.
·· Identify the manufacturer, model number, lamp type, tilt angle (if applicable), and wattage for each
luminaire type.
·· For Option 1, show the B rating, U rating, and G rating of each unique luminaire (lamp-ballast
combination) in the orientation and tilt specified in the project design.
GIB
·· For Option 2, show the total lumens per luminaire and lumens emitted above horizontal for each
unique luminaire in the orientation and tilt specified in the project design.
·· Show the performance for each angular position (tilt), if there are multiple angular positions for a
luminaire type.
·· Identify all auxiliary shielding specified.

See Further Explanation, Choosing Luminaires. This is only a preliminary design; re-design efforts may
need to occur once subsequent steps are completed and the uplighting and light trespass calculations
are known.
STEP 5. DETERMINE EXEMPTIONS

Review the list of exemptions in the credit requirements to determine whether any luminaires are
exempt from the uplighting and light trespass requirements. These exemptions may affect the choice of
luminaires.
STEP 6. SELECT UPLIGHTING AND TRESPASS COMPLIANCE OPTIONS FOR NONEXEMPT

LIGHTING
For all nonexempt lighting, determine which method of compliance documentation the project team
will follow for each of the two sets of requirements (uplight and light trespass). The options are the BUG
rating method (Option 1) and the calculation method (Option 2); the two options can also be combined.
The choice depends largely on the preliminary luminaire selections.
·· Option 1, BUG Rating Method.
°° If BUG ratings are available for all or most of the project luminaires, this will likely be the easiest
compliance path.
°° BUG ratings can also be calculated for luminaires that lack published ratings.
°° See Further Explanation, About the BUG Method and Calculating BUG Values.
·· Option 2, Calculation Method.
°° Option 2 is for projects with some luminaires that would not comply or would be difficult to include
under the BUG rating method.
°° Examples include a particular luminaire that, in itself, would not meet the BUG thresholds but when
used in concert with other luminaires can pass based on the calculation method; and adjustable
luminaires tilted from their nominal position, such that it is difficult to determine the BUG rating.
°° See Further Explanation, Vertical Illuminance and Calculating Light Trespass.
The mixed compliance path allows a project team to pursue different options for the uplighting and
trespass requirements. That is, a project can use Option 1 for uplighting and Option 2 for light trespass, or
vice versa.
473
For example, if a project is subject to a required minimum lighting level that makes it impossible to meet
the BUG limits on wattage, the team could use Option 2 for uplight because the calculation method
addresses percentages of light, not wattage. However, project teams cannot mix compliance paths within
uplight or light trespass: only one option may be used to demonstrate uplight, and only one option may
be used to demonstrate light trespass.
STEP 7. IMPLEMENT COVENANTS, CODES, AND RESTRICTIONS

Write CC&Rs based on the options selected and the strategies implemented. The CC&Rs can be
combined with other LEED-required CC&Rs.
Exterior Lighting for Residential Areas
STEP 1. DETERMINE WHETHER COMPLIANCE IS REQUIRED

Review the credit requirements and exemptions to determine whether the project has any areas that fall
into the residential category, as outlined in the credit requirements. If no lighting is required except what
is listed in the exemptions, provide justification.
STEP 2. EVALUATE COMPLIANCE

If required, demonstrate compliance via one of the two following evaluation options. If necessary, make
adjustments to the preliminary lighting design to achieve compliance.
GIB
·· Option 1, BUG Rating Method. Ensure that no luminaire exceeds the maximum BUG rating of B2-U2-G2.
BUG ratings can be calculated for luminaires that lack published ratings. See Further Explanation,
About the BUG Method.
·· Option 2, Calculation Method. Meet the requirements of Option 2 for both uplighting and trespass in

Exterior Lighting for All Other Areas. Different residential zones may use different compliance paths.
°° Modify the site lighting design or luminaire specification as necessary to achieve compliance.
°° Show the total lumens per luminaire and lumens emitted above horizontal by each luminaire (lamp-
ballast combination) for the orientation and tilt specified in the project design.
°° Show the performance for each angular position (tilt) if there are multiple angular positions for a
luminaire type.
°° Identify all auxiliary shielding specified.
See Further Explanation, Calculating Light Trespass.
Exterior Lighting for Circulation Network
STEP 1. DETERMINE NEED FOR STREET LIGHTING

Identify any areas of the circulation network that are not governed by superseding regulations.
STEP 2. MINIMIZE STREET LIGHTING

Where government regulations for street lighting do not apply, design to minimize the amount of street
lighting and do not install lighting unless warranted for reasons of safety or other concerns.
STEP 3. SPECIFY AND INSTALL FULL CUT-OFF LUMINAIRES

Ensure that no street light emits light above 90 degrees (full cut-off or U-0).
STEP 4. SPECIFY AND INSTALL COMPLIANT ORNAMENTAL LUMINAIRES

Identify any ornamental luminaires in the project. Design or choose luminaires that meet Table H in the
MLO, as noted in the credit requirements.
474
Exterior Lighting for All Other Areas

Demonstrate compliance via one of the two following evaluation options.
·· Option 1, BUG Rating Method. Based on the preliminary lighting design, confirm compliance with
the credit requirements for the maximum luminaire BUG rating for the project’s lighting zones and
luminaire locations. Ensure that no luminaire exceeds the maximum B and G ratings.
°° Consider the mounting location, the distance from the lighting boundary, and the light source when
choosing luminaires that meet the B and G ratings. Luminaires mounted high and located closest to
the lighting boundary will be the worst-case scenario and least likely to comply.
°° Consider all factors when choosing luminaires. LEDs, for example, perform differently than
traditional light sources: they are more directional and thus brighter and more likely to produce
glare, but they are also more controllable.
°° Ensure that the luminaires are located appropriately in relation to the lighting boundary, as
stipulated in the requirements. Orient all luminaires less than two mounting heights from the
building, such that the backlight points toward the nearest lighting boundary line. See Further
Explanation, Mounting Height.
°° If a luminaire is building-mounted and the backlight is oriented toward the building, it can be
exempted from the backlight requirement. In this case, only the light trespass requirements for glare
apply.
·· Option 2, Calculation Method. The vertical illuminance at the lighting boundary must not exceed the
maximum allowance (Table 4). See Further Explanation, Vertical Illuminance and Calculating Light
Trespass.
°° Determine the worst-case-scenario luminaire and provide vertical illuminance calculations on the
GIB
lighting boundary from grade level to 33 feet (10 meters) above the height of the highest luminaire
to ensure that it does not exceed the Table 4 thresholds.
°° Provide photometric information and plan for only the worst-case luminaire.
·· If the preliminary luminaires do not meet the requirements under either compliance option, adjust the
lighting design by choosing different luminaires or lamp wattages.
FURTHER EXPLANATION
LIGHTING ZONES
The Model Lighting Ordinance establishes five lighting zones, ranging from natural environments with no artificial
lighting (Lighting Zone 0) to areas of very high ambient lighting, such as Times Square in New York City (Lighting
Zone 4).
The MLO lighting zone for the project is based on the lighting zone of the immediately adjacent property at the
time construction begins.
475
TABLE 5. Model Lighting Ordinance lighting zones*
Lighting zone Definition Recommended uses
Areas where natural environment will be seriously and

adversely affected by lighting. Effects include disturbing
biological cycles of flora and fauna and/or detracting from Typically includes undeveloped areas of open
0
human enjoyment and appreciation of natural environment. space, wilderness parks and preserves, areas near
No ambient
Human activity is subordinate in importance to nature. astronomical observatories, or any other area where
lighting
Vision of human residents and users is adapted to darkness, protection of dark environment is critical.
and they expect to see little or no lighting. When not
needed, lighting should be extinguished.
Areas where lighting might harm flora and fauna or disturb

Typically includes single- and two-family residential
character of area. Vision of human residents and users
1 communities, rural town centers, business parks, and
is adapted to low light levels. Lighting may be used for
Low ambient other commercial, industrial, orstorage areas with
safety and convenience but is not necessarily uniform
lighting limited nighttime activity. May also include developed
or continuous. After curfew, most lighting should be
areas in parks and other natural settings.
extinguished or reduced as activity levels decline.
Typically includes multifamily residential uses,

institutional residential uses, schools, churches,
Areas of human activity where vision of human residents
hospitals, hotels, motels, and commercial or
2 and users is adapted to moderate light levels. Lighting may
businesses areas with evening activities in
Moderate typically be used for safety and convenience but is not
predominately residential areas. Also includes
ambient lighting necessarily uniform or continuous. After curfew, lighting
neighborhood recreational and playing fields, and
may be extinguished or reduced as activity levels decline.
mixed-use development with predominance of
residential uses.
GIB
Typically includes commercial corridors, high-intensity
Areas of human activity where vision of human residents
suburban commercial areas, town centers, mixed-
and users is adapted to moderately high light levels.
3 use areas, industrial uses and shipping and rail yards
Lighting is generally desired for safety, security and/or
Moderately high with high nighttime activity. Also includes high-use

convenience and it is often uniform and/or continuous. After
ambient lighting recreational and playing fields, regional shopping
curfew, lighting may be extinguished or reduced in most
malls, car dealerships, gas stations, and other
areas as activity levels decline.
nighttime active exterior retail areas.
Areas of human activity where vision of human residents Areas of very high ambient lighting levels, used only
and users is adapted to high light levels. Lighting is for special cases and not appropriate for most cities.
4
generally considered necessary for safety, security and/or May be used for extremely unusual installations such
High ambient
convenience and it is mostly uniform and/or continuous. as high-density entertainment districts and heavy
lighting
After curfew, lighting may be extinguished or reduced in industrial uses. (Currently only Times Square has this
some areas as activity levels decline. classification in the U.S.)
* Adapted from Model Lighting Ordinance User Guide.
LIGHTING BOUNDARY
The lighting boundary typically coincides with the property lines of the property that the LEED project occupies.
However, in certain situations the lighting boundary may be modified:
·· When the property boundary abuts a public area that includes, but is not limited to, a walkway, bikeway, plaza,
or parking lot, the lighting boundary may be moved 5 feet (1.5 meters) beyond the property line.
·· When the property boundary abuts a public roadway or public transit corridor, the lighting boundary may be
moved to the center line of that roadway or corridor.
·· When additional properties owned by the same entity responsible for the LEED project are contiguous to the
project site and have the same or a higher lighting zone as the project, the lighting boundary may be expanded
to include those properties. In these cases, it is best if a lighting master plan is developed.
CHOOSING LUMINAIRES
Once the appropriate lighting zone and boundary are established, the project’s lighting professional needs to pay
close attention to quantity, types, and locations of luminaires and the geometry of the site. The closer the luminaire
to the lighting boundary, the more likely it is that light will extend beyond the boundary. For a location with a narrow
distribution, select a luminaire with a lower pole height, or move it away from the boundary to reduce light trespass.
476
Use manufacturer’s luminaire data or IES files to obtain the necessary information for determining compliance
with this credit. Luminaires without photometric distribution data must be assumed to have 100% of their
initial lamp lumens at or above 90 degrees. For adjustable tilt luminaires, consider the angular position when
determining a BUG rating or calculating compliance. A luminaire in its nominal position may have minimal light
trespass and low illumination to the night sky (e.g., a U rating of U1). But if the designer tilts the luminaire to achieve
the desired pattern of illuminance, more light may be emitted above the horizon and change the rating to U2 or even
higher.
Determine the BUG ratings or calculations for each unique combination of luminaire and its angular position in
the lighting design. Luminaires with limited field adjustability must be assumed to have maximum tilt applied, and
lumens at or above 90 degrees must be calculated from maximum tilted orientation. To more easily meet the credit
requirements, avoid adjustable luminaire types as a primary lighting source.
The Illuminating Engineering Society has established recommendations for exterior lighting levels for various
applications. Light source selection has a significant effect on how much light is needed and how comfortable it
feels. A cooler (whiter) light source (above 2500 degrees Kelvin color temperature) with higher color rendering
index (above 80 CRI) makes it easier for people to see and to distinguish detail. By following the recommendations,
projects may be able to use lower light levels. However, to ensure acceptability and minimize liability, light levels
lower than recommended should be approved by the owner and possibly by the local jurisdiction.
ABOUT THE BUG METHOD

GIB
Backlight, uplight, and glare (BUG) ratings are used to classify luminaires and their likelihood of generating light
pollution. This comprehensive system takes into account backlight shielding, uplight shielding, and glare shielding
(Figures 1, 2), and it limits lamp lumens to values appropriate for a given lighting zone. The system includes a table
of consensus acceptable values against which the photometric data of a luminaire can be compared. BUG ratings
provide a much more detailed picture of the overall lumen distribution of a luminaire than cut-off designations.
If BUG values are available for the project’s luminaires, the team is likely to find Option 1 the easier compliance
path.
Uplight shield: full cutoff
180°
UH UH
UL UL
90° 90°
BVH FVH
80° 80°
BH FH
60° 60°
BM FM
BL FL
30° 30°
Back / Back Light Front / Forward Light Uplight

Backlight
Glare
477
Figure 1. Backlight, uplight, and glare
Non-compliant light spill Non-compliant light spill

above 90° from horizontal above 90° from horizontal
90°
FVH Very High
90°
80° FVH Very High
FH High
FH High
60°
FM Mid
FM Mid
FL Low
30° FL Low
0° 0°
View 1 View 2 - Detail
GIB
LEED PROJECT
BOUNDARY
Backlight Uplight

UH High
100° 100°
90° UL Low UL Low 90°
0°
View 3
Non-compliant light
Figure 2. Compliant
Backlight and noncompliant light
CALCULATING BUG VALUES

BUG values are typically published by product manufacturers. If published BUG data do not address the design
UCTION
position of the luminaire (or are not available at all), ratings can be calculated by reviewing a luminaire’s photometric
test data and zonal lumen distribution and comparing the data with the maximum zonal lumens for backlight,
uplight, and glare established in IES TM-15-11, Addendum A. Software is also available that calculates the BUG rating
SSc GIBc Light Pollution Reduction (Batch 2) ND
using the IES file for the luminaire.
·· For the backlight rating, determine the lowest rating at which the lumens for all secondary solid angles do not
exceed the threshold lumens from IES TM-15-11, Addendum A, Table A-1.
·· For the uplight rating, determine the lowest rating at which the lumens for all secondary solid angles do not
exceed the threshold lumens from IES TM-15-11, Addendum A, Table A-2.
·· For the glare rating, determine the lowest rating at which the lumens for all secondary solid angles do not
exceed the threshold lumens from IES TM-15-11, Addendum A, Table A-3. For building-mounted luminaires,
the BVH and BH zonal lumens do not need to be considered in determining the G rating.
478
CALCULATING LIGHT TRESPASS

To calculate light trespass, use lighting design software and develop a photometric site plan showing all installed
exterior lighting luminaires (Figure 3). Set a vertical calculation grid at each segment of the project’s lighting
boundary and the extent of the lighting zone allowances. The vertical illuminance calculation points must be no
more than 5 feet (1.5 meters) apart and extend from grade level to at least 33 feet (10 meters) above the tallest
luminaire in the project (Figure 4).

10'-0" Lighting boundary - LZ2
(3m)
Photometric calculation points
0.0 spaced 5’x5’ (1.5m x 1.5m)
1.1 2.4 2.1 2.0 1.9 1.7
Light fixture (type A)
0.0 1.4 2.7 2.6 2.0 12.5’ (3.8m) from lighting boundary
2.6 2.7
Orientation: backlight points toward the lighting boundary line
0.0 1.7 2.9 3.1
2.7 3.0 2.6
Planting strips
0.0 1.9 2.8 2.9 3.0 2.9 2.5 Proposed trees
0.0 1.5 2.6 2.7 2.6 2.8 2.2 Sidewalk
0.0 1.2 2.2 2.4 2.1 2.0 1.7

Public street
0.0 1.0 1.9 2.1 1.8 1.7 1.4
Centerline of street
GIB
0.0 0.8 1.4 1.9 1.8 1.5 1.2
0.0 1.2 1.9 2.4 2.1 1.9 1.5
0.0 2.0 2.5 2.8 2.7 2.4 2.2

0.0 2.4 3.1 3.2 3.0 2.7 2.5 Light fixture (type B)
12.5’ (3.8m) from lighting boundary
0.0 2.2 3.4 3.5 3.4 3.0 2.8 Orientation: backlight points toward the lighting boundary line
0.0 2.6 3.9 3.7 3.5 3.3

3.9
0.0 2.2 3.7 3.9 3.8 3.4 3.1
Plan (NTS)
Figure 3. Photometric site plan
VERTICAL ILLUMINANCE
Illuminance is the total quantity of light, or luminous flux, that falls on a surface, as measured in footcandles or lux.
This measurement is usually taken on the horizontal plane, at either the ground or the workplane, but measuring
vertical illuminance is helpful for understanding how much light is hitting a building façade, a human face, or the
vertical plane at a property boundary. Simply put, vertical illuminance can be explained as standing outside the
boundary looking straight into the site at eye level (or horizontal if you are on the ground looking up).
In calculation software, a vertical calculation grid is placed at the location where the measurements need to be
taken. In person, measurements are taken using a light meter held vertically. For the purposes of LEED, only the
calculation grid for the one vertical plane with greatest vertical illuminance is required to be submitted, and not
more. Projects must still assess all of the areas on the boundary for vertical illuminance, but create documentation
for only the worst case scenario because all other vertical planes will show lower illuminance values, and thus will
comply with the requirements. If there are unique situations, like sensitive areas that require different thresholds,
calculation grid documentation for those scenarios should also be submitted.
In Figure 4, the vertical illumination at a point P on a vertical surface parallel to and extending straight up from
the lighting boundary is the component of the illumination that is normal to this surface at that point. Since this
D Guide Illustrations SS9
vertical illuminance must be calculated for a grid of multiple points on the lighting boundary up to 33 feet (10 meters)
BD&C itSSc
above the height of the luminaire, Light
is usually done Pollution Reduction
with a commercially (Batch
available lighting 2) program.
software
479
33'-0"
(10m)
Vertical calculation points spaced

no more than 5ft (1.5m) apart
Tallest Luminaire
Intensity (I) of the luminaire
GIB
in the direction of the point

Angle (A) between the
incoming intensity and
the normal to the plane
P A
One of points (P) calculated

on this plane
Perpendicular (normal) to the

plane above the boundary
One portion of the

lighting boundary
Figure 4. Measuring vertical illuminance
The threshold values in Table 4 of the credit requirements must be compared with the cumulative vertical
illuminance contributed by all luminaires on the site.
MOUNTING HEIGHT
The height of the photometric center of a luminaire is considered the mounting height. Measured in distance above
grade, it informs the appropriate spacing between poles and distance from the lighting boundary (Figure 5).
480
For example, if the photometric center of a luminaire is 20 feet (6 meters) above grade, the unit of mounting
height is 20 feet (6 meters). If a pole must be two mounting heights from the lighting boundary based on the
classified zone and BUG rating, then the pole must be 40 feet (12 meters) from the nearest lighting boundary. The
mounting height and pole location need to be calculated for each luminaire.
Property line Area for lighting Vertical illuminance in the Light pollution
plane of property line concern area
Less 0.5mh
0.5mh to 1 mh
1 to 2 mh
GIB
mh = mounting height
0.5mh
1mh
2mh
Figure 5. Mounting heights
Example 1. BUG rating

A project team is attempting to pursue this credit using BUG ratings for both uplighting and light trespass (Option 1).
The project site is in lighting zone LZ2, and the preliminary design includes two exterior luminaire types: a building-
mounted wallpack luminaire and a pole-mounted site-lighting luminaire.
Based on their location on the building relative to the lighting boundary, the wallpacks fall under the category
of “building-mounted > 2 mounting heights from any lighting boundary” (Table 3). The multiple pole-mounted
luminaires throughout the site fall under two of the referenced categories: “> 2 mounting heights from lighting
boundary” and “1 to 2 mounting heights from lighting boundary and properly oriented.”
Based on the lighting zone and locations inside the lighting boundary, the team obtains the following maximum
luminaire BUG ratings from Tables 1 and 3:
TABLE 6. Maximum uplight ratings for luminaires
MLO lighting zone Luminaire uplight rating
LZ2 U2

SSc Light Pollution Reduction (Batch 2)
481
TABLE 7. Maximum backlight and glare ratings
MLO lighting zone
Luminaire mounting LZ0 LZ1 LZ2 LZ3 LZ4
Allowed backlight ratings
> 2 mounting heights from lighting boundary B1 B3 B4 B5 B5
1 to 2 mounting heights from lighting boundary

B1 B2 B3 B4 B4
and properly oriented
Allowed glare ratings
Building-mounted > 2 mounting heights from any

G0 G1 G2 G3 G4
lighting boundary
All other luminaires G0 G1 G2 G3 G4
The BUG ratings for the two specified products are as follows:
·· Wallpack, B2 U2 G2
·· Pole-mounted luminaires, B1 U0 G1
GIB
Based on the allowable maximum luminaire BUG ratings in the tables above, the specified luminaires comply with
credit requirements and are either equal to or below the maximum allowances.

Example 2. Calculating uplighting
A project team whose site falls in MLO lighting zone LZ2 is pursuing the Option 2 Calculation Method for uplighting.
The maximum allowable percentage of total luminaire lumens emitted above horizontal is 1.5%. The project must
demonstrate that 1.5% or less of total luminaire lumens is emitted above horizontal.
Based on the manufacturer’s data and IES files for the various luminaires chosen for the project, the team has
prepared a spreadsheet (Table 8).
TABLE 8. Example uplighting calculations
Total luminaire Total luminaire

Total luminaire
lumens above Total luminaire lumens above
Luminaire Quantity lumens per
90 degrees from lumens 90 degrees from
luminaire
horizontal horizontal
Type 1 10 3,000 0 30,000 0

Type 2 2 1,000 100 2,000 200
Total 32,000 200
The team calculates compliance as follows:
Total luminaire lumens = 32,000
Total lumens above 90 degrees from horizontal = 200
200 / 32,000 = 0.6%
Because 0.6% is below the maximum allowable 1.5% of total lumens above horizontal, the project achieves
compliance.
482
Example 3. Lighting plan
Light fixture (typical) LZ2 Sensitive habitat /

BUG Rating: B2-U2-G2 park space
LZ2
LZ2
LZ1
LZ2
GIB
LZ2
Clubhouse
Light Fixture Schedule
Townhomes
Fixture A
Buffer between sensitive area and development Type: Street Light Pole
Quantity: 21
Light Zone Designations: 1 and 2
Figure 6. Example lighting plan
Description of exterior lighting strategies to reduce light trespass at project site for both
LS X X
residential and nonresidential areas
USGBC LEED
LS Guide Illustrations
Description of street-lighting strategies to reduce light trespass at project site; description of any SS10
X X
ornamental luminaires in circulation network
GIBc Light Pollution Reduction (Batch 2)
LS CP CB Lighting zone(s) chosen for project X X
CP CB Site lighting plan X X
CP CB Fixture schedule showing circulation network lighting X X
For projects with nonexempt ornamental luminaires in circulation network: ornamental luminaire
CP CB X X
schedule
Uplight and light trespass: luminaire schedule showing BUG rating(s), mounting height,
CP CB X
orientation and tilt (as applicable)
CP CB Uplight: quantity of luminaires, lumens per luminaire, and lumens above horizontal X
CP CB Light trespass: vertical illuminance calculations, highlighting point of greatest illuminance X

483
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

GIB Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy Performance, and
GIB Credit Infrastructure Energy Efficiency. Installation of more luminaires at lower lamp heights to meet the
boundary restrictions and BUG requirements of this credit could make it more difficult to meet the related energy
performance prerequisite and credits. A proper lighting design both minimizes light pollution and is energy efficient.

·· Automatic controls are no longer required.
·· The BUG rating method is now a compliance option.
·· Requirements for unique lighting have been separated.
·· The concept of lighting boundaries has been added to account for varied conditions.
Illuminating Engineering Society and International Dark Sky Association (IES/IDA), Model Lighting
GIB
Ordinance (MLO) User Guide and IES TM-15-11, Addendum A: ies.org

Not available.
DEFINITIONS
BUG rating a luminaire classification system that classifies luminaires in terms of backlight (B), uplight (U), and
glare (G) (taken from IES/IDA Model Lighting Ordinance). BUG ratings supersede the former cutoff ratings.
emergency lighting a luminaire that operates only during emergency conditions and is always off during normal
building operation
illuminance the incident luminous flux density on a differential element of surface located at a point and oriented in a
particular direction, expressed in lumens per unit area. Since the area involved is differential, it is customary to refer to
this as illuminance at a point. The unit name depends on the unit of measurement for area: footcandles if square feet are
used for area, and lux if square meters are used. (Adapted from IES) In lay terms, illuminance is a measurement of light
striking a surface. It is expressed in footcandles (based on square feet) and in lux based on square meters.
light pollution waste light from building sites that produces glare, is directed upward to the sky, or is directed off the
site. Waste light does not increase nighttime safety, utility, or security and needlessly consumes energy.
light trespass obtrusive illumination that is unwanted because of quantitative, directional, or spectral attributes.
Light trespass can cause annoyance, discomfort, distraction, or loss of visibility.
mounting height the distance between ground level (or the workplane) and the center of the luminaire (light
fixture); the height at which a luminaire is installed
ornamental luminaire a luminaire intended for illuminating portions of the circulation network that also serves an
ornamental function, in addition to providing optics that effectively deliver street lighting, and has a decorative or
historical period appearance
vertical illuminance illuminance levels calculated at a point on a vertical surface, or that occur on a vertical plane
485
Innovation (in)
OVERVIEW
Sustainable design strategies and measures are constantly evolving and improving. The purpose of this LEED
category is to recognize projects for innovative planning practices and sustainable building features.
Occasionally, a strategy results in a project’s performance that greatly exceeds what is required in an existing
IN
LEED credit. Other strategies may not be addressed by any LEED prerequisite or credit but warrant consideration
for their sustainability benefits. In addition, LEED is most effectively implemented as part of a cohesive team, and
this category addresses the role of a LEED Accredited Professional in facilitating that process.
INNOVATION
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT IN
486
487
INNOVATION CREDIT
Innovation
Plan
Built Project
1–5 points
INTENT
To encourage projects to achieve exceptional or innovative performance.
IN
REQUIREMENTS
Project teams can use any combination of innovation, pilot, and exemplary performance strategies.
INNOVATION
OPTION 1. INNOVATION (1 POINT)
Achieve significant, measurable environmental performance using a strategy not addressed in the LEED green
building rating system.
Identify the following:

·· the intent of the proposed innovation credit;
·· proposed requirements for compliance;
·· proposed submittals to demonstrate compliance; and
·· the design approach or strategies used to meet the requirements.
AND/OR
OPTION 2. PILOT (1 POINT)

Achieve one pilot credit from USGBC’s LEED Pilot Credit Library.
AND/OR
OPTION 3. ADDITIONAL STRATEGIES

Innovation (1-3 points)
·· Defined in Option 1 above.
Pilot (1-3 points)

·· Meet the requirements of Option 2.
488
Exemplary Performance (1–2 points)

·· Achieve exemplary performance in an existing LEED v4 prerequisite or credit that allows exemplary
performance, as specified in the LEED Reference Guide, v4 edition. An exemplary performance point is
typically earned for achieving double the credit requirements or the next incremental percentage threshold.
IN
489
BEHIND THE INTENT

Sustainable design comes from innovative strategies and thinking. Institutional measures that reward such
thinking—such as the achievement of this credit—benefit our environment. Recognition of exceptional efforts will
spur further innovation.
When project teams innovate and go beyond LEED requirements, they not only achieve measurable
environmental benefits beyond those specified by the LEED rating system, they also have the opportunity to explore
cutting-edge pilot credits and contribute to the development of future LEED credits. When they can demonstrate
that the project exceeds the standard level of performance associated with one or more LEED credits, their
innovations can be adopted by other teams in the future.
STEP 1. IDENTIFY INNOVATIVE STRATEGIES

Innovation may begin at a project’s conception, but it can enter at any step of the process and come
from any member of the project team.
·· During initial meetings or design charrettes, explore opportunities to incorporate innovative strategies,
achieve exemplary performance for existing LEED credits, and develop pilot credits, based on the
project scope.
·· Review the project goals and targeted credits to determine whether the project is likely to meet any
exemplary performance criteria.
·· Identify any environmental strategies included in the project that are not addressed by existing LEED credits.
·· Discuss pilot credits, innovative transportation strategies, public education, and other opportunities for
IN
innovation.
STEP 2. DEVELOP INNOVATION POINT STRATEGY

Projects may earn up to 5 points through any combination of the following:
INNOVATION
·· Innovation (up to 4 points). This option is appropriate for strategies that are not addressed by any
existing credits in the LEED rating system under which the project will be certified.
·· Pilot credits (up to 4 points). This option requires project teams to achieve, document, and provide
feedback on pilot credit strategies developed by USGBC members and committees.
·· Exemplary performance (up to 2 points). This option is achieved by demonstrating performance that
greatly exceeds the level or scope required by existing LEED prerequisites or credits.
One point is reserved for pilot credits and one for innovation. To use all five points, projects must use at
least one pilot credit and one innovation credit.
Innovation (up to 4 points)

STEP 1. CONFIRM CREDIT ELIGIBILITY
For innovations that are not addressed by existing LEED credits, confirm that the proposed strategy
meets the following three basic criteria:
·· The project must demonstrate a quantitative improvement in environmental performance by
identifying or establishing a baseline of standard performance and comparing that benchmark with
the final design performance.
·· The strategy must be comprehensive. Measures that address a limited portion of a project or are not
comprehensive in other ways are not eligible. The project team must demonstrate that the proposed
innovation credit applies to the entire project being certified under LEED and has at least two
components (i.e., it is not limited to use of a single product).
·· The strategy must be significantly better than standard sustainable design practices.
Points can also be earned by achieving selected credits from other LEED rating systems. Approval of
these credits is contingent on how well the credit applies to the ND rating system.
490
Strategies must demonstrate a comprehensive approach, have significant, measurable environmental

benefits, and be better than standard practice (see Further Explanation, Suggested Topics for Innovation
Credits and Ineligible Strategies).
STEP 2. DEVELOP DOCUMENTATION

Document credit eligibility as outlined above, and note any project-specific strategies. For credits from
other LEED rating systems, provide the completed LEED credit or prerequisite form and all associated
documentation.
STEP 3. IMPLEMENT CREDIT

Develop and execute the innovative strategy or program in a manner that yields a meaningful
environmental benefit. Retain documentation and calculations to validate the project team’s approach
and implementation.
Pilot credits (up to 4 points)

STEP 1. SELECT CREDIT
Select a credit from the LEED Pilot Credit Library on the USGBC website. The Pilot Credit Library
includes credit intent, requirements, submittals, and feedback questions for each pilot credit.
·· Pilot credits open and close at varying intervals. Check the USGBC website for a current list of
available pilot credit strategies.
·· Pilot credits are specific to the rating systems. Review the list on the USGBC website to identify pilot
credits for the applicable rating system.
STEP 2. REGISTER PILOT CREDIT

Register for the selected pilot credit through the Pilot Credit Library.
·· Since pilot credit availability changes over time, register for a credit as soon as the project team
IN
decides to pursue it, rather than waiting until documentation review.

·· Once a project has registered for a pilot credit, the project team may continue to pursue it even if it is
closed to new registrants.
STEP 3. IMPLEMENT CREDIT

Follow the steps to implement the credit as outlined in the pilot credit. Visit the LEEDuser forums for the
selected pilot credit to ask questions or get advice on strategy.
STEP 4. PROVIDE FEEDBACK

Complete the credit’s feedback survey, found on the USGBC website. Include any information that might
be helpful in future revisions of the credit.
STEP 5. DOCUMENT CREDIT

Complete all credit-specific documentation as outlined in the pilot credit.
·· Some pilot credits have documentation forms or calculators.
·· Pilot credits may be attempted in any review stage and can be replaced before the next review if the
initial credit is not accepted.
Exemplary Performance (up to 2 points)

STEP 1. IDENTIFY TARGET EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE CREDITS
During design, review exemplary performance criteria and select credits for which exemplary
performance will be pursued. Credits that allow exemplary performance through a predetermined
approach are noted throughout this reference guide.
STEP 2. CONFIRM IMPLEMENTATION

Document design elements and specifications requirements to ensure that the selected exemplary
performance criteria are met. Provide the required documentation as noted in the base credit.
491
FURTHER EXPLANATION
SUGGESTED TOPICS FOR INNOVATION CREDITS

Project teams are encouraged to explore the full range of innovative opportunities in their buildings. Refer to
the online Innovation database for examples of successful Innovation credits. The examples do not constitute
preapproval of any innovation strategy, however, and Innovation credit awarded for a project today does not imply
automatic approval for similar strategies in the future. A team seeking formal preapproval should submit a credit
interpretation request (CIR).
INELIGIBLE STRATEGIES
Innovation credits are not awarded for the use of a particular product or design strategy if the technology aids in the
achievement of an existing LEED credit, even if the project is not attempting to earn that credit.
Innovation strategies that are closed pilot credits are not available unless they are listed in the online Innovation
database.
No strategy can achieve more than 1 point under Innovation. That is, a single strategy cannot be double-counted
for both exemplary performance and innovation (or both exemplary performance and a pilot credit, or both a
pilot credit and innovation). Additionally, building-based strategies documented for the project’s LEED-certified
buildings may not be applied to the LEED ND project as innovation strategies.
The innovation strategy must be specific to the LEED project under review.
IN
Exemplary
Documentation Innovation Pilot credit
performance
LS CP CB Innovation narrative* X
INNOVATION
CP CB Supporting documentation X X X
LS CP CB Pilot credit registration X
CP CB Pilot credit survey X
CP CB Pilot credit specific submittals X
LS CP CB Exemplary performance credit and level X
*A comprehensive description of the innovation strategy may be acceptable for Letter of Support projects and some
Certified Plan projects.
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.

The maximum number of exemplary performance strategies eligible for IN credits has changed from three to two.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT IN
492
None.
None.
DEFINITIONS
493
INNOVATION CREDIT
LEED Accredited
Professional
Plan
Built Project
1 point
INTENT
To encourage the team integration required by a LEED project and to

streamline the application and certification process.
IN
LEED ACCREDITED PROFESSIONAL
REQUIREMENTS
At least one principal participant of the project team must be a LEED Accredited Professional (AP) with a specialty
appropriate for the project.
494
BEHIND THE INTENT

A LEED Accredited Professional (LEED AP) with specialty can be a valuable resource in the LEED certification
process. The presence of a LEED AP with specialty helps project team members understand the rating system, the
importance of interactions among the prerequisites and credits, and the LEED application process.
STEP 1. ENGAGE LEED AP WITH SPECIALTY

Identify a project team member who is a LEED AP with specialty, or engage a LEED AP with specialty to
support the project and participate in the certification process.
·· Select a team member with a LEED AP Neighborhood Development (LEED AP ND) credential.
·· The LEED AP with specialty identified for this credit must have an active credential at the time of
certification review (see Further Explanation, Maintaining a LEED Credential).
·· LEED APs without specialty (legacy LEED APs) do not qualify for this credit.
IN
495
FURTHER EXPLANATION
MAINTAINING A LEED CREDENTIAL

The LEED AP with specialty credential can be maintained through either of the following methods:
·· Retaking and passing the LEED accreditation exam
·· Earning 30 continuing education hours per credentialing period
A credential is considered active (and eligible for this credit) only if the credential holder has completed his or her
credential maintenance through the GBCI Credential Maintenance Program. For more information, visit USGBC’s
website.
Documentation Required
Full name and specialty credential of LEED AP x
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.
IN
LEED APs without specialty (legacy LEED APs) are no longer eligible for this credit.
LEED ACCREDITED PROFESSIONAL

None.
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
None.
497
Regional Priority (rp)

OVERVIEW
Because some environmental issues are particular to a locale, volunteers from USGBC chapters and the LEED
REGIONAL PRIORITY
International Roundtable have identified distinct environmental priorities within their areas and the credits that
address those issues. These Regional Priority credits encourage project teams to focus on their local environmental
priorities.
USGBC established a process that identified six RP credits for every location and every rating system within
chapter or country boundaries. Participants were asked to determine which environmental issues were most salient
in their chapter area or country. The issues could be naturally occurring (e.g., water shortages) or man-made (e.g.,
polluted watersheds) and could reflect environmental concerns (e.g., water shortages) or environmental assets (e.g.,
abundant sunlight). The areas, or zones, were defined by a combination of priority issues—for example, an urban
RP
area with an impaired watershed versus an urban area with an intact watershed. The participants then prioritized
credits to address the important issues of given locations.
The ultimate goal of RP credits is to enhance the ability of LEED project teams to address critical environmental
issues across the country and around the world.
RP LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT
498
499
REGIONAL PRIORITY CREDIT
Regional Priority
Plan
Built Project
1–4 points
INTENT
To provide an incentive for the achievement of credits that address

geographically specific environmental, social equity, and public health
REGIONAL PRIORITY
priorities.
REQUIREMENTS
Earn up to four of the six Regional Priority credits. These credits have been identified by the USGBC regional
RP
councils and chapters as having additional regional importance for the project’s region. A database of Regional
Priority credits and their geographic applicability is available on the USGBC website, http://www.usgbc.org.
One point is awarded for each Regional Priority credit achieved, up to a maximum of four.
500
BEHIND THE INTENT

LEED projects are designed, built, and operated in many different contexts. Climate, population density, and local
regulations can differ significantly from one location to another, making certain environmental issues more critical
than others. Examples include water conservation in arid climates versus rainwater management in wet climates.
LEED projects can be more transformative if teams recognize their location’s priority environmental issues and
address them through design, construction, and operation choices. LEED encourages a focus on regional issues
through RP credits—existing LEED credits that USGBC volunteers have determined to be especially important in a
given area. For every location in the U.S., six credits are prioritized. The ultimate intent is to motivate project teams
to earn the credits that address an area’s priority issues.
STEP 1. IDENTIFY APPLICABLE RP CREDITS

Review the credits flagged for regional priority in the project’s area (see USGBC’s website). Consider how
achievement of these credits will affect the project.
STEP 2. DETERMINE PERFORMANCE REQUIRED TO EARN RP POINTS

·· For credits with multiple thresholds (e.g., percentage improvement in energy efficiency), points are
awarded at particular levels of achievement.
·· If such a credit is flagged as RP for the project’s location, confirm the threshold the project must meet
to earn the bonus point.
RP
501
FURTHER EXPLANATION
None.
Documentation
No additional documentation is required to earn Regional Priority credits. Document compliance for the selected credits, and the related RP
bonus points for their achievement will be awarded automatically.
RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.

The RP credits for a given region may be different than they were for LEED 2009.
REGIONAL PRIORITY
None.
RP
Not available.
DEFINITIONS
None.
APPENDICES LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT
502
503
APPENDICES
APPENDIX 1. USE TYPES AND CATEGORIES
TABLE 1. Use Types and Categories
Category Use type
Food retail Supermarket
Grocery with produce section
Community-serving retail Convenience store
Farmers market
Hardware store
Pharmacy
Other retail
Services Bank
Family entertainment venue (e.g., theater, sports)
Gym, health club, exercise studio
Hair care
Laundry, dry cleaner
Restaurant, café, diner (excluding those with only drive-thru

service)
Civic and community facilities Adult or senior care (licensed)
Child care (licensed)
Community or recreation center
Cultural arts facility (museum, performing arts)
Education facility (e.g., K—12 school, university, adult

education center, vocational school, community college)
Government office that serves public on-site
Medical clinic or office that treats patients
Place of worship
Police or fire station
Post office APPENDICES
Public library
Public park
Social services center
Community anchor uses (BD+C and ID+C only) Commercial office (100 or more full-time equivalent jobs)
Adapted from Criterion Planners, INDEX neighborhood completeness indicator, 2005.

504
APPENDIX 2. DEFAULT OCCUPANCY COUNTS
Use Table 1 to calculate default occupancy counts. Only use the occupancy estimates if occupancy is unknown.
For the calculation, use gross floor area, not net or leasable floor area. Gross floor area is defined as the sum of
all areas on all floors of a building included within the outside faces of the exterior wall, including common areas,
mechanical spaces, circulation areas, and all floor penetrations that connect one floor to another. To determine gross
floor area, multiply the building footprint (in square feet or square meters) by the number of floors in the building.
Exclude underground or structured parking from the calculation.
TABLE 1. Default Occupancy Numbers
Gross square feet per occupant Gross square meters per occupant
Employees Transients Employees Transients
General office 250 0 23 0
Retail, general 550 130 51 12
Retail or service (e.g., financial, 600 130 56 12

auto)
Restaurant 435 95 40 9
Grocery store 550 115 51 11
Medical office 225 330 21 31
R&D or laboratory 400 0 37 0

Warehouse, distribution 2,500 0 232 0
Warehouse, storage 20,000 0 1860 0
Hotel 1,500 700 139 65
Educational, daycare 630 105 59 10
Educational, K–12 1,300 140 121 13
Educational, postsecondary 2,100 150 195 14
Sources:
·· ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2004 (Atlanta, GA, 2004).
·· 2001 Uniform Plumbing Code (Los Angeles, CA)
·· California Public Utilities Commission, 2004–2005 Database for Energy Efficiency Resources (DEER) Update
Study (2008).
·· California State University, Capital Planning, Design and Construction Section VI, Standards for Campus
Development Programs (Long Beach, CA, 2002).
·· City of Boulder Planning Department, Projecting Future Employment—How Much Space per Person
(Boulder, 2002).
APPENDICES
·· Metro, 1999 Employment Density Study (Portland, OR 1999).

·· American Hotel and Lodging Association, Lodging Industry Profile Washington, DC, 2008.
·· LEED for Core & Shell Core Committee, personal communication (2003 - 2006).
·· LEED for Retail Core Committee, personal communication (2007)
·· OWP/P, Medical Office Building Project Averages (Chicago, 2008).
·· OWP/P, University Master Plan Projects (Chicago, 2008).
·· U.S. General Services Administration, Childcare Center Design Guide (Washington, DC, 2003).
505
APPENDIX 3. RETAIL PROCESS LOAD BASELINES
TABLE 1A. Commercial kitchen appliance prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget (IP units)
Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path
Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance Type Fuel Function
Efficiency Idle Rate Efficiency Idle Rate
Broiler, underfired Gas Cooking 30% 16,000 Btu/h/ 35% 12,000 Btu/h/ft2
ft2 peak input peak input
Combination ovens, Elec Cooking 40% steam 0.37P+4.5 kW 50% steam mode 0.133P+0.6400 kW
steam mode mode
(P = pan capacity)
Combination ovens, Gas Cooking 20% steam 1,210P+35,810 38% steam mode 200P+6,511 Btu/h
steam mode mode Btu/h
Combination ovens, Elec Cooking 65% 0.1P+1.5 kW 70% convection mode 0.080P+0.4989 kW
convection mode convection
mode
Combination ovens, Gas Cooking 35% 322P+13,563 44% convection mode 150P+5,425 Btu/h
convection mode convection Btu/h
mode
Convection oven, Elec Cooking 65% 2.0 kW 71% 1.6 kW

full-size
Convection oven, Gas Cooking 30% 18,000 Btu/h 46% 12,000 Btu/h
full-size

half-size
Conveyor oven, > Gas Cooking 20% 70,000 Btu/h 42% 57,000 Btu/h
25-inch belt
Conveyor oven, ≤ Gas Cooking 20% 45,000 Btu/h 42% 29,000 Btu/h
25-inch belt
Fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.05 kW 80% 1.0 kW
Fryer Gas Cooking 35% 14,000 Btu/h 50% 9,000 Btu/h

2
Griddle (based on Elec Cooking 60% 400 W/ft 70% 320 W/ft2
3 ft model)
Griddle (based on Gas Cooking 30% 3,500 Btu/h/ 38% 2,650 Btu/h/ft2
3 ft model) ft2
Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 na 21.5V Watts

cabinets (excluding
drawer warmers
and heated display)
0 < V < 13 ft³ (V =
volume)
Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 na 2.0V + 254 Watts

cabinets (excluding
APPENDICES
drawer warmers
and heated display)
13 ≤ V < 28 ft³
Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 na 3.8V + 203.5 Watts

cabinets (excluding
drawer warmers
and heated display)
28 ft³ ≤ V
Large vat fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.35 kW 80% 1.1 kW

506
TABLE 1A (CONTINUED). Commercial kitchen appliance prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget (IP units)

Large vat fryer Gas Cooking 35% 20,000 Btu/h 50% 12,000 Btu/h
Rack oven, double Gas Cooking 30% 65,000 Btu/h 50% 35,000 Btu/h
Rack oven, single Gas Cooking 30% 43,000 Btu/h 50% 29,000 Btu/h
Range Elec Cooking 70% 80%
Range Gas Cooking 35% na 40% and no standing na

pilots
Steam cooker, Elec Cooking 26% 200 W/pan 50% 135 W/pan
batch cooking
Steam cooker, Gas Cooking 15% 2,500 Btu/h/ 38% 2,100 Btu/h/pan
batch cooking pan
Steam cooker, high Elec Cooking 26% 330 W/pan 50% 275 W/pan
production or cook
to order
Steam cooker, high Gas Cooking 15% 5,000 Btu/h/ 38% 4,300 Btu/h/pan
production or cook pan
to order
Toaster Elec Cooking na 1.8 kW average na 1.2 kW average

operating operating energy
energy rate rate
Ice machine, IMH Elec Ice 6.89 – na 37.72*H-0.298 kWh/100 na

(ice-making head, 0.0011H lb ice
H = harvest ice), H kWh/100
≥ 450 lb/day lb ice
Ice machine, IMH Elec Ice 10.26 – na 37.72*H-0.298 kWh/100 na

(ice-making head), 0.0086H lb ice
H < 450 lb/day kWh/100
lb ice
Ice machine Elec Ice 8.85 – na 22.95*H-0.258 + 1.00 na

RCU (remote 0.0038H kWh/100 lb ice
condensing unit, kWh/100lb
w/o remote ice
compressor), H <
1,000 lb/day
Ice machine Elec Ice 5.10 na 22.95*H-0.258 + 1.00 na

RCU (remote kWh/100 kWh/100 lb ice
condensing unit), lb ice
1600 > H ≥ 1000
lb/day
Ice machine Elec Ice 5.10 na -0.00011*H + 4.60 na

RCU (remote kWh/100 kWh/100 lb ice
condensing unit), lb ice
APPENDICES
H ≥ 1600 lb/day
Ice machine SCU Elec Ice 18.0 – na 48.66*H-0.326 + 0.08 na

(self-contained 0.0469H kWh/100 lb ice
unit), H < 175 lb/day kWh/100
lb ice
Ice machine self- Elec Ice 9.80 na 48.66*H-0.326 + 0.08 na

contained unit, H ≥ kWh/100 kWh/100 lb ice
175 lb/day lb ice
507

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 4.0 na 3.68 kWh/100 lb ice na

cooled ice-making kWh/100
head, H ≥ 1436 lb/ lb ice
day (must be on
chilled loop)
Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 5.58 – na 5.13 – 0.001H kWh/100 na

cooled ice-making 0.0011H lb ice
head, 500 lb/day < kWh/100
H < 1436 (must be lb ice
on chilled loop)
Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 7.80 – na 7.02 – 0.0049H na

cooled ice-making 0.0055H kWh/100 lb ice
head, H < 500 lb/ kWh/100
day (must be on lb ice
chilled loop)
Ice machine Elec Ice Banned Banned Banned Banned

water-cooled once-
through (open
loop)
Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 11.4 – na 10.6 – 0.177H kWh/100 na

cooled SCU (self- 0.0190H lb ice
contained unit), H kWh/100
< 200 lb/day (must lb ice
be on chilled loop)
Ice machine, Elec Ice 7.6 na 7.07 kWh/100 lb ice na

water-cooled self- kWh/100
contained unit, H ≥ lb ice
200 lb/day (must
be on chilled loop)
Chest freezer, solid Elec Refrig 0.45V + na ≤ 0.270V + 0.130 kWh/ na

or glass door 0.943 kWh/ day
day
Chest refrigerator, Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 na ≤ 0.125V + 0.475 kWh/ na

solid or glass door kWh/day day
Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.75V + 4.10 na ≤ 0.607V + 0.893 kWh/ na

freezer 0 < V < kWh/day day
15 ft³
Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.75V + 4.10 na ≤ 0.733V – 1.00 kWh/ na

freezer 15 ≤ V < kWh/day day
30 ft³

freezer, 30 ≤ V < kWh/day day
50 ft³

APPENDICES
freezer, 50 ≤ V ft³ kWh/day day

refrigerator, 0 < V kWh/day day
< 15 ft³

refrigerator, 15 ≤ V kWh/day day
< 30 ft³

< 50 ft³
508


refrigerator, 50 ≤ kWh/day day
V ft³
Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.4V + 1.38 na ≤ 0.250V + 1.25 kWh/ na

freezer, 0 < V < kWh/day day
15 ft³
Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.4V + 1.38 na ≤ 0.400V – 1.000 kWh/ na

30 ft³

50 ft³

freezer, 50 ≤ V ft³ kWh/day day

refrigerator, 0 < V kWh/day day
< 15 ft³

< 30 ft³


< 50 ft³

refrigerator, 50 ≤ kWh/day day
V ft³
Clothes washer Gas Sanitation 1.72 MEF na 2.00 MEF na
Door-type dish Elec Sanitation na 1.0 kW na 0.70 kW

machine, high temp
Door-type dish Elec Sanitation na 0.6 kW na 0.6 kW

machine, low temp
Multitank rack Elec Sanitation na 2.6 kW na 2.25 kW

conveyor dish
machine, high temp
Multitank rack Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW na 2.0 kW

conveyor dish
machine, low temp
Single-tank rack Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW na 1.5 kW

conveyor dish
machine, high temp
APPENDICES

conveyor dish
machine, low temp
Undercounter dish Elec Sanitation na 0.9 kW na 0.5 kW

machine, high temp

machine, low temp
509
The energy efficiency, idle energy rates, and water use requirements, where applicable, are based on the following test methods:
ASTM F1275 Standard Test Method for Performance of Griddles
ASTM F1361 Standard Test Method for Performance of Open Deep Fat Fryers
ASTM F1484 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Steam Cookers
ASTM F1496 Standard Test Method for Performance of Convection Ovens
ASTM F1521 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Range Tops
ASTM F1605 Standard Test Method for Performance of Double-Sided Griddles
ASTM F1639 Standard Test Method for Performance of Combination Ovens
ASTM F1695 Standard Test Method for Performance of Underfired Broilers
ASTM F1696 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Single-Rack Hot Water Sanitizing, ASTM Door-Type Commercial Dishwashing
Machines
ASTM F1704 Standard Test Method for Capture and Containment Performance of Commercial Kitchen Exhaust Ventilation Systems
ASTM F1817 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Ovens
ASTM F1920 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Rack Conveyor, Hot Water Sanitizing, Commercial Dishwashing Machines
ASTM F2093 Standard Test Method for Performance of Rack Ovens
ASTM F2140 Standard Test Method for Performance of Hot Food Holding Cabinets
ASTM F2144 Standard Test Method for Performance of Large Open Vat Fryers
ASTM F2324 Standard Test Method for Prerinse Spray Valves
ASTM F2380 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Toasters
ARI 810-2007: Performance Rating of Automatic Commercial Ice Makers
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 72–2005: Method of Testing Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers with temperature setpoints at 38°F for medium-
temp refrigerators, 0°F for low-temp freezers, and -15°F for ice cream freezers
TABLE 1B. Commercial Kitchen Appliance Prescriptive Measures and Baseline for Energy Cost Budget (SI units)

Appliance type Fuel Function
Efficiency idle Rate Efficiency idle Rate
Broiler, underfired Gas Cooking 30% 50.5 kW/m2 35% 37.9 kW/m2
Combination oven, Elec Cooking 40% steam 0.37P + 4.5 kW 50% steam mode 0.133P + 0.6400
steam mode (P = pan mode kW
capacity)
Combination oven, Gas Cooking 20% steam (1 210P + 38% steam mode (200P + 6 511)/
steam mode mode 35 810)/3 412 3 412 kW
kW
Combination oven, Elec Cooking 65% 0.1P + 1.5 kW 70% convection mode 0.080P + 0.4989
convection mode convection kW
mode
Combination oven, Gas Cooking 35% (322P + 44% convection mode (150P + 5 425)/
convection mode convection 13 563)/3 412 3 412 kW
mode kW

full-size
Convection oven, Gas Cooking 30% 5.3 kW 46% 3.5 kW

full-size
APPENDICES
half-size
Conveyor oven, > 63.5- Gas Cooking 20% 20.5 kW 42% 16.7 kW
cm belt
Conveyor oven, < 63.5- Gas Cooking 20% 13.2 kW 42% 8.5 kW
cm belt
Fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.05 kW 80% 1.0 kW
Fryer Gas Cooking 35% 4.1 kW 50% 2.64 kW
Griddle (based on 90- Elec Cooking 60% 4.3 kW/m2 70% 3.45 kW/m2
cm model)
510
TABLE 1B (CONTINUED). Commercial Kitchen Appliance Prescriptive Measures and Baseline for Energy Cost Budget (SI units)

Griddle (based on 90- Gas Cooking 30% 11 kW/m2 33% 8.35 kW/m2
cm model)
Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 na (21.5*V)/0.0283

cabinets (excluding kW/m3
drawer warmers and
heated display) 0 < V <
0.368 m3 (V = volume)
Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 na (2.0*V +

cabinets (excluding 254)/0.0283 kW/m3
drawer warmers and
heated display) 0.368 ≤
V < 0.793 m3
Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 na (3.8*V +

cabinets (excluding 203.5)/0.0283
drawer warmers and kW/m3
heated display) 0.793
m3 ≤ V
Large vat fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.35 kW 80% 1.1 kW
Large vat fryer Gas Cooking 35% 5.86 kW 50% 3.5 kW
Rack oven, double Gas Cooking 30% 19 kW 50% 10.25 kW
Rack oven, single Gas Cooking 30% 12.6 kW 50% 8.5 kW

Range Elec Cooking 70% na 80% na
Range Gas Cooking 35% na 40% and no standing na

pilots
Steam cooker, batch Elec Cooking 26% 200 W/pan 50% 135 W/pan
cooking
Steam cooker, batch Gas Cooking 15% 733 W/pan 38% 615 W/pan
cooking
Steam cooker, high Elec Cooking 26% 330 W/pan 50% 275 W/pan
production or cook to
order
Steam cooker, high Gas Cooking 15% 1.47 kW/pan 38% 1.26 kW/pan
production or cook to
order
Toaster Elec Cooking na 1.8 kW average na 1.2 kW average

operating operating energy
energy rate rate
Ice machine IMH (ice- Elec Ice 0.0015 – na— ≤ 13.52*H-0.298 kWh/100 na
making head, H = ice 5.3464E-07 kg ice
harvest) H ≥ 204 kg/day kWh/kg ice
APPENDICES
Ice machine IMH (ice Elec Ice 0.2262 – na ≤ 13.52*H-0.298 kWh/100 na

making head) ice- 4.18E-04 kg ice
making head, H < 204 kWh/kg ice
kg/day
Ice machine, RCU Elec Ice 0.1951 – na ≤ 111.5835*H-0.258 + 2.205 na

(remote condensing 1.85E-04 kWh/100 kg ice
unit, w/o remote kWh/kg ice
compressor) H < 454
kg/day
511

Ice machine RCU Elec Ice 0.1124 kWh/ na ≤ 111.5835*H-0.258 + 2.205 na

(remote condensing kg ice kWh/100 kg ice
unit) 726 > H ≥ 454
kg/day
Ice machine RCU Elec Ice 0.1124 kWh/ na ≤ -0.00024H + 4.60 na

(remote condensing kg ice kWh/100 kg ice
unit) H ≥ 726 kg/day
Ice machine SCU (self Elec Ice 0.3968 – na 236.59*H-0.326 + 0.176 na

contained unit), H < 79 2.28E-03 kWh/100 kg ice
kg/day kWh/kg ice
Ice machine SCU (self- Elec Ice 0.2161 kWh/ na 236.59*H-0.326 + 0.176 na
contained unit), H ≥ 79 kg ice kWh/100 kg ice
kg/day
Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 0.0882 na ≤ 8.11 kWh/100 kg ice na

cooled ice-making head, kWh/kg ice
H ≥ 651 kg/day (must be
on a chilled loop)
Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 0.1230 – na ≤ 11.31 – 0.065H na

cooled ice-making head, 5.35E-05 kWh/100 kg ice
227 ≤ H < 651 kg/day kWh/kg ice
(must be on a chilled
loop)
Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 0.1720 – na ≤ 15.48 – 0.0238H na

cooled ice-making head, 2.67E-04 kWh/100 kg ice
H < 227 kg/day (must be kWh/kg ice
on a chilled loop)
Ice machine, water- Elec Ice Banned Banned Banned Banned

cooled once-through
(open loop)
Ice machine water- Elec Ice 0.2513 – na ≤ 23.37 – 0.086H na

cooled SCU (self- 29.23E-04 kWh/100 kg ice
contained unit) H < 91 kWh/kg ice
kg/day (must be on a
chilled loop)
Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 0.1676 kWh/ na 15.57 kWh/100 kg ice na
cooled SCU (self- kg ice
contained unit) H ≥ 91
kg/day (must be on a
chilled loop)
Chest freezer, solid or Elec Refrig 15.90V + na 9.541V + 0.130 kWh/day na

glass door 0.943 kWh/
day
Chest refrigerator, solid Elec Refrig 3.53V + na ≤ 4.417V + 0.475 kWh/ na

or glass door 2.04 kWh/ day
APPENDICES
day

freezer, 0 < V < 0.42 m3 kWh/day day
Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 26.50V + 4.1 na ≤ 25.901V – 1.00 kWh/ na

freezer, 0.42 ≤ V < kWh/day day
0.85 m3

1.42 m3
512


freezer, 1.42 ≤ V m3 kWh/day day
Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 4.24V + na ≤ 4.169V + 1.382 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0 < V < 3.34 kWh/ day
0.42 m3 day

refrigerator, 0.42 ≤ V < 3.34 kWh/ day
0.85 m3 day

1.42 m3 day

refrigerator, 1.42 ≤ V m3 3.34 kWh/ day
day

freezer, 0 < V < 0.42 m3 kWh/day day
Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 14.13V + 1.38 na ≤ 4.819V – 1.000 kWh/ na

freezer, 0.42 < V < kWh/day day
0.85 m3

1.42 m3

freezer, 1.42 ≤ V m3 kWh/day day
Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 3.53V + na ≤ 3.145V + 1.411 kWh/day na

refrigerator, 0 < V < 2.04 kWh/
0.42 m3 day
Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 3.53V + na ≤ 1.307V + 2.200 kWh/ na

0.85 m3 day

1.42 m3 day

refrigerator, 1.42 ≤ V m3 2.04 kWh/ day
day
Clothes washer Gas Sanitation 1.72 MEF 2.00 MEF
Door-type dish machine, Elec Sanitation na 1.0 kW na 0.70 kW

high temp
Door-type dish machine, Elec Sanitation na 0.6 kW na 0.6 kW

APPENDICES
low temp
Multitank rack conveyor Elec Sanitation na 2.6 kW na 2.25 kW

dish machine, high temp
Multitank rack conveyor Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW na 2.0 kW

dish machine, low temp

conveyor dish machine,
high temp
513


conveyor dish machine,
low temp

machine, high temp

machine, low temp
The energy efficiency, idle energy rates, and water use requirements, where applicable, are based on the following test methods:
ASTM F1275 Standard Test Method for Performance of Griddles
ASTM F1361 Standard Test Method for Performance of Open Deep Fat Fryers
ASTM F1484 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Steam Cookers
ASTM F1496 Standard Test Method for Performance of Convection Ovens
ASTM F1521 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Range Tops
ASTM F1605 Standard Test Method for Performance of Double-Sided Griddles
ASTM F1639 Standard Test Method for Performance of Combination Ovens
ASTM F1695 Standard Test Method for Performance of Underfired Broilers
ASTM F1696 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Single-Rack Hot Water Sanitizing, ASTM Door-Type Commercial Dishwashing Machines
ASTM F1704 Standard Test Method for Capture and Containment Performance of Commercial Kitchen Exhaust Ventilation Systems
ASTM F1817 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Ovens
ASTM F1920 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Rack Conveyor, Hot Water Sanitizing, Commercial Dishwashing Machines
ASTM F2093 Standard Test Method for Performance of Rack Ovens
ASTM F2140 Standard Test Method for Performance of Hot Food Holding Cabinets
ASTM F2144 Standard Test Method for Performance of Large Open Vat Fryers
ASTM F2324 Standard Test Method for Prerinse Spray Valves
ASTM F2380 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Toasters
ARI 810-2007: Performance Rating of Automatic Commercial Ice Makers
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 72–2005: Method of Testing Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers with temperature setpoints at 3°C for mediumtemp
refrigerators, -18°C for low-temp freezers, and -26°C for ice cream freezers.
TABLE 2. Supermarket refrigeration prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget
Prescriptive Baseline for

Item Attribute
Measure Energy Modeling Path
Commercial Refrigerator and Energy Use Limits ASHRAE 90.1-2010 ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Addendum g.
Freezers Addendum g. Table 6.8.1L Table 6.8.1L
Commercial Refrigeration Energy Use Limits ASHRAE 90.1-2010 ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Addendum g.
Equipment Addendum g. Table 6.8.1M Table 6.8.1M
TABLE 3. Walk-in coolers and freezers prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget
APPENDICES
Baseline for
Item Attribute Prescriptive Measure
Energy Modeling Path
Envelope Freezer insulation R-46 R-36
Cooler insulation R-36 R-20
Automatic closer Yes No

doors
High-efficiency low- 40W/ft (130W/m) of door 40W/ft (130W/m) of door frame (low
or no-heat reach-in frame (low temperature), 17W/ temperature), 17W/ft (55W/m) of door frame
doors ft (55W/m) of door frame (medium temperature)
(medium temperature)
514
Evaporator Evaporator fan motor Shaded pole and split phase Constant-speed fan
and control motors prohibited; use PSC or
EMC motors
Hot gas defrost No electric defrosting Electric defrosting
Condenser Air-cooled condenser Shaded pole and split phase Cycling one-speed fan
fan motor and motors prohibited; use PSC or
control EMC motors; add condenser
fan controllers
Air-cooled condenser Floating head pressure controls 10°F (-12°C) to 15°F

design approach or ambient subcooling (-9°C) dependent on suction temperature
Lighting Lighting power 0.6 W/sq.ft. 0.6 W/sq.ft.

density (W/sq.ft.) (6.5 W/sq. meter) (6.5 W/sq. meter)
Commercial Refrigerator and Energy Use Limits na Use an Exceptional Calculation Method if
Freezers attempting to take savings
Commercial Refrigerator and Energy Use Limits na Use an Exceptional Calculation Method if
Freezers attempting to take savings
TABLE 4. Commercial kitchen ventilation prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget
Strategies Prescriptive Measure Baseline
Kitchen hood control ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Section 6.5.7.1, except that ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Section 6.5.7.1 and Section G3.1.1
Section 6.5.7.1.3 and Section 6.5.7.1.4 shall apply Exception (d) where applicable
if the total kitchen exhaust airflow rate exceeds
2,000 cfm (960 L/s) (as opposed to 5,000 cfm
(2,400 L/s) noted in the ASHRAE 90.1-2010
requirements)
APPENDICES
515
APPENDIX 4. BUILDING ENERGY PERFORMANCE GUIDELINES
INTRODUCTION 516
OPTION 1. WHOLE-BUILDING ENERGY SIMULATION 516

Step-by-Step Guidance...........................................................................................................................................................................516
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 versus 90.1–2007..............................................................................................................................................518
Energy Modeler’s Qualifications.........................................................................................................................................................519
Developing a Preliminary Energy Model.........................................................................................................................................519
Modeling HVAC Systems...................................................................................................................................................................... 520
Building the Proposed Energy Model............................................................................................................................................ 520
Building the Baseline Energy Model............................................................................................................................................... 520
Finalizing the Energy Models............................................................................................................................................................... 521
Modeling with the Exceptional Calculation Method................................................................................................................ 522
Common Issues with Energy Modeling..........................................................................................................................................525
Modeling Schedules................................................................................................................................................................................ 530
Modeling Building Type Variations.................................................................................................................................................. 530
Core and Shell................................................................................................................................................................................ 530
Retail................................................................................................................................................................................................... 530
Data Centers..................................................................................................................................................................................... 531
Modeling District Energy Systems....................................................................................................................................................533
Option 1, Path 1. ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G........................................................................................................533
Option 1, Path 2. Full DES Performance Accounting...................................................................................................534
Option 1, Path 3. Streamlined DES Modeling...................................................................................................................535
Combined Heat and Power Plants........................................................................................................................................536
Special Situations for DES Energy Models.......................................................................................................................539
OPTION 2. PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE: 540

ASHRAE 50% ADVANCED ENERGY DESIGN GUIDE
OPTION 3. PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE: 541

ADVANCED BUILDINGS™ CORE PERFORMANCE™ GUIDE APPENDICES
516
INTRODUCTION
This appendix guides teams through the details of meeting GIB Prerequisite Minimum Building Energy Performance
and earning points under GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy Performance.
The first section below, for teams using Option 1, Whole-Building Energy Simulation, explains how to create
the baseline and proposed models, lists common errors in energy modeling, and discusses special cases, including
building type variations and district energy systems.
The sections on Options 2 and 3, the prescriptive approaches, provide details on complying with the ASHRAE
50% Advanced Energy Design Guide and the Advanced Buildings Core Performance Guide.
ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata, is the basis for the LEED energy efficiency requirements;
projects outside the U.S. may use a USGBC-approved equivalent standard. Read through Sections 5.4, 6.4, 7.4, 8.4, 9.4,
and 10.4 to understand how the building design must address these requirements.
Typically, the architect is responsible for Section 5.4, Building Envelope; the mechanical engineer and plumbing
designer are responsible for Sections 6.4, HVAC, and 7.4, Service Water Heating; and the electrical engineer is
responsible for Sections 8.4, Power, and 9.4, Lighting. Compliance with Section 10.4 requires coordination across
multiple disciplines.
Ensure that the project complies with the mandatory measures throughout the design, construction, and
commissioning process, particularly when major design decisions are implemented. Confirm that compliant
components are included in the final construction documents.

Before undertaking energy modeling (the performance path), consider the timing of the simulation preparation
and presentation, and understand the costs and benefits of energy modeling as it relates to the project. When
energy modeling is conducted late in design, its value is very limited except as a compliance tool: the model can only
estimate the energy savings of the design.
In contrast, if initiated early and updated throughout the design process, energy modeling can be a decision-
making tool, giving feedback as part of the larger analysis of building systems and components. The best value
comes from using energy modeling as a tool in an integrated design process to inform the selection of cost-effective
efficiency strategies.
Develop clear expectations for the presentations of modeling results and their integration into the project
schedule. Ideally, iterations of the model will be presented to the team during each stage of design, beginning as
early as possible, when the project goals are incorporated into preliminary plans. Updates should be presented as the
design is developed further to incorporate engineering and architectural details, and again when the construction
documents are being prepared.
Regardless of the project design phases, energy modeling can still be performed as the design progresses.
However, the potential benefit of energy modeling decreases as the design becomes finalized and opportunities
for incorporating changes are lost. Ask the project’s energy modeler to provide a schedule that integrates energy
modeling into the design process, with appropriate milestones.
The energy modeler should read and understand ASHRAE 90.1–2010 (Appendix G in particular) in its entirety,
not just the portions that apply to the project. This will enable a more complete understanding of the energy
modeling protocols and methodologies required for LEED projects (see ASHRAE 90.1–2010 versus 90.1–2007, below).
APPENDICES
The energy modeler should also consider reading the ASHRAE 90.1–2010 User’s Manual, which expands on the
Appendix G requirements.
Step 1. Identify energy modeler

Engage an energy modeler to perform the energy analysis.
·· It is recommended that the qualifications of the energy modeler be carefully reviewed to ensure that the
simulation will be performed accurately and according to the prerequisite requirements.
517
·· Qualified energy modelers who have experience with numerous simulations for a variety of building types
can help the design team interpret the results and develop an efficient building design (see Energy Modeler’s
Qualifications, below).
Step 2. Develop preliminary energy model or models

Buildings of the same type (new construction, major renovation, or core and shell) may be grouped into separate
models. Analyze all buildings in a single model if the building type is consistent across the project, or if the team
wishes to achieve the average improvement required by this prerequisite.
·· Consider creating preliminary energy models to analyze building design strategies that may be applied to each
group of buildings. The preliminary models use information from the design to roughly project energy usage in
various scenarios (see Developing a Preliminary Energy Model, below).
·· A preliminary energy model is not required; however, developing an early model of the proposed design will
help the design team explore the energy consequences of design options and will provide an early estimate of
overall energy performance for each group of buildings.
·· An analysis of various efficiency measures, which may take the form of a preliminary model, is necessary for the
achievement of the related credit.
·· When evaluating energy usage in different scenarios, consider strategies for lighting and daylighting, envelope,
orientation, and passive conditioning and ventilating systems in terms of projected energy savings and capital
costs as they relate to all building systems.
Step 3. Model potential HVAC system types

After building design configuration and load reduction strategies have been assessed and implemented, use the
energy model to analyze the performance of HVAC system alternatives (see Modeling HVAC Systems, below).
·· For best HVAC system performance, ensure that the system is properly sized. More effective system types,
such as radiant heating and cooling or displacement ventilation, may be feasible when loads are smaller, so
begin the analysis by exploring ways to reduce the load.
·· Analysis of HVAC systems in early design is optional for this prerequisite but is required for achievement of the
related credit.
Step 4. Develop energy model for proposed design

Once the HVAC system and other design parameters are established, build or update the proposed building energy
model to reflect the anticipated design (see Building the Proposed Energy Model, below).
·· Update the proposed model to reflect changes that occur throughout the design process to optimize energy
performance and assist with design decisions.
·· Ensure that all efficiency strategies are analyzed well before design documents are finalized.
Step 5. Create baseline energy model

Build a baseline model that reflects the minimum requirements in ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G (see Building the
Baseline Energy Model, below).
·· When modifications are made to the proposed energy model, update the baseline accordingly.
·· Consider constructing the baseline model early in the design process so that the design team can see the effect
of design changes on the percentage savings relative to ASHRAE 90.1.
·· Use the energy modeling inputs and quality control checklists spreadsheet (Appendix G) to help create the APPENDICES
baseline model. This tool was designed to help project teams create a baseline model that aligns with Appendix
G requirements.
Step 6. Update baseline and proposed models based on final design

Update the proposed energy model to reflect final construction details and specifications and make any necessary
corresponding updates to the baseline model (see Finalizing the Energy Models, below).
·· For elements or systems that cannot be readily modeled, use the exceptional calculation method or COMNET
modeling guidelines for unregulated loads (see Modeling with the Exceptional Calculation Method and Common
Issues with Energy Modeling, below).
518
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 VS. 90.1–2007

The referenced standard for building the baseline model for this prerequisite has been updated to ASHRAE 90.1–
2010, which represents a substantial increase in efficiency from the previous version, ASHRAE 90.1–2007. The major
changes are described in Table 1 and 2.
TABLE 1. Comparison of ASHRAE 90.1 mandatory requirements, 2007 and 2010
Building envelope requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010
Air barriers
NA Continuous on entire building envelope
5.4.3.1.2
HVAC requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010
Garage fans Auto-adjust fan speed with contaminant

NA
6.4.3.4.5 levels to 50% or less of capacity
Chiller efficiencies
NA Increased for all chiller types
6.4.1.1
Required to have VFD or two-speed motors
Single-zone VAV
NA for DX >9.2 tons (32.3 kW), and chilled
6.4.3.10
water AHUs >5 hp (3.7 kW) fan motors
Water and evaporatively cooled unitary
AC units and heat pump efficiency NA 3–5% more stringent
Table 6.8.1A and B
PTAC and PTHP efficiency increased
12 EER (3.52 COP) 13.8 EER (4.05 COP)
6.4.1.1; Table 6.8.1D
Water to water heat pump, CRAC,
and VRF Table 6.8.1B; Table 6.8.1K; Not covered Now covered by 90.1
Table 6.8.1J respectively
Power requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010

At least 50% of all receptacles installed

Automatic receptacle control in private offices, open offices, and
NA
8.4.2 computer classrooms must be controlled
by automatic control device
Lighting requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010
Alterations that involve less than 50% of

connected lighting load in space or area need
Threshold for retrofit compliance
not comply with lighting power density or Less than 10% of connected load
9.1.2
auto-shutoff requirements, provided that such
alterations do not increase installed LPD
Lighting power density Reduced; average 17% in space types, more
NA
9.4.5; 9.4.6 for retail display lighting
Automatic shutoff
Required in buildings >5,000 ft2 (465 m2) Required in all spaces
9.4.1.1
All spaces are required to have vacancy

Additional control All spaces to have general lighting controls,
sensors or occupancy sensors to 50% or
9.4.1 manual or automatic
less of lighting power
Classrooms, conference rooms, and break More space types added, including offices,
Space controls
rooms must have occupancy sensor or time restrooms, dressing rooms, and training,
9.4.1.2
switch that turns light off within 30 minutes copy, and storage rooms
Spaces must have controls that reduce
Light level reduction
None power level by 30–70% of connected load in
APPENDICES
9.4.1.2
addition to off mode.
Automatic, multilevel daylighting controls
Lighting in daylit zones
None installed in sidelit areas >250 ft2 (23 m2) and
9.4.1.4
toplit areas >900 ft2 (84 m2)
Auto-shutoff, power must be reduced by
Parking garage lighting
None 30% when no motion for 30 minutes,
9.4.1.3
auto-daylight control on perimeter
Exterior lighting Lighting must be controlled by At night light must either be off or operated
9.4.1.7 photosensor or time switch at reduced level
Functional testing
None All installed controls must be tested
9.4.4
519
TABLE 2. Comparison of ASHRAE 90.1 prescriptive requirements, 2007 and 2010
Requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010
For all HVAC system types,

Economizer exemptions Only for unitary equipment, EER/SEER (COP/
must meet % efficiency improvement,
Table 6.3.2 SCOP) rating
now required in most climate zones
Lighting power density Reduced, average 17% in space types,

NA
9.2.1 more for retail display lighting
ENERGY MODELER’S QUALIFICATIONS

The energy modeler should have the following competences:
·· Comprehensive understanding of all the building systems related to energy performance and the information
needed to construct a model using the selected software
·· Ability to understand and explain capabilities and limitations of modeling software for the strategies the team
would like to pursue
·· Awareness of how much time the design team needs to provide information, feedback, and responses to the
modeling exercise
·· Experience with design phase modeling
·· Ability to demonstrate how energy modeling can be used to perform cost-benefit analysis
·· Experience in modeling projects using ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G, or a thorough understanding of this approach
·· Ability to perform quality control to ensure that the modeling inputs accurately reflect the proposed design
and Appendix G baseline
·· Ability to evaluate the simulation results for reasonableness in relation to the energy modeling inputs,
including energy consumption by end use, cost, and the performance savings claimed
·· Ability to validate the model through review of actual utility bills during occupancy
DEVELOPING A PRELIMINARY ENERGY MODEL

Although not required for this prerequisite, preparation of a preliminary model can facilitate achievement of the
related credit, which requires analysis of efficiency measures. Past analyses of similar buildings or published data,
such as the ASHRAE Advanced Energy Design Guides, may also be used to inform decision making, though the
results will be less project specific. A preliminary model includes design elements identified during schematic design
and design development and generates a preliminary estimate of energy consumption and an end-use profile.
Evaluate how changes to the following elements affect HVAC sizing, energy consumption, lighting, renewable
energy opportunities, and other aspects of energy performance:
·· Program and operations (multifunction spaces, operating schedules, space allotment per person, teleworking,
reduction of building area, operations and maintenance)
·· Site conditions (shading, exterior lighting, hardscape, landscaping, adjacent site conditions)
·· Massing and orientation
·· Envelope (insulation values, window-to-wall ratios, glazing characteristics, shading, and window operability)
·· Lighting levels and interior surface reflectance
·· Thermal comfort range options
APPENDICES
·· Passive conditioning and natural ventilation strategies
When examining alternative strategies, also consider the effect on human performance and comfort. For example,
increasing daylighting may cause glare.
Typical steps in preliminary energy modeling are as follows:

1. Gather information about building loads and systems. Investigate case studies of similar buildings in similar
climates and contact local utilities for energy rates and demand charges. Determine applicable building energy
codes, including any local variations. For existing buildings, review drawings, specifications, operations and
maintenance manuals, commissioning reports, energy audit reports, and utility bills. The AEDGs provide
useful information regarding design practices specific to some building types and climate zones.
520
2. Engage the design team early to investigate opportunities for load reduction. Coordinate with the architect
to identify options for envelope insulation values, building orientation, and shading—variables that can
affect load, especially on external load–dominated buildings. Some strategies, such as building massing and
orientation, are most effectively evaluated during the concept phase of design, before the preliminary energy
model, and are not required for this prerequisite.
3. Analyze several design alternatives to investigate the combined load reduction potential of multiple
strategies. How strategies alter energy consumption varies by building type and climate zone. Examine energy
consumption by end use and heating and cooling load distribution to identify effective load reduction and
energy efficiency opportunities.
4. Investigate interconnected strategies. The additional costs of high-performance envelope elements may
be offset by smaller, less costly HVAC systems. For example, energy modeling could evaluate the effect of a
fenestration and shading configuration, with daylight harvesting controls, on cooling, heating and fan loads,
HVAC system capacities, and total building energy consumption and cost. A life-cycle cost analysis for this
scenario would indicate the net increase or decrease in capital costs and the potential savings over time.
When evaluating the capital cost, consider trade-offs between the higher capital cost for the shading and
daylight harvesting controls and the lower capital cost for a smaller HVAC system.
5. Use the model to compare potential performance with the project’s energy goals.
MODELING HVAC SYSTEMS

Although not required for the energy performance prerequisite, an evaluation of HVAC system alternatives can help
the design team optimize energy consumption. This exercise is a requirement for achievement of points under the
related credit.
The modeler should analyze the performance of several efficient HVAC systems to understand the potential
energy savings associated with each one. This information enables the design team to compare life-cycle costs,
rather than just first costs. The life-cycle cost analysis should follow the analysis of load reductions, which may affect
the life-cycle cost.
The chosen HVAC system can then be further optimized through additional energy modeling that analyzes the
potential efficiency gains of the system components and/or assigns different systems to different zones.
Typical steps for HVAC system type modeling include the following:
·· Coordinate with the mechanical engineer, since decreased loads may affect mechanical system sizing or
potential system types. Compare high-efficiency HVAC systems with typical systems for reductions in
operating costs (energy, maintenance). Weigh this against the higher first cost of more efficient equipment.
Evaluate the potential for reducing the first cost of HVAC equipment by reducing the loads. Include not only
the smaller equipment but also the infrastructure related to HVAC—ductwork, piping, controls, and in some
cases, building volume or floor area for these components.
·· For the selected system, analyze and optimize additional HVAC energy efficiency measures, including
equipment efficiency, energy recovery, economizers, and demand-controlled ventilation.
·· Coordinate with the architect and structural engineer, since different system types may influence space,
height, or structural requirements. For example, under-floor air-conditioning may influence the exterior
envelope design and could increase or decrease the height of the building.
BUILDING THE PROPOSED ENERGY MODEL

APPENDICES
An energy model of the proposed design is required for prerequisite compliance under Option 1. A team that has
already prepared a preliminary model may update it throughout the project.
Create or update proposed building characteristics based on the latest design and specifications for systems,
assemblies, and equipment. The initial model can be created as early as design development to estimate projected
savings, then be updated when the construction documents are complete. Analyze remaining efficiency strategies
that the team would like to consider before the design documents are finalized. For example, the proposed energy
model could be used to evaluate the performance and cost implications of value engineering decisions.
521
BUILDING THE BASELINE ENERGY MODEL

Developing the baseline energy model is a detailed process that requires a good working knowledge of ASHRAE
90.1–2010, Appendix G, and the associated sections of the standard. The baseline model represents a typical design
for a building of the same size and use as the proposed building. This hypothetical building meets but does not
exceed the performance requirements of ASHRAE 90.1–2010 and is used as a comparison to calculate the percentage
energy cost savings for the project design.
In general, baseline development begins by changing the inputs for all the components, assemblies, and systems
of the proposed design to minimally compliant input values, in accordance with Appendix G. Determine or update
baseline values for each system, assembly, and piece of equipment for the project’s climate zone, building type, and
fuel type(s).
If the energy simulation software automates some or all of the baseline generation, review the automated
baseline model inputs against the expected baseline values and confirm consistency (see Common Issues with Energy
Modeling, below).
Preparation of the initial baseline model is best undertaken after major design decisions have been made so
that modeling can evaluate whether the project is likely to meet energy savings targets (or achieve points under the
related credit). The baseline model will typically need to be updated based on the final building design.
FINALIZING THE ENERGY MODELS

Update the proposed model based on the information and specifications for systems, assemblies, and equipment
in the final construction documents. Confirm that all efficiency measures claimed have been incorporated into the
design. Include all energy consumption and costs associated with the building.
Ensure that assumptions used in earlier versions of the model are replaced with actual data from the
construction documents. For example, if proposed chiller control sequences were assumed in the preliminary
model, use the actual control sequences from the construction documents for the final version. Update the baseline
model as necessary based on the project’s final construction documents, including changes in occupant density,
required outdoor airflow, thermostat setpoints, and system or fuel types. The model will have to be updated again if
any changes during construction affect efficiency measures.
Schedules must be modeled correctly for both the proposed and baseline models (see Modeling Schedules, below).
Perform a quality control check to verify that all Appendix G and LEED modeling guidelines have been followed.
Record both the proposed and baseline values in the Appendix G energy modeling inputs and quality control
checklists spreadsheet. This record of energy conservation measures is a good tool for confirming that proposed
building characteristics and baseline values have been selected properly.
Document the input assumptions for receptacle and process loads. These loads should be modeled accurately
to reflect the actual expected energy consumption of the building. Per ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Table G3.1-12, receptacle
and process loads must be modeled identically in both the baseline and the proposed models, unless there are
specific efficiency requirements listed in Sections 5 through 10 that allow a less stringent baseline requirement (e.g.,
motor efficiency).
If the project claims savings for variations in power requirements, schedules, or control sequences, the burden
of proof is on the project team to document that the design represents a significant departure from conventional
practice. If an energy efficiency measure cannot be explicitly modeled, the team may use Section G2.5, Exceptional
Calculation Method (see Modeling with the Exceptional Calculation Method, below).
Verify the energy modeling results. Evaluate the energy savings by end use for reasonableness based on the APPENDICES
differences in the modeling inputs between the baseline and proposed models. Use Figure 1 to perform a step-by-
step verification.
522
PROJECT AND CONTENT
Check space summary for the Check for simulation program,

building size, space types, climate zone, weather file, Check total points Check narratives are
conditioned vs. unconditioned reference standard used, heating attempted and included describing
spaces. Check the number source, whether project includes target finder score special conditions
of stories existing renovation
INPUTS
Check HVAC Evaluate

Check building Check lighting Check process special cases
envelope input input energy input and DNW
(DES & CHP)
system input
OUTPUTS
Check unmet load hours and Check unmet load hours and Verify if the results of 4 orientations
simulation output reports simulation output reports were reported where required
END-USE CONSISTENCY
Evaluate whether Identify efficiency Evaluate whether

Verify that energy consumption Verify whether measures and verify if
end-use demand energy consumption and
and demand differences savings are justified for demand savings are
and energy use between proposed consumption is the measures with
are consistent reasonable for consistent between
and baseline cases highest absolute
linked end uses
with inputs are justified major end uses savings
BUILDING LEVEL CONSISTENCY SPECIAL OUTPUTS
Cross-check with For each fuel type, if cost and enery savings Review Verify
benchmark differ significantly, verify that virtual utility rates exceptional renewable energy
consumption are justified based on utility rate schedule calculations calculations
Model Inputs Model Output Consistency
Figure 1. Steps to verify proposed energy savings
MODELING WITH THE EXCEPTIONAL CALCULATION METHOD

In ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G, Section G2.5, an exceptional calculation method (ECM) is used when the
simulation program that is generating the energy model is incapable of modeling a certain design, material, or
device of the proposed design. LEED has adopted and slightly expanded use of exceptional calculations to cover
any savings claimed for a nonregulated load, defined as any building load, end use, or control without an Appendix G
baseline modeling requirement that allows the load, end use, or control to be modeled differently in the proposed
APPENDICES
and baseline buildings.

Energy savings limitations. Section G2.5 indicates that exceptional calculation methods cannot constitute
more than half of the difference (i.e., savings) between the proposed and baseline buildings. This will be enforced
for the ASHRAE definition of an ECM. However, in LEED, this rule will not be applied to savings attempted on
nonregulated loads unless the nonregulated load cannot be modeled in the simulation program.
Elements that cannot be simulated by modeling program. One type of ECM is representing an element that
cannot be modeled directly by the chosen energy modeling software. Examples include innovative external shading
devices, under-floor air systems, and the heat recovery performance of a variable refrigerant flow system. Whether
523
a particular strategy warrants an ECM may depend on the modeling program and whether the energy modeler
can simulate an approximation of the system in the software. If the methodology for approximation has not been
previously published by ASHRAE or USGBC as an acceptable modeling path, it is the responsibility of the energy
modeler to submit a narrative explaining the simulation and provide any calculations for the energy savings.
Documentation for nonregulated loads. Examples of nonregulated load savings include manufacturing
equipment not regulated by ASHRAE 90.1–2010, a unique manufacturing process, or any refrigeration or kitchen
equipment (including operation) not specifically covered in Appendix 3, Retail Process Load Baselines, Tables
1–4. Energy savings for nonregulated loads require additional documentation. ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Table G3.1-
12, indicates that “variations of the power requirements, schedules, or control sequences” are allowed by the
“rating authority,” provided the proposed design “represents a significant verifiable departure from documented
conventional practice.” Project teams must document the following information to prove that the savings represent
a departure from conventional practice and are not required by local code:
·· A narrative describing all baseline and proposed assumptions
·· The methodology used to calculate the savings
·· A document verifying that the efficiency measure is not conventional practice. This is generally accomplished
either by documenting the baseline comparison system, schedule, or control as standard practice, or by
showing that the savings claimed for the efficiency measure are incentivized by a local utility program.
Examples of documents used to verify that the efficiency measure is not conventional practice may include the
following:
°° A recent study with researched tabulations or monitored data establishing standard practice for the given
application in similar newly constructed facilities
°° A utility company or government program that provides incentives for the measure in new construction
°° A document showing the systems used to perform the same function in similar facilities built within the past
five years; these systems are treated as the baseline system in the analysis, and evidence must show how the
energy use for the baseline and proposed buildings is determined
Alternatively, the project team may use any of the prescriptive requirements from ASHRAE 90.1–2010 as the baseline
requirement without further justification to substantiate conventional practice, but only for the specific component.
Additional guidance. Sources of typical efficiency measures include the COMNET manual, which has a
methodology for calculating savings for process or receptacle loads, especially savings from ENERGY STAR
equipment. Refer to the manual’s Section 6.4.5, Receptacle and Process Loads, and Appendix B.
Provide a narrative explanation of the methodology used to calculate savings for any exceptional calculation
methods. Separate calculations are not necessary when the energy savings are apparent in the modeling results.
Changes from earlier versions of ASHRAE and LEED. Some efficiency measures that no longer need to be
modeled using an exceptional calculation method include garage fan demand-controlled ventilation, low-flow water
fixtures, kitchen equipment, and kitchen ventilation.
·· Enclosed parking garage ventilation. Modulating fan airflow rates based on contaminant levels are now
required to be installed, unless certain exceptions apply, per Section 6.4.3.4.5. Any design that goes beyond
these minimum baseline requirements may be counted. Two factors can affect the energy consumption:
°° The baseline fan power (in energy per flow) must be consistent with the proposed installed fan power at
full-load conditions. The project team may count higher fan motor efficiencies in the proposed building.
°° The ventilation rate, and thus fan power, can also be reduced if the design allows the fans to reduce the APPENDICES
ventilation rate below 50%. The baseline ventilation rate must be set at the minimum requirement of
ASHRAE 62.1–2010, which is 0.75 cfm per square foot (3.8 L/s per square meter). This must be the baseline
ventilation rate, regardless of any local code.
The same requirements apply to demand-controlled ventilation for outdoor air control sequences that provide
ventilation for building occupants.
·· Low-flow service water-heating fixtures. The flow rates given in GIB Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction set
the allowable baseline values. Provide sufficient information to justify energy savings from efficient fixtures
and appliances that use hot water.
524
·· Kitchen equipment. All project types may count energy savings from efficient refrigeration equipment,
cooking and food preparation, clothes washing, and other major support appliances. See Appendix 3, Retail
Process Load Baselines, Tables 1–4, for the defined baseline conditions. Provide sufficient information to justify
all the savings. Savings for a piece of equipment (or its operation) not covered in Appendix 3 must be modeled
using the ECM described above.
·· Kitchen ventilation. ASHRAE 90.1–2010 now addresses kitchen ventilation, so it is no longer considered
a nonregulated load. Section G3.1.1, exception (d), requires a kitchen with more than 5,000 cfm (2360 L/s)
of total exhaust airflow to be modeled with its own separate system. Include demand ventilation on 75%
of the exhaust air, and reduce exhaust and replacement air by 50% for half the kitchen’s occupied hours in
the baseline design. Additionally, the maximum exhaust flow rates for hoods must meet the requirements
of Section 6.5.7.1.3. The exhaust flow rate must be modeled identically in the baseline and proposed cases
at design conditions unless Appendix G indicates otherwise. Any design that goes beyond these minimum
baseline requirements may be counted. Provide sufficient information to justify all kitchen ventilation savings,
with consistent assumptions and operating schedules. Project teams that count kitchen ventilation savings
must separate the savings from each end use (e.g., fan, heating, cooling) when reporting the energy outputs.
APPENDICES
525
COMMON ISSUES WITH ENERGY MODELING

Thoroughly review both ASHRAE 90.1–2010 and the 90.1–2010 User’s Manual. The manual presents extended
explanations and also includes examples of the concepts and requirements within the standard. Table 3 addresses
many of the most common issues but is not a comprehensive list.
TABLE 3. Common issues with energy modeling, by ASHRAE 90.1 section
Scope
Inclusion of Unfinished spaces must be included in the energy model if they are part of the project scope of work. In core and
unfinished spaces shell projects, a large portion of the space may be unfinished; in new construction and major renovation projects
in project scope these spaces must not make up more than 40% of the total space. In addition, all projects other than core and shell
that have incomplete spaces must submit a letter of commitment, signed by the owner, confirming that the remaining
incomplete spaces will satisfy the requirements of each prerequisite and credit achieved by this project if and when
completed by the owner.
Modeling HVAC, Refer to ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Tables G3.1.6(c), G3.1.10(c) and (d), and G3.1.11(c), for unfinished space modeling
lighting, hot requirements. If a lighting, HVAC, or service hot water system has not yet been designed, the system required in the
water systems baseline building for that unfinished space must also be modeled in the proposed building. Refer to Table G3.1.8 on
for unfinished how to model thermal zones for such space.
spaces Example 1. A two-story office building has a ground-floor retail area that is entirely unfinished. The building contains
a chase for future ductwork and a location on the roof for the mechanical equipment for the future tenant, but no
system exists or has been specified.
In this case, the proposed HVAC system for that space must be modeled using the same HVAC system type, capacity
ratios, efficiencies, and controls as those modeled for the baseline building.
Example 2. The same hypothetical two-story office building now includes chilled and hot water connections for the
future unfinished retail space. A portion of the HVAC system has been designed.
The proposed building may be modeled as a system that uses the chilled and heating hot water (e.g., 4-pipe fan coil
unit). However, because the air-handling units and terminal distribution have not yet been designed, the cooling and
heating capacities, design fan volume, minimum volume, fan power, fan controls, etc., must be modeled identically in
both the baseline and proposed model, and equal to the requirements of the baseline model.
Additions to Project teams wishing to certify an addition to an existing building must follow the Appendix G requirements in Table
existing buildings G3.1.2, the most important of which is (b). If the existing building will be excluded, then the HVAC system serving the
addition to the building must be entirely separate from the systems serving the existing building. Refer to the table
for all requirements.
Building envelope
Baseline Construction type and maximum U-factors for baseline walls, roofs, and floors are specified by Table G3.1-5 Baseline
building (b). The constructions for walls, roofs, and floors are specified by the standard and do not depend on the proposed
envelope design. For example, if a building will have concrete masonry walls, the baseline model will still have steel-framed walls.
Existing building For an existing building that was conditioned before major renovation and will be conditioned postrenovation, the
envelope baseline building envelope should reflect the existing conditions, before the scope of work (Table G3.1-5 Baseline (f)).
However, for an existing building (or spaces in the building) that was previously unconditioned and is being renovated
to include conditioning, the baseline building envelope (or the envelope for any previously unconditioned spaces in the
building) must be modeled as if the building is new construction (i.e., according to Table 5.5).
Proposed model The proposed model must reflect the building as designed or built. To the extent possible, construction assemblies
U-values need to match the dimension and U-value inputs in the model.
Apply Appendix A to the proposed envelope. Provide the assembly U-value, rather than a point U-value, by
determining the overall construction assembly U-value that takes into account for thermal bridging as shown in
Appendix A.
Ensure that window U-values are input as the assembly U-value, which takes into account the U-value of the framing
system. The center-of-glass value is not acceptable.
APPENDICES
Baseline model For the baseline envelope properties, use the semiheated requirements to model surfaces that adjoin unconditioned
U-values, semi- spaces to conditioned spaces (e.g., a wall separating a semiheated warehouse from a conditioned office) or
exterior surfaces semiheated space to conditioned space (e.g., the slab separating an unconditioned parking garage from the
conditioned ground floor of the building). Figure 5.1 in 90.1–2010 illustrates this requirement.
526
TABLE 3 (CONTINUED). Common issues with energy modeling, by ASHRAE 90.1 section
HVAC
Baseline HVAC The HVAC system for the baseline model must be selected based on requirements in ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Section
system selection G3.1.1. The system selected will depend on the proposed building type, size, and heat source. Building type must
be based on predominant conditions (i.e., those that account for the majority or plurality of the building area), and
no space types can be excluded from the model. Building size is determined from conditioned area. Once the floor
area of the predominant condition is known, consult Table G3.1.1A to determine the predominant baseline HVAC
system.
Section G3.1.1 also specifies whether HVAC systems must be modeled with a system per floor or a system per
thermal block. Systems 1–4 are modeled with one system per thermal block and systems 5–10 with one system per
floor, using systems 9 and 10 where applicable.
When multiple floors have identical thermal blocks, those floors may be combined in the energy model.
Note that a floor with a roof and a floor without a roof do not have identical thermal blocks and cannot be
combined. A multistory building with identical thermal blocks would need to be modeled with no fewer than three
floors: a ground floor, a middle floor with appropriate multiplier, and a top floor.
There are six exceptions to the baseline HVAC system determination. These exceptions are mandatory and must be
taken if they are applicable to the project.
G3.1.1 exception (a). Check for nonpredominant conditions, such as nonresidential in a primarily residential
building, or where a portion of a building is supplied by electric heat but the rest is from fossil fuels. The area of
nonpredominant conditions can be deducted from the total area when determining the baseline HVAC system. If
nonpredominant conditions apply to more than 20,000 ft2 (1860 m2), use exception (a) and select an additional
baseline HVAC system type to serve those spaces.
Example. A 210,000 ft2 (19 510 m2) multifamily high-rise has 23,000 ft2 (2140 m2) of ground-floor retail space. The
residential units are served by heat pump units with supplemental electric heat, and the retail areas are served by a
split DX unit with fossil fuel furnace. The required baseline HVAC system for the residential spaces would be System
2–PTHP, but for the retail areas it would be System 3–Packaged DX with fossil fuel furnace, since the nonresidential
spaces meet the 20,000 ft2 (1860 m2) exception (a) in G3.1.1.
G3.1.1 exception (b). If using systems 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10, individual zones with atypical thermal loads or occupancy
profiles must be modeled with individual single-zone systems of type 3 or 4, according to exception (b). Examples
for this include computer server rooms, natatoriums, and school gymnasiums.
If this exception is not properly incorporated into the baseline model, the model results may show an unusually
high number of unmet load hours or significantly oversize the baseline case systems. A good practice is to check
the baseline output reports and verify that the thermal loads for each thermal block do not vary by more than 10
Btuh/ft2 (31.5 W/m2) from the average of the other thermal zones on the floor, and adjust the baseline model as
necessary to include this exception.
Baseline HVAC G3.1.1 exception (c). If laboratory spaces in the building have a total laboratory exhaust rate greater than 5,000 cfm
system selection (2360 L/s), a single system of type 5 or 7 must be modeled to serve only those spaces. Section G3.1.2.11 requires
(laboratory spaces) exhaust air energy recovery in accordance with Section 6.5.6.1, which is likely to include laboratories.
Baseline HVAC G3.1.1 exception (d). If kitchens in the building have a total exhaust hood airflow rate greater than 5,000 cfm (2360
system selection L/s), system type 5 or 7 must be modeled and must include demand-controlled ventilation.
(kitchens)
Baseline HVAC G3.1.1 exception (e). Heating-only systems serving rooms not exhausting or transferring air from mechanically
system selection: cooled spaces, such as storage rooms, stairwells, or mechanical rooms, should be modeled as system 9 or 10.
heated-only G3.1.1 exception (f). When the predominant system is type 9 or 10, any fully conditioned spaces (such as an small,
storage or fully conditioned office in a heated-only warehouse) should be modeled using the appropriate system type for the
circulation spaces size, number of floors, occupancy type, and heating type for the nonpredominant area of the building.
Baseline HVAC Any project with a combination of fossil fuel and electric heat serving the same space must use the fossil fuel
system fuel type baseline HVAC system (systems 1, 3, 5, and 7) unless it meets one of the exceptions to G3.1.1.
Example. A building has been designed with electric water-source heat pumps for the space loads. A 100% outdoor
air gas-fired rooftop unit provides ventilation. The spaces are served by both electric heating from the heat pumps
and ventilation air from the gas-fired unit; therefore, the spaces are considered hybrid heating and must model the
baseline HVAC system type as “Fossil Fuel, Fossil/Electric Hybrid, and Purchased Heat” (from Table G3.1.1a).
APPENDICES
In the case of electric heating equipment designed with a fossil fuel preheat coil, or a backup fossil fuel boiler, the
intent is that the equipment will be used; thus it is considered hybrid heating, and the team must use the fossil fuel
baseline heating system.
527
HVAC (Continued)
Baseline fan power The baseline fan power is calculated according to Section G3.1.2.10, which indicates that the system fan power
is based on the supply airflow and distributed to supply, return, exhaust, and relief fans. If the proposed system
has additional return, exhaust, and/or relief fans, the team may not adjust the baseline model to account for the
additional fan power. Section G3.1.2.10 also includes Table G3.1.2.9, whose value A is calculated according to Section
6.5.3.1.1 using pressure drop adjustments. Pressure drop adjustments may not be taken for system types 1, 2, 9, or
10.
The calculations are straightforward, but a common issue involves pressure credits. Table G3.1.2.9 allows pressure
drop adjustments for evaporative coolers or heat recovery devices only when they are required in the baseline
building system. Also, the pressure drop adjustment is applicable only to the design airflow through each device.
For example, if only the ventilation air is filtered with a MERV 13 filter, then only the ventilation airflow rate may
apply the 0.9 in. w.c. (224.2 Pa) adjustment, not the entire supply airflow rate.
Pressure credit may be taken only for those systems present in the proposed building.
For fully ducted return or exhaust air systems, the credit for fan power allowance cannot be based on plenum
return. The credit can be applied only when the return is fully ducted; systems that have a combination of ducted
and nonducted may not use this pressure credit.
For return or exhaust airflow control devices (which maintain a specific pressurization relative to other spaces),
a project team claiming this credit in spaces other than a laboratory, hospital, or similar space type must provide
evidence of this control device. The credit may be applied only for the amount of airflow passing through the
control device.
A project team using the modeling software to automatically determine the baseline building fan power must
ensure that the correct allowance has been calculated. Publicly available fan power calculators can be used to verify
and determine the correct fan power.
Proposed HVAC Table G3.1.1(a) requires that the proposed building be consistent with the design documents, including envelope,
system sizing lighting, HVAC, and service hot water systems. Additionally, all end-use load components within and associated
with the building must be modeled.
Table G3.1.10(b) requires that the HVAC model be consistent with the design documents. All modeled HVAC system
parameters (e.g., fan volumes, fan powers, efficiencies, heating and cooling capacities) must be consistent with the
mechanical schedules and drawings. The simulation should never be allowed to automatically size the HVAC system
for the proposed case model when there is a complete design.
Heat pumps Section G3.1.3.1 describes the operation of baseline building heat pumps. The heat pump and auxiliary heat should
(operation) operate together at low-temperature conditions, with the compressor as the lead machine. The outside air cutoff
temperature for the compressor must be no greater than the temperature associated with the low-temperature
heating efficiency requirements of Table 6.8.1B (17°F) (–8.3°C). The HSPF rating for packaged heat pump units
smaller than 65,000 Btu/h (19 kW) and packaged terminal heat pumps accounts for electric auxiliary operation
and includes test conditions at 17 degrees F (–8.3°C). The heat pump efficiency curves in the model should reflect
the heat pump ratings that account for simultaneous operation of the electric resistance and heat pump elements
below 40°F (4.4°C).
Unitary heating and Use the correct Table 6.8.1 to determine equipment efficiencies:
cooling efficiencies Table 6.8.1A for system types 3, 5 and 6
Table 6.8.1B (with electric resistance heating section) for system Type 4
Table 6.8.1D for system types 1 and 2
These efficiencies are based on the capacity of each system individually, not a sum of all units. It is important
to correctly adjust efficiencies of each piece of equipment to separate fan power at AHRI rating conditions, per
Section G3.1.2.1. Most simulation software programs can perform this step automatically.
Humidity controls Humidification must be modeled identically in the baseline and the proposed models, since it is not addressed in
Appendix G. Use the exceptional calculation method if claiming savings.
If the proposed design includes dehumidification controls, they must be modeled as designed. Dehumidification
controls may be modeled in the baseline only if one of the exceptions to Section 6.5.2.3 applies. Exception (d) for
process dehumidification does not apply to computer rooms. APPENDICES
Table G3.1.4 requires that identical schedules be used in both models, and this includes humidity setpoints. A
problem may arise if the proposed building has a dedicated outdoor air system (DOAS) that maintains proper
humidity. PTAC or small DX systems in the baseline design may not be able to maintain both temperature and
humidity simultaneously in the same way that the proposed system can. The project team may then incur a penalty
for higher humidity levels in the baseline building.
In this situation, model a DOAS in the baseline design using the same volume of outdoor air as for the proposed
design, but with the same efficiency and efficiency curves as the baseline HVAC systems. Additionally, the baseline
fan power allowance would be separated between the DOAS and the baseline system using the same ratio as the
proposed system.
528
Ventilation
Ventilation rate Table G3.1.10(b) requires that the proposed building ventilation rate be consistent with the rate indicated on the
inputs mechanical schedule. Section G3.1.2.6 requires that the ventilation rate be identical between the proposed and
baseline buildings and states that reduced ventilation “is not considered an opportunity for energy savings under
the Performance Rating Method”; ventilation is energy neutral, per the User’s Manual. However, there are exceptions
to this requirement.
Ventilation (above Exception (c) penalizes projects for providing more ventilation air to the space than is required by ASHRAE 62.1–
minimum required) 2010 or a local code, whichever requires more ventilation air. If the proposed project provides outdoor air in excess
of the amount required, the baseline must be modeled with the required ventilation rates, which will be lower than
the proposed ventilation rate. This creates an “energy penalty” for the additional fan and conditioning energy.
For various reasons, however, it is common practice to specify slightly more ventilation air than required. A project
team that has specified up to 5% more total ventilation air than required may model identical ventilation rates.
If exhaust requirements dictate the amount of ventilation air that must be provided to the building, as indicated in
Section 5.9.2 of ASHRAE 62.1–2010, provide an explanation, documentation, and calculations as necessary to show
that exhaust requirements exceed the minimum ventilation flows, and model the ventilation rate identically in both
buildings.
Demand-control Exception (a) allows credit for demand-control ventilation when it is not required by Sections 6.3.2(p) or 6.4.3.9.
ventilation If demand-control ventilation is being modeled for credit, Table G3.1.4 (baseline) indicates that schedules may be
and nighttime modified and allowed to differ to take it into account, provided the schedules are approved by the rating authority.
ventilation In this instance, project teams must submit both proposed and baseline ventilation schedules.
requirements ASHRAE 90.1, Section 6.4.3.4.3, requires shutoff dampers that automatically shut during unoccupied periods when
the HVAC system cycles on and off to meet loads except when ventilation reduces energy costs (e.g., night purge),
or when ventilation must be supplied to meet local requirements (such as minimum flow requirements for hospital
or chemical storage rooms during unoccupied periods).
Therefore, the demand-control ventilation schedules presented for both the baseline and proposed cases should
show zero outside airflow during unoccupied periods unless the supplemental documentation supports that
ventilation during unoccupied periods reduces energy cost or is required by local code, in which case the baseline
and proposed ventilation rates during unoccupied periods must be modeled with identical flow rates. Additionally,
the baseline ventilation flow must be modeling using minimum required rates.
Ventilation (zone Exception (b) allows for lower ventilation rates in the proposed building for efficient ventilation system designs that
air distribution have high zone air distribution effectiveness (Ez >1.0), as determined by ASHRAE 62.1–2010.
effectiveness) In this case, the baseline ventilation levels can be based on the proposed calculations, only with reduced zone air
distribution effectiveness (Ez = 1.0). This makes the baseline outdoor airflow rates higher than the proposed outdoor
airflow rates, so ventilation calculations must be submitted to claim the exception for a higher Ez in the proposed
case.
If a lower ventilation flow rate is an aspect of the design, the project team must provide ventilation rate procedure
calculations for both the proposed and baseline designs, with the proposed design using the actual Ez value and
the baseline design using an Ez value of 1.0 in each zone where the Ez value is greater than 1.0, but equal to the
proposed building for all other zones where the Ez value is not greater than 1.0.
If ASHRAE 62.1, Section 6.2, Ventilation Rate Procedure, is not used for the ventilation design, then this exception
may not be used.
Credit may not be taken, via ventilation flows, for any other ventilation design, such as a 100% outdoor air unit.
Additionally, credit may not be taken for increased system ventilation efficiency, Ev, of a proposed ventilation
system compared with a baseline ventilation system; Appendix G does not allow this. The only exception would be
a different Ev value due to an Ez greater than 1.0, as described above.
Natural ventilation The ASHRAE User’s Manual indicates that an exceptional calculation method is not required for natural ventilation
and gives some further examples.
Perform sufficient analysis to document that loads can be met when credit is taken for passive cooling and natural
ventilation using a simulation tool capable of ensuring thermal conditions are met with natural ventilation. A simple
load calculation is not sufficient.
APPENDICES
529
Service water heating
Hot water demand Hot water demand savings from low-flow fixtures must be derived from WE Prerequisite or Credit Indoor Water Use
Reduction calculations.
Lighting
Lighting power Lighting power must be determined using the same categorization procedure (building area or space-by-space
density, method method) in both the proposed and baseline designs.
Lighting power ASHRAE 90.1–2010 does not allow credit for lighting within dwelling units. Therefore, the lighting within these
density, multifamily units must be modeled identically in both cases unless an exceptional calculation method is pursued. If credit is
attempted, the lighting must meet prescribed illuminance levels. Refer to the ENERGY STAR’s Multifamily High Rise
Program Simulation Guidelines for examples.
Lighting power Table G3.1.6 requires that the proposed lighting power include all components shown on the plans and be
density, luminaire determined in accordance with Sections 9.1.3 and 9.1.4. Ensure that the lighting calculations include all task lighting
wattage except where specifically exempted by ASHRAE 90.1 and that all power used by the luminaires, including lamps,
ballasts, transformers, and controls, is taken into account. For track and other flexible lighting systems, use the
specified wattage of the transformer supplying the system. The sum of lamp wattages will not necessarily meet the
requirements of G3.1.6.
Lighting power ASHRAE 90.1, Section 9.6.2, addresses the use of additional lighting power for decorative lighting, in retail areas, or
density, additional when additional controls have been installed.
lighting power Additional lighting is allowed only when using the space-by-space method and if it is “installed and automatically
controlled, separately from the general lighting, to be turned off during nonbusiness hours.”
Therefore, the general lighting system must be separate and capable of providing general illumination to the space,
and the additional lighting must have automated controls that shut it off during nonbusiness hours even when the
general lighting remains on.
In retail applications, a common mistake is that the lighting may not be used for any purpose other than to highlight
the merchandise.
Project teams can model the additional lighting power up to what has actually been designed, and no more; the
baseline building must be modeled equal to what has been designed or up to the lighting allowance from ASHRAE
90.1, Section 9.6.2, whichever is less (i.e., credit may not be taken for unclaimed additional lighting power).
Note that only the sales area can be used in the lighting power allowance. For example, do not use the entire
project floor area (which may include space with other purposes, such as checkout areas, corridors, or dressing
rooms) to determine the allowance.
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 now allows an additional lighting power allowance based on the application of additional
controls and using the control factors found in Table 9.6.2. This additional allowance may be used anywhere in the
building and is based on the total wattage in the given space to which the control method is being applied.
Unlike the retail allowance, this allowance is earned with the application of the control methods and may be added
to the baseline whether or not the project designs up to the full allowance.
Automatic lighting ASHRAE 90.1, Table G3.1(g), indicates that only automatic lighting controls, such as occupancy sensors, that are in
controls addition to the required minimum control (Section 9.4.1) may be taken for credit.
One of the most common errors is taking credit for an occupancy sensor located in a conference room; this is
already a requirement of the baseline building. ASHRAE 90.1–2010 lists additional spaces that must have occupant
sensors or timer switches that automatically turn off lighting.
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 has added requirements for the lighting system and controls for buildings. Project teams are
encouraged to read the standard, the User’s Manual, and the lighting compliance forms to ensure that all mandatory
measures have been met; these are prerequisites to LEED certification.
Exterior lighting Exterior lighting is divided into allowances for tradable and nontradable surfaces. No credit may be taken for
lighting reductions on nontradable surfaces. A lighting power allowance cannot be claimed in the baseline building
for surfaces that are not provided with lighting in the actual design, and lighting fixtures cannot be double-counted
for different exterior surfaces. APPENDICES
Energy rates
Energy rates Project teams must consistently use either actual utility rates or their state’s average energy prices, published by
the U.S. Department of Energy’s Energy Information Administration for commercial building customers. The sources
may not be mixed.
530
MODELING SCHEDULES
For optimal results, ensure that the schedule inputs into the model accurately reflect the project building’s
operation. If anticipated operating schedules are unknown, helpful guidance for determining model inputs for
occupancy, lighting, HVAC system, receptacle power, and service hot water consumption values can be found in the
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 User’s Manual, Appendix G.
Schedules must be identical in both the baseline and the proposed cases unless documented in an exceptional
calculation or specifically allowed by ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G (see Modeling with the Exceptional Calculation
Method, above).
Certain space types may require specific schedules based on anticipated operation and may vary by space type.
For example, a server room may have different temperature schedules than an occupied space.
Exceptions to Section G3.1.1 may require modeling a different baseline HVAC system type in spaces with
schedules that vary significantly from the rest of the building.
Different lighting schedules may be used for a project with both office and retail occupancy when the space-by-
space method is used or when the building area method is used with multiple building type classifications. Different
schedules cannot be used, however, if an average lighting power density is applied to the whole project.
Ventilation and infiltration schedules should also be adjusted to ensure the same amount of outside air delivery
and infiltration between baseline and proposed cases, except for specific exceptions allowed by Appendix G.
MODELING BUILDING TYPE VARIATIONS

Core and Shell
Energy cost savings are based on a building’s total annual energy consumption, rather than on the owner’s scope of
work, so the owner of a core and shell project may have only a limited opportunity to improve energy savings.
In a typical core and shell building, the owner provides base-building HVAC, whereas the tenant often installs
light fixtures and other equipment. If the energy use of the base-building HVAC accounts for only a third of the
overall building energy use, the building owner must find sufficient savings within that third to meet the prerequisite
or require additional savings of the tenant in the lease agreement (see Common Issues with Energy Modeling, above).
Because the owner cannot control the effect of future improvements on the total energy consumption of the core
and shell project, for LEED energy modeling, items such as lighting or equipment loads for areas that are under the
tenants’ control must be identical in the proposed building and in the baseline, as specified by Appendix G. However,
projects can claim credit for energy reductions in tenant spaces if those reductions (such as lighting power density
reductions or improved HVAC efficiency) are required through a tenant lease agreement or other legally binding
document. For example, if a 20% reduction in lighting power density is required by the tenant lease agreement, those
savings can be claimed in the proposed model.
Zoning must be identical between the baseline and the proposed models. If HVAC zones are not defined in a
tenant space, energy modelers should follow ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Table G.3.1.8:
·· A typical rectangular floor plate must have at least five zones: one perimeter zone for each orientation and one
interior zone.
·· Spaces that can be confidently identified as differing from typical tenant use, such as mechanical rooms or
bathrooms, should be separately zoned.
·· To easily distinguish between energy use from owner and tenant spaces, projects must model separate electric
meters for tenant lighting and plug loads.
APPENDICES
Retail
For projects using whole-building energy simulation, include all relevant process loads in the energy model and
ensure that they are modeled accurately. Typical retail process loads include refrigeration equipment, cooking
and food preparation, ice machines, display lighting for merchandise, clothes washing, and other major support
appliances. Compare the energy consumption of each piece of equipment with the value indicated in Appendix 3,
Tables 1–4. If the item is not included and the project team wishes to take credit, the exceptional calculation method
must be followed.
For hard-wired refrigeration, the modeling software may be used if the system can be modeled explicitly.
Otherwise, a thermodynamically similar component model must be used, in accordance with Table G3.1.13. An
example of this would be an analysis prepared using 8760 hourly weather data.
531
For commercial kitchen equipment and refrigeration defined Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, no additional
documentation is necessary to substantiate these predefined baseline systems as industry standard. Supporting
documentation is still needed to verify that the proposed equipment includes the claimed energy-efficient features.
Data Centers
The guidance in this section is geared toward dedicated data centers and is not applicable to server closets or other
small computer rooms. Mixed-use data centers, in which the data center takes up only a portion of the building
space, may use this information as the basis for an exceptional calculation method.
The power requirements and energy use of the IT equipment in a data center typically dwarf the energy use
of the cooling system and must be considered for optimizing energy performance. The energy consumption of a
data center’s cooling system typically ranges from 15% to 25% of its total energy use, whereas in other commercial
buildings, the HVAC energy consumption approaches 50% of the total energy consumption.1
Data centers use special systems and equipment, such as large uninterruptible power supply (UPS), whose
energy efficiency requirements are not defined by ASHRAE 90.1. Some of these systems will cause inefficiencies
that can cascade through the power delivery chain, leading to increased energy usage in systems beyond those that
support IT and, in most cases, creating additional cooling loads.
Stipulations for equipment reliability and maintenance often result in redundant equipment and systems. And
the typical phased installation schedule for IT equipment (e.g., servers, storage, and networking gear) results in
power and cooling systems that operate at a fraction of the design load. To gain a more accurate understanding of
energy usage, teams should demonstrate the effects of partial-load conditions on the overall energy efficiency of the
data center.
Modeling requirements for IT equipment. Because of the high process loads associated with IT equipment
and its electrical infrastructure, many project teams look to these traditionally unregulated uses for energy savings.
Though not required, if the project team is attempting to claim energy savings from these end uses, the data center
calculator (see below) may provide a simplified method.
The reduced energy consumption of the IT and electrical equipment can help reduce HVAC energy usage. Project
teams have the option of claiming the process load savings in isolation or creating an additional energy model based
on the adjusted loads to capture the associated HVAC energy savings.
To determine total energy cost savings, it may be necessary to create one or more of the following, in addition to
the required two energy models. The specific requirements of each model are detailed below.
1. Proposed model with full IT loading (normal performance rating method model)
2. ASHRAE model with full IT loading (normal performance rating method model)
3. ASHRAE model with “baseline” IT loading (optional)
If the project team is claiming energy savings related to the IT systems, the total energy savings are calculated as the
difference between models 1 and 3.
Model 1. Proposed model with full IT loading. The model of the building’s energy cost must include all
regulated energy end uses as listed in the prerequisite criteria, as well as any unregulated energy that is specific to
the building. The proposed design must use the IT loads and schedule developed for the project. The IT loads should
be at the values for the intended final build-out of the facility. All electrical system components—examples include
incoming transformers, switchgear, UPS systems, and power distribution units—must be modeled. Power losses
associated with this equipment should be assigned to the spaces that house the equipment as an electrical load and
as a thermal load input to the energy model. Model the quantity of power and cooling equipment designed to run
during normal operation to include the effects of operating redundant equipment at partial loading on energy use.
APPENDICES
In addition to the ASHRAE 90.1 mandatory compliance requirements, provide energy efficiency data for the
following items:
·· Generator block heaters (wattage required to keep the block at the design temperature)
·· Power distribution wiring
·· Battery charging
1 U.S. Department of Energy, 2011 Buildings Energy Data Book (March 2012).
532
Submit documentation for the following items, showing efficiency data at initial and full system loading points
(loading values are a percentage of total IT load):
·· Service transformers
·· Switchgear
·· Uninterruptible power systems
·· Power distribution units
Model 2. ASHRAE model with full IT loading. For the baseline models, the air temperature at the inlet of the
server should be within ASHRAE’s recommended values, from 80.6°F (27°C) dry bulb and 59.0°F (15°C) dew point
to 64.4°F (18°C) dry bulb and 41.9°F (5.5°C) dew point, unless justification is provided for an alternative minimum
supply air temperature at the server inlet. The baseline system airflow must be sized based on a 20°F (approximately
11°C) difference between the supply air and the return air.
Model 3. ASHRAE model with “baseline” IT loading. This model is used to calculate IT energy savings due
to low-energy servers, virtualization, and efficient electrical system design. In contrast to the standard application
of exceptional calculation methods to the proposed model, for data center projects, the exceptional calculation
is applied to the baseline (model 3). Rather than reducing the energy used in the proposed design, the baseline is
increased to reflect the energy usage typical of a data center.
For IT equipment, the USGBC data center calculator provides baseline documentation; if used, additional
justification for the baseline IT loads is not necessary. IT equipment input is defined as the IT load as measured at the
point of connection of the IT device to the electrical power system. IT equipment input captures the actual power
load of the IT device exclusive of any power distribution losses and loads beyond IT devices, such as rack-mounted
fans.
The losses associated with all UPS equipment, including that which serves mechanical equipment to achieve
continuous cooling during a loss of power (e.g., pumps, air-handling units, and compressors), are considered not
part of the IT energy usage but part of the energy consumption required to operate the data center.
If a hydronic cooling system is used for IT cabinets or computers, the energy consumed by the fans built into the
cabinet and coolant distribution pumps should be considered HVAC energy use, not IT energy use.
USGBC data center calculator. The data center calculator provided by USGBC creates a representative IT
energy baseline based on the proposed design. The calculator consists of two main modules: one for the efficiency
of the server equipment that comprises the IT system and one for the efficiency of the electrical system that delivers
power to the IT system.
The calculator provides values that can be used as inputs for the electrical system energy consumption and heat
loss for the proposed model with initial IT loading to calculate the initial power usage effectiveness (PUE). The
calculator generates the following two sets of values that may be used to determine energy savings:
·· Annual energy consumption savings values, which can then be claimed directly, in isolation of any effects the
reduced electrical load would have on the HVAC system
·· Input values for the ASHRAE model with “baseline” IT loading and the ASHRAE model with initial IT loading
that can then be used during simulation
The calculator’s IT systems module compares energy use of a proposed IT equipment design with a predefined
baseline. The calculator analyzes energy use of computer servers only. Mainframes, storage, and networking
equipment are not included in the overall energy demand calculation (as it relates to the reduction in energy). To
claim savings from other types of IT equipment, teams must use the exceptional calculation method.
APPENDICES
Based on the entered values for total IT load and percentage breakdowns, the calculator generates kilowatt (kW)
values for servers, storage, and networking equipment. The kW number for the servers, combined with the server
utilization and the average power draw of the server, is used to calculate the number of physical servers that will be
in the data center. Server power is based on ENERGY STAR’s computer server qualified product list. If the number of
physical servers and their power draw are known, enter these values.
Next, enter the percentage of servers that will host virtual machines in the data center and the average
consolidation ratio. This rate of virtualization is used to calculate the server utilization percentage and then
compared with a typical virtualization rate, which is used to calculate the number of servers in the baseline case.
Finally, indicate whether a power management strategy will be used. This input takes the percentage of servers
533
that can go into sleep mode and the percentage of the time those servers can be in sleep mode. With these inputs, the
calculator determines the energy demand for the IT system in kW and also generates the annual energy use in kWh of
both the baseline case and the proposed case.
If desired, the calculated server demand value for the baseline IT load can be entered into the ASHRAE model,
with baseline IT loading as the server demand in the data center. The baseline model should use the same schedules
as the proposed model.
The data center calculator’s electrical systems module uses the peak demand of the IT system to determine
the size and power draw of the equipment. Peak IT demand values are automatically imported from the IT systems
module. For the purposes of the calculator, the electrical system comprises the following elements:
·· Incoming utility service transformer
·· Uninterruptible power supply
·· Power distribution unit
Based on the topology selected by the user, some of the energy that flows through the component is lost as heat,
which must be included in the building energy model.
The heat loss differs at varying loads. Although it is important to benchmark operation at 100% load, it may
be more important to benchmark at partial loads because electrical and cooling equipment, especially legacy
equipment, will have much lower efficiencies at partial loads.
After determining the efficiency of the baseline electrical system, the calculator provides annual energy
consumption in kWh. If desired, the losses associated with the system can be assigned to the supporting
infrastructure rooms of the appropriate energy models.
Power usage effectiveness. PUE is the metric for characterizing and reporting the overall infrastructure
efficiency of a building. Determine the PUE value of the proposed design using Equation 2.
EQUATION 1. Power usage effectiveness
Total data center energy consumption or power

PUE =
IT energy consumption or power
For example, if a facility uses 2,000,000 kWh of total energy, of which 1,600,000 kWh is attributable to IT
equipment, its PUE is as follows:
2,000,000 kWh
PUE = = 1.25
1,600,000 kWh
MODELING DISTRICT ENERGY SYSTEMS

All downstream equipment must be included in the scope of GIB Prerequisite Minimum Building Energy
Performance and GIB Credit Optimize Building Energy Performance. Downstream equipment includes heat
exchangers, steam pressure reduction stations, pumps, valves, pipes, building electrical services, and controls.
Upstream equipment is included or excluded depending on the chosen option and path.
Whenever possible, incorporate system and equipment performance parameters directly into the energy
simulation. Potential methods include developing efficiency curves and scheduling equipment operation and curves.
APPENDICES
Postprocessing of DES performance is acceptable if reasonable simulation methods are not available or are too
onerous. All postprocessing methodologies must be fully documented.
Teams that are modeling DES can choose one of three paths.
Option 1, Path 1. ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G

Model the proposed and baseline designs using purchased energy according to ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G.
All virtual DES energy rates must be identical in the baseline and proposed cases. If tariffs or rates are not
available from the district plant serving the project, such as for campus or military plants, calculate the rates based
on the virtual electric and fossil fuel rates from the model.
If a flat rate structure, in which the cost per unit of energy is the same throughout the year and there are no
534
demand charges, is being used for all energy sources, then those flat rates become the virtual energy rates for the
project.
If all energy rate structures are not flat, a preliminary run of the Option 1 baseline case energy model must first be
completed to identify the virtual electric and fossil fuel rates for the project. For this preliminary run only, the rate
for the DES-supplied energy may be left blank or entered as any value.
Once all the virtual energy rates are known for electricity and fossil fuel, calculate the virtual DES rates for both
the baseline and proposed cases per the values in the minimum energy performance calculator.
Exception: to obtain the virtual fuel rate when the connected building does not use fossil fuel but the DES central
plant does, use a flat rate consistent with the central plant’s rates or the historical average local market rates. No
preliminary model run is needed. Input the virtual DES rates into the modeling software for each DES source and use
them for the remainder of the process. Alternatively, calculate the DES energy costs directly by multiplying the DES
energy consumption for each DES source by its virtual DES rate.
Option 1, Path 2. Full DES Performance Accounting

Path 2 is available if the project is connected to a DES and the team wishes to account for average efficiency across
a smaller time step. The energy model scope accounts for both downstream and upstream equipment and requires
calculation of the district energy average efficiencies using either modeling or monitoring.
Energy rates. All DES energy rates must be identical in both the baseline and the proposed cases. Use local rates
as they would normally apply to the building for the energy sources under consideration. For energy sources used
by the DES but not normally available to the building, such as diesel fuel, use the rates charged to the DES. If this
information is not available, use representative market rates.
Exception: for DES plants that operate under specific and atypical rate structures and actively take advantage of
those rates through strategies such as load management or energy storage, use the rate structures as they apply to
the DES.
Baseline building plant. Model the baseline case with an on-site plant that is compliant with ASHRAE 90.1–
2010, Appendix G, baseline requirements for site-generated thermal energy. Model the baseline building plant
with conventional equipment using performance parameters and efficiencies per ASHRAE 90.1–2010, using energy
sources corresponding to the DES.
Proposed building plant. Model the proposed case with a virtual DES-equivalent plant. Model a virtual plant
with the same efficiencies as the entire upstream DES heating, cooling, and combined heat and power (CHP)
systems, including all distribution losses and energy use. Equipment efficiencies, distribution losses, and
distribution pumping energy may be determined using any of the following methods:
·· Monitored data
·· Engineering analysis
·· Default values
Efficiencies and losses may be determined and modeled at any level of time resolution, from hourly to annual.
However, the time resolution must be sufficiently granular to capture and reasonably represent any significant time-
or load-dependent interactions between systems, such as thermal storage or CHP.
Monitoring and analytical methods may be combined as necessary and appropriate.
Monitoring data for heating, cooling, pumping, and cogeneration may be used only if the thermal loads that are
monitored represent at least 90% of the predicted load on the campus or district plant after building occupancy.
Whether the team is using monitoring or an analytical method, the methodologies must be fully documented.
APPENDICES
The following specific requirements apply.

Heating and cooling plants. Efficiencies, whether determined through monitoring or analytically, must include
all operational effects, such as standby, equipment cycling, partial-load operation, internal pumping, and thermal
losses.
535
Thermal distribution losses. Use monitored data or an engineering analysis. Monitored data account for the
distribution losses for the DES by comparing the total thermal energy leaving the plant with the total thermal energy
used by the buildings connected to the DES. Rate the plant efficiency accordingly in the energy model:
Modified plant efficiency = Plant efficiency (%) × 100% – Distribution loss (%)
An engineering analysis takes into consideration all distribution losses between the DES and the building. For
distribution main losses, use a prorated amount based on load. For dedicated branch losses, use the total losses of
the branch that feeds the building, including heat losses and steam trap losses. Compare the total losses with the
total load of the building to get a percentage distribution loss relative to load and downgrade the plant’s efficiency
accordingly in the energy model.
Pumping energy. Whether through monitored data or engineering analysis, determine pumping energy for
the project by prorating the total pump energy of the DES by the ratio of the annual thermal load of the building
to the total annual DES thermal load. Model the pump energy as auxiliary electrical load. Pumping energy must be
determined or estimated; there is no default value.
Default efficiencies and losses. Actual efficiency performance information on the DES serving the project
building is preferred. If the project team cannot obtain or determine the actual performance data, use the following
default values. These values are conservative and are intended to represent a DES with relatively low efficiency; a
well-designed, well-operated DES generally performs better.
·· DES heating plant: 70% (higher heating value) for the total boiler plant average efficiency
·· DES cooling plant: coefficient of performance (COP) of 4.4 for the total cooling plant average efficiency
(including cooling towers and primary pumps)
·· Thermal distribution losses, including minor leaks or condensate losses:
°° Chilled water district cooling, 5%
°° Hot water district heating, 10%
°° Closed-loop steam systems, 15%
°° Open-loop steam systems, 25%
For steam systems that are partially open and partially closed, prorate between the above 15% and 25% losses in
accordance with the fraction of expected or actual condensate loss.
The above guidance assumes that DES-generated heat is used for heat in the connected building, and DES-
generated cooling is used for cooling in the connected building. If the DES produces heating that is then converted
to cooling for the connected building using absorption chillers or other similar technology, this guidance must be
modified (see CHP Modeling Guidance).
Option 1, Path 3. Streamlined DES Modeling

Path 3 is applicable for simple district energy systems. The energy model scope accounts for both downstream
equipment and upstream equipment and also requires calculation of the district energy average efficiencies using
either modeling or monitoring.
Energy rates. Use the streamlined DES modeling in the calculator provided by USGBC to allocate the energy
costs to the results of the model for each district energy source, in lieu of the purchased energy rates, to determine
APPENDICES
the baseline and proposed case energy costs.

Baseline building plant. Calculate the average annual efficiency values for each district energy fuel source used
to generate and distribute the thermal energy based on ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G, baseline case requirements.
These values depend on the ASHRAE 90.1–2010 system type that would be selected for the building if the baseline
case were modeled with on-site equipment. The calculations for baseline cost per district energy source are the same
as those for the proposed case model, except that the average efficiency is constant.
536
Proposed building plant. Determine a single value for average annual efficiency, including thermal losses and
distribution energy, for each district fuel energy source used to generate and distribute the thermal energy. For
example, for chilled water:
COST (CHW)BUILDING = CHWBUILDING × ∑ ( Cost i × η i )

i
where
COST(CHW) = proposed case cost of chilled water
BUILDING
CHWBUILDING = building energy model metered data for chilled water consumption
i = ach fuel source used at the district plant to generate or distribute chilled water (e.g.
e
electricity, diesel oil)
Cost = irtual energy rate for each fuel source (in $/unit energy). This should match the
v
i
proposed case virtual energy rate for fuel sources present in the building, and should
be supported by local energy tariffs for fuel sources not present in the building.
ηi = average efficiency calculated for each fuel source
Combined Heat and Power Plants

The baseline case is modeled as described in ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G, and as summarized in the steps for each path
(above). The baseline model assumes separate production of electricity and thermal energy. Although not modeled
as CHP, the baseline case is charged with extra energy use for CHP energy accounting purposes in some situations.
The proposed case may be modeled in various ways.
·· The average electricity generation, fuel input, and heat recovery of the CHP must be determined, or the defaults
for electric and thermal efficiency (below) must be used in conjunction with capacity ratings of the equipment.
·· Calculate annual electricity generation using one of the following methods:

°° Monitor the total annual gross electricity generation. Also monitor the total annual parasitic loads, such
as the annual electricity used for cooling the intake air for a turbine. Calculate the net annual electricity
generation by subtracting all parasitic loads from the annual gross electricity generated.
°° Model the generators in energy simulation software per Appendix G. Use peak electricity efficiencies and
generator curves that match the installed generators. Apply measured or estimated load profiles as process
loads to reflect the estimated total electric and thermal loads on the district energy CHP system. Use the
total energy generated and total fuel input from this analysis. Any parasitic loads must be included in the
analysis and subtracted from the annual electricity generation.
·· Calculate annual fuel input using one of the following methods:
°° Monitor the total annual fuel input to the generators.
generator curves that match the installed generators.
·· Calculate waste heat recovery using one of the following methods:
°° Monitor the total waste heat recovered.
generator curves that match the installed generators. Model the thermal equipment served by the CHP
APPENDICES
waste heat, such as boilers and absorption chillers, using the installed equipment capacities, efficiencies,
and efficiency curves, and reflecting the total heating and cooling loads on the plant as a process load. Use
the energy modeling outputs to identify the total heat recovered.
For baseline CHP electricity output, follow the general procedures described in this section for the proposed case,
and adjust the results as follows depending on the results of the DES electricity allocation and the total modeled
electricity use of the building in the Path 2 or Path 3 proposed case, including the electricity consumption of district
plant equipment serving the building:
·· Scenario A. If the building’s allocation of CHP-generated electricity is less than or equal to its modeled
electricity consumption, no adjustment is necessary. The baseline building is charged with the energy used by
its (non-CHP) systems at market rates using standard procedures.
537
·· Scenario B. If the building’s allocation of CHP-generated electricity exceeds its modeled electricity
consumption, the amount of excess CHP electricity allocated to the building is considered process energy
in the energy model. Adjust the input fuel associated with this excess CHP electricity in the baseline case as
described in CHP fuel input.
For the proposed design’s CHP electricity output, allocate the electricity generation to the building based on the
fraction of thermal loads to the building for the DES sources that use recovered waste heat. For each DES source
supplied to the building, determine the fraction of the recovered waste heat applied to that source as well as the
amount serving the project building. For relatively simple DES systems, in which the recovered waste heat is used
directly in the DES, and for which waste heat serves only heating loads in the connected buildings, use the formula
for simple systems:
CHP_ELECBLDG (simple systems) = (XHEAT × BLDGHEAT ) × CHP_ELECTOTAL
where
CHP_ELECBLDG = CHP electricity generation allocated to building
XHEAT = fraction of CHP plant’s total production of waste heat applied to the DES directly
BLDGHEAT = fraction of total district heat provided to building
CHP_ELECTOTAL = total CHP electricity generated at DES plant
For CHP plants in which a portion of the recovered heat is used to drive absorption chillers that provide cooling
through a DES chilled-water loop, or a portion of the recovered heat is used for a third, separate district energy
source (e.g., if the building connects to both a steam loop and a hot-water loop), calculate the electricity generation
assigned to each building using the formula for heat recovery-driven chillers.
CHP_ELECBLDG (heat recovery-driven chillers) = ( XHEAT × BLDGHEAT ) + ( YCHW × BLDGCHW ) + ( ZSOURCE × BLDGSOURCE ) × CHP_ELECTOTAL
where
CHP_ELECBLDG = CHP electricity generation allocated to building
XHEAT = fraction of CHP plant’s total production of waste heat applied to the DES
directly
BLDGHEAT = fraction of total district heat provided to building
YCHW = fraction of CHP plant’s total production of waste heat applied to producing
chilled water in DES
BLDGCHW = fraction of total district chilled water provided to building
ZSOURCE = fraction of third district energy source provided to building
BLDGSOURCE = fraction of third district energy source provided to building
When modeling CHP fuel input, allocate the CHP input fuel to the project building based on a proration and
APPENDICES
assignment of the total input fuel according to the results of the CHP electricity allocation described above for CHP
electricity output. Use the prevailing energy rates as they apply to the project. Any additional energy used by the
proposed design is also charged at market rates.
For the proposed case (all projects), calculate the CHP input fuel allocated to the building as follows:
Proposed BLDGFUEL =
( CHP_ELECBLDG
CHP_ELECTOTAL ) × CHPFUEL
538
where
Proposed CHP_ELECBLDG = proposed case CHP input fuel allocated to building
CHP_ELECTOTAL = CHP electricity generation allocated to building (from previous calculations)
CHPFUEL = total CHP electricity generated at DES plant
CHP_ELECTOTAL = total CHP fuel input for electricity generation at DES plant
For the baseline (scenario B in CHP electricity output only), calculate the CHP input fuel allocated to the
building as follows:
Baseline BLDGFUEL
with
=
( PROCESS_ELECBLDG
CHP_ELECTOTAL ) × CHPFUEL
PROCESS_ELECBLDG = CHP_ELECBLDG - PROPOSED_ELECBLDG
where
Baseline BLDGFUEL = baseline case CHP input fuel charged to building

PROCESS_ELECBLDG = amount of allocated CHP electricity in excess of building’s modeled annual
electricity consumption (treated as process energy in model)
CHPFUEL = total CHP fuel input for electricity generation at DES plant
CHP_ELECBLDG = CHP electricity generation allocated to building (from previous calculations)
PROPOSED_ = modeled electricity consumption for building from proposed case

ELECBLDG
The model must include CHP generator default efficiencies. Actual efficiency performance data on the
CHP serving the project building are preferred, based on either ongoing operations (existing CHP) or design
specifications (new CHP). If the project team cannot obtain the actual performance data, use the following default
seasonal performance values. These values are conservative, intended to represent a CHP system with relatively low
efficiency. A well-designed, well-maintained CHP system will generally offer better performance.
·· Generator electrical efficiency, 22%
·· Generator thermal efficiency, 25%
·· Single-effect absorption chillers, 0.60 COP
·· Double-effect absorption chillers, 0.90 COP
·· Absorption cooling plant electrical efficiency, including cooling towers and primary pumps, 40 COP
APPENDICES
539
Special Situations for DES Energy Models

Service water heating. If service water is heated in full or in part by DES-supplied heat, consider modeling the
energy source as purchased energy to hold the DES cost-neutral for service water heating. If desired, project teams
using Path 2 or Path 3 may use an exceptional calculation method to document DES-related savings from service
water heating. Project teams that elect to document savings must fully justify and support the annual energy
consumption and cost in both the baseline and the proposed models. Use a reasonable, well-founded purchased
energy rate in the models, such as the actual rate paid to the DES supplier or a virtual rate.
Heating converted to cooling. Sometimes the district or campus system heating energy supply is converted
to chilled water using absorption chillers or other similar technologies to serve cooling loads. In this circumstance,
the equipment that converts heating to cooling may reside within the DES itself (i.e., DES provides cooling to the
building) or within the connected buildings (i.e., DES provides heating to the building, and the building converts
heating to cooling). When the equipment that converts DES-supplied heat into cooling is part of the LEED project’s
scope of work, the DES guidance is modified for Option 1, Whole Building Simulation.
·· Model the district heating source servicing the chilled water generation equipment as follows:
°° For Path 1, use purchased heat in both the baseline and the proposed cases.
°° For Path 2 or 3, use a virtual upstream DES plant for the proposed case and compare it with code-compliant
on-site equipment for the baseline case.
·· For Path 1, model absorption chillers in the baseline case as follows:
°° When the purchased heating is hot water with average supply temperatures below 300°F (148.9°C), the
chillers must be modeled as single-effect absorption chillers (0.7 COP).
°° When the purchased heating is steam or hot water with average temperatures of 300°F (148.9°C) or higher,
the chillers must be modeled as double-effect absorption chillers (1.0 COP).
°° If the building peak cooling load is less than 300 tons (1050 kW), model one water-cooled absorption chiller.
°° If the building peak cooling load is 300 to 600 tons (1050 to 2100 kW), model two water-cooled absorption
chillers, sized equally.
°° If the building peak cooling load is more than 600 tons (2100 kW), model a minimum of two water-cooled
absorption chillers, with chillers added such that no chiller is larger than 800 tons (2800 kW), all sized
equally.
°° For a project with both absorption chillers driven by purchased hot water and electric chillers on site, the
type and quantity of absorption chillers must be as identified above, and the type and quantity of electric
chillers must be as in ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Table G3.1.3.7 (or DX equipment as specified), but the total
capacity ratio of electric to absorption cooling must be identical to that of the proposed design.
°° For a project with both district chilled water and absorption chillers on site driven by purchased heating,
the type and quantity of absorption chillers must be as identified above, and purchased cooling must also be
modeled in accordance with the district energy modeling guidance. However, the total capacity ratio of the
on-site cooling to purchased cooling must be identical to that of the proposed design.
·· Model the baseline case cooling towers, pumps, chilled water loop configurations, and loop temperature
controls as indicated in ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G.
·· Model the absorption chillers in the proposed case based on the as-designed type and capacity of chillers.
Other atypical systems. Incorporate any unconventional DES features, such as thermal storage, ground or surface
water cooling, and waste heat recovery, into the proposed virtual plant to the greatest extent practical, using the
APPENDICES
general principles presented here.

540
OPTION 2. PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE: ASHRAE 50% ADVANCED

ENERGY DESIGN GUIDE
Step 1. Select appropriate guide and ensure area requirements are met
Choose the appropriate building type (office, retail, school, or hospital) from the ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy
Design Guides (AEDGs) and review the area requirements. If any buildings do not meet both building type and size
criteria, the team must select Option 1 or Option 3.
Step 2. Assess ASHRAE prescriptive requirements

Work with the architect and engineers to assess the prescriptive requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard
90.1–2010, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.), and ensure that the
design will comply with envelope, HVAC, service water-heating, and lighting requirements, per Sections 5.5, 6.5, 7.5,
and 9.2.2.
·· The ASHRAE 90.1–2010 prescriptive requirements should not be confused with the requirements of the
AEDGs. Although projects must meet only the HVAC and service water-heating prescriptive requirements of
the applicable AEDG to earn this prerequisite, all the ASHRAE 90.1–2010 prescriptive requirements must be
met, including building envelope, HVAC, service water heating, and lighting.
·· Ensure that the lighting calculations include all task lighting except where specifically exempted by ASHRAE
90.1, and appropriately account for the total luminaire wattage for each fixture consistent with ASHRAE 90.1
requirements. Note that the luminaire wattage is not necessarily the sum of the lamp wattages but accounts for
the ballast factor (standard luminaires) and the total circuit power or current-limited power (track lighting).
·· For retail buildings, if the project team intends to earn points under the related credit, also comply with
the prescriptive measures in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, for 90% of total energy consumption for all process
equipment.
Step 3. Assess AEDG requirements for HVAC and service water-heating equipment
Work with the mechanical and plumbing engineer to ensure that the project’s HVAC and service water-heating
equipment will meet all the prescriptive AEDG requirements. Specify qualifying equipment in the construction
documents.
·· The HVAC scope includes equipment efficiency, economizers, ventilation, and ducts and dampers as discussed
in AEDG, Chapter 4, Design Strategies and Recommendations by Climate Zone.
·· Consider the capacity needs for the project and identify potential equipment that will meet those
requirements. AEDG does not address some types and sizes of equipment, and these constraints may make
certain equipment inappropriate for the project.
·· As a best practice, use the AEDG compliance checklists to track the requirements, review this list with the
project team, and include these requirements in the owner’s project requirements.
·· Once the design is complete, a project that cannot meet all AEDG requirements will find it difficult to switch to
Option 1 or Option 3; therefore, these requirements should be established early in design.
Step 4. Confirm that credit criteria will be met, if applicable

If the project team is planning to achieve points using Option 2 under the related credit, consider the additional
AEDG requirements not included in the prerequisite.
APPENDICES
541
OPTION 3. PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE: ADVANCED BUILDINGS™

CORE PERFORMANCE™ GUIDE
Step 1. Assess ASHRAE prescriptive requirements
Work with the design team to understand the prescriptive requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard
90.1–2010 to ensure that the design will comply. This also includes Sections 5.5 (envelope), 6.5 (HVAC), 7.5 (service
water heating), and 9.2.2 (lighting).
Step 2. Review requirements in Section 1, Design Process Strategies

Develop an implementation strategy for achieving the requirements for Section 1, Design Process Strategies, as
outlined in the Core Performance Guide (CPG).
·· Consider the scheduling necessary to accommodate additional meetings and design time during the design
process.
·· Consider the scheduling and resource implications of postconstruction activities, such as system verification,
operator training and documentation, and ongoing measurement.
·· Projects that select Option 3 must meet all criteria listed in Section 1 of the CPG.
Step 3. Discuss CPG requirements and implementation in design team meetings

Engage the design team in discussions about meeting the requirements of all three sections of the CPG,
implementing strategies for achieving the ENERGY STAR Target Finder goal, and documenting the process to
ensure that the design intent is clearly communicated.
Step 4. Review prescriptive requirements

Starting early in the design process, review the required prescriptive elements outlined in Section 2, Core
Performance Requirements, and the three required elements from Section 3, Enhanced Performance Strategies.
Consider alternatives for lighting, HVAC, envelope, and water-heating systems.
·· Engage design team members to confirm compliance with each prescriptive criterion. Projects must meet all
prescriptive requirements.
·· Consider the effects of continuous air barriers, below-grade exterior insulation, and enhanced economizer
operation as well as common upgrades, such as improved insulation for walls, roofs, and windows.
·· In addition to meeting the requirements of the CPG, buildings must meet all local energy code requirements
or the prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1–2010, whichever are more stringent. Where standards
conflict, follow the more stringent requirements: either the CPG and ASHRAE 90.1–2010, or CPG and the local
energy code.
Step 5. Analyze passive and active energy load reduction opportunities

As described in Section 1 of the CPG, as part of design development, analyze at least three alternative building
configurations to maximize passive reduction of energy loads. When a preferred configuration has been selected,
perform an analysis of the mechanical systems.
·· Undertake and document load calculations. Consider referencing ASHRAE 55 to identify thermal comfort
design conditions.
·· In the first iteration of load calculations, include fan sizing calculations based on zone-by-zone loads.
APPENDICES
·· Perform a second set of load calculations using partial-load conditions. Describe features of the design that
will enable efficient operation at these conditions.
·· Conduct the passive and active analyses and calculations according to Sections 1.3 and 1.4 of the CPG.
542
Step 6. Design to meet Section 2, Core Performance Requirements

Select the optimal design indicated by the load calculations and confirm that each of the requirements listed in
Section 2 of the CPG has been met or exceeded. If any design revisions require upgrades to envelope or lighting
components, redo HVAC load calculations.
·· Confirm with the architect that envelope-related efficiency measures included in the plans and specifications
meet or exceed the CPG requirements.
·· Confirm with the mechanical engineer that the specifications of the mechanical system meet or exceed the
CPG requirements.
·· Confirm with the electrical engineer or lighting designer that lighting power density calculations do not
exceed the CPG requirements.
·· Sections 2.7 and 2.9 are already mandated through the prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1–2010, as
indicated in the criteria for Option 3 of this prerequisite.
Step 7. Design for compliance with Section 3, Enhanced Performance Strategies

Work with the mechanical engineer to include the following three strategies from the CPG Section 3, Enhanced
Performance Strategies, in the plans and specifications, as applicable:
·· 3.5 Supply Air Temperature Reset (VAV). Confirm that the selected air-handling units can reset temperature
and that the building automation system (BAS) can process inputs that allow proper reset operation, such as
humidity, outdoor air temperature, and VAV damper position.
·· 3.9 Premium Economizer Performance. Confirm that the controls can accommodate a dedicated thermostat
stage, that appropriate sensors are installed in the correct location within the air streams, and that the BAS can
adequately implement the requirements.
·· 3.10 Variable Speed Control. Confirm that pumps serving variable flow systems and VAV fans having a motor
of 5 horsepower (3.73 kW) or larger can be upgraded to VFD with performance characteristics matching those
listed in the standard.

APPENDICES
APPENDICES
543

LEED Reference Guide For Neighborhood Developement

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LEED Reference Guide For Neighborhood Developement

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NEIGHBORHOOD

NOTE: for downloads of the Reference Guide:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED Steering Committee

LEED Technical Committee

LEED Market Advisory Committee

Implementation Advisory Committee

Location and Planning TAG

Shawn Seamen PN Hoffman

Sustainable Sites TAG

Water Efficiency TAG

Energy and Atmosphere TAG

Materials and Resources TAG

Indoor Environmental Quality TAG

Pilot Credit Library Working Group

Integrative Process Task Group

MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS 49

RATING SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDANCE 55

SMART LOCATION AND LINKAGE 59

NEIGHBORHOOD PATTERN AND DESIGN 169

NPD Credit Transportation Demand Management....................................................................... 249

GREEN BUILDING AND INFRASTRUCTURE 305

THE CASE FOR GREEN

1 Global Footprint Network, footprintnetwork.org/en/index.php/gfn/page/world_footprint/, accessed September 11, 2012.

THE CASE FOR GREEN NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENTS

3 National Association of Realtors, 2011 Community Preference Survey.

BENEFITS OF USING LEED

LEED-certified developments are designed to deliver the following benefits:

In particular, LEED ND benefits are distinguished by the following:

LEED CERTIFICATION PROCESS

CERTIFICATION OPTIONS FOR LEED ND

THE CASE FOR GREEN NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENTS

GUIDE STRUCTURE CREDIT STRUCTURE

GETTING STARTED Each credit category begins with an overview

achieving the prerequisite or credit. They were

market factors, and

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

INNOVATION REGIONAL PRIORITY

PROJECTS OUTSIDE THE U.S.

TAKING AN INTEGRATIVE APPROACH TO NEIGHBORHOOD

TEAM MEMBERS AND RELEVANT ORGANIZATIONS

HOW TO USE THIS REFERENCE GUIDE

DEVISING A LEED WORK PLAN

It is recommended that LEED applicants follow a series of steps to certification.

STEP 1. IDENTIFY PROJECT SITE AND PREPARE PRELIMINARY DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM

purchase, lease, or equivalent agreements.

STEP 2. SELECT RATING SYSTEM

STEP 3. ASSEMBLE PROJECT TEAM AND IDENTIFY RELEVANT ORGANIZATIONS

STEP 4. CHECK MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS AND PREREQUISITES

STEP 5. FINALIZE PROJECT BOUNDARY AND DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM

STEP 6. RECONFIRM MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS AND PREREQUISITE

STEP 7. DEVELOP LEED SCORECARD

LEED WORK PLAN

STEP 9. DEVELOP CONSISTENT DOCUMENTATION

MAINTAINING CONSISTENCY IN THE APPLICATION

LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY Property lines

Public street Public alley

Figure 1. Example project boundary

MAINTAINING CONSISTENCY IN THE APPLICATION

Figure 2. Example map of previously developed area within project

EQUATION 1. Previously developed percentage of parcel

% of adjacent Area of parcel that is previously developed